四、复注部分的意义阐明显示巴利原文
4. Paṭiniddesavāraatthavibhāvanā
一、开示导法分别的阐明显示巴利原文
1. Desanāhāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
5 如上,阿阇梨已从自性上以略说开示、以详说解说诸导法等,我等亦已了知。既然如此,为何又发起“其中,什么是开示导法”等呢?这是为三种所化众生而作。所化众生有三种,即极利根者、非极利根者与钝根者。对极利根者,诸导法以略说开示即可;对非极利根者,则以详说解说;如今,为令钝根者得以分别了知诸导法,故发起“其中,什么是开示导法”等的分别部分。然而,义注中说:“如此,为令易于掌握,先以偈颂结集的方式依自性开示了诸导法等,现在为以复注方式分别他们导法,而发起‘其中,什么是开示导法’等。”显示巴利原文
5. Evaṃ hārādayo sarūpato ācariyena uddesato uddiṭṭhā, niddesato ca niddiṭṭhā, amhehi ca ñātā, atha kasmā puna ‘‘tattha katamo desanāhāro’’tiādiko āraddhoti ce? Veneyyānaṃ tividhattā. Veneyyā hi atitikkhapañño nātitikkhapañño mandapaññoti tividhā honti. Tesañhi atitikkhapaññassānurūpaṃ hārādayo uddesato uddiṭṭhā, nātitikkhapaññassa anurūpaṃ niddesato niddiṭṭhā, idāni mandapaññassānurūpaṃ hārādayo vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha katamo desanāhāro’’tiādiko vibhaṅgavāro āraddho. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ hārādayosukhaggahaṇatthaṃ gāthābandhavasena sarūpato niddisitvā idāni tesu hāre tāva paṭiniddesavasena vibhajituṃ ‘tattha katamo desanāhāro’tiādi āraddha’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 5) vuttaṃ.
在略说与详说中所解说的那些导法之中,何为开示导法?即“由乐味、过患等”开头的偈颂所示。此偈颂依详说方式,名为开示导法。对于其“由乐味、过患等”开头的详说,我今所说“此开示导法开示何”等详细注释差别,名为开示导法分别——当如此连结。由于须被问“此开示导法开示何”,故先设问,为确定地显示“开示这些”,而说“此开示导法开示何?开示乐味、过患”等。其中,若问“此开示导法开示何?”则开示乐味,解说、详述;开示过患,解说、详述;开示出离,解说、详述;开示果,解说、详述;开示方便,解说、详述;开示教令,解说、详述——当如此连结。显示巴利原文
Tattha ye hārādayo uddesaniddesesu niddiṭṭhā, tattha hārādīsu katamo desanāhāroti ce? Yā ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthā (netti. 4) vuttā, sā ayaṃ gāthā niddesavasena desanāhāro nāma, tassa ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādi (netti. 4) niddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘ayaṃ desanāhāro kiṃ desayatī’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhāravibhaṅgo nāmāti yojanā. ‘‘Ayaṃ desanāhāro kiṃ desayatī’’ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘imaṃ desayatī’’ti niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ayaṃ desanāhāro kiṃ desayati? Assādaṃ ādīnava’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ayaṃ desanāhāro kiṃ desayatīti ce ? Assādaṃ desayati saṃvaṇṇeti vitthāreti, ādīnavaṃ desayati…pe… vitthāreti, nissaraṇaṃ desayati…pe… vitthāreti, phalaṃ desayati…pe… vitthāreti, upāyaṃ desayati…pe… vitthāreti, āṇattiṃ desayati saṃvaṇṇeti vitthāretīti yojano.
其中,“此开示之法”一词,应视为前后关联。因为应当这样问:“‘以乐味、过患等’为起始的偈颂中所显示的这些乐味等,出现在应被解说的哪些巴利圣典法中?”由此,世尊才说了“诸比丘,我将为你们说法”等语。其意旨在于:在应被承诺的巴利圣典法——“诸比丘,我将为你们说法,此法初善、中善、后善,有义利、有文句,是显示完全圆满、遍净梵行的法,我将宣说”——之中,那些应被解说的乐味等确实出现,而此开示之法正是为了开示它们。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ‘‘ayaṃ desanāhāro’’ti saddo pubbāparāpekkhoti daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘‘Assādādīnavatā’tiādigāthāyaṃ (netti. 4) dassitā ime assādādayo kattha saṃvaṇṇetabbe pāḷidhamme āgatā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘‘Assādādīnavatā’tiādigāthāyaṃ (netti. 4) dassitā ime assādādayo kattha saṃvaṇṇetabbe pāḷidhamme āgatā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi ādikalyāṇaṃ majjhekalyāṇaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ pakāsessāmī’’ti paṭiññātabbe pāḷidhamme saṃvaṇṇetabbe ye assādādayo āgatā, te ayaṃ desanāhāro desayatīti adhippāyo.
其中,“法”之一词,于教法、真理、三摩地、智慧、本性、福德、证得、所知等众多义理中流转使用,但在此处,应视为仅用于教法这一意义。至于义理的纲要,已于义注中说明,故此处我不再赘述。“vo”字虽可见于受格、作具格、填词格、与格等用法中,但此处应视为仅用于与格之意。“比丘”的意思是:乞求戒蕴等者,或因见轮回之怖畏而以身表业者为比丘。“诸比丘”即是在称呼那些比丘。应知是为了什么目的而称呼?是为了令他们面朝自己(专注),策励他们以极大精进听闻佛法而称呼。显示巴利原文
Tattha dhammasaddo pariyattisaccasamādhipaññāpakatipuññāpattiñeyyādīsu bahūsu atthesu pavatto, tathāpi idha pariyattidhammeyeva pavattoti daṭṭhabbo. Atthuddeso pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 5) vutto, tasmā idha mayā na vutto. Vo-kāropi upayogakaraṇapadapūraṇasampadānatthesu dissati ca, tathāpi idha sampadānatthevāti daṭṭhabbo. Bhikkhanti yācanti sīlakkhandhādayo, paccaye vā kāyaviññattiyāti bhikkhū, saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhanti paccavekkhantīti vā bhikkhū. Bhikkhaveti te bhikkhū ālapati, kimatthāyāti attano mukhābhimukhaṃ katvā dhammassavane atiussāhane niyojetuṃ ālapatīti veditabbo.
“我将说法”:并非我以主宰者的姿态要你们去做别的什么事,我唯独只说这一法。而且,在说法时,并非听闻他人之法后,依随闻所成智而说,而是以无碍智,对于一切应知之法得现证故,我现在只说由我自己所现起之法——他如此承诺。初善,是指在起始时即为善妙;或者说,此法的起始为善妙,故称初善。其余(中善、后善)也是依此类推的道理。在此,初善等应被理解为依义理的善妙而说。因此有云:“以戒为初善,以定为中善,以慧为后善。或者,以佛陀的善觉证为初善,以法的善妙体性为中善,以僧伽的善行道为后善。又或者,以教化了悟简略之人为初善,以教化了悟广博之人为中善,以教化堪受引导之人为后善。这便是此处所意趣的含义。”显示巴利原文
Dhammaṃ desessāmīti nāhaṃ issaratāya tumhe aññaṃ kiñci kāreyyāmi, dhammaṃyeva desessāmi, desento ca na aññesaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā sutamayañāṇānusārena desessāmi, anāvaraṇañāṇena sabbañeyyadhammesu paccakkhakāritāya idāni mayāyeva pavattiyamānaṃ dhammaṃ ahaṃ desessāmīti paṭijānāti. Ādimhi kalyāṇaṃ ādikalyāṇaṃ, ādi kalyāṇametassāti vā ādikalyāṇaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ādikalyāṇādayo cettha atthakalyāṇādivasena vuttāti daṭṭhabbā. Tenāha – ‘‘sīlena ādikalyāṇaṃ, samādhinā majjhekalyāṇaṃ, paññāya pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ. Buddhasubuddhatāya vā ādikalyāṇaṃ, dhammasudhammatāya majjhekalyāṇaṃ, saṅghasuppaṭipattiyā pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ. Atha vā ugghaṭitaññuvinayanena ādikalyāṇaṃ, vipañcitaññuvinayanena majjhekalyāṇaṃ, neyyapuggalavinayanena pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ. Ayamevattho idhādhippeto’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 5).
“Arīyati”意为“被了知”。从词根“ara”的非转用义来说,是以智为主的所缘心生起;从处所转用义来说,是应被了知之义作为所缘缘的能力。“iti”一词即指称此能力本身。具足所缘缘能力、称为所缘缘的应被了知之义,即是“ta-缘”之义——这应视为词根与缘之间义理的差别。又或,“Asati bhavati”(于不存在时存在)是义;与义一同转起的法,该法为“有义”;或具足义的法为“有义”;或因与开示等六义句结合而为“有义”。此义即是此处所意图的,因它属于导向的范围。凡法具足圆满文句,即是“有文”。由于具足松、紧、长、短、重、轻、连结、确定、分离与空点;由于具足以“a”结尾等、阴性等、单数等;由于无放逸书写等过失,故支分圆满。因它们集合,法名为“文句圆满”;或因与字母等六种文句结合而为“有文”。此义即是此处所意图的。于此中,此是缺少的,应被导入、应被加入——由于没有应被导入的,故为“完全圆满”;或由于戒蕴、定蕴、慧蕴、解脱蕴、解脱智见蕴的圆满,故为“完全圆满”。于此中,此是多余的,应被去除……显示巴利原文
Arīyati ñāyatīti attho, ara-dhātuyā nippariyāyato ñāṇappadhāno ārammaṇikacittuppādo attho, ṭhānūpacārato atthassa ñātabbassa ārammaṇapaccayasatti attho, iti-saddena sāyeva satti parāmasīyati, ārammaṇapaccayasattisahito ārammaṇapaccayasaṅkhāto ñātabbo attho ta-paccayassa atthoti dhātupaccayānaṃ atthaviseso daṭṭhabbo. Asati bhavatīti vā attho, saha atthena yo dhammo vattatīti so dhammo sāttho, atthena samannāgato vā dhammo sāttho, saṅkāsanādichaatthapadasamāyogato vā sāttho. Ayamevattho idhādhippeto nettivisayattā. Sampannaṃ byañjanaṃ yassa dhammassāti sabyañjano. Sithiladhanitadīgharassagarulahusambandhavavatthitavimuttaniggahitasampannattā , akārantādiitthiliṅgādiekavacanādisampannattā, pamādalekhādirahitattā ca avayavo sampanno taṃsamūhattā dhammo sampannabyañjano nāma, akkharādichabyañjanapadasamāyogā vā sabyañjano. Ayamevattho idhādhippeto. Imasmiṃ ayaṃ ūno, so netabbo pakkhipitabboti upanetabbābhāvato kevalaparipuṇṇo, sīlakkhandhasamādhikkhandhapaññākkhandha- vimuttikkhandhavimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhapāripūriyā vā kevalaparipuṇṇo. Idhāyaṃ atireko, so apanetabboti vatvā apanetabbābhāvato parisuddho, caturoghanittharaṇatthāya, lokāmisanirapekkhatāya pavattiyamānattā vā parisuddho. Seṭṭhattā brahmacariyaṃ, brahmānaṃ vā seṭṭhānaṃ ariyānaṃ cariyaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, pabbajjabrahmacariyamaggabrahmacariyasāsanabrahmacariyādīsu sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ pakāsayissāmi, paridīpayissāmīti attho.
“诸比丘,我将为你们说法……我将阐明”——对于应被承诺的巴利法,当出现“乐味”等时,导师仅以通称说:“说法之食宣说、解释、广演”。因此,不应理解为“说法之食在此宣说此巴利中出现的乐味,在此宣说此巴利中出现的过患”等差别。由于应被问“如何了知”,为了以确定差别、以标举方式显示“此是巴利中出现的乐味,此是巴利中出现的过患”,而开始“其中,什么是乐味?对于欲求欲乐者……”等。其中,“其中”指在那“乐味、过患……”等偈颂中所指示的、依境与有境等分类的乐味中,什么是乐味?在那些巴利法中,于何处巴利中出现?——如此问后。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi…pe… pakāsessāmī’’ti paṭiññātabbe pāḷidhamme āgate assādādayo desanāhāro desayati saṃvaṇṇeti vitthāretīti ācariyena sāmaññavaseneva vuttaṃ, tasmā desanāhāro idha pāḷiyaṃ āgataṃ imaṃ assādaṃ desayati, idha pāḷiyaṃ āgataṃ imaṃ ādīnavaṃ desayatītiādi viseso na viññātabbo, ‘‘kathaṃ viññātabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘idha pāḷiyaṃ āgato ayaṃ assādo, idha pāḷiyaṃ āgato ayaṃ ādīnavo’’ti visesaṃ niyametvā upalakkhaṇanayena dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha katamo assādo? Kāmaṃ kāmayamānassā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu visayavisayibhedesu assādesu katamo assādo tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgatoti pucchitvā –
欲求所欲者,其心贪染;
确实,当人得到所欲之物时,便心生欢喜。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kāmaṃ kāmayamānassa, tassa cetaṃ samijjhati; Addhā pītimano hoti, laddhā macco yadicchatī’’ti. (su. ni. 772; mahāni. 1) –
在这巴利偈颂中,作为境的乐味已经出现,此即是应被品尝的乐味,是说法之食的境。然而,在注释中则说——显示巴利原文
Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yo visayabhūto assādo āgato, so ayaṃ assādetabbo assādo desanāhārassa visayoti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
“世尊如此所宣说、所开演的教法,是为了显示那些乐味等而生起的。那些乐味等成为说法之食的境,在诸经文各处依其差别而被宣说,从那些处择取出来之后,为以例证的方式在此处显示,便开始了‘其中,何谓乐味?’等的解说。”(《导论注》5)显示巴利原文
‘‘Evaṃ bhagavatā desito, pakāsito ca sāsanadhammo yesaṃ assādādīnaṃ dassanavasena pavatto, te assādādayo desanāhārassa visayabhūtā yattha yattha pāṭhe savisesaṃ vuttā, tato tato niddhāretvā udāharaṇavasena idhānetvā dassetuṃ ‘tattha katamo assādo’tiādi āraddha’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 5) vuttaṃ.
其中,“被享受”故为“乐味”,即应被享受的所依之欲。“被欲求”故为“欲”,同样指所依之欲。欲求彼者,为“欲求者”,即是有情。其心与喜悦相应,故称“有喜心”。“macca(人)”则是由“manati(了知)”等词义而得名。对于正在欲求应被欲求之所依的那位有情,若其欲求之所依得以成就,他便确实成为有喜心。任何人希求任何所依,得到彼所依后,他确实会成为有喜心——偈颂的义理应如此看待。显示巴利原文
Tattha assādīyateti assādo, assādetabbo vatthukāmo. Kāmīyateti kāmo, vatthukāmo ca. Taṃ kāmayatīti kāmayamāno, satto. Tassa pītiyā yuttaṃ mano etassāti pītimano. Manati jānātītiādivacanatthena macco. Kāmaṃ kāmitabbaṃ vatthu kāmayamānassa tassa sattassa etaṃ kāmitabbaṃ vatthu sace samijjhati, evaṃ sati so satto addhā pītimano hoti. Yo macco yaṃ vatthuṃ icchati, taṃ vatthuṃ so macco laddhā addhā pītimano hotīti gāthāyattho daṭṭhabbo.
并非只说“欲求……成为有喜心”便止,而是接着宣说“得到所欲之物时,人确实成为有喜心”。因此应看到更深一层的义理:并非仅仅得到可贪的所依便成为有喜心,而是得到一切应当希求、应当供养的之后,人才成为有喜心。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kāmaṃ …pe… pītimano hotī’’ti ettakameva avatvā ‘‘laddhā macco yadicchatī’’ti vuttattā lobhanīyaṃ vatthuṃyeva laddhā pītimano na hoti, atha kho patthetabbaṃ pūjetabbanti sabbaṃ laddhā macco pītimano ca hotīti atirekattho daṭṭhabbo.
导师已作分别:“作为境界、应被享受的乐味,于此巴利偈颂中已经出现”,我们也已了知。由于应当被问及“在苦、忧等种种过患中,什么是过患?又在哪段巴利法中被提及?”因此才发起了“其中,什么是过患?如果彼欲求者……”等句。其中,“其中”意为:在那“乐味、过患……”等偈颂所指示的苦、忧等过患中,什么是过患?在那些巴利法中,于何处巴利出现?——如此设问之后。显示巴利原文
Visayabhūto assādetabbo assādo idha pāḷiyaṃ gāthāyaṃ āgatoti ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘dukkhadomanassādibhedesu ādīnavesu katamo ādīnavo kattha pāḷidhamme āgato’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo ādīnavo? Tassa ce kāmayānassā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu dukkhadomanassādīsu ādīnavesu katamo ādīnavo tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgatoti pucchitvā –
对于那贪着欲乐、心生欲求的人,
当那些欲乐衰退时,他如同被箭射中一般受苦。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tassa ce kāmayānassa, chandajātassa jantuno; Te kāmā parihāyanti, sallaviddhova ruppatī’’ti. (su. ni. 773; mahāni. 2) –
在此偈颂中出现的忧之过患,此忧之过患即是说法食的所缘境。显示巴利原文
Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yo domanassasaṅkhāto ādīnavo āgato, so ayaṃ domanassasaṅkhāto ādīnavo desanāhārassa visayoti.
而在偈颂中:“kāmayati”(欲求)即“icchati”(希望),故称“kāmayāna”(欲求者)。又或:“yāyati”(去)即“gacchati”(行),故为“yāna”(乘);以欲为乘者,称为“kāmayāna”(以欲为乘者),即彼。“chanda”(欲)已生起于彼,故为“chandajāta”(生欲者),即彼。“vijjhīyati”(被刺穿)故为“viddha”(被刺穿者);“sallati”(刺入)即“pavisati”(进入),故为“salla”(箭);被箭所刺穿者,为“sallaviddha”(被箭刺穿者)。对于欲求欲乐、生起欲望的有情,当那些应得的欲乐因某种障碍而衰失时,他便受苦。犹如被铁箭射穿的鹿受苦一般,欲乐衰失的有情便受苦——应当这样理解。而此处以“ruppati”(受苦)一词,显示了忧的生起——也应当这样理解。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ pana kāmayati icchatīti kāmayāno. Atha vā yāyati gacchatīti yāno, kāmena yāno kāmayāno, tassa. Chando jāto yassa so chandajāto, tassa. Vijjhīyateti viddho, sallati pavisatīti sallo, sallena viddho sallaviddho. Kāmaṃ kāmayānassa chandajātassa jantuno ye kāmā labhitabbā, te kāmā kenaci antarāyena yadā parihāyanti, tadā so jantu ruppati. Kīdisova ruppati? Ayomayasallaviddho migo ruppati iva, parihīnakāmo jantu ruppatīti daṭṭhabbo. Ettha ca ‘‘ruppatī’’tivacanena domanassuppatti dassitāti daṭṭhabbā.
“过患”在此教法中已出现,由阿阇梨分别解说,我们亦已了知。因为应当问:“在依道与涅槃而分的两种出离中,哪一种出离于教法何处出现?”于是便开始了“其中,什么是出离?即远离诸欲……”等文句。“其中”:即在那首“乐味、过患……”等偈颂所指示的、依道与涅槃而分的两种出离中,哪一种出离在那些经文句中于何处出现?如此问后——显示巴利原文
Domanassabhūto ādīnavo idha pāḷiyaṃ āgatoti ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘magganibbānavasena duvidhesu nissaraṇesu katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgata’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ? Yo kāme parivajjetī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu magganibbānavasena duvidhesu nissaraṇesu katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷidhamme āgatanti pucchitvā –
远离诸欲者,如以足避蛇头,
具念者于世间的此贪著,能善超越。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yo kāme parivajjeti, sappasseva padā siro; Somaṃ visattikaṃ loke, sato samativattatī’’ti. (su. ni. 774; mahāni. 3) –
在这教法的偈颂中,已出现了那称为‘道之超越因’的出离;而这称为‘道之超越因’的出离,即是‘教示食’的所缘。显示巴利原文
Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yaṃ samativattanakaraṇaṃ maggasaṅkhātaṃ nissaraṇaṃ āgataṃ, taṃ idaṃ maggasaṅkhātaṃ samativattanakaraṇaṃ nissaraṇaṃ desanāhārassa visayanti.
偈中的‘yo’是指得禅定者或圣者。‘kāme’是指如前所述的所缘之欲。通过镇伏或断除那其中现行的欲贪而远离。如何远离?犹如明眼人看见蛇头后,用脚避开,如是远离。‘sato’即具念者,那人于世间,对色等所缘的贪著,以此道善超越,善超越后而安住;这称为道的超越之因,即是一分出离,应如此连结。应说‘pādā’,而将长音缩短说为‘padā’。‘pādā’意为以足,例如‘amohabhāvā amohabhāvena’。因此说‘以自己的足’(《导论注》5)。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ yoti jhānalābhī vā ariyo vā. Kāmeti vuttappakāro vatthukāmo. Tesu pavattachandarāgassa vikkhambhanena vā samucchindanena vā parivajjeti. Kiṃ parivajjeti iva vajjeti? Sappassa siro siraṃ cakkhumā puriso disvā padā pādena parivajjeti iva, evaṃ parivajjeti. Sato satisampanno so puggalo loke rūpādīsu visattikaṃ imaṃ taṇhaṃ yena maggena samativattati saṃ suṭṭhu atikkamitvā vattati, idaṃ maggasaṅkhātaṃ samativattanakaraṇaṃ ekadesaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nāmāti yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Pādā’’ti vattabbe ākārassa rassaṃ katvā ‘‘padā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pādāti ca pādena yathā ‘‘amohabhāvā amohabhāvenā’’ti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘attano pādenā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 5).
一分所缘所摄的乐味,已在此教法中显示,并由阿阇梨分别解说,我们也已了知。然而还应追问:“一分能缘所摄的乐味,在教法的何处出现?”因此发起“其中,何等为乐味?田地、宅基……”等文。或者,为何要发起“其中,何等为乐味?田地、宅基……”等文?先前不是已经以“其中,何等为乐味?对诸欲贪求者……”等文分别过乐味了吗?的确如此。但乐味有依所缘与依能缘两种,其中所缘所摄的乐味已作分别,现在为了分别能缘所摄的乐味,而发起“其中,何等为乐味?田地、宅基……”等文。这里的“其中”是指:在那首“乐味、过患……”等偈颂所指示、依所缘与能缘而区分的乐味之中,是哪种乐味,在哪些教法的文句中、于何处出现?如此发问之后——显示巴利原文
Ekadeso visayasaṅkhāto assādo idha pāḷiyaṃ āgatoti ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘ekadeso visayisaṅkhāto assādo kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgato’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tatthakatamo assādo? Khettaṃ vatthu’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘tattha katamo assādo? Khettaṃ vatthu’’ntiādi kasmā evaṃ āraddhaṃ, nanu ‘‘tattha katamo assādo? Kāmaṃ kāmayamānassā’’tiādinā assādo vibhatto? Saccaṃ, assādo pana duvidho visayavisayivasena, tasmiṃ visayasaṅkhāto assādo pubbe vibhatto, idāni visayisaṅkhātaṃ assādaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha katamo assādo? Khettaṃ vatthu’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu visayavisayibhedesu assādesu katamo assādo tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgatoti pucchitvā –
田地、宅基或黄金,牛马、奴仆,
女人、亲属、众多欲乐,凡夫于此贪求。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Khettaṃ vatthuṃ hiraññaṃ vā, gavāssaṃ dāsaporisaṃ; Thiyo bandhū puthū kāme, yo naro anugijjhatī’’ti. (su. ni. 775; mahāni. 4) –
于此教法偈颂中,出现了名为贪求的乐味;此名为贪求的能缘乐味,即是教示之食的所缘。显示巴利原文
Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yo anugijjhanasaṅkhāto assādo āgato, so ayaṃ anugijjhanasaṅkhāto visayiassādo desanāhārassa visayoti.
偈中的‘khetta’(田):种子被撒于此处的场所,故称为田。撒种者的撒种行为,是‘khip’词根的根本义;能生起撒种行为的心,是果的转借义;作为该心之亲依止缘的稻田,其令生长的能力,也是果的转借义。以‘iti’一词,即指那令生长的能力;该能力的依止之处——那个称作稻田的场所,则是其缘之义。此理应在三藏以及类似的词义解释中,随宜运用而领会。‘vapanti patiṭṭahanti ettha’(于此播种、安立),故称为宅基。豆类等的安立,是‘vap’词根的根本义;场所所具有的令安立的能力,是果的转借义;以‘iti’一词,即指那令安立的能力;该能力的安立场所,即是其缘之义。然而,田是谷物生长的处所,宅基则是豆类等生长的处所。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ khettanti khipīyanti bījāni ettha ṭhāneti khettaṃ. Khipantānaṃ janānaṃ khipanakiriyā khipa-dhātuyā mukhyattho, khipanakiriyājanako cittuppādo phalūpacārattho, tassa cittuppādassa upanissayapaccayabhūtassa kedārassa viruḷhāpanasatti phalūpacārattho, iti-saddena sā viruḷhāpanasattiyeva parāmasīyati, tassā sattiyā patiṭṭhaṃ kedārasaṅkhātaṃ ṭhānaṃ ta-paccayattho. Esa nayo tīsu piṭakesu evarūpesu ca vacanatthesu yathārahaṃ nīharitvā gahetabbo. Vapanti patiṭṭhahanti etthāti vatthu. Aparaṇṇādīnaṃ patiṭṭhahanaṃ vapa-dhātuyā mukhyattho, ṭhānassa patiṭṭhāpanasatti phalūpacārattho, iti-saddena sā patiṭṭhāpanasatti parāmasīyati. Tassā sattiyā patiṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ ta-paccayattho. Khettaṃ pana pubbaṇṇavirūhanaṭṭhānaṃ, vatthu aparaṇṇavirūhanaṭṭhānaṃ.
‘hi’:令喜乐生起、转起,故得名为‘hi’,彼为何物?即是喜乐。‘ra’:令生金转起,故得名为‘ra’,彼为何物?即是生金。‘hi’与‘ra’合为‘hira’,是第二依主释复合词。‘ña’:令觉知、令满足,故得名为‘ña’,彼为何物?亦是生金。既是‘hira’又是‘ña’,故成‘hirañña’;其义当取:转起的喜乐转起后,能特别令人生起满足。‘vā’字是已说与未说义的合集义。‘gacchanti visesena’故名为‘gāvo’(牛);‘rattindivaṃ asanti bhakkhanti visesena’故名为‘assā’(马);牛与马合称‘gavāssaṃ’。‘dātabbaṃ paṭhamaṃ denti’故名为‘dā’;‘asanti bhakkhanti’故名为‘asā’;先给予而后食用,故名为‘dāsā’(奴仆),其义为:先将应当给予主人之物交出,然后自己才食用。或者,食用主人所给予之物,故名为‘dāsā’;或者,以苦、以艰难而食、而活,故名为‘dāsā’。‘mātāpitūnaṃ hadayaṃ purenti’(令父母心生欢喜),故名为……显示巴利原文
Hinoti pavattati pītisomanassanti hi, kiṃ taṃ? Pītisomanassaṃ, rāti pavatteti jātarūpanti raṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Jātarūpaṃ, hiṃ ranti hiraṃ, dutiyātappurisasamāso. Ñāpeti tosetīti ñaṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Jātarūpaṃ. Hiraṃ hutvā ñaṃ hiraññaṃ, pavattamānaṃ pītisomanassaṃ pavattetvā jane visesena tosetīti attho gahetabbo. Vā-saddo vuttāvuttatthasamuccayattho. Gacchanti visesenāti gāvo, rattindivaṃ asanti bhakkhanti visesenāti assā, gāvo ca assā ca gavāssaṃ. Dātabbaṃ paṭhamaṃ dentīti dā, asanti bhakkhantīti asā, datvā asā dāsā, sāmikānaṃ dātabbaṃ paṭhamaṃ datvā pacchā asanti bhakkhantīti attho. Sāmikehi vā dinnaṃ asanti bhakkhantīti dāsā, dukkhena kasirena asanti pavattantīti vā dāsā,. Mātāpitūnaṃ hadayaṃ purentīti purisā, puraṃ hitaṃ vā isanti gavesantīti purisā. Buddhapaccekabuddhacakkavattibhāvaṃ pureti kammanti puraṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Balavakammaṃ, puraṃ isanti sīlenāti vā purisā. Purisā eva hi sammāsambuddhapaccekabuddhacakkavattibhāvaṃ gacchanti. ‘‘Puri uccaṭṭhāne sentīti vā purisā. Purisā hi mātūnaṃ pituṭṭhāne ṭhitā’’ti ime vacanatthā vuttappakārā yuttāyeva atthasambhavato. Dāsā ca purisā ca dāsaporisaṃ, majjhe vuddhi. Ettha ca dāsaggahaṇena dāsīpi gahitā. Dāsā dukkaṭajanā, purisā sukhitajanāti viseso daṭṭhabbo. Ṭhanti patiṭṭhahanti ettha mātugāme puttadhītāti thiyo. Narasaddassa viggahattho heṭṭhā vuttova.
在此巴利偈颂中,有一部分名为‘忧’的过患,已由阿阇梨分别解说,亦为我等所知。由于应问‘名为苦的过患在巴利圣典中何处出现?’,故开始解说‘其中,何等为过患?无力者,他们胜彼’等。或者,为何要这样开始解说‘其中,何等为过患?无力者,他们胜彼’等?难道不是已经以‘其中,何等为过患?若彼随顺欲乐’等分别了过患吗?确实如此。然而,过患依苦、忧等而有多种。于这些众多过患中,一部分名为‘忧’的过患先前已作分别,今为分别名为‘苦’的过患,故开始解说‘其中,何等为过患?无力者,他们胜彼’等。其中,‘其中’即指在‘味、过患等’偈颂中所揭示的苦、忧等过患之中,何等为过患?‘其中’即问:于那些巴利法句中,过患出现于何处巴利法句?显示巴利原文
Ekadeso domanassasaṅkhāto ādīnavo idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ āgatoti ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘dukkhasaṅkhāto ādīnavo kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgato’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo ādīnavo? Abalā naṃ balīyantī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘tattha katamo ādīnavo? Abalā naṃ balīyantī’’tiādi kasmā evaṃ āraddhaṃ, nanu ‘‘tattha katamo ādīnavo? Tassa ce kāmayānassā’’tiādinā ādīnavo vibhattoti? Saccaṃ, ādīnavo pana bahuvidho dukkhadomanassādivasena, tasmiṃ bahuvidhe ādīnave ekadeso domanassasaṅkhāto ādīnavo pubbe vibhatto, idāni dukkhasaṅkhātaṃ ādīnavaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha katamo ādīnavo? Abalā naṃ balīyantī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu dukkhadomanassādīsu ādīnavesu katamo ādīnavo tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷidhamme āgatoti pucchitvā –
‘无力者,他们胜彼;诸危难摧伏彼;’
‘从此,苦随逐于他,犹如水随破裂之船。’(《经集》第776偈;《大义释》第5品)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Abalā naṃ balīyanti, maddantenaṃ parissayā; Tato naṃ dukkhamanveti, nāvaṃ bhinnamivodaka’’nti. (su. ni. 776; mahāni. 5) –
在此巴利偈颂中,所显示的一分名为'苦'的过患,这一分名为'苦'的过患,即属于说法资粮的范畴。显示巴利原文
Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yo dukkhasaṅkhāto ekadeso ādīnavo āgato, so ayaṃ dukkhasaṅkhāto ekadeso ādīnavo desanāhārassa visayoti.
偈颂中,'无力者'指这些烦恼没有力量。为什么烦恼是无力者?因为它们可被善法所断除。'人'指贪着田地等欲乐的人,或者因缺少信等力量而无力的人,'战胜'即制服他。虽然烦恼因可被善法断除而为无力者,但对于贪着欲乐、缺少信等力量的人,它们却能将他制服。'诸危难摧伏他':对于贪着欲乐、寻求欲乐、守护欲乐的人,从四方包围、逼迫他而现起的,即是危难——如狮子、老虎等,以及身恶行等——这些摧伏他。从此,被那些危难所征服的人,生等之苦便追随他、随行他。如同什么一样追随?如同水追随破裂的船一样,如此追随。这是[偈颂的]义理所在。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ natthi balaṃ etesaṃ kilesānanti abalā. Kasmā kilesā abalā hontīti? Kusalehi pahātabbattā. Naranti khettādikāme anugijjhantaṃ naraṃ, saddhābalādivirahato vā abalaṃ taṃ naraṃ balīyanti abhibhavanti. Kiñcāpi kilesā kusalehi pahātabbattā abalā honti, tathāpi kāmamanugijjhantaṃ saddhābalādivirahitaṃ abhibhavituṃ samatthā bhavanti. Maddantenaṃ parissayāti kāmagiddhaṃ kāme pariyesantaṃ, kāmaṃ rakkhantañca enaṃ naraṃ pari samantato paripīḷetvā ayanti pavattantīti parissayā, sīhabyagghādayo ceva kāyaduccaritādayo ca maddanti. Tato tehi parissayehi abhibhūtaṃ naṃ naraṃ jātiādidukkhaṃ anveti anugacchati. Kimiva anveti? Udakaṃ bhinnanāvaṃ anveti iva, evaṃ anvetīti attho.
在此巴利偈颂中,有一分名为'道'的出离,阿阇梨已分别解说,我们也已经了解。然而,由于应问'名为涅槃的一分出离在巴利法句的何处出现?',所以开始解说'其中,什么是出离?因此,人应常具正念'等语。或者,为何要这样开始'其中,什么是出离?因此,人应常具正念'等?难道不是已经以'其中,什么是出离?若他遍舍诸欲'等分别了出离吗?确实如此,然而出离依道与涅槃而有两种。在这两种出离中,名为'道'的出离先前已作分别,现在为了分别名为'涅槃'的出离,故开始'其中,什么是出离?因此,人应常具正念'等。此处,'其中'是指在那一'味、过患等'的偈颂中所指出的道与涅槃等出离之中,一分名为'涅槃'的出离,'其中'即是问:在那些巴利法句中,它出现于哪一处巴利法句?显示巴利原文
Ekadesaṃ maggasaṅkhātaṃ nissaraṇaṃ idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ āgatanti ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amheti ca viññātaṃ, ‘‘nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ ekadesaṃ nissaraṇaṃ kattha pāḷidhamme āgata’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ? Tasmā jantu sadā sato’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘tattha katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ? Tasmā jantu sadā sato’’tiādi kasmā evaṃ āraddhaṃ, nanu ‘‘tattha katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ? Yo kāme parivajjetī’’tiādinā nissaraṇaṃ vibhattanti? Saccaṃ, nissaraṇaṃ pana duvidhaṃ magganibbānavasena, tattha duvidhe nissaraṇe maggasaṅkhātaṃ nissaraṇaṃ pubbe vibhattaṃ, idāni nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ nissaraṇaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ nissaraṇaṃ? Tasmā jantu sadā sato’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu magganibbānesu nissaraṇesu ekadesaṃ nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ nissaraṇaṃ tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷidhamme āgatanti pucchitvā –
因此,人应恒常保持正念,舍离诸欲;
舍弃它们后,他便渡越暴流,犹如舀出船中水而抵达彼岸。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tasmā jantu sadā sato, kāmāni parivajjaye; Te pahāya tare oghaṃ, nāvaṃ sitvāva pāragū’’ti. –
在此巴利偈颂中,所提到的、名为涅槃的解脱,这解脱正是教法所宣说的内容。显示巴利原文
Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yaṃ nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ nissaraṇaṃ āgataṃ, idaṃ nissaraṇaṃ desanāhārassa visayanti.
偈颂中“因此”:因为苦追随贪著欲乐之人,故人应于一切时,于初夜、后夜精勤觉醒,具念、成就正念,对诸欲——即烦恼欲,或以镇伏、或以断除而遍舍、遍断。以圣道舍弃彼诸欲后,便能渡越四暴流。如何渡越?犹如船主将进入船中的水舀出泼去,以轻便之船不费力地渡越而达彼岸;同样地,将自身中生起的烦恼之水舀出,以圣道除去,以轻安之身,于无余依涅槃界,以涅槃达彼岸、证涅槃、得寂静,这就是它的含义。此涅槃为何名为出离?因出离一切有为,故名出离。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ tasmāti yasmā kāmagiddhaṃ naraṃ dukkhaṃ anveti, tasmā jantu sadā sabbakāle pubbarattāpararatte jāgariyānuyogena sato satisampanno hutvā kāmāni kilesakāme vikkhambhanavasena vā samucchedavasena vā parivajjaye parijaheyya. Te kāme ariyamaggena pahāya catubbidhaṃ oghaṃ tareyya tarituṃ sakkuṇeyya. Ko tarati iva tareyya? Nāvāsāmiko nāvaṃ yaṃ pavisantaṃ udakaṃ sitvā bahi siñcitvā lahukāya nāvāya appakasirena taritvā pāragū pāraṃ gacchati iva, evaṃ attani pavattaṃ kilesūdakaṃ siñcitvā ariyamaggena nīharitvā lahukena attabhāvena anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā nibbānena pāraṃ nibbānaṃ santiṃ gaccheyyāti attho. Idaṃ nibbānaṃ kasmā nissaraṇaṃ hoti? Sabbasaṅkhatanissaraṇato nissaraṇaṃ nāma.
此出离出现于此巴利法句中,已由阿阇梨分别解说,亦为我们所了知。因应问:“什么果在巴利法句的何处出现?”故开始解说“其中,什么是果?法确实保护行法者”等。其中,“其中”是指在“味、过患等”偈颂所开示的保护、成就、不死、渡越等果中,什么是果?“其中”即是问:在那些巴利法句中,于何处巴利法句中出现?显示巴利原文
Idaṃ nissaraṇaṃ idha pāḷidhamme āgatanti ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca viññātaṃ, ‘‘katamaṃ phalaṃ kattha pāḷidhamme āgata’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamaṃ phalaṃ? Dhammo have rakkhati dhammacāri’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu rakkhananipphādanamaccutaraṇādīsu phalesu katamaṃ phalaṃ tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷidhamme āgatanti pucchitvā –
‘‘Dhammo have rakkhati dhammacāriṃ, chattaṃ mahantaṃ yatha vassakāle; Esānisaṃso dhamme suciṇṇe, na duggatiṃ gacchati dhammacārī’’ti. (su. ni. 102, 103) –
在这首巴利偈颂中,所说的法从诸灾厄中守护的果,以及带来守护之增上成就的果,此守护与成就之果,即是说法之资粮的范畴。显示巴利原文
Idha pāḷigāthāyaṃ yaṃ anatthehi dhammassa rakkhanaphalaṃ āgataṃ, rakkhāvahanassa abbhudayassa yañca nipphādanaṃ phalaṃ āgataṃ, idaṃ rakkhananipphādanaṃ phalaṃ desanāhārassa visayanti.
偈颂中的“法”,是指由某人生起的布施等种种善法,这就是法。行法者,即生起该法的人,法在灾厄中保护他。以何为喻?犹如雨季降雨时,善持大伞的人,伞能保护他不被雨淋;同样地,因自己的正愿、不放逸而善护法者,法亦保护他。如此,行法者不堕恶趣。这便是善修法的功德——“善修法之功德”即是此义。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ dhammoti yena puggalena yo dānādippabhedo puññadhammo nibbattito, so dhammo. Dhammacāriṃ dhammanibbattakaṃ taṃ puggalaṃ anatthehi rakkhati. Kimiva? Vassakāle deve vassante sati mahantaṃ kusalena dhāretabbaṃ chattaṃ dhārentaṃ kusalaṃ taṃ janaṃ vassatemanato rakkhati yathā, evaṃ rakkhitabbo dhammopi attasammāpaṇidhānena appamatto hutvā suṭṭhu dhammaṃ rakkhantaṃyeva rakkhati, tādiso dhammacārīyeva duggatiṃ na gacchati. Eso ānisaṃso suciṇṇe suciṇṇassa dhamme dhammassa ānisaṃsoti attho.
“此处有部分果报依巴利圣典而来”,此义由阿阇梨阐明,亦我等所知。因应问“何等为方便?于巴利圣典何处出现?”,故以“诸行无常”等为始。所谓“于彼处”,即在那以“乐味与过患”等为起始的偈颂所指示的、以观为前导的厌离等方便之中。显示巴利原文
Ekadesaṃ phalaṃ idha pāḷidhamme āgatanti ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘katamo upāyo kattha pāḷiyaṃ āgato’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo upāyo? Sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhesu vipassanāpubbaṅgamanibbidādīsu upāyesu katamo upāyo tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷidhamme āgatoti pucchitvā –
“一切诸行无常”……乃至……
“一切诸法无我,当以慧观见时。”(《法句经》277-279偈)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbe saṅkhārā ‘aniccā’ti…pe…; Sabbe dhammā ‘anattā’ti, yadā paññāya passatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 277-279) –
在此巴利偈颂中,所谓“方便”,即是作为证得清净之因、而以观为前导的厌离智之道。此即为本说教所摄之范畴。显示巴利原文
Idha pāḷigāthāsu yo vipassanāpubbaṅgamanibbidāñāṇasaṅkhāto visuddhiyā adhigamahetubhāvato maggo āgato, ayaṃ upāyo desanāhārassa visayoti.
在偈颂中,一切诸行无余地由业、心与食所造,成为有为的诸行,当以慧观见其以坏灭义为无常时,便厌离此具足无常苦性的法,此即以观为前导的厌离智之法,也就是清净之道。在“诸行无常”等句中,诸行的有为法性质已于《分别论注》中阐明。有些阿阇梨未查阅该《分别论注》,便说“由于是观智的所缘,故仅为三地法”。若如此,道果法便会成为常等,因此应依《分别论注》之正义来理解。所谓“苦”,即具足苦苦、坏苦、行苦之性。所谓“无我”,即因无常之义、无坚实之义、苦与无坚实之核心等故,以无坚实之义为无我;或以不自在之义为无我。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu sabbe niravasesā kammacittotuāhārehi saṅkharitā saṅkhatasaṅkhārā hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccā iti yadā paññāya passati, atha anicce dukkhasabhāve nibbindati, eso vipassanāpubbaṅgamo nibbindanañāṇasaṅkhāto dhammo visuddhiyā maggoti. ‘‘Sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā’’tiādīsu saṅkhārānaṃ saṅkhatadhammabhāvo paccayākāravibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 226 saṅkhārapadaniddesa) vuttova, taṃ vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathaṃ anoloketvā ekacce ācariyā ‘‘vipassanāñāṇārammaṇattā tebhūmakadhammāyevā’’ti vadanti, evaṃ sati maggaphaladhammānaṃ niccādibhāvo bhaveyya, tasmā vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathānurūpova attho daṭṭhabbo. Dukkhāti dukkhadukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhabhāvena dukkhā. Anattāti niccasārasukhasāraattasārarahitattā asārakaṭṭhena anattā, avasavattanaṭṭhena vā anattā.
“有一部分方便是依巴利圣典而来”,此义已由阿阇梨阐明,亦为我等所了知。由于应当问“何为教令?在巴利圣典中何处出现?”,故而以“有眼者如避险道”等作为开端。此中,“在这里”即是在那部开示了“乐味与过患”等的偈颂中所指出的诸处,在远离恶行的教令与行持善法的教令等之中——这便是教令。在这里,在那些巴利法之中,即是在巴利圣典的何处呢?作如此询问之后——显示巴利原文
Ekadeso upāyo idha pāḷidhamme āgatoti ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘katamā āṇatti kattha pāḷidhamme āgatā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamā āṇatti? Cakkhumā visamānīvā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ niddiṭṭhāsu pāpaduccaritaparivajjanāṇattikalyāṇasucaritacaraṇāṇattiādīsu katamāṇatti tattha tesu pāḷidhammesu kattha pāḷidhamme āgatāti pucchitvā –
具眼者如避险途,于危难中当精进;
智者于有情世间,当远离诸恶行。”(《自说经》43偈)——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Cakkhumā visamānīva, vijjamāne parakkame; Paṇḍito jīvalokasmiṃ, pāpāni parivajjaye’’ti. (udā. 43) –
在此巴利法中,所出现的远离恶行之教示,此远离恶行之教示即是此说法所摄的范畴。显示巴利原文
Idha pāḷidhamme yā pāpaduccaritaparivajjanāṇatti āgatā, ayaṃ pāpaduccaritaparivajjanāṇatti desanāhārassa visayāti.
此偈中,明眼之人于危险现前时奋起,犹如负重者避开险地、恶象等;同样,世间智者远离种种卑劣的恶行。所谓“教令”,即是具教令权的法王世尊之教敕;此教令有多种,故于“应行善”等偈中,行诸善行即是教令。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ cakkhumā puriso vijjamāne parakkame āvahitaṃ sarīraṃ āvahantova hutvā visamāni bhūmippadesāni vā visame hatthiādayo vā parivajjeti iva, evaṃ jīvalokasmiṃ paṇḍito pāpāni lāmakāni duccaritāni parivajjeti. Āṇatti nāma āṇārahassa dhammarājassa bhagavato āṇā, sā bahuvidhā, tasmā ‘‘kareyya kalyāṇa’’ntiādigāthāyaṃ sucaritacaraṇā āṇatti.
“你们应皈依佛、皈依法、皈依如是僧伽;
你们应受持诸戒,那将为你们的利益与安乐。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Upetha saraṇaṃ buddhaṃ, dhammaṃ saṅghañca tādinaṃ; Samādiyatha sīlāni, taṃ vo atthāya hehitī’’ti. (therīgā. 249-250, 289-290) –
在最初的偈颂中,出现了皈依教令、受戒教令等内容。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu gāthāsu saraṇagamanāṇattisīlasamādānāṇattiādi āgatāti.
为何以“应观世间为空”等作为开端?难道不是在诸经中,已用“其中何为果?即法”等、“其中何为方便?即诸行”等、“其中何为教令?即具眼者”等,分别阐明了果、方便与教令吗?的确如此。诸经中各自分别阐明了果、方便与教令,而如今为了将共同出现的果、方便与教令归纳阐明,故以“应观世间为空”等作为开端。显示巴利原文
‘‘Suññato lokaṃ avekkhassū’’tiādi kasmā evaṃ āraddhaṃ, nanu ‘‘tattha katamaṃ phalaṃ? Dhammo have’’tiādinā, ‘‘tattha katamo upāyo? Sabbe saṅkhārā’’tiādinā, ‘‘tattha katamā āṇatti? Cakkhumā’’tiādinā ca phalūpāyāṇattiyo vibhattāti? Saccaṃ, visuṃ visuṃ pana suttesu āgatā phalūpāyāṇattiyo vibhattā, idāni ekato āgatā phalūpāyāṇattiyo vibhajituṃ ‘‘suññato lokaṃ avekkhassū’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.
于此,“应观世间为空”的意思是:观一切行世间为空、无我,或以不自在之相而观,或以审视其虚妄不实而观。这是世尊的言教,因其具有制定之义,故称为“教令”。因为无有恒常坚实、乐坚实、我坚实等,故称呼“莫伽罗阇”(空虚之王);又或因为无信、无戒、无闻、无施等,故为“空虚”(莫伽)。显示巴利原文
Tattha suññato lokaṃ avekkhassūti sabbampi saṅkhāralokaṃ attato suññoti avasavattitāsallakkhaṇavasena vā tucchabhāvasamanupassanavasena vā passāti idaṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ vidhānabhāvato āṇatti nāma. Niccasārasukhasāraattasārādirahitattā ‘‘mogharājā’’ti ālapati, saddhāsīlasutacāgādirahitattā vā mogho.
“常具念”者:由于对空观的具念是正知的因,故就“念”本身作为方便而言,并非指“具念者”,此处“念”即是其义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sadā sato’’ti puggalavasena vuttāya satiyā suññatādassanassa sampajānahetubhāvato satiyeva upāyo, na satimāti ettha satīti adhippāyo.
“拔除我见”者:此中所谓我见,即“色是我、我有色、色在我中、我在色中”等以二十事为所缘的见。以圣道拔除、彻底断尽之后,依上述所说方式,便能超越死神、越出死神境界。其中,超越、越出死神境界,以及成就该超越的前行之道,此即世尊教法中之果,亦即教说所摄之主题——此为其义。以上已分别阐明果、方便与教令,显示巴利原文
Attānudiṭṭhiṃ ūhaccāti ettha attānudiṭṭhi nāma ‘‘rūpaṃ attā, rūpavā attā, rūpasmiṃ attā, attani rūpa’’ntiādippakārā vīsativatthukā diṭṭhi. Maggena ūhacca samucchinditvā evaṃ vuttavidhinā maccutaro maccuno visayātikkanto siyā bhaveyya. Ettha yaṃ maccuvisayaṃ taraṇaṃ atikkamanaṃ, tassa atikkamanassa yañca pubbabhāgapaṭipadāsampajjanaṃ, idaṃ bhagavato desanāya phalaṃ desanāhārassa visayanti adhippāyo. Pubbe visuṃ visuṃ phalūpāyāṇattiyo vibhattāpi –
“莫伽罗阇,常具念,应观世间为空;
断除我见,如是便能成为超越死亡者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Suññato lokaṃ avekkhassu, mogharāja sadā sato; Attānudiṭṭhiṃ ūhacca, evaṃ maccutaro siyā’’ti. (su. ni. 1125; mahāni. 186; cūḷani. piṅgiyamāṇavapucchā 144, mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 88) –
再者,当诸果等在一首偈颂中被合在一起显示时;或于一切经、一切偈颂中,诸果等应如味、过患等那样,在有些地方通过简择而显示,应知有此差别。因此注释师说:“然而,正如……应视为合在一起举例。”显示巴利原文
Ekagāthāyaṃ puna ekato vibhajanato phalādīsu ekato dassitesu sabbattha suttesu vā sabbattha gāthāsu vā phalādayo dassetabbā assādādayo viya katthaci niddhāretvāti viseso vijānitabbo. Tenāha aṭṭhakathācariyo ‘‘yathā pana…pe… ekato udāharaṇaṃ katanti daṭṭhabba’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 5).
6 第六,作为说法食之境的味、过患等,阿阇梨以“在此圣典法句中,此味出现;在此圣典法句中,此过患出现”等方式,通过特别例示而依自性做了分别。那些味、过患等,因有“世尊是普遍地为三种人——略说即知者等说法,还是随所得为某一个人说法”这样的疑问,为依人的差别分别显示味等,即“对此人,世尊说此;对彼人,世尊说彼”,于是导师开示“其中,世尊对略说即知者……”等语。此中,“其中”即指那些味等之中。应知联结之义为:世尊对略说即知者说离;对广说即知者说此二法——过患与离;对应引导者说此三法——味、过患与离。显示巴利原文
6. Desanāhārassa visayabhūtā assādādayo ‘‘idha pāḷidhamme ayaṃ assādo āgato, idha pāḷidhamme ayaṃ ādīnavo āgato’’tiādinā visesato nidassanavasena sarūpato ācariyena vibhattā, te assādādayo tiṇṇaṃ ugghaṭitaññuādīnaṃ puggalānaṃ sāmaññato bhagavā kiṃ nu kho deseti, udāhu ekassa puggalassa yathālābhaṃ kiṃ nu desetīti anuyogassa sambhavato imassa puggalassa imaṃ deseti, imassa puggalassa imaṃ desetīti puggalabhedena assādādayo vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha bhagavā ugghaṭitaññussā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu assādādīsu. Nissaraṇaṃ ugghaṭitaññussa puggalassa bhagavā deseti, ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca ime dve vipañcitaññussa puggalassa bhagavā deseti, assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca ime tayo neyyassa puggalassa bhagavā desetīti yojanattho daṭṭhabbo.
而在注疏中则说:“如此以举例的方式,依其自性开示了乐味等之后,现在为了依人施教之别以显示教法之分别,而说‘其中,世尊……’等语。”显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ assādādayo udāharaṇavasena sarūpato dassetvā idāni tattha puggalavibhāgena desanāvibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘tattha bhagavā’tiādi vutta’’nti vuttaṃ.
其中,“略说即知者”:义理被揭示、被证知,或者说,具有分别、广说的义理被确立,故称为“略说”;能知者,名为“知”;能知略说之义者,即为“略说即知者”。意思是:仅仅通过简略的开示,便能证知那本应通过分别与广说才能证知的义理。那种仅凭略说、仅凭所举,便能了知法义而成就法益的人,名为略说即知者。显示巴利原文
Tattha ugghaṭitaññussāti ugghaṭīyate paṭivijjhīyate, ṭhapīyate vā sappabhedo vitthāro atthoti ugghaṭito, jānātīti ñū, ugghaṭitaṃ atthaṃ ñū ugghaṭitaññū, uddesamatteneva sappabhedaṃ savitthāraṃ paṭivijjhitabbaṃ atthaṃ paṭivijjhatīti attho. Yo puggalo uddeseneva uddiṭṭhamatteneva atthaṃ ñatvā atthasiddhippatto hoti, so ugghaṭitaññū nāma.
义理被广为解说、详细分别,称为“广说”;能知此者,即为“广说即知者”。那种仅凭详尽的解说、仅凭所开示的,便能了知法义而成就法益的人,名为广说即知者。显示巴利原文
Vipañcīyate vittharīyate atthoti vipañcito, taṃ jānātīti vipañcitaññū. Yo puggalo niddesena niddiṭṭhamattameva atthaṃ ñatvā atthasiddhippatto, so vipañcitaññū nāma.
其义理须假借反复解说方能引导、通达,故名为“应引导者”。有一类人,须通过反复解说或反面阐明的方式,才能了知所析之义并成就义利,此人即名为应引导者。此处应把握的意趣是:对于略说即知者,仅凭开示出离的教说,其证悟现观便得成就;对于广说即知者,须通过开示过患与出离的教说,其证悟现观方得成就;而对于应引导者,则须通过开示味、过患与出离的教说,其证悟现观方得成就。显示巴利原文
Paṭiniddesena attho netabbo pāpetabboti neyyo. Yo puggalo paṭiniddesena vā paṭilomena vā vibhattaṃ eva atthaṃ ñatvā atthasiddhippatto, so neyyo nāma. Nissaraṇadesanāyeva ugghaṭitaññussa paṭivedhābhisamayo siddho hoti, ādīnavadesanāya ceva nissaraṇadesanāya ca vipañcitaññussa paṭivedhābhisamayo siddho hoti, assādadesanāya ca ādīnavadesanāya ca nissaraṇadesanāya ca neyyassa paṭivedhābhisamayo siddho hotīti adhippāyo idha gahetabbo.
然而,此处并未将句义最胜者纳入考量,因其不具备证悟现观的能力。既然未将他纳入,那么在味、过患、出离,以及味与过患、味与出离、过患与出离、味与过患与出离这七种发趣法之中,便只有第三、第六与第七种被采纳,其余四种并未被采用。应知,此采纳与否,是基于可化导者是否得到调伏。所谓可化导者的调伏,是指圣道在可化导者的心相续中生起,而非仅仅是教法上的调伏。而圣道的生起,仅依前述的三种发趣法即可成就,因此其余的法此处未予宣说。显示巴利原文
Padaparamo panettha paṭivedhābhisamayabhajanābhāvato na gahito. Tasmiñca aggahite assādo, ādīnavo, nissaraṇaṃ, assādādīnavā, assādanissaraṇāni, ādīnavanissaraṇāni, assādādīnavanissaraṇāni cāti sattasu paṭṭhānanayesu tatiyachaṭṭhasattamāva gahitā, avasesā cattāro nayā na gahitā. Veneyyavinayanābhāvato hi gahaṇāgahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Veneyyavinayañca veneyyānaṃ santāne ariyamaggassuppādanaṃ, na sāsanavinayanamattaṃ, ariyamagguppādanañca yathāvuttehi eva tīhi padaṭṭhānanayehi sijjhatīti itare nayā idha na vuttā.
然而,根据《文册》(第23页)中所载——显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana peṭake (peṭako. 23) –
‘‘Tattha katamo assādo ca ādīnavo ca? ‘Yāni karoti puriso, tāni passati attani; Kalyāṇakārī kalyāṇaṃ, pāpakārī ca pāpaka’nti.
其中,善行者感受善果,这是味;恶行者感受恶果,这是过患。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha yaṃ kalyāṇakārī kalyāṇaṃ paccanubhoti, ayaṃ assādo. Yaṃ pāpakārī pāpaṃ paccanubhoti, ayaṃ ādīnavo.
诸比丘,有八种世间法。哪八种?‘得’等(增支部8.6)。其中,得、誉、乐、称,此为味;失、毁、苦、讥,此为过患。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aṭṭhime, bhikkhave, lokadhammā. Katame aṭṭha? ‘Lābho’tiādi (a. ni. 8.6). Tattha lābho yaso sukhaṃ pasaṃsā, ayaṃ assādo. Alābho ayaso dukkhaṃ nindā, ayaṃ ādīnavo.
其中,什么是味与出离?显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamo assādo ca nissaraṇañca?
‘Sukho vipāko puññānaṃ, adhippāyo ca ijjhati; Khippañca paramaṃ santiṃ, nibbānamadhigacchatī’ti. –
此是味与出离。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ assādo ca nissaraṇañca.
诸比丘,大人有三十二种大人相,具足这些大人之相者,唯二种趣向……乃至……无覆障者,此即全部《相经》(长部3.199)所明,此为味与离。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dvattiṃsimāni, bhikkhave, mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassa dveyeva gatiyo bhavanti…pe… vivaṭacchadoti sabbaṃ lakkhaṇasuttaṃ (dī. ni. 3.199) ayaṃ assādo ca nissaraṇañca.
什么是过患与出离?显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamo ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca?
卸下那沉重的负担,不再执取他负;
连根拔除渴爱,无求、般涅槃。”——(相应部3.22)
显示巴利原文 ‘Bhārā have pañcakkhandhā, bhārahāro ca puggalo; Bhārādānaṃ dukhaṃ loke, bhāranikkhepanaṃ sukhaṃ. ‘Nikkhipitvā garuṃ bhāraṃ, aññaṃ bhāraṃ anādiya; Samūlaṃ taṇhamabbuyha, nicchāto parinibbuto’ti. (saṃ. ni. 3.22) –
这就是它的过患与出离。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca.
其中,什么是它的味、过患与出离?显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamo assādo ca ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca?
欲乐确实多姿、甜蜜、令人愉悦,它以种种形貌扰动人心;
因此,大王,我已出家;无惑的沙门道方为更胜。
显示巴利原文 ‘Kāmā hi citrā madhurā manoramā, virūparūpena mathenti cittaṃ; Tasmā ahaṃ pabbajitomhi rāja, apaṇṇakaṃ sāmaññameva seyyo’ti. (ma. ni. 2.307; theragā. 787; peṭako. 23) –
这是味、过患与离。因此,那些方法也应在此择取而了知。于诸果等中,此法亦可获得。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ assādo ca ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañcā’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā tepi nayā idha niddhāretvā veditabbā. Phalādīsupi ayaṃ nayo labbhatiyeva.
如《藏论》(相应部1.23, 192;《藏论》22;《弥兰陀问经》2.1.9)所说:“其中,何为果与方法?‘具慧之人立于戒’这一偈,即是果与方法。”显示巴利原文
Yasmā peṭake (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192; peṭako. 22; mi. pa. 2.1.9) – ‘‘tattha katamaṃ phalañca upāyo ca? ‘Sīle patiṭṭhāya naro sappañño’ti gāthā, idaṃ phalañca upāyo ca.
其中,何为果与教令?显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamaṃ phalañca āṇatti ca?
若你们畏惧苦,若苦为你们所不喜,
无论是公开还是秘密,皆莫作恶业。
显示巴利原文 ‘Sace bhāyatha dukkhassa, sace vo dukkhamappiyaṃ; Mākattha pāpakaṃ kammaṃ, āvi vā yadi vā raho’ti. (udā. 44) –
这是果报与教诫。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ phalañca āṇatti ca.
其中,什么是方法与教诫?显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamo upāyo ca āṇatti ca?
了知此身犹如瓦罐,将心安住犹如城池;
应以智慧为武器与魔罗战斗,守护已得的胜利而不执著。
显示巴利原文 ‘Kumbhūpamaṃ kāyamimaṃ viditvā, nagarūpamaṃ cittamidaṃ ṭhapetvā; Yodhetha māraṃ paññāvudhena, jitañca rakkhe anivesano siyā’ti. (dha. pa. 40) –
“这是方法,也是教诫。”如此说故,对于果等,亦应依于苦的角度了知为示例。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ upāyo ca āṇatti cā’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā evaṃ phalādīnaṃ dukkhavasenāpi udāharaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
对于“略说即知者”等三种人,“此人对彼人开示此法,此人对彼人开示此法”——阿阇梨已随宜分别为味著等的人,这些人是依哪些行道而有差别?那些行道有多少种?依行道而有差别的人又有多少种?为了以计数显示“那些行道及那些人唯此数量”,便开示说:“其中,有四种行道”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ugghaṭitaññuādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ imassa puggalassa imaṃ deseti, imassa puggalassa imaṃ desetī’’ti yehi puggalehi assādādayo yathārahaṃ ācariyena vibhattā, te puggalā yāhi paṭipadāhi bhinnā, tā paṭipadā kittikā bhavanti, tāhi bhinnā puggalā ca kittikāti vicāraṇāya sambhavato tā paṭipadā, te ca puggalā ettakāti gaṇanato dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha catasso paṭipadā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.
其中,所谓“于彼处”,是指那些略说即知者等人。哪些人依何种行道而有差别——那些行道有四种,那些人亦有四种,应作如此连结。是哪四种?苦行道迟通达、苦行道速通达、乐行道迟通达、乐行道速通达,此为四种。是哪四种人?渴爱行者而迟钝者、渴爱行者而敏锐者、见行者而迟钝者、见行者而敏锐者,此为四种。显示巴利原文
Tattha tatthāti tesu ugghaṭitaññuādīsu puggalesu. Ye puggalā yāhi paṭipadāhi bhinnā, tā paṭipadā catasso bhavanti, te ca puggalā cattāroti yojanā kātabbā. Katamā catasso? Dukkhāpaṭipadā dandhābhiññā, dukkhāpaṭipadā khippābhiññā, sukhāpaṭipadā dandhābhiññā, sukhāpaṭipadā khippābhiññā cāti catasso. Katame cattāro? Taṇhācarito mando puggalo, taṇhācarito udatto puggalo, diṭṭhicarito mando puggalo, diṭṭhicarito udatto puggalo cāti cattāro.
因了知“依行道与通达所作的区分,即是不离于依行道所作的区分”这一道理,故在内心作意后,不说“四种行道通达”,而说“四种行道”。然而,这些区分亦依止而别,亦依观而别。如何依止而别?于地遍等业处中,从最初作意“地、地”等转起时起,乃至禅那的近行生起之间,这期间转起的慧,称为止修习的“行道”。然而,从近行开始,直至安止之间转起的慧,则称为“通达”,因为这是从下位的慧而证得殊胜的慧故。显示巴利原文
Paṭipadābhiññāhi kato vibhāgopi paṭipadāhi kato vibhāgo nāma hoti avinābhāvatoti manasi katvā ‘‘catasso paṭipadābhiññā’’ti avatvā ‘‘catasso paṭipadā’’ti vuttā. Tā panetā samathavasenāpi bhinnā, vipassanāvasenāpi bhinnā. Kathaṃ samathavasena? Pathavīkasiṇādīsu sabbapaṭhamaṃ ‘‘pathavī pathavī’’tiādinā pavattamanasikārato paṭṭhāya yāva jhānassa upacāraṃ uppajjati, tāva pavattā paññā samathabhāvanā ‘‘paṭipadā’’ti vuccati. Upacārato pana paṭṭhāya yāva appanā, tāva pavattā paññā ‘‘abhiññā’’ti vuccati heṭṭhimapaññāto adhigatapaññābhāvato.
且此行道对于某些人为苦、为困难,这是因为其执取五盖等敌对法的现行;对于另一些人,则因无这些障碍之故,为乐、为不困难。通达对于某些人迟缓、非迅速转起,这是因为其智不清晰;对于另一些人则迅速、速疾转起,这是因为其智清晰。显示巴利原文
Sā ca paṭipadā kassaci dukkhā kicchā hoti nīvaraṇādipaccanīkadhammasamudācāraggahaṇatāya, kassaci tadabhāvato sukhā akicchā hoti, abhiññāpi kassaci dandhā asīghappavatti hoti avisadañāṇatāya, kassaci khippā sīghappavatti hoti visadañāṇatāyāti.
如何依观而分?有人依止于色、无色而着手修观,先把握了四大之后,进而把握所造色,也把握无色;然而,在把握色与无色的过程中,他艰难、困苦、疲惫方能把握,这便名为苦行道。对于这位已把握色与无色者,在安住于观的阶段,道现起迟缓,故名为迟通达。与上述相反的另外两种,则依此类推而成立。然而,在此处应知,是唯依观而区分行道与通达,因为此为现观增上之故。论中说:“如此,为了将依人而示的说法予以区分,便以行道区分而分别显示那些人”,故说“四种行道”等。应依所述之理趣,了知其中的连接之理。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ vipassanāvasena? Yo rūpārūpamukhena vipassanaṃ abhinivisanto cattāri mahābhūtāni pariggahetvā upādārūpaṃ pariggaṇhāti, arūpaṃ pariggaṇhāti, rūpārūpaṃ pana pariggaṇhanto dukkhena kasirena kilamanto pariggahaetauṃ sakkoti, tassa dukkhāpaṭipadā nāma hoti. Pariggahitarūpārūpassa vipassanāparivāse maggapātubhāvadandhatāya dandhābhiññā nāma hoti. Tabbipariyāyena itarā dve honti. Vipassanāvasena pana bhinnāyeva paṭipadābhiññāyo idha daṭṭhabbā abhisamayādhikārattā, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ yesaṃ puggalānaṃ vasena desanāvibhāgo dassito, te puggale paṭipadāvibhāgena vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘catasso paṭipadā’tiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 6) vuttaṃ. Yojanānayo vuttanayānusāreneva veditabbo.
以四种行道与通达,这四种人是否都无有确定地从轮回之苦中出离呢?还是确定地“依此种行道与通达,此人得以出离;依彼种行道与通达,此人得以出离”而出离呢?由于有此思择的余地,为了确定地显示:“此人以这些为支持、得亲依止缘已,依此种行道与通达而从轮回之苦出离”,故有“渴爱行者迟钝通达”等说。显示巴利原文
Catūhi paṭipadābhiññāhi cattāro puggalā sabbeva aniyamato vaṭṭadukkhato kiṃ nu kho niyyanti, udāhu ‘‘imāya paṭipadābhiññāya ayaṃ puggalo niyyāti, imāya paṭipadābhiññāya ayaṃ puggalo niyyātī’’ti niyamato ca niyyātīti vicāraṇāya sambhavato ‘‘ayaṃ puggalo imehi nissayehi upanissayapaccayaṃ labhitvā imāya paṭipadābhiññāya vaṭṭadukkhato niyyātī’’ti niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘taṇhācarito mando’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
其中,渴爱行者中的迟钝人,以念处为支持、得亲依止缘已,以念根与念根增上的圣道,依苦行道与迟通达而从轮回之苦出离;渴爱行者中的敏锐人,以禅那为支持、得亲依止缘已,以定根与定根增上的圣道,依苦行道与速通达而从轮回之苦出离;见行者中的迟钝人,以正勤为支持、得亲依止缘已,以精进根与精进根增上的圣道,依乐行道与迟通达而从轮回之苦出离;见行者中的敏锐人,以谛为支持、得亲依止缘已,以慧根与慧根增上的圣道,依乐行道与速通达而从轮回之苦出离。应作如此连接。而在注释书中——显示巴利原文
Tattha taṇhācarito mando puggalo satipaṭṭhānehi nissayehi upanissayapaccayaṃ labhitvā satindriyena satindriyādhikena ariyamaggena dukkhāpaṭipadādandhābhiññāya vaṭṭadukkhato niyyāti, taṇhācarito udatto puggalo jhānehi nissayehi upanissayapaccayaṃ labhitvā samādhindriyena samādhindriyādhikena ariyamaggena dukkhāpaṭipadākhippābhiññāya vaṭṭadukkhato niyyāti , diṭṭhicarito mando puggalo sammappadhānehi nissayehi upanissayapaccayaṃ labhitvā vīriyindriyena vīriyindriyādhikena ariyamaggena sukhāpaṭipadādandhābhiññāya vaṭṭadukkhato niyyāti, diṭṭhicarito udatto puggalo saccehi nissayehi upanissayapaccayaṃ labhitvā paññindriyena paññindriyādhikena ariyamaggena sukhāpaṭipadākhippābhiññāya vaṭṭadukkhato niyyātīti yojanā kātabbā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
所谓四种人,即依前述行道区分而有的四种行道者。而为了结合因、方便、果来显示那行道的区分,故说「渴爱行者」等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Cattāro puggalāti yathāvuttapaṭipadāvibhāgeneva cattāro paṭipannakapuggalā, taṃ pana paṭipadāvibhāgaṃ saddhiṃ hetupāyaphalehi dassetuṃ ‘taṇhācarito’tiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 6) –
其中,渴爱行者:此人的行是由渴爱所生,故称渴爱行者。迟钝:因为具足迟钝无明,故称迟钝,即痴增盛之人。敏锐:意为敏锐,即具有广大智慧。给予广大果故,称为「udo」;那是什么?即择法;于自身中生起故,称为「atto」;此人兼具「udo」与「atto」,故称「udatto」。应作如此词义解释。显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ. Tattha taṇhācaritoti taṇhāya nibbattitaṃ caritaṃ etassa puggalassāti taṇhācarito. Mandoti mandiyāya avijjāya samannāgatoti mando, mohādhikapuggalo. Udattoti udaatto, uḷārapaññoti attho. Uḷāraṃ phalaṃ detīti udo, ko so? Pavicayo, attani nibbattoti atto, udo atto yassa puggalassāti udattoti vacanattho kātabbo.
第一种行道的因是渴爱行与钝慧,其方便为念根;一切行道的果都是出离。第二种行道的因是渴爱行与利慧,其方便为精进根。第三种行道的因是见行与钝慧,其方便为定根。第四种行道的因是见行与利慧,其方便为慧根。应当这样来观察因、方便与果。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamāya paṭipadāya hetu nāma taṇhācaritatā, mandapaññatā ca, upāyo satindriyaṃ, sabbāsampi phalaṃ niyyānameva. Dutiyāya paṭipadāya hetu nāma taṇhācaritatā, udattapaññatā ca, upāyo vīriyindriyaṃ. Tatiyāya paṭipadāya hetu nāma diṭṭhicaritatā, mandapaññatā ca, upāyo samādhindriyaṃ. Catutthiyā paṭipadāya hetu nāma diṭṭhicaritatā, udattapaññatā ca, upāyo paññindriyanti hetupāyaphalāni daṭṭhabbāni.
于中,见行而利慧的补特伽罗,名为顿悟者;见行而钝慧者,及爱行而利慧者,名为广解者;爱行而钝慧的补特伽罗,名为可引导者。因此,世尊依“于中,世尊为顿悟者开示出离”等方式,通过显示顿悟者等三种所化众的差别,开示出离,并显示了“开示过患与出离”、“开示乐味、过患与出离”等说法的类别。应知,以“四种修行方式”等,显示了修行方式的差别,进而显示了分为四类的爱行钝慧者、爱行利慧者、见行钝慧者、见行利慧者这四种补特伽罗。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca diṭṭhicarito udatto puggalo ugghaṭitaññū nāma, diṭṭhicarito mando ceva taṇhācarito udatto ca vipañcitaññū nāma, taṇhācarito mando puggalo neyyo nāma, tasmā ‘‘tattha bhagavā ugghaṭitaññussa puggalassa nissaraṇaṃ desayatī’’tiādinā nayena ugghaṭitaññuādiveneyyattayassa bhedadassanena nissaraṇaṃ desayati, ‘‘ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca desayati, assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca desayatī’’ti desanāvibhāgo dassito. ‘‘Tattha catasso paṭipadā’’tiādinā paṭipadābhedadassanena ‘‘taṇhācarito mando puggalo, taṇhācarito udatto puggalo, diṭṭhicarito mando puggalo, diṭṭhicarito udatto puggalo’’ti catudhā bhinnaṃ taṇhācaritamandādikaṃ puggalacatukkaṃ dassitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
现在,为依第二种义理联结,显示由四种修行证知而分为四类的爱行钝慧等四种补特伽罗,故说“两种爱行者”等。其中,由于爱是定的对立面,两种爱行者——钝慧与利慧的补特伽罗,获得以止为先导的观的亲依止后,为离贪而以道慧出离,成就心解脱的有学果位。出离必定由与正见俱行的正定而生,而非仅由正定。因此,两种见行者——钝慧与利慧的补特伽罗,获得以观为先导的止,为离无明而以道慧出离,成就慧解脱的无学果位。如此,四种补特伽罗唯成两种。显示巴利原文
Idāni catūhi paṭipadābhiññāhi catudhā bhinnaṃ taṇhācaritamandacatukkaṃ atthanayayojanāya dutiyāya visayaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ubho taṇhācaritā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha taṇhāya samādhipaṭipakkhattā taṇhācaritā mandaudattā ubho puggalā samathapubbaṅgamāya vipassanāya upanissayaṃ labhitvā rāgavirāgāya maggapaññāya niyyanti cetovimuttiyā sekkhaphalabhāvāya. Sammādiṭṭhisahiteneva sammāsamādhinā niyyānaṃ bhavati, na sammāsamādhinā eva, tasmā diṭṭhicaritā mandaudattā ubho puggalā vipassanāpubbaṅgamena samathena avijjāvirāgāya maggapaññāya niyyanti paññāvimuttiyā asekkhaphalabhāvāyāti cattāropi puggalā duvidhāyeva bhavantīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“为了离贪”:“贪”者,染著之义;依此而离染,故名“离”;贪之离,名“离贪”,即以此离贪。心:就心之分类而言,定亦称为心,如“应修习心与慧”(相应部1.23, 192;弥兰陀问经2.1.9)。以寂止之力,从对立面解脱,故为解脱;以心、以定而解脱,故为心解脱;或心即是解脱,即心解脱,此指不还果定。因为不还果补特伽罗于定中圆满,故以心解脱而出离。“为了离无明”:“无明”者,于不应知的身恶行等却知,或于应知的身善行等却不知,依词源解释。依此离染,故为离;无明之离,名“离无明”,即以此离无明。以种种方式了知,故为慧;解脱,故为解脱;以慧而解脱,故为慧解脱;或慧即是解脱,即慧解脱,此指阿罗汉果慧,以此慧解脱。显示巴利原文
Rāgavirāgāyāti rañjatīti rāgo, so virajjati etāyāti virāgā, rāgassa virāgā rāgavirāgā, tāya rāgavirāgāya. Cetoti cittappabhedena ca samādhi vuccati yathā ‘‘cittaṃ paññañca bhāvaya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192; mi. pa. 2.1.9.). Paṭippassaddhivasena paṭipakkhato vimuccatīti vimutti, cetasā cittena samādhinā vimuccatīti cetovimutti, ceto eva vā vimutti cetovimutti, anāgāmiphalasamādhi. Anāgāmipuggalo hi samādhismiṃ paripūrakāritāya cetovimuttiyā niyyāti. Avijjāvirāgāyāti avindiyaṃ kāyaduccaritādiṃ vindatīti avijjā, vindiyaṃ vā kāyasucaritādiṃ na vindatīti avijjā niruttinayena. Virajjati etāyāti virāgā, avijjāya virāgā avijjāvirāgā, tāya avijjāvirāgāya. Pakārehi jānātīti paññā, vimuccatīti vimutti, paññāya vimuccatīti paññāvimutti, paññā eva vā vimutti paññāvimutti, arahattaphalapaññā, tāya paññāvimuttiyā.
因为应当说明“那些补特伽罗中,哪些应以何种义理来引导”,故说“其中,那些以止为先导者”等句。其中,“其中”是指:在以“两种贪行者”等方式所分别的补特伽罗中,那两种贪行者中钝慧与利慧的补特伽罗,以止……乃至……而出离,这两类贪行者钝慧与利慧的补特伽罗,应以喜旋理来引导、度化、接引;那两种见行者中钝慧与利慧的补特伽罗,以观……乃至……以止而出离,这两类见行者钝慧与利慧的补特伽罗,应以狮子游戏理来引导、度化、接引。这便是其义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tesu katame puggalā kena atthanayena hātabbā’’ti vattabbato ‘‘tattha ye samathapubbaṅgamāhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu ‘‘ubho taṇhācaritā’’tiādinā vibhattesu puggalesu ye ubho taṇhācaritā mandaudattā puggalā samatha…pe… niyyanti, te ubho taṇhācaritā mandaudattā puggalā nandiyāvaṭṭena nayena hātabbā gametabbā netabbā. Ye ubho diṭṭhicaritā mandaudattā puggalā vipassanā…pe… samathena niyyanti, te ubho diṭṭhicaritā mandaudattā puggalā sīhavikkīḷitena nayena hātabbā gametabbā netabbāti attho.
7 通过“其中,四种通行”等教说理趣,依苦通行等的差别,分别了贪行者钝慧等不同补特伽罗,此已为我们所了知。因为应当问:“在如此分别之后,这教说理趣当于何处、以何种方式存在于应加注释的法中?”故说“此理趣存在于何处”等句。在九支具足的导师所应开示的法中,于应加注释的法里,分别了思所成等、闻所成等三种慧;依此三种慧,复又分别了顿悟者等三种补特伽罗。应如此了知:以此分别的方式,这教说理趣便存在于导师所应开示的法中。显示巴利原文
7. ‘‘Tattha catasso paṭipadā’’tiādinā desanāhārena dukkhāpaṭipadābhedena taṇhācaritamandādibhedo puggalo vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘tassa vibhattānantaraṃ svāyaṃ desanāhāro kattha saṃvaṇṇetabbe dhamme kenaci ākārena sambhavatī’’ti pucchitabbabhāvato ‘‘svāyaṃ hāro kattha sambhavatī’’tiādimāha. Navamakkhaṇasampannassa satthā yaṃ dhammaṃ deseti, tasmiṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbe dhamme yā vīmaṃsādikā sutamayādikā tisso paññā vibhattā, tāhi paññāhi ye ugghaṭitaññuādayo tayo puggalā vibhattā, iti vibhattākārena ayaṃ desanāhāro satthārā desetabbe dhamme sambhavatīti daṭṭhabbo.
在此,所谓‘此理趣’,即通过教法的分类、修行方式的区分,展示了应受教化众生的类别,这便是‘教法理趣’。‘在何处存在’是指在何处,由于缺乏注释,对于应注释的法,它得以存在。‘对于谁’是指那位应受教化者,他已从边地等八种无暇中解脱,并具备听闻、忆持等圆满条件,对于这样的应受教化者。‘导师’是指教导、训诫包括诸天在内的世间者,故称导师。‘法’是指所教导的、应注释的法。‘教导’是指通过简略与详细的方式宣说。‘某位’是指在世尊的弟子中,能够如此教导法的弟子。‘应受尊敬者’是指具备戒、闻、施等功德殊胜、应受恭敬、为人所信赖的、值得相信其言语者。‘同梵行者’是指共同、或一同修习世尊教法的梵行,故称同梵行者。‘获得净信’是指对于导师生起‘教导法的导师是正等正觉者’的净信,对于所教导的法生起‘此法确实是善说,有义有利,文句具足,完全圆满,完全清净,能带来利益、带来安乐、带来幸福,能产生禅那、道、果,且应为我们所信受’的不动净信,并在自相续中反复生起信受;同样,对于说法者弟子生起‘这位说法弟子确实有能力以简略或详细方式教导法,是应受尊敬的同梵行者,应受恭敬,值得相信其言语’的净信,对于由弟子所教导的法生起‘由如此弟子所教导的法,是有义有利,文句具足,完全圆满,完全清净,能带来利益、带来安乐、带来幸福,能产生禅那、道、果,且应为我们所信受’的净信,并在自相续中反复生起信受,这是其含义。显示巴利原文
Tattha svāyaṃ hāroti desanāhārena paṭipadāvibhāgena veneyyapuggalavibhāgo dassito, so ayaṃ desanāhāro. Kattha sambhavatīti kattha saṃvaṇṇetabbe dhamme saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena sambhavatīti. Yassāti yo so veneyyo paccantajādīhi aṭṭhahi akkhaṇehi vimutto, savanadhāraṇādīhi ca sampattīhi samannāgato, tassa veneyyassa. Satthāti sadevakaṃ lokaṃ sāsati anusāsatīti satthā. Dhammanti desitaṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbaṃ dhammaṃ. Desayatīti saṅkhepanayavitthāranayehi bhāsati. Aññataroti bhagavato sāvakesu evaṃ dhammaṃ desetuṃ samattho sāvako. Garuṭṭhāniyoti gāravassa ṭhānabhūtehi sīlasutacāgādiguṇavisesehi yutto mānito saddahitabbavacano. Sabrahmacārīti samaṃ, saha vā brahmaṃ satthusāsanaṃ carati paṭipajjatīti sabrahmacārī. Saddhaṃ labhati ‘‘yo satthā dhammaṃ deseti, so satthā sammāsambuddho hotī’’ti satthari, ‘‘svākkhāto vatāyaṃ dhammo sāttho sabyañjano ekantaparipuṇṇo ekantaparisuddho atthāvaho hitāvaho sukhāvaho jhānamaggaphalanibbattako, amhehi ca saddahitabbo’’ti desite dhamme ca acalasaddhaṃ labhati, saddahanaṃ attano santāne punappunaṃ uppādeti. Tathā ‘‘yo sāvako dhammaṃ deseti, so sāvako saṅkhepato vā vitthārato vā dhammaṃ desetuṃ samattho vata garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī mānito saddahitabbavacano’’ti desake sāvake ca ‘‘tādisena sāvakena desito yo dhammo, so dhammo sāttho sabyañjano ekantaparipuṇṇo ekantaparisuddho atthāvaho hitāvaho sukhāvaho jhānamaggaphalanibbattako, amhehi ca saddahitabbo’’ti sāvakena desitadhamme ca saddhaṃ saddahanaṃ attano santāne punappunaṃ uppādetīti attho.
此处,对于那位堪受教化、对导师所教导的法及弟子所教导的法生起净信者,他所作的审察,审察时的策励,策励时的衡量,衡量时的观照——这种以审察等为始、随信而转的智慧,即名为‘闻所成慧’。其中,‘审察’即审察,是对圣典文句与义理的审察;或者,审察是指以另一文句审察此文句、以另一义理审察此义理的思择智慧。同样地,对于策励等词,也应理解为状态成就与作者成就的解说。策励是指以策励为助缘、成就法的忆持与熟习的智慧,而非精进。在此,仅仅停留在听闻阶段、不进行审察等便停止的,不成为闻所成慧;听闻并审察后,未达到策励等便停止的;听闻、审察并策励后,未达到衡量等便停止的;听闻、审察、策励并衡量后,未达到观照便停止的,这些智慧也不应视为闻所成慧。然而,听闻后生起净信者,进行审察;审察者,进行策励;策励者,进行衡量;衡量者,进行观照,这方才应视为名为‘闻所成慧’的智慧。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti tasmiṃ saddahitabbe satthārā desitadhamme ceva sāvakena desitadhamme ca saddahantassa veneyyassa yā vīmaṃsā, vīmaṃsantassa yā ussāhanā, ussahantassa yā tulanā, tulayantassa yā upaparikkhā, sā ayaṃ vīmaṃsādikā paññā saddhānusārena pavattanato sutamayī paññā nāma. Tattha vīmaṃsanaṃ vimaṃsā, pāḷiyā, pāḷiatthassa ca vīmaṃsā. Vīmaṃsatīti vā vīmaṃsā, padaṃ padantarena, padatthaṃ padatthantarena vicāraṇakā paññā. Yathā cettha, evaṃ ussāhanādīsupi bhāvasādhanakattusādhanāni kātabbāni. Ussāhanā ca ussāhena upatthambhikā dhammassa dhāraṇaparicayasādhikā paññā ca, na vīriyaṃ, ettha ca yā sutamatteyeva pavattā, vīmaṃsādibhāvaṃ appattā nivattā, sā sutamayī paññā na hoti. Yā ca sutvā vīmaṃsitvā ussāhanādibhāvaṃ appattā nivattā, yā ca sutvā vīmaṃsitvā ussahitvā tulanādibhāvaṃ appattā nivattā, yā ca sutvā vīmaṃsitvā ussahitvā tulayitvā upaparikkhanabhāvaṃ appattā nivattā, sāpi paññā na sutamayī paññā hotīti daṭṭhabbā. Yā pana sutvā saddahantassa vīmaṃsā, vīmaṃsantassa ussāhanā, ussahantassa tulanā, tulayantassa upaparikkhā hoti, ayaṃ sutamayī paññā nāma hotīti daṭṭhabbā.
闻所成慧已由阿阇梨分别,我们也已了知;由于应说‘什么是思所成慧’,故在分别闻所成慧之后,为分别思所成慧,而说‘同样,以闻为依止’等语。其中,‘闻’即所听闻的教法,故称闻;或指听闻教法这一行为,故称闻,闻有两种。‘以依止’是指以之为近依止,这是其含义。这里的‘以闻为依止’是具格语,表示如此这般的状态特征。在此,对于‘此离杀生等是戒,以戒行的意义为戒;此一境性是定,以等持的意义为定;这些地等所造色,以变坏的意义为色;这些触等,以朝向的意义为名;这些色等五法,以积聚的意义为蕴’等诸法的逼迫等自性进行审察的智慧,名为审察。对于这些戒、定等,询问‘戒,即于此安立,故称戒’等的词义后,对其共相、作用、现起、足处进行衡量的把握智慧,名为衡量。对于这些戒、定等法,不舍弃自性相,而以无常、苦、无我、变坏、有缘、有为等行相进行思惟、观照的智慧,则特别应视为名为‘观照’。由于闻所成慧依于对所闻法的忆持与熟习而转起,故不说‘策励’,犹如策励已生起;而思所成慧并非依于对所思维之法的忆持与熟习而转起。显示巴利原文
Sutamayī paññā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘katamā cintāmayī paññā’’ti vattabbabhāvato sutamayiyā paññāya vibhajanānantaraṃ cintāmayiṃ paññaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘tathā sutena nissayenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sutanti suyyate pariyattidhammoti suto, savanaṃ pariyattidhammassāti vā sutaṃ, duvidhampi sutaṃ. Nissayena upanissāyāti attho. Itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cetaṃ ‘‘sutena nissayenā’’ti karaṇavacanaṃ. Ettha pana ‘‘idaṃ pāṇātipātādiviramanaṃ sīlanaṭṭhena sīlaṃ, ayaṃ ekaggatā samādahanaṭṭhena samādhi , imāni bhūtupādāni ruppanaṭṭhena rūpāni, ime phassādayo namanaṭṭhena nāmāni, ime rūpādayo pañca dhammā rāsaṭṭhena khandhā’’ti tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ pīḷanādisabhāvassa vīmaṃsanābhūtā paññā vīmaṃsā nāma. Tesaṃyeva sīlasamādhiādīnaṃ sīlati patiṭṭhahati etthāti sīlantiādivacanatthaṃ pucchitvā sabhāgalakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānānaṃ tuletvā viya gahaṇapaññā tulanaṃ nāma. Tesaṃyeva sīlasamādhiādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ avijahitvā aniccatādukkhatādinamanaruppanādisappaccayasaṅkhatādiākāre vitakketvā upaparikkhaṇapaññā eva upaparikkhā nāmāti visesato daṭṭhabbo. Sutadhammassa dhāraṇaparicayavasena pavattanato sutamayī paññā ussāhanā jātā viya na cintāmayī paññā cintitassa dhāraṇaparicayavasena appavattanatoti ‘‘ussāhanā’’ti na vuttaṃ.
闻所成慧与思所成慧已由阿阇梨分别,我们也已了知;由于应说‘什么是修所成慧’,故在显示了作为因的闻所成慧与思所成慧之后,为分别作为果的修所成慧,而说‘以此二慧’等语。其中,‘以此二慧’是指作为因的闻所成慧与思所成慧。或者,瑜伽行者安住于闻所成慧、或思所成慧、或两者之中,便着手修习毗婆舍那。‘与如理作意相应者’是指对于色法、无色法,以把握等方式,对于诸行,以无常等方式,以如理作意正确、善加运用者。通过成就见清净、度疑清净、道非道智见清净、行道智见清净、智见清净,精勤修习毗婆舍那的瑜伽行者,在其相续中,于见地或修地生起的、以涅槃为所缘、名为智见清净的圣道智,这应视为修所成慧的含义。虽然初道智因初次见涅槃而说为‘见’,但因其依修习而转起,故应知为‘修所成慧’。‘见地’指初道与初果,其余则称为‘修地’。显示巴利原文
Sutamayī paññā ceva cintāmayī paññā ca ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘katamā bhāvanāmayī paññā’’ti vattabbabhāvato kāraṇabhūtānaṃ dvinnaṃ sutamayicintāmayipaññānaṃ dassanānantaraṃ phalabhūtaṃ bhāvanāmayiṃ paññaṃ vibhajanto ‘‘imāhi dvīhī’’tiādimāha. Tattha imāhi dvīhi paññāhīti sutamayicintāmayipaññāhi kāraṇabhūtāhi. Sutamayipaññāya vā cintāmayipaññāya vā ubhayattha vā ṭhitoyeva yogāvacaro vipassanaṃ ārabhatīti. Manasikārasampayuttassāti rūpārūpesu pariggahādivasena saṅkhāresu aniccatādivasena manasikārena sammā pakārehi yuttappayuttassa. Diṭṭhivisuddhikaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhimaggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi- paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhisampādanena vipassanaṃ ussukkantassa yogāvacarassa santāne ñāṇadassanavisuddhisaṅkhātaṃ yaṃ ariyamaggañāṇaṃ nibbānārammaṇadassanabhūmiyaṃ vā bhāvanābhūmiyaṃ vā uppajjati, ayaṃ bhāvanāmayī paññāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Yadipi paṭhamamaggañāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanato ‘‘dassana’’nti vuttaṃ, bhāvanāvasena pana pavattanato ‘‘bhāvanāmayī paññā’’ti veditabbaṃ. Dassanabhūmīti paṭhamamaggaphalāni, sesāni ‘‘bhāvanābhūmī’’ti vuccanti.
8 我们的阿阇梨已通过“若是导师”等语,分别了闻所成慧等。如此,若无闻,则不应有名为思所成慧的智慧;然而,对于大菩萨们,纵使无闻,思所成慧也必定存在。考虑到这一质难,为了将其含摄并以另一种方式加以分别,而说“从他人音声”等。显示巴利原文
8. Amhākācariya tumhehi ‘‘yassa satthā vā’’tiādinā sutamayipaññādikā vibhattā, evaṃ sati sutena vinā cintāmayī paññā nāma na bhaveyya, mahābodhisattānaṃ pana sutena vinā cintāmayī paññā hotvevāti codanaṃ manasi katvā tasmiṃ saṅgahetvā pakārantarena vibhajituṃ ‘‘paratoghosā’’tiādimāha.
其中,“从他闻”:以从他处生起的说法音声为缘,故称“从他闻”。“自内所起”:各自独立在自己的内心中生起。“如理作意”:对于应思惟的色等法,以把握其变坏、弯曲等自性的方式而生起作意,这称为思所成慧。依此,声闻弟子也被一般地包含在内;然而,由于此处是仅就“略解知者”等而说,故声闻弟子在此被特别纳入,因此前一种解释更为合理。“从他”:以从说法者生起的说法音声为因,所生起的智慧;“自内所起”及以如理作意为因,所生起的智慧,此因依修习而转起,故称修所成慧。依此,声闻弟子也被一般地包含在内;然而,由于此处是仅就“略解知者”等而说,故声闻弟子在此被特别纳入,因此前一种解释更为合理。将“从他”及“自内所起”等因所生之慧,依修习而转起者称为修所成慧,如此分别之后,应由智者了知。欲详细了知深义者,应依《导论注》中“依此行道分别”等注疏语而了知。显示巴利原文
Tattha paratoghosāti parato pavatto desanāghoso paccayo etissāti paratoghosā. Paccattasamuṭṭhitāti pati visuṃ attaniyeva samuṭṭhitā. Yonisomanasikārāti tesaṃ tesaṃ cintetabbānaṃ rūpādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ ruppananamanādisabhāvapariggaṇhanādinā upāyena pavattamanasikārā cintāmayī paññā nāma, iminā sāvakāpi sāmaññato gahitā, tathāpi ugghaṭitaññuādīnaṃyeva vuttattā sāvakā idha gahitā, tasmā purimanayo yuttataro. Paratoti dhammadesakato pavattena dhammadesanāghosena hetunā yaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, paccattasamuṭṭhitena, yonisomanasikārena ca hetunā yaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, ayaṃ bhāvanāvasena pavattanato bhāvanāmayī paññā nāma, iminā sāvakāpi sāmaññato gahitā, tathāpi ugghaṭitaññuādīnaṃyeva vuttattā sāvakā idha gahitā, tasmā purimanayo yuttataro. Paratoti dhammadesakato pavattena dhammadesanāghosena hetunā yaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, paccattasamuṭṭhitena, yonisomanasikārena ca hetunā yaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, ayaṃ bhāvanāvasena pavattanato bhāvanāmayī paññā nāmāti vibhajitvā paṇḍitehi ñeyyāti vitthārena gambhīratthaṃ ñātuṃ icchantehi ‘‘evaṃ paṭipadāvibhāgenā’’tiādinā (netti. aṭṭha. 9) aṭṭhakathāvacanena jānitabbo.
闻所成慧等三种慧,阿阇梨已以种种方法分别,我们也已了知。为了通过行道慧的差别来分别补特伽罗,即:“在这些慧中,具备一或二慧者,名为某补特伽罗;一慧也无者,名为某补特伽罗”,故说“若具这些”等语,以回答“具有此慧或这些慧者,名为某补特伽罗;无有者,名为某补特伽罗”这样的问题。显示巴利原文
Sutamayipaññādikā tisso paññā ācariyena nānānayehi vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘tāsu yassa ekā vā dve vā paññā atthi, so puggalo konāmo, yassa ekāpi natthi, so puggalo konāmo’’ti pucchitabbabhāvato yassa ayaṃ paññā, imā vā atthi, so puggalo itthannāmo, yassa natthi, so puggalo itthannāmoti paṭipadāpaññāppabhedena puggalaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘yassa imā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
其中,若极利根者具备闻所成慧与思所成慧两种智慧,仅凭略说法要便能明了,名为略解知者。若非极利根者,通过略说与广说而具备闻所成慧,无思所成慧,依略说与广说而了知,名为广解知者。若是钝根者,通过略说与广说既不具闻所成慧,亦不具思所成慧,须靠略说、广说及反复解说而了知,直至被引导至详尽无余的阐述,名为可引导者。而在注疏中说:“今为显示这些慧的作用,结合所化众生的差别而说‘若具’等语。”显示巴利原文
Tattha yassa atitikkhapaññassa sutamayī paññā ceva cintāmayī paññā ca imā dve paññā atthi, ayaṃ atitikkhapañño uddesamatteneva jānanato ugghaṭitaññū nāma. Yassa nātitikkhapaññassa uddesaniddesehi sutamayī paññā atthi, cintāmayī paññā natthi, ayaṃ nātitikkhapañño uddesaniddesehi jānanato vipañcitaññū nāma. Yassa mandapaññassa uddesaniddesehi neva sutamayī paññā atthi, na cintāmayī paññā ca, ayaṃ mandapañño uddesaniddesapaṭiniddesehi jānanato niravasesavitthāradesanāya netabbato neyyo nāmāti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘idāni yadatthaṃ imā paññā uddhaṭā, tameva veneyyapuggalavibhāgaṃ yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘yassā’tiādi vutta’’ntiādi (netti. aṭṭha. 8) vuttaṃ.
9 第九节:“其中,世尊以‘略解知者’等”阐明教说,“其中,四种行道”等依行道分别,“此即彼引导”等依智分别,由此将教说分类为三种所化众生。这已由阿阇梨分别,我们也已了知。为了回答这一问题——“将教说引导与此教说巴利结合时,先前以‘诸比丘,我将为你们说法’等作为教说引导之境而安立的这巴利教说,在由教说引导所确定的味等义中,是为何义而宣说?”——故以“此教说此义”决定而显示,从而开始“此即法说”等语。显示巴利原文
9. ‘‘Tattha bhagavā ugghaṭitaññussā’’tiādinā desanaṃ vibhāveti, ‘‘tattha catasso paṭipadā’’tiādinā paṭipadāvibhāgehi, ‘‘svāyaṃ hāro’’tiādinā ñāṇavibhāgehi ca desanābhājanaṃ veneyyattayaṃ ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘yāya desanāpāḷiyā desanāhāraṃ yojetuṃ pubbe ‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’tiādinā desanāhārassa visayabhāvena yā pāḷidesanā nikkhittā, sā pāḷidesanā desanāhārena niddhāritesu assādādīsu atthesu kimatthaṃ desayatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘imaṃ atthaṃ desayatī’’ti niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘sāyaṃ dhammadesanā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.
其中,“此即法说”是指:先前作为教说引导之境而安立的、初善等法说,这就是“此即法说”。为欲阐明“此即法说在味等义中,是为何义而说”,提问之后答道:“说四圣谛”。为显示其自相,而说“苦、集、灭、道”。因为它们具有转起、令转起、还灭、还灭方便之体性,且无颠倒,故称为“谛”。显示巴利原文
Tattha sāyaṃ dhammadesanāti yā dhammadesanā ādikalyāṇādikā pubbe desanāhārassa visayabhāvena nikkhittā, sāyaṃ dhammadesanā assādādīsu kimatthaṃ desayatīti kathetukāmatāya pucchati, pucchitvā ‘‘cattāri saccāni desayatī’’ti vissajjeti, tāni sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘dukkhaṃ samudayaṃ nirodhaṃ magga’’nti vuttaṃ. Pavattipavattakanivattinivattanupāyabhāvena aviparītabhāvato ‘‘saccānī’’ti vuttāni.
若在某一教说中,诸谛已通过教说引导加以确定,那么说这一教说宣说四圣谛,便是合理的。若在某一教说中,确定了味等,便不能说这一教说宣说四圣谛。而前文中已确定了味等,因此,考虑到“亦应说‘味等’”这一质难,才说“过患与果是苦”等语。依教说引导的注释方法,在教说中所确定的过患与果即是苦谛,味是集谛,出离是灭谛,方便与教令是道谛,因此,“宣说四圣谛”是必定应说的。显示巴利原文
Yassaṃ desanāyaṃ saccāni desanāhārena niddhāritāni, sā desanā cattāri saccāni desayatīti yuttaṃ hotu. Yassaṃ desanāyaṃ assādādayo niddhāritā, sā desanā cattāri saccāni desayatīti na sakkā vattuṃ. Heṭṭhā ca assādādayo niddhāritā, tasmā ‘‘assādādayo’’tipi vattabbanti codanaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘ādīnavo phalañca dukkha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Desanāhārena saṃvaṇṇanānayena desanāyaṃ niddhārito ādīnavo ceva phalañca dukkhasaccaṃ hoti, assādo samudayasaccaṃ, nissaraṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, upāyo ceva āṇatti ca maggasaccaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘cattāri saccāni desayatī’’ti vattabbamevāti.
渴爱所系的三地诸法是苦,而这些法因无常等而受逼迫,故正是过患。“果”指的是教说之果,是世间的,并非出世间的,因此必定应说为“苦”。“味”因执取了渴爱之味,故应说“味是集”。味的一部分即是苦,味的一部分既是苦亦是集。与观相应的圣道及世尊的教令,因是证得教说之果的方便,故说“方便与教令是道”,而出离的一部分也应视为道。为回答“此四圣谛,哪一教说特别宣说?”这一问题,故以“此四圣谛,此即是法轮”确定而显示其特别之处。应作如此连结:此所谓法轮,正是特别宣说此四圣谛。显示巴利原文
Taṇhāvajjā tebhūmakadhammā dukkhaṃ, te ca aniccādīhi pīḷitattā ādīnavāyeva. Phalanti desanāya phalaṃ lokiyaṃ, na lokuttaraṃ, tasmā dukkhanti vattabbameva. Assādoti taṇhāssādassa gahitattā ‘‘assādo samudayo’’ti ca vattabbaṃ. Assādekadeso dukkhameva, assādekadeso dukkhañceva samudayo ca. Saha vipassanāya ariyamaggo ca bhagavato āṇatti ca desanāya phalādhigamassa upāyabhāvato ‘‘upāyo, āṇatti ca maggo’’ti vuttaṃ, nissaraṇekadesopi maggoti daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Imāni cattāri saccāni yā desanā visesato desayati, katamā sā’’ti pucchitabbattā visesaṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘imāni cattāri saccāni idaṃ dhammacakka’’nti vuttaṃ. Idaṃ vuccamānaṃ dhammacakkaṃ imāni cattāri saccāni visesato desayatīti yojanā kātabbā.
对于“特别宣说此四圣谛的教说,世尊为何称之为法轮?”这一应问,故有“如世尊所说……”等语。在此,由“生也是苦”等语句,以渴爱为始的生等三地法,作为苦的所依,并以苦苦等性,故说为“苦”。应连结为“由我所转起”。“比丘”一词,是为了在听闻中生起热忱而作的称呼。“巴拉纳西”,即巴拉纳西城不远处。“仙人堕处”,即那些因寻求戒蕴等而被称为“仙人”的独觉佛们坠落之处。“鹿野苑”,即建于为鹿群施与无畏之处的林园。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yā desanā imāni cattāri saccāni visesato desayati, tassā desanāya dhammacakkabhāvaṃ kiṃ bhagavā āhā’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘yathāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘jātipi dukkhā’’tiādivacanato (mahāva. 14) taṇhāvajjaṃ jātiādikaṃ tebhūmakadhammajātaṃ dukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvena, dukkhadukkhādibhāvena ca ‘‘dukkha’’nti vuttaṃ. Meti mayā pavattitanti yojanā. Bhikkhaveti savane ussāhaṃ janetuṃ ālapati. Bārāṇasiyanti bārāṇasīnagarassa avidūre. Isipataneti sīlakkhandhādīnaṃ isanato gavesanato ‘‘isī’’ti voharitānaṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ patanaṭṭhāne. Migadāyeti migānaṃ abhayadānaṭṭhāne kārite assameva.
无上:因无更上者,故为无上、无等比。法轮:由念处等,以持自性等义而为法,由转起义而为轮,故称法轮。不可逆转:即不可遮止。为何?因为能生此法者世尊是法自在者、正自觉者,所生之法亦是无上,并由憍陈如等及十八俱胝梵天证得四圣谛故。若问“为何不可逆转?”便应说“由沙门……”等。此中,沙门即仅达出家者。婆罗门即种姓婆罗门。因为对于胜义沙门、婆罗门来说,若要遮止,连遮止的心念也不会生起。天指六欲界天。梵天指色界梵天。经文并非只说“由沙门……乃至……梵天”便止,而说“由任何人”,以此语摄尽其余刹帝利、居士等众。因此应知,刹帝利、婆罗门、居士、沙门、四大王天、三十三天、魔、梵天这八种众,皆不能遮止。世间即众生聚集之处,法轮所依之处。显示巴利原文
Anuttaranti uttaritarābhāvena anuttaraṃ anatisayaṃ. Dhammacakkanti satipaṭṭhānādike sabhāvadhāraṇādinā atthena dhammo ceva pavattanaṭṭhena cakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ. Appaṭivattiyanti appaṭisedhanīyaṃ. Kasmā? Janakassa bhagavato dhammissarattā sammāsambuddhattā, jaññassa ca anuttarattā koṇḍaññādīnañceva aṭṭhārasabrahmakoṭiyā ca catusaccapaṭivedhasādhanato ca. ‘‘Kena appaṭivattiya’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘samaṇena vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha samaṇenāti pabbajjamattūpagatena . Brāhmaṇenāti jātibrāhmaṇena. Paramatthānañhi samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ paṭisedhane cittuppādānuppajjanampi natthi. Devenāti chakāmāvacaradevena. Brahmunāti rūpabrahmā gahitā. ‘‘Samaṇena vā …pe… brahmunā’’ti ettakameva avatvā‘‘kenacī’’ti vuttavacanena avasesakhattiyagahapatiparisajanā saṅgahitā. Tasmā khattiyabrāhmaṇagahapatisamaṇacātumahārājikatāvatiṃsamārabrahmaparisā aṭṭhavidhāpi paṭisedhetuṃ asamatthāyevāti veditabbā. Lokasminti sattasamūhe dhammacakkādhāre.
“十二句经”:为随顺偈颂而分别法轮经中的句,故说“此中无量……”等。此中“此中”,是指法轮说法之中。并非说“无量字、无量句”,而是说“无量句、无量字”,以逆序语显示大多为句所摄。句、字、文,应视为语序的颠倒。此义即是:应说的相状、四圣谛义的宣说、阐明、阐明方式、施设方式,这是相状与相状的属格关系。开示方式,即应开示义之相状。此理于其余亦然。“如是亦”:即以此方式,应知这些苦是圣谛。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dvādasa padāni sutta’’nti gāthānurūpaṃ dhammacakkasutte padāni vibhajanto ‘‘tattha aparimāṇā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti dhammacakkadesanāyaṃ (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13 ādayo; paṭi. ma. 2.30). ‘‘Aparimāṇā akkharā aparimāṇā padā’’ti avatvā ‘‘aparimāṇā padā aparimāṇā akkharā’’ti uppaṭipāṭivacanehi yebhuyyena padasaṅgahitānīti dasseti. Padā, akkharā, byañjanāti ca liṅgavipallāsānīti daṭṭhabbāni. Etasseva atthassāti vattabbākārassa catusaccasaṅkhātassa atthasseva saṅkāsanā pakāsanā pakāsanākāro paññattākāroti ākāravantaākārasambandhe sāmivacanaṃ. Saṅkāsanākāroti ca saṅkāsanīyassa atthassa ākāro. Esa nayo sesesupi. Itipīti iti iminā pakārenapi, iminā pakārenapi idaṃ jātiādikaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti veditabbaṃ.
“此”,指欲爱等差别,这是渴爱。苦集,因为是苦生起之因,故为苦集。“此”,指从一切行出离,这是无为界。苦灭,因为是生老等苦的不生与灭的缘,故为苦灭。“此”,指正见等八支圣道。苦灭道,因为以已证的苦灭涅槃为所缘而行,又是趣向苦灭的道路,故为苦灭行道。其余如前所说。显示巴利原文
Ayanti kāmataṇhādibhedā ayaṃ taṇhā. Dukkhasamudayoti dukkhanibbattanassa hetubhāvato dukkhasamudayo. Ayanti sabbasaṅkhatato nissaṭā ayaṃ asaṅkhatā dhātu. Dukkhanirodhoti jātiādippabhedassa dukkhassa anuppādananirodhapaccayattā dukkhanirodho. Ayanti sammādiṭṭhādiko aṭṭhaṅgiko ariyo maggo. Dukkhanirodhabhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena gatattā, dukkhanirodhappattiyā paṭipadābhāvato ca dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
以“此中无量……”等语句,对字、句、义句进行分析后,为了显示它们之间以境与有境的关系相连结,而说“此中世尊以字开示……”等。又或因为可能有这样的思择:“世尊是以共通的字等开示或阐明,还是如理地开示、阐明?”为了确定并以境与有境的关系显示相连结,而说“此中世尊以字开示……”等。此处,为何说“以字开示”?难道不是以“苦谛”等句开示苦谛等义吗?的确如此。然而,通过把握作为句支分的字,也就把握了由字集合而成的句;而把握句时,苦谛等义的了解确实存在。如果这样,因以句便能成就,字是否不应一一把握?并非如此,因为对于苦谛等义的了解有殊胜的生起。由“du”字,把握了以多灾厄为依处的可厌之义;由“kha”字,把握了无恒常、净、乐、我性的空无之义,如是等殊胜的知解生起。因此,说“句义把握的殊胜安立生起”。在句的末端,因无别立的句末,以字略示之义,由句加以阐明,故说“以句阐明”。而在句的末端,开示、阐明之义被开显、被敞开,故说“以文开显”。又以种种方式分别句时,其义被分别,故说“以相状分别”。对于句的各部分及句支分,一一作语源分别时,其义被显了,故说“以语源显了”。以已作语源的句支分,依广说无余开显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha aparimāṇā’’tiādinā byañjanapadaatthapadāni vibhajitvā tesaṃ aññamaññaṃ visayivisayabhāvena sambandhabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāsetī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā bhagavā kiṃ sāmaññehi akkharādīhi saṅkāseti vā pakāseti vā, udāhu yathārahaṃ saṅkāseti pakāsetītiādivicāraṇāya sambhavato visayavisayibhāvena sambandhabhāvaṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāsetī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘akkharehi saṅkāsetī’’ti kasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ, nanu ‘‘dukkhasacca’’ntiādīsu padeneva dukkhasaccatthattādiko saṅkāsitabboti? Saccaṃ, padāvayavassa pana akkharassa gahaṇamukheneva akkharasamudāyassapi padassa gahaṇaṃ hoti, pade gahite ca dukkhasaccatthādikāvabodho hotveva, evaṃ sati padeneva sijjhanato akkharo visuṃ na gahetabboti? Na, dukkhasaccatthādikāvabodhassa visesuppattibhāvato. Du-iti akkharena hi anekupaddavādhiṭṭhānabhāvena kucchitattho gahito, kha-iti akkharena dhuvasubhasukhattabhāvavirahena tucchatthoti evamādikāvabodhassa visesuppatti bhavati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘padatthagahaṇassa visesādhānaṃ jāyatī’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 9). Padapariyosāne vākyapariyosānābhāvato akkharehi saṃkhittena dīpiyamāno attho padehi pakāsitovāti vuttaṃ ‘‘padehi pakāsetī’’ti. Vākyapariyosāne pana saṅkāsito pakāsito attho vivarito vivaṭo katovāti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Byañjanehi vivaratī’’ti. Pakārehi ca vākyabhede kate so attho vibhatto nāmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘ākārehi vibhajatī’’ti. Vākyāvayavānaṃ padānaṃ paccekaṃ nibbacanavibhāge kate so attho pākaṭo katovāti vuttaṃ ‘‘niruttīhi uttānīkarotī’’ti. Katanibbacanehi vākyāvayavehi vitthāravasena niravasesato desitehi veneyyasattānaṃ citte parisamantato tosanaṃ hoti, paññātejanañcāti āha ‘‘niddesehi paññapetī’’ti.
在“世尊以字宣说”等语句中,若将限定词用于“唯世尊”或“唯以字”,则其义应成“弟子不宣说,不以句等宣说”;然而,弟子确实宣说,也以句等宣说。那么应将限定词加于何处呢?应当加限定词为“世尊唯以字宣说”。如此,由弟子所宣说或由句等所宣说的意义便被涵盖,而且词义不属于字等的范畴亦得以成立。因此,在单一关联的经中,应只列出六种文句;在多种关联的经中,则应依关联的差别,分别列出各别的六种文句。显示巴利原文
‘‘Bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāsetī’’tiādīsu ‘‘bhagavā evā’’ti vā ‘‘akkharehi evā’’ti vā avadhāraṇe yojite ‘‘sāvako na saṅkāseti, padādīhi na saṅkāsetī’’ti attho bhaveyya, sāvako ca saṅkāseti, padādīhi ca saṅkāseti. Kattha avadhāraṇaṃ yojetabbanti ce? ‘‘Bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāsetiyevā’’ti avadhāraṇaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Evañhi sati sāvakena saṅkāsito vā padādīhi saṅkāsito vā attho saṅgahito hoti. Atthapadānañca akkharādinānāvisayatā siddhā hoti. Tena ekānusandhike sutte chaḷeva atthapadāni niddhāretabbāni, anekānusandhike sutte anusandhibhedena visuṃ visuṃ cha cha atthapadāni niddhāretabbāni.
因应当被问及:“在六种文句中,以何种文句成就何种作用?”为了决定并显示“以此成就此作用,以此成就此作用”,故说“此中,世尊以字与句开显”等。此中,“此中”指在字等文句之中。“开显”意为成就开显的作用。虽然仅仅是宣说本身便成就了开显的作用,但由于世尊是宣说的生起者,因此被称为成就开显的作用。其余之处亦应作如是理解。显示巴利原文
‘‘Chasu byañjanapadesu katamena byañjanapadena katamaṃ kiccaṃ sādhetī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iminā idaṃ kiccaṃ, iminā idaṃ kiccaṃ sādhetī’’ti niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha bhagavā akkharehi ca padehi ca ugghaṭetī’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti akkharādīsu byañjanapadesu. Ugghaṭetīti ugghaṭanakiccaṃ sādhetīti attho. Kiñcāpi desanāva ugghaṭanakiccaṃ sādheti, bhagavā pana desanājanakattā ugghaṭanakiccaṃ sādhetīti vuccati. Sesesupi evamattho daṭṭhabbo.
因为可能会这样问:“成就开显作用的仅是宣说本身,还是它也能成就分别与广说作用而成为宣说的生起者?抑或是成就各别作用的其他宣说?”为了确定并显示“这是成就各别作用的其他宣说”,所以说了“在此,开显等”。或者,因为可能会问:“什么是开显?什么是分别?什么是广说?”所以说了“在此,开显等”。这里的“在此”,是指在成就开显等作用的宣说中。“开显”指成就开显作用的宣说,即最初的宣说;“分别”指成就分别作用的宣说,即中间的宣说;“广说”指成就广说作用的宣说,即最后的宣说。应作如是理解。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ugghaṭanakiccasādhikā desanāyeva kiṃ vipañcanavitthāraṇakiccasādhikā desanājanakattā, udāhu visuṃ visuṃ kiccasādhikā aññā’’ti pucchitabbabhāvato visuṃ visuṃ kiccasādhikā aññā desanāti niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha ugghaṭanā ādī’’tiādimāha. Atha vā ‘‘katamā ugghaṭanā, katamā vipañcanā, katamā vitthāraṇā’’ti pucchitabbattā vuttaṃ ‘‘tattha ugghaṭanā ādī’’tiādi. Tattha tatthāti ugghaṭanādikiccasādhikāsu desanāsu. Ugghaṭanāti ugghaṭanakiccasādhikā desanā ādidesanā hoti. Vipañcanāti vipañcanakiccasādhikā desanā majjhedesanā hoti. Vitthāraṇāti vitthāraṇakiccasādhikā desanā pariyosānadesanā hotīti attho daṭṭhabbo.
因为可能会有人这样问:“以开显的方式略说时,作为所缘之义的法与律调伏哪一种人?以分别的方式广说时,作为所缘之义的法与律调伏哪一种人?以广说的方式极广说时,作为所缘之义的法与律调伏哪一种人?”所以说了“此法与律”等。而注释书则说:“这样显示了‘以文字宣说’等六种文辞的作用之后,现在为了显示词义的作用,才说‘此法与律’等。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Ugghaṭiyanto uddisiyamāno pariyattiatthabhūto dhammavinayo katamaṃ puggalaṃ vineti, vipañciyanto niddisiyamāno pariyattiatthabhūto dhammavinayo katamaṃ puggalaṃ vineti, vitthāriyanto paṭiniddisiyamāno pariyattiatthabhūto dhammavinayo katamaṃ puggalaṃ vinetī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘soyaṃ dhammavinayo’’tiādimāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ ‘akkharehi saṅkāsetī’tiādīnaṃ channaṃ byañjanapadānaṃ byāpāraṃ dassetvā idāni atthapadānaṃ byāpāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘soyaṃ dhammavinayo’tiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 9) vuttaṃ.
在此,以开显的方式略说时,即作为略说所缘义的此法与律,调伏已开显智之人;由于调伏了已开显智之人,故称此开显而略说的、作为略说所缘义的律为“初善”。以分别的方式广说时,即作为广说所缘义的此法与律,调伏已分别智之人;由于调伏了已分别智之人,故称此分别而广说的、作为广说所缘义的律为“中善”。以广说的方式极广说时,即作为极广说所缘义的此法与律,调伏可引导之人,生起调伏;由于调伏了可引导之人,故称此广说而极广说的、作为极广说所缘义的律为“终善”。应知这就是连结之义。显示巴利原文
Tattha ugghaṭiyanto uddisiyamāno uddesapariyattiatthabhūto so ayaṃ dhammavinayo ugghaṭitaññupuggalaṃ vineti, tena ugghaṭitaññuno puggalassa vinayanena naṃ ugghaṭiyantaṃ uddisiyamānaṃ uddesapariyattiatthabhūtaṃ vinayaṃ ‘‘ādikalyāṇo’’ti āhu. Vipañciyanto niddisiyamāno niddesapariyattiatthabhūto so ayaṃ dhammavinayo vipañcitaññupuggalaṃ vineti, tena vipañcitaññupuggalassa vinayanena naṃ vipañciyantaṃ niddisiyamānaṃ niddesapariyattiatthabhūtaṃ vinayaṃ ‘‘majjhekalyāṇo’’ti āhu. Vitthāriyanto paṭiniddisiyamāno paṭiniddesapariyattiatthabhūto so ayaṃ dhammavinayo neyyaṃ puggalaṃ vineti vinayanaṃ janeti, tena neyyassa puggalassa vinayanena naṃ vitthāriyantaṃ paṭiniddisiyamānaṃ paṭiniddesapariyattiatthabhūtaṃ vinayaṃ ‘‘pariyosānakalyāṇo’’ti āhūti yojanatthoti daṭṭhabbo.
或者,借由‘以文字宣说’等说法,显示了六种词的作用。若如此,则义将成无作用;然而义从究竟而言实是有作用的——思及这一质难,故说‘此法是律’等。由此显示:正是义在究竟上成就了三类所调伏者的调伏之事,而表诠义之声则于施设层面成就三类所调伏者的调伏之事。然而,由于执著于词者没有证得谛现观的立足之处,故此处未提及此人。又或者,犹如以‘有学’的提及亦含摄善凡夫,以‘可引导者’的提及,亦应视为含摄了执著于词者。于‘以文字’等句中,具工具义的词为工具格,而非具因义。因为文字等是开显等的目的,而非开显等是文字等的目的,故如‘因食而活’等例,不应取其因义。在那里,依食物之因得活,因活而获食,即以活的作用为果,同时以活的作用为因而被理解。‘因乞求而活’等亦复如是。故说:‘为何目的之作用,彼即为因’。在那里,‘为何目的’即食物等目的,何为的活等作用——即食物等目的,是彼活等作用之因,应作如是理解。显示巴利原文
Atha vā ‘‘akkharehi saṅkāsetī’’tiādinā channaṃ padānaṃ byāpāro dassito, evaṃ sati attho nibyāpāro siyā, attho ca nippariyāyato sabyāpāroyevāti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘soyaṃ dhammavinayo’’tiādi. Etena atthoyeva mukhyato veneyyattayassa vinayanakiccaṃ sādheti, atthavācako pana saddo ṭhānūpacārato veneyyattayassa vinayanakiccaṃ sādhetīti dasseti. Padaparamassa pana saccappaṭivedhassa patiṭṭhānābhāvato so idha na vutto. Sekkhaggahaṇena vā kalyāṇaputhujjanassa viya neyyaggahaṇena padaparamassa puggalassāpi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ . Akkharehītiādīsu karaṇatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, na hetvatthe. Akkharādīnañhi ugghaṭanādīni payojanāniyeva honti, na ugghaṭanādīnaṃ akkharādīni payojanānīti ‘‘annena vasatī’’tiādīsu viya na hetuattho gahetabbo. Tattha hi annena hetunā vasati, vasanena hetunā annaṃ laddhanti vasanakiriyāya phalaṃ vasanakiriyāya hetubhāvena gahitaṃ. ‘‘Ajjhesanena vasatī’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Tenāha ‘‘yadatthā ca kiriyā, so hetū’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 9). Tattha yadatthāti so annādiko attho yassā vasanādikiriyāyāti yadatthā, vasanādikiriyā, so annādiko attho tassā vasanādikiriyāya hetūti attho veditabbo.
10 其中,以‘tattha aparimāṇā padā’等句,显示了以‘dhammaṃ vo bhikkhave desessāmī’开示的巴利圣典之十二词具足所摄的三种美善后,现在为显示以六义句、六文句的差别所摄的义句与文句之美善,而说‘tattha chappadāni attho’等。或者,随顺‘dvādasa padāni sutta’所说,以‘tattha aparimāṇā’等句显示了以‘dhammaṃ vo bhikkhave desessāmī’开示的巴利圣典之十二词性后,随顺‘ādikalyāṇaṃ majjhekalyāṇaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇa’所说,以‘tattha bhagavā akkharehi cā’等句显示了该圣典的三种美善;显示之后,现在为随顺‘sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddha’所说,显示该圣典之六义句、六文句的具足,而说‘tattha chappadāni attho’等。显示巴利原文
10. ‘‘Tattha aparimāṇā padā’’tiādinā ‘‘dhammaṃ vo bhikkhave desessāmī’’ti uddiṭṭhāya pāḷiyā dvādasapadasampattisaṅkhātaṃ tividhakalyāṇataṃ dassetvā idāni chaatthapadachabyañjanapadabhedena sampattisaṅkhātaṃ atthapadabyañjanapadakalyāṇataṃ dassento ‘‘tattha chappadāni attho’’tiādimāha. Atha vā ‘‘dvādasa padāni sutta’’nti vuttānurūpaṃ ‘‘tattha aparimāṇā’’tiādinā ‘‘dhammaṃ vo bhikkhave desessāmī’’ti uddiṭṭhāya pāḷiyā dvādasapadatā dassetvā ‘‘ādikalyāṇaṃ majjhekalyāṇaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇa’’nti vuttānurūpaṃ ‘‘tattha bhagavā akkharehi cā’’tiādinā tassā pāḷiyā tividhakalyāṇatā dassitā, dassetvā idāni ‘‘sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddha’’nti vuttānurūpaṃ tassā pāḷiyā chaatthapadabyañjanapadasampannataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha chappadāni attho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tissaṃ desanāhāravisayasaṅkhātāyaṃ pāḷiyaṃ chappadāni attho. Katamāni chappadāni? Saṅkāsanā, pakāsanā, vivaraṇā, vibhajanā, uttānīkammaṃ, paññatti imāni chappadāni. Attho yassa atthi tasmā sātthaṃ. Tatthāti tissaṃ desanāhāravisayasaṅkhātāyaṃ pāḷiyaṃ chappadāni byañjanaṃ. Katamāni chappadāni? Akkharaṃ, padaṃ, byañjanaṃ, ākāro, nirutti, niddeso imāni chappadāni. Byañjanaṃ yassa atthīti sabyañjananti yojanā kātabbā. Tenāti tassā pāḷiyā tividhakalyāṇachaatthapadasampannachabyañjanapadasampannaṭṭhena, ‘‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave…pe… suddha’’nti bhagavā āhāti attho.
为了确定并显示‘kevala’一词所指的‘全部’等义中的意趣,而说‘kevalanti lokuttaraṃ na missaṃ lokiyehi dhammehī’。‘paripuṇṇaṃ’:于所指称的义理中,无有一义缺失;于能诠表的音声中,亦无有一个无义、多余的音声,故为‘paripuṇṇaṃ’,即无缺、无减、无增。‘parisuddhaṃ’:由于远离了音声过失、义理过失等,故为‘parisuddhaṃ’;或由于远离了贪等垢秽,成为极清净、殊胜之上人法显现的依处,故为‘parisuddhaṃ’、‘pariyodātaṃ’。此法之垢秽已离去,故为‘nimmalaṃ’。由于远离音声过失等,或远离贪等,从一切垢秽中出离,周遍地、完全地清净,故为‘pariyodātaṃ’。‘upaṭṭhitaṃ’:一切殊胜法于此现前,故为‘upaṭṭhitaṃ’,如‘padakkantaṃ’(已踏入)之例。‘padakkantaṃ’即已踏入之处。‘visesā’:相对于人法而殊胜,故为‘visesā’;一切显示巴利原文
Kevalasaddassa sakalādiatthavācakattā adhippetatthaṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘kevalanti lokuttaraṃ na missaṃ lokiyehi dhammehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Paripuṇṇanti adhippetatthe ekopi attho ūno natthi, vācakasaddesupi anatthako ekopi saddo adhiko natthīti paripuṇṇaṃ anūnaṃ anatirekaṃ. Parisuddhanti saddadosaatthadosādivirahato vā parisuddhaṃ, rāgādimalavirahato vā pariyodātānaṃ uttarimanussadhammavisesānaṃ upaṭṭhitaṭṭhānattā parisuddhaṃ pariyodātaṃ. Niggataṃ malaṃ etassa dhammassāti nimmalaṃ. Saddadosādivirahato vā rāgādivirahato vā sabbamalehi apagataṃ pari samantato odātanti pariyodātaṃ. Upaṭṭhitanti upatiṭṭhanti ettha sabbavisesāti upaṭṭhitaṃ yathā ‘‘padakkanta’’nti. Padakkantaṃ padakkantaṭṭhānaṃ. Visisanti manussadhammehīti visesā, sabbe visesā sabbavisesā, sabbato vā visesāti sabbavisesā, uttarimanussadhammā. Tesaṃ sabbavisesānaṃ upaṭṭhitanti yojanā. Idanti sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ. Tathāgatassa sammāsambuddhassa padanti tathāgatapadaṃ. Padanti ca paṭipattigamanena vā desanāgamanena vā kilesaggahaṇaṃ. Ottharitvā gamanaṭṭhānaṃ itipi vuccati pavuccati, tathāgatena gocarāsevanena vā bhāvanāsevanena vā nisevitaṃ bhajitaṃ itipi vuccati, tathāgatassa mahāvajirañāṇasabbaññutaññāṇadantehi ārañjitaṃ ārañjitaṭṭhānaṃ itipi vuccati, ato tathāgatapadādibhāvena vattabbabhāvato etaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ iti paññāyati. Brahmacariyanti brahmuno sabbasattuttamassa bhagavato cariyaṃ, brahmaṃ vā sabbaseṭṭhaṃ cariyaṃ brahmacariyaṃ. Paññāyatīti yathāvuttehi pakārehi ñāyatīti attho veditabbo.
因为有人会问:“我们如何能无疑了知此含摄三学的教法之圆满清净性所构成的如来足处性——如来足处性、如来所亲近性、如来所体味性、以他们那种方式所开示性?”所以说了“tenāha bhagavā”等语,意思是:由世尊所说、能显示他们性质的那些话,你们应当无疑了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Imassa sikkhattayassa saṅgahassa sāsanassa paripuṇṇabhāvaparisuddhabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ tathāgatapadabhāvaṃ!Tathāgatapadabhāvaṃ, tathāgatanisevitabhāvaṃ, tathāgataārañjitabhāvaṃ, tehi pakārehi ñāpitabhāvaṃ kathaṃ mayaṃ nikkaṅkhā jānissāmā’’ti vattabbato ‘‘tenāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tabbhāvadīpakena bhagavatā vuttena vacanena tumhehi nikkaṅkhehi jānitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
如果世尊以字母与词语开示,以文句与形态广说,以语义与详释详加解说,那么阿阇梨所造之教示摄受便无必要,因为纵无教示摄受,世尊的教说本身亦能成就义利。有鉴于此质疑,乃问:“此法教是为谁而设?”答:“为瑜伽行者。”这其中,“yogīnaṃ”指那些致力于四圣谛业处修习的人,即瑜伽行者;为他们而设。因此,由我所造之教示摄受所注释、如前所述的世尊教说,能成就开示等作用,故教示摄受于瑜伽行者是有利益的,应如此看待。由于会有人问:“教示摄受的功德等教示摄受性,我们应如何了知、信受?”故说“tenāha āyasmā…pe… desanāhāro”。其中,因为具寿大迦旃延以那显示功德等的教示摄受性,说了“assādādīnavatā…pe… desanāhāro”这番话,凭借这番话,你们应了知、信受教示摄受于瑜伽行者具有功德等教示摄受性,这就是所说之义。显示巴利原文
Yadi bhagavā akkharehi ca padehi ca ugghaṭeti, byañjanehi ca ākārehi ca vipañcayati, niruttīhi ca niddesehi ca vitthāreti, evaṃ sati ācariyena racitena desanāhārena payojanaṃ na bhavati, desanāhārena na vinā bhagavato desanāyameva atthasijjhanatoti codanaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘kesaṃ ayaṃ dhammadesanā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘yogīna’’nti āha. Tattha yogīnanti yujjanti catusaccakammaṭṭhānabhāvanāyanti yogino, tesaṃ yogīnaṃ. Tena mayā racitena desanāhārena saṃvaṇṇitā ayaṃ vuttappakārā bhagavato desanā ugghaṭanādikiccaṃ sādhetīti desanāhāro yogīnaṃ sātthakoyevāti daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Desanāhārassa assādādidesanāhārabhāvo kena amhehi jānitabbo saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāha āyasmā…pe… desanāhāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha tena assādādidesanāhārabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno ‘‘assādādīnavatā…pe… desanāhāro’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena tumhehi desanāhārassa yogīnaṃ assādādidesanāhārabhāvo jānitabbo saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
因为有人会问:“那么,仅此教示摄受就圆满了么?此外别无其他所应用的吗?”故说“niyutto desanāhāro”。其中,在那教说中,功德等已由该教示摄受所确定;在那教说中,该教示摄受既经确定便加以应用,应如此理解其义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kiṃ pana ettāvatā desanāhāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘niyutto desanāhāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yassaṃ desanāyaṃ assādādayo yena desanāhārena niddhāritā, tassaṃ desanāyaṃ so desanāhāro niddhāretvā yojitoti attho daṭṭhabboti.
然而,智者应当依循注释与复注,将深奥的义理详尽抉择之后,方才纳受。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
二、抉择理趣分别的阐明显示巴利原文
2. Vicayahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
11 凡由阿阇梨以某种特定的解说——即教示理趣的分别——分别了如味、过患等经义,此特定的解说——即教示理趣的分别——便已圆满。因应被询问‘什么是抉择理趣?’,故说‘其中,什么是抉择理趣?’等语。其中,‘其中’是指于他们所指示的十六种教示理趣等理趣之中,何者名为抉择理趣分别这一特定解说?如此提问。以‘所问与所答’等指示偈颂,将现今由我所宣说的‘此抉择理趣抉择何者?’等特定解说,导入名为抉择理趣的分别。显示巴利原文
11. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena desanāhāravibhaṅgena assādādayo suttatthā ācariyena vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto desanāhāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo vicayo hāro’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo vicayo hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu hāresu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vicayo hāro vicayahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Yaṃ pucchitañca vissajjitañcā’’tiādiniddesagāthāya idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘ayaṃ vicayo hāro kiṃ vicinatī’’tiādiko saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vicayahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti yojanā.
以‘此抉择理趣抉择何者?’此句,问及那所应抉择的抉择。正因如此,为了逐一确定并显示这所应抉择的境域,故说‘抉择句、抉择问’等语。不说‘何谓抉择、句抉择’等,而说‘抉择何者、抉择句’等,以此语句,显示了‘抉择’一词的能作者之义。其中,‘抉择句’是指:对于九分教中所有的文句,乃至结语,依名词等词类、阴性等词性、以‘a’结尾等词尾、第一转结尾等格、单数等数而作抉择。‘抉择问’是指:依未见阐明等、七种所依等、共许境等、过去境等而作抉择。‘抉择答’是指:依一向记答等、分别记答等、反问答等、世间记答等而作抉择。‘抉择前后’是指:将前文与后文相合而作抉择。‘抉择味’是指:依味之渴爱等、应受味之乐等而作抉择。‘抉择过患’是指:依苦苦、变易苦、行苦,或依不可爱领受等、有终尽性等、属于杂染分等而作抉择。‘抉择出离’是指:依道,或依涅槃,或依道的来至,或依涅槃的无为界等异名而作抉择。‘抉择果’是指:依随法而行不堕恶趣,或依度越死亡等,为教说之果;依随教说而行,为行之果,如此抉择。‘抉择方便’是指:依无常随观等而转起,或依厌离智等而作抉择。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ayaṃ vicayo hāro kiṃ vicinatī’’ti iminā yo vicayo vicinitabbo, taṃ vicayaṃ vicinitabbaṃ pucchati, tasmā vicinitabbaṃ visayaṃ visuṃ visuṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘padaṃ vicinati, pañhaṃ vicinatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kiṃ vicayo padavicayo’’tiādiṃ avatvā ‘‘kiṃ vicinati, padaṃ vicinatī’’tiādivacanena vicayasaddassa kattusādhanatthaṃ dasseti. Tattha padaṃ vicinatīti navavidhassa suttantassa sabbaṃ padaṃ yāva nigamanā nāmapadādijātisaddādiitthiliṅgādiākārantādipaṭhamavibhatyantādiekavacanādivasena vicinati. Pañhaṃ vicinatīti adiṭṭhajotanādisattādhiṭṭhānādisammutivisayādiatītavisayādivasena vicinati. Vissajjanaṃ vicinatīti ekaṃsabyākaraṇavissajjanādisāvasesabyākaraṇavissajjanādi sauttarabyākaraṇa vissajjanādi lokiyabyākaraṇavissajjanādivasena vicinati. Pubbāparaṃ vicinatīti pubbena aparaṃ saṃsanditvā vicinati. Assādaṃ vicinatīti assādakataṇhādiassādetabbasukhādivasena vicinati. Ādīnavaṃ vicinatīti dukkhadukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhavasena vā aniṭṭhānubhavanādiādiantavantatādisaṃkilesabhāgiyādivasena vā vicinati. Nissaraṇaṃ vicinatīti maggavasena vā nibbānavasena vā maggassa vā āgamavasena, nibbānassa asaṅkhatadhātuādipariyāyavasena vā vicinati. Phalaṃ vicinatīti dhammacaraṇassa duggatigamanābhāvena vā maccutaraṇādinā vā desanāya phalaṃ, desanānusārena caraṇassa phalaṃ vicinati. Upāyaṃ vicinatīti aniccānupassanādivasena pavattananibbidāñāṇādivasena vā saddhāsativasena vā visuddhiyā upāyaṃ vicinati. Āṇattiṃ vicinatīti pāpaparivajjanāṇattivasena vā lokassa suññatāpekkhanāṇattivasena vā vicinati. Anugītiṃ vicinatīti vuttānugītivasena vā vuccamānānugītivasena vā anurūpaṃ gītiṃ vicinati. Sabbe nava suttante vicinatīti suttageyyādike nava sutte āhaccavacanavasena vā anusandhivacanavasena vā nītatthavacanavasena vā neyyatthavacanavasena vā saṃkilesabhāgiyādivasena vā vicinati.
虽然先已分别了句抉择,然而,由于需要对经典逐句审察,负担极为沉重,句抉择并非易事,因此暂且搁置,先分别问抉择与答抉择,故说‘会是如何?’等语。其中,‘会是如何?’意为:问抉择应以何种方式进行?那种方式会是如何呢?其含义是:如同具寿阿逸多在《彼岸道》中向世尊提问的方式,问抉择即应依那种方式进行。此中,‘具寿’是亲切的称呼。‘阿逸多’即婆罗门巴瓦利的十六位侍者弟子之一的阿逸多。‘彼岸道’:由此前往、到达彼岸涅槃,故名‘彼岸道’,这是对《阿逸多经》等十六部经典的统称。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi padavicayo paṭhamaṃ vibhatto, suttassa pana anupadaṃ vicinitabbatāya atibhāriyo, na sukaro padavicayoti taṃ aggahetvā pañhāvicayavissajjanavicaye tāva vibhajanto ‘‘yathā kiṃ bhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha yathā kiṃ bhaveti yena pakārena so pañhāvicayo pavattetabbo, taṃ pakārajātaṃ kīdisaṃ bhaveyyāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Āyasmā ajito pārāyane bhagavantaṃ pañhaṃ yathā yena pakārena pucchati, tathā tena pakārena pañhāvicayo pavattetabboti attho. Tattha āyasmāti piyavacanaṃ. Ajitoti bāvarībrāhmaṇassa paricārakabhūtānaṃ soḷasannaṃ aññataro ajito. Pārāyaneti pāraṃ nibbānaṃ ayati gacchati etenāti pārāyanaṃ, ajitasuttādisoḷasasuttassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
‘世间被什么遮蔽,’(具寿阿逸多问,)
‘因何而不显耀?’
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kenassu nivuto loko, (iccāyasmā ajito,) Kenassu nappakāsati;
“你所说的染着是什么?它的大怖畏又是什么?”(《经集》1038;《小义释·序偈》57,《阿逸多学童问义释》1)显示巴利原文
Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsi, kiṃ su tassa mahabbhaya’’nti. (su. ni. 1038; cūḷani. vatthugāthā 57, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 1) –
此偈颂的意思是:“以何法,世间——即被圣者所诃弃的有情——被遮蔽、被覆盖?具寿阿逸多如此问。以何等因缘,如上所说的世间不显耀?对于如上所说的世间,其染着是什么?其大怖畏又是什么?”他如此问道。显示巴利原文
Gāthāya ‘‘kena dhammena loko ariyavajjo satto nivuto paṭicchādito, iti āyasmā ajito pucchati. Kena hetunā yathāvuttaloko nappakāsati, assa yathāvuttalokassa kiṃ abhilepanaṃ iti tvaṃ brūsi, tassa yathāvuttalokassa kiṃ mahabbhayanti tvaṃ brūsīti pucchatī’’ti attho.
如此,依此分类,这四偈中的诸分句作为问题而被说出,或是阐明所问之义。然而,就主要意义而言,它被视为“一个问题”。虽然由于以四句提问的方式生起,可说为四种,但因为所欲了知的只是同一个义理,故说为“一个问题”。因为应当说“请说其因”,所以宣说其因:“由摄一义”。这是说:“虽然在此问中,包含了所谓遮蔽、不显耀、染着、大怖畏这四种义理,但由于摄取了同一个所诠之义,故从主要意义上视为一个问题,应如此理解。”因为应当说“我们如何能信受摄一义?”,所以宣说“因为世尊如此说”。如此,正是以摄一义,世尊既如此说,故你们应信受摄一义,这就是所说之义。显示巴利原文
Iti iminā pabhedena cattāri imāni gāthāpādapadāni pucchitāni pucchāvasena vuttāni, pucchitatthadīpakāni vā, padhānavasena pana so ‘‘eko pañho’’ti mato, yadipi catunnaṃ padānaṃ pucchanavasena pavattattā catubbidhoti vattabbo, ñātuṃ pana icchitassa ekasseva atthassa sambhavato ‘‘eko pañho’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kāraṇaṃ vadehī’’ti vattabbattā kāraṇamāha ‘‘ekavatthupariggahā’’ti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘yadipi nivāraṇāpakāsanābhilepanamahabbhayasaṅkhātā cattāro atthā pucchāyaṃ gahitā, ekassa pana abhidheyyatthassa gahaṇato ‘eko pañho’ti padhānavasena gahitoti daṭṭhabbo’’ti. ‘‘Ekavatthupariggahaṇaṃ kathaṃ amhehi saddahitabba’’nti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘evañhi āhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ ekavatthupariggahaṇeneva bhagavā hi yasmā āha, iti tasmā ekavatthupariggahaṇaṃ tumhehi saddahitabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
“世间被什么遮蔽?”——这是针对以世间为所依的遮蔽提问,而不是针对以种种法为所依的遮蔽。“它因什么而不显现?”——这是针对世间的不显现提问,而不是针对种种自性法。“你说它的涂染是什么?”——这是针对世间的涂染提问,而不是针对种种自性法。“它的大怖畏是什么?”——这是针对那个世间的大怖畏提问,而不是针对种种自性法。因此,“世间被什么遮蔽?”等问题,就单一所依与多种所依而言,属于单一所依;就法所依与有情所依而言,属于有情所依;就未显令显等方式而言,属于未显令显之问等。应如此随宜审察,这是要旨。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kenassu nivuto loko’’ti iminā lokādhiṭṭhānaṃ paṭicchādanaṃ pucchati, na nānādhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Kenassu nappakāsatī’’ti iminā lokasseva appakāsanaṃ pucchati, na nānāsabhāvadhammassa. ‘‘Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsī’’ti iminā lokasseva abhilepanaṃ pucchati, na nānāsabhāvadhammassa. ‘‘Kiṃ su tassa mahabbhaya’’nti iminā tasseva lokassa mahabbhayaṃ pucchati, na nānāsabhāvadhammassa. Tasmā ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’tiādipañho ekādhiṭṭhānanānādhiṭṭhānesu ekādhiṭṭhāno, dhammādhiṭṭhānasattādhiṭṭhānesu sattādhiṭṭhāno, adiṭṭhajotanādīsu adiṭṭhajotanāpañhotiādinā yathāsambhavaṃ vicinitabboti adhippāyo.
因为应当说明“问题中被视为‘所依’的世间,此世间有三种”,所以说了“世间有三种”等。其中,此世间有三种类别,故称“三种”。以贪等烦恼而杂染的欲界有情称为烦恼,既是烦恼又是世间,故为烦恼世间,即欲界有情。因其多具贪等烦恼,故称烦恼世间。以禅那与神通而存在(或增盛)的称为有,既是有又是世间,故为有世间,即色界有情。因其依禅那等而存在(增盛)。具足根的称为根,既是根又是世间,故为根世间,即无色界有情。因其多住于不动定而根极清净。这些世间通通是依属于(三界)的法而施设的,因此不包含圣者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pañhassa yo loko ‘adhiṭṭhāno’ti gahito, so loko tividho’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘loko tividho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tayo vidhā etassa lokassāti tividho. Kilissati rāgādivasena kāmāvacarasattoti kileso, kileso ca so loko cāti kilesaloko, kāmāvacarasatto. So hi rāgādikilesabahulatāya kilesalokoti. Bhavati jhānābhiññāhi buddhīhīti bhavo, bhavo ca so loko cāti bhavaloko, rūpāvacarasatto. So hi jhānādibuddhīhi bhavatīti. Indriyena samannāgatoti indriyo, indriyo ca so loko cāti indriyaloko, arūpāvacarasatto. So hi āneñjasamādhibahulatāya visuddhindriyo hotīti lokasamaññā pariyāpannadhammavasena pavattā, tasmā ariyā na gahitāti.
“世间被什么遮蔽?”等偈颂中的问句审察(模式),阿阇梨已作了分别,我们也已了知。因为应当问:“答句审察模式是在何处对答句作了分别?”,所以说了“其中,答句”等。其中,“其中”是指在那“世间被什么遮蔽?”等问句中——显示巴利原文
‘‘Kenassu nivuto loko’’tiādigāthāya pucchāvicayo hāro ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘vissajjanāvicayo hāro kattha vissajjanāya vibhatto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha vissajjanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’tiādipucchāyaṃ –
“世间为无明所覆,阿吉陀!”世尊说,
“因悭吝与放逸而不放光明;
我说渴爱是垢染,苦是它的大怖畏。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Avijjāya nivuto loko, (ajitāti bhagavā,) Vivicchā pamādā nappakāsati; Jappābhilepanaṃ brūmi, dukkhamassa mahabbhaya’’nti. (su. ni. 1039; cūḷani. vatthugāthā 58, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa) –
应知此偈为答句。其中,“世间被无明所遮蔽”:如同在黑半月十四日、密林深处、乌云密布、深夜这四种具足之黑暗中,车队等被遮蔽一般,具有遮蔽法自性的无明,将有情世间遮蔽、覆藏。世尊呼唤“阿吉陀”后说道:“悭吝”——因疑与放逸,如前所说的世间便不显现。世尊说:“我说,渴爱是如前所说世间的‘涂染’。”世尊对阿吉陀说:“我说,生等轮回之苦是如前所说世间的‘大怖畏’。”这便是此处的含义。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ gāthā vissajjanāti daṭṭhabbā. Tattha avijjāya nivuto lokoti kāḷapakkhacatuddasī, ghanavanasaṇḍa, meghapaṭalacchādana, aḍḍharattīnaṃ vasena caturaṅgasamannāgatena andhakārena rathaghaṭādi paṭicchādito viya dhammasabhāvapaṭicchādanalakkhaṇāya avijjāya sattaloko nivuto paṭicchādito. ‘‘Ajitā’’ti ca ālapanaṃ katvā bhagavā āha. Vivicchāti vicikicchāya pamādahetu yathāvuttaloko nappakāsati. Jappaṃ taṇhaṃ yathāvuttalokassa ‘‘abhilepana’’nti ahaṃ brūmīti bhagavā āha, dukkhaṃ jātiādivaṭṭadukkhaṃ assa yathāvuttalokassa ‘‘mahabbhaya’’nti ahaṃ brūmīti bhagavā ajitaṃ āhāti attho.
因应问“对此答句应如何审察?”,故说“这四句”等。其中,“这四句”指“世间被什么遮蔽?”等问偈中的偈句。“以此四句”指“世间被无明所遮蔽”等答偈中的偈句,即以此作了回答。如何回答呢?第一问句由第一答句回答,第二问句由第二答句回答,第三问句由第三答句回答,第四问句由第四答句回答。显示巴利原文
‘‘Imāya vissajjanāya kathaṃ vicineyyā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘imāni cattāri padānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha imāni cattāri padānīti ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’tiādipucchāgāthāyaṃ vuttāni gāthāpadāni. Imehi catūhi padehīti ‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko’’ti vissajjanāgāthāyaṃ vuttehi gāthāpadehi vissajjitāni. Kathaṃ? Paṭhamaṃ padaṃ paṭhamena padena, dutiyaṃ padaṃ dutiyena padena, tatiyaṃ padaṃ tatiyena padena, catutthaṃ padaṃ catutthena padena vissajjitaṃ.
对于“世间被什么遮蔽?”这第一问,以“世间被无明所遮蔽”作为第一答,而非颠倒顺序。无明是明的对治品,因此世间因无明而成为不知者。为说明“如何被遮蔽”而令人生信,故说“世间被诸盖所遮蔽”。若如此,考虑到“应以‘世间被盖所遮蔽’作答”的责难,便说“因为一切众生皆以无明为盖”。由于当说“一切众生以无明为盖的道理,应依何语信受?”,便说了“如世尊所说”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kenassu nivuto loko’’ti paṭhamapañhe‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko’’ti paṭhamā vissajjanā katā, na uppaṭipāṭiyā. Vijjāya paṭipakkhā avijjā, tasmā avijjāya ajānako loko bhaveyya. Kathaṃ nivuto saddahitabboti āha ‘‘nīvaraṇehi nivuto loko’’ti. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘nīvaraṇena nivuto loko’’ti vissajjanā kātabbāti codanaṃ manasi katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘avijjānīvaraṇā hi sabbe sattā’’ti. ‘‘Sabbasattānaṃ avijjānīvaraṇabhāvo kena vacanena saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yathāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
诸比丘,于一切众生、一切有情、一切存在,依教说而谈,我只说一种盖,便是无明。因为一切众生确以无明为盖。诸比丘,在无明完全灭尽、舍断、遣除之前,我说众生并非没有盖。世尊如是所说,你们应依此说而信受:一切众生皆以无明为盖。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbasattānaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbapāṇānaṃ sabbabhūtānaṃ, pariyāyato ekameva nīvaraṇaṃ vadāmi, yadidaṃ avijjā. Avijjānīvaraṇā hi sabbe sattā. Sabbasova bhikkhave avijjāya nirodhā cāgā paṭinissaggā natthi sattānaṃ nīvaraṇanti vadāmī’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ yathā yena pakārena bhagavā āha, tathā tena pakārena vuttena tena vacanena tumhehi sabbasattānaṃ avijjānīvaraṇabhāvo saddahitabboti.
由于顾虑到“以‘世间被无明所遮蔽’这一句,不仅是对‘世间被什么遮蔽?’这第一问的回答,也成了对‘它因何而不显现?’这第二问的回答”这样的责难,因而说了“因此”等语。此处,以“世间被无明所遮蔽”作为对“世间被什么遮蔽?”这第一问的回答,是恰当的、更为恰当的;正因为更为恰当,故而对于“世间被什么遮蔽?”这一问题,应说其回答即是“世间被无明所遮蔽”,此为要旨。显示巴利原文
‘‘Avijjāya nivuto loko’’ti padena ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’ti paṭhamasseva padassa vissajjanā na siyā, ‘‘kenassu nappakāsatī’’ti dutiyapadassāpi vissajjanā siyāti codanaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘tena cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tena ‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko’’ti padena ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’ti paṭhamassa padassa vissajjanā yuttā yuttatarā hoti, yuttatarattā ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’ti pañhe ‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko’’ti vissajjanāti mayā vattabbāyevāti adhippāyo.
对于“以何而不显现”这一问,应作如是回答:“因悭吝与放逸而不显现。”意思是:由于悭吝的生起以及由于放逸,世间不显现。被无明盖所覆蔽的世间不显现,应作此解答。为说明“为何说‘悭吝与放逸令世间不显现’这一回答已作”,故说“彼人”等语。其中,彼凡夫被无明盖所覆,彼凡夫以悭吝而悭吝。为设问“他以何悭吝而悭吝?此悭吝名为什么?”,故说“悭吝即名为疑”。为说明“以此何故不显现”,故说“彼疑惑者”等语。以此疑惑,彼凡夫于应信之处不信;以于应信处不信故,不为断不善法、证善法而发起应发之精进;不发精进故,他便于此世间随逐放逸而住;随放逸而住故,放逸者便不令白法生起;于不令生起者,白法便不生起而不显现,不以显现的方式转起。因此,“因悭吝与放逸,世间不显现”应作此解答,这是意趣所在。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kenassu nappakāsatī’’ti imasmiṃ pañhe ‘‘vivicchā pamādā nappakāsatī’’ti ayaṃ vissajjanā kātabbā, vivicchāya pavattattā, pamādā ca loko nappakāsatīti attho. Avijjānīvaraṇāya nivuto loko nappakāsatīti vissajjanā kātabbā, ‘‘kathaṃ vivicchā pamādā loko nappakāsatīti vissajjanā katā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yo puggalo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yo puthujjanabhūto puggalo avijjānīvaraṇehi nivuto, so puthujjanabhūto puggalo vivicchāya vivicchati. ‘‘Yāya vivicchāya vivicchati, sā vivicchā katamā nāmā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘vivicchā nāma vuccati vicikicchā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tāya kasmā nappakāsatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘so vicikicchanto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tāya vicikicchanto so puthujjanabhūto puggalo saddahitabbesu nābhisaddahati; saddahitabbesu na abhisaddahanto akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ pahānāya, kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ sacchikiriyāya ārabhitabbaṃ vīriyaṃ nārabhati; anārabhanto so puggalo idha loke pamādamanuyutto viharatīti, pamādena viharanto pamatto puggalo sukke dhamme na uppādiyati; anuppādayantassa tassa puggalassa te sukkā dhammā anuppādiyamānā hutvā nappakāsanti pakāsanavasena na pavattanti; tasmā ‘‘vivicchā pamādā loko nappakāsatī’’ti vissajjanā kātabbāti adhippāyo.
因其必须有“此类人之白法不显现者,我们当以何种言语信受”之说,故有“如世尊所说”等语。其中——显示巴利原文
‘‘Tādisassa sukkadhammānaṃ appakāsanabhāvo amhehi kena vacanena saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘yathāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha –
远住之人自昭显,犹如雪山之高峰;
此处不善者不显,犹如夜中射出之箭;
他们以功德而显现,以称誉与名声而显现。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dūre santo pakāsanti, himavantova pabbato; Asantettha na dissanti, rattiṃ khittā yathā sarā; Te guṇehi pakāsanti, kittiyā ca yasena cā’’ti. –
世尊以某种不显现的方式所说的偈颂,依此不显现的方式所说之偈颂而表明:此类人的善法不显,乃是你们应当信受的。因此,「因悭吝与放逸,世间不显现」——这是如此解答的意旨。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ gāthāpāṭhaṃ bhagavā yathā yena appakāsanākārena āha, tathā tena appakāsanākārena vuttena tena gāthāpāṭhena tādisassa puggalassa sukkadhammānaṃ appakāsanabhāvo tumhehi saddahitabboyeva, tasmā ‘‘vivicchā pamādā loko nappakāsatī’’ti vissajjanā kātabbāvāti adhippāyo.
偈颂之义为:犹如雪山虽处远方,对远方有眼之人也显现;同样地,善士虽处远方,也因功德所起的称誉,以及因功德而起的名声、受用与眷属,对远处的智者而显现。犹如在夜间射出的箭不显现那般,于此众生世间,随逐于悭吝与放逸而住的不善者便不显现。为显示「善者以功德而显现」,故说此颂:「他们以功德而显现……」。功德是内在生起的,因为须说明「如何以功德而显现」,故说「以称誉及以名声」。因功德而起的称誉,及因功德而起的名声而显现的人,即被称为以功德而显现。显示巴利原文
Gāthāttho pana – himavanto pabbato dūre ṭhito dūre ṭhitānampi sacakkhukānaṃ puggalānaṃ pakāsati iva, evaṃ santo sappurisā dūre ṭhitānampi guṇavasena pavattāya kittiyā ca guṇavasena pavattehi yasaparibhogaparivārehi ca dūre ṭhitānaṃ paṇḍitānaṃ pakāsanti, rattikāle khittā sarā usū na dissanti yathā, ettha sattaloke vivicchāpamādānaṃ vasena viharanto asanto na dissanti. Ye santo pakāsanti, te santo guṇehi pakāsantīti dassetuṃ ‘‘te guṇehi pakāsantī’’ti vuttaṃ . Guṇā nāma abbhantare jātā, ‘‘kathaṃ guṇehi pakāsantī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘kittiyā ca yasena cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Guṇānubhāvena pavattāya kittiyā ca guṇānubhāvena pavattena yasena ca pakāsantā puggalā guṇehi pakāsantīti vattabbāvāti.
若因悭吝与放逸而不显现,世间即为所覆蔽,因此第一句也应作答。作意于此责难后,便说“以此故”等语。其中,“以此”即指“因悭吝与放逸而不显现”之句,用来应答“以何而不显现”这第二句,既适当又更相契。这便是义理所在:即以句来解答句义,应如此看待。此理于下文、于上文亦同。显示巴利原文
Yadi vivicchāpamādānaṃ vasena nappakāsati, evaṃ sati loko nivuto hoti, tasmā paṭhamassa padassāpi vissajjanā kātabbāti codanaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘tena cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tenāti ‘‘vivicchā pamādā nappakāsatī’’ti padena ‘‘kenassu nappakāsatī’’ti dutiyassa padassa vissajjanā yuttā yuttatarāti attho. Padenāti ca padatthaṭṭhena vissajjanāti attho. Padassāti padatthassa pucchitabbassāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Esa nayo heṭṭhā, upari ca.
在“你说何者是涂染?”这一问中,阿逸多应见“我说渴爱是涂染”的解答。因应当追问“何谓渴爱?”,故说“渴爱即是所称的贪爱”。那贪爱如何涂染世间?应如此连缀而了知。因此而有“如世尊所说”等语。其中,即如以贪爱而有涂染之性——显示巴利原文
‘‘Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsī’’ti pañhe ‘‘jappābhilepanaṃ brūmī’’ti vissajjanā tassā ajitena daṭṭhabbā. ‘‘Katamā jappā nāmā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘jappā nāma vuccati taṇhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā taṇhā lokaṃ abhilimpatīti kathaṃ viññāyatīti yojanā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yathāha bhagavā’’tiādi. Tattha yathā yena taṇhāya abhilepanabhāvena –
当人一旦被贪欲征服,那时便是陷入了一片盲目的黑暗。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ratto atthaṃ na jānāti, ratto dhammaṃ na passati; Andhaṃ tamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ rāgo sahate nara’’nti. –
世尊所说的此颂,其要旨是:应如此了知,正是通过那以‘涂染’之义所说的偈颂,而得知‘彼贪爱涂染世间’。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ gāthaṃ bhagavā āha, tathā tena abhilepanabhāvena vuttāya tāya gāthāya sā taṇhā lokaṃ abhilimpatīti viññāyatīti adhippāyo.
在此偈中:‘染著的有情’即是染者,指具足贪欲的有情。依于因,而有果生起,这是‘果’的含义。因能持果,故彼因名为‘法’。‘黑暗’即指盲暗。‘Yaṃ’即‘于何时’,此处的‘Yaṃ’是处格用作主格的用法。当贪欲征服人、征服那具贪者的时候,那时便生起了盲目的黑暗——应如此连接上下文。或者,‘因何贪欲而征服人’的缘故,那时便生起了盲目的黑暗;或者,‘贪欲征服何人’,对此人而言,那时便生起了盲目的黑暗;或者,‘贪欲征服人’,‘何者为征服、何者为制伏’的成就,彼征服、彼制伏即是那盲目的黑暗——应如此连接上下文。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ pana – rajjati sattoti ratto, rāgasamaṅgīsatto. Kāraṇaṃ paṭicca asati pavattati phalanti atthaṃ, phalaṃ. Kāraṇaṃ phalaṃ dhāreti, taṃ kāraṇaṃ dhammaṃ nāma. Andhakāraṃ andhaṃ. Yanti yamhi kāle. Yanti hi bhummatthe paccattavacanaṃ. Yamhi kāle rāgo naraṃ rāgasamaṅgiṃ sahate abhibhavati, tadā kāle andhaṃ andhakāraṃ tamaṃ hotīti yojanā. Rāgo naraṃ yaṃ yasmā sahate, tasmā andhaṃ tamaṃ tadā hotīti vā, rāgo yaṃ naraṃ sahate, tassa narassa andhaṃ tamaṃ tadā hotīti vā, rāgo naraṃ yaṃ sahate abhibhūyate yaṃ sahanaṃ abhibhavanaṃ nipphādeti, taṃ sahanaṃ abhibhavanaṃ andhaṃ andhakāraṃ tamaṃ hotīti vā yojanā.
因为必须说“若染者不知义等,那么如何有渴爱的涂染”,所以说了“此贪爱”等语。其中,对于诸所缘多有执著、多有系缚的有贪者,他那贪爱由于这样多所系缚,便成为渴爱、成为随眠安住者。如此,以此因缘,那里众生世间的贪爱被某种胶著所涂染,犹如污垢一般,称为被渴爱的涂染所涂染,这样来联系。又因为必须说明“渴爱的涂染也是不显现的原因,所以对‘以何而不显现’这第二个问题也应给予回答”,因此说了“以此故”等语。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yadi ratto atthādikaṃ na jānāti, evaṃ sati kathaṃ jappābhilepanaṃ bhavatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘sāyaṃ taṇhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ārammaṇesu āsattibahulassa āsaṅgabahulassa taṇhāsamaṅgissa puggalassa sā ayaṃ taṇhā evaṃ bahuāsaṅgavasena abhijappā pariyuṭṭhānaṭṭhāyinī hoti. Iti karitvā iminā kāraṇena tattha taṇhāya sattaloko kenaci silesena abhilitto makkhito viya jappābhilepena abhilitto nāma bhavatīti yojanā. ‘‘Jappābhilepanaṃ appakāsanassapi kāraṇaṃ bhavati, tasmā ‘kenassu nappakāsatī’ti dutiyapadatthassapi vissajjanā siyā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tena cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
问:“此世间的大恐怖是什么?”对于这第四个问题,阿耆多的回答应视为:“此世间的苦应是大恐怖。”众生由此恐惧,故称为恐怖;大恐怖即是大怖畏。因为要回答“苦有几种”,所以说明“有两种苦”等。此苦有两种,故称二种。因为要回答“哪二种苦”,所以说明“身苦与心苦”。因为要回答“什么是身苦,什么是心苦”,所以说明“凡是身体的苦,这称为苦;凡是心的苦,这称为忧。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Tassa lokassa mahabbhayaṃ ki’’nti imasmiṃ catutthapañhe ‘‘assa lokassa dukkhaṃ mahabbhayaṃ bhave’’ti ayaṃ vissajjanā tassā ajitena daṭṭhabbā. Bhāyati loko etasmāti bhayaṃ, mahantaṃ bhayaṃ mahabbhayaṃ. ‘‘Katividhaṃ dukkha’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘duvidhaṃ dukkha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Dve vidhā assa dukkhassāti duvidhaṃ. ‘‘Katamaṃ duvidhaṃ dukkha’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘kāyikañca cetasikañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Katamaṃ kāyikaṃ, katamaṃ cetasika’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yaṃ kāyikaṃ, idaṃ dukkhaṃ yaṃ cetasikaṃ, idaṃ domanassa’’nti vuttaṃ.
疾病、刀杖等不可爱之色,可能成为众生世间的大恐怖。由于必须说明“为何苦是大恐怖,应当信受”,所以说了“一切众生”等语。其中,一切众生对如上所述的苦感到畏惧。对众生而言,没有与苦相等的其他恐怖,更不用说有超过苦的恐怖了。因为确实没有,也就是没有苦之外的别的恐怖,所以“苦是世间的大恐怖”这句话应当信受。这就是它的意旨。显示巴利原文
Rogādisatthādianiṭṭharūpaṃ sattalokassa mahabbhayaṃ bhaveyya, ‘‘kathaṃ dukkhaṃ mahabbhayaṃ bhaveti saddahetabba’’nti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘sabbe sattā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sabbe sattā yathāvuttassa dukkhassa ubbijjanti, dukkhena samasamaṃ aññaṃ bhayaṃ sattānaṃ natthi, dukkhato uttaritaraṃ vā pana bhayaṃ kuto atthi. Hi yasmā natthi, tasmā dukkhato aññassa bhayassa abhāvato ‘‘dukkhaṃ lokassa mahabbhaya’’nti vacanaṃ saddahitabbanti adhippāyo.
通过“一切众生”等语,表明疾病、刀杖等不可爱色,其根本正是苦。因为可能有人说:“依身与心分为二种的苦,只是苦受而已;若是如此,则行苦与变易苦的大恐怖性便不能成立。”为对治此说,故宣说“三种苦性”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbe sattā’’tiādivacanena rogādisatthādianiṭṭharūpaṃ dukkhamūlamevāti dasseti. ‘‘Kāyikacetasikavasena duvidhaṃ dukkhaṃ dukkhavedanāyeva, evaṃ sati saṅkhāradukkhavipariṇāmadukkhānaṃ mahabbhayabhāvo na āpajjeyyā’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘tisso dukkhatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
因为可能有人问:“三种苦性是在一切众生、一切时中生起,还是有时对某些众生不生起?”所以宣说“其中,世间”等。其中,“其中”指在这三种苦性之中。“世间”指具足财富且少病的众生世间。“有时”指个别地、偶尔地,从自己所作因的苦苦中解脱,或从他人所作因的苦苦中解脱;同样,个别地、偶尔地,长寿的世间从变易苦中解脱。又因有人问“以何因缘而得解脱”,故搁置提问,为显示原因而说“那是什么原因呢”等。在众生世间中,有些是少病的,他们因具足财富与少病而从苦苦中解脱,特别是色界众生得解脱。有些是长寿的,他们因长寿而从变易苦中解脱;特别是无色界众生得解脱,因为无色界众生多安住于舍受等至。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tisso dukkhatā sabbesaṃ sattānaṃ sabbakālesu uppajjanti, kadāci kassaci na uppajjantī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha loko’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tāsu tīsu dukkhatāsu. Lokoti bhogasampanno ceva appābādho ca sattaloko. Odhaso odhiso kadāci karahaci attūpakkamamūlāya dukkhadukkhatāya muccati, kadāci parūpakkamamūlāya dukkhadukkhatāya muccati, tathā odhaso odhiso kadāci karahaci dīghāyuko loko vipariṇāmadukkhatāya muccati, ‘‘kena hetunā muccatī’’ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā hetuṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘taṃ kissa hetū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sattaloke appekacce appābādhā honti, te bhogasampannattā ceva appābādhattā ca dukkhadukkhatāya muccanti, visesato rūpāvacarasattā muccanti. Appekacce dīghāyukāpi honti, te dīghāyukattā vipariṇāmadukkhatāya muccanti; visesato arūpāvacarasattā muccanti arūpāvacarasattānaṃ upekkhāsamāpattibahulattā.
他们从那些苦中的解脱是不定的,因此,由于未能超越那些苦,你们所说的解脱是不定的,我们也已知晓。因为可能有人问:“什么是决定的解脱?”所以宣说“然而,从行苦中”等。其中,“从行苦中”:苦受也因其是造作的而包含在诸行中,应取这样的行苦之义。“世间”指阿罗汉。“被执取”指由果报四蕴及业生色所构成的五蕴,即“执取”;执取本身即是“有余依”,即五蕴;无此的涅槃界,即是“无余依”。以无余依涅槃界而解脱,此处的工具格是表示状态。所谓“涅槃界”,仅指五蕴的息灭,并非无为界。因此,由于行苦具有遍一切世间的性质,含摄一切世间,故说一切世间皆是苦。由此,世尊说“苦是它的大恐怖”。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ tāhi dukkhatāhi muccanaṃ anekantikaṃ hoti, tasmā tāhi anatikkantattā anekantikaṃ muccanaṃ tumhehi vuttaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘katamaṃ ekantikamuccana’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘saṅkhāradukkhatāya panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saṅkhāradukkhatāyāti dukkhavedanāpi saṅkhatattā saṅkhārapariyāpannā, tādisāya saṅkhāradukkhatāyāti attho gahetabbo. Lokoti arahā. Upādīyati vipākakkhandhacatukkakaṭattārūpasaṅkhātaṃ khandhapañcakanti upādi, upādiyeva sesaṃ upādisesaṃ, khandhapañcakaṃ, taṃ natthi etissā nibbānadhātuyāti anupādisesā. Anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā anupādisesanibbānadhātu hutvā muccati, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cāyaṃ karaṇaniddeso. Nibbānadhātūti ca khandhapañcakassa nibbāyanamattaṃ adhippetaṃ, na asaṅkhatadhātu. Tasmāti saṅkhāradukkhatāya sakalalokabyāpakabhāvena sabbalokasaṅgāhakattā vuttappakārasaṅkhāradukkhatāya sabbalokassa dukkhaṃ hoti, iti katvā saṅkhāradukkhatāya sabbalokassa dukkhabhāvato ‘‘dukkhamassa mahabbhaya’’nti bhagavatā vuttaṃ.
根据“以受为缘而有渴爱”的经文,有人可能会产生疑惑:用“苦是它的大恐怖”这句,是否也回答了第三句“你说什么是它的染着”?因此说“由此,对第四句的回答也是合理的”。又因应说明“如何以次第了知问答的合理性”,故有“因此世尊说”等语。由于世尊已了知问答的次第合理性,所以才说“世间被无明所覆”等,因此,你们也应当了知这层合理性。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1, 3, 36; mahāva. 1; vibha. 225) vacanato ‘‘dukkhamassa mahabbhaya’’nti padena ‘‘kissābhilepanaṃ brūsī’’ti tatiyapadassāpi vissajjanā siyāti āsaṅkabhāvato ‘‘tena ca catutthassa padassa vissajjanā yuttā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kena yathākkamaṃ pucchāvissajjanānaṃ yuttatarabhāvo jānitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena yathākkamaṃ pucchāvissajjanānaṃ yuttatarattā yuttatarajānanako bhagavā ‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko’’tiādimāha, tasmā yuttatarabhāvo tumhehi jānitabboti.
在此应当了知:由于提问者不了知世间的盖等,又熟悉外道各宗论义,并对那些宗义及盖等怀有疑惑,因此必须纯粹以众生为立足点来提问,也必须纯粹以众生为立足点来回答。所以,此提问是以众生为立足点而提出的。而为了令不了知者了知,为了断除已生起的疑惑,对此提问所应回答的盖等所缘有四种,因此提问也有四种。然而,作为盖等所缘的世间,在偈颂中是作为依处而被说出的,故说“一个问题已被显示”。这是此处的提问分析;回答分析则应依循提问分析中所说的方法,如“显未见为回答、断疑为回答”等了知。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca lokassa nīvaraṇādīni ajānantena ca titthiyavādesu samayantaresu paricayena ca tesu samayantaresu ceva nīvaraṇādīsu ca saṃsayapakkhandena ekaṃseneva sattādhiṭṭhānena pucchitabbattā, ekaṃseneva sattādhiṭṭhānena byākātabbattā ca sattādhiṭṭhānā pucchā katāti veditabbā. Sā cāyaṃ pucchā ajānantassa jānanatthāya, jātasaṃsayassa ca saṃsayavinodanatthāya vissajjetabbassa nīvaraṇādivisayassa catubbidhattā catubbidhā. Nīvaraṇādīnaṃ pana visayānaṃ loko ca ādhārabhāvena gāthāyaṃ vuttoti ‘‘eko pañho dassito’’ti ayamettha pucchāvicayo, vissajjanāvicayo pana ‘‘adiṭṭhajotanā vissajjanā, vimaticchedanā vissajjanā’’tiādinā pucchāvicaye vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
单一所依处的问答分析,诸师已经分别解说,我们也已了知。因为还应说明:“多处所依处的问答分析,谁能予以分别?我们又当如何了知?为了令我们了知,请为我们分别那项分析”,所以先引出多处所依处的提问,以作显示:显示巴利原文
Ekādhāre pucchāvissajjane vicayo ācariyehi vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘anekādhāre pucchāvissajjane yo vicayo vibhajanāraho, so vicayo kathaṃ amhehi viññāyati, amhākaṃ viññāpanatthāya tasmiṃ vicayaṃ vibhajathā’’ti vattabbabhāvato anekādhāraṃ pucchaṃ tāva nīharitvā dassetuṃ –
“诸流遍处流,”(尊者阿耆多问)
“何为诸流的遮止?”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Savanti sabbadhi sotā, (iccāyasmā ajito,) Sotānaṃ kiṃ nivāraṇaṃ; Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūhi, kena sotā pidhīyare’’ti. (su. ni. 1040; cūḷani. vatthugāthā 59, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 3) –
他诵出偈颂。首先应理解偈颂的含义。‘Savanti’意为流动、转起。‘Sabbadhi’指在作为渴爱等所缘的一切色等诸处中。‘Sotā’指渴爱、贪求、嗔恚等诸流。‘Iccāyasmā’意为‘如是’,是具寿阿耆多这样说。‘Sotānaṃ’即渴爱、贪求、嗔恚等诸流。‘Kiṃ nivāraṇaṃ’问:什么法能成为障碍?什么法能成为守护?‘Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūhi’意为:为了利益一切众生,请您为我们开示这诸流——即渴爱、贪求、嗔恚等——的防护与障碍。‘Kena sotā pidhīyare’意为:以何种能断除的法,诸智者能遮止渴爱、贪求、嗔恚等诸流?他如此询问。这些是所问的问题。显示巴利原文
Gāthamāha . Gāthāttho tāva daṭṭhabbo. Savantīti sandanti, pavattantīti attho. Sabbadhīti taṇhādīnaṃ ārammaṇabhūtesu sabbesu rūpādīsu āyatanesu. Sotāti taṇhābhijjhābyāpādādayo sotā. Iccāyasmāti iti evaṃ āyasmā ajito āha. Sotānanti taṇhābhijjhābyāpādādīnaṃ sotānaṃ. Kiṃ nivāraṇanti kiṃ katamaṃ dhammajātaṃ āvaraṇaṃ bhave, kā katamā dhammajāti rakkhā bhave. Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūhīti sotānaṃ taṇhābhijjhābyāpādādīnaṃ saṃvaraṇaṃ āvaraṇaṃ idaṃ dhammajātaṃ bhaveti sabbasattahitatthaṃ amhākaṃ tvaṃ kathehi. Kena sotāpidhīyareti kena pahāyakadhammena taṇhābhijjhābyāpādādayo sotā paṇḍitehi pidhīyareti pucchatīti pucchitāni.
由于有人会问:‘在这以提问方式说出的“savanti…pe…pidhīyare”偈颂中,问及了多少词语?问及了多少问题?’因此回答说:‘这四个词语被问及,它们是两个问题。’因为有人会问:‘如果这一以提问方式进行的偈颂有四个词语,那么问题也应有四种,为什么说是两个?’所以解释说:‘为什么?因为它们是以多词表述的方式被问及的。’这些由该偈颂所摄取的含义,正是以多词表述的方式被问及的。这里的意思是:‘savanti…pe…pidhīyare’涉及众多词语,但所问及的只是这两个含义:即名为防护的念,以及作为遮止之因的慧。因此,从含义上说,称为两个问题。由于又有人问:‘如何说问题具有双重含义的领域?’为了阐明问题具有双重含义的领域,所以说‘evaṃ samāpannassa’等。其中,‘evaṃ samāpannassa’意为:这个众生世间,或者被这些作为恶趣之因的、称为亲戚衰败等的灾祸所完全陷入、淹没,或者被杀生等的灾祸所完全陷入、淹没;对于如此被淹没或陷入者。‘Evaṃ saṃkili…’显示巴利原文
‘‘Pucchāvasena kathitāya ‘savanti…pe… pidhīyare’ti imāya gāthāya kittakāni padāni pucchitāni, kittakā pañhā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘imāni cattāri padāni pucchitāni, te dve pañhā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pucchāvasena pavattāya imissā gāthāya yadi cattāri padāni siyuṃ, evaṃ santesu pañhāpi catubbidhā siyuṃ, kasmā ‘dve’ti vuttā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘kasmā? Ime hi bahvādhivacanena pucchitā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ime etāya gāthāya gahitā atthā bahvādhivacanena pucchitā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘savanti…pe… pidhīyareti bahūni vacanāni adhikicca pavattā saṃvarasaṅkhātā sati ceva pidahanahetubhūtā paññā cāti ime dve atthāva pucchitā, tasmā atthavasena dve pañhā vuttā vā’’ti. ‘‘Pucchāya duvidhatthavisayatā kathaṃ vuttā’’ti vattabbattā pucchāya duvidhatthavisayataṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘evaṃ samāpannassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evaṃ samāpannassāti imāhi duggatihetubhūtāhi ñātibyasanādisaṅkhātāhi āpadāhi vā, pāṇavadhādīhi āpadāhi vā, samaṃ saha, sabbathā vā ayaṃ sattaloko āpanno ajjhotthaṭo, evaṃ ajjhotthaṭassa vā samāpannassa. Evaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhassāti ñātibyasanādayo vā pāṇavadhādīni āgamma pavattehi dasahi kilesavatthūhi ca ayaṃ sattaloko saṃkiliṭṭho, evaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhassa ca lokassāti samāpannassa ajjhotthaṭassa lokassa vodānaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ kiṃ katamaṃ dhammajātaṃ bhave. Iti evañhi saccaṃ ajitasutte āhāti vitthārattho, pucchāya duvidhatthavisayatā ñātabbāti adhippāyo.
有人可能会问:‘诸流是在一切处为一切世间而流动,还是仅为某一部分?’因此回答说:‘“诸流在一切处流动”,这是对未得定、多行贪求、嗔恚、放逸者而说。’应知其中意趣是:由于多行贪求、嗔恚、放逸,心在色等种种所缘上散乱者,诸流才流动、转起;对于已得定、离贪求、嗔恚、放逸者,则非如此。又有人问:‘什么是贪求?什么是嗔恚?什么是放逸?’于是说‘其中,什么是贪求’等。其中,‘tattha’指在这些贪求、嗔恚、放逸之中。‘什么是贪求?’这是贪,而不仅是贪求的行为。贪是不善根,不仅是贪著的行为。‘什么是嗔恚?’这是嗔,而不仅是嗔恚的行为。嗔是不善根,不仅是毁坏的行为。‘什么是放逸?’这是痴,而不仅是失念。痴是不善根,不仅是迷惑的行为。如此,依此所说方式,由于贪求等是不善根,对于多行贪求、嗔恚、放逸、未得定者,渴爱在色等六处中流动。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kiṃ nu sotā sabbassa lokassa sabbadhi savanti, udāhu, ekaccassevā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘savanti sabbadhi sotāti, asamāhitassa savanti abhijjhābyāpādappamādabahulassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha abhijjhābyāpādappamādabahulattā rūpādīsu nānārammaṇesu vikkhittacittasseva sotā savanti pavattanti, na samāhitassa abhijjhābyāpādappamādavirahitassāti adhippāyo daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Katamā abhijjhā, katamo byāpādo, katamo pamādo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tattha yā abhijjhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu abhijjhābyāpādappamādesu. Yā abhijjhā, ayaṃ lobho, na abhijjhāyanamattaṃ. Lobho ca akusalamūlaṃ, na lubbhanamattaṃ. Yo byāpādo, ayaṃ doso, na byāpajjanamattaṃ. Doso ca akusalamūlaṃ, na dūsanamattaṃ. Yo pamādo, ayaṃ moho, na sativippavāsamattaṃ. Moho ca akusalamūlaṃ, na mūhanamattaṃ. Evaṃ iminā vuttappakārena abhijjhādīnaṃ akusalamūlattā yassa abhijjhābyāpādappamādabahulassa asamāhitassa chasu rūpādīsu āyatanesu taṇhā savanti.
因为应当被问:“那种渴爱有几种?”所以世尊说:“色渴爱……乃至……法渴爱。”又因为应当被问:“对于色渴爱等六种渴爱在色处等六处中流转,我们应当以何种言教而信受?”所以世尊说:“如世尊所说”等。其意趣是:世尊以何种方式说“比丘们,它流动……乃至……被触恼”这样的言教,你们便应以那种方式、依所说之理来信受。在这里,由于眼等处对于色渴爱等六流具有门的作用,世尊依近依处的修辞,将眼等说成好像自己在流动。“Iti”的意思是:依此所说方式,一切从一切眼等门中流动、转起。“Sabbathā”的意思是:以一切方式,即以渴爱、邪执、高举等方式流动和转起。因为应当被问:“为何从一切眼等门中流动、转起,应以一切方式——即渴爱、邪执、高举等方式而了知流动的状态?”所以世尊说“因此他说”等。其中,“tena”的意思是:对于未得定者,贪求、嗔恚等从眼等门,以渴爱、邪执、高举的形态随渴爱等而转起。了知此转起情形的世尊便说:“诸流在一切处流动。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Katividhā sā taṇhā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘rūpataṇhā…pe… dhammataṇhā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Channaṃ rūpataṇhādīnaṃ chasu rūpādiāyatanesu savanaṃ kena ca vacanena amhehi saddahitabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘yathāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Savatīti ca kho, bhikkhave…pe… paṭihaññatī’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ bhagavā yathā yena pakārena āha, tathā tena pakārena vuttanayena vacanena tumhehi saddahitabbanti adhippāyo. Ettha ca cakkhādīnaṃ rūpataṇhādīnaṃ channaṃ sotānaṃ dvārabhāvena pavattattā cakkhādayo nissitūpacāravasena sayaṃ savanto viya bhagavatā vuttā. Itīti evaṃ vuttappakārena sabbā sabbasmā cakkhādidvārato ca savati pavattati. Sabbathā sabbappakārena taṇhāyanamicchābhinivesanaunnamanādippakārena savati pavattatīti attho. ‘‘Kasmā sabbasmā cakkhādidvārato ca savati pavattati, sabbappakārena taṇhāyanamicchābhinivesanaunnamanādippakārena savanabhāvo vijānitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tenāti asamāhitassa abhijjhābyāpādādīnaṃ cakkhādidvārato ca taṇhāyanamicchābhinivesaunnamanākārena taṇhādivasena pavattanato pavattajānanako bhagavā ‘‘savanti sabbadhi sotā’’ti āha.
因为应当被问:“以‘诸流的障碍是什么’这句话,是在问什么?是问诸流的随眠断吗?还是问其违犯断?”所以回答说:“‘诸流的障碍是什么’是问困扰的破坏。”又因为应当被说:“这困扰的破坏是清净,还是出离?”所以说:“这是清净。”因为应当被问:“‘请说诸流的防护,以什么遮止诸流’这句话,是在问什么?是问诸流的困扰吗?还是问其违犯,或是问其根除?”所以回答说:“‘诸流的……遮止’是问随眠的根除。”又因为应当被说:“这随眠的根除是清净,还是出离?”所以说:“这是出离。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Sotānaṃ ‘kiṃ nivāraṇa’nti iminā kiṃ pucchati? Sotānaṃ anusayappahānaṃ pucchati kiṃ? Udāhu vītikkamappahānaṃ pucchatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘sotānaṃ kiṃ nivāraṇanti pariyuṭṭhānavighātaṃ pucchatī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ pariyuṭṭhānavighātaṃ vodānaṃ, udāhu vuṭṭhānaṃ ki’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘idaṃ vodāna’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūhi, ‘kena sotā pidhīyare’ti iminā kiṃ pucchati? Sotānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānaṃ pucchati kiṃ? Udāhu vītikkamanaṃ, samugghāṭaṃ vā pucchati ki’’nti vattabbattā sotānaṃ…pe… pidhīyareti anusayasamugghāṭaṃ pucchatī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ anusayasamugghāṭaṃ vodānaṃ kiṃ, udāhu vuṭṭhānaṃ ki’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘idaṃ vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ.
‘诸流在一切处流动’等问题的分析,已由阿阇梨说出,我们也已了知;因为应当被说:“对于那个问题,什么是解答的分析?”所以说:“其中,是解答”等。在那个问题中——显示巴利原文
‘‘Savanti sabbadhi sotā’’tiādipucchāvicayo ācariyena vutto, amhehi ca ñāto; tāya pucchāya ‘‘katamo vissajjanavicayo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tattha vissajjanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pucchāyaṃ –
於世间种种流,(阿耆多!世尊说:)
正念是对它们的阻碍;
我说诸流的防护,它们因智慧而得以关闭。”(《小部·经集》1041,《小品·本事偈》第60偈,《阿耆多童子问义释》第4)——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yāni sotāni lokasmiṃ, (ajitāti bhagavā,) Sati tesaṃ nivāraṇaṃ; Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmi, paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti. (su. ni. 1041 cūḷani. vatthugāthā 60, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 4) –
应视为对偈颂的回答。对于这首偈颂:“阿耆多,世间流转的诸流,它们如何流?诸流的阻碍是什么?我说,诸流的防护是什么?以什么慧来关闭诸流?”应作如下理释:此处,“念”是指与观慧相应的正念。“以慧”是指以道慧。“来关闭”是指通过不给其生起的机会而予以关闭、断绝。显示巴利原文
Gāthā vissajjanāti daṭṭhabbā. Tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ ajita lokasmiṃ yāni sotāni savanti, tesaṃ sotānaṃ yaṃ nivāraṇaṃ, sā sati hoti; taṃ satiṃ sotānaṃ saṃvaranti ahaṃ brūmi; ete sotā paññāya pidhīyareti yojanā kātabbā. Tattha satīti vipassanāpaññāya sampayuttā sati. Paññāyāti maggapaññāya. Pidhīyareti uppajjituṃ appadānavasena pidhīyanti pacchijjanti.
世尊说:“正念是它们的阻碍,是诸流的防护”——因为当被问及:“依任何念,诸流的防护作用得以成就?依何种殊胜的念,诸流的防护作用得以成就?究竟依何种念,诸流的防护作用得以成就?”时,故有“身至念”等语。此中,“身至念”是指系念于色身、观照头发等的无常等法而生起的、与观智相应的正念。“已修习”是指依观照身至念为无常、苦、无我、厌离、离贪、灭、舍弃而修习。因为如此观无常者能舍断常想;观苦者能舍断乐想;观无我者能舍断我想;厌离者能舍断欢喜;离贪者能舍断贪;观灭者能舍断集;观舍弃者能舍断取。“多修习”是指如前所述,经历一日、一月、一年乃至七年而修习。“眼”是指作为贪等生起之门而安立的眼,此处的“眼”字应视为带有鼻音。于眼,不执取——是指不执取于眼门生起的伴随着贪等的心相续,或不拉扯具备此心之人,即于可意色上不执取;于不可意色上不撞击。依已修习、多修习的身至念,于耳,不执取于可意声……乃至……于不可意声上不撞击。理释应随顺其生起的次第来理解。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sati tesaṃ nivāraṇaṃ sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmī’’ti bhagavā āha – ‘‘yāya kāyaci satiyā sotānaṃ saṃvaraṇakiccaṃ siddhaṃ kiṃ, visiṭṭhāya satiyā sotānaṃ saṃvaraṇakiccaṃ siddhaṃ kiṃ, katamāya satiyā sotānaṃ saṃvaraṇakiccaṃ siddha’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘kāyagatāya satiyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kāyagatāya satiyāti rūpakāye gataṃ kesādikaṃ aniccādito vipassitvā pavattāya vipassanāñāṇasampayuttāya satiyā. Bhāvitāyāti kāyagataṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato nibbindanato virajjanato nirodhanato paṭinissajjanato anupassanāvasena bhāvitāya. Evañhi aniccato anupassanto niccasaññaṃ pajahati; dukkhato anupassanto sukhasaññaṃ pajahati; anattato anupassanto attasaññaṃ pajahati; nibbindanto nandiṃ pajahati; virajjanto rāgaṃ pajahati; nirodhento samudayaṃ pajahati; paṭinissajjanto ādānaṃ pajahatīti. Bahulīkatāyāti yathāvuttappakārena divasampi māsampi saṃvaccharampi sattasaṃvaccharampi bahulīkatāya. Cakkhunti abhijjhādipavattidvārabhāvena ṭhitaṃ cakkhuṃ, niggahitāgamaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nāviñchatīti cakkhudvāre pavattaṃ abhijjhādisahitaṃ cittasantānaṃ, taṃsamaṅgīpuggalaṃ vā nākaḍḍhati, manāpikesu rūpesu nāviñchatīti yojanā. Amanāpikesu rūpesu na paṭihaññati. Kāyagatāya satiyā bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya sotaṃ nāviñchati. Manāpikesu saddesu…pe… amanāpikesu saddesu na paṭihaññatīti yojanā yathāsambhavato kātabbā.
问:“以什么原因而不执取、不撞击?”答:“因诸根已得防护、已得遮止,故不执取、不撞击。”问:“由何种守护而令它们得以防护、得以遮止?”答:“由正念的守护而令它们得以防护、得以遮止。”因为理应说明“我们凭什么相信,由于正念的守护而得以防护、得以遮止”,故说“因此”等语。此中,“因此”的意思是:世尊了知由于正念的守护而得以防护、得以遮止,故说了“正念是它们的阻碍”这句话。由这句话,你们应当相信,由于正念的守护而得以防护、得以遮止——此处应视为此理释侧重于前分慧的随转功能。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kena kāraṇena nāviñchati paṭihaññatī’’ti pucchati, indriyānaṃ saṃvutanivāritattā nāviñchati na paṭihaññatīti vissajjeti. ‘‘Kenārakkhena te saṃvutanivāritā’’ti pucchati, satiārakkhena te saṃvutanivāritāti vissajjeti. ‘‘Satiārakkhena saṃvutanivāritabhāvo kena amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tenāti tasmā satiārakkhena saṃvutanivāritattā saṃvutanivāritajānanako bhagavā ‘‘sati tesaṃ nivāraṇa’’nti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena tumhehi satiārakkhena saṃvutanivāritabhāvo saddahitabboti pubbabhāge paññā satyānugāti kiccamevettha adhikanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
关于“正念是它们的阻碍”这一回答的详细义理,阿阇梨已经解说过,我们也已了知。至于“它们被慧所关闭”这一回答的详细义理,由于应当说明“我们应如何了知”,为了开显“它们被慧所关闭”的回答之义,便开示了“以慧舍断随眠”等语。其中,“以慧”是指以道慧。“随眠”是指遇到适当因缘便有能力生起的欲贪随眠等。“被舍断”的意思为:以慧舍断随眠时,依于理的执取也同样被舍断。为何舍断后而说为“被舍断”?答:因为随眠被舍断,所以执取亦被舍断。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sati tesaṃ nivāraṇa’’nti vissajjanassa vitthārattho ācariyena vutto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti vissajjanassa vitthārattho ‘‘kathaṃ amhehi jānitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti vissajjanassa vitthāratthaṃ dassento ‘‘paññāya anusayā pahīyantī’’tiādimāha. Tattha paññāyāti maggapaññāya. Anusayāti anurūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ labhitvā uppajjanārahā kāmarāgānusayādayo. Pahīyanti samucchedavasena anusayesu paññāya pahīnesu pariyuṭṭhānāpi atthato pahīyanti. Kissa pahīnattā ‘‘pahīyantī’’ti vuccati? Anusayassa pahīnattā pariyuṭṭhānā pahīyantīti vissajjeti.
由于应当问:“依靠随眠的舍断,执取的舍断像什么呢?”因此说“那就像有根的树”等。其中,就如同有根的树,用锄头等掘开泥土,将根毫无剩余地拔除时,那棵树的花、果、嫩叶、新枝等相续,也同样被锄头等彻底截断一样;同样地,以阿罗汉道智舍断随眠时,随眠的执取相续也被截断、关闭、遮蔽。被什么截断?被慧、被道慧所截断,应作如此义解。又因为应当说“如何信解被慧截断?”而说“因此”等语。其意指:由“它们被慧所关闭”这句话,随眠的执取相续被慧截断,这应当被智者所信受。显示巴利原文
‘‘Taṃ anusayappahānena pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ kiṃ viya bhavatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘taṃ yathā khandhavantassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha khandhavantassa rukkhassa kudālādinā bhūmiṃ khaṇitvā anavasesamūluddharaṇe kate tassa rukkhassa pupphaphalapallavaṅkurasantatipi kudālādinā samucchinnāva bhavati yathā, evaṃ arahattamaggañāṇena anusayesu pahīnesu anusayānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānasantati samucchinnā pidahitā paṭicchannā bhavati. Kena samucchinnā bhavati? Paññāya maggapaññāya samucchinnā bhavatīti atthayojanā daṭṭhabbā. ‘‘Paññāya paricchinnabhāvo kathaṃ saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti vacanato anusayānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānasantatiyā paññāya paricchinnabhāvo paṇḍitehi saddahitabboti adhippāyo.
在这些问答中,对于不知或怀疑诸流的防护与关闭者,因为应当问防护与关闭之法,故“依法而问”即是问的考察;因为应当以念与慧回答,故“依法而答”即是答的考察,应如是知。其中,“世间以何所覆”等问,是依障碍、疑、放逸、掉举而成为四种,但依世间所依则说为一问;同样地,“诸流处处流”等问,依防护与关闭虽为二种,但取其同义而依一所依应说为“一问”,或因诸流众多而说为“多问”;然而并未这样说,而是不触及流,仅依防护与关闭,于“诸流处处流”等中说有“二问”。随顺于此理,于“世间以何所覆”等中,不触及世间,仅依障碍等四种,亦应说为“四问”——应当如是见此理则。显示巴利原文
Imesu pañhāvissajjanesu sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ, pidhānañca ajānantena vā saṃsayitena vā saṃvarapidhānānaṃ pucchitabbattā dhammādhiṭṭhānā pucchāti pucchāvicayo ceva satipaññānaṃ vissajjetabbattā dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ vissajjananti vissajjanavicayo ca veditabbo. Etesu ca ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’tiādiko pañho nīvaraṇavicikicchāpamādajappānaṃ vasena catubbidhopi lokādhiṭṭhānavasena eko pañhoti vutto, evaṃ sati ‘‘savanti sabbadhi sotā’’tiādikopi pañho saṃvarapidhānānaṃ vasena duvidhopi ekatthavasena gahetvā ekādhiṭṭhānavasena ‘‘eko pañho’’ti vattabbo, sotānaṃ bahubhāvato vā ‘‘bahupañho’’ti vattabbo; tathā pana avatvā sote anāmasitvā saṃvarapidhānānaṃ vasena ‘‘savanti sabbadhi sotā’’tiādimhi ‘‘dve pañhā’’ti vuttā. Tadanusārena ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’tiādimhipi lokaṃ anāmasitvā nīvaraṇādīnaṃ catunnaṃ vasena ‘‘cattāro pañhā’’tipi vattabbāti ayaṃ nayo dassitoti nayadassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
说法时,把握所说法的脉络,依自己所制定的规范,对于所问的问题,既不搁置问题,也不作承诺便予以解答——这样的‘简择理趣’,已由阿阇梨分别解说,我们也已了知。应当说:‘说法时,把握所说法的脉络,对于所问的问题,搁置该问题,又作出承诺,而后解答——这种简择理趣如何被我们所理解?为令我等理解,请就此简择加以分别。’为了显示其中应简择的方式,在‘诸流’等偈颂中显示了简择方式之后,紧接着说‘慧与念’。显示巴利原文
Desanākāle vuttadhammassa anusandhimaggahetvā attanā racitaniyāmeneva pucchitapañhassa ceva pañhaṃ aṭṭhapetvā, paṭiññañca akatvā vissajjanassa ca vicayahāro ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘desanākāle vuttadhammassa anusandhiṃ gahetvā pucchitapañhassa ceva taṃ pañhaṃ ṭhapetvā, paṭiññañca katvā vissajjanassa ca yo vicayo hāro vibhatto, so vicayahāro kathaṃ amhehi viññāyati, amhākaṃ viññāpanatthāya tasmiṃ vicayaṃ vibhajethā’’ti vattabbabhāvato tesu vicetabbākāraṃ dassento ‘‘yāni sotānī’’tiādigāthāya vicayākāradassanānantaraṃ ‘‘paññā ceva sati cā’’tiādimāha.
此处应先了知偈颂的含义:通过断除随眠而说诸流止息的慧,以及通过断除缠缚而说诸流止息的念,这就是慧,这就是念。以此慧与念,无余俱生的名与色,这一切在何处止息时,能无余地灭尽?贤者!我这样被问:‘世尊,请您为我宣说这止息。’如是,尊者阿耆多向世尊请问。显示巴利原文
Tattha gāthāttho tāva viññātabbo – yāya paññāya anusayappahānena sotanirujjhanaṃ vuttaṃ, yāya satiyā ca pariyuṭṭhānappahānena sotanirujjhanaṃ vuttaṃ, sāyaṃ paññā ceva sāyaṃ sati ca tāhi paññāsatīhi asesaṃ sahuppannaṃ nāmañceva rūpañca, etaṃ sabbaṃ kattha nirujjhamāne asesaṃ uparujjhatīti mārisa me mayā puṭṭho tvaṃ bhagavā mayhaṃ etaṃ nirujjhanaṃ pabrūhi, iti āyasmā ajito bhagavantaṃ pucchati.
阿耆多!你所问的这止息问题,你所问于我的,我为你宣说那止息。在识灭处,与慧、念俱行的名与色,与识的灭尽一起,无余地同时灭尽。在此识灭处,这一切与识灭尽一起,于同一刹那,无前无后地灭尽。这识灭不超越那名色的灭,那名色的灭也不超越这识灭。显示巴利原文
Ajita tvaṃ yametaṃ pañhaṃ pucchitaṃ nirujjhanaṃ maṃ apucchi, ahaṃ te tava taṃ nirujjhanaṃ vadāmi. Yattha viññāṇanirodhe paññāsatisahitaṃ nāmañca rūpañca viññāṇassa nirodhena saha ekato asesaṃ uparujjhati, ettha viññāṇanirodhe etaṃ sabbaṃ viññāṇanirodhena ekato ekakkhaṇe apubbaṃ acarimaṃ uparujjhati, etaṃ viññāṇanirodhaṃ tassa nāmarūpassa nirodho nātivattati, taṃ taṃ nāmarūpanirodhaṃ so so viññāṇanirodho nātivattatīti.
在这一问题上,这位阿耆多问的是什么?是只问灭尽,还是另有所问?因此应说“此问题中,他问的是脉络”等。其中,“此”指那位请问问题的尊者阿耆多。“问题”指“慧与念”等问题。如果所问的是脉络,那么“这一切于何处灭尽”的提问是否不合理?并非不合理,因为“依此灭尽而连接”的意义得以成立,故称为脉络。因此说:“问脉络者问什么……乃至……涅槃界。”由于问脉络时也问及无余依涅槃界,所以“这一切在何处灭尽”的提问是合理的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tasmiṃ pañhe ayaṃ ajito kiṃ pucchati? Uparujjhanameva pucchati, udāhu aññaṃ pucchatī’’ti vattabbato ‘‘ayaṃ pañhe anusandhiṃ pucchatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ayanti yo āyasmā ajito pañhaṃ apucchīti ayaṃ ajito. Pañheti ‘‘paññā ceva sati cā’’tiādipañhe. Yadi anusandhiṃ pucchati, evaṃ sati ‘‘katthetaṃ uparujjhatī’’ti pucchanaṃ ayuttaṃ bhaveyyāti? Na, anusandhīyati etena upanirujjhanenāti anusandhīti atthasambhavato. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anusandhiṃ pucchanto kiṃ…pe… nibbānadhātu’’nti. Anusandhipucchanena anupādisesanibbānadhātuyāpi pucchanato ‘‘katthetaṃ uparujjhatī’’ti pucchanaṃ yuttameva.
既然应当问:“所问的无余依涅槃界依何种行道而证得?”为了开显称为四圣谛业处修习的行道及其所缘,而说“三谛”等。其中,“有为”指由业等诸缘和合、共同造作苦等,故称有为。“灭法”——止息即是灭,法亦是灭法,因此苦等诸法以灭为法性,应如此理解。为了显示三谛的自相,说“苦、集、道”。苦、集、道这三谛被称为有为。由于应当问:“灭谛是什么?”而说“灭是无为”。这里也应当说“灭法”。因为非由业等缘所造作,故是无为。因为没有生灭,故是不灭法。由于应当问:“在所应断与能断的谛中,以何种能断断何种所断?于何地断除?”而说“其中,集于二地”等。其中,“二地”指见地与修地。“欲贪”指欲有贪。“色贪”指色有贪。“无色贪”指无色有贪。依结的差别,十结得以断除,如此连接。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yā anupādisesanibbānadhātu pucchitā, taṃ katamāya paṭipadāya adhigacchatī’’ti pucchitabbattā catusaccakammaṭṭhānabhāvanāsaṅkhātaṃ paṭipadaṃ visayena saha dassetuṃ ‘‘tīṇī saccānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saṅkhatānīti kammādipaccayehi samecca sambhūya dukkhādīni karīyantīti saṅkhatāni. Nirodhadhammānīti nirujjhanaṃ nirodho, dhammopi nirodhadhammova, tasmā nirodho dhammo sabhāvo yesaṃ dukkhādīnanti nirodhadhammānīti atthova gahetabbo. Tāni tīṇi saccāni sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘dukkhaṃ samudayo maggo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tīṇi dukkhasamudayamaggasaccāni saṅkhatānīti vuttāni, ‘‘kiṃ nirodhasacca’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘nirodho asaṅkhato’’ti vuttaṃ. Idha ‘‘nirodhadhammo’’tipi vattabbaṃ. Kammādipaccayehi asaṅkhatattā asaṅkhato. Uppādanirodhābhāvato anirodhadhammo. ‘‘Pahāyakapahātabbesu saccesu katamena pahāyakena katamo pahātabbo, katamāya bhūmiyā pahīno’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha samudayo dvīsu bhūmīsū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha dvīsu bhūmīsūti dassanabhāvanābhūmīsu. Kāmacchandoti kāmabhavarāgo. Rūparāgoti rūpabhavarāgo. Arūparāgoti arūpabhavarāgo. Saṃyojanabhedato dasa saṃyojanāni pahīyantīti yojanā.
12 应断的结已依见地与修地的差别而被分别,我们也已了知。既然应当说“依根的差别,它们是如何被分别的”,故说“其中,三种”等。或者,由于应当问:“在应断的结中,哪些结以哪一根作为自己的能断而灭尽?”而说“其中,三种”等。它们依止于各自的能断,将能断作为能断之后,以不再生起的方式灭尽。由于应当问:“未知当知根与已知根是结灭尽的因,具知根又是什么的因?”而说“然而”等。其中,具知根——阿罗汉以此了知“我生已尽”,这了知的作用即是具知根,是在尽、生尽、阿罗汉果中生起的智。具知根——阿罗汉以此了知“不再有未来的此世状态”,这了知的作用也是具知根。然而,在不生起、不产生、阿罗汉果中生起的智,被称为具知根,这是知的作用。以根智作为能断,结得以灭尽。由于应当说:“那些智何时灭尽?”而说“其中,那在尽……”等。显示巴利原文
12. Pahātabbasaṃyojanāni dassanabhūmibhāvanābhūmibhedena vibhattāni, amhehipi ñātāni, ‘‘indriyabhedato kathaṃ vibhattānī’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘tattha tīṇī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘pahātabbasaṃyojanesu katamāni saṃyojanāni katamaṃ indriyaṃ attano pahāyakaṃ katvā nirujjhantī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha tīṇī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Adhiṭṭhāya attano pahāyakaṃ katvā nirujjhanti anuppādavasena. ‘‘Anaññātaññassāmītindriyañca aññindriyañca saṃyojanānaṃ nirujjhanahetu hotu, aññātāvindriyaṃ kissa hetū’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ yena aññātāvindriyena arahā ‘‘me jāti khīṇā’’ti evaṃ jānāti, idaṃ jānanahetu aññātāvindriyaṃ khaye jātikkhaye arahattaphale pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Yaṃ yena aññātāvindriyena arahā ‘‘itthattāya aparaṃ na bhavissāmī’’ti pajānāti, idaṃ pajānanahetu aññātāvindriyaṃ. Anuppāde pana anuppajjane arahattaphale pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ aññātāvindriyaṃ jānanahetu hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Indriyañāṇāni pahāyakāni katvā saṃyojanāni nirujjhanti, ‘‘tāni ñāṇāni kadā nirujjhantī’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘tattha yañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
因为应如此问:“未知当知根在证得已知根时灭尽,已知根在证得阿罗汉时灭尽,具知根何时灭尽?”故而说“其中,那在尽……”等。其中,“二”是指依作用的差别而说为二,但就自性而言,实则为一。显示巴利原文
‘‘Anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ aññindriyaṃ pāpuṇantassa nirujjhatu, aññindriyaṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇantassa nirujjhatu, aññātāvindriyaṃ kadā nirujjhatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yañca khaye’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha dveti kiccabhedena dve, sabhāvato pana ekāva.
因为应说:“了知的作用也只有一个,如何有二?”所以讲“再者”等。这是说,依所缘与慧的差别而获得两个名称。那个慧——在前面偈颂中,以遮蔽诸流的作用而被说的慧,由于它以种种方式了知的自性,故名为慧。那个念——依所见所缘,以不漂浮、深入之义,故名为念。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pajānanakiccampi ekameva, kathaṃ dve siyu’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ārammaṇapaññābhedena dve nāmāni labbhantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sāti yā paññā pubbagāthāyaṃ sotapidhānakiccena vuttā, sā paññā pakārehi jānanasabhāvena paññā nāma. Yathādiṭṭhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ apilāpanaṭṭhena ogāhanaṭṭhena sati nāma.
13 “慧及念二者”这一句的意义,阿阇梨已经分析过,我们也已了知;而“名色”这一句的意义,我们应如何了知呢?因为应当这样提问,所以在分析名色时,他说:“此中,那些五取蕴……”等。其中,一个“此中”是指业与果报轮转的差别,即三有之中;另一个“此中”是指名为五取蕴的名色集合体之中。“五根”是指眼等五根。“与识相应”并非从相应缘的意义而说,而是就多数人未加分析便执取的性质而说。然而,通达分别的人应当这样分别而把握:“名为与识相应,色则不与识相应,它们是俱生的。”“它的”是指与慧、念俱生的名色的“灭”,即无余依涅槃界。显示巴利原文
13. ‘‘Paññā ceva sati cā’’ti padassa attho ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘nāmarūpañcā’ti padassa attho kathaṃ amhehi ñātabbo’’ti vattabbattā nāmarūpaṃ vibhajanto ‘‘tattha ye pañcupādānakkhandhā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti kammavipākavaṭṭabhede bhavattaye. Tatthāti pañcupādānakkhandhasaṅkhātanāmarūpasamudāye. Pañcindriyānīti cakkhādipañcindriyāni . Viññāṇasampayuttanti sampayuttapaccayattaṃ sandhāya na vuttaṃ, pacurajanassa pana avibhajitvā gahaṇīyasabhāvamattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Vibhāgaṃ jānantehi pana ‘‘nāmaṃ viññāṇasampayuttaṃ, rūpaṃ pana na viññāṇasampayuttaṃ, sahajāta’’nti vibhajitvā gahetabbaṃ. Tassāti paññāsatisahitassa nāmarūpassa. Nirodhanti anupādisesanibbānadhātuṃ.
尊者阿耆多在《彼岸道品》中向世尊请问时,这样说道:“慧与念二者……在此何处灭尽?”由于应当如此提问:“‘慧与念二者’等偈颂所问的无余依涅槃界,应当通过何种证得而证得?”因此,它是通过四神足之门、通过圣道证得之门而证得的,而四神足的修习又以四根为根本。所以,为了拣出那些作为根本的四根来开示,他说:“此中,念与慧”等。当念——也就是对善与不善法之趣向的探寻——成就时,定必然成就;而通过提及念,在偈颂中即意指断除缠缚,又由于断除缠缚,定的作用便明显了,因此他说:“念是二根,即念根与定根。”慧则通过以四正勤为体的精进而成就对随眠的断除,离开精进便不能成就,因此说:“慧是二根,即慧根与精进根。”显示巴利原文
Bhagavantaṃ pucchanto āyasmā ajito ‘‘paññā ceva…pe… katthetaṃ uparujjhatī’’ti evaṃ pārāyane āha. ‘‘Paññā cevātiādigāthāya yā anupādisesanibbānadhātu pucchitā, sā anupādisesanibbānadhātu katamena adhigamena pattabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā caturiddhipādamukhena ariyamaggādhigamamukhena pattabbā, caturiddhipādabhāvanāya ca cattārindriyāni mūlabhūtāni, tasmā mūlabhūtāni tāni cattārindriyāni niddhāretvā dassento ‘‘tattha sati ca paññā cā’’tiādimāha. Kusalākusaladhammagatiyo samanvesamānāya satiyā sijjhamānāya ekantena samādhi nipphādetabbo, satiggahaṇena ca pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ gāthāyaṃ adhippetaṃ, pariyuṭṭhānappahānena ca samādhikiccaṃ pākaṭanti āha ‘‘sati dve indriyāni satindriyañca samādhindriyañcā’’ti. Paññāya anusayasamugghātaṃ catubbidhasammappadhānasaṅkhātena vīriyena sijjhati, na vinā tenāti vuttaṃ ‘‘paññā dve indriyāni paññindriyañca vīriyindriyañcā’’ti.
在这四种如前所说的根中,当它们于前行阶段或道刹那成就时,与之相应的那种信解、安立便得以成就,这种称为信解、安立的法聚——信根,也就成就了。因为应当这样提问:“在那些作为根本的根成就时,依于哪一根,哪一法得以成就?”为了开示“依此而成就此”,他说:“此中,那种以信为主导的……”等。其中,“此中”是指于念等之中。“以信为主导的”是指:以作为缘的信而成就的欲为主,故为以信为主导;由于以信为主导,而应令生起的心一境性,故为以信为主导。“欲定”是指:以欲为首而生起的定,或者与欲为主相应而在前行阶段生起的定,称为欲定;“断”是断的因,应如此连接。而“断”的意思是:以此欲定而断除被镇伏的烦恼,因此这里的“断”应取具格的意义。“以思择力”是指以遍作力。“以修习力”是指以广大修习力。显示巴利原文
Imesu yathāvuttesu catūsu indriyesu pubbabhāge vā maggakkhaṇe vā sijjhantesu taṃsampayuttā yā saddahanā okappanā siddhā, idaṃ saddahanaokappanasaṅkhātaṃ dhammajātaṃ saddhindriyaṃ siddhaṃ, ‘‘tesu mūlabhūtesu indriyesu siddhesu katamena indriyena katamo dhammo siddho’’ti pucchitabbattā iminā ayaṃ siddhoti dassento ‘‘tattha yā saddhādhipateyyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti satyādīsu. Saddhādhipateyyāti paccayabhūtāya saddhāya siddho chando adhipatīti saddhādhipati, saddhādhipatinā pavattetabbā cittekaggatāti saddhādhipateyyā. Chandasamādhīti chandaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pavattito samādhi vā chandādhipatinā sampayutto pubbabhāge pavatto samādhi vā chandasamādhi, pahānaṃ pahānahetu hotīti yojanā kātabbā. Pahānanti ca pajahati vikkhambhitakilese etena chandasamādhināti pahānanti karaṇasādhanattho gahetabbo. Paṭisaṅkhānabalenāti parikammabalena. Bhāvanābalenāti mahaggatabhāvanābalena.
因为应当说:“这欲定本身单独就是断”,所以宣说了“此中,那些出息入息”等文。其中,“此中”是指于那已得定的心、于心的生起之中。通过“在那个已得定的心的生起中,出息……”等语句,以出息等为首,摄取了能生出息等的精进行;而这些精进行,只要修习尚未圆满,就由于一再随念而称为“随念”,由于一再思惟而称为“思惟”。然而,像这样所说的“随念与思惟,这些是行”的这种先前所说的欲定,或者由于镇伏烦恼及彼分断,而称为“断”或“断因的精勤”。因为应当这样提问:“这些所说的行等,是在修习什么?”所以说了“这些行……”等文。其中,应这样连接:“他修习具足欲定精进行之神足,这些行及彼二者,都依于远离、依于离欲、依于灭、向于舍而转。”显示巴利原文
‘‘So chandasamādhi sayaṃ kevalova pahāna’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘tattha ye assāsapassāsā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ samāhite citte cittuppāde. ‘‘Tasmiṃ samāhite cittuppāde assāsā’’tiādinā assāsādisīsena assāsādijanakā vīriyasaṅkhārā gahitā, te ca yāva bhāvanāpāripūrī, tāva punappunaṃ saraṇato ca sarā, punappunaṃ saṅkappato ca saṅkappā. Yo pana ‘‘sarasaṅkappā, ime saṅkhārā cā’’ti evaṃ vuttappakāro purimako chandasamādhi vā kilesavikkhambhanatāya ca tadaṅgappahānatāya ca pahānaṃ pahānahetupadhānaṃ vā, ‘‘ime vuttappakārā saṅkhārādayo kiṃ bhāventī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘ime ca saṅkhārā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ime saṅkhārā ca tadubhayañca chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ vivekanissitaṃ virāganissitaṃ nirodhanissitaṃ vossaggapariṇāmiṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāvetīti yojanā.
“具足欲定与精勤行”:欲即是主导,故为欲主导;欲主导之定,即欲主导定。世尊曾这样说过:“比丘们,若比丘以欲为主导,便能得定。”或者,以欲为因之定,或以欲为首之定,称为欲定;这是指以欲主导为缘而生起的定。作为精勤之行,便称为精勤行;以“精勤”一词排除了有为行等。欲定与精勤行合在一起,即为欲定精勤行;具足彼者,即具足欲……乃至……具足;那……乃至……已至。能成就、能圆满、能生起,故为“神”;部分,即是神足;神本身就是足、就是部分,故为神足,这便是第四神足。又或者,众生由此而成就、增长、达到殊胜,故为“神”;依此而达到,故为“足”;神之足,故为神足。虽然就通称的意义而说为“神足”,但由于宣说了“具足欲定精勤行”,所以应理解为欲神足;他修习、增长那神足、那欲神足,这便是它的意义。显示巴利原文
Chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgatanti chando eva adhipati chandādhipati, chandādhipatisamādhi. Tena vuttaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘chandaṃ ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu adhipatiṃ karitvā labhati samādhi’’nti (vibha. 432). Chandahetuko vā samādhi, chandādiko vā samādhi chandasamādhi, chandādhipatissa paccayuppanno samādhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Padhānabhūtā saṅkhārā padhānasaṅkhārā, padhānasaddena saṅkhatasaṅkhārādayo nivattāpitā, chandasamādhi ca padhānasaṅkhārā cāti chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārā, tehi samannāgato chanda…pe… samannāgato, taṃ…pe… gataṃ. Ijjhati samijjhati nippajjatīti iddhi, koṭṭhāso, iddhi eva pādo koṭṭhāsoti iddhipādo, iddhipādacatuttho. Ijjhanti vā tāya sattā iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti iddhi, pajjati etenāti pādo, iddhiyā pādoti iddhipādo. Iddhipādoti sāmaññatthavasena vuttopi ‘‘chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgata’’nti vuttattā chandiddhipādova gahetabbo, taṃ iddhipādaṃ taṃ chandiddhipādaṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti attho.
依止于远离、依止于离欲:于内观刹那,依作用而缘彼分远离,依意向而缘出离远离;于道刹那,依作用而缘正断远离,依所缘而缘出离远离。依止于离欲:于内观刹那,依作用而缘彼分离欲,依意向而缘出离远离;于道刹那,依作用而缘正断离欲,依所缘而缘出离离欲。依止于灭:于内观刹那,依作用而缘彼分灭,依意向而缘出离灭;于道刹那,依作用而缘正断灭,依所缘而缘出离灭。“导向舍遣”:此处,舍遣有舍离舍遣与投入舍遣两种。其中,于内观刹那,依彼分而有舍离舍遣,依心倾向涅槃而有投入舍遣;于道刹那,依正断而有舍离舍遣,依以涅槃为所缘而有投入舍遣。应作如是分别而了知。“导向舍遣”意为:导向如上所说的舍遣之义,或已导向而令其成熟、作成熟。这便是导向舍遣者,即那导向舍遣者。显示巴利原文
Vivekanissitaṃ virāganissitanti vipassanākkhaṇe kiccato tadaṅgavivekanissitaṃ, ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ, maggakkhaṇe pana kiccato samucchedavivekanissitaṃ, ārammaṇato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ. Virāganissitanti vipassanākkhaṇe kiccato tadaṅgavirāganissitaṃ, ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ, maggakkhaṇe pana kiccato samucchedavirāganissitaṃ , ārammaṇato nissaraṇavirāganissitaṃ. Nirodhanissitanti vipassanākkhaṇe kiccato tadaṅganirodhanissitaṃ, ajjhāsayato nissaraṇanirodhanissitaṃ, maggakkhaṇe kiccato samucchedanirodhanissitaṃ, ārammaṇato nissaraṇanirodhanissitaṃ. Vossaggapariṇāminti ettha pariccāgavossaggapakkhandanavossaggavasena vossaggo duvidho. Tatthapi vipassanākkhaṇe tadaṅgavasena pariccāgavossaggo, nibbānaninnabhāvena pakkhandanavossaggo, maggakkhaṇe samucchedavasena pariccāgavossaggo, ārammaṇakaraṇena nibbānapakkhandanavossaggoti vibhajitvā gahetabbo. Yathāvuttavossaggatthaṃ pariṇamati, pariṇataṃ vā paripacati paripacanaṃ karotīti vossaggapariṇāmī, taṃ vossaggapariṇāmiṃ.
导师已宣说欲神足之修相,我等也已了知。然而,由于应当说明“我等应如何了知精进神足之修相”,故说“其中,凡以精进为主宰”等语句。其义理应依前文所说之理而了知。然而,我当将略摄而置的文句,以广释而安立。如何呢?——显示巴利原文
Chandiddhipādabhāvanākāro ācariyena vutto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ vīriyiddhipādabhāvanākāro amhehi vijānitabbo’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘tattha yā vīriyādhipateyyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho heṭṭhā vuttanayānusāreneva viññeyyo. Saṃkhittavasena pana ṭhapitaṃ pāṭhaṃ vitthārato ṭhapessāmi. Kathaṃ? –
其中,凡以精进为增上之心一境性,即名精进定。于入定心中,由镇伏烦恼、或由简择力、或由修习力而断除,此名为断。其中,出入息、寻、伺、想、受、忆念思惟,这些都是诸行。如是,前之精进定、由镇伏烦恼之断,以及这些诸行——即构成具足精进定、勤、诸行之神足。修习此神足,依止于远离、依止于离欲、依止于灭、导向舍遣。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha yā vīriyādhipateyyā cittekaggatā, ayaṃ vīriyasamādhi. Samāhite citte kilesānaṃ vikkhambhanatāya paṭisaṅkhānabalena vā bhāvanābalena vā, idaṃ pahānaṃ. Tattha ye assāsapassāsā vitakkavicārā saññāvedayitā sarasaṅkappā, ime saṅkhārā. Iti purimako ca vīriyasamādhi, kilesavikkhambhanatāya ca pahānaṃ ime ca saṅkhārā, tadubhayaṃ vīriyasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāveti vivekanissitaṃ virāganissitaṃ nirodhanissitaṃ vossaggapariṇāmiṃ.
其中,凡以心为增上之心一境性,即名心定。于入定心中,由镇伏烦恼、或由简择力、或由修习力而断除,此名为断。其中,出入息、寻、伺、想、受、忆念思惟,这些都是诸行。如是,前之心定、由镇伏烦恼之断,以及这些诸行——即构成具足心定、勤、诸行之神足。修习此神足,依止于远离、依止于离欲、依止于灭、导向舍遣。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha yā cittādhipateyyā cittekaggatā, ayaṃ cittasamādhi. Samāhite citte kilesānaṃ vikkhambhanatāya paṭisaṅkhānabalena vā bhāvanābalena vā, idaṃ pahānaṃ. Tattha ye assāsapassāsā vitakkavicārā saññāvedayitā sarasaṅkappā, ime saṅkhārā. Iti purimako ca cittasamādhi, kilesavikkhambhanatāya ca pahānaṃ ime ca saṅkhārā, tadubhayaṃ cittasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāveti vivekanissitaṃ virāganissitaṃ nirodhanissitaṃ vossaggapariṇāmiṃ.
其中,凡以观为增上之心一境性,即名观定。于入定心中,由镇伏烦恼、或由简择力、或由修习力而断除,此名为断。其中,出入息、寻、伺、想、受、忆念思惟,这些都是诸行。如是,前之观定、由镇伏烦恼之断,以及这些诸行——即构成具足观定、勤、诸行之神足。修习此神足,依止于远离、依止于离欲、依止于灭、导向舍遣。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha yā vīmaṃsādhipateyyā cittekaggatā, ayaṃ vīmaṃsāsamādhi, samāhite citte kilesānaṃ vikkhambhanatāya paṭisaṅkhānabalena vā bhāvanābalena vā, idaṃ pahānaṃ. Tattha ye assāsapassāsā vitakkavicārā saññāvedayitā sarasaṅkappā, ime saṅkhārā. Iti purimako ca vīmaṃsāsamādhi kilesavikkhambhanatāya ca pahānaṃ ime ca saṅkhārā, tadubhayaṃ vīmaṃsāsamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāveti vivekanissitaṃ virāganissitaṃ nirodhanissitaṃ vossaggapariṇāmi’’nti.
然而,它们的区别在于:精进定,是以精进为首而生起的定,或是在前行阶段与精进为主宰相应而生起的定。心定,是以心为首而生起的定,或是在前行阶段与心为主宰相应而生起的定。观定,是以观为首而生起的定,或是在前行阶段与观为主宰相应而生起的定。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana viseso – vīriyasamādhīti vīriyaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pavattito samādhi vā vīriyādhipatinā sampayutto pubbabhāge pavatto samādhi vā vīriyasamādhi. Cittasamādhīti cittaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pavattito samādhi vā cittādhipatinā sampayutto pubbabhāge pavatto samādhi vā cittasamādhi. Vīmaṃsāsamādhīti vīmaṃsaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pavattito samādhi vā vīmaṃsādhipatinā sampayutto pubbabhāge pavatto samādhi vā vīmaṃsāsamādhīti.
此处依七力的相应作了略释。然而,具足深智者应当随顺注释与复注,或以广说、或以深解,分别抉择而领会。显示巴利原文
Sattibalānurūpenettha saṅkhepavaṇṇanā katā, gambhīrañāṇehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānurūpena vitthārato vā gambhīrato vā vibhajitvā gahetabbā.
14 已说“欲定、精进定、心定、观定”。若如是,则可能说:“如是,唯观定是以智为根、以智为先导、以智为随转;其他三定则应以无智为根、以无智为先导、以无智为转起。”为示一切定皆是以智为根等,故说“一切定以智为根”等。其中,一切定者,即欲定、精进定、心定、观定四种定。以智为根者,以于单转向路或多转向路中生起之近行智为根。以智为先导者,以证得智为其先导,故为以智为先导。以智为随转者,以省察智为其随转,故为以智为随转。或者,以多转向近行智或结生智为其根,故为以智为根;以近行智为其先导,故为以智为先导;以安止智为其随转,故为以智为随转。或者,一切近行智为其根,故为以智为根;安止智为其先导,故为以智为先导;神通智为其随转,故为以智为随转;或随转即随转,智之随转即智随转,有智随转者,故为以智为随转。而智,即如前所说之种类。显示巴利原文
14. ‘‘Chandasamādhi vīriyasamādhi cittasamādhi vīmaṃsāsamādhī’’ti vutto, ‘‘evaṃ sati vīmaṃsāsamādhiyeva ñāṇamūlako ñāṇapubbaṅgamo ñāṇānuparivatti bhaveyya, aññe tayo samādhayo aññāṇamūlakā aññāṇapubbaṅgamā aññāṇapavattiyo bhaveyyu’’nti vattabbattā sabbe samādhayo ñāṇamūlakādayoyevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbo samādhi ñāṇamūlako’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sabbo samādhīti chandasamādhi, vīriyasamādhi, cittasamādhi, vīmaṃsāsamādhīti catubbidho samādhi. Ñāṇamūlakoti ekāvajjanavīthinānāvajjanavīthīsu pavattaṃ upacārañāṇamūlako. Ñāṇapubbaṅgamoti adhigamañāṇaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ assāti ñāṇapubbaṅgamo. Ñāṇānuparivattīti paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ anuparivatti assāti ñāṇānuparivatti. Atha vā nānāvajjanūpacārañāṇaṃ vā paṭisandhiñāṇaṃ vā mūlaṃ assāti ñāṇamūlako, upacārañāṇaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ assāti ñāṇapubbaṅgamo, appanāñāṇaṃ anuparivatti assāti ñāṇānuparivatti. Sabbaṃ vā upacārañāṇaṃ mūlaṃ assāti ñāṇamūlako. Appanāñāṇaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ assāti ñāṇapubbaṅgamo. Abhiññāñāṇaṃ anuparivatti assāti ñāṇānuparivatti, anuparivattanaṃ vā anuparivatti, ñāṇassa anuparivatti ñāṇānuparivatti, ñāṇānuparivatti assāti ñāṇānuparivatti. Ñāṇaṃ pana pubbe vuttappakārameva.
“如前,后亦然”:谓由此定——即欲界等四种定——以宿住随念智随转,于过去无数劫成坏之间,善巧通达自他之蕴相续,非难通达;如是,由此定以未来分智随转,于未来无数劫成坏之间,亦善巧通达自他之蕴相续,非难通达。“如后,前亦然”:谓由此定以他心智随转,于未来仅七日之其他有情心,善巧通达,非难通达;如是,由此定,于过去仅七日之其他有情心,亦善巧通达,非难通达。显示巴利原文
Yathā pure tathā pacchāti yathā chandasamādhiādicatubbidhasamādhissa pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇānuparivattibhāvena pure atītāsu jātīsu asaṅkhyeyyesupi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭesu attano khandhapaṭibaddhassa, paresaṃ khandhapaṭibaddhassa ca suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhanaṃ tathā tathāvuttasamādhissa anāgataṃsañāṇānuparivattibhāvena pacchā anāgatāsu jātīsu asaṅkhyeyyesupi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭesu attano khandhapaṭibaddhassa, paresaṃ khandhapaṭibaddhassa ca suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhananti attho daṭṭhabbo. Yathā pacchā tathā pureti yathā yathāvuttasamādhissa cetopariyañāṇānuparivattibhāvena anāgatesu sattasuyeva divasesu parasattānaṃyeva cittassa suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhanaṃ, tathā tathāvuttasamādhissa pure atītesu sattasuyeva divasesu parasattānaṃyeva cittassa suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhananti attho.
“如昼,夜亦然”:谓如有眼之人于白昼,由日光驱除闇冥,对现前眼所识之色,意识亦善了知;如是,于黑夜,虽具四支之闇,由该定以天眼智随转,于色境善巧通达,非难通达。“如夜,昼亦然”:谓于黑夜,虽具四支之闇,由该定以天眼智随转,于色境善巧通达,非难通达;如是,于白昼,于微细色境、或被墙等所覆之色境、或处极远之色境,由该定以天眼智随转,亦善巧通达,非难通达。显示巴利原文
Yathā divā tathā rattinti yathā cakkhumantānaṃ sattānaṃ divasabhāge sūriyālokena andhakārassa viddhaṃsitattā āpāthagataṃ cakkhuviññeyyaṃ rūpaṃ manoviññāṇenapi suviññeyyaṃ, tathā rattibhāge caturaṅgasamannāgatepi andhakāre vattamāne yathāvuttasamādhissa dibbacakkhuñāṇānuparivattibhāvena rūpāyatanassa suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhanaṃ. Yathā rattiṃ tathā divāti yathā rattibhāge caturaṅgasamannāgatepi andhakāre yathāvuttasamādhissa dibbacakkhuñāṇānuparivattibhāvena rūpāyatanassa suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhanaṃ, tathā divasabhāge sukhumassa rūpāyatanassa vā kenaci pākārādinā tirohitassa rūpāyatanassa vā atidūraṭṭhāne pavattassa rūpāyatanassa vā yathāvuttasamādhissa dibbacakkhuñāṇānuparivattibhāvena suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhananti attho daṭṭhabbo.
由该定于白昼,以天耳智随转,于微细声境、或被墙等所覆之声境、或处极远之声境,善巧通达,非难通达;如是,于黑夜,由该定以天耳智随转,于微细声境、或被墙等所覆之声境、或处极远之声境,亦善巧通达,非难通达。当以此理类推。显示巴利原文
Yathā yathāvuttasamādhissa divasabhāge dibbasotañāṇānuparivattibhāvena sukhumassa saddāyatanassa vā kenaci pākārādinā tirohitassa saddāyatanassa vā atidūraṭṭhāne pavattassa saddāyatanassa vā suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhanaṃ, tathā rattibhāgepi yathāvuttasamādhissa dibbasotañāṇānuparivattibhāvena sukhumassa saddāyatanassa vā kenaci pākārādinā tirohitassa saddāyatanassa vā atidūraṭṭhāne pavattassa saddāyatanassa vā suṭṭhu paṭivijjhanameva, na duppaṭivijjhananti ayaṃ nayopi netabbo. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
在说了“如过去:正如通过禅定以宿住随念智的随转……”等之后,又说“正如在色处中所说,对于声处,亦应通过禅定以天耳智的随转而如此引导”(《导论注》14)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathā pureti yathā samādhissa pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇānuparivattibhāvenā’’tiādiṃ vatvā ‘‘yathā ca rūpāyatane vuttaṃ, tathā samādhissa dibbasotañāṇānuparivattitāya saddāyatane ca netabba’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 14).
因为应该问到:“以智为根等之定,伴随宿住随念智的随转等,修习什么?”所以说了“iti vivaṭena”等。其中,iti 的意思是“如此”,即以上述方式。apariyonaddhena 的意思是“无覆盖”,即去除了五盖等。sappabhāsaṃ cittaṃ 的意思是“有光辉的心”,即与神足相应的道心,修习此心。当与神足相应的道心生起时,与道心俱起的善法,也就是信根、精进根、念根、定根、慧根这五根便生起。当道心灭去时,它们以不再生起的方式灭去,因为唯有一个心识刹那。如此,由于道识的灭,慧与念也随之灭去,应作这样的连接。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ñāṇamūlakādisamādhinā pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇānuparivattibhāvādisahitena kiṃ bhāvetī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti vivaṭenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha itīti evaṃ vuttappakārena. Apariyonaddhenāti nīvaraṇādivigamanena. Sappabhāsaṃ cittanti iddhipādasampayuttaṃ maggacittaṃ bhāveti. Iddhipādasampayutte maggacitte uppajjamāne hi maggacittasahabhūni kusalāni saddhindriyavīriyindriyasatindriyasamādhindriyapaññindriyabhūtāni pañcindriyāni uppajjanti. Maggacitte nirujjhamāne anuppajjanabhāvena nirujjhanti ekacittakkhaṇikattā. Evaṃ maggaviññāṇassa nirodhā paññā ca sati ca nirujjhatīti yojanā.
因为应该说:“何种识灭去,名色便灭去?”所以说了“nāmarūpañca”等,意思是:由于结生识的灭,名色也灭去。或者说,因为应该说:“由于识的灭,慧与念等所说的五根如此灭去”,为了显示“名色也灭去,而正在灭去的名色正是由于结生识的灭而灭去”,所以说了“nāmarūpañca”等。其中,nāmarūpañca 的意思是:在未以道断除渴爱、无明等之时,应当生起的受等三蕴以及四大种和所造色。viññāṇahetukaṃ 的意思是:应当生起的结生识是此名色的因,故说为“以识为因”。viññāṇapaccayā nibbattaṃ 的意思是:以识为缘而生。tassa 指应当生起的那个。hetu 指渴爱、无明等烦恼。viññāṇaṃ 指应当生起的结生识。anāhāraṃ 的意思是“无食”,即没有滋养、没有缘。anabhinanditaṃ 的意思是不被渴爱等所喜。appaṭisandhikaṃ 的意思是“无结生”,即无再有的连接。nti 指这样的识。ahetu 指此名色没有作为因的结生识,故为“无因”。appaccayaṃ 的意思是“无缘”,即由于缺乏[缘]。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kassa viññāṇassa nirodhā nāmarūpaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘nāmarūpañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, paṭisandhiviññāṇassa nirodhā nāmarūpañca nirujjhatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā ‘‘viññāṇassa nirodhā paññā ca sati cāti vuttāni pañcindriyāni evaṃ nirujjhantī’’ti vattabbattā nāmarūpañca nirujjhati, nirujjhamānaṃ pana nāmarūpaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇassa nirodhā nirujjhatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘nāmarūpañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nāmarūpañcāti maggena taṇhāavijjādike anupacchinne uppajjanārahaṃ vedanādikkhandhattayaṃ, bhūtupādārūpañca. Viññāṇahetukanti uppajjanārahaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ hetu assa nāmarūpassāti viññāṇahetukaṃ. Viññāṇapaccayā nibbattanti viññāṇena paccayena nibbattaṃ. Tassāti uppajjanārahassa paṭisandhiviññāṇassa. Hetūti taṇhāavijjādiko kileso. Viññāṇanti uppajjanārahaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ. Anāhāranti appaccayaṃ. Anabhinanditanti kāmataṇhādīhi anabhinanditabbaṃ. Appaṭisandhikanti punabbhavābhisandahanarahitaṃ. Nti tādisaṃ viññāṇaṃ. Ahetūti natthi hetusaṅkhātaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ imassa nāmarūpassāti ahetu. Appaccayanti sahāyavirahena natthi paccayā saṅkhārā imassāti appaccayaṃ. Evaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇassa nirodhā nāmarūpañca nirujjhatīti.
“对于五十种心与名色的灭尽,依所述方式,我们应如何信受呢?”因为应如此说,故有“因此世尊说”等语。世尊了知五十种心与名色的灭尽方式,以应说之方式,宣示了阐明灭尽方式的偈颂:“这是……等,此处于此灭尽”。以此偈颂,你们应信受我所说的灭尽之理。在此,对于五十种心与名色的灭尽,由于不知者或对此有疑的阿逸多应问,故应抉择如是等问法之分别:“是未见解明之问,或是已见对照之问,或是依有情安立之问,或是依多种安立之问,或是依法安立之问”。应抉择如是等答法之分别:“是显示自性之答,或是依多种安立之答,或是依法安立之答”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Paññāsatīnañceva nāmarūpassa ca vuttappakārena nirujjhanabhāvo kathaṃ amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vattabbākārena paññāsatīnañceva nāmarūpassa ca nirujjhanabhāvajānanako bhagavā yathānirujjhanabhāvadīpakaṃ ‘‘yametaṃ…pe… etthetaṃ uparujjhatī’’ti gāthāvacanaṃ āha. Tena gāthāvacanena tumhehi mayā vutto nirujjhanabhāvo saddahitabboyevāti. Etthāpi paññāsatināmarūpānaṃ nirujjhanaṃ ajānantena tattha vā saṃsayantena ajitena pucchitabbattā ‘‘adiṭṭhajotanā pucchāti vā diṭṭhasaṃsandanā pucchāti vā paññādīnaṃ anekatthattā dhammato vā anekādhiṭṭhānā pucchāti vā dhammādhiṭṭhānā pucchā’’ti vā iccevamādipucchāvicayo niddhāretabbo. ‘‘Sarūpadassanavissajjananti vā anekādhiṭṭhānavissajjananti vā dhammādhiṭṭhānavissajjana’’nti vā iccevamādivissajjanavicayo niddhāretabbo.
如此,导师分别显示了依有情安立等之问答与依法安立等之问答,并分别抉择了问法之分别与答法之分别,我们也已了知。由于应问:“当依有情安立与依法安立之问答一并显示时,我们应如何了知问法之分别与答法之分别?”故引出依有情安立与依法安立之问,并分别其抉择,而说“诸有为法”等语。而在注释中——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānādipucchāvissajjanāni ceva dhammādhiṭṭhānādipucchāvissajjanāni ca visuṃ visuṃ dassetvā pucchāvicayo ceva vissajjanavicayo ca ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘sattādhiṭṭhānadhammādhiṭṭhānesu ekato dassitesu pucchāvissajjanesu kathaṃ pucchāvicayo ceva vissajjanavicayo ca amhehi viññātabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā sattādhiṭṭhānadhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ pucchaṃ nīharitvā tattha vicayaṃ vibhajanto ‘‘ye ca saṅkhatadhammāse’’tiādimāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
如此,显示了连同衔接之问后,前文已分别显示了依有情安立之问与依法安立之问,现在为将它们一并显示,便引述“诸有为法”等语。(《导论注释》14)显示巴利原文
‘‘Evaṃ anusandhipucchampi dassetvā heṭṭhā sattādhiṭṭhānā, dhammādhiṭṭhānā ca pucchā visuṃ visuṃ dassitāti idāni tā saha dassetuṃ ‘‘ye ca saṅkhatadhammāse’tiādi āraddha’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 14) –
已说。其义如下:在此教法中,那些阿拉汉已了知诸行,众多有情正在修习戒等,为有学。阿逸多尊者这样问道:“智者啊,请为我宣说那些阿拉汉及有学的行仪与行道,世尊,尊者!”显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ. Tassāyaṃ attho – idha sāsane ye arahanto saṅkhatadhammā honti, puthū bahūyeva satta janā sekkhā sīlādisikkhamānā honti, tesaṃ arahantāvañceva sekkhānañca iriyaṃ paṭipattiṃ meṃ mahā puṭṭho nipako tvaṃ bhagavā pabrūhi mārisa iti āyasmā ajito pucchanto āhāti.
15 在该偈中,因为需要说明“问了多少”,故说“这些”等语。因为应依词义提问,故说“这三个词被提出”。在“诸……尊者”偈中,所问的问题有三个。因为应问“为何、以何因缘而有三个”,故说“为何……以结合”等语。有学、无学,以及以观为前行的断除,称为“有学、无学、以观为前行的断除”;它们的结合即是“有学……结合”,以此“有学……结合”。由此,依问法方式而说的“诸有为法……尊者”偈,应知含有三个问题。显示巴利原文
15. Tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ ‘‘kittakāni pucchitānī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘imānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Padatthānurūpaṃ pucchitabbattā ‘‘imāni tīṇi padāni pucchitānī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ye ca …pe… mārisā’’ti gāthāyaṃ ye pañhā pucchitā, te pañhā tayo honti, ‘‘kissa kena kāraṇena tayo hontī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘kissa…pe… yogenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sekkhā ariyā ca asekkhā ariyā ca vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ pahānañcāti sekhāsekhavipassanāpubbaṅgamappahānāni, tesaṃ yogoti sekhā…pe… yogo, tena sekhā…pe… yogena. Evaṃ pucchāvidhinā hi yasmā ‘‘ye ca saṅkhatadhammāse…pe… mārisā’’ti gāthamāha, tasmā tayo pañhā hontīti daṭṭhabbā.
以“诸有为法”此句,问无学的阿拉汉果;以“诸有学众多在此”此句,问有学与无学的有学修习;以“智者啊,请为我宣说他们的行仪,尊者”此句,问有学与无学在观前分中的彼分断除。应如此了知问法之分别:“是未见解明之问,或是已见对照之问,或是依有情安立之问,或是依多种安立之问。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Ye ca saṅkhatadhammāse’’ti iminā asekkhānaṃ arahattaṃ pucchati, ‘‘ye ca sekkhā puthū idhā’’ti iminā sekkhāsekkhānaṃ sekkhasikkhanaṃ pucchati, ‘‘tesaṃ me nipako iriyaṃ, puṭṭho pabrūhi mārisā’’ti iminā sekkhāsekkhānaṃ vipassanā pubbabhāge tadaṅgappahānaṃ pucchati. ‘‘Adiṭṭhajotanā pucchāti vā diṭṭhasaṃsandanā pucchāti vā sattādhiṭṭhānā pucchāti vā anekādhiṭṭhānā pucchā’’ti vā iccevamādipucchāvicayo niddhāretabbo.
引出“依有情安立、依法安立”之问后,阿阇梨已分别抉择了所问之法,我们也已了知。为了回应“在那所问之中,哪一个是答偈?”故开始宣说“其中答”等语句。“其中”,即指在该偈中。“于诸欲……应遍行”,这正是世尊所说的答偈。于诸欲:“欲”即所贪著的对象(事物欲),意指在种种欲之中,对于这些事物欲,智者不应以烦恼欲而生贪著。心不浑浊:智者应断除令心浑浊的嗔恚寻思等,以及身恶行等法,令心不浑浊,极为清净。善巧一切法:由于以无常等观照一切法,故于无常等五蕴之中善巧、娴熟。具念:因随念于发等身分而安住,故为具念。比丘:由以怖畏等观察诸行法,故为比丘。应遍行:指以彼分断、镇伏断、正断断的方式,周遍地远离烦恼欲与事物欲。显示巴利原文
Sattadhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ pucchaṃ nīharitvā pucchāvicayo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘tassaṃ pucchāyaṃ katamā vissajjanāgāthā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha vissajjanā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthāti tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ. ‘‘Kāmesu…pe… paribbaje’’ti vissajjanāgāthā bhagavatā vuttā. Kāmesūti kāmīyantīti kāmā, tesu kāmesu. Vatthukāmesu kilesakāmena paṇḍitehi nābhigijjheyya. Manasā nāvilosiyāti āvilabhāvakare byāpādavitakkādayo ceva kāyaduccaritādayo ca dhamme pajahanto paṇḍito manasā anāvilo suppasanno bhaveyya. Kusalo sabbadhammānanti sabbadhammānaṃ aniccatādinā paritulitattā aniccatādīsu pañcasu khandhesu kusalo cheko. Satoti kesādīsu saratīti sato. Bhikkhūti saṅkhatadhamme bhayādito ikkhatīti bhikkhu. Paribbajeti tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedappahānabhāvena kilesakāmavatthukāme pari samantato vajjeyya.
在问偈中,世尊以“智者”一词称赞并宣说了答偈,由此显示了世尊凭借无碍智而达到最胜的状态。现在,为了将那种无碍智依身业等类别分别显示,故说“世尊的一切身业”等语句。其中,凡以无碍智了知后所作的一切身业,皆以智为前导、以智为随转。其余语业、意业,也同此理。于过去分:即对于过去有中的自身与他人的蕴等部分,世尊的智见不被无明所障碍。于未来分:即对于未来有中的自身与他人的蕴等部分。于现在分:即对于现在有中的自身与他人的蕴等部分。显示巴利原文
Pucchāgāthāyaṃ ‘‘nipako’’ti padena pasaṃsitena bhagavatā vissajjanāgāthā vuttā, tassa bhagavato yena anāvaraṇañāṇena ukkaṃsagatena pakkabhāvo dassito, taṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ tāva kāyakammādibhedehi vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘bhagavato sabbaṃ kāyakamma’’ntiādimāha. Tattha anāvaraṇañāṇena jānitvā kataṃ sabbaṃ kāyakammaṃ ñāṇapubbaṅgamaṃ ñāṇānuparivatti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Atīte aṃseti atītabhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse aññāṇena appaṭihataṃ bhagavato ñāṇadassanaṃ. Anāgate aṃseti anāgatabhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse. Paccuppanne aṃseti paccuppanne bhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse.
由于应问“智见在何处有障碍?”,故设立此问而说“何处”等语,以显示障碍的境界。或者,由于应问“在现在有中的自身、他身蕴等部分,他人亦可有智见;依此类推,在过去、未来分中,他人的智见在何处会有障碍?”,故设立此问而说“何处”等语,以确定并显示障碍的境界。其中,“何处”:即询问在何处、在何时,他人的智见会有障碍。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ñāṇadassanassa katarasmiṃ paṭighāto’’ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā paṭighātavisayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ko cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘paccuppannabhave saparakkhandhādike koṭṭhāse aññesampi ñāṇadassanaṃ bhaveyya, tadanusārena atītānāgatakoṭṭhāsesupi katarasmiṃ aññesaṃ ñāṇadassanassa paṭighāto bhaveyyā’’ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā paṭighātavisayaṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ko cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ko cāti kva katarasmiṃ samaye aññesaṃ ñāṇadassanassa paṭighāto bhaveyyāti pucchi.
对于无常、苦、无我,其他众生有不知、不见。这种称为无明与不见的自性,是对智见的障碍,并非仅仅障碍对自他诸蕴等的观察。以此说明,于三相上生起的智见,其他众生难以通达,而世尊的智见则与一切他人不共。因为通过世尊对三相的阐明,应调伏者能证得四圣谛。由于需要说明“以何种譬喻能令我们明白,世尊没有智见的障碍,而其他众生的智见却有障碍”,故说“如同在此”等语。其中,如同在此世间,有眼之人于空中看见星星,却无法通过计数的约定知道“有这么多”,同样,其他众生对智见的障碍,即是这种无明与不见的自性。显示巴利原文
Anicce, dukkhe, anattaniye ca aññesaṃ aññāṇaṃ yaṃ adassanaṃ atthi, aññāṇādassanasaṅkhāto sabhāvo ñāṇadassanassa paṭighāto bhavati, na saparakkhandhādidassanamattapaṭighāto. Etena aniccato lakkhaṇattaye pavattassa ñāṇadassanassa aññesaṃ durabhisambhavaṃ, bhagavato ca ñāṇadassanassa aññehi asādhāraṇataṃ dasseti. Bhagavato hi lakkhaṇattayavibhāvanena veneyyā catusaccappaṭivedhaṃ labhanti. ‘‘Bhagavato ñāṇadassanapaṭighātābhāvena aññesañca ñāṇadassanassa paṭighātabhāvo katamāya upamāya amhākaṃ pākaṭo’’ti vattabbabhāvato upamāya pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘yathā idhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha idha sattaloke cakkhumā puriso ākāse tārakāni passeyya, gaṇanasaṅketena ‘‘ettakānī’’ti no ca jāneyya yathā, evaṃ aññesaṃ ñāṇadassanassa paṭighāto ayaṃ aññāṇadassanasabhāvo bhavati.
然而,世尊并无那样的无明与不见,因此应理解为,世尊的智见不被任何无明与不见所障碍。因为会问“为何我们应相信世尊的智见无障碍”,故说“诸佛世尊确实有无障碍的智见”。又因为需说“贤善者……世尊的无障碍智,导师已通过身业等类别开示,我们也已了知;那么,在以‘iriya’一词所问的偈颂中,有学与无学的行道应如何理解?”为显示有学与无学行道,故说“其中有学”等语。其中,“其中”指在该解答中。“有学”指具足有学戒者,对于可引生贪染的色所缘等法,应守护心而不贪染;对于可引生缠缚的嗔恚事,应守护心而不嗔怒。显示巴利原文
Bhagavato pana tathā abhāvato kenaci aññāṇena adassanena appaṭihataṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ bhavatīti attho daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Bhagavato ñāṇadassanassa appaṭihatabhāvo kasmā amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘anāvaraṇañāṇadassanā hi buddhā bhagavanto’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Nipakassa…pe… bhagavato anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ kāyakammādibhedehi ācariyena vibhajitvā dassitaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, pacchā gāthāya ‘iriya’nti padena pucchitā sekkhāsekkhapaṭipadā kathaṃ vijānitabbā’’ti vattabbattā sekkhāsekkhapaṭipadaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha sekhenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ vissajjane. Sekhenāti sikkhanasīlena puggalena rajanīyesu rūpārammaṇādīsu dhammesu gedhā cittaṃ rakkhitabbaṃ, pariyuṭṭhānīyesu āghātavatthūsu dosā cittaṃ rakkhitabbaṃ.
因为会问“在那些贪染与嗔怒中,世尊在回答的偈颂里制止了什么、宣说了哪个词”,故说“其中,那种欲求”等语。其中,“其中”指在贪染与嗔怒中。“欲求”指贪的欲求。“迷醉”指与贪、痴俱行的痴迷。“希求”指贪的希求。“喜爱”指渴爱的喜爱,而非慈心的喜爱。“戏乐”指贪染的戏乐。这些皆为贪染的同义词。为了制止那称为贪染的欲求等,世尊通过“不应在欲乐中贪染”这般分别而宣说。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tesu gedhadosesu katamaṃ nivārento bhagavā vissajjanagāthāyaṃ katamaṃ padamāhā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yā icchā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti gedhadosesu. Icchāti rāgicchā. Mucchāti lobhamohasahagatamohamucchā. Patthanāti rāgapatthanā. Piyāyanāti taṇhāpiyāyanāva, na mettāpiyāyanā. Kīḷanāti gedhakīḷanā. Etāni hi gedhapariyāyavacanāni. Taṃ gedhasaṅkhātaṃ icchādikaṃ nivārento bhagavā ‘‘kāmesu nābhigijjheyyā’’ti evaṃ visuṃ visuṃ pakārena āha.
世尊为遮止那名为“缠覆恼害”的嗔怒,而分别说“心应不浑浊”,如此结成句义。世尊为了各别遮止贪染与嗔怒,故说两句;为说明“应以此义信受”,遂说“诚然,有学”等语。于可贪染之物生贪染的有学,今生起未生的贪类烦恼,令已生者增长广大;于可缠覆之物心浑浊的有学,今生起未生的嗔类烦恼,令已生者增长广大。如是,以此遮止之义,汝等当信受我语——此为意趣所在。显示巴利原文
Pariyuṭṭhānavighātaṃ dosaṃ nivārento bhagavā ‘‘manasānāvilo siyā’’ti evaṃ visuṃ visuṃ pakārena āhāti yojanā. Gedhadosānaṃ visuṃ visuṃ nivārento bhagavā dve padāni āhāti vuttaṃ, ‘‘taṃ kena atthena saddahitabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘tathā hi sekho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Rajanīyesu abhigijjhanto sekho anuppannaṃ lobhapadhānaṃ kilesañca uppādeti, uppannaṃ kilesañca phātiṃ abhivaḍḍhanaṃ karoti, pariyuṭṭhānīyesu āvilo sekho anuppannaṃ dosapadhānaṃ kilesañca uppādeti, uppannaṃ kilesañca phātiṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ karoti, iti iminā paṭikkhepaatthena taṃ mama vacanaṃ saddahitabbanti adhippāyo.
若问:“然则不贪染且心不浑浊的有学,只是遮止了贪染与嗔怒,还是也更成就了上分之道?”为了显示其亦成就上分之道,故说“然,心无浑浊之思惟者”等语。其中,“心无浑浊之思惟者”:指无有能使心浑浊的思惟,即无嗔恚思惟与无害思惟。因无欲贪等而不贪染,精勤发起善的精进。为说明“如何精勤”,故说“彼于未生……”等。其中,“彼”指为成就上分道位而修行的有学。“未生”等义,循注疏之句即可明了,故不予细释。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kiṃ pana anabhigijjhanto, anāvilo ca sekkho agedhadosanivāraṇameva karoti, udāhu uttaripi paṭipadaṃ pūretī’’ti pucchitabbattā uttaripi paṭipadaṃ pūretiyevāti dassento ‘‘yo pana anāvilasaṅkappo’’tiādimāha. Tattha anāvilasaṅkappoti natthi āvilakarā saṅkappā byāpādasaṅkappavihiṃsāsaṅkappā etassāti anāvilasaṅkappo, icchādigedhassa abhāvena anabhigijjhanto vāyamati kusalavāyāmaṃ pavatteti. ‘‘Kathaṃ vāyamatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so anuppannāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha soti uparibhāvanāmaggabhāvatthāya paṭipajjamāno sekkho. Anuppannānantiādīnaṃ attho sakkā aṭṭhakathāvacaneneva (netti. aṭṭha. 15-16) jānitunti na vibhatto.
16 以随念不净等为相的根,于渴爱所生之处遮止与欲贪俱起的寻——这随念不净等为相的根即是念根。以成就广大状态的无散乱遮止嗔恚寻——这名为无散乱的根即是定根。以正精进遮止害寻——这名为正精进的根即是精进根。以称为正见的根,于已生起……不予忍受——这名为正见的根即是慧根。当此四根生起时,因心不浑浊的状态而生起彼信解安立——这名为信的根即是信根。以上诸根,即是有学的五根。显示巴利原文
16.Yenāti asubhādīnaṃ anussaraṇalakkhaṇena indriyena taṇhāmayitavatthūsu kāmataṇhāya sahajātaṃ vitakkaṃ vāreti, idaṃ asubhādianussaraṇalakkhaṇaṃ indriyaṃ satindriyaṃ. Yena mahaggatabhāvappattena avikkhepena byāpādavitakkaṃ vāreti, idaṃ avikkhepasaṅkhātaṃ indriyaṃ samādhindriyaṃ. Yena sammappadhānena vihiṃsāvitakkaṃ vāreti, idaṃ sammappadhānasaṅkhātaṃ indriyaṃ vīriyindriyaṃ. Yena sammādiṭṭhisaṅkhātena indriyena uppannuppanne…pe… nādhivāseti, idaṃ sammādiṭṭhisaṅkhātaṃ indriyaṃ paññindriyaṃ. Imesu catūsu indriyesu saha uppajjamānā yā saddahanā okappanā uppajjati, anāvilabhāvato idaṃ saddahanasaṅkhātaṃ indriyaṃ saddhindriyaṃ. Imāni sekkhassa pañcindriyāni.
它们并非在同一个领域中成就最胜性,而是于各自领域中成就最胜性。为解答“哪一根在哪个领域中发挥最胜性”这一问题,并显示“这根在此领域中发挥作用”,故说“其中,信根应在何处见”等。在此,“其中”是指于那些根中,在四预流支中,应见信根发挥了最胜性;其余诸根亦应如此类比。为解答“有学是仅以慧根被世尊称为不放逸而受到称赞,还是以一切善法而受称赞”这一问题,并显示“是以一切善法、以五根为首而被称说、受到称赞”,故说“如此,有学”等。此中,“如此”是指通过显示五根的生起,有学补特伽罗以一切善法被世尊称为不放逸而受到称赞,其心处于不浑浊的状态——这是连接。为说明“有学之心不浑浊的状态应以何者信解”,故说“因此世尊说:心应不浑浊”。因世尊已说“心应不浑浊”,故你们应当信解有学之心不浑浊的状态。显示巴利原文
Ekasmiṃyeva visaye jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ na pāpuṇeyyuṃ, attano visaye jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ pāpuṇituṃ arahanti, ‘‘katamaṃ indriyaṃ kattha visaye jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ pavatta’’nti pucchitabbabhāvato idaṃ indriyaṃ imasmiṃ visaye pavattanti dassento ‘‘tattha saddhindriyaṃ kattha daṭṭhabba’’ntiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti tesu indriyesu catūsu sotāpattiyaṅgesu saddhindriyaṃ jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ pavattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi yojetabbaṃ. Kiṃ nu sekkho paññindriyeva appamatto’ti bhagavatā vutto thomito, udāhu sabbehi kusalehi dhammehīti pucchitabbattā sabbehi kusalehi dhammehi pañcindriyapamukhehi vutto thomito hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ sekho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evaṃ pañcindriyānaṃ nibbattidassanena sekho puggalo sabbehi kusalehi dhammehi appamattoti bhagavatā vutto thomito anāvilatāya manasāti yojanā. ‘‘Sekkhassa anāvilatā kena saddahitabbā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāha bhagavā manasānāvilo siyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhagavatā ‘‘manasānāvilo siyā’’ti vuttattā sekkhassa anāvilatā tumhehi saddahitabbāti.
17 第十七条 有学已达顶点的行道,已由导师分别阐明,且我等已了知。为解答“如何了知无学已达顶点的行道”这一问题,并为分别显示无学已达顶点的行道,故说“于一切法善巧”等。其中,“于一切法”意指:无学于一切法中,依已达顶点的行道而善巧、极为善巧,此为世尊所说、所赞叹,意即“心无浑浊”。为了彰显无学于一切法中的善巧,而此善巧的所缘境界即是一切法,于是先依“人”的立场分别显示这一切法,故说“名为世间”等。在此,由“于一切法”一语所说法,名为世间,分为烦恼世间、有世间、根世间三种,此即理趣。其中,处于狭劣法之立场而生起烦恼,故为烦恼;作为善法等生起之处,故为世间,即烦恼世间。处于广大法之立场而作为修习之处,故为有;又如前说,作为生起之处,故为世间,即有世间。处于信根等法之立场,由有主宰作用而成为根;作为证得信根等之处,故为世间,即根世间。显示巴利原文
17. Sekkhassa matthakappattā paṭipadā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘kathaṃ asekkhassa matthakappattā paṭipadā ñātabbā’’ti vattabbattā asekkhassa matthakappattaṃ paṭipadaṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘kusalo sabbadhammāna’’ntiādimāha. Tattha sabbadhammānanti sabbesu dhammesu matthakappattāya paṭipadāya asekkho kusalo chekataroti bhagavatā vutto thomito anāvilatāya manasāti. Asekkhassa sabbadhammesu yaṃ kosallaṃ dassetukāmo, tassa kosallassa visayabhūte sabbadhamme tāva puggalādhiṭṭhānena vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘loko nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘sabbadhammāna’’nti iminā vuttadhammasaṅkhāto loko nāma kilesaloko, bhavaloko, indriyalokoti tividho hotīti yojanā. Tattha parittadhammaṭṭho kilesajananaṭṭhena kileso, kusalādipavattanaṭṭhena loko cāti kilesaloko. Mahaggatadhammaṭṭho bhavanaṭṭhena bhavo, vuttanayena loko cāti bhavaloko. Saddhindriyādidhammaṭṭho ādhipaccaṭṭhayogavasena indriyabhūto hutvā saddhindriyādipattanaṭṭhena loko cāti indriyaloko.
为解答“在此三世间中,由何者生起何者”这一问题,故说“于此”等。为解答“谁生起信等诸根”这一问题,故说“他生起诸根”。其中,“他”是指这样一个人:安住于成办种种狭劣法(烦恼世间所摄)与广大法(有世间所摄),此人即于自己的相续中生起信等诸根。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tīsu lokesu katamena katamo samudāgacchatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Saddhādiindriyāni ko nibbattetī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so indriyāni nibbattetī’’ti vuttaṃ . Tattha soti yo puggalo kilesalokasaṅkhāte parittadhamme, bhavalokasaṅkhāte mahaggatadhamme ca taṃtaṃsampādanavasena ṭhito, so puggalo saddhindriyādīni indriyāni attasantāne nibbatteti.
因当问:“当诸根在自己的相续中,由反复令其生起而增长时,生起何等慧?”故说“于诸根”等。其中,“所应知”即所应证知者。“遍知”是指依特相、依缘,由摄受等而转起、了知色法与非色法之慧。因当问:“此遍知应以几种方式观察?”故说“此(遍知)以二种”等。其中,此遍知应由智者以观察遍知与修习遍知这二种方式观察而把握。“观察遍知”应知为由见道慧所生的“所知遍知”,是故本疏有云:“观察遍知即所知遍知”。“修习遍知”应知为由修道慧所生,与“度遍知”及“断遍知”相结合。显示巴利原文
‘‘Indriyesu attasantānesu punappunaṃ nibbattāpanavasena vuḍḍhāpiyamānesu kā paññā bhavatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘indriyesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha neyyassāti abhiññeyyassa. Pariññāti rūpārūpadhamme salakkhaṇato, paccayato ca pariggahādivasena pavattapaññā. ‘‘Sā pariññā katividhena upaparikkhitabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘sā duvidhenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sā pariññā dassanapariññāya ca bhāvanāpariññāya ca duvidhena viññūhi upaparikkhitvā gahetabbāti. Dassanapariññāyāti ca dassanamaggapaññājanikāya ñātapariññāyāti attho gahetabbo. Tena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘dassanapariññāti ñātapariññā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 17). Bhāvanāpariññāyāti bhāvanāmaggapaññājanikāya tīraṇapariññāya saddhiṃ pahānapariññāyāti attho.
“此以二种”等所说之义过于简略,不能明了,应说“请详细解说”,故说“然而当”等。其中,“当”指强力观智生起之时。“有学”是由持学戒故,即善凡夫与入流等圣者。“所应知”指所应了知的色等诸行。“遍知”指以摄受等智摄受而了知,与厌离智相应。“其”指彼善凡夫与入流等。“二法”指善凡夫的强力观智之法与入流等的强力观智之法。如此,见善巧次第令生于相续中而达见道智;修习善巧则达一来道等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sā duvidhenā’tiādinā vutto attho atisaṅkhepo na sakkā viññātuṃ, vitthāretvā kathehī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yadā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yadāti balavavipassanuppajjanakāle. Sekhoti sikkhanasīlatāya kalyāṇaputhujjano ceva sotāpannādiko ca. Ñeyyanti ñātabbaṃ rūpādikaṃ saṅkhāraṃ. Parijānātīti pariggahādiñāṇena pariggahetvā jānāti nibbidāñāṇasahagatena. Tassāti kalyāṇaputhujjanassa ceva sotāpannādikassa ca. Dve dhammāti kalyāṇaputhujjanassa balavavipassanādhammo ceva sotāpannādikassa ca balavavipassanādhammo ca. Yathākkamaṃ dassanakosallaṃ sotāpattimaggañāṇañceva bhāvanākosallaṃ sakadāgāmimaggādikañca santāne pavattāpanavasena gacchanti.
因当问:“先前所说‘所应知的遍知’之智,应以几种方式了知?”故说“此智应以五种方式了知……作证”。又因当问:“于此依观智差别所分的五种证智等中,何者为证智?何者为遍知?何者为断?何者为修习?何者为作证?”故说“其中何者”等。其中,“其中”指于证智等之中。“了知诸法特相之智”:以所缘为作用而转起,了知色法之粗等特相与非色法之触等特相之智,此即了知因果、被称为法无碍解之智,以及了知因果、被称为义无碍解之智。此与特相一起了知因果之慧,即名为证智。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pubbe yaṃ ñāṇaṃ ‘neyyassa pariññā’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ ñāṇaṃ katividhena veditabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘taṃ ñāṇaṃ pañcavidhena veditabbaṃ…pe... sacchikiriyā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tāsu vipassanābhedena bhinnāsu pañcasu abhiññādīsu katamā abhiññā, katamā pariññā, katamaṃ pahānaṃ, katamā bhāvanā, katamā sacchikiriyā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti abhiññādīsu. Yaṃ dhammānaṃ salakkhaṇe ñāṇanti rūpadhammānaṃ kakkhaḷādisalakkhaṇe, arūpadhammānaṃ phusanādisalakkhaṇe ārammaṇakaraṇavasena pavattaṃ yaṃ ñāṇaṃ hetuphalajānanahetujānanasaṅkhātā dhammapaṭisambhidā ceva hetuphalajānanasaṅkhātā atthapaṭisambhidā ca bhavati. Ayaṃ salakkhaṇena saddhiṃ hetuphalajānanā paññā abhiññā nāma.
“如此”是指依所说方式,以证智证知。所谓“遍知”等,即如:“此是无过的善,此是有过的不善,此是生起不善果报的有过,此是生起善果报的无过,此是染污的黑,此是无染的白,此无过等善应修习,此有过等不善不应修习”。以如此方式,从无常等开始,经由聚思择等方法所把握、所审察的、作为观智所缘的这些有为法,令生灭智等果与利益次第生起。由彼所生观智生起故,令近行定生起,以此次第,所把握已转起的生灭智等,即是通达谛的现观,此是其义。如此界定后转起的遍知,结合“此遍知即名为遍知”,即依所说方式的遍知之慧遍知后,应断、应修习、应作证的三法便得确立。“诸不善法应断”——如此转起的遍知之慧,此即是断,即断智。“诸善法应修习”——如此转起的遍知之慧,此即是修习慧。“此是无为,应作证”——如此转起的遍知之慧,此即是作证慧。如此结合,应把握与注疏要旨不相违之义。显示巴利原文
Evanti vuttappakārena. Abhiññāñāṇena abhijānitvā. Yā parijānanātiādīsu ‘‘idaṃ anavajjaṃ kusalaṃ, idaṃ sāvajjaṃ akusalaṃ, idaṃ akusalavipākajanakaṃ sāvajjaṃ, idaṃ kusalavipākajanakaṃ anavajjaṃ, idaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ kaṇhaṃ, idaṃ asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ sukkaṃ, idaṃ kusalaṃ anavajjādikaṃ sevitabbaṃ, idaṃ akusalaṃ sāvajjādikaṃ na sevitabba’’nti evaṃ aniccādito kalāpasammasanādivasena gahitā sammasitā ime vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā saṅkhatadhammā idaṃ udayabbayañāṇādiphalaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ anukkamena nibbattāpenti. Tannibbattavipassanāya uppajjanato upacāraṃ uppādenti, evaṃ anukkamena gahitānaṃ pavattitānaṃ tesaṃ udayabbayañāṇādīnaṃ ayaṃ saccānubodhapaṭivedho atthoti paricchinditvā yā parijānanā pavattā, sā ayaṃ parijānanā pariññā nāmāti yojetvā, evaṃ vuttappakārāya pariññāpaññāya parijānitvā pahātabbā, bhāvetabbā, sacchikātabbā ca tayo dhammā avasiṭṭhā bhavanti. ‘‘Ye akusalā, te pahātabbā’’ti yā parijānanā paññā pavattā, idaṃ pahānaṃ pahānañāṇaṃ. ‘‘Ye kusalā, te bhāvetabbā’’ti yā parijānanā paññā pavattā, sā bhāvanāpaññā. ‘‘Yaṃ asaṅkhataṃ, idaṃ sacchikiriya’’nti yā parijānanā paññā pavattā, sā sacchikiriyāpaññāti yojetvā aṭṭhakathādhippāyena aviruddho attho gahetabbo.
导师已分别解说了神通等五种慧,我们也已了知。由于当说“以这些遍知而了知的人,被称为什么?被如何称赞?”,故说“是者”等语。其中,凡是以所说方式了知的人,这位了知者因对缘已生起的诸法善巧、适切,被称为“义善巧”而受到称赞;因对缘法善巧,被称为“法善巧”;因契合四种单一性等理趣而精通,被称为“善性善巧”;因精通果等至,被称为“果善巧”;因精通增长,称为“增善巧”;因精通衰减,称为“减善巧”;当紧急事务或怖畏生起时,因精通能止息该事务或怖畏的处所及到达之因,被称为“方便善巧”;在前进等大行中具足念与正知,则被称为“具足大善巧”而受到称赞。由于当说“此无学者的义等善巧状态应如何被信受?”,故说“因此说”等语。意思是:由于说了“于一切法善巧”,故应被信受。显示巴利原文
Abhiññādayo pañcavidhā paññā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘tāhi pariññāhi jānanto puggalo ‘ki’nti vuccati thomīyatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yo eva’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yo puggalo evaṃ vuttappakārena jānāti, ayaṃ jānanto puggalo paccayuppannesu dhammesu kusalattā chekattā ‘‘atthakusalo’’ti vuccati thomīyati, paccayadhammesu kusalattā ‘‘dhammakusalo’’ti ca catunnaṃ ekattādīnaṃ nayānaṃ yuttatāya kovidattā ‘‘kalyāṇatākusalo’’ti ca phalasamāpattīsu kovidattā ‘‘phalatākusalo’’ti ca vaḍḍhīsu kovidattā ‘‘āyakusalo’’ti ca avaḍḍhīsu kovidattā ‘‘apāyakusalo’’ti ca accāyike kicce vā bhaye vā uppanne sati tassa kiccassa, bhayassa vā tikicchanasamatthe ṭhānuppattiyakāraṇe kovidattā ‘‘upāyakusalo’’ti ca mahantesu abhikkamādīsu satisampajaññāya sampannattā ‘‘mahatā kosallena samannāgato’’ti ca vuccati thomīyati. ‘‘Tassa asekkhassa atthādīsu kusalabhāvo kathaṃ saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kusalo sabbadhammāna’’nti vuttattā saddahitabboti adhippāyo.
“于一切法善巧”这一句的含义,导师已作分别解说,我们也已了知。由于当说“具念比丘应游行”这一句的含义如何被我们详细了知?故说“具念比丘应游行”等语。或者,由于世尊说过“具念比丘应游行”,便应问:“具足在何处转起的与念相应之智的具念者,为达何目的而应游行?”为了确定而显示:“具足在这些中转起的与念相应之智的具念者,为达此目的而应游行”,故说“具念比丘应游行”等语。其中,“以此”是指:凡是具足在前进等中转起的与念相应之智的具念无学比丘,以此无学比丘,因学处已圆满、更无所需,为现法乐住的目的,在前进时……乃至……在沉默时,应以念、与念相应的正知、以智而住,应转起名为四威仪路转换的住行。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kusalo sabbadhammāna’’nti padassa attho ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘sato bhikkhu paribbaje’’ti padassa attho kathaṃ amhehi vitthārato viññāto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘sato bhikkhu paribbaje’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘sato bhikkhu paribbaje’’ti bhagavatā vuttaṃ, ‘‘kattha pavattena satisahitena ñāṇena sampanno sato kimatthaṃ paribbaje’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘imesu pavattena satisahitañāṇena sampanno sato imamatthaṃ paribbaje’’ti niyametvā dassento ‘‘sato bhikkhu paribbaje’’tiādimāha. Tattha tenāti yo abhikkamādīsu pavattena satisahitañāṇena samannāgato sato asekkhabhikkhu, tena asekkhabhikkhunā pariniṭṭhitasikkhattā aññapayojanābhāvato diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthaṃ abhikkante…pe… tuṇhībhāvena satena satisahitena sampajānena ñāṇena vihātabbaṃ catuiriyāpathaparivattanasaṅkhātaṃ viharaṇaṃ pavattetabbaṃ.
既然应当问“已开示的有学与无学行道,概略而言有几种?”为了说明这些名为行道的行为,基于人来简略分为二种,所以宣说‘这二种行’等语。其中,无论是依应修习的善法等差别、依义善巧等差别,还是依前进等时的念与正知差别而开示的诸行,这二种行都由世尊认可,并以令其认可的方式教导。即:已清净的阿罗汉众为一种行,正在清净的有学众为一种行,应知这便是依人而分的二种。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yā sekkhāsekkhapaṭipadā niddiṭṭhā, imā sekkhāsekkhapaṭipadā saṅkhepato katividhā’’ti pucchitabbattā imā paṭipadāsaṅkhātā cariyā saṅkhepato puggalavasena dveti dassetuṃ ‘‘imā dve cariyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yā cariyā bhāvetabbakusalādibhedena vā atthakosallādibhedena vā abhikkamādīsu satisampajaññabhedena vā niddiṭṭhā, imā cariyā dveti bhagavatā anuññātā anujānanavasena desitā, visuddhānaṃ arahantānaṃ ekā cariyā, visujjhantānaṃ sekkhānaṃ ekā cariyāti puggalavasena dveti daṭṭhabbā.
既然应当说“为何唯独无学者以‘具念前进’等语被记说、被称赞,而善凡夫也以‘具念前进’等语被记说、被称赞?”因此宣说‘因为所作已办’等语。阿罗汉的诸根已作所作,由于诸根已作所作,凡是应问的问题,那一切四种应被证悟之处——应依苦的遍知现观而证悟……乃至……应依灭的作证现观而证悟,这四种应证悟的所证,无学者由于达到念的广大状态,已经这样以遍知现观等了知,因此这位无学者以非譬喻的方式被记说为‘为贪的灭尽、为嗔的灭尽、为痴的灭尽,具念前进,具念后退’而受到称赞。有学也依所说,以各自的遍知现观等了知应证悟的所证,因此应知,他同样被记说‘具念……乃至……痴的’而受到称赞。因此说‘谁正在清净?有学众’。显示巴利原文
‘‘Asekkhoyeva kasmā ‘sato abhikkamatī’tiādinā vuccati thomīyati, kalyāṇaputhujjanopi ‘sato abhikkamatī’tiādinā vuccati thomīyatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘katakiccāni hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Arahato indriyāni katakiccāni, indriyānaṃ katakiccattā yaṃ pucchaṃ pucchitabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ catubbidhaṃ dukkhassa pariññābhisamayena bojjhitabbaṃ…pe… nirodhassa sacchikiriyābhisamayena bojjhitabbaṃ bhave. Catubbidhaṃ idaṃ bojjhaṃ bojjhitabbaṃ yo asekkho sativepullappattattā evaṃ pariññābhisamayādinā jānāti,ayaṃ asekkho nippariyāyena ‘‘rāgassa khayāya, dosassa khayāya, mohassa khayāya sato abhikkamati, sato paṭikkamatī’’ti vuccati thomīyati. Sekkhopi yathāvuttaṃ bojjhaṃ bojjhitabbaṃ attano pariññābhisamayādinā jānāti, tasmā ‘‘sato…pe… mohassā’’ti vuccati thomīyatīti veditabbo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ke visujjhantā? Sekkhā’’ti.
既然应当说“为何有学与无学以念与正知前进等的状态,以及贪等灭尽的状态,应当被信受?”因此宣说‘所以世尊说:具念比丘应游行’。既然应当问“导师已指出,世尊的一切身业以智为先导等,于可意诸欲中无贪染的状态、于不可意诸欲中心无浑浊的状态、于一切法中善巧的状态、具念与正知者的游行状态。为什么我们应当信受那无贪染等的状态?”因此宣说‘所以这样说:于诸欲中……乃至……应游行’。此偈中的问答审察,也应当依此前所说的单一所依等、法所依等理趣的随行来理解。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kasmā sekkhāsekkhānaṃ satisampajaññena abhikkamanādibhāvo, rāgādīnañca khayabhāvo saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā vuttaṃ ‘‘tenāha bhagavā sato bhikkhu paribbaje’’ti. ‘‘Bhagavato sabbaṃ kāyakammaṃ ñāṇapubbaṅgama’ntiādinā (netti. 15) manāpikesu kāmesu nābhigijjhanabhāvo, amanāpikesu kāmesu manasā anāvilabhāvo, sabbadhammesu kusalabhāvo, satisampajaññena samannāgatassa paribbajanabhāvo ācariyena niddiṭṭho, so nābhigijjhanabhāvādiko kasmā amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā vuttaṃ ‘‘tenāha kāmesu…pe… paribbaje’’ti. Imissā gāthāyapi pucchāvissajjanavicayo pubbe ekādhiṭṭhānādidhammādhiṭṭhānādivasena vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
在辨别之说的分别中,导师已取出《阿逸多经》对问的审查与答的审查作了分别解说,我们也已了知。而由于需要问“在诸经中什么是问的审查与答的审查?”,为了显示:依循《阿逸多经》中审问与审答的方法,在其他诸经中也应取出问答,并运用审问与审答,因此说“应如此问,应如此答”。而在注释书中——显示巴利原文
Vicayahāravibhaṅge ajitasuttaṃ nīharitvā pucchāvissajjanavicayo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘katamo suttantaresu pucchāvissajjanavicayo’’ti pucchitabbattā ajitasutte pucchāvissajjanavicayanayānusārena suttantaresupi pucchāvissajjanāni nīharitvā pucchāvicayavissajjanavicayā yojetabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ pucchitabbaṃ, evaṃ vissajjitabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
至此,大长老在分别辨别之说时,依《阿逸多经》开示了审问与审答之后,为显示此方法在其余诸经中如何应用于审问与审答,而如此说道:“应如此问,应如此答。”显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā ca mahāthero vicayahāraṃ vibhajanto ajitasuttavasena pucchāvicayaṃ, vissajjanavicayañca dassetvā idāni suttantaresupi pucchāvissajjanavicayānaṃ nayaṃ dassento evaṃ pucchitabbaṃ, evaṃ vissajjitabba’nti āhā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 17) –
以上已说。此处“如是”是指:应依循《阿逸多经》中所开示的审问方式,取出以提问形式呈现的经文,来分别审问;同样地,应依循《阿逸多经》中所开示的审答方式,在其他经中取出以解答形式呈现的经文,来分别审答。显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ. Tattha evanti ajitasutte (su. ni. 1038 ādayo; cūḷani. vatthugāthā 57, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 1 ādayo) vuttapucchāvicayānusārena pucchāvasena pavattasuttaṃ nīharitvā pucchāvicayo vibhajetabbo, evaṃ ajitasutte (su. ni. 1038 ādayo; cūḷani. vatthugāthā 57 ādayo, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 1 ādayo) vuttavissajjanavicayānusārena suttantaresupi vissajjanavasena pavattasuttaṃ nīharitvā vissajjanavicayo vibhajetabbo.
提问与解答的考察,阿阇梨已经分别,我们也已了知。为解答“什么是经与随偈的考察”,故说“经的与随偈”等语。在此,“经的”指所引出的经。“随偈”则指属于其他经教的随偈。应使义理与文句相符:即应使该随偈在义理上和文句上与所要注释的经相同、相似,或者说,应使该随偈与所要注释的经在经义上、文句上相符。为解答“若义理不符,有何过失”,故说“义理乖离的文句,即成绮语”。又因为已说“义理不符的过失我们也已了知,但若文句不符,又有何过失”,所以更应设问而说:“放置不当的文句,其义理也难以通达。”因此,正由于有此过失,在结集时应使随偈或经具足义理与文句。显示巴利原文
Pucchāvissajjanavicayā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘katamo suttaanugītivicayo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘suttassa ca anugītī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha suttassāti nīharitasuttassa. Anugītīti suttantaradesanāsaṅkhātā anugīti. Atthato ca byañjanato ca samānetabbāti tassā anugītiyā atthato, byañjanato ca saṃvaṇṇetabbasuttena samānā sadisī kātabbā, tasmiṃ vā saṃvaṇṇiyamānasutte anugīti suttatthato, byañjanato ca samānetabbā . ‘‘Atthato asamāne ko nāma doso āpajjeyyā’’ti pucchitabbattā atthāpagataṃ hi byañjanaṃ samphappalāpaṃ bhavatī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Atthato asamāne doso vutto, amhehi ca ñāto, byañjanato asamāne pana ko nāma doso āpajjatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dunnikkhittassa padabyañjanassa atthopi dunnayo bhavatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā sadosattā anugītiyā vā suttena atthabyañjanūpetaṃ saṅgāyitabbaṃ.
随偈的考察,阿阇梨已经分别,我们也已了知。为解答“什么是经的考察”,故说“与经”等语。在此,“与经”指与所择定的经。应如此考察:“此所择定的经,是世尊亲口所说的教言,还是结集者们所说的衔接语?”应如此考察:“此所择定的经,是了义,还是不了义?”应如此考察:“此所择定的经,属于杂染分,还是属于净习分?”应如此考察:“此所择定的经,属于决择分,还是属于无学分?”如此考察之后,若是亲口教言,便应择定为“亲口教言”而受持;若是无学经,便应择定为“无学经”而受持,这就是“了知”的意思。显示巴利原文
Anugītivicayo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘katamo suttassa vicayo’’ti pucchitabbattā suttañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha suttañcāti niddhāritasuttañca. ‘‘Idaṃ niddhāritasuttaṃ nāma bhagavatā vuttaṃ āhaccavacanaṃ kiṃ, udāhu saṅgāyantehi vuttaṃ anusandhivacanaṃ ki’’nti pavicinitabbaṃ, ‘‘idaṃ niddhāritasuttaṃ nītatthaṃ kiṃ, udāhu neyyatthaṃ ki’’nti pavicinitabbaṃ, ‘‘idaṃ niddhāritasuttaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ kiṃ, udāhu vāsanābhāgiyaṃ ki’’nti pavicinitabbaṃ, ‘‘idaṃ niddhāritasuttaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ kiṃ, udāhu asekkhabhāgiyaṃ ki’’nti pavicinitabbaṃ. Evaṃ pavicinitvā yadi āhaccavacanaṃ bhave, evaṃ sati ‘‘āhaccavacana’’nti niddhāretvā gahetabbaṃ. Yadi asekkhasuttaṃ bhave, evaṃ sati ‘‘asekkhasutta’’nti niddhāretvā gahetabbaṃ, ñātanti attho.
为解答“考察经之后,择定作为经义的一切诸谛,应在何处得见”,故而设问;为显示“应在此处得见”,便说“此经的一切……在何处……结尾”。在此,“此经”指为了考察而择定的那部经。由于该经的经义不出四谛,因此,一切诸谛应即在此经的开头、中间、结尾处见到,这是它的含义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Suttaṃ pavicinitvā suttassa atthabhūtāni sabbāni saccāni niddhāretvā kattha padese passitabbānī’’ti pucchitabbattā pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā imasmiṃ padese passitabbānīti dassetuṃ ‘‘kuhiṃ imassa suttassa sabbāni…pe… pariyosāne’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha imassa suttassāti yaṃ suttaṃ vicinituṃ niddhāritaṃ, imassa suttassa catusaccavinimuttassa suttatthassa abhāvato sabbāni saccāni tasseva suttassa ādimajjhapariyosāne passitabbānīti attho.
总结以上所说的经考察,而说“应如此考察经”。因应说“如上所述提问等的可考察性,应由我等了知、信受”,故说“因此他说……随偈”。于此,因如上所述提问等具有可考察性,尊者大迦旃延说了“所问的……随偈”等语;其要义是,以此语,可考察性应由你们了知或信受。显示巴利原文
Yathāvuttaṃ suttavicayaṃ nigamento ‘‘evaṃ suttaṃ pavicetabba’’nti āha. ‘‘Na yathāvuttapucchādīnaṃ pavicetabbabhāvo amhehi jānitabbo saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘tenāha…pe… anugītī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha tena yathāvuttapucchādīnaṃ vicetabbabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno ‘‘yaṃ pucchitañca…pe… anugītī’’tiādikaṃ yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena vicetabbabhāvo tumhehi jānitabbo saddahitabbovāti vuttaṃ hoti.
因应询问:“如上所说的这种考察,作为摄是圆满的呢,还是另有其他应择定而运用的呢?”故说“考察摄已予运用”。于此,提问考察、解答考察、前后考察、随偈考察、经考察已依其自性分别;以这些为基础,其余的味等考察也应当如理择定,而后运用、连接起来,这是旨趣所在。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathāvuttappakāro ca vicayo hāro paripuṇṇo kiṃ, udāhu aññopi niddhāretvā yojetabbo atthi ki’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘niyutto vicayo hāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha pucchāvicayavissajjanavicayapubbāparavicayaanugītivicayasuttavicayā sarūpato vibhattā, tehi avaseso assādādivicayopi yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yutto yuñjitabboti adhippāyo.
然而,诸智者应依循注疏与复注,将深奥之义详细分别之后而予受持。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
3. 理由摄论之阐释显示巴利原文
3. Yuttihāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
18 十八、凭藉注释特相的思择理趣分别,对句问等进行了审察,此一注释特相的思择理趣分别已告圆满。因为应当问“什么是合理理趣分别”,所以宣说“其中,什么是合理理趣”等。此处的“其中”,是指在已开示的十六种理趣中,问哪一种注释特相是合理理趣、合理理趣分别。“一切理趣”等的开示,应当了知即是如今所说“这是合理理趣”等广释注释特相,称为合理理趣分别。因此说“其中,什么是合理理趣等,是合理理趣分别”(《导论注》18)。这合理理趣,是问以合理或不合理的方式,将何种经义加以连接,即应当连接的经义。然而,经义有两种:以不如实方式执取者,与以如实方式执取者。其中,唯有以不如实方式执取的义,须依真实以理趣抉择而连接;另一者,则仅以如实陈述而连接。又因此注释名为理趣寻求,若无大教示则不可能,故在分别合理理趣时,为了首先指示合理理趣的相,而宣说“四大教示”等。其中,“大教示”是指以佛陀等大者为依据而说的根据,或指法的伟大所依、安立处。被指示者,称为“教示”;佛陀是此一根据的教示,故为“佛陀教示”。其余亦应依此理趣类推。“我于佛前亲闻显示巴利原文
18. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vicayahāravibhaṅgena padapañhādayo vicitā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vicayahāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo yuttihāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo yuttihāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu hāresu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso yuttihāro yuttihāravibhaṅgoti pucchi. ‘‘Sabbesaṃ hārāna’’ntiādiniddesassa idāni vuccamāno ‘‘ayaṃ yuttihāro’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso yuttihāravibhaṅgo nāmāti viññeyyo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tattha katamo yuttihārotiādi yuttihāravibhaṅgo’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 18). Ayaṃ yuttihāro kiṃ nāma suttatthaṃ yuttāyuttivasena yojayatīti yuñjitabbaṃ suttatthaṃ pucchati. Suttattho pana duvidho atathākārena gayhamāno, tathākārena gayhamāno atthoti. Tattha atathākārena gayhamānova attho yāthāvato yuttiniddhāraṇena yojetabbo, itaro pana bhūtakathanamattena yojetabbo. Yasmā panāyaṃ yuttigavesanā nāma saṃvaṇṇanā mahāpadesehi vinā na sambhavati, tasmā yuttihāraṃ vibhajanto tassa yuttihārassa lakkhaṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ upadisituṃ ‘‘cattāro mahāpadesā’’tiādimāha. Tattha mahāpadesāti mahante buddhādayo apadisitvā vuttāni kāraṇāni, mahantāni vā dhammassa apadesāni patiṭṭhānāni. Apadisīyateti apadeso, buddho apadeso etassa kāraṇassāti buddhāpadeso. Sesesupi eseva nayo netabbo. ‘‘Buddhassa sammukhā etaṃ suttaṃ mayā suta’’nti vatvā ābhatassa ganthassa suttavinayehi saṃsandanaṃ dhammo, asaṃsandanaṃ adhammoti vinicchayakāraṇaṃ mahāpadesoti adhippāyo. ‘‘Buddhassa sammukhā mayā ābhataṃ, saṅghassa sammukhā mayā ābhataṃ, sambahulattherānaṃ sammukhā mayā ābhataṃ, ekattherassa sammukhā mayā ābhata’’nti vatvā ābhatassa ganthassa yāni byañjanapadaatthapadāni santi, tāni padabyañjanāni bhagavatā desite sutte otarayitabbāni anuppavesitāni, vinaye rāgādivinaye sandassayitabbāni saṃsandetabbāni. Dhammatāyaṃ upanikkhipitabbāni pakkhipitabbāni. Yadi suttatthena, vinayatthena, dhammatāya ca aviruddhāni honti, evaṃ sati tava ābhatapadabyañjanāni yuttānīti vinicchayantehi vatvā gahetabbānīti adhippāyo.
“应令入、应令对现、应令安立于经、律、法性中”,这是阿阇梨所说。由于应当说明“于何经中,于何律中,于何法性中”,故说“于何经中”等。其中,“于四圣谛中”,即于开示四圣谛的经中。贪依此不净等而灭尽、寂止,故说为“贪调伏”。那是什么?即不净相等所缘。彼有此,故说为“贪调伏”。那是什么?即开示不净相等的特定经典。于“嗔调伏”等,亦依此理类推。缘起,是舍弃常见、断见后,以开示一性理趣等,而开示无明、行等自性法的缘与缘生之性,因此说“应安立于何法性中?于缘起中”。显示巴利原文
Suttavinayadhammatāsu otarayitabbāni sandassayitabbāni upanikkhipitabbānīti ācariyena vuttāni, ‘‘kattha sutte, kattha vinaye, kattha dhammatāya’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘katamasmiṃ sutte’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha catūsu ariyasaccesūti catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ dassanakesu suttesu. Rāgo vinassati vūpasamati etena asubhādināti rāgavinayaṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Asubhādinimittaṃ, taṃ assa atthīti rāgavinayo, ko so? Asubhādinimittadassanako suttantaviseso. Esa nayo dosavinayotiādīsupi. Paṭiccasamuppādo nāma sassatadiṭṭhiucchedadiṭṭhiṃ vivajjetvā ekattanayādīnaṃ dīpanena avijjādisaṅkhārādisabhāvadhammānaṃ paccayapaccayuppannabhāvadīpakoti vuttaṃ ‘‘katamissaṃ dhammatāyaṃ upanikkhipitabbāni? Paṭiccasamuppāde’’ti.
由于应当问:“若入、若对现、若不违于经等,则不生什么?”故说“于四”等。其中,若说“我于佛等前持来”后,所持来典籍若入于四圣谛,则如此,所持来典籍不生诸漏。若对现于贪等烦恼调伏,则如此,所持来典籍不生诸漏。若不违于法性,则如此,所持来典籍不生诸漏,应见此义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Suttādīsu avatarante sandissante avilomente kiṃ na janetī’’ti vattabbato ‘‘catūsū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘buddhādīnaṃ sammukhā mayā ābhata’’nti vatvā ābhatagantho catūsu ariyasaccesu yadi avatarati, evaṃ sati ābhatagantho āsave na janeti. Rāgādikilesavinaye yadi sandissati, evaṃ sati ābhatagantho āsave na janeti. Dhammatañca yadi na vilometi, evaṃ sati ābhatagantho āsave na janetīti attho daṭṭhabbo.
因为应当说明“为何在合理理趣分别中引用四大教示”,故说“以四大教示”等。在所持来的经典中,任何所生的义理、任何所生的法,若与四大教示相合,便应将那所生的义理或所生的法收录于应注释的经中。又以任何理由与四大教示相合,便将那理由以注释的方式收录于应注释的经中;以任何方式与四大教示相合,便将那方式以注释的方式收录于应注释的经中。为了如此收录,故引用四大教示,这是其含义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kimatthaṃ yuttihāravibhaṅge cattāro mahāpadesā ābhatā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘catūhi mahāpadesehī’’tiādimāha. Tattha ābhataganthe yaṃ yaṃ atthajātaṃ, yaṃ yaṃ dhammajātaṃ vā catūhi mahāpadesehi yujjati, taṃ taṃ atthajātaṃ vā taṃ taṃ dhammajātaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇetabbasutte gahetabbaṃ. Yena yena kāraṇena ca catūhi mahāpadesehi yujjati, taṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāvasena saṃvaṇṇetabbasutte gahetabbaṃ. Yathā yathā pakārena catūhi mahāpadesehi yujjati, so so pakāro saṃvaṇṇanāvasena saṃvaṇṇetabbasutte gahetabbo. Evaṃ gāhaṇatthaṃ cattāro mahāpadesā ābhatāti attho.
19 十九、阿阇梨说:“凡是与四大教示相合而不相违的任何所生义,都应予以接受。”因为应当说明“于何处、由谁应作理趣抉择”,故说“由问问题者”等。亦即,应由提问者于问题中作理趣抉择。其中,“问题”指应被问的自性法。“由问者”指有能力解答的智者。“于问题”指以提问方式进行的文句。应首先以句为单位,彻底审察有多少句,并以合理理趣审思、探究。由于应问“如何审思”,故说“若所有”等。其中,“所有句”指所问文句中一切句,若它们宣说同一义,则依义而为一个问题。于其余情况,亦依此理类推。因此说“因为欲知彼一义”(《导论注》19)。显示巴利原文
19. Catūhi mahāpadesehi yuttaṃ aviruddhaṃ taṃ taṃ atthajātaṃ gahetabbanti ācariyena vuttaṃ, ‘‘kattha kena yuttiniddhāraṇaṃ kātabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘pañhaṃ pucchitenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pañhe pañhaṃ pucchitena puggalena yuttiniddhāraṇaṃ kātabbanti. Tattha pañhanti pañhitabbaṃ sabhāvadhammaṃ. Pucchitenāti vissajjetuṃ samatthena paṇḍitapuggalena. Pañheti pucchāvasena pavattapāṭhe. Padāni kati kittakāni hontīti padaso paṭhamaṃ pariyogāhitabbaṃ yuttihārena vicetabbaṃ vīmaṃsitabbaṃ. ‘‘Kathaṃ vicetabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yadi sabbānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sabbāni padānīti pucchitapāṭhe niravasesāni padāni ekaṃ samānaṃ atthaṃ yadi abhivadanti, evaṃ sati atthavasena eko pañho. Esa nayo sesesupi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tadatthassekassa ñātuṃ icchitattā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 19).
“一”指依义理而为一类问题。由反复检验的人即应了知、坚定地了知。为了显示“了知的途径是什么”,而说“这些法是什么”等。其中,“那些应被解释的教理之法,是义理不同,还是文句不同?抑或这些教理之法义理为一,只是文句有异呢?”——应如此依理推究而了知,这是其连结。为了显示“如所说的问题是什么”,便问“如同什么”,而后说“如同那……”等。显示巴利原文
Ekanti atthavasena ekavidhaṃ pañhaṃ. Upaparikkhamānena puggalena aññātabbaṃ daḷhaṃ jānitabbaṃ. ‘‘Ko ājānanākāro’’ti pucchitabbattā ājānanākāraṃ dassento ‘‘kiṃ ime dhammā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘ye hi pariyattidhammā saṃvaṇṇetabbā, ime pariyattidhammā nānatthā honti kiṃ, nānābyañjanā honti kiṃ, udāhu imesaṃ pariyattidhammānaṃ eko attho hoti, byañjanameva nānaṃ hoti ki’’nti yuttito vicetvā aññātabbanti yojanā. ‘‘Yathāvutto pañho kiṃ bhave’’ti pucchitabbattā yathāvuttaṃ pañhaṃ ekadesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā kiṃ bhave’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘yathā sā’’tiādimāha.
在那提问偈颂中:如同盗贼被刽子手砍杀一般,众生世间恒常被何法砍杀?如同被藤蔓缠绕、覆盖其所依附的树一般,众生世间恒常被何法缠绕、覆盖?如同被涂有毒药的利箭射入、穿透一般,众生世间恒常被何箭射入、穿透?众生世间恒常被何烟所熏、被何所烧?这是其文句的连缀。显示巴利原文
Tassaṃ pucchāgāthāyaṃ – coraghātakena manussena coro abbhāhato viya kena dhammena sattaloko sadā abbhāhato, māluvalatāya attano nissitarukkho parivārito ajjhotthaṭo viya kena dhammena sattaloko sadā parivārito ajjhotthaṭo, visappītakhurappena sallena otiṇṇo anupaviṭṭho viya kena sallena sattaloko sadā otiṇṇo anupaviṭṭho, kissa kena kāraṇena sattaloko sadā dhūpāyito santāpitoti yojanā.
为了回答“此提问偈颂中有多少词句”而说“这些”等语。其中,被问及含义的词句共有四句。为了回答“有多少问题”而说“那三个问题”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Imāya pucchāgāthāya kittakāni padānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘imānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pucchitānīti pucchitatthāni padāni cattāri honti. ‘‘Kittakā pañhā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘te tayo pañhā’’ti vuttaṃ.
因为世尊为那位天人所解答,由此从解答中便可了知为“三个问题”。为了回答“哪一个是解答偈颂”而说——显示巴利原文
Bhagavā devatāya hi yasmā vissajjeti, iti tasmā vissajjanato ‘‘tayopañhā’’ti viññāyati. ‘‘Katamā vissajjanagāthā’’ti pucchitabbattā –
世间恒为死亡所击打,常被老衰所围困;
为渴爱之箭所射中,恒时被欲望烟熏。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Maccunābbhāhato loko, jarāya parivārito; Taṇhāsallena otiṇṇo, icchādhūpāyito sadā’’ti. –
如是说。在那解答偈中:正如盗贼被刽子手所杀一般,众生世间恒常为死亡所击打;正如树木被自己所依附的蔓藤缠绕覆盖一般,众生世间恒常被老衰缠绕覆盖;正如被涂毒的利箭射入穿透一般,众生世间恒常被渴爱之箭射入穿透;众生世间恒常被欲望所烟熏、所烧灼。这便是其中的连结。显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ. Tassaṃ vissajjanagāthāyaṃ – coraghātakena manussena coro abbhāhato viya maccunā sattaloko sadā abbhāhato, māluvalatāya attano nissitarukkho parivārito ajjhotthaṭo viya jarāya sattaloko sadā parivārito ajjhotthaṭo, visappītakhurappena sallena otiṇṇo anupaviṭṭho viya taṇhāsallena sattaloko sadā otiṇṇo anupaviṭṭho, icchāya sattaloko sadā dhūpāyito santāpitoti yojanā.
20 为解答“何为死,何为老”,故说“其中,老”等句。此处的“其中”,是指那解答偈之中。第二句所说的老与第一句所说的死,此二者是有为的五蕴聚的有为之相;离开有为的五蕴聚,便不能单独获得——这是它的义理。为说明“老与死此二有为之相当如何分别了知”,而说“于老中,住立者的变异性”等句。这里,“于老中,住立者的变异性”是指安住着的蕴相续的变异性,这是显而易见的“老”,并非刹那安住的老。“死是灭尽”,是指世俗共许的死,即结生的灭尽,既不是刹那死,也不是断灭死。因此说:“生起可了知,灭尽可了知,安住者的变异可了知。”显示巴利原文
20. ‘‘Katamaṃ maccu, katamā jarā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha jarā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tissaṃ vissajjanagāthāyaṃ. Dutiyapade vuttā jarā ca paṭhamapade vuttaṃ maraṇañca imāni dve saṅkhatassa khandhapañcakassa saṅkhatalakkhaṇāni honti, saṅkhataṃ khandhapañcakaṃ muñcitvā visuṃ na upalabbhatīti attho. ‘‘Saṅkhatalakkhaṇānaṃ jarāmaraṇānaṃ kathaṃ bhedo jānitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘jarāyaṃ ṭhitassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha jarāyaṃ ṭhitassa aññathattanti ṭhitassa khandhappabandhassa yaṃ aññathattaṃ, ayaṃ pākaṭajarā nāma, na khaṇaṭṭhitijarā. Maraṇaṃ vayoti sammutimaraṇaṃ cutiyeva hoti, na khaṇikamaraṇaṃ, na samucchedamaraṇaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘uppādo paññāyati, vayo paññāyati, ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ paññāyatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.38; a. ni. 3.47; kathā. 214).
若死亡只是安住者的死,那么老与死的差别便不合理;倘不合理,则“那三个问题”的说法也不合理。为明此义,故说“其中,老与……”等。此处,“其中”是指那解答偈中所说的老与所说的死,就其义理而言,差别是合理的。显示巴利原文
Yadi ṭhitasseva maraṇaṃ siyā, evaṃ sati jarāmaraṇānaṃ nānattaṃ yuttaṃ na siyā, ayutte sati ‘‘te tayo pañhā’’ti vacanampi ayuttamevāti vattabbato ‘‘tattha jarāya cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tissaṃ vissajjanagāthāyaṃ vuttāya jarāya ca vuttassa maraṇassa ca atthato nānattaṃ yuttaṃ.
为说明“依何因由而合理,依何因由而应接受差别”,故说“即使是处于母胎中的众生也会死”。因为即使未达老的、尚处母胎的众生也会死,所以应接受差别。为说明“即使是处于母胎中的众生也可能达至衰老”,故说“但他们并未衰老”。即使已到达老,由于未现起衰老,即未达明显之老便已死去;由此,这里意指无明显的死亡发生,故应了知:老是一事,死是另一事。为说明“并非只有处母胎界的众生才会在未达明显的老时死去,其他众生亦然”,故说“并且诸天也有死”。为说明“诸天因长时存在,也可能达到老”,故说“但他们的身体并不衰老”。为说明“老与死差别的原因不仅仅是这些”,并显示另有他因,故说“能对治……”等。其中,能对治明显的衰老,却不能对治死;以此因由,亦应接受老与死的差别,这便是义理。考虑到这样的责难:“为何说不能对治死?难道通过修习神足通获得自在时,还不能对治死吗?”故说“除了具神通者的神通境界之外”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kena kāraṇena yuttaṃ, kathaṃ kāraṇena nānattaṃ sampaṭicchitabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘gabbhagatāpi hi mīyantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Jaraṃ appattā gabbhagatāpi sattā hi yasmā mīyanti, tasmā nānattaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ. ‘‘Gabbhagatāpi jarappattā bhaveyyu’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘na ca te jiṇṇā bhavantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Jarappattāpi ajiṇṇattā jiṇṇajaraṃ appattāva mīyanti, evaṃ idhādhippetassa jiṇṇajarāvirahitassa maraṇassa sambhavato aññā jarā, aññaṃ maraṇanti ñātabbanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Na gabbhagatānaṃyeva jiṇṇajaraṃ appattaṃ maraṇaṃ atthi, aññesampi atthī’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘atthi ca devānaṃ maraṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Devāpi cirakālasambhavato jaraṃ pattā bhaveyyu’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘na ca tesaṃ sarīrāni jīrantī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Jarāmaraṇānaṃ nānatte kāraṇaṃ ettakamevā’’ti vattabbattā aññampi atthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘sakkate vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha jiṇṇajarāya paṭikammaṃ kātuṃ sakkateva, maraṇassa pana paṭikammassa kātuṃ na sakkateva, imināpi kāraṇena jarāmaraṇānaṃ nānattaṃ sampaṭicchitabbamevāti attho. ‘‘Na sakkate maraṇassa paṭikammaṃ kātu’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu iddhipādabhāvanāya vasībhāve sati sakkā maraṇassāpi paṭikammaṃ kātunti codanaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘aññatreva iddhimantānaṃ iddhivisayā’’ti vuttaṃ.
阿阇梨已开示了老与死彼此间的差别,我们也已了知。为了阐明“然而,渴爱与老死如何有差别”,便说“然而,即使……”等语,以显示渴爱与它们的差异。因为即使没有渴爱,离贪者也照样会老、会死,正如所见,所以应承认渴爱与老死是不同的。显示巴利原文
Jarāmaraṇānaṃ aññamaññaṃ nānābhāvo ācariyena dassito, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ pana taṇhāya jarāmaraṇehi nānābhāvo’’ti vattabbato tehi taṇhāya nānattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ panāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṇhāya avijjamānāyapi jīrantāpi mīyantāpi vītarāgā yasmā dissanti, tasmā taṇhāya jarāmaraṇehi nānābhāvo sampaṭicchitabbo.
如果有人认为“渴爱具有老、坏灭的特征”,那么,当他们执取渴爱与老死无差别时,会有什么过失呢?为了指出这一过失,所以说“如果……”等语。正如老死以老、坏灭的特征而明显,同样,如果渴爱也以老、坏灭的特征而明显,那么,如果真是这样,哪怕正值青春年华的所有人也应成为离渴爱者,然而他们并非离渴爱者,因此应当承认二者是不同的。为了显示还会产生其他过失,又说道“又如渴爱是苦之……”等语。此中,若老死与渴爱无差别,则如同渴爱(有爱)是苦集一样,老死也应成为苦集。正因为老死并非苦集,所以应知老死与渴爱是不同的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Taṇhāya jīraṇabhijjanalakkhaṇaṃ atthīti tehi taṇhāya anaññatte ko nāma doso siyā’’ti vattabbato dosaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yadi cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Jarāmaraṇaṃ yathā yena jīraṇabhijjanalakkhaṇena pākaṭaṃ, evaṃ jīraṇabhijjanalakkhaṇena taṇhāpi pākaṭā. Yadi ca siyā; evaṃ sante yobbanaṭṭhāpi sabbe māṇavā vigatataṇhā siyuṃ, na ca vigatataṇhā, tasmā nānābhāvo sampaṭicchitabbo. Tato aññopi doso āpajjeyyāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā ca taṇhā dukkhassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha jarāmaraṇānaṃ taṇhāya anaññatte sati taṇhāya bhavataṇhāya dukkhasamudayo hoti, evaṃ jarāmaraṇampi dukkhasamudayo siyā. Yasmā na jarāmaraṇaṃ dukkhasamudayo, tasmā jarāmaraṇehi taṇhāya nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.
为了显示若它们无差别还会产生这样的过失,而说“又如渴爱是道所断……”等语。其中,若它们无差别,则如同渴爱是道所断一样,老死也应成为道所断。而如同老死并非道所断,渴爱也不应是道所断,但事实并非如此——因为渴爱是应断的,老死不是应断的,因此也应知老死与渴爱是不同的。显示巴利原文
Tehi tāya anaññatte sati evampi doso āpajjeyyāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā ca taṇhā maggavajjhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tehi tāya anaññatte sati yathā taṇhā maggavajjhā hoti, evaṃ jarāmaraṇampi maggavajjhaṃ siyā. Yathā jarāmaraṇaṃ maggavajjhaṃ na hoti, evaṃ taṇhāpi maggavajjhā na siyā, tathā ca na hoti pahātabbāpahātabbabhāvato, tasmāpi jarāmaraṇehi taṇhāya nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.
既然需要说明“应以‘如果……’等语所表述的理证和理由来探求老死与渴爱的差别”,为了表明也应以其他理由来探求,故说“以此理证……”等语。其中,“以此理证”是指以“如果……”等语所说的这种理证、这种理由。“应以种种理由”意为:应以种种作为理由的理证来探求老死与渴爱的差别,这是其含义。为何说“应以种种理由来探求”?难道不是已从理证、从意义上见到了差别吗?忆念此问难后,便说“如果见到……”等语。其中,倘若从理证所成立、从意义上也见到了老死与渴爱的差别,那么,从文句上也必定应探求差别,这是其含义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yadi cātiādinā vuttāya yuttiyā upapattiyā eva jarāmaraṇehi taṇhāya aññattaṃ gavesitabba’’nti vattabbattā aññehipi kāraṇehi gavesitabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘imāya yuttiyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha imāya yuttiyāti yā yutti ‘‘yadi cā’’tiādinā vuttāya imāya yuttiyā upapattiyā. Aññamaññehi kāraṇehi aññehi aññehi kāraṇabhūtehi upapattīhi jarāmaraṇehi taṇhāya aññattaṃ gavesitabbanti attho. ‘‘Aññamaññehi kāraṇehi gavesitabba’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu yuttiyā, atthato ca aññattaṃ sandissatīti codanaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘yadi ca sandissatī’’tiādimāha. Tattha yuttisamāruḷhaṃ atthato ca maraṇehi taṇhāya ca aññattaṃ yadi ca sandissati, byañjanatopi aññattaṃ gavesitabbamevāti attho.
由于需要说明“如何从文句上探求差别?”,故说“箭……”等语。其中,以“箭”或“烟熏”这两种文句所说的这些名为欲、渴爱的法,从意义上说,它们是同一、一致的,这是合理的,并非不同。对于不以“箭”或“烟熏”这两种文句所说的老死与渴爱,它们同一则不合理。为阐明此义,而说“因为不……”等语。其中,欲与渴爱从意义上说,不同是不合理的,唯有同一才是合理的,这是其联系。因为欲与渴爱有老、坏的生起,所以老死与渴爱可能同一。由于需要说明“为何不同是合理的?”,故说“当渴爱的意图……”等语。其中,当渴爱的意图未满足时,于九种嗔恨事中,会生起忿怒,也会生起怨恨。当老死未满足时,于九种嗔恨事中,不会生起忿怒,也不会生起怨恨。因此,应知以此理证,老与死和渴爱从意义上说,不同确实是合理的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathaṃ byañjanato aññattaṃ gavesitabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘salloti vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘sallo’’ti vā ‘‘dhūpāyana’’nti vā dvīhi byañjanehi vuccamānānaṃ imesaṃ icchātaṇhāsaṅkhātānaṃ dhammānaṃ atthato ekattaṃ samānattaṃ yujjati, na aññattaṃ. ‘‘Sallo’’ti vā ‘‘dhūpāyana’’nti vā dvīhi byañjanehi avuccamānānaṃ jarāmaraṇānaṃ taṇhāya ekattaṃ na yujjati. Tamevatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘na hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha icchāya ca taṇhāya ca atthato aññattaṃ na yujjati, ekattameva yujjatīti yojanā. Icchāya ca taṇhāya ca jīraṇabhijjanasambhavato jarāmaraṇehi taṇhāya ekattaṃ siyā, ‘‘kasmā aññattaṃ yutta’’nti vattabbato ‘‘taṇhāya adhippāye’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha taṇhāya adhippāye aparipūramāne navasu āghātavatthūsu kodho ca uppajjati, upanāho ca uppajjati. Jarāmaraṇesu aparipūramānesu navasu āghātavatthūsu kodho ca na uppajjati, upanāho ca na uppajjati. Iti imāya yuttiyā jarāya ca maraṇassa ca taṇhāya ca atthato aññattaṃ yujjatiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
如果欲与渴爱在意义上同一合理,那么世尊为何在“世间被死神所袭”等偈颂中,二分地说“被渴爱之箭所贯穿,常被欲之烟所熏”呢?为避开此问难,而说“然而,世尊所说的这个……”等语。其中,以“欲”和“渴爱”这两个名称所说的这个言说,是世尊依据外在的、可欲可求的事物——即色等所缘的差别,而以“欲”和“渴爱”两个名称来说的,是以言说的方式而作的,因此,同一才是合理的,并非不同,应知这是其含义。显示巴利原文
Yadi icchā taṇhāya atthato ekattaṃ yuttaṃ, evaṃ sati kasmā bhagavatā ‘‘maccunābbhāhato loko’’tiādigāthāyaṃ ‘‘taṇhāsallena otiṇṇo, icchādhūpāyito sadā’’ti dvidhā vuttāti codanaṃ pariharanto ‘‘yaṃ panidaṃ bhagavatā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘icchā’’tipi ‘‘taṇhā’’tipi dvīhi nāmehi yaṃ panidaṃ abhilapitaṃ yaṃ panidaṃ abhilapanaṃ kataṃ, idaṃ abhilapanaṃ bhagavatā bāhirānaṃ icchitabbatasitabbānaṃ vatthūnaṃ rūpādiārammaṇānaṃ bhedānaṃ vasena ‘‘icchā’’tipi ‘‘taṇhā’’tipi dvīhi nāmehi abhilapitaṃ abhilapanavasena katanti ekattaṃ yuttameva, na nānattanti attho daṭṭhabbo.
因为应当说:“以名称而二分说的欲、渴爱等,凭何相信它们是同一的呢?”所以说了“一切……”等语。其中,一切以种种名称区分的欲等渴爱,确实以执取为同一特征,因此,即便名称不同,也应相信它们以同一特征而为同一,应知此义。因为应当问:“如何是合理的?”所以说了“如同一切……”等语。其中,如同以薪火、草火等而种种的一切火,都以热性为同一特征,同样,这些也以执取为同一特征,这便是其中的关联。为了显示一切火依所依而有种种名称,从自性上说明,故说“又……”等语。其含义是明显的。应作这样的关联:渴爱依所缘而被世尊以种种名称所说,火依所依而被以种种名称所说。显示巴利原文
‘‘Nāmavasena dvidhā vuttānaṃ icchātaṇhādīnaṃ kena ekattaṃ yuttanti saddahitabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘sabbāhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nānānāmavasena pabhedā sabbā icchādikā taṇhā ajjhosānalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇā hi yasmā yuttā, tasmā nāmavasena bhinnānampi ekalakkhaṇena ekattaṃ yuttanti saddahitabbanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Kimiva yutta’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yathā sabbo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kaṭṭhaggiādivasena aneko sabboaggi uṇhattalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇo yathā, evaṃ ajjhosānalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇāti yojanā. Sabbassa aggino upādānavasena anekāni nāmāni sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho pākaṭo. Ārammaṇavasena taṇhā aññehi aññehi nāmehi bhagavatā abhilapitā, upādānavasena aggi aññehi aññehi nāmehi abhilapitoti yojanā kātabbā.
在回答偈中,以所出现的名称而被称为渴爱,因此应被询问;为了显示它以众多名称被称说,故说“欲求”等。其中,应被欲求的义利即色等所缘,众生以此而欲求,故为欲求。以此而渴求,故为渴爱。如箭一般刺入、进入、扩散,故为箭;或带来热恼,故为箭;或令热恼生起,故为箭。令熏烧、热恼、遍烧,故为熏烧。如急流一般流动、牵引、夺去,故为流;或流动、刺入,故为流。扩散,故为扩散。以喜之因而润泽,故为润泽。在种种趣中产生疲劳,故为疲劳。众生以此而认为色等所缘,故为认为。系缚于有,故为系缚。被希望、被渴求,故为希望;或希望、渴求,故为希望。被渴望,故为渴望;或渴望所缘之味,故为渴望。被欢喜,故为欢喜;或欢喜,故为欢喜。详细应依注疏(《导论》注第20)而了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vissajjanagāthāyaṃ āgatanāmehi eva taṇhā abhilapitā’’ti pucchitabbattā anekehi nāmehi abhilapitāti dassetuṃ ‘‘icchāitipī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha icchitabbāni atthāni rūpādīni ārammaṇāni sattā icchanti etāyāti icchā. Tasanti etāyāti taṇhā. Sallati pavisati visappītaṃ sallaṃ viyāti sallā, santāpaṃ lāti ādadātīti vā sallā, santāpaṃ lāti pavattetīti vā sallā. Dhūpāyati santāpeti paridahatīti dhūpāyanā. Sarati ākaḍḍhati avaharati sīghasotā saritā viyāti saritā, sarati sallatīti vā saritā. Visaratīti visattikā. Pītivasena sinehatīti sineho. Tāsu tāsu gatīsu kilamathaṃ uppādetīti kilamatho. Sattā rūpādiārammaṇāni maññanti etāyāti maññanā. Bhavaṃ bandhatīti bandho. Āsīyate patthīyateti āsā. Āsiyati patthetīti vā āsā. Pipāsīyateti pipāsā, ārammaṇarasaṃ pipāsatīti vā pipāsā. Abhinandīyateti abhinandanā, abhinandatīti vā abhinandanā. Vitthārato aṭṭhakathāvasena (netti. aṭṭha. 20) veditabbo.
因为应当说:“渴爱以欲求等种种方式被称说,应依何而信受?”所以说了“如于同义词”等。在同义词之引导的分别中,“希望与欲……同义词”(《导论》37),渴爱如以某种方式被说,就应信受那以彼方式所说的渴爱,是以欲求等种种方式被称说。因为应当说:“即使导师在同义词分别中所说,若世尊未曾说,应依何而信受?”所以说了“如世尊所说”等。如世尊以某种方式说了“于色有彼”等语,就应依彼方式所说的彼语而信受。如此,则是合理的,即应把握此义:依所说之理,欲与渴爱于义为一,老、死与渴爱于义为异,故“三问”之语所说,彼语为合理。显示巴利原文
‘‘Taṇhāya icchādippakāravasena ālapitabhāvo kena saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yathā ca vevacane’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vevacanahāravibhaṅge ‘‘āsā ca pīhā…pe… vevacana’’nti (netti. 37) yā taṇhā yathā yena pakārena vuttā, tathā tena pakārena vuttāya taṇhāya icchādippakāravasena ālapitabhāvo saddahitabbo. ‘‘Vevacanavibhaṅge ācariyena vuttopi bhagavatā avutte kena saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yathāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā yena pakārena bhagavā ‘‘rūpe tissā’’tiādikaṃ yaṃ vacanamāha, tathā tena pakārena vuttena tena vacanena saddahitabbo vāti. Evaṃ yujjatīti evaṃ vuttanayena icchātaṇhānaṃ atthato ekattā , jarāya ca maraṇassa ca taṇhāya ca atthato aññattā ca ‘‘tayo pañhā’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ vacanaṃ yujjatīti attho gahetabbo.
21 在第21颂“世间被何所害”等偈中提出了三个问题,导师已经分别解说了三问存在的道理,我们也已了知。由于还应当阐明“依其他方式,此理又该如何了知”,为了显示也应依其他方式寻求道理,所以接着说“一切苦之现行”等。其中,一切苦的现行以欲渴行之根为因,这是合理的;一切厌离的现行以欲渴资具之根为因,便不合理。依词义而言,苦的现行、转起,就是苦之现行;以欲渴为缘而转起的行,是它的根,所以称为欲渴行之根。厌离的现行、转起,就是厌离之现行;作为欲渴资具所依的欲,是它的根,所以称为欲渴资具之根。在这里,被称为不乐的厌倦,也就是厌离,若以欲渴资具为根是合理的;但由智慧所生的厌离若以欲渴资具为根,就不合理了。因此说:并非一切厌离的现行都以欲渴资具为根,所以说它不合理。显示巴利原文
21. ‘‘Kenassubbhāhato lokotiādigāthāya tayo pañhā vuttā’’ti pañhattayabhāve yutti ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā. ‘‘Tato aññehi pakārehi yutti kathaṃ ñātabbā’’ti vattabbabhāvato aññehi pakārehipi yuttigavesanaṃ dassento ‘‘sabbo dukkhūpacāro’’tiādimāha. Tattha sabbo dukkhūpacāro kāmataṇhāsaṅkhāramūlakoti yujjati, sabbo nibbidūpacāro kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlakoti na yujjati. Vacanatthato pana dukkhassa upacāro pavattīti dukkhūpacāro. Kāmataṇhāpaccayā pavatto saṅkhāro mūlaṃ etassāti kāmataṇhāsaṅkhāramūlako. Nibbidāya upacāro pavattīti nibbidūpacāro. Kāmataṇhāya parikkhārabhūto vatthukāmo mūlaṃ etassāti kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlakoti. Tattha anabhiratisaṅkhātā ukkaṇṭhā nibbidā kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlikā yujjati, ñāṇanibbidā kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlikā na yujjati, tasmā sabbo nibbidūpacāro kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlakoti na pana yujjatīti vuttaṃ.
因为还应当说明:“导师已分别的三问存在之理以及苦之现行与厌离之现行中的道理,是否只应观照这一种道理,还是也应依此道理去寻求其他道理?”为了指出正确的方法,所以说“依此……”等。这里的意思是:在三问存在以及苦之现行与厌离之现行中,我所分别的道理,应当随顺这一道理,在各处巴利经文里,也运用其他种种理据去寻求道理。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pañhattayabhāve ceva dukkhūpacāranibbidūpacāre ca yā yutti ācariyena vibhattā, sāva yutti sallakkhetabbā kiṃ, udāhu imāya yuttiyā aññāpi yutti gavesitabbā ki’’nti vattabbato nayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imāyā’’tiādimāha. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – pañhattayabhāve ceva dukkhūpacāranibbidūpacāre ca yā yutti mayā vibhattā, imāya yuttiyā anusārena aññamaññehi kāraṇehi tesu tesu pāḷippadesesu yuttipi gavesitabbāti.
因为还应当说:“这种方法的显示还是简略的,不能详尽地加以推求”,所以为了将那种方法的显示展开来详细分别,便开始了“正如世尊……”等的说明。由于不净是可厌离的对象,贪的生起是不合理的,因此为贪行者说不净法而对治贪,是合理的。由于慈心是嗔恚的对治,为嗔行者说慈法而对治嗔,是合理的。由于缘起是智慧的领域,为痴行者说缘起而对治痴,是合理的。又因为应当说:“对贪行者而言,慈等法也可能合理,因为它遍及一切众生”,所以才说“如果世尊在这儿……”等。这是指烦恼炽盛的贪行者:如果对那样的补特伽罗说慈心解脱,那么因为依慈也会生起贪欲,所以说法就不合理了。或者说,如果为他宣说乐行道,由于贪行者并不适合苦行道,所以说法也不合理。又或者说,如果为他宣说以观为前导的断,由于贪行者舍弃不净随观而做以观为前导的断是难以做到的,所以说法也不合理。这段文句就是这样的连接。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idaṃ nayadassanaṃ saṃkhittaṃ, na sakkā vitthārato gavesitu’’nti vattabbato taṃ nayadassanaṃ vitthārato vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hi bhagavā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Asubhassa jigucchanīyabhāvato rāguppādo na yutto, tasmā rāgacaritassa puggalassa asubhadesanā rāgavinayāya yuttā. Mettāya dosapaṭipakkhattā dosacaritassa puggalassa mettādesanā dosavinayāya yuttā. Paṭiccasamuppādassa paññāvisayattā mohacaritassa puggalassa paṭiccasamuppādadesanā mohavinayāya yuttā. ‘‘Rāgacaritassāpi mettādidesanā yujjeyya sabbasattasādhāraṇattā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yadihi bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tibbakilesassa rāgacaritassa adhippetattā tādisassa puggalassa mettaṃ cetovimuttiṃ yadi deseyya, evaṃ sati mettāvasenapi rāguppajjanato desanā na yujjati. Sukhaṃ paṭipadaṃ vā yadi deseyya, evaṃ sati rāgacaritassa dukkhāpaṭipadāyujjanato desanā na yujjati. Vipassanāpubbaṅgamaṃ pahānaṃ vā yadipi deseyya, evaṃ sati rāgacaritassa asubhānupassanaṃ vajjetvā vipassanāpubbaṅgamassa pahānassa dukkarato desanā na yujjatīti yojanā.
为了显示“世尊对贪行者”等并非以无余方式分别其理,而仅是方法的开示,依此所开示的方法,亦应寻求其余,故说“如是,任何”等。对于贪所开示的任何随顺断,对于嗔所开示的任何随顺断,对于痴所开示的任何随顺断,所有这些随顺断,在作为慧之基础的诸巴利文段中,应以简择之引导加以简择后,以理之引导而连结,这就是连结。显示巴利原文
‘‘Bhagavā rāgacaritassā’’tiādinā niravasesavasena yutti na vibhattā, nayadassanamevāti yo nayo dassito, tena nayena aññāpi gavesitabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ yaṃ kiñcī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Rāgassa yaṃ kiñci anulomappahānaṃ, dosassa yaṃ kiñci anulomappahānaṃ, mohassa yaṃ kiñci anulomappahānaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ anulomappahānaṃ yattakā pāḷippadesā ñāṇassa bhūmi, tattakesu vicayena hārena vicinitvā yuttihārena yojetabbanti yojanā.
“应当以断除贪等来探求理则”——因当如此说,为显示还须以慈等梵住果定与九次第定自在,加以分别而探求理则,故以“住于慈者”等开始。其中,住于慈者,即获得慈住之补特伽罗;由于慈是嗔恚的对治,说“嗔恚将占据其心”不合理,而说“住于慈者,嗔恚的断除已不复存在”才合理。住于悲者,即获得悲住之补特伽罗;由于悲是恼害的对治,说“恼害将占据其心”不合理,而说“住于悲者,恼害的断除已不复存在”才合理。住于喜者,即获得喜住之补特伽罗;由于喜是不悦的对治,说“不悦将占据其心”不合理,而说“住于喜者,不悦的断除已不复存在”才合理。住于舍者,即获得舍住之补特伽罗;由于舍是贪欲的对治,说“贪欲将占据其心”不合理,而说“住于舍者,贪欲的断除已不复存在”才合理。显示巴利原文
‘‘Rāgādippahānavasena yutti gavesitabbā’’ti vattabbabhāvato aññehipi mettādibrahmavihāraphalasamāpattinavānupubbasamāpattivasībhāvehi vibhajitvā yuttigavesanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘mettāvihārissā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha mettāvihārissa mettāvihāralābhino sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa mettāya byāpādapaṭipakkhattā byāpādo cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti desanā na yujjatīti ca, mettāvihārissa sato byāpādo pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti desanā yujjati. Karuṇāvihārissa karuṇāvihāralābhino sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa karuṇāya vihesāya paṭipakkhattā vihesā cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti desanā na yujjati, karuṇāvihārissa sato vihesā pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti desanā yujjati. Muditāvihārissa muditāvihāralābhino sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa muditāya aratiyā paṭipakkhattā arati cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti desanā na yujjati, muditāvihārissa sato arati pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti desanā yujjati. Upekkhāvihārissa upekkhāvihāralābhino sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa upekkhāya rāgassa paṭipakkhattā rāgo cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti desanā na yujjati, upekkhāvihārissa sato rāgo pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti desanā yujjati.
对于无相行者,即由无常随观之门获得果定住之补特伽罗,说“心随逐于相,即随逐于诸行之相,于常等已断除的相中运转”不合理;而说“由于无相随观是常等颠倒的对治,对于无相住者,相的断除已不复存在”才合理。对于执为“我是”的五蕴,不见“此五蕴是我”;然而即使在不作如是观时,说“我是什么?我是如何?”的疑与疑箭将占据其心,同样不合理。因为疑唯是应断之法,故说“不见此五蕴是我者,疑与疑箭的断除已不复存在”才合理。显示巴利原文
Animittavihārissa aniccānupassanāmukhena paṭiladdhaphalasamāpattivihāralābhino sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa nimittānusāri tena teneva saṅkhāranimittānusāreneva niccādīsu pahīnena nimittena viññāṇaṃ pavattatīti desanā na yujjati, animittānupassanāya niccādivipallāsapaṭipakkhattā animittavihārissa sato nimittaṃ pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti desanā yujjati. ‘‘Asmī’’ti maññitaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ attavigataṃ ‘‘ayaṃ khandhapañcako ahaṃ asmī’’ti na samanupassāmi, atha ca pana asamanupassane satipi ‘‘me kiṃ asmī’’ti ‘‘kathaṃ asmī’’ti vicikicchā kathaṃkathāsallaṃ cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti desanā na yujjati, vicikicchāya pahānekaṭṭhabhāvato ‘‘ayaṃ khandhapañcako ahaṃ asmī’’ti asamanupassantassa vicikicchā kathaṃkathāsallaṃ pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti desanā yujjati.
“难道只应依据果定来探求理则吗?”——因为会有这样的问难,为了显示也须依据禅定来探求理则,便以“又如初禅”等作为开端。或者:“难道只应依据果定住者来探求理则吗?”——因为会有这样的问难,为了显示也须依据禅定住者来探求理则,便以“又如初禅”等作为开端。在这里,正如对于入初禅的果定住者应探求理则,同样地,对于禅定住者也应探求理则。如何探求呢?对于入初禅者——也就是具备初禅的补特伽罗,说“由镇伏诸盖,欲贪与嗔恚能导向第二禅的殊胜”,这是不合理的;而说“欲贪与嗔恚能导向禅定的退失”,这则是合理的。说“伴随寻的想与作意,连同近行法,与第二禅法一起能导向禅定的退失”,这是不合理的;而说“伴随寻的想与作意能导向上分禅的殊胜”,这则是合理的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Phalasamāpattivaseneva yutti gavesitabbā ki’’nti vattabbattā jhānasamāpattivasenapi yutti gavesitabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā vā pana paṭhamaṃ jhāna’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘phalasamāpattivihārisseva yutti gavesitabbā ki’’nti vattabbattā jhānasamāpattivasenapi yutti gavesitabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā vā pana paṭhamaṃ jhāna’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha yathā paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa phalasamāpattivihārissa yutti gavesitabbā, evaṃ jhānasamāpattivihārissapi yutti gavesitabbā. Kathaṃ? Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa paṭhamajjhānasamaṅgino sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa nīvaraṇavikkhambhanato kāmarāgabyāpādā visesāya dutiyajjhānāya saṃvattantīti desanā na yujjati, kāmarāgabyāpādā jhānassa hānāya saṃvattantīti desanā yujjati. Vitakkasahagatā saññāmanasikārā upacāradhammena saha dutiyajjhānadhammā jhānassa hānāya saṃvattantīti desanā na yujjati, vitakkasahagatā saññāmanasikārā visesāya uparijhānatthāya saṃvattantīti desanā yujjati.
对于入第二禅的补特伽罗,说“伴随寻伺的想与作意,连同近行法,与初禅法一起能导向上分禅的殊胜”,这是不合理的;而说“伴随寻伺的想与作意能导向无寻禅的退失”,这则是合理的。说“伴随舍的想与作意,连同近行法,与第四禅法一起能导向禅定的退失”,这是不合理的;而说“伴随舍的想与作意能导向上分禅的殊胜”,这则是合理的。其余各处,也应随其义理作相应的理解。在如上所述的定中,因已得自在修习、善巧修习,所以心便称为善修习。显示巴利原文
Dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa sato saṃvijjamānassa puggalassa vitakkavicārasahagatā vā saññāmanasikārā upacāradhammena saha paṭhamajjhānadhammā visesāya uparijhānatthāya saṃvattantīti desanā na yujjati, vitakkavicārasahagatā saññāmanasikārā avitakkajhānassa hānāya saṃvattantīti desanā yujjati. Upekkhāsahagatā vā saññāmanasikārā upacāradhammena saha catutthajjhānadhammā jhānassa hānāya saṃvattantīti desanā na yujjati, upekkhāsahagatā saññāmanasikārā visesāya uparijhānatthāya saṃvattantīti desanā yujjati. Sesesupi atthānurūpaṃ yojanā kātabbā. Yathāvuttasamāpattīsu vasībhāvena paricitaṃ kallatāparicitaṃ cittaṃ nāma.
理则的探求不应仅限于此。为了显示在九种经中也应当依据所获得的理则来加以探求,故说“如是,一切”等语。“对于一切处,依其所述的行境,以抉择理则加以抉择之后,应当以理则相结合——对此,谁应信受呢?”——因为当有此问,故说“故说”等语。在这里,具寿大迦旃延以所当结合的理则说出“一切”等语,意即应当由该语而被信受。显示巴利原文
Ettakameva yuttigavesanaṃ na kātabbaṃ, navavidhasuttantesu yathāladdhayuttigavesanampi kātabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ sabbe’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sabbesaṃ hārānaṃ yathāvuttabhūmigocarānaṃ vicayahārena vicinitvā yuttihārena yojetabbabhāvo kena saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tena yojetabbabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno ‘‘sabbesa’’ntiādikaṃ yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
然而,智者应依循义注与复注的传承,将深义详细分别之后而把握。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
4. 足处理则分别之阐释显示巴利原文
4. Padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
22 此中,作为特定解释的理趣分别——即分别问题解答等之合理与不合理者——已告圆满。为问:“什么是句所依处之分别?”于是开启了“其中,什么是句所依处理趣”等的解说。这里的“其中”,是指在已指出的十六种教示理趣等理趣中,“作为特定解释的句所依处理趣——即句所依处之分别——是什么?”如此提问。对于“胜者教导了法”等的指出,现在由我所说的“这是句所依处理趣”等,应知是作为特定解释而广说的句所依处之分别。因此说:“其中,什么是句所依处理趣等,即句所依处之分别”(《导论注》22)。现在,为明了此作为广说的句所依处理趣究竟教导、解释了三藏所教导诸法中的什么法,而提出这一问题时,为了确定并分别“此近果的近因即是句所依处”,便说了“这是句所依处”等。其意思是:于一切应知法不如实通达,便是无明的特相,因此,无明具有于一切法如实或不如实通达的特相;而对于那无明,以“不净”为“净”等的颠倒想便是句所依处,即近因。当有颠倒想时,无明便转起,辗转增上而不减损,因此,颠倒想成为无明的句所依处,即显示巴利原文
22. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena yuttihāravibhaṅgabhūtena pañhāvissajjanādīnaṃ yuttāyuttabhāvo vibhatto, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto yuttihāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo padaṭṭhāno hāro’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu hāresu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso padaṭṭhāno hāro padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgoti pucchati. ‘‘Dhammaṃ desesi jino’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘ayaṃ padaṭṭhāno hāro’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgoti viññeyyo. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tattha katamo padaṭṭhāno hārotiādi padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 22). ‘‘Ayaṃ idāni vuccamāno vitthārabhūto padaṭṭhāno hāro piṭakattaye desitesu dhammesu kiṃ nāma dhammaṃ desayati saṃvaṇṇetī’’ti pucchaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘idaṃ āsannakāraṇaṃ imassa āsannaphalassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti niyametvā vibhajituṃ ‘‘ayaṃ padaṭṭhāno’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho – sabbesu viññeyyadhammesu yāthāvato asampaṭivedho lakkhaṇaṃ etissā avijjāyāti sabbadhammayāthāvaasampaṭivedhalakkhaṇā, avijjā, tassā avijjāya asubhe ‘‘subha’’ntiādivipallāsā padaṭṭhānaṃ āsannakāraṇaṃ. Vipallāse sati avijjā vattati uparūpari jāyati na hāyati, tasmā vipallāsā avijjāya padaṭṭhānaṃ āsannakāraṇaṃ bhavanti. Avijjāya vaṭṭamūlakattā taṃ ādiṃ katvā padaṭṭhānaṃ vibhattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
由于渴爱也是轮回的根本,接下来为分别渴爱的句所依处,而说“以执著为特相”等。其中,“可爱色、可意色”是指具有可爱本性、可意本性的眼等所生法。当可爱、可意、可乐的眼等存在时,渴爱便转起,并辗转增上。因此,可爱色、可意色是渴爱的句所依处,即近因。显示巴利原文
Taṇhāyapi vaṭṭamūlakattā tadanantaraṃ taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘ajjhosānalakkhaṇā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha piyarūpaṃ sātarūpanti piyasabhāvaṃ sātasabhāvaṃ cakkhādidhammajātaṃ. Piyanīyasātanīye cakkhādike sati taṇhā vattati uparūpari jāyati, tasmā piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ āsannakāraṇaṃ bhavati.
当有不与取时,贪便转起,因此不与取是贪的近因。因为不与取哪怕仅生起一次,由于不见过患,它确实成为贪的近因。显示巴利原文
Adinnādāne sati lobho vattati, tasmā adinnādānaṃ lobhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ bhavati. Adinnādānañhi ekavāraṃ uppannampi anādīnavadassanato lobhassa āsannakāraṇaṃ bhavatveva.
即便于头发等不净物上生起的净想,由于其特相为执取青等颜色、长等形状、微笑等相,因此眼等诸根的不防护便成为净想的近因。显示巴利原文
Kesādīsu asubhesu pavattāyapi subhasaññāya nīlādivaṇṇadīghādisaṇṭhānahasanādibyañjanaggahaṇalakkhaṇattā cakkhundriyādīnaṃ asaṃvaro subhasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ bhavati.
即便于苦苦等上生起的乐想,由于其特相为接近有漏触,因此对色等的味著便成为乐想的近因。显示巴利原文
Dukkhadukkhādīsu pavattāyapi sukhasaññāya sāsavaphassūpagamanalakkhaṇattā rūpādīsu assādo sukhasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
虽然常想生起于色蕴等无常法中,但由于其特相是对具足有为特征的诸法不作随观,所以执取色蕴等为常的识,是常想的句所依处。显示巴利原文
Rūpakkhandhādīsu aniccesu pavattāyapi niccasaññāya saṅkhatalakkhaṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ asamanupassanalakkhaṇattā rūpakkhandhādīsu niccaggahaṇaṃ viññāṇaṃ niccasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
在被称为无常、苦、无我的诸蕴等中生起的我想,其特相是不随观无常想与苦想,因此以“我”、“我所”等方式转起的名身,是我想的句所依处。显示巴利原文
Aniccadukkhānattasaṅkhātesu khandhādīsu pavattāyapi attasaññāya aniccasaññādukkhasaññānaṃ asamanupassanalakkhaṇattā ahaṃmamādivasena pavatto nāmakāyo attasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
如此开示了无明等不善分诸法的句所依处之后,为了显示其对治分——明等诸法的句所依处,便宣说了“以通达一切法为特相”等语。由于明在一切所知法中现起,且具有通达一切法的特相,因此一切所应知是明的句所依处。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ avijjādīnaṃ akusalapakkhānaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ dassetvā idāni tappaṭipakkhānaṃ vijjādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbadhammasampaṭivedhalakkhaṇā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sabbesu ñeyyadhammesu pavattāya vijjāya sabbadhammasampaṭivedhalakkhaṇattā sabbaṃ neyyaṃ vijjāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
由于奢摩他具有镇伏掉举——即心散乱——的特相,作为似相的不净便成为奢摩他的句所依处。因为不净是对治渴爱的,而渴爱一旦不存在,奢摩他便得以安住。显示巴利原文
Samathassa cittavikkhepasaṅkhātauddhaccapaṭisaṃharaṇasaṅkhātavikkhambhanalakkhaṇattā paṭibhāganimittabhūtā asubhā samathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Asubhāya hi taṇhāpaṭipakkhattā, taṇhāya ca abhāve samatho tiṭṭhatīti.
由于依离不与取而转起的无贪,具有收摄欲境的特相,因此离不与取成为无贪的句所依处。显示巴利原文
Adinnādānā veramaṇivasena pavattassa alobhassa icchāvacarapaṭisaṃharaṇalakkhaṇattā adinnādānā veramaṇī alobhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.
由于依离杀生而转起的无瞋,具有无恼害的特相,因此离杀生成为无瞋的句所依处。显示巴利原文
Pāṇātipātā veramaṇivasena pavattassa adosassa abyāpajjalakkhaṇattā pāṇātipātā veramaṇī adosassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.
以正行方式生起的无痴,其特相为于事物不颠倒行,因此正行是无痴的句所依处。显示巴利原文
Sammāpaṭipattivasena pavattassa amohassa vatthuavippaṭipattilakkhaṇattā sammāpaṭipatti amohassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.
以厌离方式生起的不净想,其特相为执取青瘀相、脓烂相,因此厌离是不净想的句所依处。因为由厌离智生起不乐,依此不乐,不净想得以安住。显示巴利原文
Nibbidāvasena pavattāya asubhasaññāya vinīlakavipubbakagahaṇalakkhaṇattā nibbidā asubhasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Nibbidāñāṇena hi anabhirati pavattati, anabhiratiyā ca asubhasaññā ṭhitāti.
以苦受方式生起的苦想,其特相为遍知有漏触,因此受是苦想的句所依处。显示巴利原文
Dukkhavedanāvasena pavattāya dukkhasaññāya sāsavaphassaparijānanalakkhaṇattā vedanā dukkhasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
无常想依生灭而转起,以随观诸有为法之特相为相,因此生灭是无常想的句所依处。因为随观生灭之后,无常想即转起。显示巴利原文
Uppādavayavasena pavattāya aniccasaññāya saṅkhatalakkhaṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ samanupassanalakkhaṇattā uppādavayā aniccasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Uppādavayañhi samanupassitvā aniccasaññā pavattā.
无我想依唯法想而转起,以执著一切法为相,因此法想是无我想的句所依处。显示巴利原文
Dhammamattasaññāvasena pavattāya anattasaññāya sabbadhammaabhinivesalakkhaṇattā dhammasaññā anattasaññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
欲贪以色等五种欲功德为所缘,因此五种欲功德是欲贪的句所依处。显示巴利原文
Kāmarāgassa rūpādipañcakāmaguṇārammaṇattā pañca kāmaguṇā kāmarāgassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.
缘取色身而生起的色贪,是随顺眼等五根而转起的,因此五根色为色贪的近因。显示巴利原文
Rūpasaṅkhāte kāye ārabbha pavattassa rūparāgassa cakkhādipañcindriyānaṃ anusārena pavattanato pañcindriyāni rūpāni rūparāgassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.
以有爱的方式转起的有贪,六处是其近因。所谓“观已生之有”,即:“如此不可爱的色不要生起,如此可爱的色当生起;如此苦受不要生起,如此乐受当生起”等,以这种方式转起的色欢喜,即为五取蕴的近因。显示巴利原文
Bhavanikantivasena pavattassa bhavarāgassa chaḷāyatanaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Nibbattabhavānupassitāti ‘‘edisaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ rūpaṃ mā nibbattatu, edisaṃ iṭṭhaṃ rūpaṃ nibbattatu edisī dukkhā vedanā mā nibbattatu, edisī sukhā vedanā nibbattatū’’ti evamādinā pakārena pavattā rūpābhinandanā, sā pañcannaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ.
业自性智为宿住随念智所随行,故宿住随念智见是业自性智的近因。显示巴利原文
Kammassakataññāṇassa pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇānugatattā pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇadassanaṃ kammassakataññāṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.
凡以净信为相的信,名为净信相的信;凡以胜解为现起的信,名为胜解现起的信。凡以无浊为相的净,名为无浊相的净;凡以澄净为现起的净,名为澄净现起的净。然而,当知彼净仅是信的特殊状态。不动净信是以希求为相之信的近因,具净信相之信是无浊相之净的近因,四正勤是以策励为相之精进的近因,身念处等是以不漂移为相之念的近因,由于具禅那的定有一境性相,故寻等诸禅支为定的近因,由于慧有知的作用与知所缘相,故诸谛为慧的近因。显示巴利原文
Okappanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ yassā saddhāyāti okappanalakkhaṇā saddhā. Adhimutti paccupaṭṭhānaṃ yassā saddhāyāti adhimuttipaccupaṭṭhānā ca saddhā. Anāvilaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ yassa pasādassāti anāvilalakkhaṇoti pasādo. Sampasīdanaṃ paccupaṭṭhānaṃ yassa pasādassāti sampasīdanapaccupaṭṭhāno ca pasādo. So pana pasādo saddhāya eva avatthāvisesoti veditabbo. Aveccapasādo abhipatthiyanalakkhaṇāya saddhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, okappanalakkhaṇā saddhā anāvilalakkhaṇassa pasādassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, catubbidhaṃ sammappadhānaṃ vīriyaṃ ārambhalakkhaṇassa vīriyassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, kāyādisatipaṭṭhānaṃ apilāpanalakkhaṇāya satiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ, jhānasahitassa samādhissa ekaggalakkhaṇattā vitakkādijhānāni samādhissa padaṭṭhānaṃ, paññāya kiccapajānanaārammaṇapajānanalakkhaṇattā saccāni paññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
因为应被问及:“阿阇梨所分别的无明等之近因——那些无明等,又是哪些法的近因?”为显示那些无明等也是这些法的近因,所以说“另一理趣”等。无明是以执味作意为相的非如理作意的近因,因为无明覆蔽了过患,所以非如理作意生起。以于谛迷惑为相的无明,是福行、非福行、不动行的近因;以再生为相的三地之思,是异熟识的近因;以结生识为缘而生起的有之状态而具结生相者,是名色的近因,由俱生等缘的力量所致;以名身、色身聚合为相的名色,是六处的近因,由依止等缘的力量所致;以眼等六根转起为相的六处,依次是六种触的近因,由依止等缘的力量所致;以眼净色、色所缘、眼识等和合为相的六种触,彼触依次为与彼六种触俱生的六种受的近因,由俱生等缘的力量所致;以领纳可爱、领纳不可爱、领纳非可爱非不可爱为相的三种受,彼受为依彼三种受而转起的渴爱的近因,由亲依止等缘的力量所致;以于自他相续中执取为相的渴爱,彼渴爱为依彼渴爱而转起的四种取的近因,由亲依止等缘的力量所致。应读作“彼受”、“彼渴爱”、“彼取”,或可能是性倒错的表述。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yesaṃ avijjādīnaṃ padaṭṭhānāni ācariyena vibhattāni, te avijjādayo katamesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānānī’’ti pucchitabbattā te avijjādayopi imesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānāti dassetuṃ ‘‘aparo nayo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Avijjā assādamanasikāralakkhaṇassa ayonisomanasikārassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Avijjāya hi ādīnavacchādanato ayonisomanasikāro jātoti. Saccasammohanalakkhaṇā avijjā puññāpuññāneñjābhisaṅkhārānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ, punabbhavavirohanalakkhaṇā tebhūmakacetanā saṅkhārā vipākaviññāṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, opapaccayikasaṅkhātena upapattibhavabhāvena nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ nāmarūpassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, nāmakāyarūpakāyasaṅghātalakkhaṇaṃ nāmarūpaṃ chaḷāyatanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ sahajātādipaccayabhāvato, cakkhādīnaṃ channaṃ indriyānaṃ pavattānaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ chaḷāyatanaṃ chabbidhassa phassassa yathākkamaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ nissayādipaccayabhāvato, cakkhupasādarūpārammaṇaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādisannipātalakkhaṇo chabbidho phasso, taṃ vedanāya tena chabbidhena phassena sahajātāya chabbidhāya vedanāya yathākkamaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ sahajātādipaccayabhāvato, iṭṭhānubhavanaaniṭṭhānubhavanaiṭṭhāniṭṭhānubhavanalakkhaṇā tividhā vedanā, taṃ taṇhāya tāya tividhāya vedanāya vasena pavattāya taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ upanissayādipaccayabhāvato, saparasantānesu ajjhosānalakkhaṇā taṇhā, taṃ upādānassa tāya taṇhāya vasena pavattassa catubbidhassa upādānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ upanissayādipaccayabhāvato. ‘‘So vedanāyā’’ti ca ‘‘sā taṇhāyā’’ti ca ‘‘sā upādānassā’’ti ca pāṭhena bhavitabbaṃ, liṅgavipallāsaniddeso vā siyā.
凡是缘生的、能产生结生蕴的取,彼取是二种有的近因。凡是以名身、色身生起为相的业有,彼业有是生的近因。凡是已成生有、以蕴的显现为相的生,彼生是老之近因。凡是以所依蕴的成熟为相的老,彼老是死的近因。凡是共许为命根断绝之相的死,彼共许之死也是忧的近因:由于思念亲爱者之死多生起忧,故彼忧是悲泣的近因。凡悲泣为哀叹之作者,彼悲泣是身苦的近因。凡以身逼迫为相的身苦,彼身苦是忧受的近因。凡以心逼迫为相的忧受,彼忧受是恼的近因。凡恼为烧灼之作者、热恼之作者,彼恼是有的近因——即恼之所依相续的有的近因。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ upādānaṃ opapaccayikaṃ upapattikkhandhanibbattakaṃ, taṃ upādānaṃ duvidhassa bhavassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yo kammabhavo nāmakāyarūpakāyasambhavanalakkhaṇo, so kammabhavo jātiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yā upapattibhūtā jāti khandhapātubhāvalakkhaṇā, taṃ sā jāti jarāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yā jiṇṇajarā upadhikkhandhaparipākalakkhaṇā, taṃ sā jiṇṇajarā maraṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yampi yassa sammutimaraṇaṃ jīvitindriyupacchedalakkhaṇaṃ, tampi tassa sammutimaraṇaṃ sokassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Piyassa maraṇaṃ cintentassa yebhuyyena sokuppajjanato yo soko ñātiādipiyesu ussukkakārako, taṃ so soko paridevassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yo paridevo lālappakārako, taṃ so paridevo kāyikadukkhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ kāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ kāyasampīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ, taṃ kāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ domanassassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ domanassaṃ cittasampīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ, taṃ domanassaṃ upāyāsassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yo upāyāso odahanakārako avadahanakārako, taṃ so upāyāso bhavassa upāyāsassa nissayasantānabhavassa padaṭṭhānaṃ.
为显示所说的“有”,故说“这些”等语。其中,有支:烦恼是有的支分、原因;业轮与异熟轮是称为“有”的支分、部分。当它们在现在等时和合生起时,那称为烦恼轮、业轮、异熟轮的法聚,于此“有”中应视为“有”。那称为“有”的烦恼轮、业轮、异熟轮三者,是轮回的近因,因为由前前所成就的烦恼等轮,轮回无间生起。凡以出离为相的圣道,彼圣道即为灭(涅槃)的近因,因为是证得之因故。显示巴利原文
Bhavassāti vuttabhavaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha bhavaṅgāni kileso bhavassa aṅgaṃ kāraṇaṃ kammavaṭṭavipākavaṭṭāni bhavasaṅkhātāni aṅgāni avayavāni. Yadā paccuppannādikāle samaggāni nibbattāni bhavanti, tadā so kilesavaṭṭakammavaṭṭavipākavaṭṭasaṅkhāto dhammasamūho ‘‘bhavassā’’ti ettha bhavoti daṭṭhabbo. Taṃ bhavasaṅkhātaṃ kilesavaṭṭakammavaṭṭavipākavaṭṭattayaṃ saṃsārassa padaṭṭhānaṃ purimaṃ purimaṃ jātinipphannakilesādivaṭṭena saṃsārassa abbocchinnuppajjanato, yo ariyamaggo niyyānikalakkhaṇo, taṃ so ariyamaggo nirodhassa nibbānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ sampāpakahetubhāvato.
多闻者,因是一切弟子等的依止处,如同渡场,故称为“渡场”;知者称为“知”;渡场知者,称为“渡场知者”。渡场知者的状态,即是渡场知性,也就是正亲近。此是喜知性的近因。因为多闻者由正亲近而生起与法相应的喜悦,由喜悦而生起业处的修习,故由听闻适宜之法而知喜,是为喜知者;喜知者的状态即是喜知性,也就是业处的修习。此是得知性的近因。因为由业处的修习而生起知得修证,故为得知性。知得修证是自知性的近因。因为由知得修证,具足五勤支者生起知自,故为自知性。自知性是宿世所作福德的近因。显示巴利原文
Bahussuto sabbasissādīnaṃ patiṭṭhānattā titthaṃ viyāti titthaṃ, jānātīti ñū, titthaṃ ñūti titthaññū, titthaññuno bhāvo titthaññutā, sammāpayirupāsanā, sā pītaññutāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Bahussutassa hi sammāpayirupāsanāya dhammūpasañhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ jāyati, pāmojjena ca kammaṭṭhānabrūhanā jāyatīti sappāyadhammassavanena pītiṃ jānātīti pītaññū, pītaññuno bhāvo pītaññutā, kammaṭṭhānassa brūhanā, sā pattaññutāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānabrūhanāya hi bhāvanāpattajānanatā jāyatīti pattaññutā. Bhāvanāpattajānanatā attaññutāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Bhāvanāpattajānanatāya hi pañcahi padhāniyaṅgehi samannāgatassa attano jānanatā jāyatīti attaññutā pubbekatapuññatāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
由于了知精进支具足的状态,过去的福行得以生起;过去已作的福业是住于适宜之处的足处。由于过去所造的福业,得以住于适宜之处;住于适宜之处是亲近善士的足处。由于住于适宜之处,得以亲近善士;亲近善士是自正愿的足处。由于亲近善士,自正愿得以生起;自正愿是诸戒的足处。由于自正愿,诸戒得以安立;诸戒是无悔的足处。因为观察自身安立的戒时,确实没有悔恨;由无悔而生起喜悦,故无悔是喜悦的足处。由喜悦而生起喜,故喜悦是喜的足处。由喜而生起轻安,故喜是轻安的足处。由轻安而生起乐,故轻安是乐的足处。由乐而生起定,故乐是定的足处。由定而生起如实知见,故定是如实知见的足处。由如实知见而生起厌离,故如实知见是厌离的足处。由厌离而生起离欲,故厌离是离欲的足处。由离欲而生起解脱,故离欲是解脱的足处。由解脱而生起解脱知见,故解脱是解脱知见的足处。如此,依上述道理,凡任何法成为亲依止缘,任何法成为缘,所有这一切法,都应视为其自己缘生法的足处。显示巴利原文
Padhāniyaṅgesu samannāgatattajānanatāya hi pubbe puññakaraṇaṃ jātaṃ, pubbekatapuññatā patirūpadesavāsassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Pubbe hi katena puññena patirūpadesavāso laddho, patirūpadesavāso sappurisūpanissayassapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Patirūpadesavāsena hi sappurisūpanissayo laddho, sappurisūpanissayo attasammāpaṇidhānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sappurisūpanissayena hi attasammāpaṇidhānaṃ jātaṃ, attasammāpaṇidhānaṃ sīlānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Attasammāpaṇidhānena hi sīlāni sampatiṭṭhitāni, sīlāni avippaṭisārassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Attani hi sampatiṭṭhitaṃ sīlaṃ paccavekkhantassa vippaṭisāro natthevāti, avippaṭisārena pāmojjaṃ jāyati, tasmā avippaṭisāro pāmojjassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Pāmojjena pīti jāyati, tasmā pāmojjaṃ pītiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Pītiyā passaddhi jāyati, tasmā pīti passaddhiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Passaddhiyā sukhaṃ jāyati, tasmā passaddhi sukhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sukhena samādhi jāyati, tasmā sukhaṃ samādhissa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Samādhinā yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ jāyati, tasmā samādhi yathābhūtañāṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yathābhūtañāṇadassanena nibbidāñāṇaṃ jāyati, tasmā yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ nibbidāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Nibbidāya virāgo jāyati, tasmā nibbidā virāgassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Virāgena vimutti jāyati, tasmā virāgo vimuttiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Vimuttiyā vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ jāyati, tasmā vimutti vimuttiñāṇadassanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Evaṃ yathāvuttanayena yo koci dhammo upanissayo hoti, yo koci dhammo paccayo hoti, sabbo so dhammo attano paccayuppannassa dhammassa padaṭṭhānanti daṭṭhabbo.
因为应当说明“对于亲依止缘法,或缘法的缘生法之足处性,应该如何信受?”所以才有“因此”等语。其中,“因此”的意思是:由于尊者大迦旃延通过“如来宣说法”等文句,阐明了任一亲依止缘法、缘法的缘生法之足处性,所以应当信受那些亲依止缘法、缘法的足处性。又因为应当说明“上面所显示的足处义理是否已经圆满?还是另有需要择出而衔接的内容?”所以才有“已衔接的足处义理”一句。在此,虽于巴利原文中未作区分,但依所获之理,将足处义理提取并衔接之后,应加以衔接、区分而宣说。显示巴利原文
‘‘Upanissayadhammassa, paccayadhammassa vā paccayuppannadhammassa padaṭṭhānabhāvo kena saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tenāti yassa kassaci upanissayadhammassa, paccayadhammassa ca paccayuppannadhammassa padaṭṭhānabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno ‘‘dhammaṃ deseti jino’’tiādikaṃ yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena tesaṃ upanissayadhammapaccayadhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvo saddahitabboti. ‘‘Yathāvutto padaṭṭhāno hāro paripuṇṇo kiṃ, udāhu añño niddhāretvā yojetabbo atthi ki’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto padaṭṭhāno hāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Idha pāḷiyaṃ avibhattampi yathālābhavasena padaṭṭhāno hāro nīharitvā yutto yujjitabbo, vibhajitabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
然而,诸智者应当依照注释与复注,将深邃的义理详细分别之后而受持。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
5. 相论分别之阐释显示巴利原文
5. Lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
23 二十三、以具有特定注释性质的足处分别,将无明等的足处分别之后,这一具有特定注释性质的足处义理分别便已圆满。由于接下来应问“什么是相义理分别?”,所以说出“其中,什么是相义理?”等语。其中,“其中”一词的意思前面已经说过。若问:“什么是具有特定注释性质的相义理、相义理分别?”应知:现在我将要说的“诸法”等广分别的特定注释,即名为相义理、相义理分别。因此说:“其中,什么是相义理等,名为相义理分别”(《导论》注23)。现在将要说明的这一广分别相义理,在遍问三藏中所说的诸法时,究竟是以何法作为标记之后,为了简要显示相义理简择中的法,才说出“诸法”等的。其中,“诸法”指的是种种缘合而生之法。“同一相”指的是相同的相状。“那些法”指的是那些具有相同相状的缘合法,此为别出之义。“于一法中”指的是:在具有相同相状的某一法中,当世尊于圣典中宣说此法时,其余具有相同相的法,即因相同相而被宣说。显示巴利原文
23. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena padaṭṭhānavibhaṅgena avijjādīnaṃ padaṭṭhānāni vibhattāni, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo lakkhaṇo hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tattha-saddassa attho vuttova. Katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso lakkhaṇo hāro lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgoti pucchati. ‘‘Vuttamhi ekadhamme’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘ye dhammā’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso lakkhaṇo hāro lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti viññeyyoti. Tena vuttaṃ –‘‘tattha katamo lakkhaṇo hārotiādi lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgo nāmā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 23). Ayaṃ idāni vuccamāno vitthārabhūto lakkhaṇo hāro piṭakattaye desitesu dhammesu kiṃ nāma lakkhitabbaṃ dhammaṃ lakkhīyatīti pucchitvā pucchite lakkhaṇahāravicaye dhamme saṅkhepena dassetuṃ ‘‘ye dhammā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ye dhammāti ye samūhā dhammā. Ekalakkhaṇāti samānalakkhaṇā. Tesaṃ dhammānanti samānalakkhaṇānaṃ tesaṃ samūhadhammānaṃ, niddhāraṇe cetaṃ. Ekasmiṃ dhammeti samānalakkhaṇe ekasmiṃ dhamme, pāḷiyaṃ bhagavatā vutte sati vuttadhammato avasiṭṭhasamānalakkhaṇā dhammā samānalakkhaṇena vuttā bhavantīti attho.
为了确定并显示:‘当在相义理中广说此法时,这些具有相同相的法也已被说’,所以说了‘如同什么存在?’等。其意为:询问‘如同以何种方式被说,那种方式是什么存在?’。‘如同以何种方式被说,那种方式即是相同相的状态’是其意义。世尊是如何说的?世尊说:‘诸比丘,眼’等等。当说到‘诸比丘,眼不安住’等时,‘诸比丘,耳不安住’等语也已被说。显示巴利原文
Lakkhaṇahāravisaye dhamme vitthārato imasmiṃ dhamme vutte ime samānalakkhaṇā dhammāpi vuttā bhavantīti niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā kiṃ bhave’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – yathā yena pakārena vuttā bhavanti, so pakāro kiṃ bhaveti pucchati. Yathā yena pakārena vuttā bhavanti, so pakāro samānalakkhaṇāti bhāvo bhaveti attho. Kinti bhagavā āha? ‘‘Cakkhuṃ bhikkhave’’tiādiṃ bhagavā āha. ‘‘Cakkhuṃ, bhikkhave, anavaṭṭhita’’ntiādimhi vutte ‘‘sotaṃ, bhikkhave, anavaṭṭhita’’ntiādivacanampi vuttameva bhavati.
由于应说‘或以不安住等相为相同相,或以内处性为相同相,即仅依处而说同一相’,故为了显示依蕴的同一相,而说‘如同所说’等。当说到‘罗陀,对过去色应无期待,对未来色不应欢喜,应为对现在色的厌离、离欲、灭尽、舍断、遣除而修行’时,‘罗陀,对过去受应无期待,对未来受不应欢喜,应为对现在受的厌离、离欲、灭尽、舍断、遣除而修行’等也应被说。显示巴利原文
‘‘Anavaṭṭhitādilakkhaṇena samānalakkhaṇattā vā ajjhattikāyatanabhāvena samānalakkhaṇattā vāti āyatanavaseneva ekalakkhaṇaṃ vattabba’’nti vattabbattā khandhavasenapi ekalakkhaṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā cāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Atīte, rādha, rūpe anapekkho hoti, anāgataṃ rūpaṃ mā abhinandi , paccuppannassa rūpassa nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya cāgāya paṭinissaggāya paṭipajjā’’ti vutte ‘‘atītāya, rādha, vedanāya anapekkho hoti, anāgataṃ vedanaṃ mā abhinandi, paccuppannāya vedanāya nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya cāgāya paṭinissaggāya paṭipajjā’’tiādi vuttaṃ bhave.
或者,由于与‘不执取的特征’具有相同特征,或者由于与‘蕴的特征’具有相同特征,因此正是依于蕴和处,诸法才应被说为具有单一特征。为了显示‘由于应被说,故依于念处也应被说’,而说了‘正如所说’等。其中,其含义为:正如世尊以某种单一特征而说,同样地,以那种单一特征,未被说的法也成为已被说。那些内观者,若于五蕴恒常善精勤,恒常修习身至念,则不从事不应做的,如净妙乐等,也不从事耕田、经商等业,而于应做的,如不净苦等,或于身等,成为恒常精勤者,世尊如此说——这是连接。显示巴利原文
‘‘Anapekkhanīyalakkhaṇena samānalakkhaṇattā vā khandhalakkhaṇena samānalakkhaṇattā vāti khandhāyatanavaseneva ekalakkhaṇadhammā vattabbā’’ti vattabbattā satipaṭṭhānavasenāpi vattabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathā yena ekalakkhaṇattena ca bhagavā āha, tathā ca tena ekalakkhaṇattena ca avuttāpi dhammā vuttā bhavantīti attho. Ye vipassakā puggalā pañcasu khandhesu niccaṃ susamāraddhā niccaṃ kāyagatāsatiṃ bhāventi, te vipassakā akiccaṃ subhasukhādikaṃ, kasivāṇijjādikammaṃ vā na sevanti, kicce asubhāsukhādike, kāyādike vā sātaccakārino hontīti bhagavā āhāti yojanā.
此处,iti一词省略了一个音节。如此,在‘yesañca’等偈颂中,当世尊已以其自性说示了关于发等身的‘身至念’时,由于念处的单一特征,其所余的‘入于受的念’、‘入于心的念’和‘入于法的念’也由此被说。简而言之,应说为:恒常善精勤者,恒常‘入于受的念’……恒常‘入于心的念’……恒常‘入于法的念’。显示巴利原文
Itisaddassa cettha ekassa lopo. Iti evaṃ ‘‘yesañcā’’tiādigāthāya kesādike kāye gatāya pavattāya satiyā bhagavatā sarūpena vuttāya vijjamānāya tadavasesā vedanāgatā sati ca cittagatā sati ca dhammagatā sati ca satipaṭṭhānabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattena vuttā bhavantīti saṅkhepato niccaṃ susamāraddhā niccaṃ vedanāgatā sati ca…pe… niccaṃ cittagatā sati ca…pe… niccaṃ dhammagatā satīti vattabbāti.
因为必须说“正是依于念处,诸法才应被说为具有单一特征”,所以说了“因此,任何……”等。其中,任何色处,由眼识所见;任何声处,由耳识所闻;任何香、味、触处,由鼻识等三种识所觉知;如此,当世尊以其自性说示了所见等三时,其余任何被了知的、属于法所缘的色,由于所缘状态的单一特征,也被世尊所说——这是含义。或者,任何色处“所见”已被世尊所说,当此被说时,所余的“所闻”等也随之被说——这些含义应分别连结。因此说:“或所见,或所闻,或所觉知。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Satipaṭṭhānavaseneva ekalakkhaṇā dhammā vattabbā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tathā yaṃ kiñcī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ kiñci rūpāyatanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇena diṭṭhaṃ, yaṃ kiñci saddāyatanaṃ sotaviññāṇena sutaṃ, yaṃ kiñci gandharasaphoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ ghānaviññāṇādittayena viññāṇena mutaṃ, iti evaṃ diṭṭhādittaye bhagavatā sarūpena vutte sati tadavasesaṃ yaṃ kiñci viññātaṃ dhammārammaṇapariyāpannaṃ rūpaṃ bhagavatā ālambitabbabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā vuttaṃ bhavatīti attho. Atha vā yaṃ kiñci rūpāyatanaṃ diṭṭhaṃ bhagavatā vuttaṃ, tasmiṃ vutte sati tadavasesaṃ sutādikampi vuttaṃ hotīti ādiattho visuṃ visuṃ yojetabbo. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘diṭṭhaṃ vā sutaṃ vā mutaṃ vā’’ti.
由于可能被问及:“当身至念被说时,其所余的入于受的念等是否也应被说?”为了显示三十七菩提分法也由此被说,因而说了“正如世尊所说”等。其含义是:正如世尊以能出离的特征、以单一特征而说,同样地,以如是单一特征,它们也成为被说。当世尊说:“因此,比丘,你在此教法中,应成为热忱、正知、具念者,依彼分断或镇伏断调伏世间的贪忧后,于身——发等所成之身,安住于观身——观此发等之身而住”时,那么,“因此,比丘,你于受,安住于观受而住,热忱、正知、具念,调伏世间的贪忧;因此,比丘,你于心……安住于观心而住……调伏……贪忧;因此,比丘,你于法,安住于观法而住……调伏……贪忧”也随之被说——应知此为略义。其广释在注释书中多处已说,故此处不再详述。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kāyagatāya satiyā vuttāya tadavasesā vedanāgatāsatiādayoyeva vattabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammāpi vuttā bhavantīti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā cāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathā yena niyyānikalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattena ca bhagavā āha, tathā tena ekalakkhaṇattena ca bhagavā āha, tathā tena ekalakkhaṇattena ca vuttā bhavantīti attho. ‘‘Tasmā abhijjhādomanassena abhibhūtattā iha mama sāsane, bhikkhu, tvaṃ ātāpī sampajāno satimā hutvā loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ tadaṅgappahānena vā vikkhambhanappahānena vā vineyya vinayitvā kāye kesādirūpakāye kāyānupassī kesādirūpakāyānupassī hutvā viharāhī’’ti bhagavatā vutte sati ‘‘tasmātiha, tvaṃ bhikkhu, vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharāhi ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ, tasmātiha, tvaṃ bhikkhu, citte cittānupassī viharāhi…pe… domanassaṃ, tasmātiha, tvaṃ bhikkhu, dhammesu dhammānupassī viharāhi…pe… domanassa’’nti vuttaṃ bhavatīti saṅkhepattho veditabbo. Vitthārattho pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 23) bahudhā vuttoti amhehi na vitthārito.
若问:“当仅说一念处时,为何已说四念处?”答云:“热忱即精进根”等。其中,以“热忱”一词,说明于身、受、心、法中现起的精进根;以“正知”一词,说明于身、受、心、法中现起的慧根;以“具念”一词,说明于身、受、心、法中现起的念根;以“调伏世间中的贪忧”一词,说明于身、受、心、法中现起的定根,而非仅于身中现起者。如是,若说:以此方式,于身随观身的瑜伽行者,四念处即达修习圆满。若是如此,则由于精进、慧、念、定四根是四念处的成就因,便以相同一相、以同一特征而达圆满——这是其中的关联。因此,注释书说:“成就四念处的这些根,其自性并无差别,故为同一特征。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Ekasmiṃ satipaṭṭhāne vutte kasmā cattāro satipaṭṭhānā vuttā bhaveyyu’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘ātāpīti vīriyindriya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘ātāpī’’ti iminā padena kāyavedanācittadhammesu pavattaṃ vīriyindriyaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sampajāno’’ti padena kāyavedanācittadhammesu pavattaṃ paññindriyaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Satimā’’ti padena kāyavedanācittadhammesu pavattaṃ satindriyaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassa’’nti padena kāyavedanācittadhammesu pavattaṃ samādhindriyaṃ vuttaṃ, na kāyeyeva pavattaṃ. Evaṃ pakārena kāye kāyānupassino yogāvacarassa cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantīti ce vadeyya, evaṃ sati catunnaṃ vīriyapaññāsatisamādhīnaṃ indriyānaṃ catunnaṃ satipaṭṭhānānaṃ sādhakabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā samānalakkhaṇattā pāripūriṃ gacchantīti yojanā. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ – ‘‘catusatipaṭṭhānasādhane imesaṃ indriyānaṃ sabhāvabhedābhāvato samānalakkhaṇattā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 23).
24 若问:“虽如此说,仍唯四念处被说,如何三十七菩提分法亦被说?”乃有“于四念处中”等语。于此,彼瑜伽行者修习四念处时,其四正勤便达到修习圆满。对其余诸法,亦应如是关联。了悟四谛者,称为“觉”,即圣道智;趣向于觉者,为“觉支”。属于觉——圣道智之分支者,为“菩提分”。显示巴利原文
24. ‘‘Evaṃ vuttepi cattāro satipaṭṭhānāyeva vattabbā bhaveyyuṃ, kathaṃ sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammā vattabbā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘catūsu satipaṭṭhānesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu yena yogāvacarena bhāviyamānesu tassa yogāvacarassa cattāro sammappadhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti. Evaṃ sesesupi yojanā kātabbā. Catunnaṃ saccānaṃ bujjhanaṃ bodhaṃ, ariyamaggañāṇaṃ, bodhaṃ gacchantīti bodhaṅgamā. Bodhassa ariyamaggañāṇassa pakkhe bhavāti bodhipakkhiyā.
若问:“唯善法以同一特征而被简择,抑或不善法亦如此?”乃有“如是,不善法亦……”等语。其意为:正如善法以同一特征而被确定,不善法亦应以同一特征而被确定。若复问:“如何确定?”为显示应以“同处应断”的特征而确定,便说:“以同一特征,断除而趋于灭尽。”其中,“以同一特征”即指因同处应断而具有相同特征。若问:“何谓断除而趋于灭尽?”答云:“于四念处中……”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kusalāyeva dhammā ekalakkhaṇabhāvena nīharitā kiṃ, udāhu akusalāpi dhammā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘evaṃ akusalāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kusalā dhammā ekalakkhaṇattena niddhāritā yathā, evaṃ akusalāpi dhammā ekalakkhaṇattena niddhāritabbāyevāti attho. ‘‘Kathaṃ niddhāretabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā pahānekaṭṭhabhāvena niddhāretabbāti dassento ‘‘ekalakkhaṇattā pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchantī’’ti āha. Tattha ekalakkhaṇattāti pahānekaṭṭhabhāvena samānalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Katamaṃ pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchantī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘catūsu satipaṭṭhānesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
其中,四念处……得以遍知:当瑜伽行者修习身至念处时,他对头发等不净色身的“净”颠倒想便得断除,其段食得以遍知。因为“食集故色集”(相应部 3.56),当对色身的欲贪被断除时,对其资集之段食的欲贪亦被断除,这就是它的含义。当修习受至念处时,于苦中“乐”的颠倒想被断除,其触食得以遍知。因为“触缘受”(中部 3.126;相应部 2.1, 39;大品 1;自说 1;分别 225),当对受的欲贪被断除时,对其所缘之触食的欲贪亦被断除。当修习心至念处时,于无常中“常”的颠倒想被断除,其识食得以遍知。当修习法至念处时,于无我中“我”的颠倒想被断除,其意思食得以遍知。如此一一对应,当每一念处所应断除的被说明时,其余应断除的也因断除之性同一相而得以说明。应如此领会此义。显示巴利原文
Tattha catūsu…pe… pariññaṃ gacchantīti kāyāgatāsatipaṭṭhāne yogāvacarena bhāviyamāne sati tena yogāvacarena asubhe kesādike rūpakāye ‘‘subha’’nti vipallāso pahīyati, assa yogāvacarassa kabaḷīkārāhāro pariññaṃ gacchati, ‘‘āhārasamudayā rūpasamudayo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.56) vuttattā rūpakāye chandarāgaṃ pajahantassa tassa samudaye kabaḷīkārāhārepi chandarāgo pahīyatīti attho. Vedanāgatāsatipaṭṭhāne bhāviyamāne sati dukkhe ‘‘sukha’’nti vipallāso pahīyati, assa yogāvacarassa phassāhāro pariññaṃ gacchati, ‘‘phassapaccayā vedanā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1, 39; mahāva. 1; udā. 1; vibha. 225) vuttattā vedanāya chandarāgaṃ pajahantassa tassa paccaye phassāhāre chandarāgo pahīyati. Cittagatāsatipaṭṭhāne bhāviyamāne anicce ‘‘nicca’’nti vipallāso pahīyati, assa yogāvacarassa viññāṇāhāro pariññaṃ gacchati. Dhammagatāsatipaṭṭhāne bhāviyamāne anattani ‘‘attā’’ti vipallāso pahīyati, assa yogāvacarassa manosañcetanāhāro pariññaṃ gacchatīti visuṃ visuṃ yojetvā ekekasmiṃ pahātabbe vutte tadavasesā pahātabbā vuttā bhavanti pahātabbabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattāti attho gahetabbo.
“其食得以遍知”一语中,已领会“于食中生起的欲贪、嗔恚、愚痴被根除”之义。因为若缘段食而生起的欲贪存在,则对段食的遍知根本不存在;然而当该欲贪被断除时,遍知便生起。对于其余食的知解,也是同理。若某瑜伽行者已修习念处,已断除颠倒想,已生起食的遍知,则该瑜伽行者于取中成为无取。因为于被执为“净”的身体中,欲取特别生起,故被执为净的身体是欲取所依;而以身至念应随念的不净所执之发等,则绝非欲取所依。于乐受中以味著为门而见取生起,故被执为乐的受是见取所依;然而以受至念应随观的受,则绝非见取所依。以执见“心是常”为门,而执取“由彼彼自戒、自禁得清净”成为执取,故心是戒禁取所依;然而以心至念应随观的心,则绝非戒禁取所依。于法中,对未如实以名色分别而见者,于诸法中有我执著,故诸法是执我语取所依;然而以法至念应随观的诸法,则绝非执我语取所依。因此,当四念处被修习时,于取中成为无取,应领会此说之意趣。显示巴利原文
‘‘Āhārā cassa pariññaṃ gacchantī’’ti vacane āhāresu pavattā kāmarāgadosamohā byantīkatā hontīti attho gahito. Kabaḷīkārāhārañhi ārabbha pavatte kāmarāge vijjamāne kabaḷīkārāhārassa vijānanā nattheva, tasmiṃ kāmarāge pana pahīne parijānanā bhavatīti. Sesāhārajānanampi eseva nayo. Yassa yogāvacarassa satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā, vipallāsā pahīnā, āhāraparijānanā uppannā, so yogāvacaro upādānehi anupādāno bhavati. Subhasaññite hi kāye kāmupādānaṃ visesena bhavatīti subhasaññito kāyo kāmupādānassa vatthu, kāyagatāya satiyā anusaritabbo asubhasaññito kesādi kāmupādānassa vatthu na hotveva. Sukhavedanāya assādavasena diṭṭhupādānaṃ bhavatīti sukhasaññitā vedanā diṭṭhupādānassa vatthu, vedanāgatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā vedanā diṭṭhupādānassa vatthu na hotveva. ‘‘Cittaṃ nicca’’nti diṭṭhigahaṇavasena tassa tassa attano sīlavatavasena parisuddhīti parāmasanaṃ hotīti cittaṃ sīlabbatupādānassa vatthu, cittagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbaṃ cittaṃ sīlabbatupādānassa vatthu na hotveva. Dhamme nāmarūpaparicchedena yathābhūtaṃ apassantassa dhammesu attābhiniveso hotīti dhammā attavādupādānassa vatthu, dhammagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā dhammā attavādupādānassa vatthu na honti eva. Tasmā catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu bhāviyamānesu upādānehi anupādāno bhavatīti vuttanti adhippāyo gahetabbo.
为显示“由修习念处的瑜伽行者,不仅于取中成为无取,亦从诸轭中脱离”,故说“从诸轭中脱离”等。其中,“从诸轭中”指从欲轭、有轭、见轭、无明轭中。“脱离”指以彼分断、镇伏断、正断断之力而离、而解脱之义。因为被执为“净”的色身是欲贪所依,然而以身至念应随观的身,则绝非欲贪所依。被执为“乐”或“乐因”的有,是有贪所依;然而以受至念应随观的有,则非有贪所依。应被执为“我”的心,是见轭所依;然而以心至念应随观的心,则非见轭所依。由于难以分析,且诸法唯是法性而难通达,故不应被分析、不应被唯以法性通达的诸法,是无明轭所依;然而以法至念应随观的诸法,则非无明轭所依。因此,四念处随观者被称为“从诸轭中脱离”。此理亦应适用于“从诸漏中成为无漏”“从诸暴流中成为已渡”等处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yena yogāvacarena satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā, so yogāvacaro upādānehiyeva anupādāno bhavatī’’ti pucchitabbattā yogādīhipi visaṃyutto bhavatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘yogehi ca visaṃyutto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yogehi cāti kāmayogabhavayogadiṭṭhiyogaavijjāyogehi ca. Visaṃyuttoti tadaṅgappahānavikkhambhanappahānasamucchedappahānavasena vigato, vimutto ca bhavatīti attho. Subhasaññito hi rūpakāyo kāmarāgassa vatthu hoti, kāyagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbo kāyo kāmarāgassa vatthu na hotveva. ‘‘Sukho’’ti vā ‘‘sukhahetū’’ti vā gahaṇīyo bhavo bhavarāgassa vatthu hoti, vedanāgatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbo bhavo bhavarāgassa vatthu na hoti. ‘‘Attā’’ti abhinivisitabbaṃ cittaṃ diṭṭhiyogassa vatthu hoti, cittagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbaṃ cittaṃ diṭṭhiyogassa vatthu na hoti. Vinibbhogassa dukkarattā, dhammānaṃ dhammamattatāya ca duppaṭivijjhattā avinibbhujitabbā, dhammamattatāya appaṭivijjhitabbā dhammā avijjāyogassa vatthu honti, dhammagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā dhammā avijjāyogassa vatthu na honti. Tasmā catusatipaṭṭhānānupassako ‘‘yogehi ca visaṃyutto’’ti vutto. Ayaṃ nayo āsavehi ca anāsavo bhavati, oghehi ca nitthiṇṇo bhavatīti etthāpi yojetabbo.
于“从诸系中脱离”一句:被执为“净”的色身,是贪欲身系的所依;然而以身至念而应被随观的色身,则不是贪欲身系的所依。具有苦苦、变易苦、行苦性的受,是嗔恚身系的所依,因此说“于苦受中随眠嗔随眠”(中部1.465);然而以受至念而应被随观的受,则不是嗔恚身系的所依。以执著“心是常”为门,而有常见者执取“由自戒得清净,由自禁得清净”,故被执为“常”的心,是戒禁取身系的所依;然而以心至念而应被随观的心,则不是戒禁取身系的所依。由于不见诸法具有缘与名色的自性,而生有见、无有见,故应被执取为“此是真实”的诸法,是执此真实身系的所依;然而以法至念而应被随观的诸法,则不是执此真实身系的所依。因此,四念处随观者被称为“从诸系中脱离”。显示巴利原文
Ganthehi ca vippayutto bhavatīti ettha pana subhasaññito rūpakāyo abhijjhākāyaganthassa vatthu, kāyagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbo rūpakāyo abhijjhākāyaganthassa vatthu na hoti. Dukkhadukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhabhūtā vedanā byāpādakāyaganthassa vatthu honti, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayo anusetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465). Vedanāgatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā vedanā byāpādakāyaganthassa vatthu na hoti. ‘‘Cittaṃ nicca’’nti abhinivesavasena sassatassa ‘‘attano sīlena suddhi, vatena suddhī’’ti parāmasanaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘nicca’’nti gahitaṃ cittaṃ sīlabbataparāmāsakāyaganthassa vatthu, cittagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbaṃ cittaṃ sīlabbataparāmāsassa vatthu na hoti. Dhammānaṃ sappaccayanāmarūpasabhāvassa adassanato bhavadiṭṭhivibhavadiṭṭhi hoti, tasmā ‘‘idaṃ sacca’’nti abhinivisitabbā dhammā idaṃsaccābhinivesakāyaganthassa vatthu, dhammagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā dhammā idaṃsaccābhinivesakāyaganthassa vatthu na honti, tasmā catusatipaṭṭhānānupassako ‘‘ganthehi ca vippayutto’’ti vutto.
被执为净妙的色身,是贪欲箭的所依;然而以身至念而应被随观的身体,则不是贪欲箭的所依。被执为快乐的受,是嗔恚箭的所依——因此,受即是嗔恚箭的所依;然而以受至念而应被随观的受,则不是嗔恚箭的所依。执取“心是我”后,以“我是优胜者”等方式生起的慢箭,其所以为心;然而以心至念而应被随观的心,则不是慢箭的所依。由于不知诸法具有缘与名色的自性,诸法成为痴箭的所依;然而以法至念而应被随观的诸法,则不是痴箭的所依。因此,修习四念处随观者被称为“从诸箭中成为无箭者”。显示巴利原文
Subhasaññito ca kāyo rāgasallassa vatthu, kāyagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbo kāyo rāgasallassa vatthu na hoti. Sukhasaññitāya vedanāya doso hoti, tasmā vedanā dosasallassa vatthu, vedanāgatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā vedanā dosasallassa vatthu na hoti. ‘‘Cittaṃ attā’’ti gahetvā ‘‘attā seyyo’’tiādivasena pavattassa mānasallassa cittaṃ vatthu, cittagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbaṃ cittaṃ mānasallassa vatthu na hoti. Dhammānaṃ sappaccayanāmarūpasabhāvassa ajānanato dhammā mohasallassa vatthu, dhammagatāya pana satiyā anupassitabbā dhammā mohasallassa vatthu na honti, tasmā catusatipaṭṭhānānupassako ‘‘sallehi ca visallo bhavatī’’ti vutto.
导师说:“他的诸食得到遍知”;为了说明“这位瑜伽行者的识住也得到遍知”,故而说“他的识住也得到遍知”,盖因应问:“是只有诸食为此瑜伽行者所遍知,还是余者也得遍知?”若有人说:修习四念处的那位瑜伽行者,仅遍知了身、受、心、法,而识住未得遍知——那么,以身随观等而遍知身、受、心、法时,想也应当被遍知。因为当受与心等诸法被遍知时,由不相离性故,想也就被遍知了。显示巴利原文
‘‘Āhārā cassa pariññaṃ gacchantī’’ti ācariyena vuttaṃ, ‘‘kiṃ pana āhārāva assa yogāvacarassa pariññaṃ gacchanti, udāhu aññepī’’ti pucchitabbattā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo ca assa yogāvacarassa pariññaṃ gacchantīti dassetuṃ ‘‘viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo cassa pariññaṃ gacchantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yogāvacarena cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā, tassa yogāvacarassa kāyavedanācittadhammāva pariññaṃ gaccheyyuṃ, na viññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti ce vadeyya kāyānupassanādīhi ca kāyavedanācittadhammesu pariññātesu saññāyapi pariññātabbabhāvato. Sā hi vedanācittasaṅkhātena dhammesu pariññātesu avinābhāvato pariññātāvāti.
已说:修习四念处的瑜伽行者,于诸取成为无取者,于诸轭成为离轭者,于诸蕴成为离蕴者,于诸漏成为无漏者,于诸暴流成为已渡越者,于诸箭成为无箭者。为表显“他正是如此,抑或别有不同”而说“他于诸非行处亦不行非处”,以此说明他不入非行处。对色身视为净妙等而抱期望者,是趣入欲非行处,因此被视为净妙等的色身,特成为欲非行处的所依。然而,以入出息等为所缘、当以身随观念处随观的身,则不成为欲非行处的所依,故修习身随观念处者不去欲非行处。以乐受的味著而感受者,因乐受受损而生起嗔恚,因此乐受成为嗔非行处的所依。然而,当以受随观念处随观的受,则不成为嗔非行处的所依,故修习受念处者不去嗔非行处。以相续密集而执取为“常、恒”的心,成为痴非行处的所依。然而,当以心随观念处随观的心,则不成为痴非行处的所依,故修习心随观念处者不去痴非行处。于未分别而不了知法自性者,生起恐惧,因此未分别而不知自性的诸法,成为恐惧非行处的所依。然而,当以法随观念处随观、应分别了知的诸法,则不成为贪非行处的所依,故修习法随观念处者不去贪非行处。显示巴利原文
Yena cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā, so yogāvacaro upādānehi anupādāno ca, yogehi visaṃyutto ca, khandhehi vippayutto ca, āsavehi anāsavo ca, oghehi nitthiṇṇo ca, sallehi visallo ca bhavatīti vutto, ‘‘kiṃ pana tathāvidhova hoti, udāhu aññathāpī’’ti pucchitabbattā agatimpi na gacchatīti dassento ‘‘agatigamanehi ca na agatiṃ gacchatī’’ti āha. Subhādisaññite rūpakāye apekkhamāno puggalo chandāgatiṃ gacchatīti subhādisaññito rūpakāyo visesato chandāgatiyā vatthu hoti, kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānena pana anupassitabbo assāsapassāsādiko kāyo chandāgatiyā vatthu na hoti, tasmā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ bhāvento puggalo chandāgatiṃ na gacchati. Sukhavedanassādavasena vedayamāno tadabhāvena byāpādaṃ āgacchatīti sukhavedanā dosāgatiyā vatthu hoti, vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānena pana anupassitabbā vedanā dosāgatiyā vatthu na hoti , tasmā vedanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ bhāvento puggalo dosāgatiṃ na gacchati. Santatighanavasena ‘‘niccaṃ, dhuva’’nti gahitaṃ cittaṃ mohassa vatthu hoti, cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānena pana anupassitabbaṃ cittaṃ mohassa vatthu na hoti, tasmā cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ bhāvento puggalo dosāgatiṃ na gacchati. Vibhajitvā dhammasabhāvaṃ ajānantassa bhayaṃ jāyatīti vibhajitvā ajāniyasabhāvā dhammā bhayassa vatthu honti, dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānena pana anupassitabbā vibhajitvā jānitabbā dhammā rāgassa vatthu na honti, tasmā dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ bhāvento puggalo bhayāgatiṃ na gacchati. Evaṃ pahātabbabhāvena ekalakkhaṇe akusalepi dhamme nīharitvā idāni nigametuṃ ‘‘evaṃ akusalāpi dhammā ekalakkhaṇattā pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchantī’’ti puna vuttaṃ.
导师曾言:于应修习诸法中,若说一分,则其余应修习法,由同一特相故,亦应举而说之;于应断除诸法中,若说一分,则其余应断除法,由同一特相故,亦应举而说之。我等已了知此义。今为以余门显示特相摄之例,故说“又或者,于任何处……”,因若更有应说者,汝等亦当说之。此中,“于任何处”:于色一分之教中,世尊教导了色根——即具有变坏特相的眼根等乃至命根之八种根,是为色之一分。即于彼色一分教中,具有变坏特相的眼界等乃至触界之十种色界,亦由变坏同一特相而被教导;整个色蕴亦被教导;具有变坏特相的眼处等乃至触处之十种处,亦由变坏同一特相而被世尊所教导。显示巴利原文
Bhāvetabbesu dhammesu ekadesesu vutte tadavasesāpi bhāvetabbā dhammā ekalakkhaṇattā nīharitvā vattabbā, pahātabbesupi dhammesu ekadese vutte tadavasesāpi dhammā pahātabbā ekalakkhaṇattā nīharitvā vattabbāti ācariyena vuttā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘aññathāpi yadi vattabbā siyuṃ, tepi vadathā’’ti vattabbabhāvato aññenapi pariyāyena lakkhaṇahārassa udāharaṇāni dassetuṃ ‘‘yattha vā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ . Tattha yattha yassaṃ rūpekadesadesanāyaṃ rūpindriyaṃ ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ cakkhundriyādijīvitindriyapariyosānaṃ aṭṭhavidhaṃ indriyaṃ rūpekadesaṃ bhagavatā desitaṃ. Tattheva tassaṃ rūpekadesadesanāyaṃ rūpadhātu ruppanalakkhaṇā cakkhudhātādiphoṭṭhabbadhātupariyosānā dasavidhā rūpadhātu ruppanalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā desitā. Sabbo rūpakkhandho ca desito. Rūpāyatanaṃ ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ cakkhāyatanādiphoṭṭhabbāyatanapariyosānaṃ dasavidhaṃ āyatanaṃ ruppanalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā bhagavatā desitaṃ.
又或者,于某受一分教中,世尊若说乐受,即于彼受一分教中,乐根亦被说,喜根亦被说,苦集圣谛由具有乐受性同一特相故亦被说。又或者,于某受一分教中,世尊若说苦受,即于彼受一分教中,苦根亦被说,忧根亦被说,苦圣谛由具有苦受性同一特相故亦被说。又或者,于某受一分教中,世尊若说不苦不乐受,即于彼受一分教中,舍根亦被说,整个缘起亦被说。应作如是连结。显示巴利原文
Yattha vā pana yassaṃ vedanekadesadesanāyaṃ sukhā vedanā bhagavatā desitā, tattha tassaṃ vedanekadesadesanāyaṃ sukhindriyañca desitaṃ, somanassindriyañca desitaṃ, dukkhasamudayo ariyasaccañca desitaṃ sukhavedanābhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā. Yattha vā pana yassaṃ vedanekadesadesanāyaṃ dukkhā vedanā bhagavatā desitā, tattha tassaṃ vedanekadesadesanāyaṃ dukkhindriyañca desitaṃ domanassindriyañca desitaṃ, dukkhaṃ ariyasaccañca desitaṃ dukkhavedanābhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā. Yattha vā pana yassaṃ vedanekadesadesanāyaṃ adukkhamasukhā vedanā bhagavatā desitā, tattha tassaṃ vedanekadesadesanāyaṃ upekkhindriyañca desitaṃ, sabbo paṭiccasamuppādo ca desitoti yojanā kātabbā.
在宣说无苦无乐受的教法中,基于同相的缘故,舍根也应已被宣说。有人或问:“缘起是依什么因缘而宣说的?”为了说明因由而回答“依何因”的提问,故有“依无苦无乐受……”等文。在此,由于无明随眠于无苦无乐受中,因此宣说了无明。宣说了无明之后,以无明为根本的整个缘起——如“无明缘行……乃至苦蕴集起”所示——亦应视为已被宣说,这便是其意趣所在。显示巴利原文
Yassaṃ desanāyaṃ adukkhamasukhā vedanā desitā, tassaṃ desanāyaṃ upekkhindriyaṃ desitaṃ hotu samānalakkhaṇattā, ‘‘kena paṭiccasamuppādo desito bhaveyyā’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘kena kāraṇenā’’ti pucchitvā kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘adukkhamasukhāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya hi yasmā avijjā anuseti, tasmā avijjā desitā hoti. Avijjāya ca desitāya avijjāmūlako sabbopi paṭiccasamuppādo ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā…pe… dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī’’ti desitova hotīti adhippāyo daṭṭhabbo.
阿阇梨说:“顺次转起的缘起——如‘无明缘行……乃至苦聚集’——是已被宣说的。”考虑到有人会非难:“如果这样转起的那个缘起已被宣说,那么整个缘起岂不都已被宣说了?这是不应说的。”为了回应此非难,于是说“那个……”等。此处,顺次转起的那个缘起,应当依贪、嗔、痴等杂染方面来断除。而逆次转起的缘起——即以“由于无明无余离贪灭故行灭”等作为开端的那个缘起——应当依离贪、离嗔、离痴等圣法方面来断除。至于顺逆次转起的那个缘起,则应依这两方面来断除。因此,应该说“整个缘起皆已宣说”,应当如此把握其意趣。显示巴利原文
‘‘Avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā…pe… samudayo hotī’’ti anulomavasena pavatto yo paṭiccasamuppādo desitoti ācariyena vutto, ‘‘yadi tathā pavatto so ca paṭiccasamuppādo desito, evaṃ sati sabbo ca paṭiccasamuppādo desito’’ti na vattabboti codanaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘so cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yo ca anulomavasena pavatto, so ca sarāgasadosasamohasaṃkilesapakkhena hātabbo. Yo ca paṭilomavasena ‘‘avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’tiādiko pavatto, so ca vītarāgavītadosavītamohaariyadhammehi hātabbo. Yo ca anulomapaṭilomavasena pavatto, so ca tadubhayehi hātabbo. Tasmā ‘‘sabbo ca paṭiccasamuppādo desito’’ti vattabbovāti adhippāyo gahetabbo.
依据“诸法若同一相,于彼诸法中,说一法时,余法即已被说”等原理,阿阇梨所说的“相的牵引结合”,本即应当如此运用,而非另作他说。然而,由于会有人问是否也可另作运用,为了表明“亦可作其他的相的牵引结合”,故有“如是,诸法……”等文。在此,地等色法与触等非色法,依执持作用、结合作用等而同一相,于彼色与非色法中,说一法时,其余色与非色法便已被说。地等色法与触等非色法,依坚硬相、触击相等而同一相,于彼色与非色法中,说一法时,其余色与非色法便已被说。诸法依坏灭的共相、所被倾向的共相、无常等共相,或蕴、处等共相而同一相,于彼诸行法中,说一行法时,余法亦已被说。诸行法依坏与生为行、死与生为行、同灭与生为行,或依死与生而同一相,于彼诸行法中,说一行法时,余诸行法亦已被说——应当如此作义理上的结合。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ye dhammā ekalakkhaṇā, tesaṃ dhammānaṃ ekasmiṃ dhamme vutte avasiṭṭhā dhammā vuttā bhavantītiādinā (netti. 23) ācariyena yā lakkhaṇahārayojanā vuttā, sāva kātabbā, na aññathā kātabbā’’ti pucchitabbabhāvato aññathāpi lakkhaṇahārayojanā kātabbāyevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ ye dhammā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ye pathavīādayo rūpadhammā, ye phassādayo arūpadhammā sandhāraṇādikiccato saṅghaṭṭanādikiccato ekalakkhaṇā, tesaṃ rūpārūpadhammānaṃ ekasmiṃ dhamme vutte avasiṭṭhā rūpārūpadhammā vuttā bhavanti. Ye pathavīādayo rūpadhammā, ye phassādayo arūpadhammā kakkhaḷādilakkhaṇato phusanādilakkhaṇato ekalakkhaṇā, tesaṃ rūpārūpadhammānaṃ ekasmiṃ dhamme vutte avasiṭṭhā rūpārūpadhammā vuttā bhavanti. Ye dhammā ruppanasāmaññato namanasāmaññato aniccādisāmaññato vā khandhāyatanādisāmaññato vā ekalakkhaṇā, tesaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ ekasmiṃ saṅkhatadhamme vutte avasiṭṭhā dhammā vuttā bhavanti. Ye saṅkhatadhammā bhaṅguppādato saṅkhato cutūpapātato samānanirodhuppādasaṅkhatato vā cutūpapātato ekalakkhaṇā, tesaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ ekasmiṃ saṅkhatadhamme vutte avasiṭṭhā saṅkhatadhammā vuttā bhavantīti atthayojanā kātabbā.
于“依作用与依相”等处,当知以“与”字即摄俱行、同等因等。而于俱行等之中所应说者,即如于“异身异想者,由不作意异想”等处,依俱行性简别出与想俱行之诸法——此即如前已说。显示巴利原文
Kiccato ca lakkhaṇato cātiādīsu ca-saddena sahacaraṇasamānahetutādayo saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbā . Sahacaraṇādīsu ca yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ ‘‘nānattakāyanānattasaññino (dī. ni. 3.341, 357, 359; a. ni. 9.24), nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā’’tiādīsu sahacāritāya saññāsahagatā dhammā niddhāritātiādinā vuttameva.
因为可能会有人问:“当一法依自相被宣说时,依同一相等故,其余诸法亦已被说,我们又如何能了知、信受这一点呢?”所以才说了“因此”等语。在此处,正是由于其余诸法亦已被说,尊者大迦旃延才会以“于一法已说时”等语,以此语告诉你们:应当了知、信受其余诸法亦已被说。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ekasmiṃ dhamme sarūpato vutte ekalakkhaṇādito avasiṭṭhadhammānampi vuttabhāvo kena amhehi jānitabbo saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘tenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tena avasiṭṭhadhammānampi vuttabhāvena ‘‘vuttamhi ekadhamme’’tiādikaṃ yaṃ vacanaṃ āyasmā mahākaccāno āha, tena vacanena tumhehi avasiṭṭhānampi vuttabhāvo jānitabbo saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
又,因为应当说:“至此,相牵引圆满,再无其他安立”,故说“安立的相牵引”。在此,若某部经中,当一法被说时,其余诸法亦由此相牵引而得以简别,那么在该经中,此相牵引即被安立,于简别后而作结合——应如此理解其义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettāvatā ca lakkhaṇahāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto lakkhaṇo hāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ekasmiṃ dhamme vutte avasiṭṭhadhammāpi yena lakkhaṇahārena niddhāritā, tassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ so lakkhaṇo hāro niyutto niddhāretvā yojitoti attho daṭṭhabboti.
然而,智者应依循注释书的复注,详尽分解之后再把握深义。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
6. 四阵牵引分别之阐释显示巴利原文
6. Catubyūhahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
25 25. 作为释义特相的相牵引分别,已圆满阐明了与经义同义的部分。因为会被问到“什么是四阵牵引分别?”所以说了“于此,什么是四阵牵引”等句。这里的“于此”,是指前面所说的十六种示导牵引等当中。应知“什么是”即指什么是释义特相的四阵牵引,称为四阵牵引分别。因此说:“于此,什么是四阵牵引?就是四阵牵引分别。”因为还会被问到:“依此四阵牵引,应寻求何种文句等?”所以说了“依文”等句。在这里,“依文”的意思是:四阵牵引的经典,由于特别具有考察文句的性质,因此被称为“文”;依此四阵牵引,由释义者寻求经的文法、经的意趣、经的因缘、经的前后连贯——这便是义。显示巴利原文
25. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgena suttatthehi samānatthā vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo catubyūhahāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo catubyūho hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu. Katamoti katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso catubyūho hāro catubyūhahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti viññeyyo. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tattha katamo catubyūho hāroti catubyūhahāravibhaṅgo’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 25). ‘‘Iminā catubyūhahārena katamassa neruttādayo gavesitabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘byañjanenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha byañjanenāti catubyūhahārassa suttassa visesato byañjanavicayabhāvato ‘‘byañjanā’’ti vohāritena iminā catubyūhahārena suttassa neruttañca, suttassa adhippāyo ca, suttassa nidānañca, suttassa pubbāparasandhi ca saṃvaṇṇentehi gavesitabboti attho.
若问:“在应以四种阵列方式探寻的语义解释等中,哪一种是经文应探寻的语义解释?”则说“其中,什么是语义解释”等句。其含义是:若问:“在这应以四种阵列方式探寻的语义解释等当中,哪一种是经文的语义解释,也就是词源解释?”应这样回答:经文拣择之后说出的自性施设——语言表达,便是应探寻的;这自性语言表达的词源解释,就称为语义解释。若问:“所谓‘语言表达即语义解释’,那语言表达又是什么?”则说“词语的组合”。词语的组合即词语之间相互结合、连贯。其关联在于:就像经文的含义应被解说的那样,随之生起的自性语言表达,那生起的自性语言表达本身就叫做语言表达。若问:“那自性语言表达又是什么?”则说“即对诸法以名称而有的智”。其含义是:以某种作为原因的名称施设,对于应了知的诸法,善巧之人凭借名称——如‘地’等名称、‘触’等名称、‘蕴’等名称——而生起种种名称的智,那作为原因的名称施设即称为自性语言表达。文中的‘yaṃ’是词性变格,实际是‘yāya’的意思。为了说明“请开示对词性、原形、诸法以名称而生起的智”,故说“显示巴利原文
‘‘Catubyūhahārena gavesitabbesu neruttādīsu katamaṃ suttassa gavesitabbaṃ nerutta’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamaṃ nerutta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho – tattha tesu iminā catubyūhahārena gavesitabbesu neruttādīsu katamaṃ suttassa neruttaṃ nibbacanaṃ nāmāti ce puccheyya? Suttassa yā nirutti niddhāretvā vuttā sabhāvapaññatti gavesitabbā, idaṃ sabhāvaniruttibhūtaṃ nibbacanaṃ neruttaṃ nāmāti. ‘‘Yā nirutti neruttaṃ nāmāti vuttā, kā pana sā niruttī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘padasaṃhitā’’ti vuttaṃ. Padesu saṃhitā yuttā padasaṃhitā. Yathā yathā suttattho vattabbo, tathā tathā yā sabhāvanirutti pavattā, sā pavattā sabhāvaniruttiyeva nirutti nāmāti yojanā. ‘‘Kā pana sā sabhāvaniruttī’’ti pucchitabbattā ca ‘‘yaṃ dhammānaṃ nāmaso ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ yāya kāraṇabhūtāya nāmapaññattiyā dhammānaṃ neyyānaṃ nāmaso pathavīnāmādinā vā phassanāmādinā vā khandhanāmādinā vā vividhena nāmena atthadhammādīsu kusalassa puggalassa ñāṇaṃ pavattati, sā kāraṇabhūtā nāmapaññatti sabhāvanirutti nāmāti attho. Yanti ca liṅgavipallāso, yāyāti attho. ‘‘Liṅgapakatidhammānaṃ nāmaso pavattamānaṃ ñāṇaṃ vivaritvā kathehī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yadā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘yadā hi bhikkhūtiādinā ‘dhammānaṃ nāmaso ñāṇa’nti padassa atthaṃ vivaratī’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 25) vuttaṃ. Tassattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vibhajitvā vuttovāti na vicārito.
26 语义的解释已由导师分别解说,我们亦已了知。若问:“经中应探寻的世尊意趣为何?”便说“其中,何谓意趣”等语,其义显然。再者,如“法确实保护”等经文中,若有人希望以自己所护持的法而得保护,世尊的意趣便是:他应护持法。若有人希望从恶趣解脱,世尊的意趣便是:他应护持法。显示巴利原文
26. Neruttaṃ ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ ‘‘katamo sutte gavesitabbo bhagavato adhippāyo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo adhippāyo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho pākaṭo. Apica ‘‘dhammo have rakkhatī’’tiādīsu yena puggalena attanā rakkhitena dhammena rakkhitabbabhāvo icchito, so dhammaṃ rakkhissatīti bhagavato adhippāyo. Yo puggalo duggatito muccitukāmo, so dhammaṃ rakkhissatīti bhagavato adhippāyo.
又如“盗贼于破门处被捉”等经文中,若盗贼希望免于处死,世尊的意趣便是:他应不再行盗贼之事。若有人希望从地狱等苦中解脱,世尊的意趣便是:他应不再造恶业。显示巴利原文
Coro yathā sandhimukhe gahitotiādīsu yo coro ghātanato muccitukāmo, so corakammaṃ na karissatīti bhagavato adhippāyo. Yo puggalo apāyādidukkhato muccitukāmo, so pāpakammaṃ na karissatīti bhagavato adhippāyo.
又“渴望快乐者”等经文中,那些希求快乐的人,世尊的意趣便是:他们将远离伤害他人。显示巴利原文
Sukhakāmānītiādīsu ye puggalā sukhaṃ icchanti, te parahiṃsanato vivajjissantīti bhagavato adhippāyo.
在“当人昏沉且贪食”等经文中,那些渴望从一再生起的生老死中解脱的人,世尊的意趣是:他们将于饮食知量,知足,生活清净,具足巴帝摩卡律仪,精勤不懈,修习观,心怀恭敬与尊重。显示巴利原文
Middhī yadā hoti mahagghaso cātiādīsu ye puggalā punappunaṃ pavattamānajātijarāmaraṇato muccitukāmā, te bhojane mattaññuno bhavissanti, santuṭṭhā bhavissanti, suddhājīvā bhavissanti, pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlasampannā bhavissanti, atandino bhavissanti, vipassakā bhavissanti, sagāravā sappatissā bhavissantīti bhagavato adhippāyo.
在“不放逸是不死之道”等经文中,那些畏惧死亡、渴求涅槃的人,世尊的意趣是:他们将于布施、持戒、禅修等诸善法中不放逸。显示巴利原文
Appamādo amatapadantiādīsu ye puggalā maccuno bhāyanti, nibbānamicchanti, te puggalā dānasīlabhāvanākammesu appamattā bhavissantīti bhagavato adhippāyo.
27 27. 应于经中探寻的意趣,已由导师分别解说,我等也已了知。若问:“什么是经中应探寻的因缘?”便说:“其中,何谓因缘”等。此中,因缘者,能取出果而给予,故名为因缘。那是什么?是原因。“有财者”,即致力于财富增长之因者,故名有财者。“牧牛者”,即守护、保护牛群者,故名牧牛者。“依着”指儿子、牛等(《经集注释》1.33)。“人”指有儿子的男子或牧牛者。然而,这是依词性、或依多数、或依在偈颂中出现的方式而说。应知女性也确实有基于依着而生的喜悦。显示巴利原文
27. Sutte gavesitabbo adhippāyo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca viññāto, ‘‘katamaṃ suttassa gavesitabbaṃ nidāna’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamaṃ nidāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nidānanti phalaṃ nīharitvā detīti nidānaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Kāraṇaṃ. Dhaniyoti dhanavaḍḍhanakāraṇe niyuttoti dhaniyo. Gopālakoti gāvo issarabhāvena pāleti rakkhatīti gopālako. Upadhīhīti puttagoṇādīhi (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.33). Narassāti puttimantassa vā gopālakassa vā narassāti ca padaṭṭhānavasena vā yebhuyyavasena vā gāthāyaṃ āgatavasena vā vuttaṃ, nāriyāpi upadhīhi nandanā atthevāti daṭṭhabbā.
“以此事物”:即此称为“依着”的事物,就是儿子、牛等事物。“事物”:即儿子、牛等在其中存续、转起的喜悦之处。有财者取了“能取出喜悦而给予,即以儿子、牛等为因缘”的含义,而说“依着是人的喜悦”。世尊则取了“儿子、牛等事物在其中存续、转起忧愁,能取出忧愁而给予,即以儿子、牛等为因缘”的含义,而说“依着是人的忧愁”。“所执取者”即执取。那是什么?就是儿子、牛等,这种执取称为“依着”,并非烦恼的依着,也非蕴身的依着。显示巴利原文
Iminā vatthunāti upadhisaṅkhātena imināva puttagavādinā vatthunā. Vasati pavattati nandanā ettha puttagoṇādiketi vatthu. Nandanaṃ nīharitvā deti puttagoṇādikanti nidānanti atthaṃ gahetvā dhaniyo ‘‘upadhīhi narassa nandanā’’ti āha. Bhagavā pana ‘‘vasati pavattati socanā ettha puttagoṇādikehi vatthu, socanaṃ nīharitvā deti puttagoṇādikanti nidāna’’nti atthaṃ gahetvā ‘‘upadhīhi narassa socanā’’ti āha. Pariggahīyateti pariggahaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Puttagoṇādikaṃ, taṃ pariggahaṃ ‘‘upadhī’’ti āha, na kilesūpadhikāyakhandhūpadhinti.
“于依着中”:即于称为蕴的身体中。在此将身体称为“依着”,并非指儿子、牛等,也不是指执取物。显示巴利原文
Upadhīsūti khandhasaṅkhātesu kāyesu. Kāyaṃ ‘‘upadhī’’ti āha, na puttagavādikaṃ, na pariggahaṃ.
“于外在事物中”:即于珠宝、耳环、儿女、妻子等事物中。显示巴利原文
Bāhiresuvatthūsūti maṇikuṇḍalaputtadārādīsu vatthūsu.
“欲乐”是指于可意对象中,以味著其乐而生起的渴爱。“于外在事物的渴爱”是指于可意的外在事物中,以味著其乐而生起的渴爱。显示巴利原文
Kāmasukhanti kāmanīyesu assādasukhavasena pavattā taṇhā. Bāhiravatthukāya taṇhāyāti kāmanīyesu bāhiravatthūsu assādasukhavasena pavattāya taṇhāya.
“于内在事物之身”是指于称为色身的内在事物中,以欢喜而生起的渴爱。显示巴利原文
Ajjhattikavatthukāyāti rūpakāyasaṅkhāte ajjhattikavatthumhi abhinandanavasena pavattāya.
再者,“于内在事物之身”又指于称为五蕴的内在事物中,以爱染而生起的渴爱。显示巴利原文
Puna ajjhattikavatthukāyāti pañcakkhandhasaṅkhāte ajjhattikavatthumhi sinehavasena pavattāya.
应探寻的因缘已作分别解说,我们也已了知。如果有人问:“应探寻的前后连贯是什么?”便说“其中,什么是前后连贯”等句。这里所说的“于彼处”,即指那些语义解释、意趣、因缘及前后连贯。“如同”,是指以黑暗等的体性来说。世尊所说的“为欲所盲……乃至……母亲”所指的欲爱,正是以那黑暗等的同一体性,与“为欲所盲……乃至……母亲”这一偈颂相关联。显示巴利原文
Gavesitabbaṃ nidānaṃ vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘katamo gavesitabbo pubbāparasandhī’’ti pucchitabbattā tattha katamo pubbāparasandhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu neruttādhippāyanidānapubbāparasandhīsu. Yathāti yena andhakārādinā sabhāvena ‘‘kāmandhā…pe… mātara’’nti yaṃ kāmataṇhaṃ bhagavā āha, ayaṃ kāmataṇhā tathā tena andhakārādinā sabhāvena ‘‘kāmandhā…pe… mātara’’nti gāthā vuttāti yojanā.
偈颂的含义是这样的:“贪于欲”故是欲,即欲爱。由于对义理的无知、对法的不能照见,因此是盲,称为“欲盲者”。被名为欲爱的网,以对义理与法的无知及不能照见而覆盖、缠裹,是“网所覆者”。被名为渴爱的盖,以对义理与法的同样的无知及不能照见而遮蔽、掩盖,是“渴爱盖所蔽者”。那些被名为放逸的放逸之结缚所系、所应系的有情,在义理与法中,他们追随老死,恰如以嘴在浅处活动的鱼追随死亡,又如饮乳的牛犊追随母牛一般,如此追随老死。应作如此理解。显示巴利原文
Gāthāttho pana – kāmetīti kāmo, kāmataṇhā, kāmena atthassa ajānanatāya dhammassa, apassanatāya ca andhāti kāmandhā. Kāmataṇhāsaṅkhātena jālena atthadhammānaṃ ajānanāpassanena sañchannā paliguṇṭhitāti jālasañchannā. Taṇhāsaṅkhātena chadanena tesaṃyeva atthadhammānaṃ ajānanāpassanena chāditā pihitāti taṇhāchadanachāditā. Atthadhammesu pamattasaṅkhātena pamādena bandhanena baddhā bandhitabbā puggalā jarāmaraṇaṃ anventi, kumināmukhe pavattā macchā maraṇaṃ anventi iva ca, khīrapako vaccho mātaraṃ anveti iva ca, tathā jarāmaraṇaṃ anventīti gahetabbo.
为了说明这一点——“‘为欲所盲……乃至……母’这一教示或偈颂所说的欲爱,与后面哪一段作为教示的文句相契合?”在如此提问之后,为了显示“它与此教示或与此偈颂相契合”,便说“它与哪一个……”等语句。其中,“它”是指“欲盲者……乃至……追随”这一教示或偈颂。“以前后”是指与此教示之前的教说语句或偈颂语句,以及之后的教说语句或偈颂语句。“相契合”,即是问:是否相互连接、相互吻合、相互一致。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kāmandhā…pe… mātara’nti yāya desanāya, gāthāya vā kāmataṇhā vuttā, sā desanā, gāthā vā katamena desanābhūtena aparena yujjatī’’ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā imāya desanāya, gāthāya vā yujjatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘sā katamenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sāti ‘‘kāmandhā…pe… anventī’’ti desanā, gāthā vā. Pubbāparenāti tato desanāto pubbena desanāvacanena, gāthāvacanena vā aparena desanāvacanena, gāthāvacanena vā. Yujjati yujjanaṃ eti sametīti pucchati.
“如”是指以此暗蔽等。世尊所说“染者……乃至……人”的偈语,正与彼暗蔽等相契应,这便是结合。偈意如下:“染者”,即正在染着的有情,不知义理——不知自利之义与利他之义。“染者”,即正在染着的有情,不以慧眼见法——不见前述义理之因。当贪染着于彼人时,此人便有盲、有黑暗、有痴、有无明,应作如是解。显示巴利原文
Yathāti yena andhakaraṇādinā. ‘‘Ratto…pe… nara’’nti yaṃ gāthāvacanaṃ bhagavā āha, tena gāthāvacanena tathā andhakaraṇādinā yujjatīti yojanā. Gāthāttho pana – ratto rañjanto puggalo atthaṃ attahitapayojanaṃ parahitapayojanaṃ na jānāti. Ratto rañjanto dhammaṃ yathāvuttassa atthassa hetuṃ paññācakkhunā na passati. Rāgo yaṃ naraṃ yadā sahate, tadā tassa narassa andhaṃ andhakāraṃ tamaṃ aññāṇaṃ hotīti gahetabbo.
“如是”即如此。以盲性、作盲性,以覆性、作覆性。那渴爱即是“欲盲者……乃至……母”这一偈语所说的欲贪,此即欲贪。“被说示”即由后一偈“染者……乃至……人”被世尊所称说、借称说而告知。所说之义相同,因此前教示与后教示相契合,这便是所说之义。显示巴利原文
Itīti evaṃ. Andhatāya andhakaraṇatāya sañchannatāya sañchannakaraṇatāya. Sāyeva taṇhāti ‘‘kāmandhā…pe… mātara’’nti gāthāvacanena yā kāmataṇhā vuttā, sāyeva kāmataṇhā. Abhilapitāti ‘‘ratto…pe… nara’’nti aparena gāthāvacanena bhagavatā vohāritā voharaṇena ñāpitā, abhilapitassa atthassa samānatā pubbadesanā aparadesanāya yujjatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
为了说明“两偈之中,以哪些词句说示了彼同一渴爱”,而确定地指出“以这些词句说示”,故说“且彼所说……”等。其中,第一偈所说“欲盲者……乃至……所蔽”,以及第二偈所说“染者……乃至……不见”——世尊即是以这些表示现行的词句,即“欲盲者……乃至……不见”,说示了第一偈所说的同一欲贪。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dvīsu gāthāsu katamehi padehi sāyeva taṇhā abhilapitā’’ti pucchitabbattā imehi abhilapitāti niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yañcāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paṭhamagāthāyaṃ ‘‘kāmandhā…pe… chāditā’’ti yañca padaṃ āha, dutiyagāthāyañca ‘‘ratto…pe… na passatī’’ti yañca padaṃ āha. Pariyuṭṭhānehi pariyuṭṭhānadīpakehi imehi ‘‘kāmandhā…pe… passatī’’ti padehi sāyeva paṭhamagāthāya vuttā kāmataṇhā ca bhagavatā abhilapitā.
因须解答“所说的黑暗是什么?所说的后有爱是什么?”,故说“所谓黑暗……”等。此处,所说的黑暗即无明,此即是苦集;所说的后有爱,此亦是苦集。这便是文句的连结。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yaṃ andhakāraṃ vuttaṃ, katamaṃ taṃ? Yā taṇhā ponobhavikā vuttā, katamā sā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yaṃ andhakāra’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha andhakāraṃ yaṃ aññāṇaṃ vuttaṃ, ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo bhave. Yā ca taṇhā ponobhavikā vuttā, ayañca dukkhasamudayo bhaveti yojanā.
世尊所说的“欲”一词,指的是这些烦恼欲。世尊所说的“为网所覆者”一词,则以加行与现行,显示了他们烦恼欲的现行。所以,因为:在某一相续中生起的渴爱,不让该相续从轮回出离,以色等所缘令其染着,以烦恼遍取心而安住。由此,渴爱以遍取心而安住于相续中。“以烦恼力”,即依违犯烦恼之力。“以现行力”,即依未至违犯而生起之力。“他们”,指与上述具有渴爱者同类之人。“他们”即被渴爱之缚所系、如此安住者。“追随老死”,即不能超越老死。“此”,即世尊以“追随老死”这一语句显示了老死的随转。这是文句的连结。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kāmā’’ti yañca padaṃ bhagavā āha, tena padena ime kilesakāmā vuttā. ‘‘Jālasañchannā’’ti yañca padaṃ bhagavā āha, tena padena tesaṃyeva kilesakāmānaṃ payogena samudācārena pariyuṭṭhānaṃ bhagavā dasseti. Tasmāti yasmā yasmiṃ santāne taṇhā uppannā, taṃ santānaṃ saṃsārato nissarituṃ adatvā rūpārammaṇādīhi palobhayamānā hutvā cittaṃ kilesehi pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, tasmā taṇhāya cittaṃ pariyādāya santāne tiṭṭhamānattā. Kilesavasenāti vītikkamakilesavasena. Pariyuṭṭhānavasenāti vītikkamanaṃ appatvā uppajjamānavasena. Yeti vuttappakārataṇhāsahitapuggalasadisā. Teti te taṇhābandhanabaddhā ca edisakā ca puggalā. Jarāmaraṇaṃ anventi jarāmaraṇaṃ atikkamituṃ na sakkuṇanti. Ayanti jarāmaraṇānuppavatti ‘‘jarāmaraṇamanventī’’ti iminā vacanena bhagavatā dassitāti yojanā.
“欲盲者”等偈与“染者”等偈的前后关联,已由阿阇梨予以分别,也为我们所了知。为了说明“‘彼之戏论与住立……’等偈中的前后关联应如何为我们所了知”,故说“彼之戏论……”等。该偈的意义是:那位牟尼没有戏论——即渴爱、慢、见,也没有由渴爱、慢、见所造作的诸行,没有住立——即随眠与渴爱,没有如同系缚的渴爱现行,没有如同门闩的无明;那位牟尼被称为超越者,超越了戏论等一切。无渴爱、无慢、无见、无系缚、无门闩,于世中行走,那位牟尼不为与渴爱俱的世间——包括诸天——所知。这便是意义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kāmandhā’’tiādigāthāya ceva ‘‘ratto’’tiādigāthāya ca pubbāparasandhi ācariyena vibhatto , amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ ‘yassa papañcā ṭhitī cā’tiādigāthāsu pubbāparasandhi amhehi viññātabbo’’ti vattabbattā yassa papañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassā gāthāya – yassa munino papañcā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhī ca natthi, taṇhāmānadiṭṭhīhi abhisaṅkhatā saṅkhārā ca natthi, ṭhitī anusayā taṇhā ca natthi, sandānasadisaṃ taṇhāpariyuṭṭhānaṃ natthi, palighasadiso moho ca natthi, so muni papañcādikaṃ sabbaṃ vītivatto atikkantoti vuccati. Nittaṇhaṃ nimānaṃ nidiṭṭhiṃ nisandānaṃ nipalighaṃ loke carantaṃ taṃ muniṃ sadevako taṇhāsahito loko na vijānātīti attho.
在偈颂中,世尊说到了“戏论等”。为了解答“那些是什么”,便宣说了“名为戏论”等。爱、慢、见能令所依之人长久地在轮回中流转、煎熬,故名戏论;以彼爱、慢、见为俱生缘或支持缘所造作的诸行,也名为戏论。于相续中未断除故,爱是众生住立之因,故名为住。于正在转起的爱,其缠缚以及三十六爱网中所说的诸游履,这一切以束缚所依之人故,与锁链相似,故名为锁链。愚痴以阻止所依之人进入涅槃城故,与门闩相似,故名为门闩。为了解答“那位无戏论等者超越了些什么?”,便宣说了“那些”等。凡是所说的那类戏论、诸行,所说的那类住,所说的那种锁链,所说的那种门闩,若说为无,便是已超越这一切戏论等的牟尼。应知,此牟尼即称为“无爱者”。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ papañcādayo bhagavatā vuttā, ‘‘katame te’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘papañcā nāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Attano ādhārapuggalaṃ saṃsāre ciraṃ papañcantāpentī taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo ca, tāhi taṇhāmānadiṭṭhīhi sahajātavasena vā upatthambhanavasena vā abhisaṅkhatā saṅkhārā ca papañcā nāma. Santāne appahīnaṭṭhena anusayā taṇhā sattānaṃ tiṭṭhanahetuttā ṭhitī nāma. Pavattamānāya taṇhāya yaṃ pariyuṭṭhānañca chattiṃsataṇhāya jāliniyā yāni vicaritāni ca vuttāni, idaṃ sabbaṃ attano ādhāraṃ puggalaṃ bandhanaṭṭhena sandānasadisattā sandānaṃ nāma. Moho attano ādhārassa puggalassa nibbānanagarappavesanassa paṭisedhakattā palighasadisattā paligho nāma. ‘‘Yassa papañcādayo natthi, so kiṃ vītivatto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘ye cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ye vuttappakārā papañcā saṅkhārā, yā ca vuttappakārā ṭhiti, yaṃ vuttappakāraṃ sandānañca, yaṃ vuttappakāraṃ palighañca natthīti vuttā, sabbaṃ etaṃ papañcādikaṃ yo muni samatikkanto, ayaṃ muni ‘‘nittaṇho’’ti vuccatīti daṭṭhabbo.
28 在“凡戏论等”的偈颂中,说到了那些戏论等。其中,以爱、慢、见为因的诸行,在何时、给予几种果报?与那些诸行相应的爱,又在何时、给予几种果报?为了解答这些问题,便宣说了“其中,缠缚行”等。其中,于彼中,即于那些戏论行等中。缠缚行,即依违犯而生起的缠缚不善行与思。现法受等:于现见之法、自体(现世)中给予应受果报者,为现法受;或于现法中感受果报者,也为现法受。那是什么?是在不可责难等中,依极度责难等而生起的第一速行思。于再生中感受果报者,为再生受,也就是第七速行思。于后后之转起、自体(未来世)中感受果报者,为后后受,也就是中间转起的五个速行思。依其给予三种果报,而有此行三类。同样地,与此三类行思相应的三类爱,也给予三种果报:或于现法自体(现世)中,或于再生即无间有中,或于后转起之有中,令其生起。如是,世尊宣说了能生果报的行,或与彼相应的爱。显示巴利原文
28. ‘‘Yassa papañcātiādigāthāyaṃ ye papañcādayo vuttā, tesu taṇhāmānadiṭṭhihetukā saṅkhārā kadā katividhaṃ phalaṃ denti, taṃsaṅkhārasampayuttā taṇhā kadā katividhaṃ phalaṃ detī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha pariyuṭṭhānasaṅkhārā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu papañcasaṅkhārādīsu. Pariyuṭṭhānasaṅkhārāti vītikkamavasena pavattā pariyuṭṭhānā akusalasaṅkhārā cetanā. Diṭṭhadhammavedanīyādīti diṭṭhe passitabbe dhamme attabhāve vedanīyaṃ phalaṃ detīti diṭṭhadhammavedanīyā, diṭṭhe dhamme phalaṃ vedetīti vā diṭṭhadhammavedanīyā. Kā sā? Apadussanīyādīsu atidussanādivasena pavattā paṭhamajavanacetanā. Upapajje phalaṃ vedetīti upapajjavedanīyā, sattamajavanacetanā. Aparāpariyāye attabhāve phalaṃ vedetīti aparāpariyāyavedanīyā, majjhe pavattā pañca javanacetanā. Tiphaladānavasena tividhā saṅkhārā. Evaṃ imāya tividhāya saṅkhāracetanāya sampayuttā tividhā taṇhā tividhaṃ phalaṃ diṭṭhe vā dhamme attabhāve , upapajje vā anantarabhave, apare vā pariyāye bhave deti nibbattetīti evaṃ phalanibbattakasaṅkhāraṃ vā taṃsampayuttaṃ taṇhaṃ vā bhagavā āha.
为了解答“能生果报的行是由哪种教说或偈颂所说的?此教说或偈颂又与哪种教说体或其他教说前后相合?”的问题,便宣说了“凡由贪所造之业”等。所说的“凡……世间”这一教说,与所说的“凡由贪所造之业……或于后转起中”这一教说——世尊的这两种教说,彼此以前后、前与后、后与前的方式相合、相顺、相符,如同恒河水与阎牟那河水,阎牟那河水也与恒河水相合、相符。“凡……世间”的教说与“凡由贪所造之业……于后转起中”的教说相合、相符,“凡由贪所造之业……于后转起中”的教说也与“凡……世间”的教说相合、相符。应当如此取其义。为了解答“如何相合?”,便宣说了“其中,缠缚”等,即说以能生现法受等三种果报之义而相合。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yāya desanāya, gāthāya vā phalanibbattakaṃ saṅkhāraṃ āha, sā desanā, gāthā vā katamena desanābhūtena vā aparena yujjatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yaṃ lobhapakataṃ kammaṃ karotī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā ‘‘yassa…pe… loko’’ti desanā ca yā ‘‘yaṃ lobhapakataṃ kammaṃ…pe… apare vā pariyāye’’ti desanā ca vuttā, bhagavato idaṃ desanādvayaṃ aññamaññaṃ pubbāparena pubbaṃ aparena aparaṃ pubbena yujjati yujjanaṃ eti sameti, yathā gaṅgodakaṃ yamunodakena, yamunodakampi gaṅgodakena saṃsandati sameti. ‘‘Yassa…pe… loko’’ti desanā ‘‘yaṃ lobhapakataṃ…pe… pariyāye’’ti desanāya saṃsandati sameti, ‘‘yaṃ lobhapakataṃ…pe… pariyāye’’ti desanāpi ‘‘yassa…pe… loko’’ti desanāya saṃsandati sametīti attho gahetabbo. ‘‘Kathaṃ yujjatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha pariyuṭṭhāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ, diṭṭhadhammavedanīyādiphalattayanibbattakaṭṭhena yujjatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
为了显示世尊所教导的每一部经皆前后相合,便取出那些经来显示其前后相合,故说“如说”等。相合的方式,应依所述的方法来理解。其中,于那些缠缚、行、爱游履中。缠缚,即因不如理作意,缘取色等所缘,在众生相续中转起的爱行。以审察力,即以观见不净、无常等之力,应通过彼分断而断除。诸行,即应依见而断的诸行。以见力,即以称为见的初道智之力,应断除之。三十六爱游履,即除了依见应断的爱游履之外,所剩余的三十六爱游履。爱已出离者,即成为无爱者;无爱者的状态即是无爱性。那是什么?即有余涅槃界。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ yaṃ suttaṃ bhagavatā desitaṃ pubbāparena yujjati, taṃ taṃ suttampi nīharitvā pubbāparasaṃsandanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Saṃsandanākāro vuttanayānusārena gahetabbo. Tatthāti tesu pariyuṭṭhānasaṅkhārataṇhāvicaritesu. Pariyuṭṭhānanti rūpārammaṇādīni ayonisomanasikārena ārabbha sattasantāne pavattaṃ taṇhācaritaṃ. Paṭisaṅkhānabalenāti asubhāniccādidassanabalena tadaṅgappahānavasena pahātabbaṃ. Saṅkhārāti dassanapahātabbā saṅkhārā. Dassanabalenāti dassanasaṅkhātapaṭhamamaggañāṇabalena pahātabbā. Chattiṃsa taṇhāvicaritānīti dassanena pahātabbataṇhāvicaritehi avasesāni chattiṃsa taṇhāvicaritāni. Niggatā taṇhā yassa so nittaṇho, nittaṇhassa bhāvo nittaṇhatā, kā sā? Saupādisesā nibbānadhātu.
戏论、行、爱喜三者,虽在意义上实为同一,但为显示在教说中,借由字句等而有差别,故说“再者”等。显示巴利原文
Papañcasaṅkhārābhinandanattayaṃ yadipi atthato ekaṃ samānaṃ, desanāya pana padakkharādīhi viseso atthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
由于应当被问及:“此由阿阇梨所分别的前后连接,它有几种?”因此说了“而此前后连接”等。然而在义注中则说:“并非唯有经与经之间的相合才是前后连接,为显示还有其他种类,故说‘而此’等。”其中,义连接,即依动作、作者等,意义与意义之间的连接。句连接,即名句等与名句等之间的连接。教说连接,即一种教说与另一种教说之间的连接。解说连接,即一种解说与另一种解说之间的连接。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yoyaṃ pubbāparasandhi ācariyena vibhatto, soyaṃ katividho’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so cāyaṃ pubbāparo sandhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘na kevalaṃ suttantarasaṃsandanameva pubbāparasandhi, atha kho aññopi atthīti dassetuṃ ‘so cāya’ntiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 28). Tattha atthasandhīti kiriyākārakādivasena atthassa atthena sandhi. Padasandhīti nāmapadādikassa nāmapadādikantarena sandhi. Desanāsandhīti vuttappakārassa desanantarassa vuttappakārena desanantarena sandhi. Niddesasandhīti niddesantarassa niddesantarena sandhi.
所谓“连合”,除义等之外,并无其他自性法存在;而义等亦摄于六义句等中,故说“义连合是六句”等。显示巴利原文
Sandhi ca nāma atthādayo muñcitvā añño sabhāvadhammo nāma natthi, atthādīnañca chaatthapadādīsu avarodhanato ‘‘atthasandhi chappadānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
义连合与文连合,已由阿阇梨分别解说,我等亦已了知。因应问“如何是说法连合”,故说“说法连合,非依地”等。于“禅修者非依地而修禅,禅修者亦修禅”句中,应解其义:此处,具禅那者非依地、非以地为所缘而修禅,乃依出离一切行之涅槃、以涅槃为所缘而入果等至,如是修禅。于“非依水”等,亦应以同法连合。盖证果等至者已弃舍地等,唯以涅槃为所缘而入果等至。此处,地等四大种因属色,故摄欲有与色有;空无边处等则摄无色有,其意为避三有而修禅。若禅修者非依地等而修禅,却又修禅,则或生此疑:禅修者是否依于所谓此世界的众生相续、或所谓彼世界的众生相续、或非根所系之相续而修禅?为遮此疑,故说“非依此世界”等。其中,“此世界”指令名为此世、现见自身的众生相续,禅修者非依此而修禅,禅修者亦修禅。“彼世界”指异于此世、名为他有的众生相续,禅修者非依彼而修禅,禅修者亦修禅。显示巴利原文
Atthasandhibyañjanasandhayo ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘katamā desanāsandhī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘desanāsandhi na ca pathavi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha na ca pathaviṃ nissāya jhāyati jhāyī jhāyati cāti ettha jhāyī jhānasamaṅgī puggalo pathaviṃ nissāya ālambitvā na ca jhāyati, sabbasaṅkhāranissaṭaṃ pana nibbānaṃ nissāya ālambitvā phalasamāpattiṃ jhāyati samāpajjati evāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Na ca āpantiādīsupi esa nayo yojetabbo. Phalasamāpattisamaṅgī puggalo hi pathavīādayo muñcitvā nibbānameva ārabbha phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjatīti. Ettha ca pathavīādīhi mahābhūtehi kāmabhavarūpabhavā gahitā rūpapaṭibaddhavuttitāya. Ākāsānañcāyatanādīhipi arūpabhavo gahito, bhavattayaṃ vajjetvā ca jhāyatīti adhippāyo. Yadi pathavīādayo nissāya na jhāyī jhāyati ca, evaṃ sati idhalokasaṅkhātaṃ sattasantānaṃ vā paralokasaṅkhātaṃ sattasantānaṃ vā anindriyasantānaṃ vā nissāya jhāyī jhāyatīti āsaṅkanīyattā taṃ pariharanto ‘‘na ca imaṃ loka’’ntiādimāha. Tattha imaṃ lokanti idhalokasaṅkhāto diṭṭho attabhāvo sattasantāno vutto, tasmiṃ nissāya na jhāyati jhāyī jhāyati ca. Paralokanti idhalokato añño bhavantarasaṅkhāto sattasantāno vutto, tasmiṃ nissāya na ca jhāyati jhāyī jhāyati ca.
于“此二者”等句中,应如此连合:除去此二者——此世与彼世二,其间,凡所见之色处,彼色处亦非依;凡所闻之声处,彼声处亦非依;凡所嗅、所尝、所触之香处、味处、触处,彼香处、味处、触处亦非依;凡所识知之水界、空界、相色、名为食素之法处一分色,彼水界等法处一分色亦非依;凡已寻得或未寻得、已至近处之事物,彼事物亦非依;凡已至或未至、已寻得、值得寻求之妙好事物,彼事物亦非依;凡已寻思、应以寻思力为所缘之事物,彼事物亦非依;凡已伺察、应以伺察力为所缘之事物,彼事物亦非依;凡以意、以心随念、以其随念力为所缘之事物,禅修者非依彼事物而修禅,禅修者亦修禅。显示巴利原文
Yamidaṃ ubhayantiādīsu idaṃ ubhayaṃ idhalokaparalokadvayaṃ antarena vajjetvā yaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, taṃ rūpāyatanampi. Yaṃ saddāyatanaṃ sutaṃ, taṃ saddāyatanampi. Yaṃ gandhāyatanarasāyatanaphoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ mutaṃ, taṃ gandhāyatanarasāyatanaphoṭṭhabbāyatanampi. Yaṃ āpodhātu ākāsadhātu lakkhaṇarūpaṃ ojāsaṅkhātaṃ dhammāyatanekadesarūpaṃ viññātaṃ, taṃ āpodhātādikaṃ dhammāyatanekadesarūpampi. Yaṃ vatthu pariyesitaṃ vā apariyesitaṃ vā santike pattaṃ, taṃ vatthumpi. Yaṃ vatthu pattaṃ vā appattaṃ vā pariyesitaṃ pariyesanārahaṃ sundaraṃ, taṃ vatthumpi. Yaṃ vatthu vitakkitaṃ vitakkanavasena ālambitabbaṃ, taṃ vatthumpi. Yaṃ vatthu vicāritaṃ anumajjanavasena ālambitabbaṃ, taṃ vatthumpi. Yaṃ vatthu manasā citteneva anucintitaṃ anucintanavasena ālambitabbaṃ, taṃ vatthumpi nissāya na jhāyati jhāyī jhāyati cāti yojanā kātabbā.
此处,所见等唯应理解为外色,因为此处意指非根所系之色。因此注释师说:“彼二者解脱,即非根所系之色相续。”若问:“若禅修者并非如前所说依于地等而禅修,却又确实在禅修,那么,这位禅修者究竟依于何物而禅修?世间有谁能知晓,还是无人可知?”为显示“无人可知”,故说“在此包括天界之世间”等。应如此了知其义:这位漏尽者以果等至禅那而禅修,在包括天界之世间……乃至……包括天众之众生中,以无所依之心禅修,故在包括天界之世间……乃至……包括天众之众生中,不为任何人所知。因此有言:显示巴利原文
Ettha diṭṭhādikaṃ bahiddhārūpameva gahetabbaṃ anindriyabaddharūpassa adhippetattā. Tenāha aṭṭhakathācariyo – ‘‘tadubhayavinimutto anindriyabaddho rūpasantāno’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 28). ‘‘Yadi jhāyī puggalo yathāvutte pathavīādayo nissāya na jhāyati jhāyī jhāyati ca, evaṃ sati ayaṃ jhāyī puggalo idaṃ nāma nissāya jhāyatīti loke kenaci ñāyati kiṃ, udāhu na ñāyatī’’ti pucchitabbattā na ñāyatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘ayaṃ sadevake loke’’tiādimāha. Tattha phalasamāpattijhānena jhāyanto ayaṃ khīṇāsavapuggalo sadevake loke…pe… sadevamanussāya pajāya yattha katthacipi anissitena cittena jhāyatīti sadevake loke…pe… sadevamanussāya pajāya kenaci na ñāyatīti attho gahetabbo. Tena vuttaṃ –
‘‘Namo te purisājañña, namo te purisuttama; Yassa te nābhijānāma, kiṃ tvaṃ nissāya jhāyasī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 3.79; netti. 104);
若有人问:“不为任何人所觉知的状态,当以何经阐明?”为显示应依《瞿低迦经》阐明,故说“如魔罗波旬”等。复注中则说:“今为以《瞿低迦经》与《跋迦利经》阐明漏尽者之心无所依止的状态,故说‘如魔罗’等。”其 中,魔罗意为:于布施等造福业者中、或于福业中,杀戮、遮止者;或意为:于自利利他中杀戮者。波旬意为:具足恶心生起者。前生曾为杀蜥蜴者,故得名“瞿低迦”的善男子,于般涅槃时,魔罗探寻其般涅槃后之结生等识,却不知、不见。又因应被说及:“能知他心之魔罗,为何不知?”故说“因为彼”等。因为彼瞿低迦已超越戏论,由于渴爱断除,彼瞿低迦亦无见之依止,是故魔罗不知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kenaci aviññāyabhāvo kena suttena vibhāvetabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā iminā godhikasuttena (saṃ. ni. 1.159) vibhāvetabboti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā māro pāpimā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘idāni khīṇāsavacittassa katthacipi anissitabhāvaṃ godhikasuttena (saṃ. ni. 1.159) vakkalisuttena (saṃ. ni. 3.87) ca vibhāvetuṃ ‘yathā māro’tiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 28) vuttaṃ. Tattha dānādipuññakārake, puññe vā māreti nivāretīti māro, attahitaparahite māretīti vā māro. Pāpacittuppādavantatāya pāpimā. Pubbattabhāve godhassa ghātakattā ‘‘godhiko’’ti laddhanāmassa parinibbāyantassa kulaputtassa parinibbānato uddhaṃ paṭisandhādi viññāṇaṃ samanvesanto na jānāti na passati. ‘‘Paracittajānanako māro kasmā na jānātī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘so hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. So godhiko hi yasmā papañcātīto, tasmā taṇhāpahānena diṭṭhinissayopi assa godhikassa yasmā natthi, tasmā ca na jānātīti.
若有人问:“只应依《瞿低迦经》来阐明吗?”因此又说了“又如”等。或许有人会生起这样的想法:“《瞿低迦经》和《跋迦利经》阐明了无余涅槃界的无依止状态,那么,有余涅槃界的无依止状态又是以什么方式被了知的呢?”为了表明“即使那时也依然无人了知”,故说“与包括天在内的世间”等。其中应作如下连接:这些漏尽者,以有余涅槃界的果等至禅那而修时,有时以无依止之心而修,此不为包括天在内的世间所了知,不为包括魔在内的……不为包括天、人在内的世间所了知。在此,“无依止之心不被了知”中的“不”字不应与“修”字连接,因为会产生“不修”的意思;而应与“不被了知”连接,因为后文注释中说:“在世间中,不为任何人所了知”。应把握如下含义:此教说连接,如同通过《瞿低迦经》与《跋迦利经》彼此间的义理而确定的契合,以及通过“不依于地”等教说和“不依于此世”等教说,以该教说的义理而确定的契合一样;由此教说,应理解“无论何处,依于任何所依而修者,即非真修;唯依于涅槃而修者,方为真修”的义理。显示巴利原文
‘‘Godhikasutteneva vibhāvetabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Godhikasuttavakkalisuttehi anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā anissitabhāvo vibhāvito, evaṃ sati saupādisesanibbānadhātuyā anissitabhāvo kena viññāyatīti attho bhaveyyā’’ti vattabbattā tadāpi na viññāyatiyevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sadevakena lokenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā phalasamāpattijhānena jhāyamānā ime khīṇāsavā katthaci anissitacittā jhāyantīti sadevakena lokena na ñāyanti samārakena…pe… sadevamanussāya na ñāyantīti yojanā kātabbā. Anissitacittā na ñāyantīti ettha hi na-kāro ca ‘‘jhāyamānā’’ti pade na sambandhitabbo ‘‘na jhāyamānā’’ti atthassa sambhavato. ‘‘Na ñāyantī’’ti pana sambandhitabbo heṭṭhā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ eva ‘‘loke kenacipi na ñāyatī’’ti vuttattā. Ayaṃ desanāsandhīti godhikasuttavakkalisuttānaṃ aññamaññaṃ atthavasena saṃsandanā niddhāritā viya ‘‘na ca pathaviṃ nissāyā’’tiādidesanāya ca ‘‘na ca imaṃ loka’’ntiādidesanāya ca yāya desanāya atthavasena saṃsandanā niddhāritā, tāya desanāya yattha katthaci yaṃ kiñci nissāya jhāyī na jhāyati, nibbānaṃ nissāya jhāyī jhāyatīti atthavasena niddhāritā, ayaṃ saṃsandanā desanāsandhi nāmāti attho gahetabbo.
教说连接已由阿阇梨分别,我等也已了知。若问:“何为释义连接?”因此说:“其中,何为释义连接?即依止心”等。其 中,“其中”是指:在义连接、文连接、教说连接、释义连接这四种连接中,被举出的“释义连接”,从释义上说究竟指什么?这是询问。“依止心”的意思是:凡夫的心,或以与渴爱、邪见俱生的方式,或以亲依止的方式,都是有所依止的,故称“依止心”,应被理解为凡夫补特伽罗,因为此教说是以补特伽罗为所依。若教说以法为所依,则在此诸经文中,宣说的是依止的心,故称“依止心”,即为了了知依止心而宣说的诸经文。“无依止心”的意思是:那些圣者补特伽罗的心是无依止的,故称“无依止心”,应被理解为圣者补特伽罗,因为此教说是以补特伽罗为所依。然而,若以法为所依,则在诸经文中,宣说的是无依止的心,故称“无依止心”,即为了了知无依止心而宣说的诸经文。显示巴利原文
Desanāsandhi ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘katamā niddesasandhī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamā niddesasandhīti nissitacittā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu catūsu atthasandhibyañjanasandhidesanāsandhiniddesasandhīsu yā sandhi ‘‘niddesasandhī’’ti uddiṭṭhā, sā niddesato katamāti pucchatīti attho. Nissitacittāti taṇhādiṭṭhisahajātavasena vā upanissayavasena vā nissitaṃ cittaṃ yesaṃ puthujjanānanti nissitacittā, puthujjanā puggalā niddisitabbā imāya desanāya puggalādhiṭṭhānattā. Yadi desanā dhammādhiṭṭhānā, evaṃ sati nissitaṃ cittaṃ ettha suttappadesesu desitanti nissitacittā nissitacittajānanatthāya desitā suttappadesā. Anissitaṃ cittaṃ yesaṃ ariyapuggalānanti anissitacittā, ariyapuggalā niddisitabbā imāya desanāya puggalādhiṭṭhānattā. Dhammādhiṭṭhānāya pana anissitaṃ cittaṃ yattha suttappadesesu desitanti anissitacittā, anissitacittajānanatthāya desitā suttappadesā.
由于应被问及:“依止心应以何种释义来解释?无依止心应以何种释义来解释?”因此说“依止心应以不善分来解释”等。即应以不善分的释义来解释。“以善分”等中,也适用此理。在显示了不善分的共相与善分的共相之后,为了显示不善的差别与善的差别,而说“依止心以杂染”等。应当如此分别了知:此释义连接——就依止心方面,是以杂染等后续释义与不善分等先前释义的和合,称为释义连接;就无依止心方面,是以清净等后续释义与善分等先前释义的和合,也称为释义连接。显示巴利原文
‘‘Nissitacittā kena niddesena niddisitabbā, anissitacittā kena niddesena niddisitabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘nissitacittā akusalapakkhena niddisitabbā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Akusalapakkhena niddesena niddisitabbā. Kusalapakkhenātiādīsupi esa nayo yojetabbo. Akusalapakkhasāmaññakusalapakkhasāmaññehi dassetvā akusalavisesakusalavisesehi dassetuṃ ‘‘nissitacittā saṃkilesenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ niddesasandhīti akusalapakkhādikassa purimaniddesassa saṃkilesādikena pacchimena niddesena nissitacittavasena ayaṃ saṃsandanā ca niddesasandhi nāma. Kusalapakkhādikassa purimassa niddesassa vodānādikena pacchimena niddesena anissitacittavasena ayaṃ saṃsandanā ca niddesasandhi nāmāti vibhajitvā veditabbā.
应当这样说:“四聚摄句所应分别的状态,既依词源、意图、因缘、前后连接的分类,也依义连接、文连接、释义连接、教说连接的分类,我们应如何了知、信受呢?”因此说“因此他说”等。此处,其意为:尊者大迦旃延以那样的应被分别的状态,说出“词源、意图”等语(《导论》第4摄句概要),以此语句,你们应了知、信受四聚摄句如此应被分别的状态。这是所说的意思。显示巴利原文
‘‘Catubyūhahārassa neruttamadhippāyanidānapubbāparasandhippabhedena ceva atthabyañjanasandhiniddesasandhidesanāsandhippabhedena ca vibhajitabbabhāvo kena amhehi jānitabbo saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbabhāvato ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tena tathā vibhajitabbabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno ‘‘neruttamadhippāyo’’tiādikaṃ (netti. 4 hārasaṅkhepa) yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena tumhehi catubyūhahārassa tathā vibhajitabbabhāvo jānitabbo saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
应当说:“至此,四聚摄句已圆满,更无其他所应结合者。”因此说“已结合四聚摄句”。此处应见其义:于任何巴利语中,凡是四类,其四聚摄句便随所得而结合;于该巴利语中,如此确定了那种四类四聚摄句后,便已结合、已运用。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettāvatā ca catubyūhahāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto catubyūho hāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yassaṃ yassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ yo yo catubbidho, so so catubyūhahāro ca yathālābhavasena yojito, tassaṃ tassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ so so catubbidho catubyūhahāro tathā niddhāretvā yutto yojitoti attho daṭṭhabbo.
然而,智者应依义注与复注,将甚深义理详细辨析而领受。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
7. 转摄句分别之阐明显示巴利原文
7. Āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
29 29. 以作为注释殊胜的四聚摄句分别,词源等已被分别……四聚摄句分别遂得圆满。因为当问“何为转摄句分别”,故说“其中,何为转摄句”等。其中,“其中”乃指于所列十六种教说摄句等之中,何者是注释殊胜的转摄句,即名转摄句分别——如此提问。现在,我将要说的“开始”等,作为对“于一立足处”等释义之广释殊胜,被执取为所谓转摄句分别。因为应当说:“于此教说摄句中,于一立足处——即教说安立处,寻求其余立足处;寻求已,如何转向其对立面?”所以——显示巴利原文
29. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena catubyūhahāravibhaṅgena neruttādayo vibhattā, so…pe… catubyūhahāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo āvaṭṭo hāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā tattha katamo āvaṭṭo hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso āvaṭṭo hāro āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Ekamhi padaṭṭhāne’’ntiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘ārambhathā’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti gahito. ‘‘Tattha desanāyaṃ ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne desanāruḷhe sesakaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesati, pariyesitvā kathaṃ paṭipakkhe āvaṭṭetī’’ti vattabbattā –
应着手!应出离!应精勤于佛陀的教法;
抖落死魔之军,如象摧毁苇屋。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ārambhatha nikkamatha, yuñjatha buddhasāsane; Dhunātha maccuno senaṃ, naḷāgāraṃva kuñjaro’’ti. –
此偈颂已说。在此偈颂中,于一个所缘处——即已开示之处,寻求其余的所缘处。然而,此偈颂的义理已于注释书(《导论注》29)中阐明。显示巴利原文
Gāthā vuttā. Idha gāthāyaṃ ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne desanāruḷhe sesakaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Gāthāttho pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 29) vutto.
在“应开始”等偈颂中,由于必须说明“在已开示的所缘中,何者是所缘?应探寻的其余所缘又是什么”,因此说“应开始、应出发是精进的所缘”等。其中,“精进的所缘”虽依通称而说,但应如此探寻:名为“发勤界”的精进,是名为“出离界”的精进的所缘;名为“出离界”的精进,是名为“勇猛界”的精进的所缘;名为“勇猛界”的精进,是与止修习相应的精进的所缘。“应专精”一语所说的与止修习相应的精进,是“于佛陀教法中”一语所说的广大定的所缘;已开示的乐等其余所缘亦应探寻。以“抖落死魔之军”一句所摄的与观相应的精进,是能断烦恼的慧的所缘;已开示的定等其余所缘亦应探寻。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ārambhathā’tiādigāthāyaṃ katarasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne desanāruḷhe katamaṃ sesakaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘ārambhatha nikkamathāti vīriyassa padaṭṭhāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘vīriyassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti sāmaññavasena vuttampi ārambhadhātusaṅkhātaṃ vīriyaṃ nikkamadhātusaṅkhātassa vīriyassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, nikkamadhātusaṅkhātaṃ vīriyaṃ parakkamadhātusaṅkhātassa vīriyassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, parakkamadhātusaṅkhātaṃ vīriyaṃ samathabhāvanāsahitassa vīriyassa padaṭṭhānantiādinā pariyesitabbanti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Yuñjathā’’ti iminā vuttaṃ samathabhāvanāsahitaṃ vīriyaṃ ‘‘buddhasāsane’’ti iminā vuttassa mahaggatasamādhissa padaṭṭhānaṃ, desanāruḷhaṃ sukhādikaṃ sesakampi padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesitabbaṃ. ‘‘Dhunātha maccuno sena’’nti padena gahitaṃ vipassanāsahitaṃ vīriyaṃ kilesadhunane samatthāya paññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, desanāruḷhaṃ samādhiādikaṃ sesakampi padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesitabbaṃ.
如果说“开始吧”等所提及的精进,仅仅是共通精进、定与慧的所缘,若是如此,又如何能断除轮回之根而证得还灭呢?因此才有了之后“开始吧、前进吧,是精进根的所缘”等说法。因为即使与增上作用相应,它也是以精进为主的所缘,所以说开始修行的瑜伽行者能够断除轮回之根而证得还灭。然而,考虑到“开始吧”等是对于精进发勤事等的教示,有人或许会将发勤事等本身解释为所缘;在想到这样的责难后,便说道“这些所缘就是教示”。“开始吧”等乃是如前所述的所缘的教示,并非精进发勤事等,因此应视为只是解释了所缘。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yadi ‘ārambhathā’tiādikaṃ vuttaṃ vīriyaṃ sāmaññabhūtānaṃ vīriyasamādhipaññānaṃyeva padaṭṭhānaṃ siyā, evaṃ sati kathaṃ vaṭṭamūlaṃ chinditvā vivaṭṭaṃ pāpessantī’’ti vattabbattā puna ‘‘ārambhatha nikkamathāti vīriyindriyassa padaṭṭhāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Ādhipaccakiccatāya yuttassāpi vīriyādhikassa padaṭṭhānattā ārabhantā yogāvacarapuggalā vaṭṭamūlaṃ chinditvā vivaṭṭaṃ pāpentīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Ārambhathā’’tiādikā pana yasmā vīriyārambhavatthuādidesanā hoti, tasmā ārambhavatthuādīniyeva saṃvaṇṇitāni padaṭṭhānanti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘imāni padaṭṭhānāni desanā’’ti. ‘‘Ārambhathā’’tiādikā yathāvuttapadaṭṭhānāni desanā hoti, na vīriyārambhavatthuādīni, tasmā padaṭṭhānaṃyeva saṃvaṇṇitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
如此,已经依所缘解释了“开始吧”等教示的意义,我们也已经了知。由于接下来应阐明“如何依此教示的对治面来解释意义”,于是便有了“或者,对于那些未致力于修习者……”等说法。这其中,对于那些在修行中尚未致力于修习、智慧尚未成熟的众生,为了使他们在未来能够了知,便随顺他们与修习之因相关的习行分,发起了“开始吧”等教示。而对于那些已经致力于修习、智慧已经成熟的众生,为了使他们能在现法遍知发勤的因,“开始吧”等教示也被发起。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ‘‘ārambhathā’’tiādidesanāya padaṭṭhānavasena attho vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ tassāyeva desanāya paṭipakkhavasena attho vibhajitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘ayuñjantānaṃ vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yoge bhāvanāyaṃ ayuñjantānaṃ sattānaṃ aparipakkañāṇānaṃ yoge yogahetu vāsanābhāgiyavasena āyatiṃ jānanatthāya ‘‘ārambhathā’’tiādidesanā āraddhā. Yuñjantānaṃ paripakkañāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ ārambhe ārambhahetu diṭṭheva dhamme parijānanatthāya ‘‘ārambhathā’’tiādidesanā āraddhā.
这其中,在那些已致力于修习和未致力于修习、智慧成熟和未成熟的众生当中,那些智慧未成熟、尚未致力于修习的众生,是以放逸为根本,在修行中由于放逸而不致力于道业。此放逸有两种:以渴爱为根本的放逸,和以无明为根本的放逸。在这两种放逸中,被无知遮蔽的、以无明为根本的这一类众生,由于无知的放逸,不能了知所应了知的处所,也就是“这些具有生灭法的五蕴,即是所应知处”。这种没有因由的放逸,便称为以无明为根本的放逸。以渴爱为根本的放逸则有三种:为了生起尚未生起的财富而寻求的渴爱众生,所陷入的放逸是一种;为了守护已生起的财富而加以保护的渴爱众生,以守护为因所陷入的放逸是第二种;受用现有财富的渴爱众生,以受用为因所陷入的放逸是第三种。如此,在这世间,此放逸共有四种:一种以无明为近因的放逸,以及三种以渴爱为近因的放逸。这其中,在无明与渴爱两者中,名身——也就是触等名法的集合——是无明的近因;色身——也就是地等色法的集合——是渴爱的近因。这便是说:应当确定,名为发勤界、出离界的精进,其所要对治的便是这四种放逸;确定之后可知,一种放逸以无明为近因,三种放逸以渴爱为近因。其中,无明以名身为近因,渴爱以色身为近因。显示巴利原文
Tattha tesu yuñjantāyuñjantesu paripakkāparipakkañāṇesu ye aparipakkañāṇā sattā na yuñjanti, te aparipakkañāṇā sattā pamādamūlakā hutvā yoge bhāvanāyaṃ yena pamādena na yuñjanti, so pamādo taṇhāmūlako pamādo, avijjāmūlako pamādoti dubbidho hoti. Tattha tasmiṃ dubbidhe pamāde aññāṇena nivuto avijjāmūlako satto yena pamādena ñeyyaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘ime uppādavayadhammā pañcakkhandhā ñeyyaṭṭhānaṃ nāmā’’ti nappajānāti, ayaṃ aññāṇahetuko pamādo avijjāmūlako pamādā nāma. Yo pamādo taṇhāmūlako, so pamādo tividho anuppannānaṃ bhogānaṃ uppādāya pariyesanto taṇhiko satto yaṃ pamādaṃ āpajjati, ayaṃ pamādo ca, uppannānaṃ bhogānaṃ ṭhitatthāya rakkhanto taṇhiko satto ārakkhanimittaṃ yaṃ pamādaṃ āpajjati, ayaṃ pamādo ca, ṭhitaṃ bhogaṃ paribhuñjanto taṇhiko satto paribhoganimittaṃ yaṃ pamādaṃ āpajjati, ayaṃ pamādo cāti tividho hoti. Iti loke ayaṃ pamādo catubbidho avijjāpadaṭṭhāno ekavidho pamādo, taṇhāpadaṭṭhāno tividho pamādoti catubbidho hoti. Tattha tāsu avijjātaṇhāsu nāmakāyo phassādināmasamūho avijjāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, rūpakāyo pathavīādirūpasamūho taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ārambhadhātunikkamadhātusaṅkhātassa vīriyassa paṭipakkho catubbidho pamādo niddhāretabbo, niddhāretvā ekavidhassa pamādassa avijjā padaṭṭhānaṃ, tividhassa pamādassa taṇhā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Avijjāya nāmakāyo padaṭṭhānaṃ, taṇhāya rūpakāyo padaṭṭhānanti paṭipakkhe āvaṭṭetvā padaṭṭhānaṃ pariyesitabbanti.
为解答“为何名身成为无明的近因,色身成为渴爱的近因”这一问题,先问“此为何故”,随后说明:“于有色生存中为执著,于无色生存中为迷惑。”因为在有色生存里,即对于色法,众生以我、我所等方式生起执著和渴爱的偏执,故而安立:色身为渴爱的近因。又于无始轮回中,男与女实以彼此之色为乐。因为在无色法(如触等)中,由于其微细性,众生常陷于迷惑,所以安立:名身为无明的近因。应当如此融会贯通——这就是说:由于渴爱与无明以色身和名身为所缘而生起,因此可得出:色身是渴爱的近因,名身是无明的近因。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kasmā nāmakāyo avijjāya padaṭṭhānaṃ bhavati, rūpakāyo taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ bhavatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘taṃ kissa hetū’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘rūpīsu bhavesu ajjhosānaṃ, arūpīsu sammoho’’ti vuttaṃ. Rūpīsu bhavesu rūpadhammesu ahaṃmamādivasena ajjhosānaṃ taṇhābhiniveso sattesu patiṭṭhito yasmā hoti, tasmā rūpakāyo taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ bhavati. Anamatagge hi saṃsāre itthipurisā aññamaññarūpābhirāmā bhavanti. Arūpīsu phassādīsu sukhumabhāvato sammoho sattesu patiṭṭhito yasmā hoti, tasmā nāmakāyo avijjāya padaṭṭhānaṃ bhavatīti yojanā kātabbā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – rūpakāyanāmakāyesu ārammaṇakaraṇavasena taṇhāya ca avijjāya ca uppajjanato rūpakāyo taṇhāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, nāmakāyo avijjāya padaṭṭhānanti nīharitabbāvāti.
当被问及“什么是色身,什么是名身”时,便说:“于此,色身即是色蕴,名身即是四无色蕴。”其中的意思是:在色身和名身这两者中,色身是色的聚集,称为色蕴;名身是名的聚集,称为四无色蕴。这五蕴以无明和渴爱为所缘,故成为有取(有所执取)。又当被问“这些五蕴以何种取而成为有取”时,为解答此问,同样说道:“这些五蕴以何种取为有取?以渴爱与无明。”应如此贯通理趣:这些五蕴,依止于作为取的渴爱与作为取的无明,故名为“有取五蕴”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamo rūpakāyo, katamo nāmakāyo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha rūpakāyo rūpakkhandho, nāmakāyo cattāro arūpino khandhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu rūpakāyanāmakāyesu rūpakāyo rūpasamūho nāma rūpakkhandho hoti, nāmakāyo nāmasamūho nāma cattāro arūpino khandhāti. Ime pañcakkhandhā avijjātaṇhānaṃ ārammaṇattā saupādānā bhaveyyuṃ, ‘‘katamena upādānena saupādānā bhavantī’’ti pucchitabbattā tatheva pucchitvā vissajjetuṃ ‘‘ime pañcakkhandhā katamena upādānena saupādānā? Taṇhāya ca avijjāya cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha upādānabhūtāya taṇhāya ca upādānabhūtāya avijjāya ca ime pañcakkhandhā saupādānā nāma bhavantīti yojanā kātabbā.
当被问及“几种取称作渴爱,几种取称作无明”时,便说:“其中,渴爱护有二”等。“其中”,指在渴爱与无明两者之中。欲取与戒禁取这两种取,称为渴爱。因为依于渴爱,才会生起“我的戒、我的禁行”这样的执取。见取与我有身见取(我见取)这两种取,称为无明。因为依于无明,才会生起常见以及“我、我所”等见。当被问及“依此四取,有取五蕴在四谛中摄于几谛”时,于是说:“以此”等。凡是世间五蕴,即是有取蕴;而取本身也是被执取的对象,所以此有取五蕴即是苦,名为苦谛。四取作为苦的生因,这四支取便是集,名为集谛。“五蕴”即是有取五蕴,因为是苦的基处,所以是苦。“于彼(tesanti)”,意即于那些有取五蕴之中。“说法”,即世尊为了随顺所化弟子而宣说“起始”等的法。虽然之前已作略说,但为显示义理的差别,再次开示:“为了遍知苦,为了断除集。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Kittakāni upādānāni taṇhā nāma bhavanti, kittakāni upādānāni avijjā nāma bhavantī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha taṇhā dve’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tāsu taṇhāavijjāsu. Kāmupādānañca sīlabbatupādānañca dve upādānāni taṇhā nāma bhavanti. Taṇhāvasena hi ‘‘mama sīlaṃ, mama vata’’nti parāmasanaṃ bhavati. Diṭṭhupādānañca attavādupādānañca dve upādānāni avijjā nāma bhavanti. Avijjāvasena hi sassatadiṭṭhi ceva ahaṃmamādidiṭṭhi ca bhavanti. ‘‘Imehi catūhi upādānehi saupādānakkhandhā catūsu saccesu kittakaṃ saccaṃ nāmā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘imehī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ye lokiyakkhandhā saupādānā khandhā bhavanti, upādānena hi upādānānipi bhavanti, idaṃ saupādānakkhandhapañcakaṃ dukkhaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ nāma. Yāni cattāri upādānāni dukkhakāraṇāni bhavanti, ayaṃ upādānacatukko samudayo samudayasaccaṃ nāma bhavati. Pañcakkhandhāti saupādānā pañcakkhandhā dukkhavatthubhāvato dukkhaṃ. Tesanti saupādānānaṃ pañcakkhandhānaṃ. Dhammaṃ desetīti ‘‘ārambhathā’’tiādikaṃ dhammaṃ veneyyānurūpaṃ bhagavā deseti. Sāmaññena pubbe vuttampi atthavasena visesaṃ dassetuṃ puna ‘‘dukkhassa pariññāya, samudayassa pahānāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
30 作为放逸之对治,前二谛已由阿阇梨阐明,我们也已了知。然而,由于还应说明“后二谛应如何阐明”,为了开显后二谛同样可依放逸之门来阐明,故说“其中,那三类”等语。此处,“其中”是指那些以渴爱为根、以无明为根的放逸。“它的”,即那以渴爱为根的三类放逸。“通达”,是对味等的遍知。“守护”,即是守护自心。“收摄”,是指对所谓“它的”所指的放逸,以其对立面——不放逸的勤行——来加以收摄、予以断除。这种藉由不放逸勤行而起的断除,即名为修习,亦名为止。如此,通过放逸的对治,再转向而阐明了止。显示巴利原文
30. Ārambhapaṭipakkhabhūtapamādavasena purimasaccadvayaṃ ācariyena niddhāritaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘itarasaccadvayaṃ kathaṃ niddhāritabba’’nti vattabbattā taṃ dvayampi pamādamukheneva niddhāritabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha yo tividho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu taṇhāmūlakaavijjāmūlakesu pamādesu. Tassāti tividhassa taṇhāmūlakassa pamādassa. Sampaṭivedhenāti assādādīnaṃ parijānanena. Rakkhaṇāti attacittassa rakkhaṇasaṅkhātā. Paṭisaṃharaṇāti ‘‘tassā’’ti iminā vuttassa pamādassa paṭipakkhabhūtena appamādānanuyogena saṃharaṇā yā khepanā atthi, ayaṃ pamādassa paṭipakkhabhūtena appamādānuyogena pavattā khepanasaṅkhātā bhāvanā samatho nāmāti pamādassa paṭipakkhamukhena puna āvaṭṭetvā samatho niddhāritoti.
由于应当被问:“彼止是如何、以何方便而生起的?”如此问后,为了开示其方便,便说“它如何”等语。此处,“如何”是指以何方便。如所说“欲求故为欲,或所欲乐故为欲”,对于依此二种欲而生起的味,以及依“诸欲少味而多苦”等教说而了知的诸欲之患——在此“于欲”一词中,乃是业格的具格义,故说“依止于欲”。依“此是诸欲的出离,即出离”之语,此处的“出离”意指初禅。在“vokāraṃ”一词中,va是插入音,o音表劣性。“利益”,是指四遍净戒等。当它了知这些时,彼止便藉由该方便而生起,这是它的意思。显示巴利原文
‘‘So samatho kathaṃ kena upāyena bhavatī’’ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā upāyaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘so katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kathanti kena upāyena. ‘‘Kāmentīti kāmā, kāmīyantīti vā kāmā’’ti vuttānaṃ dvinnaṃ kāmānaṃ paṭicca uppajjamānaṃ assādañca, ‘‘appassādā kāmā bahudukkhā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.235) vacanato appassādanīyānaṃ kāmānaṃ paṭicca uppajjamānaṃ ādīnavañca. Kāmānanti ca kammatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ –‘‘kāme paṭiccā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 30). ‘‘Kāmānametaṃ nissaraṇaṃ, yadidaṃ nekkhamma’’nti (itivu. 72) vacanato nissaraṇanti idha paṭhamajjhānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Vokāranti ettha va-kāro āgamo, o-kāraṃ lāmakabhāvaṃ. Ānisaṃsanti catupārisuddhisīlādikaṃ. Yadā jānāti, tadā tena upāyena samatho bhavatīti attho.
止已由阿阇梨分别,我们也已了知。然而,由于应当问“什么是观?”为了分别观,故说“其中,那审查”等语。或者可以说:前文已说,当了知诸欲之味等时,止便生起;由于还应问:“当彼止生起时,什么是观?”故说“其中,那审查”等语。此处,“其中”是指当彼止生起时,对于味等,有无常等之审查、伺察与慧生起,此审查、伺察与慧,以殊胜之见故,名为观。又或者,对以渴爱为根的三类放逸之通达、守护与收摄,此即是止,由阿阇梨所说;由于应当问“什么是观?”故说“其中,那审查”等语。此处,“其中”是指当有如上所说之止时,对于如上所说之放逸,依无常等所生起的审查、伺察与慧,此审查、伺察与慧,以殊胜之见故,名为观。其差别在于:审查较弱,而伺察更为有力。显示巴利原文
Samatho ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘katamā vipassanā’’ti pucchitabbattā vipassanaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha yā vīmaṃsā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā kāmānaṃ assādādayo yadā jānāti, tadā samatho bhavatīti vutto, ‘‘tasmiṃ samathe bhavamāne sati katamā bhavatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yā vīmaṃsā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ samathe bhavamāne sati assādādīnaṃ yā aniccādivīmaṃsā upaparikkhā paññā bhavati, ayaṃ vīmaṃsā upaparikkhā paññā visesena passanato vipassanā nāma. Atha vā tividhassa taṇhāmūlakassa pamādassa sampaṭivedhena rakkhaṇā paṭisaṃharaṇā, ayaṃ samathoti ācariyena vutto, ‘‘katamā vipassanā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yā vīmaṃsā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ yathāvutte samathe sati yathāvuttassa pamādassa aniccādivasena yā vīmaṃsā upaparikkhā paññā uppannā, ayaṃ vīmaṃsā upaparikkhā paññā visesena passanato vipassanā nāma. Vīmaṃsāva dubbalā, upaparikkhā balavatīti viseso.
止与观二法由阿阇梨所确定。由于应说明“这已确定的二法趣向什么”,故说“这二”等。止趣向止修习的圆满,观趣向观修习的圆满。由于应说明“修习这二法时,瑜伽行者断除什么”,故说“于此”等。修习止时,瑜伽行者断除渴爱;修习观时,瑜伽行者断除无明。如是,这二种应断的法——渴爱与无明——得以断除。由于应问“这二法被断除时,哪些法灭尽”,故说“于此二法被断除时”等,以显示取等亦灭尽,亦即显示整个轮转苦的灭尽。其中,当渴爱由止修习被断除、无明由观修习被断除时,在这二法由二种修习被断除时,欲取等四取以镇伏与正断的方式灭尽,而非以刹那坏灭的方式灭尽。显示巴利原文
Samatho ceva vipassanā ca dve dhammā ācariyena niddhāritā, ‘‘ime niddhāritā dve dhammā kiṃ gacchantī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘ime dve’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Samatho samathabhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchati, vipassanā vipassanābhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchati. ‘‘Imesu dvīsu dhammesu bhāviyamānesu katame yogāvacarena pahīyantī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘imesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Samathe dhamme bhāviyamāne taṇhā yogāvacarena pahīyati, vipassanāya bhāviyamānāya avijjā yogāvacarena pahīyatīti ime dve pahātabbā dhammā pahīyanti taṇhā ceva avijjā ca. ‘‘Imesu dvīsu dhammesu pahīyamānesu katame dhammā nirujjhantī’’ti pucchitabbattā upādānādayopi nirujjhantīti sakalavaṭṭadukkhanirodhaṃ dassento ‘‘imesu dvīsu dhammesu pahīnesū’’tiādimāha. Tattha taṇhāya samathabhāvanāya pahīyamānāya, avijjāya vipassanābhāvanāya pahīyamānāya imesu dvīsu dhammesu dvīhi bhāvanāhi pahīnesu kāmupādānādīni cattāri upādānāni vikkhambhanasamucchedavasena nirujjhanti, na bhaṅgakkhaṇavasena.
于此,有人问:“既然说‘渴爱灭故取灭’,说‘渴爱被断除时诸取灭尽’是合理的,但无明被断除时,诸取如何灭尽呢?”因为在“渴爱灭故取灭”的文句中,应理解为伴随无明的渴爱灭,故取灭,此义成立。正如伴随渴爱的无明是诸行的缘,同样,伴随无明的渴爱是诸取的缘。因此,应理解为:伴随无明的渴爱灭尽,故取灭尽,这一含义得以成立。以镇伏与正断的方式,取灭故有灭,此理于其余诸支亦同。如是,整个苦蕴的灭尽,于此也应视为已包含了伴随渴爱的无明灭故行灭等。如此,以异分与同分的方式回转,确定了前二谛;而止与观这二法正是道、道谛,轮转的灭尽即是灭谛、涅槃。这样,四谛便得以确定。显示巴利原文
Etthāha – ‘‘taṇhānirodhā upādānanirodho’’ti vuttattā ‘‘taṇhāya pahīyamānāya upādānāni nirujjhantī’’ti vacanaṃ yuttaṃ hotu, kathaṃ avijjāya pahīyamānāya upādānāni nirujjhantīti? ‘‘Taṇhānirodhā upādānanirodho’’ti pāṭhe avijjāsahitataṇhānirodhā upādānanirodhoti atthasambhavato. Yathā hi taṇhāsahitāva avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo, evaṃ avijjāsahitāva taṇhā upādānānaṃ paccayo hotīti avijjāsahitataṇhānirodhā upādānanirodhoti attho sambhavatīti gahetabbo. Vikkhambhanasamucchedavasena upādānanirodhā tatheva bhavanirodhoti esa nayo sesesupi. Evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodhoti etthāpi taṇhāsahitaavijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodhotiādiko gahitoti daṭṭhabbo. Itīti evaṃ visabhāgasabhāgadhammānaṃ āvaṭṭanavasena niddhāritāni ca purimakāni dve saccāni ca, samatho ca vipassanā ca ime dve dhammā maggo ca maggasaccañca, vaṭṭanirodho vaṭṭanirodhasaccañca nibbānanti cattāri saccāni niddhāritāni.
由于有人会说:“以精进的对立法——放逸等法,或以同分的放逸等法回转,来确定四谛的道理,我们凭什么相信?”所以才有“因此说”等文。因此,世尊依那应被确定的道理,宣说了“应发勤,应出离”等偈颂;也就是说,“应发勤,应出离”等偈颂表明:四谛应被确定的道理,你们应当信受。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vīriyapaṭipakkhabhūtassa pamādādidhammassa vasena vā sabhāgabhūtassa pamādādidhammassa vasena vā āvaṭṭetvā catunnaṃ saccānaṃ niddhāritabbabhāvo amhehi kena saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena tathā niddhāritabbabhāvena bhagavā ‘‘ārambhatha nikkamathā’’tiādigāthāvacanaṃ āha, tena ‘‘ārambhatha nikkamathā’’tiādigāthāvacanena tathā catunnaṃ saccānaṃ niddhāritabbabhāvo tumhehi saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
为了回答“以‘应发勤,应出离’等仅安立清净分,唯以该清净分的异分法与同分法回转而作四谛确定,应如何作”这一问题,而说“如于根”等偈颂,显示也安立杂染分,唯以该杂染分的异分法与同分法回转而作四谛确定。然而在义注中——显示巴利原文
‘‘Ārambhatha nikkamathā’tiādinā vodānapakkhaṃyeva nikkhipitvā tasseva vodānapakkhassa visabhāgadhammasabhāgadhammavaseneva āvaṭṭetvā catusaccaniddhāraṇaṃ kātabba’’nti pucchitabbattā saṃkilesapakkhampi nikkhipitvā tasseva saṃkilesassa visabhāgadhammasabhāgadhammavasenapi āvaṭṭetvā catusaccaniddhāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘yathāpi mūle’’tiādigāthāvacanamāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
“这样,安立了清净分,并显示了以它的异分法与同分法进行回转之后,现在为了安立杂染分,也显示以它的异分法与同分法进行回转,而说‘如于根’偈。”(《导论义注》30)——显示巴利原文
‘‘Evaṃ vodānapakkhaṃ nikkhipitvā tassa visabhāgadhammavasena, sabhāgadhammavasena ca āvaṭṭanaṃ dassetvā idāni saṃkilesapakkhaṃ nikkhipitvā tassa visabhāgadhammavasena, sabhāgadhammavasena ca āvaṭṭanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘yathāpi mūle’ti gāthamāhā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 30) –
如上所说。偈颂的含义也在义注中作了说明。即便如此,为了诸位修行者的利益,仍将依照义注来解说。显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ. Gāthātthopi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutto. Tathāpi yatipotānaṃ atthāya aṭṭhakathānusāreneva kathayissāma.
“集合”即树,以根而住立,以此部分立于地面,故称为“根”。那是什么呢?那是立于地面、名为根的树的部分。对于这个根来说,无有危害——即无斧砍等障碍,故为“无危害”。由于无危害,其自性坚固时,便称为“坚固”。被砍断者,称为“已断”。那是什么?是立于地、带根的树的部分,而非被砍下后拿取的部分。因为生长、增长,故称为“树”。而那个立于地、带根的树的部分,也称作“树”,如同说“见海”。再次生长,是就再生芽而言。于渴爱随眠——即名为自身的树根中,若未被拔除,也就是未被阿罗汉道智断除时,此名为自身的苦,便以苦为因,一再无间地生起,绝不灭尽。这就是偈颂的义理。显示巴利原文
Samūho rukkho mūlati patiṭṭhāti etena avayavena bhūmibhāge ṭhitenāti mūlaṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Bhūmibhāge ṭhito mūlasaṅkhāto rukkhāvayavo, tasmiṃ mūle. Natthi upaddavo pharasuchedādiantarāyo assa mūlassāti anupaddavo. Daḷheti upaddavābhāvena sabhāvato thire sati. Chindīyatīti chinno, ko so? Bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhitamūlasahito rukkhāvayavo, na chinditvā gahito rukkhāvayavo. Ruhati vaḍḍhatīti rukkho. So ca bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhitamūlasahito rukkhāvayavo rukkhoti vutto yathā ‘‘samuddo diṭṭho’’ti. Punareva rūhatīti puna aṅkuruppādanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Taṇhānusayeti attabhāvasaṅkhātassa rukkhassa mūle. Anūhateti arahattamaggañāṇena anupacchinne sati idaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ dukkhaṃ dukkhahetu punappunaṃ abbocchinnaṃ nibbattati na nirujjhatiyevāti gāthāttho.
问:“在此偈中,所说的以未被拔除的状态而成为苦生起之根的渴爱随眠,此渴爱随眠是哪一种渴爱的随眠呢?”答:“由于渴爱有欲渴爱等多种,所以它是有渴爱的随眠。”因为并不存在有乐味渴爱。作为有渴爱这一法的缘的随眠,即是无明随眠。若问:“随眠有多种,为何应信为无明随眠?”则应答:“因为以无明为缘而有了有渴爱。”由于无明是有渴爱的缘,故应信为无明随眠。因为以无明不见诸有中的过患,所以才有有乐味渴爱。对于此二烦恼等,应依前文所说之理,在确定四谛之后,了知异分与同分法的回转,而止观则应取用与道相应者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idha gāthāyaṃ yo taṇhānusayo anūhatabhāvena dukkhassa nibbattanassa mūlanti vutto, ayaṃ taṇhānusayo katamassā taṇhāya anusayo’’ti pucchati, ‘‘taṇhāya kāmataṇhādivasena bahuvidhattā bhavataṇhāya anusayo’’ti vissajjeti bhavassādataṇhābhāvato. Yo anusayo etassa bhavataṇhāsaṅkhātassa dhammassa paccayo hoti, ayaṃ anusayo avijjānusayo hoti. ‘‘Anusayo bahuvidho, kasmā avijjānusayoti saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘avijjāpaccayā hi bhavataṇhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Avijjāya bhavataṇhāya paccayattā avijjānusayo saddahitabbo. Avijjāya hi bhavesu ādīnavassa adassanavasena bhavassādataṇhā bhavatīti. Ime dve kilesātiādimhi heṭṭhā vuttanayānusārena cattāri saccāni niddhāretvā visabhāgasabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanaṃ viññātabbaṃ, samathavipassanā pana maggasampayuttāva gahetabbā.
“一切恶”等的衔接义理,在《指导论注》第30节中已说明。“一切恶”是指已达业道状态的一切不善。“不作”是指在自他相续中不令它生起。“善”是指已达业道状态的三地善及出世间善。“具足”是指以在相续中生起的方式而成就。“自心”即自己的心,令自心清净、洁白,以证得阿罗汉果,故称“自心清净”。而阿罗汉道的生起,已被“善的具足”一词所涵盖。这里阐明了不作等三事,是诸佛、正自觉者的教法、教诫,这就是偈颂的义理。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbapāpassā’’tiādikassa anusandhyattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 30) vutto. Sabbapāpassāti kammapathabhāvappattāpattassa niravasesassa akusalassa. Akaraṇanti saparasantānesu anuppādanaṃ . Kusalassāti kammapathabhāvappattāpattassa tebhūmakakusalassa ceva lokuttarakusalassa ca. Upasampadāti santāne uppādanavasena sampadā. Sassa attano cittanti sacittaṃ, sacittassa pariyodāpanaṃ vodānaṃ arahattaphaluppattiyāti sacittapariyodāpanaṃ. Arahattamagguppādo pana ‘‘kusalassa upasampadā’’ti padena gahito. Etaṃ akaraṇādittayadīpanaṃ buddhānaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ ovādoti gāthāttho.
此偈颂所说的“不作诸恶”,为依恶行业道分别彼恶,故说“名为一切恶”等。“嗔所等起”是就多数情况而言,也有贪所等起的情形。“贪所等起”也是就多数情况而言,也有嗔所等起的情形。“痴所等起”同样如此说。应知贪所等起与嗔所等起也会同时发生。一切恶已依恶行业道的分类而分别,因应问“仅以此分别,还是以其他分别”,故又以其他方式,即依不善根、恶趣行的分类而分别,而说“凡有贪求”等。然而在注疏中,衔接义是这样说的:“如此依恶行、不善业道、业的分类,分别了‘一切恶’中所说的恶之后,现在为显示其依不善根的恶趣行分类,而说‘不善根’等。”(《指导论注》第30节)因愚痴而对自性无所知者,有怖畏生起,故由怖畏与愚痴而走向恶趣,这称为“痴所等起”。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ yassa pāpassa akaraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ pāpaṃ duccaritakammapathavasena vibhajituṃ ‘‘sabbapāpaṃ nāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dosasamuṭṭhānanti yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ, lobhasamuṭṭhānampi bhavati. Lobhasamuṭṭhānantipi yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ, dosasamuṭṭhānampi bhavati. Mohasamuṭṭhānampi tatheva vuttaṃ. Lobhasamuṭṭhānadosasamuṭṭhānampi sambhavatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sabbapāpo duccaritakammapathappabhedena vibhatto, ‘‘ettakeneva vibhajitabbo, udāhu aññena vibhajitabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā aññena akusalamūlaagatigamanabhedenapi vibhajituṃ ‘‘yā abhijjhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ duccaritaakusalakammapathakammavibhāgena ‘sabbapāpa’nti ettha vuttapāpaṃ vibhajitvā idānissa akusalamūlavasena agatigamanavibhāgampi dassetuṃ ‘akusalamūla’ntiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 30) anusandhyattho vutto. Mohavasena sabhāvaṃ ajānantassa bhayasambhavato yaṃ bhayā ca mohā ca agatiṃ gacchati, idaṃ mohasamuṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ.
一切恶已由阿阇梨分别,我们也已了知。因应问“什么是一切恶的不作”,对此而说“于此,贪以不净……”等。而在注疏中——显示巴利原文
Sabbapāpo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘katamaṃ sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’nti pucchitabbattā tattha lobho asubhāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
“至此,显示了‘一切恶的不作’中的恶之后,现在为显示其不作,而说‘贪……乃至……以慧’,即以三善根,通过断除三不善根的方式,说明一切恶的不作、不令生起。”(《指导论注》第30节)——已说。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettāvatā ‘sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’nti ettha pāpaṃ dassetvā idāni tassa akaraṇaṃ dassento ‘lobho…pe… paññāyā’ti tīhi kusalamūlehi tiṇṇaṃ akusalamūlānaṃ pahānavasena sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ anuppādanamāhā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 30) –
因执取净相而现起的贪,可由不净与不净修习中所转起的无贪,以彼分断与镇伏断而断除;以对有情忿怒与损害而现起的嗔,可由慈与慈心修习中所转起的无嗔,以彼分断与镇伏断而断除;以对有情及诸行迷惑而现起的痴,可由慧、审察慧与修道慧,以彼分断、镇伏断与正断而断除。显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ. Subhādhimuttavasena pavatto lobho asubhāya asubhabhāvanāya tathāpavattena alobhena tadaṅgavikkhambhanappahānena pahīyati, sattesu kujjhanadussanavasena pavatto doso mettāya mettābhāvanāya tathāpavattena adosena ca tadaṅgavikkhambhanappahānena pahīyati, sattesu ceva saṅkhāresu ca muyhanavasena pavatto moho paññāya vicāraṇapaññāya ca bhāvanāmaggapaññāya ca tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedappahānena pahīyati.
由于可能有人会问:“如果仅凭三善根便能断除不善根,那舍、悲、喜岂不是成了无用?”所以才说“同样,贪以舍……”等。这里“以舍”是指以“一切有情皆是业之所有者”等方式所修习的舍。而喜在平息了不乐之后,也断除了以不乐为根本的痴,正是基于此意趣,才说“痴以喜而断除、走向灭尽”。又因有人会问:“应以善根等断除不善根,我们凭什么要信受?”所以才说了“因此说”等。由此可见,世尊正是以这种应当断除的方式,说出“一切恶的不作”这句法语;以此“一切恶的不作”之语,意在说明:你们应当信受如此应断除的道理。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yadi tīhi kusalamūleheva akusalamūlāni pahīyanti, evaṃ sati upekkhākaruṇāmuditā niratthakā bhaveyyu’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘tathā lobho upekkhāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Upekkhāyāti ‘‘sabbe sattā kammassakā’’tiādinā bhāvitāya upekkhāya. Muditā aratiṃ vūpasametvā aratiyā mūlabhūtaṃ mohampi pajahatīti manasi katvā ‘‘moho muditāya pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Akusalamūlānaṃ kusalamūlādīhi pahātabbattaṃ kena amhehi saddahitabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena tathā pahātabbattena bhagavā ‘‘sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’nti vacanaṃ āha, tena ‘‘sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’nti vacanena tathā pahātabbattaṃ tumhehi saddahitabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
31 31. 由于可能有人会说:“至此,一切恶已经作了分别,那么‘不作一切恶’也应已作分别;如果是这样,那八邪的不作岂不是未被遮止了吗?”因此才说“名为一切恶者,即是八邪”等。所谓邪念,是指于无常等中执取“常”等,以随念、思惟等方式现起的不善法。显示巴利原文
31. ‘‘Ettāvatā ca sabbapāpo vibhatto, tassa akaraṇañca vibhattaṃ siyā, evaṃ sati aṭṭhamicchattānaṃ akaraṇaṃ anivāritaṃ siyā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘sabbapāpaṃ nāma aṭṭha micchattānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Micchāsatīti aniccādīsu ‘‘nicca’’nti anussaraṇacintanādivasena pavattaakusalappavatti.
诸恶莫作已被阿阇梨以种种方式分别解说,我们也已了知。由于应说‘如何分别、了知善的具足’,故为显示善的具足而分别解说‘当八邪已断除时’等。八正道即正见、正思惟、正语、正业、正命、正精进、正念、正定;此八正道以对治异品法的转化方式而成就。‘过去的’是指由过去正自觉者所宣说的。这巴帝摩卡教诫偈乃是毗婆尸世尊的。当心清净时,与心相应的五蕴也得清净。因有人会问:‘凭何我们应信受心清净则五蕴清净?’所以世尊说‘确实如是’等。依上述方式,世尊宣说了‘诸比丘,为心清净故,梵行住于如来处’之语,以此‘心……住……’之语,意示你们应当信受。若问:‘清净有几种?’因此说‘有两种’等。以止观断除诸盖,以圣道修习拔除随眠,由于清净有此两种,所以五蕴得以清净,这是其义理。因为已断除盖与随眠的人,具有令人净信之色。显示巴利原文
Sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ bahudhā ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca viññātaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ kusalassa sampadā vibhajitabbā viññātabbā’’ti vattabbattā kusalassa sampadaṃ vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘aṭṭhasu micchattesu pahīnesū’’tiādimāha. Aṭṭha sammattānīti sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā sammākammanto sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati sammāsamādhīti aṭṭhasammattāni visabhāgaparivattanadhammavasena sampajjanti. Atītassāti atītena sammāsambuddhena desitassa. Vipassino hi bhagavato ayaṃ pātimokkhuddesagāthā. Citte pariyodāpiteti cittapaṭibaddhā pañcakkhandhāpi pariyodāpitā bhavanti. ‘‘Cittapariyodāpitena pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ pariyodāpitabhāvo kathaṃ amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘evañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vuttappakārena bhagavā yaṃ ‘‘cetovisuddhatthaṃ bhikkhave tathāgate brahmacariyaṃ vussatī’’ti vacanaṃ āha, tena ‘‘ceto…pe… vussatī’’ti vacanena tumhehi saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Pariyodāpanā katividhā bhavantī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘duvidhā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Samathavipassanāya nīvaraṇappahānañca ariyamaggabhāvanāya anusayasamugghāto cāti pariyodāpanassa duvidhattā pañcakkhandhā pariyodāpitā bhavantīti attho. Pahīnanīvaraṇānusayā hi puggalā pasādanīyavaṇṇā honti.
若问:‘清净地有多少种?’因此说了‘两种清净地’等。若问:‘在《诸恶莫作》等偈颂所开示的诸法中,什么是苦谛,什么是集谛,什么是道谛,什么是灭谛?’因此说了‘其中,由证得……’等。其中,是指在偈颂所开示的诸法中,由证得、由遍知现观而清净的五蕴——这五蕴即是苦,是苦谛。由那渴爱的染污,五蕴得以清净——这渴爱的染污即是集,是集谛。由那圣道支而清净——这圣道即是道,是道谛。由证得无为界的人而得以清净——这无为界法即是灭,是灭谛。这四圣谛是通过偈颂所开示诸法的同分、异分回转方式而确定的。‘因此说’等的含义,应依前述方法了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pariyodāpanassa kittikā bhūmiyo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dve pariyodāpanabhūmiyo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘‘Sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’ntiādigāthāya desitesu dhammesu katamaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, katamaṃ samudayasaccaṃ , katamaṃ maggasaccaṃ, katamaṃ nirodhasacca’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yaṃ paṭivedhenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti gāthāya desitesu dhammesu yaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ paṭivedhena pariññābhisamayena pariyodāpeti, idaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ dukkhaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ bhave. Yato taṇhāsaṃkilesato khandhapañcakaṃ pariyodāpeti, ayaṃ taṇhāsaṃkileso samudayo samudayasaccaṃ. Yena ariyamaggaṅgena pariyodāpeti, ayaṃ ariyamaggo maggasaccaṃ. Yaṃ asaṅkhatadhātuṃ adhigatena puggalena pariyodāpitaṃ, ayaṃ asaṅkhatadhātudhammo nirodho nirodhasaccaṃ bhave. Imāni cattāri saccāni gāthāya desitadhammānaṃ sabhāgavisabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena niddhāritāni. ‘‘Tenāhā’’tiādikassa attho heṭṭhā vuttanayena veditabbo.
《诸恶莫作》等偈颂所开示的诸法,依同类法与异类法的回转,四圣谛已由阿阇梨确定,我们也已了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’ntiādigāthāya desitānaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāgavisabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena cattāri saccāni ācariyena niddhāritāni, amhehi ca viññātāni.
法护持行法者,犹如雨季时的大伞;
这是善行于法的功德,行法者不堕恶趣。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘‘Dhammo have rakkhati dhammacāriṃ, chattaṃ mahantaṃ yatha vassakāle; Esānisaṃso dhamme suciṇṇe, na duggatiṃ gacchati dhammacārī’ti –
因为应说“通过偈颂所开示的诸法,以异分、同分法之回转,如何确定了四圣谛”,故说“法确实……”等。为了分别显示该偈颂所开示的诸法,而说“所谓法……”等。其中,所谓法,是指善法。根律仪,是指包括意根在内的六根律仪等一切律仪。因此说:“应知此处以根律仪为首,摄尽一切戒。”(《指导论注》31)四恶趣,是恶业行者所趣之处,故为恶趣。而一切再生,因为是具足苦苦、行苦、坏苦者所趣之处,故亦名为恶趣。显示巴利原文
Gāthāya desitānaṃ dhammānaṃ visabhāgasabhāgadhammānaṃ āvaṭṭanavasena kathaṃ cattāri saccāni niddhāritānī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘dhammo have’’tiādimāha. Tāya gāthāya desite dhamme vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘dhammo nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha dhammo nāmāti puññadhammo nāma. Indriyasaṃvaroti manacchaṭṭhindriyasaṃvarasīlādiko sabbo saṃvaro. Tena vuttaṃ –‘‘indriyasaṃvarasīsena cettha sabbampi sīlaṃ gahitanti daṭṭhabba’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 31). Cattāro apāyā dukkaṭakammakārīnaṃ gatibhūtattā duggati. Sabbā upapattiyo pana dukkhadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasamaṅgīnaṃ gatibhūtattā duggati nāma.
因当问:“在这两种法中,根律仪法住于何处?如何善行?又从何处守护?”故说“其中,那住于律仪戒的……”等语。其中,即指这两种法。住于律仪戒中的不毁坏性,应以此不毁坏而行持。那住于律仪戒、已善行、已修习的善法,决定性地守护那位自依止者免于四恶趣;非决定性地,仅被守护的善法自身也能作守护。应当如此把握其义。所谓“免于恶趣”,是就主要方面而说,实则亦能守护,令免于疾病等灾祸。或者,疾病等灾祸因为是从恶趣所分离而来,应视为含摄在恶趣之中。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tasmiṃ duvidhe dhamme indriyasaṃvaradhammo kattha ṭhito, kathaṃ suciṇṇo, kuto rakkhatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yā saṃvarasīle’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ duvidhe dhamme. Saṃvarasīle ṭhitā yā akhaṇḍakāritā hoti, ayaṃ akhaṇḍavasena kātabbo saṃvarasīle ṭhito suṭṭhu āciṇṇapariciṇṇo puññadhammo catūhi apāyehi attano ādhāraṃ attānaṃ rakkhantaṃ puggalaṃ ekantikabhāvena rakkhati, anekantikabhāvena pana rakkhitamatto puññadhammopi rakkhatīti attho gahetabbo. Apāyehīti ca padhānavasena vuttaṃ, rogādiantarāyatopi rakkhati. Rogādiantarāyo vā ayato apagatattā apāyantogadhoti daṭṭhabbo.
因当解说:“如此守护,我们应依何信受?”故说“如是,世尊……”等语。世尊以所说的这种方式,显示了其特征及方式后,说:“诸比丘,具戒者有此二种去处,即天与人。”以此“二种……乃至……人”之语,便是说你们应当信受。又因当阐明:“对于那住于律仪戒、应作不毁坏、已善行的善法,其免于恶趣的守护是决定性的,应以何经说明?”故说“如是,在那烂陀……”等。其中,“如是”指的是以此现在将说的方式,同时亦应了知前述的含义。“在那烂陀”,是指在名为那烂陀的集镇中,有位名叫阿私婆陀子的聚落主,对世尊说了下面将要说出的“婆罗门,尊者……”等语。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tathā rakkhatīti kena amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘evaṃ bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vuttappakārena lakkhaṇapakāradassanaṃ bhagavā ‘‘dvemā, bhikkhave, sīlavato gatiyo devā ca manussā cā’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena ‘‘dvemā…pe… manussā cā’’ti vacanena tumhehi saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Saṃvarasīle ṭhitassa akhaṇḍakātabbassa suciṇṇassa puññadhammassa apāyehi rakkhaṇe ekantikabhāvo kena suttena dīpetabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘evañca nāḷandāya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evañcāti iminā idāni vuccamānena pakārenapi vuttappakāro attho veditabbo. Nāḷandāyanti nāḷandanāmake nigame nisinno asibandhakanāmassa putto gāmaṇi gāmajeṭṭhako bhagavantaṃ etaṃ vuccamānaṃ ‘‘brāhmaṇā, bhante’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.
“婆罗门”指外道的婆罗门。“尊者”是聚落主对世尊的称呼。“后方住者”指坐在西方的人。“令上升”指使人从人间往生、上生天界。显示巴利原文
Brāhmaṇāti bāhirakā brāhmaṇā. Bhanteti bhagavantaṃ gāmaṇi ālapati. Pacchābhūmakāti pacchimadisāya nisinnakā. Uyyāpentīti manussalokato uddhaṃ devalokaṃ yāpenti pāpenti.
“于此”是指:在此世间,若有这样的人。应将其连接为:若有杀生……乃至……邪见的人。其余的内容,应依巴利原文及前述说明来了知。显示巴利原文
Idhassāti idhaloke assa bhaveyya. Puriso pāṇātipātī…pe… micchādiṭṭhiko assa bhaveyyāti yojanā. Sesaṃ pāḷito ceva vuttānusārena ca ñeyyaṃ.
32 因为应当说“通过异分法与同分法的回转,四圣谛已被确定,我们应依什么而确信”,所以说了“因此,大迦旃延在《一处所缘》中说”。显示巴利原文
32. ‘‘Visabhāgadhammasabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena catunnaṃ saccānaṃ niddhāritabhāvo kena amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāha mahākaccāno ekamhi padaṭṭhāne’’ti vuttaṃ.
因为应当说“至此,回转导向已圆满,无其他可结合”,所以说了“已结合的回转导向”。应了知其义为:在任何经典中,依所得而被结合的任何回转导向,即在该经典中被如此确定、结合与应用。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettāvatā ca āvaṭṭo hāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto āvaṭṭo hāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Yassaṃ yassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ yo yo āvaṭṭo hāro yathālābhavasena yojito, tassaṃ tassaṃ pāḷiyaṃ so so āvaṭṭo hāro tathā niddhāretvā yutto yojitoti attho daṭṭhabbo.
然而,智者应依循注疏与复注,将深奥之义详加分别而把握。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusāreneva gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
8. 分别导向之分别的阐明显示巴利原文
8. Vibhattihāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
33 作为特定解释的回转导向分别,已将所应回转的处所缘等作了分别,如此,这作为特定解释的回转导向分别便告圆满。由于应当问“其中,什么是分别导向的分别”,所以说了“其中,什么是分别导向……”等。此处,“其中”是就对已指出的十六种宣说导向等而问:什么名为分别导向分别的特定解释?应如此理解:现在我将要说的“二经……”等细分说明,即是名为分别导向分别的特定解释。显示巴利原文
33. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgena āvaṭṭetabbā padaṭṭhānādayo vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘tattha katamo vibhattihāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo vibhattihāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vibhattihāro vibhattihāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Dhammañca padaṭṭhānaṃ bhūmiñcā’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘dve suttānī’’tiādiko vitthārabhūto saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vibhattihāro vibhattihāravibhaṅgo nāmāti attho gahetabbo.
问:“那些经典中,以此分别导向之法分析而成法句基础的诸地,那些经典有多少?”为了首先显示那些经典,而说:“有两部经典——习气分与决择分。”其中,“习气分”:福德的修习称为习气,习气的部分或类别即习气分;依能诠而摄属于习气分的经典,便称为习气分。哪一部呢?凡是世尊在其中开示三种福业事的那部经典,即是习气分。“决择分”:对贪蕴等的刺破、破除称为决择,决择的部分或类别即决择分;依能诠而摄属于决择分的经典,便称为决择分。哪一部呢?凡是世尊在其中开示有学与无学法的那部经典,即是决择分。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yesu suttesu vuttā dhammapadaṭṭhānabhūmiyo iminā vibhattihārena vibhattā, tāni suttāni kittakānī’’ti pucchitabbattā tāni suttāni paṭhamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dve suttāni vāsanābhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha vāsanābhāgiyanti puññabhāvanā vāsanā nāma, vāsanāya bhāgo koṭṭhāso vāsanābhāgo, vāsanābhāge vācakabhāvena niyuttaṃ suttanti vāsanābhāgiyaṃ, katamaṃ taṃ? Yasmiṃ sutte tīṇi puññakiriyavatthūni bhagavatā desitāni, taṃ suttaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ. Nibbedhabhāgiyanti lobhakkhandhādīnaṃ nibbijjhanaṃ padālanaṃ nibbedho, nibbedhassa bhāgo koṭṭhāso nibbedhabhāgo, nibbedhabhāge vācakabhāvena niyuttaṃ suttanti nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ, katamaṃ taṃ? Yasmiṃ sutte sekkhāsekkhadhammā bhagavatā desitā, taṃ suttaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ.
若问:“那些经典的接受者——那些人,由哪些行道而成就?那些行道有多少?”为此说“二行道”等。布施、持戒、修习所成之福所摄的行道,名为福分行道;果分所摄的行道,名为果分行道。若问:“那些接受者立于哪些戒中而行道?那些戒有多少?”为此说“二戒”等。依此而防护,故为防护;此防护有五种:巴帝摩卡防护、念防护、智防护、忍防护、精进防护。所有这些都因防护诸恶而称为防护,又因作为世间与出世间成就的立足处而称为戒。依此而断除应断除的,故为断除;断除的行为也即是断除。此断除有五种:彼分断除、镇伏断除、正断断除、止息断除、出离断除。其中,除出离断除外,其余四种断除也依上述的方法而称为戒。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tesaṃ suttānaṃ paṭiggāhakā puggalā yāhi paṭipadāhi sampajjanti, tā paṭipadā kittikā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dve paṭipadā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dānasīlabhāvanāmayapuññabhāge bhavā paṭipadāti puññabhāgiyā. Phalabhāge bhavā paṭipadāti phalabhāgiyā. ‘‘Yesu sīlesu ṭhitā paṭiggāhakā paṭipajjanti, tāni sīlāni kittakānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dve sīlānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Saṃvarati etena saṃvarenāti saṃvaro, so saṃvaro pātimokkhasaṃvaro, satisaṃvaro, ñāṇasaṃvaro, khantisaṃvaro, vīriyasaṃvaroti pañcavidho. Sabbopi pāpasaṃvaraṇato saṃvaro, lokiyalokuttarasampattiṭṭhānattā sīlaṃ nāma. Pajahati etena pahātabbeti pahānaṃ, pajahanaṃ vā pahānaṃ, tañca pahānaṃ tadaṅgappahānaṃ, vikkhambhanappahānaṃ, samucchedappahānaṃ, paṭipassaddhippahānaṃ, nissaraṇappahānanti pañcavidhaṃ. Tattha nissaraṇappahānaṃ vajjetvā catubbidhaṃ pahānaṃ vuttanayena sīlaṃ nāma.
若问:“在那些经典等中,世尊开示哪一部经典,又以哪一种行道来开示?立于哪一种戒的人,以哪一种戒而成为梵行者?”为了这样分别显示,而说“其中,世尊”等。此处应如此连接:在那些习气分等经典中,所谓习气分经典——在那些福分等行道中,世尊以福分行道为某人开示;那位习气分经典的接受者,在那些防护戒等之中,立于防护戒,以那称为防护戒的梵行——即最胜行,而成为梵行者,也就是最胜行的圆满者。在那些习气分等经典中,所谓决择分经典——在那些福分等行道中,世尊以果分行道为某人开示;那位决择分经典的接受者,在那些防护戒等之中,依靠正断与止息断除之力,立于断除戒,以那称为断除戒的殊胜梵行——即道,而成为梵行者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tesu suttādīsu bhagavā katamaṃ suttaṃ katamāya paṭipadāya desayati, katarasmiṃ sīle ṭhito puggalo katamena sīlena brahmacārī bhavatī’’ti pucchitabbattā tathā vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu vāsanābhāgiyādīsu suttesu vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ tattha tāsu puññabhāgiyādipaṭipadāsu puññabhāgiyāya paṭipadāya bhagavā yassa puggalassa desayati, so vāsanābhāgiyasuttapaṭiggāhako puggalo tattha saṃvarasīlādīsu saṃvarasīle ṭhito hutvā tena saṃvarasīlasaṅkhātena brahmacariyena seṭṭhacariyena brahmacārī seṭṭhācārapūrako bhavati. Tattha tesu vāsanābhāgiyādīsu suttesu nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ tattha tāsu puññabhāgiyādipaṭipadāsu phalabhāgiyāya paṭipadāya yassa puggalassa bhagavā desayati, so nibbedhabhāgiyasuttapaṭiggāhako puggalo tattha saṃvarasīlādīsu pahānasīle samucchedappassaddhippahānavasena ṭhito hutvā tena pahānasīlasaṅkhātena visesabhūtena maggasaṅkhātena brahmacariyena brahmacārī bhavatīti yojanā kātabbā.
若问:“在习气分经典等之中,哪一部是习气分经典?”为此说“其中,哪一部”等。这里的“其中”,是指那些习气分经典等。“布施论”,是关于善士施、施果报与非善士施、施果报的论说。“戒论”,是关于五戒等戒的果报的论说。“天论”,是关于天界成就之乐的论说,以及关于能生于天的福德的论说。“过患”,是显示过失的经典。“功德”,是显示功德的经典。应当这样连接:这些便称为习气分经典。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vāsanābhāgiyasuttādīsu katamaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ sutta’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katama’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu vāsanābhāgiyasuttādīsu. Dānakathāti sappurisadānadānaphalaasappurisadānadānaphalakathā. Sīlakathāti pañcasīlādisīlaphalakathā. Saggakathāti saggasampattisukhakathā ceva sagge nibbattāpakapuññakathā ca. Ādīnavoti ādīnavadassako suttanto. Ānisaṃsoti ānisaṃsadassako suttanto. Vāsanābhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāmāti yojanā.
在“其中,哪一部”等语句中,衔接的意义如前所说。应这样连接:凡开示四圣谛的教说,那教说即称为决择分经典。如果这样,那么习气分经典也会成为决择分经典,因为它同样开示四圣谛。考虑到这种质疑,便说“在习气分经典中”等。在习气分经典中,没有那种作为出起观、作为圣道立足处的了知,没有道与圣道,也没有果与圣果。然而,在决择分经典中,则有了知等;在习气分经典中则没有。以“了知”等语,说明开示四圣谛的布施论等包含在决择分经典中,而其余部分则称为习气分经典。若问:“那些经典中所分析的、作为法句立足处的诸地,那些经典并非只有二部,为何说‘仅二经被确定’?”答:因为在不混杂的情况下,经典中所说的应被分析的法句立足处诸地,是容易了知的。若说:“若如此,则杂染分经典与无学分经典也应被确定,因为它们同样不混杂。”答:并非如此,没有被确定。因为当习气分经典被确定时,杂染分经典也随之被确定,因为从杂染法中出离的法正是习气分法;而当决择分经典被确定时,无学分经典也随之被确定,因为无有差别。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katama’’ntiādīsu anusandhyattho vuttanayova. Yā desanā catusaccappakāsanā, sā desanā nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ suttaṃ nāmāti yojanā. Evañca sati vāsanābhāgiyasuttassapi nibbedhabhāgiyasuttabhāvo āpajjeyya catusaccappakāsanatoti codanaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘vāsanābhāgiye sutte’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vāsanābhāgiye sutte pajānanā vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā ariyamaggapadaṭṭhānabhūtā paññā natthi, maggo ariyamaggo natthi, phalaṃ ariyaphalaṃ natthi. Nibbedhabhāgiye sutte pana pajānanādayo atthi, vāsanābhāgiye sutte natthi. ‘‘Pajānanā’’tiādinā catusaccappakāsanā dānakathādikā nibbedhabhāgiye sutte antogadhā, itaraṃyeva vāsanābhāgiyasuttanti nāmāti dasseti. Yesu suttesu vuttā dhammapadaṭṭhānabhūmiyo vibhattā, tāni suttāni dveyeva na honti, kasmā ‘‘dveyeva suttāni niddhāritānī’’ti ce vadeyyuṃ? Asaṅkarato sutte vuttānaṃ dhammapadaṭṭhānabhūmīnaṃ vibhajitabbānaṃ suviññeyyattā. ‘‘Yadi evaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasuttānipi niddhāritāni asaṅkarattā’’ti ce vadeyyuṃ? No niddhāritāni, vāsanābhāgiyasutte niddhārite saṃkilesabhāgiyasuttampi niddhāritaṃ, saṃkilesadhammato nissaṭṭhadhammānaṃyeva vāsanābhāgiyadhammattā nibbedhabhāgiyasutte ca niddhārite asekkhabhāgiyasuttampi niddhāritaṃ anaññattā.
因为应当被问及:“那些在诸经中依论母方式所分析的、作为法句之立足处的诸地,那些经应当以何种果来结合?”故说了“这四部经”等。其中,“这四部经”是指:如此被确定的习气分经与决择分经,以及经由这一确定而被确定的杂染分经与无学分经。这四部经应当以它们各自的教导之理和所引之果,从一切方面、以一切部分,用防护戒与断除戒的梵行来结合。而结合者,应从一切方面、以一切部分,以句等简择之理简择防护戒等之果后,以合理之理寻求相适之果,进而“此果是此人之果,此果是此经之果”,将诸经各别地与果结合,应如此理解其义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yesu suttesu vuttā dhammapadaṭṭhānabhūmiyo vibhattihārena vibhattā, tāni suttāni katamena phalena yojayitabbānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘imāni cattāri suttānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha imāni cattāri suttānīti yathāniddhāritāni vāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyasuttāni ceva taṃniddhāraṇena niddhāritāni saṃkilesabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasuttāni cāti cattāri suttāni imesaṃyeva catunnaṃ suttānaṃ desanāya nayena nītena phalena sabbato sabbabhāgena saṃvarasīlappahānasīlena brahmacariyena yojayitabbāni. Yojentena ca sabbato sabbabhāgena ca padādivicayena hārena saṃvarasīlādikaṃ phalaṃ vicinitvā yuttihārena yuttaṃ phalaṃ gavesitvā ‘‘idaṃ phalaṃ imassa puggalassa phalaṃ, idaṃ phalaṃ imassa suttassa phala’’nti suttāni visuṃ visuṃ phalena yojayitabbānīti attho gahetabbo.
因为应当被问及:“应以多少果、以梵行来结合?”故说了“智慧之地的范围”。由世尊所教导的习气分经所成就的福德分行道等,堪能作为分别智之地与所缘而存在;其范围有多广,就应以那些地来结合习气分经。由决择分经所成就的果分行道等,堪能作为分别智之地与所缘而存在;其范围有多广,就应以那些地来结合决择分经。其余二种经也应当随其所应而结合。以此显示智慧之地与经义具有种种多样。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kittakena phalena brahmacariyena yojetabbānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yāvatikā ñāṇassa bhūmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhagavatā desitena vāsanābhāgiyasuttena siddhā yāvatikā puññabhāgiyā paṭipadādayo vibhajanañāṇassa bhūmi ārammaṇā bhavitumarahanti, tāvatikāhi bhūmīhi vāsanābhāgiyasuttaṃ yojayitabbaṃ. Nibbedhabhāgiyasuttena siddhā yāvatikā phalabhāgiyā paṭipadādayo vibhajanañāṇassa bhūmi ārammaṇā bhavitumarahanti, tāvatikāhi bhūmīhi nibbedhabhāgiyasuttaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Itaradvayampi suttaṃ yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Etena ñāṇassa bhūmīnaṃ suttatthānaṃ bahuvidhattaṃ dasseti.
34 在习气分经等经中所说的诸法,阿阇梨已从习气分与决择分的角度作了分析,我们也已了知。由于还应当问:‘如何从杂染分与无学分、共与不共的角度来分析?’因此开始了‘其中,哪些法是共的?’等提问。而在注释书中则说:显示巴利原文
34. Vāsanābhāgiyasuttādīsu vuttā dhammā vāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyabhāvehi ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘kathaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaasekkhābhāgiyabhāvehi asādhāraṇāsādhāraṇabhāvehi vibhajitabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katame dhammā sādhāraṇā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāya pana –
如是,从习气分与决择分的角度对诸法作了一部分的分析之后,现在为了再从杂染分与无学分、共与不共的角度来分析它们,便开始了‘其中,哪些法是共的?’等提问。(《导论注》34)显示巴利原文
‘‘Evaṃ vāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyabhāvehi dhamme ekadesena vibhajitvā idāni tesaṃ kilesabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyabhāvehi sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇabhāvehi vibhajituṃ ‘tattha katame dhammā sādhāraṇā’tiādi āraddha’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 34) –
如上所说。其中,‘于其中’是指:对于那些在经中所说、应以论母方式加以分析的诸法,问:‘在这些法中,哪些法是共的?’答:‘二法是共的。’为显示那二法的自性,而说‘名共与事共’。其中,‘名共’是指:以名称、以名施设而共、相同,即:以‘善’之名,二十一种心生起是相同的;以‘不善’等名,十二种心生起是相同的;能被善等名施设和言说的诸义,被称为善等名共。因此,在复注中说:显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti ye dhammā sutte vuttā vibhattihārena vibhajitabbā, tesu dhammesu katame dhammā sādhāraṇāti pucchati, dve dhammā sādhāraṇāti vissajjeti. Te dve dhamme sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘nāmasādhāraṇā, vatthusādhāraṇā cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha nāmasādhāraṇāti nāmena nāmapaññattiyā sādhāraṇā samānā, ‘‘kusalā’’ti nāmena ekavīsati cittuppādā samānā, ‘‘akusalā’’tyādināmena dvādasa cittuppādā samānā, kusalādināmapaññattivacanena vacanīyā atthā kusalādināmasādhāraṇāti vuttā. Tena ṭīkāyaṃ –
“名”即是名的施设,正是以此名称为门,由音声而了知其义。而且,音声仅是以共相的形式来把握如是之义,并非以别相的形式。因此,可被音声言说之义,由于其可被把握的特性系属于共相之名,故说为“名共”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Nāmaṃ nāmapaññatti, taṃmukheneva saddato tadatthāvagamo. Saddena ca sāmaññarūpeneva tathārūpassa atthassa gahaṇaṃ, na visesarūpena. Tasmā saddavacanīyā atthā sādhāraṇarūpanāmāyattagahaṇīyatāya nāmasādhāraṇā vuttā’’ti –
“事共”是说:以作为依止处的事而共。意思是:那些在作为依止处的相续中,或在心生起等中现起的诸法,这些法即与该相续、该事或该心生起等为共、为同。虽然由于在同一相续中现起,从触等自性而言各有差别,但事共者即是同一事,故说“依论母方式分析”。显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ. Vatthusādhāraṇāti patiṭṭhānabhūtena vatthunā sādhāraṇā. Yasmiṃ patiṭṭhānabhūte santāne vā cittuppādādimhi vā ye dhammā pavattanti, te dhammā tena santānena vā vatthunā tena cittuppādādinā vā sādhāraṇā samānāti attho. Ekasantāne patitattā phusanādisabhāvato bhinnāpi vatthusādhāraṇā samānavatthukāyeva bhavantīti vibhattihārena vibhajitvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
因为应有人问:“是否只应以名共和事共来分别,此外便没有其他可分别的了?”所以才说“或复有其他”等。除了名共和事共之外,或复有其他如作用共、缘共、对治共等法类,凡是属于这等共相的类别,这一切也都应以审察的方式审查,以合理的方式寻求后,再以分别的方式分别其合理的共相——这是意旨所在。因为应问:“在这些名共等之中,哪些是名共,哪些是事共?”所以接着说“对于决定邪性的众生”等。对于犯杀母等六种决定邪性业行的众生,以及恶趣因、善趣因、二因、三因这四种不定业行的凡夫众生,在他们相续中转起的见所断烦恼,即为见所断名共,因为即使有身见、疑、戒禁取等在体性上有别,也不超越“见所断”之名。由于是所述决定与不定众生的见所断烦恼的依止事,故为事共,即共一事之意。对于凡夫的恶趣因等四种众生及须陀洹,在他们相续中转起的欲贪、嗔恚烦恼,即为欲贪、嗔恚名共,因为即使是斯陀含道所断、阿那含道所断而在体性上有别,也不超越“欲贪、嗔恚”之名。应知:由于是所述凡夫及须陀洹的欲贪、嗔恚的依止事,故为事共,即共一事之意。对于凡夫及阿那含,显示巴利原文
‘‘Kiṃ nāmasādhāraṇavatthusādhāraṇāyeva vibhajitabbā, aññaṃ vibhajitabbaṃ natthī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yaṃ vā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nāmasādhāraṇavatthusādhāraṇehi aññaṃ yaṃ vā pana kiccasādhāraṇapaccayasādhāraṇapaṭipakkhādisādhāraṇampi dhammajātaṃ evaṃjātiyaṃ sādhāraṇajātiyaṃ, tampi sabbaṃ vicayahārena vicinitvā yuttihārena gavesitvā yuttaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ vibhattihārena vibhajitabbanti adhippāyo. ‘‘Tesu nāmasādhāraṇādīsu katame nāmasādhāraṇā, katame vatthusādhāraṇā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘micchattaniyatānaṃ sattāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Mātughātakādīnaṃ channaṃ micchattaniyatakammakarānaṃ sattānañca duggatiahetukasugatiahetukaduhetukatihetukānaṃ catunnaṃ puthujjanānaṃ aniyatakammakarānaṃ sattānañca santāne pavattā dassanapahātabbā kilesā dassanapahātabbanāmasādhāraṇā samānā bhavanti sakkāyadiṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmasanavasena bhinnasabhāvānampi dassanapahātabbanāmanātivattanato. Vuttappakārānaṃ niyatāniyatasattānaṃ dassanapahātabbānaṃ kilesānaṃ patiṭṭhānavatthubhāvato vatthusādhāraṇā ca samānavatthukāti attho. Puthujjanassa duggatiahetukādicatubbidhasattassa, sotāpannassa ca santāne pavattā kāmarāgabyāpādā kilesā kāmarāgabyāpādanāmasādhāraṇā samānā bhavanti sakadāgāmimaggappahātabbaanāgāmimaggappahātabbavasena bhinnasabhāvānampi kāmarāgabyāpādanāmanātivattanato. Vuttappakārassa puthujjanassa, sotāpannassa ca kāmarāgabyāpādānaṃ patiṭṭhānavatthubhāvato vatthusādhāraṇā samānavatthukāti attho ca gahetabbo. Puthujjanassa, anāgāmissa ca santāne pavattā uddhaṃbhāgiyā saṃyojanā uddhambhāgiyanāmasādhāraṇā samānā bhavanti rūparāgādivasena bhinnasabhāvānampi uddhaṃbhāgiyanāmanātivattanato. Puthujjanassa, anāgāmissa ca uddhaṃbhāgiyānaṃ patiṭṭhānavatthubhāvato vatthusādhāraṇā samānavatthukāti attho ca gahetabbo. Tena vuttaṃ ṭīkāyaṃ – ‘‘dassanapahātabbānañhi yathā micchattaniyatasattā pavattiṭṭhānaṃ, evaṃ aniyatāpī’’ti vuttaṃ. Saṅkhepato pana saṃkilesapakkhe pahānekaṭṭhā kilesā nāmasādhāraṇā honti, sahajekaṭṭhā kilesā vatthusādhāraṇāti daṭṭhabbā.
于杂染品中,共相已由阿阇梨分别,我们亦已了知。因当问:“于清净品中,共相是如何分别的?”故说“凡任何圣弟子”等。其中,“凡任何”是以总说的方式,指初禅等世间等至。“圣弟子”应说为圣者世尊的弟子,是得禅那者及住果者,而非住道者,因为住道者不入任何世间等至。所有那些世间等至——色界、无色界、天住、梵住、初禅等至等,以这些同义语而为共相。何以故?因为这些既与具足他们至的离欲者及未离欲者共,又不超越“世间等至”之名,且为离欲者及未离欲者所入。由于应说:“圣弟子入世间等至时,是次第次第而入,既然如此,如何可信是与离欲者共的呢?”故说“因为共法”等。而在义注中说:“‘如何是他们次第而取,又应如何次第而取,如何是共?’——心中生起此追问后,为作澄清而说:‘因为共法如此相互’等。”显示巴利原文
Saṃkilesapakkhe sādhāraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘kathaṃ vodānapakkhe sādhāraṇā vibhattā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yaṃ kiñci ariyasāvako’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ kiñcīti sāmaññavasena vuttā paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiādikā lokiyā samāpattiyeva gahitā. Ariyasāvakoti ariyassa bhagavato sāvako ariyasāvakoti vattabbo, jhānalābhī ca phalaṭṭho ca puggalo, na maggaṭṭho. Maggaṭṭho hi lokiyaṃ yaṃ kiñci samāpattiṃ na samāpajjati. Sabbā sā lokiyasamāpatti rūpāvacarā arūpāvacarā dibbavihāro brahmavihāro paṭhamajjhānasamāpattīti evamādīhi pariyāyehi sādhāraṇā taṃsamaṅgīhi vītarāgāvītarāgehi sādhāraṇā lokiyasamāpattināmanātivattanato ca vītarāgāvītarāgehi samāpajjitabbato ca. ‘‘Ariyasāvako ca lokiyaṃ samāpattiṃ samāpajjanto odhiso odhiso samāpajjati, evaṃ sati kathaṃ vītarāgehi sādhāraṇāti saddahitabbā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘sādhāraṇā hi dhammā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – ‘‘kathaṃ te odhiso gahitā, atha odhiso gahetabbā, kathaṃ sādhāraṇāti anuyogaṃ manasi katvā taṃ visodhento āha – ‘sādhāraṇā hi dhammā evaṃ aññamañña’ntiādī’’ti vuttaṃ.
其中,那些由离欲者与未离欲者各各次第而入的诸法,即后后转起的法类,确实不超越各自前前生起的、名为“世间等至”的确定境界,因为它们彼此不相超越,所以应当信受、应当理解为“是共的”——这是意思。因为应说:“次第而入时,如何是不超越?”为使不超越变得明显,故说“即使”等。无论是圣弟子还是未离欲者,只要具足这些世间等至法,那位圣弟子或未离欲者即使次第而入,也不超越彼法——世间等至法,即不会超越而进入其他。应知:所具足的这些世间等至法,这些世间等至法就是共的。显示巴利原文
Tattha evaṃ vītarāgāvītarāgehi odhiso odhiso samāpajjitabbā dhammā paraṃ paraṃ pacchā pacchā pavattiyamānaṃ dhammajātaṃ sakaṃ sakaṃ pubbe pubbe jātaṃ ‘‘lokiyasamāpattī’’ti nāmaṃ niyatavisayaṃ aññamaññaṃ hutvā hi yasmā nātivattanti, tasmā sādhāraṇāti saddahitabbā gahetabbāti attho. ‘‘Paraṃ paraṃ samāpajjanto kathaṃ nātivattatī’’ti vattabbattā nātivattanaṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘yopī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yo ariyasāvako vā avītarāgo vā. Imehi lokiyasamāpattidhammehi samannāgato, so ariyasāvako vā avītarāgo vā paraṃ paraṃ samāpajjantopi taṃ dhammaṃ lokiyaṃ samāpattidhammaṃ nātivattati, aññaṃ upagantvā nātikkamatīti attho. Yehi lokiyasamāpattidhammehi samannāgato, ime lokiyasamāpatti dhammā sādhāraṇāvāti daṭṭhabbā.
在《随习分》等经中所说的那些法,已依此分别理趣而分别。因当问:“在这些法中,哪些法是不共的?”故说“其中哪些法是不共的”等。其中,所问的是:在那些应分别的法中,哪些法是不共的?问已,依于教说,应寻求不共法,或者应寻求“有学与无学”,或者应寻求“堪能与不堪能”。又或者,因教说仅及于“有学与无学、堪能与不堪能”,故应依教说而寻求不共法。应如何寻求?于圣者中,依有学与无学法,“有学”之名与无学不共,“无学”之名与有学不共;于非圣者中,“堪能”之名与不堪能不共,“不堪能”之名与堪能不共。应当如此寻求。欲贪结与嗔恚结,由于未断除,能以随眠性生起,此为住于入流道与须陀洹果的第八者(向须陀洹)所共;而法性、法自相则是不共的。这是说:第八者住于入流道,对于须陀洹果者,是不共的;须陀洹果者住于须陀洹果,对于第八者,是不共的。或者,第八者正在断除的烦恼,对于须陀洹是不共的;须陀洹已断除的烦恼,对于第八者是不共的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vāsanābhāgiyādisuttesu vuttā ye dhammā iminā vibhattihārena vibhattā, yesu dhammesu katame dhammā asādhāraṇā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katame dhammā asādhāraṇā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu vibhajitabbesu dhammesu katame dhammā asādhāraṇāti pucchati, pucchitvā yāva desanaṃ upādāya asādhāraṇā dhammā gavesitabbā, ‘‘sekkhāsekkhā’’ti vā gavesitabbā, ‘‘bhabbābhabbā’’ti vā gavesitabbā. Atha vā yāva ‘‘sekkhāsekkhā bhabbābhabbā’’ti desanā vuttā, tāva desanaṃ upādāya asādhāraṇā gavesitabbā. Kathaṃ gavesitabbā? Ariyesu sekkhāsekkhadhammavasena ‘‘sekkhā’’ti nāmaṃ asekkhena asādhāraṇaṃ, ‘‘asekkhā’’ti nāmaṃ sekkhena asādhāraṇanti vā, anariyesu ‘‘bhabbā’’ti nāmaṃ abhabbena asādhāraṇaṃ, ‘‘abhabbā’’ti nāmaṃ bhabbena asādhāraṇanti vā gavesitabbā. Kāmarāgabyāpādā saṃyojanā appahīnattā anusayabhāvena uppajjanārahattā aṭṭhamakassa sotāpattimaggaṭṭhassa ca sotāpannassa phalaṭṭhassa ca sādhāraṇā bhavanti, dhammatā dhammasabhāvo asādhāraṇo. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘aṭṭhamakassa sotāpattimaggaṭṭhatā sotāpannassa asādhāraṇā, sotāpannassa sotāpannaphalaṭṭhatā ca aṭṭhamakassa sotāpattimaggaṭṭhassa asādhāraṇā. Aṭṭhamakassa vā pahīyamānakilesatā sotāpannassa asādhāraṇā, sotāpannassa pahīnakilesatā ca aṭṭhamakassa asādhāraṇā’’ti.
由于未断除上分结,它们能以随眠的方式生起。这是第八者(以住道身份)与类似第八者的住阿那含道者、以及阿那含果者所共的;而法性、法自相则是不共的。意思是:“第八者所处的阿那含道位,对阿那含果者是不共的;阿那含果者对第八者是不共的。”或者:“第八者正在断除的烦恼,对阿那含是不共的;阿那含果者已断除的烦恼,对第八者是不共的。”也可以说:“住道对住果是不共的,住果对住道是不共的。”七种有学众共有的“有学”之名是共的,而法性则不共。即:四位住道者各自的住道性,对其他住道者是不共的。于下三果的住果者亦然:下三果住果者各自的住果性,对其他住果者以及四位住道者皆是不共的。也可以说:“有学众各自的住道性对住果性是不共的,各自的住果性对住道性是不共的。”凡是行道者——即为了证果而修道者,名为行道者——此四位具道者的“行道者”名是共的,而法性即各自的住道性则不共。所有七种有学者的戒是共的,法性即各自的住道性与住果性则不共。在《随习分》与《杂染分》经中所说的“由见所断”等法,以及在《决了分》与《无学显示巴利原文
Uddhambhāgiyā saṃyojanā appahīnattā anusayabhāvena uppajjanārahattā aṭṭhamakassa maggaṭṭhabhāvena aṭṭhamakasadisassa anāgāmimaggaṭṭhassa ca anāgāmissa phalaṭṭhassa ca sādhāraṇā, dhammatā dhammasabhāvo asādhāraṇā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘aṭṭhamakassa anāgāmimaggaṭṭhatā anāgāmissa phalaṭṭhassa asādhāraṇā, anāgāmissa anāgāmiphalaṭṭhatā ca aṭṭhamakassa asādhāraṇā. Aṭṭhamakassa vā pahīyamānakilesatā anāgāmissa asādhāraṇā, anāgāmissa phalaṭṭhassa pahīnakilesatā ca aṭṭhamakassa asādhāraṇā’’ti. ‘‘Maggaṭṭhatā phalaṭṭhatāya asādhāraṇā, phalaṭṭhatā ca maggaṭṭhatāya asādhāraṇā’’tipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Sabbesaṃ sattannaṃ sekkhānaṃ puggalānaṃ nāmaṃ‘‘sekkhā’’ti nāmaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ. Dhammatā asādhāraṇāti catunnaṃ maggaṭṭhānaṃ taṃtaṃmaggaṭṭhatā aññamaññaṃ maggaṭṭhānaṃ asādhāraṇā. Heṭṭhimaphalattayaṭṭhānañca asādhāraṇā, heṭṭhimaphalattayaṭṭhānaṃ taṃtaṃphalaṭṭhatā ca aññamaññaṃ phalaṭṭhānaṃ asādhāraṇā, catunnaṃ maggaṭṭhānañca asādhāraṇāti attho. ‘‘Sekkhānaṃ taṃtaṃmaggaṭṭhatā taṃtaṃphalaṭṭhatāya asādhāraṇā, taṃtaṃphalaṭṭhatā ca taṃtaṃmaggaṭṭhatāya asādhāraṇā’’ti vattumpi vaṭṭati. Sabbesaṃ paṭipannakānanti phalatthāya paṭipajjantīti paṭipannakā, tesaṃ maggasamaṅgīnaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ nāmaṃ ‘‘paṭipannakā’’ti nāmaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ, dhammatā taṃtaṃmaggaṭṭhatā asādhāraṇā. Sabbesaṃ sekkhānaṃ sattannaṃ puggalānaṃ sekkhānaṃ sīlaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ, dhammatā taṃtaṃmaggaṭṭhaphalaṭṭhatā asādhāraṇāti. Vāsanābhāgiyasaṃkilesabhāgiyasuttesu vuttā dassanenapahātabbādayo ceva nibbedhabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyasuttesu vuttā sekkhādayo ca dhammā sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇabhedena vibhattihārena vibhajitabbāti adhippāyo veditabbo.
“第八者等”一语,论师分别了圣者中的不共法,我们也已了知。因为应问“于非圣者中,不共法是如何分别的?”,为显示依圣者中所述之理则,于非圣者中也应分别后寻求,故说“如是随观差别”等。而在注释书中则说:“如是,以‘第八者等’指出圣者中的不共法之后,为显示其余非圣者的理则,故说‘如是随观差别’等。”因此,依于圣者中所述的理则,在堪能与不堪能的非圣者中,智者随观差别;由于不共而随观差别,在堪能与不堪能中也应依劣、胜、中来寻求。如何寻求呢?因杀母等而转起、与嗔恚相应及与邪见相应的第七速行心,其决定邪性对具备该第七速行心者是共的;而如是转起的初速行心等不决定法,其与嗔恚相应等性为共;决定邪性的法,因为唯于一心生起中存在,故为不共。正如心不能被称为“与心相杂”,决定邪性也不能被称为“与决定邪性共”。在决定邪性者中,对于具有决定邪见,即拥有与邪见相应第七速行心者,不决定的与邪见相应初速行心等诸法,其与邪见相应等性为共;而决定邪见,因为唯于一心生起中具备,故为不共。是故注释师说:显示巴利原文
‘‘Aṭṭhamakassā’’tiādinā ariyesu puggalesu asādhāraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘kathaṃ anariyesu asādhāraṇā vibhattā’’ti pucchitabbattā ariyesu vuttanayānusārena anariyesupi vibhajitvā gavesitabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ visesānupassinā’’tiādi vuttaṃ . Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – ‘‘evaṃ ‘aṭṭhamakassā’tiādinā ariyapuggalesu asādhāraṇadhammaṃ dassetvā itaresu nayadassanatthaṃ ‘evaṃ visesānupassinā’tiādi vutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ ariyesu vuttanayānusārena bhabbābhabbesu anariyesu visesānupassinā asādhāraṇato visesaṃ asādhāraṇaṃ anupassinā gavesakena paṇḍitena bhabbābhabbesupi hīnukkaṭṭhamajjhimaṃ upādāya gavesitabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Mātughātādivasena pavattānaṃ paṭighasampayuttadiṭṭhisampayuttasattamajavanacittuppādānaṃ micchattaniyatānaṃ taṃsamaṅgīnaṃ vā tathāpavattā paṭhamajavanacittupādādayo aniyatā dhammā paṭighasampayuttādibhāvena sādhāraṇā, micchattaniyatā dhammā ekacittuppādattā asādhāraṇā. Yathā hi cittaṃ ‘‘cittasaṃsaṭṭha’’nti na vattabbaṃ, evaṃ micchattaniyatāpi ‘‘micchattaniyatasādhāraṇā’’ti na vattabbā. Micchattaniyatesupi niyatamicchādiṭṭhikānaṃ diṭṭhisampayuttasattamajavanacittuppādasamaṅgīnaṃ aniyatā diṭṭhisampayuttapaṭhamajavanacittuppādādayo dhammā diṭṭhisampayuttādibhāvena sādhāraṇā, niyatamicchādiṭṭhi ekacittuppādasamaṅgībhāvato asādhāraṇā. Tenāha aṭṭhakathācariyo –
“对于决定邪性者而言,不决定法是共的,决定邪性法则是不共的。在决定邪性者之中,对于具有决定邪见者,不决定法是共的,决定邪见则是不共的——随观差别者应当依此理则来了知。”(《指导论注》34)显示巴利原文
‘‘Micchattaniyatānaṃ aniyatā dhammā sādhāraṇa, micchattaniyatā dhammā asādhāraṇā. Micchattaniyatesupi niyatamicchādiṭṭhikānaṃ aniyatā dhammā sādhāraṇā, niyatamicchādiṭṭhi asādhāraṇāti iminā nayena visesānupassinā veditabbā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 34).
其中,“依此理则”一语,是取其义:对于邪性决定者,可生起的不定法为共,不可生起的不定法为不共,故说“堪能与不堪能”。同样,劣者的劣,以劣性为共,中与胜则不共;中者的中,以中性为共,劣与胜则不共;胜者的胜,以胜性为共,劣与中则不共——当如此寻求。因此说:“应依劣、胜、中来寻求”。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘iminā nayenā’’ti iminā micchattaniyatānaṃ uppajjituṃ bhabbā aniyatā dhammā sādhāraṇā, uppajjituṃ abhabbā aniyatā dhammā asādhāraṇāti gahitā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bhabbābhabbā’’ti. Tathā hīnassa hīno hīnabhāvena sādhāraṇo, majjhimukkaṭṭhā asādhāraṇā. Majjhimassa majjhimo sādhāraṇo, hīnukkaṭṭhā asādhāraṇā. Ukkaṭṭhassa ukkaṭṭho ukkaṭṭhabhāvena sādhāraṇo, hīnamajjhimā asādhāraṇātipi gavesitabbā. Tenāha – ‘‘hīnukkaṭṭhamajjhimaṃ upādāya gavesitabba’’nti.
于此,以“其中哪些法是共通的?”等种种分别理趣的方式分别诸法而开示,且为我们所知。由于应问“如何以分别理趣的方式,将地之近因分别开示?”,故于分别法之后,为别别开示地之近因,而说“见地”等。其中,“见地”:于此——即初道——有见,故为见地,也就是入流道。“入正性决定”:正性决定即是正性决定,那是什么?是到达正性决定;进入即是入,即入流果;于正性决定之进入,便是入正性决定,由此得名。名为见地的入流道,是名为入正性决定的入流果之现证的近因。因为具足初道者名为正在进入正性决定,而具足果者则名为已进入正性决定,因此以“入正性决定”一语摄取了初果的生起。“修地”:指上三道。“更上的”:应各自连接为——是彼彼道之上转起的彼彼果之现证的近因。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katame dhammā sādhāraṇā’’tiādinā nānāvidhena vibhattihāranayena dhammā vibhajitvā dassitā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘kathaṃ bhūmipadaṭṭhānāni vibhattihāranayena vibhajitvā dassitānī’’ti pucchitabbabhāvato dhammavibhajanānantaraṃ bhūmipadaṭṭhānāni vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘dassanabhūmī’’tiādimāha. Tattha dassanabhūmīti dassanaṃ bhavati ettha paṭhamamaggeti dassanabhūmi, sotāpattimaggo . Niyāmāvakkantiyāti niyamanaṃ niyāmo, ko so? Sampattaniyāmo, avakkanaṃ avakkanti, sotāpattiphalaṃ, niyāmassa avakkanti niyāmāvakkanti, tāya. Dassanabhūmināmako sotāpattimaggo niyāmāvakkantināmakassa sotāpattiphalassa pattiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Paṭhamamaggasamaṅgī puggalo hi niyāmaṃ okkamanto nāma, phalasamaṅgī pana niyāmaṃ okkanto nāma hoti, tasmā niyāmāvakkantisaddena paṭhamaphaluppatti gahitā. Bhāvanābhūmīti uparimaggattayaṃ. Uttarikānanti tassa tassa maggassa uparipavattānaṃ taṃtaṃphalānaṃ pattiyā padaṭṭhānanti paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
苦行道与迟钝通达,因在钝慧者中生起,带来奢摩他,故为奢摩他的近因;乐行道与速疾通达,因在慧增上者中生起,带来毗婆舍那,故为毗婆舍那的近因;其余二行道,也应理解为因在非极慧者中生起,故为奢摩他的近因。因此,义注中说:“然而其余三行道也带来奢摩他”等(《导论义注》34)。布施所成的福德事,其本身并非绝对唯是听法的近因,礼敬、祈请、问难等也是近因,因此由那些原因而成为共通,成为从他闻的近因;而从他闻则以听法、解答问题等方式转起。因为在舍离应施物、礼敬、祈请之时,大多会说法;在问难等时,则会解答,或作反问、讨论等。戒所成的福德事,以欢悦、喜、轻安、乐、定作为近因的方式而成为共通,成为思所成慧的近因。因为具戒者于省察戒时,会有欢悦等生起;而心得定者,则能胜任于法之思惟。显示巴利原文
Dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā mandapaññassa uppajjanato samathaṃ āvahantī hutvā samathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, sukhāpaṭipadā khippābhiññā ñāṇādhikassa uppajjanato vipassanāvahantī hutvā vipassanāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, avasesā dve paṭipadāpi nātipaññassa uppajjanato samathassa padaṭṭhānanti gahetabbā. Tena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘itarā pana tissopi paṭipadā samathaṃ āvahantī’’tiādi (netti. aṭṭha. 34). Dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu sayameva ekantena dhammassavanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ na hoti, vandanayācanapañhāpucchanādayopi padaṭṭhānaṃ honti, tasmā tehi kāraṇehi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā paratoghosassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, paratoghoso ca dhammassavanapañhāvissajjanādivasena pavatto. Dātabbavatthupariccajanavandanayācanakālesu hi yebhuyyena dhammaṃ desenti, pañhāpucchanādikālesu ca vissajjenti, paṭipucchasākacchādīni vā karonti. Sīlamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu pāmojjapītipassaddhisukhasamādhīhi padaṭṭhānabhāvena sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā cintāmayiyā paññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Sīlavantassa hi sīlaṃ paccavekkhantassa pāmojjādayo honti, samāhito ca dhammacintane samattho hoti.
“修所成福行事”:前前的奢摩他修习与毗婆舍那修习,和布施、戒等福行事之因共通,而为后后的修所成慧、后后的奢摩他修习与毗婆舍那修习的近因。因此,义注中说:“‘共通’并非如种子对于芽,亦非如见地等对于入决定等那样独特,而是共通,也以其他那些因作为近因。”由于应当宣说:“布施所成、戒所成、修所成的福行事,对于从他闻、思所成、修所成慧的近因地位,阿阇梨已分别解说;果真如此,则那些布施所成等,依次对于教法、多闻、业处实践、道正见的近因地位,便不应存在了。”因此,为了也开示如此转起的近因地位,而说了“布施所成的福行事,对于从他闻和闻所成慧……”等。而于义注中:显示巴利原文
Bhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthūti purimā purimā samathabhāvanā ceva vipassanābhāvanā ca puññakiriyavatthudānasīlādīhi kāraṇehi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā bhāvanāmayiyā paññāya pacchimāya pacchimāya samathabhāvanāya ceva vipassanābhāvanāya ca padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ – ‘‘sādhāraṇanti na bījaṃ viya aṅkurassa, dassanabhūmiādayo viya niyāmāvakkantiādīnaṃ āveṇikaṃ , atha kho sādhāraṇaṃ tadaññakāraṇehipī’’ti. ‘‘Dānamayasīlamayabhāvanāmayapuññakiriyavatthūnaṃ paratoghosacintāmayibhāvanāmayipaññānaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvo ācariyena vibhatto, evaṃ sati tesaṃ dānamayādīnaṃ yathākkamaṃ pariyattibāhusaccakammaṭṭhānānuyogamaggasammādiṭṭhīnaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvo na bhaveyyā’’ti vattabbattā tathāpavattaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvampi dassetuṃ ‘‘dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu parato ca ghosassa sutamayiyā ca paññāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
“现在,由于布施、戒与世间修习,并非仅仅如前面所说,只是从他闻等的近因,而是依次也成为教法、多闻、业处实践、道正见的缘,因此,为了也显示这一理趣,再次以‘布施所成’等扩展了教说。”(《导论义注》34)——已说。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idāni yasmā dānaṃ, sīlaṃ, lokiyabhāvanā ca na kevalaṃ yathāvuttaparatoghosādīnaṃyeva, atha kho yathākkamaṃ pariyattibāhusaccakammaṭṭhānānuyogamaggasammādiṭṭhīnampi paccayā honti, tasmā tampi nayaṃ dassetuṃ puna ‘dānamaya’ntiādinā desanaṃ vaḍḍhesī’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 34) –
其中,布施所成福行事对于从他闻的共通近因状态,应依前文所说之理了知。然而,布施之后,听闻教说,依所闻而广作思惟的人,其转起的闻所成慧,与礼敬、祈请等共通而成为近因。戒所成福行事对于思所成慧的共通近因状态,也已说过。然而,依止清净戒,以“我将生起禅那”、“我将生起道果”等而省察的人,其转起的如理作意,与欢悦等共通而成为近因。修所成福行事对于修所成慧的共通近因状态,也已说过。然而,以名为奢摩他修习的禅那为基,或唯依止已成熟的毗婆舍那状态而转起的正见,与清净戒等共通而成为近因。显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ. Tattha dānamayapuññakiriyavatthuno paratoghosassa sādhāraṇapadaṭṭhānabhāvo heṭṭhā vuttanayena ñātabbo. Dānaṃ pana datvā desanaṃ sutvā sutānusārena vitthāretvā cintentassa pavattamānāya sutamayiyā paññāya vandanayācanādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Sīlamayapuññakiriyavatthunopi cintāmayiyā paññāya sādhāraṇapadaṭṭhānabhāvo vuttoyeva. Parisuddhasīlaṃ pana nissāya ‘‘jhānaṃ nibbattessāmi, maggaphalaṃ nibbattessāmī’’tiādinā paccavekkhantassa pavattamānassa yonisomanasikārassa pāmojjādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Bhāvanāmayapuññakiriyavatthuno bhāvanāmayiyā paññāya sādhāraṇapadaṭṭhānabhāvopi vuttoyeva. Samathabhāvanāsaṅkhātaṃ pana jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vā paripākaṃ vipassanābhāvaṃyeva vā nissāya pavattamānāya sammādiṭṭhiyā parisuddhasīlādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti.
布施等福行事等的外缘等作为近因的情况,阿阇梨已反复分别,我等也已了知。为了说明‘如理住处等也是这些法的近因,应当如所分别的那样,由我等如所了知的那样,分别之后开示’,而说‘如理住处’等。然而在注释书中说:‘同样地,为了显示如理住处等是身远离、心远离等的原因这一理趣,而说如理住处等。’由于依止于如理住处而住者,其身远离与心远离得以增长,其定亦得以增长,故如理住处成为身远离、心远离以及近行定、安止定的近因,并与戒等共通。‘善士亲近’是指:从亲近善士而生起的、应作为所缘的信;或者,依此获得亲近缘之后,在亲近者相续中生起的先前之信。此善士亲近,对于具信者于三宝所生的三种不坏净而言,成为与三宝功德等共通的近因;亲近了能授予止的得相之善士后,依彼所给之理趣而住、应被修习的止,其善士亲近则成为与戒、喜、悦等共通的近因。由于自正愿者能令厌离恶行等生起,故自正愿成为与生、老等审察共通的惭的近因;由于自正愿显示巴利原文
Dānamayapuññakiriyavatthuādīnaṃ paratoghosādīnaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvo punappunaṃ ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘patirūpadesavāsādayopi imesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānānīti yathā vibhajitabbā, amhehi ca viññātabbā, tathā vibhajitvā dassethā’’ti vattabbattā tepi vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘patirūpadesavāso’’tiādimāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘tathā patirūpadesavāsādayo kāyavivekacittavivekādīnaṃ kāraṇaṃ hontīti imaṃ nayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘patirūpadesavāso’tiādimāhā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 34) vuttaṃ. Patirūpadesaṃ nissāya vasantassa kāyavivekacittavivekavaḍḍhanato, samādhivaḍḍhanato ca patirūpadesavāso kāyacittavivekassa ca upacārasamādhiappanāsamādhissa ca sīlādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sappurisūpanissayoti sappurisasantāne pavatto payirupāsato ālambitabbo pasādo, tato vā upanissayaṃ labhitvā payirupāsantānaṃ santāne pavatto pubbapasādo yathāvidho sappurisūpanissayo payirupāsantassa saddhāsampannassa ratanattaye tiṇṇaṃ aveccappasādānaṃ ratanattayaguṇādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā padaṭṭhānaṃ, samathassa labhananimittadāyakaṃ sappurisaṃ payirupāsitvā tena dinnanaye ṭhatvā pavattetabbassa samathassa sappurisūpanissayo sīlapāmojjapītādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Attasammāpaṇihitassa pāpajigucchādīnaṃ sambhavato attasammāpaṇidhānaṃ jātivayādipaccavekkhaṇena sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā hiriyā ca padaṭṭhānaṃ, attasammāpaṇihitassa nibbidādīnaṃ sambhavato sīlādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā vipassanāya ca padaṭṭhānaṃ.
以彼分断等方式舍断不善,成为与厌离智等共通的善思择、省察随观、慧以及圣道定根的近因。法善说性,即随顺闻法善说而生起的善根,名为善根种植,此善根种植成为由那种善根所生的世间、出世间成就以及果等至的近因。僧善行性,即由于僧团的善行,成为僧团护持者们善行、具敬重、接受教言的近因。师圆满,即对于不了知导师及法之功德者,令其生信;对于已信者及仅有少许信者,令其信更增广、增长的近因。无碍别解脱律仪,即在僧团中或大众中,为了折伏恶性、恶口、恶戒之人,以及为了具足别解脱律仪等戒的可爱之人得安住之近因。然而,当知这些也是与其他相应的种种原因共通而成为近因的。显示巴利原文
Tadaṅgādivasena akusalapariccāgo nibbidāñāṇādīhi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā kusalavīmaṃsāya paṭisaṅkhānupassanāya paññāya ca ariyamaggasamādhindriyassa ca padaṭṭhānaṃ. Dhammasvākkhātatā svākkhātadhammassavanānusārena pavattakusalamūlakā lokiyalokuttarasampatti kusalamūlaropanā nāma, tāya ca tathāvidhakusalamūlakāya phalasamāpattiyā ca padaṭṭhānaṃ. Saṅghasuppaṭipannatā saṅghasuṭṭhutāya saṅghassa upaṭṭhākānaṃ suṭṭhubhāvāya sappatissavāya vacanasampaṭicchanabhāvāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Satthusampadā satthari ceva dhammādīsu ca guṇaajānanatāya appasannānañca pasādāya pasannānañca appamattakapasādānañca bhiyyobhāvāya vaḍḍhanāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Appaṭihatapātimokkhatā saṅghamajjhe vā parisamajjhe vā dummaṅkūnaṃ dummukhānaṃ dussīlānaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāya, pesalānaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarādisīlasampannānaṃ puggalānaṃ phāsuvihārāya ca padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Honto pana yathānurūpehi aññehi kāraṇehi sādhāraṇaṃ hutvā hotīti veditabbo.
由于应当问:‘在《随顺分经》等中所说的法地、近因,其应被分别的情况,我等应如何了知、如何信受?’故说‘因此他说’等语。其义应依上述之理而了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vāsanābhāgiyasuttādīsu vuttadhammabhūmipadaṭṭhānānaṃ vibhattihārena vibhajitabbabhāvo amhehi kena jānitabbo saddahitabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
因为按理当说:“至此,分别理趣已告圆满,再无其他应加运用”,所以称为“已运用分别理趣”。在诸经中,凡有宣说诸法等之处,即随所可得之理,于彼经所说彼彼法中配合了某种分别理趣;此分别理趣即是被择取、被运用、被结合者——应如此看待此义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettāvatā ca vibhattihāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto vibhattihāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Yattha yattha sutte ye ye dhammādayo vuttā, tattha tattha sutte vuttesu tesu tesu dhammādīsu yathālābhavasena yo yo vibhattihāro yojito, so so vibhattihāro niddhāretvā yutto yojitoti attho daṭṭhabbo.
然而,智者唯应依循注疏与复注的理趣,将深奥之义详尽分别后加以把握。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusāreneva gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
9. 转换理趣分别之阐明显示巴利原文
9. Parivattanahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
35 35. 以某种不共的解说——即分别理趣的分别——将经中所说的法等加以分别,此不共解说的分别便已圆满。因为应被提问:“什么是转换理趣分别”,所以说了“其中,什么是转换理趣”等句。“其中”是指:在他们所标明的十六种说示理趣等中,哪一种不共的解说名为转换理趣、转换理趣分别?这是提问。“于善不善法”等指示,即如今由我所说的“于正见之补特伽罗”等句,此广说不共的解说便是转换理趣、转换理趣分别。应如此领解此义。显示巴利原文
35. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇāvisesabhūtena vibhattihāravibhaṅgena sutte vuttā dhammādayo vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇāvisesabhūto vibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo parivattanahāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo parivattano hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso parivattano hāro parivattanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Kusalākusale dhamme’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘sammādiṭṭhissa purisapuggalassā’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso parivattano hāro parivattanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti attho gahetabbo.
为回应这样的询问:“在所解说的经中,已指示的应修习之善,其对立面是什么?又应如何转换?”为阐明此应修习之善的对立面即是如此,且应依应被断除的性质作转换,故说“于正见者”等。然而,在注释书中——显示巴利原文
‘‘Saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte niddiṭṭhassa katamassa bhāvitabbassa kusalassa katamo paṭipakkho, kathaṃ parivattetabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā imassa bhāvitabbassa kusalassa ayaṃ paṭipakkho, evaṃ pahātabbabhāvavasena parivattetabboti dassento ‘‘sammādiṭṭhissa purisapuggalassā’’tiādimāha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
“其中,由于在所解说的经中,将已指示的善、不善法的对立面——不善、善法,依应被断除的性质等而拣择,即是从对立面作转换,因此开始说‘于正见者,邪见已灭尽’等。”(《导论注》35)显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha yasmā saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte yathāniddiṭṭhānaṃ kusalākusaladhammānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūte akusalakusaladhamme pahātabbabhāvādivasena niddhāraṇaṃ paṭipakkhato parivattanaṃ, tasmā ‘sammādiṭṭhissa purisapuggalassa micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā bhavatī’tiādi āraddha’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 35) –
以上已说。因为对于能断的善法,以应被断除的性质作简择;对于应被断除的不善法,以能断的性质作简择,这便称为从对立面而转变。其中,“正见者”是指拥有正确、善美、殊胜之见的人。因为这一教说是依人而立的,故说“士夫、人”。而此正见,无论它是依信业、业果等而转起,或依无常等观而转起,或依道正见而转起,都被无余地统摄了。当此正见修习时,邪见即被断除、灭尽;若仅邪见灭尽,那么其余不善法则尚未灭尽。显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ. Pahāyakassa hi dhammassa pahātabbabhāvavasena niddhāraṇaṃ, pahātabbassa ca dhammassa pahāyakabhāvavasena niddhāraṇaṃ paṭipakkhato parivattanaṃ nāma hoti. Tattha sammādiṭṭhissāti sammā sundarā pasatthā diṭṭhi yassa puggalassāti sammādiṭṭhi. Puggalapadaṭṭhānā hi ayaṃ desanā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘purisapuggalassā’’ti. Sā pana sammādiṭṭhi kammakammaphalādisaddahanavasena vā aniccādivipassanāvasena vā maggasammādassanavasena vā pavattā niravasesāva gahitā. ‘‘Yāya bhāvitāya sammādiṭṭhiyā pahātabbā micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā bhavati, yadi kevalā micchādiṭṭhiyeva nijjiṇṇā bhavati, evaṃ sati tadavasesā akusalā dhammā ajiṇṇā
由于可说“可能存在”,故说“凡以邪见为缘……”等。以邪见为缘,种种恶不善法可能生起、堪能生起;而这些不善法,对于这位具足正见的士夫、人,已被灭尽、应被断除,具有不再生起的自性。因此,世尊说:“以取灭故,有灭。”显示巴利原文
Bhaveyyu’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘ye cassa micchādiṭṭhipaccayā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Micchādiṭṭhipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalāyeva dhammā ca uppajjeyyuṃ uppajjanārahā bhaveyyuṃ, te ca akusalā dhammā assa sammādiṭṭhisampannassa purisapuggalassa nijjiṇṇā pahātabbārahā anuppajjanasabhāvā honti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘upādānanirodhā bhavanirodho’’ti (udā. 2; mahāva. 1).
由于可以说:“如果具足正见的士夫、人的邪见及以彼为缘的不善法被灭尽,那么以正见为缘的善法可能不会生起”,因此说“依正见为缘……”等。对于这位具足正见的士夫、人,堪能生起的、依正见为缘的种种善法——奢摩他、毗婆舍那或菩提分法——得以生起;而这些已生起的法,在此具足正见的士夫、人的相续中,通过一再转起的方式达到修习圆满。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yadi sammādiṭṭhissa purisapuggalassa micchādiṭṭhi, tappaccayā akusaladhammāyeva nijjiṇṇā bhavanti, evaṃ sati sammādiṭṭhipaccayā kusalā dhammā na sambhaveyyu’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘sammādiṭṭhipaccayā cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Assa sammādiṭṭhisampannassa purisapuggalassa uppajjanārahā sammādiṭṭhipaccayā aneke kusalā samathavipassanā vā bodhipakkhiyā vā dhammā sambhavanti, uppannā ca te dhammā assa sammādiṭṭhisampannassa purisapuggalassa santāne punappunaṃ pavattanavasena bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
正见的对立面——邪见,以及以彼为缘的不善法的转变方式,已由阿阇梨分别解说,我们也已了知。由于可说:“正思惟法的对立面法应如何转变?”故说“正思惟的士夫、人……”等。其联结义等应依前说之理了知。正语者,即拥有善、美、清净之语的人,即彼正语者。“士夫、人”等的意义也应依前说之理了知。而此处的差别义是:正解脱智见者,即拥有不颠倒的、正确的解脱智见的人;对于彼正解脱智见者——即具足观察智见的士夫、人,其“我们未解脱而以为解脱”的、依邪执而转起的邪解脱智见,被灭尽、消失。“凡彼……”等的衔接等,应依前说之理了知。显示巴利原文
Sammādiṭṭhiyā paṭipakkhānaṃ micchādiṭṭhiyā, tappaccayānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ parivattanabhāvo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘sammāsaṅkappassa dhammassa paṭipakkho dhammo kathaṃ parivattetabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘sammāsaṅkappassa purisapuggalassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yojanattha ādayo vuttanayānusārena veditabbā. Sammā sundarā pasatthā vācā yassa puggalassāti sammāvāco, tassa sammāvācassa. ‘‘Purisapuggalassā’’tiādīnaṃ atthopi vuttanayena veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana visesatthosammā aviparītato vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ yassa puggalassāti sammāvimuttiñāṇadassano, tassa sammāvimuttiñāṇadassanassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇadassanasampannassa purisapuggalassa ‘‘avimuttāva samānā vimuttā maya’’nti micchābhinivesavasena pavattaṃ micchāvimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ nijjiṇṇaṃ vigataṃ bhavati. ‘‘Ye cassā’’tiādīnaṃ anusandhyādiko vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
36 因为应这样问:“依‘正见者’等所说,正见等诸善法的对立面——邪见等诸不善法,是否应以应断的方式翻转?”为了说明离杀生等诸善法的对立面——杀生等诸不善法,也应以应断的方式翻转,故说“或彼离杀生者……”等。而在义注中说:“如此,以正见等为首显示了邪见等之后,再以离杀生、离不与取、离欲邪行等显示杀生等的翻转,故开始说‘彼……’等”(《导论义注》36)。彼以彼分断等而断除。时语者,即于应说之时,依戒而说应说之语的人,就是那位时语者。显示巴利原文
36. ‘‘Sammādiṭṭhissātiādinā sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ kusalānaṃ paṭipakkhā micchādiṭṭhādikāyeva akusalā pahātabbabhāvena parivattetabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā pāṇātipātāveramaṇiādīnaṃ kusalānaṃ paṭipakkhā pāṇātipātādikāpi akusalā pahātabbabhāvena parivattetabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yassa vā pāṇātipātā paṭiviratassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ sammādiṭṭhiādimukhena micchādiṭṭhiādiṃ dassetvā puna pāṇātipātaadinnādānakāmesumicchācārādito veramaṇiyādīhi pāṇātipātādīnaṃ parivattanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘yassā’tiādi āraddha’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 36) vuttaṃ. Tadaṅgādivasenapahīno hoti. Kālavādissāti vaditabbakāle vaditabbaṃ vadati sīlenāti kālavādī, tassa.
因为应这样问:“唯依所说方式翻转吗?”为了说明也依其他方式翻转,故说“凡有任何……”等。而在义注中说:“以‘凡有任何……’等,显示以正见等为首,邪见等唯以另一种方式翻转”(《导论义注》36)。其中,某些邪见者、邪思惟者等人,诽谤其他圣者的圣八支道。现见的,即致力于现见者;同法者,即依法、依理而行者。应被呵责的,即具足应被呵责之相者。论诘与随诘,就是论诘与随诘;这些贤者诽谤正见法。以彼诽谤故,他们不应被供养、不应被尊敬,不应被称赞、不应被赞叹。如这些中,应作这样的联结:这些贤者诽谤正思惟法,或正语法等,各别各别地诽谤正思惟法。因此,那些邪思惟者,这些贤者不应被供养、不应被称赞……乃至……这些贤者诽谤正解脱法。因此,那些邪语者,这些贤者不应被供养、不应被称赞。这些贤者诽谤正解脱智见法。因此,那些邪解脱者,这些贤者不应被供养、不应被称赞。这些贤者诽谤正解脱智见法。因此,那些邪解脱智见者,这些贤者不应被供养、不应被称赞。另有“邪解脱智见”的文本。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathāvuttappakāreneva parivattetabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā aññena pakārenapi parivattetabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ye ca kho kecī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘ye ca kho kecītiādinā sammādiṭṭhiādimukheneva micchādiṭṭhiādīhi eva parivattanaṃ pakārantarena dassetī’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 36) vuttaṃ. Tattha keci micchādiṭṭhikamicchāsaṅkappādikāyeva puggalā paresaṃ ariyānaṃ ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ garahanti. Sandiṭṭhikā sandiṭṭhe niyuttā, sahadhammikā saha dhammena kāraṇena ye vattanti sahadhammikā. Gārayhā garahitabbākāre yuttā . Vādā ca anuvādā ca vādānuvādā, te bhavanto sammādiṭṭhiñca dhammaṃ garahanti. Tena garahaṇena. Pujjā pūjitabbā ca na bhavanti, pāsaṃsā pasaṃsitabbā ca na bhavanti. Evantiādīsu sammāsaṅkappaṃ vā sammāvācādikaṃ vā visuṃ visuṃ sammāsaṅkappañca te bhavanto dhammaṃ garahanti. Tena hi ye micchāsaṅkappikā, te bhavanto na pujjā ca pāsaṃsā ca…pe… sammāvimuttiñca te bhavanto dhammaṃ garahanti. Tena hi ye micchādiṭṭhivācikā, te bhavanto na pujjā ca pāsaṃsā ca. Sammāvimuttiñāṇadassanañca te bhavanto dhammaṃ garahanti. Tena hi ye micchāvimuttikā, te bhavanto na pujjā ca pāsaṃsā ca. Sammāvimuttiñāṇadassanañca te bhavanto dhammaṃ garahanti. Tena hi ye micchāvimuttiñāṇadassanikā, te bhavanto na pujjā ca pāsaṃsā cāti yojanā kātabbā. ‘‘Micchāvimuttiñāṇadassanā’’tipi pāṭho atthi.
因为应当这样说:“乃是依对圣道正见等的呵斥,来翻转邪见等,而非依对其余诸法的称赞。”为了说明对于欲乐等的称赞,也应翻转出欲乐的对立面——离欲等,故说“若复有人这样说”等。其中,“应受用的诸欲、应遍受用的诸欲、应亲近的诸欲、应依止的诸欲”:在此,以“被欲求故为欲乐”的业成就方式,摄取了事欲;不那么微妙的诸欲,是“应受用的”;过于微妙的诸欲,是“应遍受用的”(遍、从各方面受用)。更为微妙的诸欲,是“应极亲近的”,即决定应亲近的。“应修习的诸欲、应多作的诸欲”:在此,以“欲求故为欲乐”的作者成就方式,摄取了烦恼欲;以一再令生起的方式应修习、应增长、应转起的烦恼欲,以多番一再令生起的方式应作、应增长的烦恼欲。若任何凡夫、欲自在者这样说,对于这些欲自在凡夫中的某些人,以对立的方式,远离他们诸欲的善思心所,便会成为非法、不可亲近。应把握此意。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ariyamaggasammādiṭṭhādīnaṃ garahavaseneva micchādiṭṭhādayo ca parivattetabbā, nāvasesānaṃ pasaṃsāvasenā’’ti vattabbattā kāmādīnaṃ pasaṃsāvasenapi kāmānaṃ paṭipakkhā veramaṇiyādayopi parivattetabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ye ca kho keci evamāhaṃsū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha bhuñjitabbā kāmā, paribhuñjitabbā kāmā, āsevitabbā kāmā, nisevitabbā kāmāti ettha kāmīyanteti kāmāti kammasādhanavasena vatthukāmā gahitā, nātipaṇītā kāmā bhuñjitabbā, atipaṇītā kāmā pari samantato bhuñjitabbā. Atipaṇītatarā kāmā ā bhuso sevitabbā, niyatā sevitabbā. Bhāvayitabbā kāmā, bahulīkātabbā kāmāti ettha pana kāmentīti kāmāti kattusādhanavasena kilesakāmā gahitā, punappunaṃ uppādanavasena bhāvayitabbā vaḍḍhāpetabbā pavattetabbā kilesakāmā, bahūnaṃ punappunaṃ uppādanavasena kātabbā vaḍḍhāpetabbā kilesakāmāti ye ca kāmavasikā puthujjanā keci evamāhaṃsu tesaṃ kāmavasikānaṃ puthujjanānaṃ kesañci tādisehi kāmehi veramaṇī kusalacetanā paṭipakkhavasena adhammo asevitabbo nāma āpajjeyyāti adhippāyo gahetabbo.
为显示依二边而翻转,故说“或复有人”等。若那些依五火等而行的外道如是言:“自苦行随顺是法、是导向解脱的”,则对于这些依五火等而行者,那称为中道、伴随观慧的圣道,便成为非法、非导向解脱、不可修习的。为显示依苦乐而翻转,故说“若复有人”等。那些以“我们将令恶业消尽”等方式自我伤害而行者所转起的身热恼之苦法,被执为是导向解脱的。显示巴利原文
Antadvayavasena parivattanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye vā pana kecī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Attakilamathānuyogo dhammoti niyyānikoti ye vā pana pañcātapādipaṭipannakā tatthiyā evamāhaṃsu, tesaṃ pañcātapādipaṭipannakānaṃ niyyāniko dhammo majjhimāpaṭipadāsaṅkhāto vipassanāsahito ariyamaggo adhammo aniyyāniko abhāvetabbo nāma āpajjeyyāti. Sukhadukkhavasenapi parivattanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye ca kho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pāpaṃ nijjarāpessāmā’’ti attahiṃsanādivasena paṭipannakānaṃ pavatto sarīratāpano dukkho dhammo niyyānikoti.
若任何如此而行者如是指称,对于这些如此而行者,那依无过失的资具受用为缘而生起的身苦止息之乐法,便会成为非法、不应转起的。显示巴利原文
Ye ca tathāpaṭipannakā keci evamāhaṃsu, tesaṃ tathāpaṭipannakānaṃ anavajjapaccayaparibhogavasena pavatto sarīradukkhūpasamo sukho dhammo adhammo appavattetabbo āpajjeyyāti.
阿阇梨已依二边等门对翻转作了分别,我等也已了知。但还应当问:“如何依不净想等而翻转?”为显示应如此依不净想等翻转净想等,故说“或又如”等。而在义注中说:“今为显示依不净想等门而翻转净想等,故说‘或又如’等。”(《导论义注》36)于一切诸行中:即于三地诸行中。对于已起观者,三地诸法因流出烦恼之不净,故显现为不净。显示巴利原文
Antadvayādivasena parivattanaṃ ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ asubhasaññādivasena parivattetabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā evaṃ asubhasaññādivasena subhasaññādikā parivattetabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā vā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘idāni asubhasaññādimukhena subhasaññādiparivattanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘yathā vā panā’tiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 36) vuttaṃ. Sabbasaṅkhāresūti tebhūmakasaṅkhāresu. Āraddhavipassakassa hi tebhūmakā dhammā kilesāsucipaggharaṇakattā asubhato upaṭṭhahanti.
若有人说:“如果仅凭自性,这些就是这些的对立面,而不可翻转,如此一来便不能翻转一切无余的对立面,如何能够翻转?”为了显示翻转之相,所以说了“或无论何法”等。此处,导师内心喜纳、以见接受某个想要翻转的善或不善法,对该喜纳、接受的善或不善法,其对立面即为对立法、非法,依于对该法的不欲、相违方面而被了知、被遍知。导师内心喜纳、以见接受某个想要翻转的可意或不可意法,对该喜纳、接受的可意或不可意法,其对立面即为对立法,同样依于对该法的不欲、相违方面而被了知、被遍知。这便是说:欲翻转者应依所愿法随顺的对立面而作翻转,此即翻转中的对立相。因此,义注中说:“阐明对立之相。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Yadi sarūpatoyeva imesaṃ ime paṭipakkhāti aparivattetabbā siyuṃ, evaṃ sati niravasesā ca paṭipakkhā na sakkā parivattetuṃ, kathaṃ sakkā parivattetu’’nti vattabbattā parivattanalakkhaṇaṃ dassento ‘‘yaṃ yaṃ vā panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kusalaṃ vā akusalaṃ vā yaṃ yaṃ dhammaṃ parivattetukāmo ācariyo cittena rocayati diṭṭhiyā upagacchati, kusalassa vā akusalassa vā tassa tassa rucikassa upagatassa dhammassa yo paṭipakkho, so paṭipakkhadhammo asaddhammo assa dhammassa aniṭṭhato paccanīkato ajjhāpanno pariññāto. Iṭṭhaṃ vā aniṭṭhaṃ vā yaṃ yaṃ dhammaṃ parivattetukāmo ācariyo cittena rocayati diṭṭhiyā upagacchati, iṭṭhassa vā aniṭṭhassa vā tassa tassa rucikassa dhammassa yo paṭipakkho, so paṭipakkhadhammo assa dhammassa aniṭṭhato paccanīkadhammato ajjhāpanno pariññāto bhavatīti parivattetukāmena icchitabbadhammānurūpapaṭipakkhavasena parivattanaṃ kātabbanti parivattane paṭipakkhalakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘paṭipakkhassa lakkhaṇaṃ vibhāvetī’’ti.
为回应“我们如何信受如此所说的翻转?”故说“因此说”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Evaṃ vuttappakāraṃ parivattanaṃ amhehi kathaṃ saddahitabba’’nti vattabbatā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
应说:“至此,翻转之摄句已究竟圆满,更无其他系属。”所以说了“已系属:翻转之摄句”。于某经中,当善与不善被指明时,依对立而引出,随其可能,某一翻转之摄句便被系属;在该经中,当(善与不善)被指明时,依对立而引出,各个相应的翻转之摄句便如是被系属、被确立、被结合、被贯穿。当知此义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettāvatā parivatto hāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto parivattano hāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmiṃ sutte kusalākusale niddiṭṭhe paṭipakkhavasena nīharitvā yathāsambhavaṃ yo yo parivattano hāro niyutto, tasmiṃ sutte niddiṭṭhe paṭipakkhavasena nīharitvā so so parivattano hāro niyutto niddhāretvā yutto yojitoti attho gahetabboti.
然而,智者当依义注与复注,详细分别深义而受持之。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
10. 同义夺格分别之阐释显示巴利原文
10. Vevacanahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
37 以作为特别赞叹的转起摄句分别,应被翻转的经义已得分别,故彼作为特别赞叹的翻转摄句分别已告圆满。因应问:“何为同义语摄句分别?”故而说:“其中,何为同义语摄句”等。其中,“其中”即于所指的十六种说示摄句等之中。问:何为作为特别赞叹的同义语摄句、同义语摄句分别?对于“同义语有多种”等指示,如今由我所说明的“一法,世尊”等广分别、特别赞叹,即是同义语摄句、同义语摄句分别,应把握此义。因应问:“哪些同义语已被确定?那些同义语又是哪些?”故说“如同一”等。其义为:如同一法——应了知之法、自性法或应令了知之法,世尊以种种方式及同义语,彼此而指示,如是种种方式的同义语应被了知。因应说:“那些同义语,世尊如何说?”故说“如世尊说”等。如同种种方式的同义语——显示巴利原文
37. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena pavattanahāravibhaṅgena parivattetabbā suttatthā vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto parivattanahāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo vevacanahāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo vevacano hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vevacano hāro vevacanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Vevacanāni bahūnī’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘ekaṃ bhagavā dhamma’’ntiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso vevacano hāro vevacanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti attho gahetabbo. ‘‘Yāni vevacanāni niddhāritāni, katamāni tāni vevacanānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yathā eka’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Ekaṃ viññātabbaṃ dhammaṃ sabhāvadhammaṃ paññāpetabbaṃ vā dhammaṃ aññamaññehi yathā yehi pakārehi ceva vevacanehi ca bhagavā niddisati, tathāpakārāni vevacanāni viññātabbānīti attho. ‘‘Tāni vevacanāni kinti bhagavā āhā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yathāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā yaṃyaṃpakārāni vevacanāni –
期望、希求与欢喜,诸流安住于种种界中;
无明为根所生的种种渴求,我皆已连根断尽。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Āsā ca pihā ca abhinandanā ca, anekadhātūsu sarā patiṭṭhitā; Aññāṇamūlappabhavā pajappitā, sabbā mayā byantikatā samūlikā’’ti. –
世尊说:应了知种种如是类的同义词,这是它的含义。显示巴利原文
Bhagavā āha, taṃtaṃpakārāni vevacanāni viññātabbānīti attho.
对同一法以种种异门同义词加以指称,其果益在注释书(《导论》注第37条)中已多处宣说,故此处不赘述。因应问“何为望,何为欲”等,故有“所谓‘望’者”等说。对未来事物生起“必将到来”的期盼,即是期盼者所起的期盼,此人此期盼称为“望”。对现在事物生起的希求,即是希求者所起的希求;又或见其他更胜者后,生起“愿我亦得如是”的羡慕,即是羡慕者所起的羡慕,此希求称为“欲”。缘未来事而转起的渴爱称为“望”,缘未来与现在事而转起的渴爱称为“欲”,然二者同属渴爱性故为一性,唯是一法。所愿之事的成就为“事成就”,依此渴爱而起护持为“护持”,对事成就的护持为“事成就护持”。于护持者所生的渴爱,此渴爱名为“欢喜”。显示巴利原文
Ekasseva dhammassa anekehi pariyāyabhūtehi vevacanehi niddisane phalaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 37) bahudhā vuttaṃ, tasmā amhehi na dassitaṃ. ‘‘Katamā āsā, katamā pihādī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘āsā nāma vuccatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā bhavissassa atthassa āsīsanā avassaṃ āgamissatīti yā āsā assa āsīsantassa puggalassa uppajjati, tassa āsīsanā ‘‘āsā nāmā’’ti vuccati. Vattamānassa yā patthanā assa patthayantassa uppajjati, seyyataraṃ vā aññaṃ disvā ‘‘ediso ahaṃ bhaveyya’’nti yā pihā assa pihayantassa uppajjati, sā patthanā ‘‘pihā nāmā’’ti vuccati. Anāgatatthaṃ ārabbha pavattā taṇhā ‘‘āsā’’ti vuccati, anāgatapaccuppannatthaṃ ārabbha pavattā taṇhā ‘‘pihā’’ti vuccati, tathāpi taṇhābhāvena ekattā eko dhammova atthassa icchitassa nipphatti atthanipphatti, paṭipāleti etāya taṇhāyāti paṭipālanā, atthanipphattiyā paṭipālanāti atthanipphattipaṭipālanā. Yā taṇhā assa pālayantassa puggalassa uppajjati, sā taṇhā ‘‘abhinandanā’’ti vuccati.
为回答“由渴爱护持的事成就,是哪种事成就?”这一问题,便从“有情”与“行作”两方面加以分别而说明:“可爱的亲戚,或可爱的法”等。其中,“亲戚”一词也包括了朋友、亲属等。而“法”即指可爱色所缘等六种,凡渴爱者以渴爱于此欢喜,此渴爱即称为“欢喜”。对于可厌的亲戚或法,由于颠倒而执为不可厌的亲戚或法,或因自性而执为不可厌,凡渴爱者以渴爱于此欢喜,此渴爱亦称为“欢喜”——应如此连结而取其义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yā atthanipphatti taṇhāya paṭipāletabbā, katamā sā atthanipphattī’’ti pucchitabbattā taṃ atthanipphattiṃ sattato vā saṅkhārato vā vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘piyaṃ vā ñātiṃ, piyaṃ vā dhamma’’ntiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘ñāti’’nti iminā mittabandhavādayopi gahitā. Dhammaṃ pana piyarūpārammaṇādikaṃ chabbidhampi yāya taṇhāya taṇhiko abhinandati, sā taṇhā ‘‘abhinandanā nāmā’’ti vuccati. Paṭikkūlaṃ ñātiṃ vā dhammaṃ vā vipallāsavasena appaṭikkūlaṃ ñātiṃ vā dhammaṃ vā sabhāvavasena appaṭikkūlato yāya taṇhāya taṇhiko abhinandati , sā taṇhā vā ‘‘abhinandanā nāmā’’ti vuccatīti yojetvā attho gahetabbo.
为回答“世尊所说‘流’的多种界中,所描述的渴爱是哪些界?”这一问题,为显示那些界的自相,故说“眼界”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yāsu anekāsu dhātūsu vuttappakārā taṇhā ‘sarā’ti bhagavatā vuttā, katamā tā dhātuyo’’ti pucchitabbattā tā dhātuyo sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘cakkhudhātū’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
为回答“于那些界中,哪种流依止、转起于哪种界?”这一问题,为作出确定并显示“此流依止、转起于此界”,故说“流者,即某些胜解色者”等。其中,“某些”指被称为“流”的色渴之渴爱者。“胜解色者”指胜解、执著于称为色界的所缘。由此句,名为色渴的流依止、转起于色界之义已被采纳。同样,由“某些胜解声者”等句,名为声渴等的流依止、转起于声界等义,亦同此取其流义。“某些胜解法者”:此处以“法”一词,取眼界、耳界、鼻界、舌界、身界、七识界、法界,故虽依止处而取十八界,也应视为只取了六种。为回答“在胜解色等之中,有多少词属于渴爱部分,是渴爱的同义词?”这一问题,为作出确定并显示“如此如此多的词属于渴爱部分,是渴爱的同义词”,故说“其中,有六种依家的忧”等。“其中”指在色等六种之中。“六种依家的忧”指依赖在色等六种中转起的渴爱、爱著而生起的六种忧。其余亦同此理。为回应“世尊也说了六种依家的舍,为何未予引用?”的疑问,故说“六种依家的舍,属于见部分”,因属于见部分,故未引用,这便是其义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tāsu dhātūsu katamāya dhātuyā katamā sarā patiṭṭhitā pavattā’’ti pucchitabbattā imāya dhātuyā ayaṃ sarā patiṭṭhitā pavattāti niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘sarāti keci rūpādhimuttā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kecīti sarāsaṅkhātāya rūpataṇhāya taṇhikā puggalā. Rūpādhimuttāti rūpadhātusaṅkhāte ārammaṇe adhimuttā ajjhositā. Iminā padena rūpataṇhāsaṅkhātā sarā rūpadhātuyā patiṭṭhitā pavattāti gahitā, ‘‘keci saddādhimuttā’’tiādīhipi saddataṇhāsaṅkhātādayo sarā saddadhātuyādīsu patiṭṭhitā pavattā sarāva gahitā. Keci dhammādhimuttāti ettha dhammaggahaṇena cakkhudhātusotadhātughānadhātujivhādhātukāyadhātusattaviññāṇadhātudhammadhātuyo gahitā, tasmā aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo patiṭṭhānabhāvena gahitāpi chabbidhāva gahitāti daṭṭhabbā. ‘‘Rūpādhimuttādīsu kittakāni padāni taṇhāpakkhe taṇhāya vevacanā’’ti pucchitabbattā etādisāni ettakāni padāni taṇhāpakkhe taṇhāvevacanānīti niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha yāni cha gehasitānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu chasu rūpādīsu. Cha gehasitāni domanassānīti chasu rūpādīsu pavattaṃ taṇhāpemaṃ nissāya pavattāni cha domanassāni. Esa nayo sesesupi. ‘‘Cha upekkhā gehasitāpi bhagavatā vuttā, kasmā na gahitā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yā cha upekkhā gehasitā, ayaṃ diṭṭhipakkho’’ti vuttaṃ, diṭṭhipakkhattā na gahitāti attho.
38 因应说明“所述类型的渴爱如何被取著”,故说“即彼以希求行相”等。正是所述类型的渴爱,由于以希求行相生起,故以期望等异门宣说;由于在色等所缘法中欢喜,故以“法喜”异门宣说;由于在色等所缘法中如吞没后令其成熟般执著而住,故以“法执著”异门宣说。因此,它们是渴爱的同义词。显示巴利原文
38. ‘‘Kathaṃ vuttappakārā taṇhā eva gahitā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘sāyeva patthanākārenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sā vuttappakārā eva taṇhā patthanākārena pavattanato āsādipariyāyena vuttā, rūpādiārammaṇadhammesu nandanato ‘‘dhammanandī’’ti pariyāyena vuttā, rūpādiārammaṇadhammesu gilitvā pariniṭṭhapeti viya ajjhosāya tiṭṭhanato ‘‘dhammajjhosāna’’nti pariyāyena vuttā, tasmā taṇhāya vevacanāni honti.
渴爱的同义词已由阿阇梨指出,我等也已了知。由于应问“什么是心的同义词?”,故说“心、意”等。“思考所缘,故为心;了知,故为意;识别,故为识”等义,在诸论(《法集论》注第5条)中已说,故我等未加详释。这些正是同义词,是此的同义词,我们仅说至此。“慧根、慧力”等则是慧的同义词。显示巴利原文
Taṇhāya vevacanāni ācariyena niddiṭṭhāni, amhehi ca ñātāni, ‘‘katamāni cittassa vevacanānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘cittaṃ mano’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ārammaṇaṃ cintetīti cittaṃ. Manati jānātīti mano. Vijānātīti viññāṇa’’ntiādinā attho pakaraṇesu (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 5) vuttova, tasmā amhehi na vitthārito. Vevacanāniyeva imāni imassa vevacanānīti ettakāniyeva kathayissāma. ‘‘Paññindriyaṃ paññābala’’ntiādīni paññāvevacanāni.
“阿拉汉、正自觉者”等是佛陀的同义词。由于应问“那些同义词宣说于何处?”,故说“如于佛随念中所说”等。在佛随念的教导中,世尊所说“彼世尊亦是阿拉汉……乃至……世尊”的种种同义词,应知即是佛随念的同义词,即佛陀的同义词。“如于法随念中所说”等,也应同样作连结。显示巴利原文
‘‘Arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’tiādīni buddhassa vevacanāni. ‘‘Tāni kattha desitānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yathā ca buddhānussatiyaṃ vutta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Buddhānussatidesanāyaṃ yathā ca yaṃyaṃpakāraṃ vevacanaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṃ…pe… bhagavato’’ti vuttaṃ, etaṃpakāraṃ vevacanaṃ buddhānussatiyā vevacanaṃ buddhassa vevacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Yathā ca dhammānussatiyaṃ vutta’’ntiādīsupi evameva yojanā kātabbā.
“故说”等语的衔接义,以及“同义词句是已结合的”等语的衔接义,应依照前文所述的方法来了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tenāhā’’tiādyānusandhyādiattho ceva ‘‘niyutto vevacano hāro’’tiānusandhyādiattho ca vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
然而,诸智者应依注释书与复注,将深奥之义详尽分别之后而领受。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
11. 施设句分别之阐释显示巴利原文
11. Paññattihāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
39 第三十九项:凡是以注释之别的分别分析了同义词,那个作为注释之别的分别便是圆满的。由于应当问“什么是施设之分别?”,故说“其中,什么是施设之分别?”等语。其中,“其中”是指在前已指出的十六种说示方式等之中,哪一种作为注释之别的分别是施设之分别、是名为施设之分别的分别呢?现在,从我所说的“世尊以一种法,以种种施设来教导”等开示,应当这样理解:名为“以通常的言语宣说”等的、作为广释注释之别的施设之分别,即是名为施设之分别的分别。显示巴利原文
39. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vibhaṅgena vevacanāni vibhattāni, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo paññattihāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo paññattihāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso paññattihāro paññattihāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Ekaṃ bhagavā dhammaṃ paññattīhi vividhāhi desetī’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘yā pakatikathāya desanā’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso paññattihāro paññattihāravibhaṅgo nāmāti gahetabbo.
由于应问:“世尊以哪些种种施设教导一法?哪些是那些种种施设?”故说“以通常之语”等。其中,“以通常之语”是指:不特别区分“味著”等词义的差别,而只依义理本身自然生起的言说,即善巧作意的法谈。这种教导能将所意指的义理,以安立、建立的方式令所化众生的相续了知,因此称为安立施设;以那种施设来教导法,这就是它的含义。由于应问:“被称为‘以通常之语而说’的施设是什么?”故如此提问后,为了详细显示而说“什么是通常之语而说?”等。在注释书中说:“如此,为了详细解说简略提到的‘以通常之语而说’之义,先问‘什么是通常之语而说?’,然后说‘四谛’等。”其中,教导与所应教导者虽有所差别,但以无差别的譬喻说“教导是四谛”,其意为:四谛的施设即名为教导。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yāhi vividhāhi paññattīhi ekaṃ dhammaṃ bhagavā deseti, katamā tā vividhā paññattiyo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yā pakatikathāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pakatikathāyāti assādādipadatthavisesaṃ aniddhāretvā atthasabhāvena pavattāya kathāya sādhukaṃ manasikāradhammakathāya yā desanā yathādhippetamatthaṃ veneyyasantāne nikkhipati patiṭṭhapeti pakārena ñāpeti, tasmā nikkhepapaññatti, tāya paññattiyā dhammaṃ desetīti attho. ‘‘Yā paññatti ‘pakatikathāya desanā’ti vuttā, katamā sā’’ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘kā ca pakatikathāya desanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –‘‘iti ‘pakatikathāya desanā’ti saṅkhepena vuttamatthaṃ vitthārena vibhajituṃ ‘kā ca pakatikathāya desanā’ti pucchitvā ‘cattāri saccānī’tiādimāhā’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 39) vuttaṃ. Tattha desanādesetabbassa bhedabhāvepi abhedopacārena ‘‘desanā cattāri saccānī’’ti vuttaṃ, catunnaṃ saccānaṃ paññatti desanā nāmāti attho.
由于应问:“世尊如何说那谛施设?”故说“如世尊所说”。世尊以何种方式所说的种种施设,那种施设便应依那种方式被了知。世尊所说的“这是苦”这一施设,应视为:是五蕴的安立施设,是六界的安立施设,是十八界的安立施设,是十二处的安立施设,是十根的安立施设。然而,蕴、界、处、根仅是世间法。依逼迫、有为、热恼、变坏这些共通之义,将它们统合为一,说为“这是苦”。十根是指:眼根、耳根、鼻根、舌根、身根、女根、男根、命根、意根、受根。由于领纳之相为其共相,受根被计为一根;而信根等因属于道支,故不计入。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathaṃ taṃ saccapaññattiṃ bhagavā āhā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yathā bhagavā āhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā yena pakārena bhagavā yaṃ yaṃ paññattiṃ āha, tathā tena pakārena sā paññatti jānitabbā. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkha’’nti yaṃ paññattiṃ bhagavā āha, ayaṃ ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’nti paññatti pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ nikkhepapaññatti, channaṃ dhātūnaṃ nikkhepapaññatti, aṭṭhārasannaṃ dhātūnaṃ nikkhepapaññatti, dvādasannaṃ āyatanānaṃ nikkhepapaññatti, dasannaṃ indriyānaṃ nikkhepapaññattīti yojanā kātabbā. Khandhadhātuāyatanindriyāni ca lokiyāneva. Pīḷanasaṅkhatasantāpavipariṇāmatthatāsāmaññena ekattaṃ upanetvā ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’nti vuttā. Dasannaṃ indriyānanti cakkhusotaghānajivhākāyaitthipurisajīvitamanavedanindriyānaṃ dasannaṃ. Anubhavanalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā vedanindriyaṃ ekanti gahitaṃ, saddhindriyādīni pana maggapariyāpannattā na gahitāni.
于抟食中:即依处所譬喻而称为食素的食中,由于贪非由圣道所断,故以随眠、漏或渴求的方式而有喜。有爱——此处道理亦然。已住立、已增长:因获得了能牵引结生的能力而住立,故应被理解为既住立又增长。诸行:即能产生后有、为再生之因的诸行。生、老、死:生具有再生之相,而非仅是生起;老具有衰熟之相,而非仅是住立;死具有破坏之相,而非仅是坏灭。因此说“有忧、有悲、有恼”。显示巴利原文
Kabaḷīkāreti ṭhānūpacārena voharite ojāsaṅkhāte āhāre, rāgo ariyamaggena appahātabbattā anusayavasena, āsāvasena vā patthanāvasena vā atthi nandī. Atthi taṇhāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Patiṭṭhitaṃ viruḷhanti paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāpattiyā patiṭṭhitattā patiṭṭhitañceva viruḷhañcāti gahetabbaṃ. Saṅkhārānanti punabbhavanibbattakassa bhavassa abhinibbattihetukānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ. Jātijarāmaraṇanti abhinibbattanalakkhaṇā jāti, na uppādova, paripākalakkhaṇā jarā, na ṭhitiyeva, bhedanalakkhaṇaṃ maraṇaṃ, na bhaṅgameva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sasokaṃ sadaraṃ saupāyāsa’’nti.
“比丘们,若于触食有贪……比丘们,若于意思食有贪……比丘们,若于识食有贪……我说……”此施设因令知苦与集之因,称为因施设。显示巴利原文
‘‘Phasse ce, bhikkhave, āhāre…pe… manosañcetanāya ce, bhikkhave, āhāre…pe… viññāṇe ce, bhikkhave, āhāre atthi rāgo…pe… vadāmī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti dukkhassa ca samudayassa ca pabhavassa paññāpanato pabhavapaññatti nāma.
以流转门分析的施设类别,已由阿阇梨分判,亦为我们所了知。因为需要说明“如何以还灭门分析施设类别?”,所以开示“比丘们,若于段食无贪”等。“比丘们,若于段食……我说无有忧悲恼”,此施设因令知苦的遍知,称为遍知施设;因令知集的断除,称为断除施设;因令知道的修习,称为修习施设;因令知灭的作证,称为作证施设。显示巴利原文
Vaṭṭavasena paññattibhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ vivaṭṭavasena paññattibhedo vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘kabaḷīkāre ce, bhikkhave, āhāre natthi rāgo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kabaḷīkāre…pe… anupāyāsanti vadāmī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti dukkhassa pariññāya ca paññāpanato pariññāpaññatti nāma, samudayassa pahānassa ca paññāpanato pahānapaññatti nāma, maggassa bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, nirodhassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma.
40 以还灭门分析的施设类别,已由阿阇梨分判,亦为我们所了知。因为需要说明“如何以思惟门分析施设类别?”,所以开示“比丘们,应修习定”等。“比丘们,应修习定……如实地了知”,此施设因令知道的修习,称为修习施设;因令知苦的遍知,称为遍知施设;因令知集的断除,称为断除施设;因令知灭的作证,称为作证施设。显示巴利原文
40. Vivaṭṭavasena paññattibhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ sammasanavasena paññattibhedo vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘samādhiṃ, bhikkhave, bhāvethā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Samādhiṃ, bhikkhave, bhāvetha…pe… yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti maggassa bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, dukkhassa pariññāya ca paññāpanato pariññāpaññatti nāma, samudayassa pahānassa ca paññāpanato pahānapaññatti nāma, nirodhassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma.
依思惟门而分的施设差别,已由阿阇梨分析,且为我等所了知。因当说“如何依取蕴门分析施设差别?”,故说“罗陀,应散坏色”等。“罗陀,应散坏色……涅槃”——此施设因令知称为爱的灭尽与灭,故名灭施设;因令知对味著的厌离,故名厌离施设;因令知苦的遍知,故名遍知施设;因令知集的断除,故名断除施设;因令知道的修习,故名修习施设;因令知灭的作证,故名作证施设。显示巴利原文
Sammasanavasena paññattibhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ upādānakkhandhavasena paññattibhedo vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘rūpaṃ, rādha, vikirathā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Rūpaṃ, rādha, vikiratha…pe… nibbāna’’nti ayaṃ paññatti taṇhāsaṅkhātassa rodhassa nirodhassa ca paññāpanato nirodhapaññatti nāma, assādassa nibbidāya ca paññāpanato nibbidāpaññatti nāma, dukkhassa pariññāya ca paññāpanato pariññāpaññatti nāma, samudayassa pahānassa ca paññāpanato pahānapaññatti nāma, maggassa bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, nirodhassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma.
因问:“破坏、毁坏、令散坏色、受、想、行、识,依智慧而行向渴爱灭尽者,了知什么?”故说:“他如实了知‘此是苦’”等。“他如实了知‘此是苦’……如实了知‘导至灭之道’”——此施设因说明对圣谛的证悟,故名证悟施设;因说明见地与安立,故名安立施设;因说明道的修习,故名修习施设;因说明须陀洹果的作证,故名作证施设。“他如实了知‘此是诸漏’……如实了知‘诸漏无余灭尽’”——此施设因说明尽智的生起,故名生起施设;因说明不生智与机缘,故名机缘施设;因说明道的修习,故名修习施设;因说明苦的遍知,故名遍知施设;因说明集的舍断,故名舍断施设;因说明精进根的发勤,故名发勤施设;因说明箭的拔除,故名拔除施设;因说明修习地与安立,故名安立施设;因说明对恶不善法的冲破,故名冲破施设。显示巴利原文
‘‘Rūpavedanāsaññāsaṅkhāraviññāṇāni vikiranto viddhaṃsento vikīḷaniyaṃ karonto paññāya taṇhākkhayāya paṭipajjanto kiṃ pajānātī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so ‘idaṃ dukkha’nti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘So ‘idaṃ dukkha’nti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti…pe… nirodhagāminipaṭipadāti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti saccānaṃ paṭivedhassa paññāpanato paṭivedhapaññatti nāma, dassanabhūmiyā nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, maggassa bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, sotāpattiphalassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma. ‘‘So ‘ime āsavā’ti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe… ‘āsavā asesaṃ nirujjhantī’ti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti khayeñāṇassa uppādassa ca paññāpanato uppādapaññatti nāma, anuppādeñāṇassa okāsassa ca paññāpanato okāsapaññatti nāma, maggassa bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, dukkhassa pariññāya ca paññāpanato pariññāpaññatti nāma, samudayassa pahānassa ca paññāpanato pahānapaññatti nāma, vīriyindriyassa ārambhassa ca paññāpanato ārambhapaññatti nāma, āsāṭikānaṃ āhaṭanāya ca paññāpanato āhaṭanāpaññatti nāma, bhāvanābhūmiyā nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhinighātassa ca paññāpanato abhinighātapaññatti nāma.
41 又,依轮转、依还灭、依法审察、依取蕴、依了知等,于诸谛中种种施设差别,已由阿阇梨分辨,亦为我等所了知。因问:“如何依三转于诸谛中分辨施设差别?”故为显示依三转于诸谛中的施设差别,而说“此是苦,诸比丘”等。然注释书中说:“如是,依轮转与还灭之门,唯依审察与取蕴之门,显示了于诸谛中的施设差别后,今为依三转而显示,故开始说‘此是苦,诸比丘’等。”(引自《藏释注》41)此处,先由遍知开始。“于未曾闻法中”:即依遍知,于前所未闻的四圣谛法中。“眼”:最初见涅槃之义,故名为眼。“智”:如其自性,依作用遍知与作证之义,故名为智。“慧”:如其自性,于作用遍知等已通达,依了知之义,故名为慧。“明”:如是已令了知之义,故名为明。“光”:令发光明之义,故名为光。此眼等一切,皆是慧的同义语。“此是苦,诸比丘……生起”——此施设因说明诸谛之教示,故名教示施设;因说明闻所成慧与安立,故名安立施设;因说明未知当知根的作证,故名作证施设;因说明法轮之转动,故名转动施设。显示巴利原文
41. Vaṭṭavasena vā vivaṭṭavasena vā dhammasammasanavasena vā upādānakkhandhavasena vā pajānanavasena vā saccesu nānāvidho paññattibhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ teparivaṭṭavasena saccesu paññattibhedo vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā teparivaṭṭavasena saccesu paññattibhedaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idaṃ dukkhanti me, bhikkhave’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – ‘‘evaṃ vaṭṭavivaṭṭamukhena sammasanaupādānakkhandhamukheneva saccesu paññattivibhāgaṃ dassetvā idāni teparivaṭṭavasena dassetuṃ ‘idaṃ dukkhanti me bhikkhave’tiādi āraddha’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 41) vuttaṃ. Tattha pubbe parijānanato paṭṭhāya. Ananussutesūti parijānanavasena ananussutesu catūsu saccadhammesu. Cakkhunti paṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanaṭṭhena cakkhu nāma. Yathāsabhāvato kiccaparijānanaṭṭhena sacchikiriyaparijānanaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ nāma. Yathāsabhāvato kiccaparijānanādīnaṃ paṭivijjhitvā pajānanaṭṭhena paññā nāma. Tathā viditakaraṇaṭṭhena vijjā nāma. Ālokobhāsakaraṇaṭṭhena āloko nāma. Idaṃ cakkhādikaṃ sabbaṃ paññāvevacanameva. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhanti me bhikkhave…pe… udapādī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti saccānaṃ desanāya paññāpanato desanāpaññatti nāma, sutamayiyā paññāya nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, anaññātaññassāmītindriyassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma, dhammacakkassa pavattanāya ca paññāpanato pavattanāpaññatti nāma.
“此苦应被遍知……生起”——这一施设由于说明了道之修习,故称为“修习施设”;由于说明了思所成慧与安立,故称为“安立施设”;由于说明了已知根之作证,故称为“作证施设”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Taṃ kho panidaṃ dukkhaṃ pariññeyyaṃ…pe… udapādī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti maggassa bhāvanāya paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, cintāmayiyā paññāya nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, aññindriyassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma.
“此苦已被遍知……生起”——这一施设由于说明了道之修习,故称为“修习施设”;由于说明了修所成慧与安立,故称为“安立施设”;由于说明了具已知根之作证,故称为“作证施设”;由于说明了法轮之转动,故称为“转动施设”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Taṃ kho panidaṃ dukkhaṃ pariññātaṃ…pe… udapādī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti maggassa bhāvanāya paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, bhāvanāmayiyā paññāya nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, aññātāvino indriyassa sacchikiriyāya ca paññāpanato sacchikiriyāpaññatti nāma, dhammacakkassa pavattanāya ca paññāpanato pavattanāpaññatti nāma.
依三转,诸谛中种种施设的差别,已由阿阇梨加以分别,我等也已了知。若问:“如何依善、不善等,分辨所说法之施设差别?”则说“等与不等之生”等。又,于《转法轮经》中,施设之差别已由阿阇梨分别,我等也已了知。若问:“如何于‘等与不等’等偈中,分辨施设之差别?”则说“等与不等”等。所谓“等”,是被衡量、被截断之意,即欲界业;所谓“不等”,是再无其他世间业能与此业等同之意,即广大业,也就是色界、无色界业。由此行令后有生起,故称“生”,此即“生”;令后有造作,故称“有行”;于内心依观而喜乐,故称“内喜”;依止而得定,故称“等至”;于自身中生起,故称“自生”,此即“自生”。牟尼正自觉者舍离了“生”与“有行”、“等”与“不等”,内喜而等至,如破铠甲般,如此破除“自生”——应以此理趣理解。又或者,牟尼正自觉者衡量“等”,见到“不等”之涅槃,以圣道舍离“生”与“有行”。如何舍离?彼牟尼依观而内喜,依止而入近行定与安止定,得等至,如破除铠甲般,如此破除自身中生起的烦恼,以无烦恼而舍业——应以此摄取偈颂之义。显示巴利原文
Teparivaṭṭavasena saccesu nānāvidho paññattibhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ kusalākusalādivasena desitadhammassa paññattibhedo vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tulamatulañca sambhava’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā dhammacakkasutte paññattibhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘tulamatulañcātiādigāthāya kathaṃ paññattibhedo vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tulamatulañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tulīyati paricchijjīyatīti tulaṃ, kāmāvacarakammaṃ, natthi tulaṃ sadisaṃ aññaṃ lokiyakammaṃ assa mahaggatakammassāti atulaṃ, rūpārūpāvacarakammaṃ. Punabbhavaṃ sambhavati etena saṅkhārenāti sambhavo, taṃ sambhavaṃ. Punabbhavaṃ saṅkharotīti bhavasaṅkhāro. Ajjhatte vipassanāvasena ramatīti ajjhattarato. Samathavasena samādhiyatīti samāhito. Attani sambhavatīti attasambhavo, taṃ attasambhavaṃ. Muni sambuddho sambhavaṃ bhavasaṅkhāraṃ tulañca atulañca avassaji, ajjhattarato samāhito kavacaṃ abhindi iva, evaṃ attasambhavaṃ abhindi padālayīti yojanā kātabbā. Atha vā muni sambuddho ‘‘pañcakkhandhā aniccā dukkhā anattā vipariṇāmadhammā, nibbānaṃ pana niccaṃ sukhaṃ asaṅkhataṃ avipariṇāmadhamma’’nti tulaṃ tulayanto atulaṃ nibbānaṃ disvā sambhavaṃ bhavasaṅkhāraṃ ariyamaggena avassaji. Kathaṃ avassaji? So hi muni vipassanāvasena ajjhattarato ca hutvā, samathavasena upacārappanāsu samāhito ca hutvā kavacaṃ abhindi iva, evaṃ attasambhavaṃ attani sañjātaṃ kilesaṃ abhindi padālayi, kilesābhāvena kammañca jahīti gāthāttho gahetabbo.
“同与不同”这一施设,依对一切法的证知而施设,故名证知施设;依对法无碍解的安立而施设,故名安立施设。“牟尼舍弃了有行”这一施设,依对集的舍离而施设,故名舍离施设;依对苦的遍知而施设,故名遍知施设。“内乐、等持”这一施设,依对身至念的修习而施设,故名修习施设;依对心一境性的住立而施设,故名住立施设。“破除了如铠甲般的自生”这一施设,依对心的厌离而施设,故名厌离施设;依对一切知性之取着的施设,故名取着施设;依对无明卵壳的破开而施设,故名破开施设。因为应当说明“如上所说的施设分类,应依何而信受?”故说“因此说”等。由于如上所说的施设分类是依世尊所说“同与不同”等偈颂而成立,故应依此成立之理,信受如上偈颂中所说的施设分类。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tulamatulañca sambhava’’nti paññatti sabbadhammānaṃ abhiññāya paññāpanato abhiññāpaññatti nāma, dhammapaṭisambhidāya nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, ‘‘bhavasaṅkhāramavassaji munī’’ti paññatti samudayassa pariccāgassa ca paññāpanato pariccāgapaññatti nāma, dukkhassa pariññāya ca paññāpanato pariññāpaññatti nāma, ‘‘ajjhattarato samāhito’’ti paññatti kāyagatāya satiyā bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma, cittekaggatāya ṭhitiyā ca paññāpanato ṭhitipaññatti nāma, ‘‘abhindi kavacamivattasambhava’’nti paññatti cittassa abhinibbidāya ca paññāpanato abhinibbidāpaññatti nāma, sabbaññutāya upādānassa ca paññāpanato upādānapaññatti nāma, avijjāṇḍakosānaṃ padālanāya ca paññāpanato padālapaññatti nāma, ‘‘yathāvutto paññattippabhedo kena saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tathāvuttassa paññattippabhedassa sambhavato bhagavā yaṃ ‘‘tulamatula’’ntiādigāthamāha, tathāsambhavato yathāvuttāya gāthāya yathāvutto paññattippabhedo saddahitabboti.
在“同与不同”等偈颂中,施设的分类已由阿阇梨分别解说,我们也已经了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tulamatulañcā’’tiādigāthāyaṃ paññattippabhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto.
因为了知世间诸欲是缠缚,具念者为调伏它们而应修学。
显示巴利原文 ‘Yo dukkhamaddakkhi yatonidānaṃ, kāmesu so jantu kathaṃ nameyya; Kāmā hi loke saṅgoti ñatvā, tesaṃ satīmā vinayāya sikkhe’ti. –
然而,因为应当说明“此偈颂中,施设的分别如何被阐明”,故说“那见到苦”等。那位已开始修观的人,见到一切三界因果之苦从何因生起,他如何会倾心于诸欲呢?他实不应倾心。因为世间诸欲应被视为“缠缚”,故不应倾心。如此,了知此苦的状态与苦因的状态后,为了调伏、平息那些欲,具足身至念的具念者应当修学三学。此偈颂的含义应如此略知。而在注释书(《导论注》41)中则有详细解释。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ pana kathaṃ paññattibhedo vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yo dukkhamaddakkhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yo āraddhavipassako jantu yatonidānaṃ sabbaṃ tebhūmakaṃ hetuphalaṃ dukkhaṃ addakkhi, so āraddhavipassako jantu kāmesu kathaṃ nameyya nametuṃ nārahati. Kāmā loke ‘‘saṅgo’’ti hi yasmā passitabbā, tasmā nametuṃ nārahati, iti etaṃ dukkhabhāvaṃ dukkhahetubhāvaṃ ñatvā tesaṃ kāmānaṃ vinayāya vūpasamāya satimā kāyagatāsatisampanno tīṇi sikkhāni sikkhe sikkheyyāti gāthāttho saṅkhepena viññātabbo. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 41) pana vitthārena saṃvaṇṇito.
“见苦”这一施设,由于安立了苦的同义词及遍知,故成为同义施设及遍知施设。“从何因”这一施设,由于安立了集、生起及断除,故成为生起施设及断除施设。“见”这一施设,由于安立了智眼的同义词及通达,故成为同义施设及通达施设。“他如何会倾心于诸欲”这一施设,由于安立了欲贪的同义词及不耽着,故成为同义施设及不耽着施设。“因为了知世间诸欲是缠缚”这一施设,由于是对诸欲视为怨敌的安立,故名为见施设。因为诸欲因生起无义利而与怨敌相似。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yo dukkha’’nti paññatti dukkhassa vevacanassa ca pariññāya ca paññāpanato vevacanapaññatti, pariññāpaññatti ca hoti. ‘‘Yatonidāna’’nti paññatti samudayassa pabhavassa ca pahānassa ca paññāpanato pabhavapaññatti ceva pahānapaññatti ca hoti. ‘‘Addakkhī’’ti paññatti ñāṇacakkhussa vevacanassa ca paṭivedhassa ca paññāpanato vevacanapaññatti ceva paṭivedhapaññatti ca hoti. ‘‘Kāmesu so jantu kathaṃ nameyyā’’ti paññatti kāmataṇhāya vevacanassa ca anabhinivisassa ca paññāpanato vevacanapaññatti ceva anabhinivesapaññatti ca hoti. ‘‘Kāmā hi loke saṅgoti ñatvā’’ti paññatti kāmānaṃ paccatthikato dassanassa ca paññāpanato dassanapaññatti nāma. Kāmā hi anatthajānanato paccatthikasadisā.
为阐明“它们如何成为无义利之因”,故说“因为诸欲”等。诸欲因被贪欲之火等从内焚烧,故如炭坑喻;因成为腐烂,故如肉脍喻;因被外物所焚烧,故如火聚喻、炽燃火堆喻;因无安住之处,故如悬崖喻;因被类似毒的瞋等所恼害,故如蛇喻。“具念者”这一施设,因是为断除与损减而施设,故称损减施设;因是对身至念安立的施设,故称安立施设;因是对道修习的施设,故称修习施设。“为调伏而修学”这一施设,因是为调伏贪、调伏瞋、调伏痴及通达而施设,故称通达施设。“人”这一施设,因是瑜伽行者同义词的施设,故称同义施设。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kīdisā hutvā anatthajanakā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘kāmā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kāmā rāgaggiādīhi antodayhanato aṅgārakāsūpamā ca, pūtibhāvāpajjanato maṃsapesūpamā ca, bahi aññena dayhanato pāvakakappā jalitaggikkhandhūpamā ca, patiṭṭhānābhāvato papātūpamā ca, visasadisehi dosādīhi parahiṃsanato uragopamā ca. ‘‘Tesaṃ satīmā’’ti paññatti pahānāya apacayassa ca paññāpanato apacayapaññatti nāma, kāyagatāya satiyā nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, maggassa bhāvanāya ca paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma. ‘‘Vinayāya sikkhe’’ti paññattirāgavinayassa dosavinayassa mohavinayassa paṭivedhassa ca paññāpanato paṭivedhapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Jantū’’ti paññatti yogissa vevacanassa ca paññāpanato vevacanapaññatti nāma.
为阐明“jantu一词通常指一般有情,为何此处应指瑜伽行者”,故说“因为当”等。瑜伽行者一旦在某一时刻了知诸欲是缠缚,那时他便以身至念等令善法生起,使诸欲不再生起;那位生起善法的瑜伽行者,为令未生的善法生起而精进,作善精进,因此“jantu”一词应被理解为指瑜伽行者。“人”这一施设,因是为获得未得的禅那等善法而精进的施设,故称精进施设;因是为不满足于微少安立的施设,故称安立施设。“他为令未生的善法生起而精进”这一施设是精进施设。为阐明“由于何种因,为令已生的善法住立而精进这一施设是何种施设”,故说“其中,他为令已生的”等。其中,在彼“未生的”等之中。“他为令已生的善法住立而精进”这一施设,因是对修习与不放逸的施设,故称不放逸施设;因是对精进根安立的施设,故称安立施设;因是对善法守护的施设,故称守护施设;因是对增上心学住立的施设,故称住立施设。为说明“上述施设的分类应依何而信受”,故说“因此说”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Jantūti sāmaññasattavācako saddo kasmā yogivācakoti viññātabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yadā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yogī yadā yasmiṃ kāle kāmā saṅgoti pajānāti, tadā tasmiṃ kāle so yogī kāmānaṃ anuppādāya kusale dhamme kāyagatāsatiādīhi uppādayati, so kusale dhamme uppādento yogī anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ uppādāya vāyamati kusalavīriyaṃ karoti, tasmā yogīvācako jantusaddoti viññātabbo. ‘‘Jantū’’ti ayaṃ paññatti appattassa kusalassa jhānadhammādikassa pattiyā vāyāmassa ca paññāpanato vāyāmapaññatti nāma, oramattikāya asantuṭṭhiyā nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma. ‘‘So anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ uppādāya vāyamatī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti vāyāmapaññatti, ‘‘hetuso uppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ ṭhitiyā vāyamatīti paññatti katamā paññattī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha so uppannāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tasmiṃ ‘‘anuppannāna’’ntiādimhi. ‘‘So uppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ ṭhitiyā vāyamatī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti bhāvanāya appamādassa ca paññāpanato appamādapaññatti nāma, vīriyindriyassa nikkhepassa ca paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma, kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ ārakkhassa ca paññāpanato ārakkhapaññatti nāma, adhicittasikkhāya ṭhitiyā ca paññāpanato ṭhitipaññatti nāma. ‘‘Kena yathāvuttappakāro paññattippabhedo saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
在“那见到苦、以及从何因……”等偈颂中,施设的分类已由阿阇梨分别解说,我等亦已了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yo dukkhamaddakkhi yatonidāna’’ntiādigāthāya paññattippabhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto.
世间与痴相结缚,似显吉祥之相;
愚者为依着所缚,为黑暗所笼罩;
似显无吉祥,而见者则了无执著。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Mohasambandhano loko, bhabbarūpova dissati; Upadhibandhano bālo, tamasā parivārito; Assirī viya khāyati, passato natthi kiñcananti. –
于此偈颂中,为说明“诸施设的差别如何被分别”,故说“与痴相连”等。其中,“与痴相连”是指与以痴为因的结缚相连。“世间”是指未断结缚的有情世间。“看似有能者而显现”是指,对于无慧的愚者,即使不能者也看似能者、如同具能者一般呈现。“依着之缚者”是指应被烦恼依着所束缚;因在此“yu”后缀表业的意义。或者,即愚者的烦恼束缚存在于诸依着中,故为“依着之缚者”。“取两种非增长”故为“愚者”。彼为黑暗、为痴所笼罩所遮蔽,在有慧的智者看来,他似无祥瑞、如同远离祥瑞而呈现。对于以慧眼观照的智者而言,则无有任何事物——当如此理解其略义。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ pana kathaṃ paññattippabhedo vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘mohasambandhano’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha mohasambandhanoti mohahetukehi saṃyojanehi sambandho. Lokoti appahīnasaṃyojano sattaloko. Bhabbarūpovadissatīti abhabbopi attā bhabbarūpova bhabbajātiko viya bālānaṃ avipassakānaṃ dissati. Upadhibandhanoti kilesūpadhīhi bandhitabbo. Yu-paccayo hi kammatthe vihito. Upadhīsu vā kilesānaṃ bandhanaṃ yassa bālassāti upadhibandhano. Dve avaḍḍhiyo lāti gaṇhātīti bālo. Tamasā sammohena parivārito paṭicchādito paṇḍitānaṃ vipassakānaṃ assirī viya sirīvirahito viya khāyati upaṭṭhāti. Passato paññācakkhunā passantassa paṇḍitassa kiñcanaṃ natthīti saṅkhepattho daṭṭhabbo.
“与痴相连的世间”:此施设是依以痴为首的颠倒教说而安立,故名“教说施设”。“看似有能者而显现”:此施设是依颠倒的世间以颠倒的方式呈现而安立,故名“颠倒施设”。“依着之缚者的愚者”:此施设是对恶欲行之起源的施设,故名“起源施设”。“依着之缚者的愚者”:此施设是对诸不善法缠缚作用的施设,故名“作用施设”。“依着之缚者的愚者”:此施设是对烦恼束缚力与愚痴力的施设,故名“力施设”。“依着之缚者的愚者”:此施设是对诸行增长的施设,故名“增长施设”。“被黑暗所包围”:此施设是对无明黑暗的教说的施设,故名“教说施设”;又是对无明黑暗同义词的施设,故名“同义施设”。“看似无有祥瑞而显现”:此施设是对天眼通所见作用的施设,故名“见施设”。“看似无有祥瑞而显现”:此施设是对慧眼安立的施设,故名“安立施设”。“观照者无有任何事物”:此施设是对圣者通达的施设,故名“通达施设”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Mohasambandhano loko’’ti paññatti mohasīsena gahitānaṃ vipallāsānaṃ desanāya paññāpanato desanāpaññatti nāma. ‘‘Bhabbarūpova dissatī’’ti paññatti lokassa viparītassa viparītākārena upaṭṭhahantassa paññāpanato viparītapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Upadhibandhano bālo’’ti paññatti pāpakānaṃ icchāvacarānaṃ pabhavassa paññāpanato pabhavapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Upadhibandhano bālo’’ti paññatti pariyuṭṭhānānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ bandhanakiccassa paññāpanato kiccapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Upadhibandhano bālo’’ti paññatti kilesānaṃ bandhanabalamūhanabalānaṃ paññāpanato balapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Upadhibandhano bālo’’ti paññatti saṅkhārānaṃ viruhanāya paññāpanato viruhanāpaññatti nāma. ‘‘Tamasā parivārito’’ti paññatti avijjandhakārassa desanāya paññāpanato desanāpaññatti nāma, avijjandhakārassa vevacanassa ca paññāpanato vevacanapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Assirī viya khāyatī’’ti paññatti dibbacakkhussa dassanakiriyāya paññāpanato dassanapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Assirī viya khāyatī’’ti paññatti paññācakkhussa nikkhepassa paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Passato natthi kiñcana’’nti paññatti sattānaṃ ariyānaṃ paṭivedhassa paññāpanato paṭivedhapaññatti nāma.
当问“什么是‘什么’?”时,便说“贪是‘什么’”等。又当说“如前所述的施设差别,我们应如何信受?”时,便说“因此他说”等。因为如前所述的施设差别确有其事,世尊才说“与痴相连”等偈;正因其如实存在,故依此偈,如前所述的施设差别应随顺该偈而信受。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamaṃ kiñcana’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘rāgo kiñcana’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yathāvutto paññattippabhedo kathaṃ amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathāvuttassa paññattippabhedassa sambhavato bhagavā yaṃ ‘‘mohasambandhano’’tiādimāha, tathāsambhavato tāya gāthāya yathāvutto paññattippabhedo gāthānusārena saddahitabbo.
“与痴相连的世间”等偈颂的施设分别,已由阿阇梨作出分析,我们也已了知。由于应当问:“诸比丘,有未生……等经文的施设分别是如何分析的?”故此处引出“诸比丘,有……”等经文。若问:“世尊说那部经文是为了什么目的?”应知:因为在胜义上并不存在,涅槃是无;为了破斥那种认为“‘有涅槃’的说法就如同‘兔角’的说法一样毫无意义,仅是世俗言说”的邪见,世尊才说了此经。显示巴利原文
‘‘Mohasambandhano loko’’tiādigāthāya paññattippabhedo ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, ajāta’ntiādipāṭhassa paññattippabhedo kathaṃ vibhatto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘atthi bhikkhave’’tiādipāḷimāha. ‘‘Sā pana pāḷi kimatthaṃ bhagavatā vuttā’’ti ce puccheyya? Paramatthato avijjamānattā nibbānaṃ natthi, tasmā ‘‘atthi nibbāna’’nti vacanaṃ sasavisāṇavacanaṃ viya anatthaṃ, vohāramattametanti vadantānaṃ micchāvādaṃ bhañjituṃ bhagavatā vuttāti daṭṭhabbā.
因为不从任何处所生,故为未生;因为未生,故为非有。因为不是由诸缘所造作,故为非造。因为没有一切有为,故无为的涅槃存在。如果这未生等的涅槃不存在,那么出离也就不可了知;又因为涅槃是圣道与圣果的所缘,并且由于道果能断除烦恼、令其寂止,而由断除故令三种轮转不再转起,所以应知未生等的涅槃确实存在。显示巴利原文
Kutocipi ajātattā abhūtattā ajātaṃ abhūtaṃ. Paccayehi akatattā akataṃ. Saṅkhatābhāvato asaṅkhataṃ nibbānaṃ atthi. Etaṃ ajātādikaṃ nibbānaṃ no ce abhavissa, evaṃ sati nissaraṇaṃ na paññāyetha, nibbānassa ca ariyamaggaphalānaṃ ārammaṇattā, maggaphalānañca kilesānaṃ samucchindanato paṭippassambhanato, samucchindanena ca tividhassa vaṭṭassa apavaṭṭanato ajātādikaṃ nibbānaṃ atthiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“诸比丘,有未生……乃至……无为”——这一施设既是涅槃的教说施设,也是涅槃的同义施设。“若此处无有已生者……乃至……可被了知”——这一施设既是有为的同义施设,也是有为的引摄施设。“由于有……乃至……无为”——这一施设既是涅槃的同义施设,也是涅槃的阐明施设。“由于有已生者……乃至……可被了知”——这一施设既是涅槃的同义施设,也是道从轮回中出离的施设,亦即出离施设。智者应拣择而持取这些施设的差别。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, ajātaṃ…pe… asaṅkhata’’nti ayaṃ paññatti nibbānassa desanāpaññatti ca nibbānassa vevacanapaññatti ca hoti. ‘‘Nayidha jātassa…pe… paññāyethā’’ti ayaṃ paññatti saṅkhatassa vevacanapaññatti ca saṅkhatassa upanayanapaññatti ca hoti. ‘‘Yasmā ca…pe… asaṅkhata’’nti ayaṃ paññatti nibbānassa vevacanapaññatti ca nibbānassa jotanāpaññatti ca hoti. ‘‘Yasmā jātassa…pe… paññāyatī’’ti ayaṃ paññatti nibbānassa vevacanapaññatti ca maggassa saṃsārato niyyānikapaññatti ca nissaraṇapaññatti ca hotīti paññattiviseso paṇḍitehi niddhāretvā gahetabbo.
由于必须说明“如前所述的涅槃施设分别应以何为信受”,故说“因此世尊说”等语。“因此尊者说”等的衔接之义,以及“施设之摄取已结合”的衔接之义,应依前述之理而了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathāvutto nibbānassa paññattippabhedo kena saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tenāha āyasmā’’tiādyānusandhyādiattho ceva ‘‘niyutto paññattihāro’’ti anusandhyādiattho ca vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
然而,智者应随顺注释与复注,将甚深之义广加分别而后受持。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
12. 下降摄论分之阐释显示巴利原文
12. Otaraṇahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
42 42. 由作为种种解释之殊胜的施设之摄的分别,诸施设已得分析;此作为种种解释之殊胜的分别即得圆满。由于应当问“什么是入摄之摄的分别”,故说“其中,什么是入摄之摄”等。其中,“其中”是指:在已指明的十六种教说之摄等之中,什么是作为种种解释之殊胜的入摄之摄、亦即名为入摄之摄的分别?这是提问。“缘起者”等所标示的、我今当说的“向上、向下、于一切处得解脱”等广释之殊胜,应知即是那名为入摄之摄、入摄之摄的分别。显示巴利原文
42. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena paññattihāravibhaṅgena paññattiyo vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo otaraṇo hāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo otaraṇo hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso otaraṇo hāro otaraṇahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Yo ca paṭiccuppādo’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘uddhaṃ adho sabbadhi vippamutto’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso otaraṇo hāro otaraṇahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti gahetabbo.
其中,于经文中,因应问“简择出哪些缘起等后,以哪些被简择的法而入”,为显示“于此经中,简择出这些缘起等后,以这些被简择的法而入”,故说“于上、于下、于一切处彻底解脱”等。其中,“于上”指欲界之上,于上方生起的色界与无色界。“于下”指色界之下,于下方生起的欲界。“于一切处”指在一切欲界、色界、无色界中。“彻底解脱”指由于不再以结生方式再生而彻底解脱的无学者。这位有学者,因以见道彻底断除了有身见,故“不观‘有我’”而住。如此,当知此偈颂之义:有学者与无学者,以有学之解脱与无学之解脱,渡越了前所未渡的暴流,为不再有而解脱,已出离。显示巴利原文
Tattha pāṭhe ‘‘katame paṭiccasamuppādādayo niddhāretvā katamehi niddhāritehi dhammehi otaratī’’ti pucchitabbattā imasmiṃ pāṭhe ime paṭiccasamuppādādayo niddhāretvā imehi niddhāritehi dhammehi otaratīti dassetuṃ ‘‘uddhaṃ adho sabbadhi vippamutto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha uddhanti kāmadhātuto uddhaṃ uparibhāge pavattāya rūpadhātuarūpadhātuyā. Adhoti rūpadhātuto heṭṭhābhāge pavattāya kāmadhātuyā. Sabbadhīti sabbasmiṃ kāmarūpaarūpadhātumhi. Vippamuttoti paṭisandhivasena appavattanato vippamutto asekkho. Ayaṃ sekkho dassanamaggena sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā samugghātattā ‘‘ahaṃ asmī’’ti anānupassī viharati. Evaṃ sekkhāya vimuttiyā ceva asekkhāya vimuttiyā ca sekkho ceva asekkho ca atiṇṇapubbaṃ oghaṃ apunabbhavāya vimutto udatārīti gāthāttho gahetabbo.
于彼偈颂经文中,因应问“简择出哪些之后,以哪些而入”,故说“于上,指色界”等。说“于上”,因可能产生“从人间向上,四大王天等亦被包含”的含义,为遮止此义,故说“色界、无色界”。说“于下”,因可能产生“从人界向下,四恶趣地亦被包含”的含义,为遮止此义,故说“欲界”。说“于一切处”,因可能产生“四地”的含义,故说“于三界”。此无学解脱,即已解脱之无学者所具有的离染,此离染即是无学果解脱。在“于上、于下、于一切处彻底解脱”的经文中,所说那种类型的无学解脱已被简择出,此为彼义。对于被简择出的无学解脱,那些被简择出的信等五根,便成为无学的五根。如此所说之入,即是依根而对于解脱之入,名为进入。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ gāthāpāṭhe ‘‘katame niddhāretvā katamehi otaratī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘uddhanti rūpadhātū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Uddhanti manussalokato uddhaṃ cātumahārājikādayopi gahitāti atthasambhavato taṃ nivattetuṃ ‘‘rūpadhātu arūpadhātū’’ti vuttaṃ. Adhoti manussabhavato adho cattāro apāyabhūmiyo ca gahitāti atthasambhavato taṃ nivattetuṃ ‘‘kāmadhātū’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbadhīti catubhūmiketi atthasambhavato ‘‘tedhātuke’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ asekkhā vimuttīti vimuttassa asekkhassa yā virāgatā atthi, ayampi virāgatā asekkhaphalavimutti. ‘‘Uddhaṃ adho sabbadhi vippamutto’’ti pāṭhe vuttappakārā ayaṃ asekkhā vimutti niddhāritāti attho. Niddhāritāya asekkhāya vimuttiyā yāni saddhādipañcindriyāni niddhāritāni, tāniyeva asekkhāni pañcindriyāni bhavanti. Ayaṃ vuttappakārā otaraṇā indriyehi vimuttiyā otaraṇā nāma pavesanā nāma.
那些无学的五根,由于资助明,或为慧的近因,而成为明。由于明的生起——即以此种明之生起为因——无明灭尽,即无明灭尽……乃至……苦蕴灭尽。此所说之入,即是依缘起而对于明之入,名为入。显示巴利原文
Tāniyeva asekkhāni pañcindriyāni vijjāya upakārakattā, paññāpadaṭṭhānattā vā vijjā bhavanti. Vijjuppādā tādisāya vijjāya uppādā uppādahetuto avijjānirodho avijjāya nirodho hoti…pe… dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hoti, ayaṃ vuttappakārā otaraṇā paṭiccasamuppādehi otaraṇā nāma.
这些无学五根,由于信与精进为戒之生因,念有随顺慧的作用,故被三蕴所摄。其余应依所说方式了知。显示巴利原文
Tāniyeva asekkhāni pañcindriyāni tīhi khandhehi saṅgahitāni saddhāvīriyehi sīlasambhavato, satiyā ca paññānuvattakattā. Sesā vuttanayānusārena veditabbā.
在“于上、于下、于一切处彻底解脱”的经文中,由简择而入已由阿阇梨分别解说,我们也已知晓。在“不观‘有我’”的经文中,因当说“简择哪些后,以哪些入而入?”,故说“不观‘有我’,即是对有身见”等。那位不观“有我”的有学,对于他的有身见,有彼断除存在,那称为断除的断除解脱即是有学解脱。对于彼有学解脱,那些被简择出的信等五根,即成为有学五根。此所解说之入,即依根而入,名为入。其余应依所说方式了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Uddhaṃ adho sabbadhi vippamutto’’ti pāṭhe niddhāretvā otaraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘ayaṃ ahasmīti anānupassī’’ti pāṭhe ‘‘katame niddhāretvā katamehi otaraṇehi otaratī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘ayaṃ ahasmīti anānupassīti ayaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yo ayaṃ sekkho ‘‘ahamasmī’’ti nānupassī, tassa sekkhassa sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā yo samugghāto atthi, yā samugghātasaṅkhātā samugghātavimutti sekkhā vimutti hoti, tassā sekkhāya vimuttiyā yāni saddhādipañcindriyāni niddhāritāni, tāniyeva sekkhāni pañcindriyāni bhavanti. Ayaṃ vuttappakārā otaraṇā indriyehi otaraṇā nāma. Sesā vuttanayānusārena veditabbā.
43 43. 在“于上、于下”等偈颂中,由简择而入已由阿阇梨分别解说,我们也已知晓。在“依著者有动摇”等经文中,因应问“简择哪些后,以哪些入?”,故说“依著者有动摇,无依著者无动摇”等。依著之人有动摇、有动转;无依著之人无动摇、无动转。无动摇、无动转时,则有轻安;有轻安存在时,则无倾向;无倾向、无倾向存在时,则无来去;无来去、无来去存在时,则无死生;无死生、无死生存在时,则于此处内六处不见我,于彼处外六处不见我,于两者之间,排除之后,于触等诸法聚中亦不见我。此即是缘起,自“无明灭尽”等始,作苦之终结、尽头,此为其义。显示巴利原文
43. ‘‘Uddhaṃ adho’’tiādigāthāyaṃ otaraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘nissitassa calita’’ntiādipāṭhe ‘‘katame niddhāretvā katamehi otaratī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘nissitassa calitaṃ, anissitassa calitaṃ natthī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nissitassa puggalassa calitaṃ calanaṃ atthi, anissitassa puggalassa calitaṃ calanaṃ natthi. Calite calane asati passaddhi bhavati, passaddhiyā sati vijjamānāya nati na hoti, natiyā asati avijjamānāya āgatigati na hoti, āgatigatiyā asati avijjamānāya cutūpapāto na hoti, cutūpapāte asati avijjamāne idha chasu ajjhattikāyatanesu attānaṃ neva passati, huraṃ vā chasu bāhirāyatanesu attānaṃ na passati, ubhayaṃ antarena vajjetvā phassādisamudāyesu dhammesu attānaṃ na passati, esova paṭiccasamuppādo ‘‘avijjānirodhā’’tiādiko dukkhassa anto avasānaṃ karotīti attho.
“依著者有动摇”句中,因应问“依著有几种”而说“依著者有动摇,即所谓依著”等。其中,于彼两种依著——贪爱依著与见依著中,对于染著的有情所简择出的思,此思法称为贪爱依著;对于愚痴的有情所简择出的思,此思法称为见依著。而那两种思,则名为行。以行为缘而有识……乃至……一切缘起已如是简择。此所说之“入”,即是依缘起而入,得名为入。显示巴利原文
Nissitassacalitanti ettha ‘‘nissayo katividho’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘nissitassa calitanti nissayo nāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu duvidhesu taṇhānissayadiṭṭhinissayesu yā cetanā rattassa puggalassa niddhāritā, ayaṃ cetanādhammo taṇhānissayo nāma. Yā cetanā mūḷhassa puggalassa niddhāritā. Ayaṃ cetanādhammo diṭṭhinissayo nāma. Sā duvidhā cetanā pana saṅkhārā nāma. Saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ…pe… sabbo paṭiccasamuppādo niddhārito. Ayaṃ vuttappakārā otaraṇā paṭiccasamuppādehi otaraṇā nāma.
其中,于彼贪爱依著与见依著中,对于染著的有情所简择出的受,此为乐受;对于极度愚痴的有情所简择出的受,此为不苦不乐受。余者多分应依所说的方法了知。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti tasmiṃ taṇhānissayadiṭṭhinissaye yā vedanā rattassa puggalassa niddhāritā, ayaṃ sukhā vedanā. Yā cetanā sammūḷhassa puggalassa niddhāritā, ayaṃ adukkhamasukhā vedanā. Yebhuyyena sesā vuttanayānusārena veditabbā.
44 44. 于“依著者有动摇”等经文中,阿阇梨已分别解说“入”,我等亦已了知。显示巴利原文
44. ‘‘Nissitassa calita’’ntiādipāṭhe otaraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā.
凡任何忧愁、悲泣……(中略)
于世间任何处,不应造作可爱者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ye keci sokā paridevitā vā…pe… Piyaṃ na kayirātha kuhiñci loke’’ti. –
在偈颂部分,为了问明“确定何者后,依何而通达?”故说“凡任何忧愁”等。凡任何忧愁、任何悲泣,或世间所生起的种种苦,这些都是缘于可爱者而生起的;若可爱者不存在,这些忧愁等便不会生起。因此,由于可爱者不存在时忧愁等便不存在,离忧者于世间任何处皆无忧愁,离忧者是快乐的。如此,离忧者具足安乐,是故希求无忧、无尘垢的善士,不应于世间任何处造作可爱者。这是偈颂的含义。显示巴利原文
Gāthāpāṭhe ‘‘katame niddhāretvā katamehi otaratī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘ye keci sokā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ye keci sokā vā yā kāci paridevitā vā anekarūpā yā kāci dukkhā vā lokasmiṃ sambhavanti. Ete sokādayo piyaṃ paṭicca pabhavanti, piye asante ete sokādayo na bhavanti. Tasmā piye asante sokādīnaṃ abhāvato yesaṃ vītasokānaṃ kuhiñci lokepi natthi, te vītasokā sukhino bhavanti. Tasmā vītasokānaṃ sukhasampannattā asokaṃ virajaṃ patthayāno sappuriso kuhiñci loke piyaṃ na kayirāthāti gāthāttho.
在“凡任何忧愁、悲泣,以及世间种种形态的苦,这些皆缘于可爱者而生起”这段文字中,所确定的受是苦受。其余可依前述方法了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ye keci sokā paridevitā vā, dukkhā ca lokasmimanekarūpā piyaṃ paṭicca pabhavanti ete’’ti ettha pāṭhe yā vedanā niddhāritā, ayaṃ dukkhā vedanā. Sesā vuttanayānusārena veditabbā.
在“凡任何忧愁”等偈颂文中,通达之理已由阿阇梨分别,我等亦已了知。因为应当问及“确定了哪些法之后,凭借哪些法而通达”,所以宣说了“欲求欲乐者”等偈。该偈的含义,如前已述。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ye keci sokā’’tiādigāthāpāṭhe otaraṇā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā , ‘‘kāmaṃ kāmayamānassā’’tiādigāthāpāṭhe ‘‘katame niddhāretvā katamehi otaratī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘kāmaṃ kāmayamānassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ attho heṭṭhā vuttova.
其中,于“心生喜悦”这段文中,所说的喜悦心已被确定,此喜悦心即是随顺;于“如被箭刺而受苦”这段文中,所说的苦受,此苦受即是嗔恚。随顺与嗔恚已被确定,这便是其义。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti tasmiṃ ‘‘pītimano hotī’’ti pāṭhe yā pītimanatā vuttā niddhāritā, ayaṃ pītimanatā anunayo hoti. ‘‘Sallaviddhova ruppatī’’ti pāṭhe yaṃ ruppanaṃ āha, idaṃ ruppanaṃ paṭighaṃ hoti, anunayo ca paṭighañca niddhāritāti attho.
若问“确定了随顺与嗔恚之后,又确定了什么法”,便答道“而随顺与嗔恚是渴爱的一部分”。所谓渴爱的一部分,即因为是渴爱的一部分,所以渴爱便被确定了。若有人说:“随顺可算作渴爱的一部分,嗔恚却不该是渴爱的一部分”?嗔恚乃依于自爱而生起,因此嗔恚也是渴爱的一部分。又若问“确定了渴爱之后,又确定了什么”,便说“复次,以渴爱……”等。由于十种色处是渴爱的近因,十种色处便被确定了。这种所说的通达,称为依处的通达。在经中出现的缘起等,乃是通过那种特定的注释方法而得确定,或通过经义之门而得确定,因此……在以如是方法确定的缘起等之中,那种特定的注释方法,以表其义或令知其义的方式通达、进入、汇集,这一特定的注释方法应被理解为“通达之方法”。在其余各处,也应依前述之理来领会通达。“因此尊者说”等连接词的含义,以及“通达之方法已结合”的连接词含义,皆应依前述之理了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Anunaye ca paṭighe ca niddhārite katamo dhammo niddhārito’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘anunayo paṭighañca pana taṇhāpakkho’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṇhāpakkhoti taṇhāpakkhattā taṇhā niddhāritā. ‘‘Anunayo taṇhāpakkho hotu, paṭighaṃ pana taṇhāpakkhaṃ na siyā’’ti ce vadeyya? Paṭighassa attasinehavasena pavattanato paṭighampi taṇhāpakkhaṃ hoti. ‘‘Taṇhāya niddhāritāya katamo niddhārito’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘taṇhāya ca panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dasannaṃ rūpāyatanānaṃ taṇhāya padaṭṭhānattā dasa rūpāni āyatanāni niddhāritāni. Ayaṃ vuttappakārā otaraṇā āyatanehi otaraṇā nāma. Sutte āgatā paṭiccasamuppādādayo tena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena nayena niddhāritā, suttatthamukhena vā niddhāritā, tena…pe… nayena niddhāritesu paṭiccasamuppādādīsu yo saṃvaṇṇanānayaviseso tadatthavācakavasena vā tadatthañāpakavasena vā otarati pavisati samosarati, so saṃvaṇṇanānayaviseso otaraṇo hāro nāmāti adhippāyo daṭṭhabbo. Sesesupi vuttanayānusārena otaraṇā gahetabbā. ‘‘Tenāha āyasmā’’tiādyānusandhyādiattho ceva ‘‘niyutto otaraṇo hāro’’ti anusandhyādiattho ca vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
然而,智者应依注释与复注,详细分别深奥之义而领受。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
十三、净化方法分别的阐明显示巴利原文
13. Sodhanahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
45 那种作为特定注释的通达方法分别,藉由它,应被通达的经义得以分别;当这一分别完成时,那作为特定注释的分别便已圆满。由于应被问及“什么是净化方法分别”,所以说了“其中,什么是净化方法”等。其中:在那些已指出的十六种说法方法等之中,什么是名为净化方法分别的特定注释?这是提问。“于问题已解答时”等的说明:如今由我所说的“如同尊者阿耆多”等详细特定注释,应被理解为名为净化方法分别。因为应被问及“如何在此问题中理解净化方法”,所以说了“如同尊者”等。如同:以尊者阿耆多在《彼岸道》中向世尊提问的方式,当问题已被解答时,这净化方法应被理解。因为应被说“确定后分别”,所以为了确定后分别,说了“以何”等。偈颂的含义已说。显示巴利原文
45. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena otaraṇahāravibhaṅgena otaretabbā suttatthā vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo sodhanahāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo sodhano hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso sodhano hāro sodhanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Vissajjitamhi pañhe’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘yathā āyasmā ajito’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso sodhanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti gahetabbo. ‘‘Kathaṃ tattha pañhe sodhano hāro viññātabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yathā āyasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā yena pakārena āyasmā ajito pārāyane bhagavantaṃ pañhaṃ pucchati, tathā tena pakārena vissajjitamhi pañhe ayaṃ sodhano hāro viññātabboti. ‘‘Niyametvā vibhajehī’’ti vattabbattā niyametvā vibhajituṃ ‘‘kenassū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Gāthāttho vuttova.
‘‘Kenassu nivuto loko, kenassu nappakāsati; Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsi, kiṃsu tassa mahabbhaya’’nti. –
再者,在以提问方式展开的偈颂中:显示巴利原文
Pucchāvasena pavattagāthāyañca –
世尊说:阿耆多,世间为无明所覆蔽,
因悭吝与放逸而不显现;
我说渴爱是垢秽,苦是它的大怖畏。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Avijjāya nivuto loko, (ajitāti bhagavā,) Vivicchā pamādā nappakāsati; Jappābhilepanaṃ brūmi, dukkhamassa mahabbhaya’’nti. –
在以解答方式展开的偈颂中——当以“世间被什么遮蔽”这句提出问题时,世尊以“世间被无明所遮蔽”这句,通过去除对于该义的无知、疑惑等垢秽,净化了“世间被什么遮蔽”这一句。因为当该义被解答时,无知、疑惑等即不复存在,因此义得以净化;义得净化时,句也同样得以净化。因此,在注释中说:“由于该义被解答”(《指导论注》45),在复注中也说:“通过去除对于该对象的无知、疑惑等垢秽而得以净化”。并非开始:不应开始询问所有偈句或偈义,因为对于想要了知的一切义,并未以解答的方式彻底穷尽,所以世尊仅以“世间被无明所遮蔽”这一句来净化。在其余各处,也是这个道理。显示巴利原文
Vissajjanavasena pavattagāthāyañcāti imāsu dvīsu gāthāsu ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’ti iminā padena pañhe pucchite ‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko’’ti iminā padena bhagavā ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’ti padaṃ tadatthe aññāṇasaṃsayādimalānaṃ apanayanena sodheti. Tadatthe hi vissajjite aññāṇasaṃsayādīnaṃ abhāvato attho sodhito nāma, atthe ca sodhite padampi sodhitaṃyeva. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ – ‘‘tadatthassa vissajjanato’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 45), ṭīkāyañca ‘‘tabbisayaaññāṇasaṃsayādimalāpanayanena sodhetī’’ti vuttaṃ. No ca ārambhanti pucchituṃ ārabhitabbaṃ sabbagāthāpadaṃ, gāthātthaṃ vā, ñātuṃ icchitassa sabbassa atthassa vissajjanavasena apariyositattā bhagavā ‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko’’ti ettakeneva padena sodheti. Sesesupi esa nayo.
当以“什么是它的大怖畏”这句提出问题时,世尊以“苦是它的大怖畏”这句,使得想要了知的起始之义获得了清净与净化。在其余偈颂中,也是这个道理。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kiṃsu tassa mahabbhaya’’nti iminā padena pañhe pucchite ‘‘dukkhamassa mahabbhaya’’nti padena bhagavatā ārambho ñātuṃ icchito attho suddho sodhito hoti. Sesagāthāsupi eseva nayo.
当在一个问题上,以无余解答的方式,其开端是清净、已被净化的,那么该问题即是已被解答、已被净化的。当在一个问题上,以无余解答的方式,其开端尚不清净、未被净化时,那么该问题就还不是已被解答、已被净化的——应如此连接句义。“因此他说”等语句的句间衔接及其含义,以及“已结合的净化之引导”这一句间的衔接及其含义,应依前述方法了知。显示巴利原文
Yattha pañhe evaṃ niravasesavissajjanavasena ārambho suddho sodhito bhavati, so pañho vissajjito sodhito bhavati. Yattha pañhe evaṃ niravasesavissajjanavasena ārambho yāva asuddho asodhito bhavati, tāva so pañho vissajjito sodhito na bhavatīti yojanā. ‘‘Tenāhā’’tiādyānusandhyādyattho ceva ‘‘niyutto sodhano hāro’’ti anusandhyādyattho ca vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
然而,诸智者应当依循注疏与复注,详细分别深义而领受。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
十四、安立导引法分别的阐明显示巴利原文
14. Adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
46 由某种特殊注释的分别,问题等得以澄清,此特殊注释的分别是圆满的。因应被问到“何为安立引导之分别”,故说“其中,何为安立引导”等。“其中”,即在已开示的十六种说示引导等之中,问:从反面指示而言,何种特殊注释是安立引导,名为安立引导之分别?“以统一性而说诸法,以及以差异性而说者”等所指示的,并由我今详述的“彼处于彼处所指示者,应如是持守”等广释的特殊注释,应知即是安立引导之分别。显示巴利原文
46. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vibhaṅgena pañhādayo sodhitā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo adhiṭṭhāno hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso paṭiniddesato adhiṭṭhāno hāro adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Ekattatāya dhammā, yepi ca vemattatāya niddiṭṭhā’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘ye tattha niddiṭṭhā, tathā te dhārayitabbā’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti gahetabbo.
因应被问及:“诸经中以统一性与差异性所指示的诸法,是应如实地持守呢,还是应以其他方式分别呢?”故说“彼处于彼处”等。其中,于那些经中,凡苦谛等法以统一性及差异性而被指示,那些苦谛等法即应如是以统一性及差异性而被持守、观察,不应以其他方式分别。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ye dhammā suttesu ekattatāya ca vemattatāya ca niddiṭṭhā, te dhammā kiṃ pana tatheva dhārayitabbā , udāhu aññathāpi vikappayitabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘ye tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu suttantesu ye dukkhasaccādayo dhammā ekattatāya ca vemattatāya ca niddiṭṭhā, te dukkhasaccādayo dhammā tathā ekattatāya ca vemattatāya ca dhārayitabbā upalakkhitabbā, na aññathā vikappayitabbā.
由于应当被问及:“共相施设以世俗言说为性,并无决定性,何为统一性?何为差异性?”因此说“苦是统一性”等。所谓“苦”——即不观待生等差别相而说苦的共相,此苦的共相即名为苦的统一性。被问及“其中,何为苦?”时,观待生等差别相而说“生是苦,老是苦……识是苦”,此苦的差别相即名为苦的差异性。所谓“其中”,即指经中所说的苦等诸法,在那些苦等义之中。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sāmaññakappanāya vohārabhāvena anavaṭṭhānato katamā ekattatā, katamā vemattatā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dukkhanti ekattatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dukkhanti jātiādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā dukkhasāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ dukkhasāmaññatā dukkhassa ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamaṃ dukkha’’nti pucchitā ‘‘jāti dukkhā, jarā dukkhā…pe... viññāṇaṃ dukkha’’nti jātiādivisesamapekkhitvā yā dukkhavisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ dukkhavisesatā dukkhassa vemattatā nāma. Tatthāti ye dukkhādayo dhammā sutte vuttā, tattha tesu dukkhādīsu atthesu.
苦集——即不观待“渴爱能引再生”等差别相而说集的共相,此集的共相即名为集的统一性。若被问及“其中,何为集?”时,则观待差别相而说“此渴爱……乃至无有爱”,此集的差别相即名为集的差异性。显示巴利原文
Dukkhasamudayoti ‘‘taṇhā ponobhavikā’’ti visesamanapekkhitvā yā samudayasāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ samudayasāmaññatā samudayassa ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamo samudayo’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘yāyaṃ taṇhā…pe… vibhavataṇhā’’ti visesaṃ apekkhitvā yā samudayavisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ samudayavisesatā samudayassa vemattatā nāma.
苦灭——即不观待“即彼渴爱的无余离贪灭”等差别相而说灭的共相,此灭的共相即名为灭的统一性。若被问及“其中,何为苦灭?”时,则观待差别相而说“即彼渴爱的无余离贪灭、舍离、遣除、解脱、无着”,此灭的差别相即名为灭的差异性。显示巴利原文
Dukkhanirodhoti ‘‘tassāyeva taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho’’ti visesamanapekkhitvā yā nirodhasāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ nirodhasāmaññatā nirodhassa ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamo dukkhanirodho’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘yo tassāyeva taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayo’’ti visesamapekkhitvā yā nirodhavisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ nirodhavisesatā nirodhassa vemattatā nāma.
所谓苦灭道迹——即不观待正见等差别,而说灭道迹的共相,此灭道迹的共相,即名为道的统一性。若问“其中,何为苦灭道迹?”即观待正见等差别而说“即此圣……乃至正定”,此差别苦灭道迹性,即名为道的差异性。显示巴利原文
Dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti? Paṭipadāti sammādiṭṭhiādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā nirodhagāminipaṭipadāsāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ nirodhagāminipaṭipadāsāmaññatā maggassa ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamā dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘ayameva ariyo…pe… sammāsamādhī’’ti sammādiṭṭhiādivisesamapekkhitvā yā visesadukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ visesadukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadatā maggassa vemattatā nāma.
所谓道——即不观待地狱道等差别,而说共相道性,此共相道性,即名为道的统一性。若问“其中,何为道?”即观待地狱道等差别而说“地狱道……乃至涅槃道”,此差别道性,即名为道的差异性。显示巴利原文
Maggoti nirayagāmimaggādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā sāmaññamaggatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ sāmaññamaggatā maggassa ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamo maggo’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘nirayagāmī maggo…pe… nibbānagāmī maggo’’ti nirayagāmimaggādivisesaṃ apekkhitvā yā visesamaggatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ visesamaggatā maggassa vemattatā nāma.
所谓灭——即不观待择灭等差别,而说共相灭性,此共相灭性,即名为灭的统一性。若问“其中,何为灭?”即观待择灭等差别而说“择灭……乃至一切烦恼灭”,此差别灭性,即名为灭的差异性。显示巴利原文
Nirodhoti paṭisaṅkhānirodhādivisesaṃ anapekkhitvā yā sāmaññanirodhatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ sāmaññanirodhatā nirodhassa ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamo nirodho’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘paṭisaṅkhānirodho…pe… sabbakilesanirodho’’ti paṭisaṅkhānirodhādivisesaṃ apekkhitvā yā visesanirodhatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ visesanirodhatā nirodhassa vemattatā nāma.
色——不观待四大种等差别而说共相色性,此共相色性即名为色的统一性。被问及“其中,何为色”时,则观待四大种等差别而说“四大种所造……乃至风界令心离染”,此差别色性即名为色的差异性。显示巴利原文
Rūpanti cātumahābhūtikādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā sāmaññarūpatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ sāmaññarūpatā rūpassa ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamaṃ rūpa’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘cātumahābhūtikaṃ…pe… vāyodhātuyā cittaṃ virājetī’’ti cātumahābhūtikādivisesamapekkhitvā yā visesarūpatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ visesarūpatā rūpassa vemattatā nāma.
48 无明——不观待于苦无知等差别而说无明共相,此无明共相即名为无明的统一性。被问及“其中,何为无明”时,则观待于苦无知等差别而说“于苦无知,于苦集无知……乃至无明超逾、愚痴、不善根”,此无明差别相即名为无明的差异性。显示巴利原文
48.Avijjāti dukkheaññāṇādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā avijjāsāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ avijjāsāmaññatā avijjāya ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamā avijjā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudaye aññāṇaṃ…pe… avijjālaṅghī moho akusalamūla’’nti dukkheaññāṇādivisesamapekkhitvā yā avijjāvisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ avijjāvisesatā avijjāya vemattatā nāma.
明——不观待于苦智等差别而说明之共相,此明之共相即名为明的统一性。被问及“其中,何为明”时,则观待于苦智等差别而说“苦智、苦集智……乃至择法觉支、道支、属于道”,此明之差别相即名为明的差异性。显示巴利原文
Vijjāti dukkheñāṇādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā vijjāsāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ vijjāsāmaññatā vijjāya ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamā vijjā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudaye ñāṇaṃ…pe… dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo maggaṅgaṃ maggapariyāpanna’’nti dukkheñāṇādivisesamapekkhitvā yā vijjāvisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ vijjāvisesatā vijjāya vemattatā nāma.
所谓“等至”:若不着眼于有想等至等特殊类别,所说的等至共通性,此共通性即是等至的“单一性”。当被问及“其中,什么是等至”之后,回答说“有想等至、无想等至……乃至灭尽等至”,这是着眼于有想等至等特殊类别,所说的等至差别性,此差别性即是等至的“差异性”。显示巴利原文
Samāpattīti saññāsamāpatyādivisesaṃ anapekkhitvā yā sāmaññasamāpattitā vuttā, sā sāmaññasamāpattitā samāpattiyā ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamā samāpattī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘saññāsamāpatti asaññāsamāpatti…pe… nirodhasamāpattī’’ti saññāsamāpatyādivisesaṃ apekkhitvā yā visesasamāpattitā vuttā, sā ayaṃ visesasamāpattitā samāpattiyā vemattatā nāma.
所谓“禅修者”:若不着眼于有学禅修者等特殊类别,所说的禅修者共通性,此禅修者的共通性,即是禅修者的“单一性”。当被问及“其中,什么是禅修者”之后,回答说“有有学禅修者、有无学禅修者……乃至慧增上禅修者”,这是着眼于有学禅修者、无学禅修者等特殊类别,所说的禅修者差别性,此差别性即是禅修者的“差异性”。显示巴利原文
Jhāyīti sekkhajhāyīādivisesaṃ anapekkhitvā yā jhāyīsāmaññatā vuttā, sā jhāyīsāmaññatā jhāyino ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamo jhāyī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘atthi sekkho jhāyī, atthi asekkho jhāyī…pe… paññuttaro jhāyī’’ti sekkhajhāyīasekkhajhāyīādivisesamapekkhitvā yā jhāyīvisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ jhāyīvisesatā jhāyino vemattatā nāma.
所谓“定”:若不着眼于有寻定等特殊类别,所说的定共通性,此定的共通性,即是定的“单一性”。当被问及“其中,什么是定”之后,回答说“有寻定、无寻定……乃至邪定、正定”,这是着眼于有寻定等特殊类别,所说的定差别性,此差别性即是定的“差异性”。显示巴利原文
Samādhīti saraṇasamādhyādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā samādhisāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ samādhisāmaññatā samādhino ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamo samādhī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘saraṇo samādhi, araṇo samādhi…pe… micchāsamādhi, sammāsamādhī’’ti saraṇasamādhyādivisesamapekkhitvā yā samādhivisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ samādhivisesatā samādhino vemattatā nāma.
所谓“行道”,若是不依苦行道等差别而说其共通性,此行道之共通性即是行道的单一性。若问“其中,何为行道”而答“苦行道、迟通行……乃至乐速通行”,则是依苦行道等差别而说其差别性,此行道之差别性即是行道的差异性。显示巴利原文
Paṭipadāti āgāḷhapaṭipadādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā paṭipadāsāmaññatā vuttā, ayaṃ paṭipadāsāmaññatā paṭipadāya ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamā paṭipadā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘āgāḷhapaṭipadā, nijjhāmapaṭipadā…pe… sukhā paṭipadā khippābhiññā’’ti āgāḷhapaṭipadādivisesamapekkhitvā yā paṭipadāvisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ paṭipadāvisesatā paṭipadāya vemattatā nāma.
所谓“身”,若是不依名身等差别而说其共通性,此身之共通性即是身的单一性。若问“其中,何为身”而答“名身、色身……乃至此是名身”,则是依名身等差别而说其差别性,此身之差别性即是身的差异性。应作如是连结。其词义等差别,于注释书(《导论注》47)中已有详述。显示巴利原文
Kāyoti nāmakāyādivisesamanapekkhitvā yā kāyasāmaññatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ kāyasāmaññatā kāyassa ekattatā nāma. ‘‘Tattha katamo kāyo’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘nāmakāyo rūpakāyo…pe… ayaṃ nāmakāyo’’ti nāmakāyādivisesamapekkhitvā yā kāyavisesatā vuttā, sā ayaṃ kāyavisesatā kāyassa vemattatā nāmāti yojanā kātabbā. Padatthādiko viseso aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 47) vitthārato vutto.
为以结论方式显示前述苦、集等法的单一性等特征,故说“如是,凡法”等语。其中,“如是”指依我所说“苦的单一性。其中,何为苦?生是苦,老是苦”等言说。“凡法”指任何生、老、病等差别法。“凡法”亦指从这些生等差别法之外的老等差别法。“相同性”是说,以苦性而言,生等差别法与老等差别法相同。“彼法”指老等差别法。“以单一性”是说,依苦集性等相同性,苦、集等状态合为一体。“成为一体”指虽因生等差别而呈多样,但以“苦集”等同一言词所指称,故成为一体。然而,凡以某种方式而特征不同者,即以该方式而有差异性。凡生等法,以种种令生、令熟等自性,而彼生等法与老等法特征不同、不相似;彼生等法即以彼彼令生、令熟等自性,而与老等法有差异性,为不相似。应知此义:虽于苦集等状态上相同,然生等法较之老等法,仍有殊异性。显示巴利原文
Vuttappakārassa dukkhasamudayādikassa dhammassa ekattatādilakkhaṇaṃ nigamanavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ yo dhammo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evanti iminā mayā vuttena ‘‘dukkhanti ekattatā. Tattha katamaṃ dukkhaṃ? Jāti dukkhā, jarā dukkhā’’tiādivacanena. Yo dhammoti yo koci jātijarābyādhyādivisesadhammo. Yassa dhammassāti tato jātiādivisesadhammato aññassa jarādivisesadhammassa. Samānabhāvoti jātiādivisesadhammena jarādivisesadhammassa dukkhabhāvena samānabhāvo. Tassa dhammassāti jarādivisesadhammassa. Ekattatāyāti dukkhasamudayatādisamānatāya dukkhasamudayādibhāvānaṃ ekībhāvena. Ekībhavatīti jātiādivisesabhedena anekopi ‘‘dukkhasamudayo’’tiādinā ekasaddābhidheyyatāya ekībhavati. Yena yena vā pana vilakkhaṇo, tena tena vemattaṃ gacchati. Yassa jātiādidhammassa yena yena abhinibbattanaparipācanādisabhāvena yo jātiādidhammo jarādidhammena vilakkhaṇo visadiso hoti, tassa jātiādidhammassa tena tena abhinibbattanaparipācanādisabhāvena so jātiādidhammo jarādidhammena vemattataṃ visadisattaṃ gacchati, dukkhasamudayādibhāvena samānopi jātiādidhammo jarādidhammassa visiṭṭhataṃ gacchatīti attho daṭṭhabbo.
苦集等法的一性与差异性,已由阿阇梨加以分别,亦为我等所了知。为显示“当被问及彼一性与差异性时,应审察所依”,故说“如是,于经中被问时”等。其中,“如是”即依上述方式:于经中被问时、于记说中被问时,或于偈颂中被问时,应审察所依。应作如是连属:若问“应审察什么”,则审察“是以一性而问,还是以差异性而问”。然而,注释书中说:“今为引导至一性与差异性之领域而显示,故说‘于经中或记说中’等”;为说明“如何问,如何解答”,故说“若以一性”等。而“故说”等之连属,以及“已连结之所依引导”等之连属,应依前述方法了知。显示巴利原文
Dukkhasamudayādidhammassa ekattavemattatā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘tāya ekattavemattatāya kattha pucchite sati adhiṭṭhānaṃ vīmaṃsitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā suttādike pucchite sati vīmaṃsitabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ sutte vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evaṃ iminā vuttappakārena sutte vā pucchite, veyyākaraṇe vā pucchite, gāthāyaṃ vā pucchitāyaṃ sati adhiṭṭhānaṃ vīmaṃsitabbaṃ. ‘‘Kiṃ vīmaṃsitabba’’nti puccheyya ‘‘ekattatāya pucchati kiṃ, udāhu vemattatāya pucchati ki’’nti vīmaṃsitabbanti yojanā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – ‘‘idāni tāva ekattavemattatāvisaye niyojetvā dassetuṃ ‘sutte vā veyyākaraṇe vā’tiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 48) vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kathaṃ pucchitaṃ, kathaṃ vissajjitabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘yadi ekattatāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tenāhā’’tiādyānusandhyādiko ca ‘‘niyutto adhiṭṭhāno hāro’’ti imassa anusandhyādiko ca vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
然智者应依注释书与复注之次第,将深义详尽分别而领受。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
15. 资具引导之分别的阐明显示巴利原文
15. Parikkhārahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
49 49. 凡是以某种殊胜诠释的分别,解说苦谛等的一性等,该殊胜诠释即是圆满的。因为应当被问“什么是名为资具轮之分别”,故说“于此,什么是资具轮”等。于此,“于此”是指:在所指示的十六种教说轮等之中,哪一种殊胜诠释的资具轮,名为资具轮分别?他如此发问。对于“诸法生起某法”的解说,今由我来说明:作为资具的因与缘,其详细的殊胜诠释之资具分别,名为“凡某法生起某法,彼法即是其资具”等。显示巴利原文
49. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vibhaṅgena dukkhasaccādīnaṃ ekattatādayo vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo parikkhārahāravibhaṅgo nāmā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo parikkhāro hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso parikkhāro hāro parikkhārahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Ye dhammā yaṃ dhammaṃ janayantī’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘yo dhammo yaṃ dhammaṃ janayati, tassa so parikkhāro’’tiādiko parikkhārabhūtassa hetuno ceva paccayassa ca vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso parikkhāravibhaṅgo nāma.
因当问:“何为应被陈述的资具?”故说“某法”等。其中,凡某法以因缘的方式生起、产生作为果的某法,该果法的彼因缘方式之某法,即名资具。为问:“资具的相是什么?”如是问后,为显示特相差别,故说“何等相?”等。然而注疏中说:“于此,‘某法生起某法,彼即其资具’,如是略说资具之相后,为以分别显示,故说‘何等相’等。”因当问:“有多少法生起?”故说“二法生起,即因与缘。”因当说:“因是理由,缘也是理由,如此同为理由,以何种相而说为二?”故说“于此,何等相?”等。因的相是对所生果不共于其他果,缘的相是共于一切果,以此特相应说为二,这是它的意思。为问:“不共与共的特相是怎样的?”故以“如什么?”等问后,说“如嫩芽之”等。其义为:以何种不共与共的特相,彼即如彼。如同嫩芽的生起,种子是不共的;如是,因对于果的生起是不共的。如同地与水的对于嫩芽的生起是共的;如是,缘对于果的生起是共的。因是一切果的缘,故嫩芽的种子是能生的不共因。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamo saṃvaṇṇetabbo parikkhāro’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yo dhammo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yo hetupaccayappakāro dhammo yaṃ phalabhūtaṃ dhammaṃ janayati janeti, tassa phaladhammassa so hetupaccayappakāro dhammo parikkhāro nāma. ‘‘Kiṃlakkhaṇo parikkhāro’’ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā lakkhaṇavisesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kiṃlakkhaṇo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – ‘‘tattha ‘yo dhammo yaṃ dhammaṃ janayati, tassa so parikkhāro’ti saṅkhepato parikkhāralakkhaṇaṃ vatvā taṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘kiṃlakkhaṇo’tiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 49) vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kittakā dhammā janayantī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dve dhammā janayanti hetu ca paccayo cā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Hetupi kāraṇaṃ, paccayopi kāraṇaṃ , tasmā kāraṇāyeva kena lakkhaṇena dvidhā vuttā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tattha kiṃlakkhaṇo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Janitabbaphalato aññehi phalehi asādhāraṇalakkhaṇo hetu, sabbaphalehi sādhāraṇalakkhaṇo paccayo, iminā visesalakkhaṇena dvidhā vattabbāti attho. ‘‘Sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇaviseso kīdiso bhave’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yathā kiṃ bhave’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘yathā aṅkurassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā yo sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇaviseso atthi, tathā so sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇaviseso kiṃ viya bhaveti attho. Aṅkurassa nibbattiyā bījaṃ asādhāraṇaṃ yathā, tathā hetu phalassa nibbattiyā asādhāraṇo bhave. Pathavī ca āpo ca aṅkurassa nibbattiyā sādhāraṇā bhavanti yathā, tathā paccayo phalassa nibbattiyā sādhāraṇo bhave. Sabbaphalassa paccayattā aṅkurassa bījaṃ asādhāraṇaṃ janakaṃ hetu. ‘‘Kathaṃ pathavī, āpo ca sādhāraṇā janakāti saddahitabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘aṅkurassa hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Samaṃ samānaṃ phalaṃ bhavāpetīti sabhāvo, ko so? Bījaṃ hetuyeva. ‘‘Kiṃ hetupaccayānaṃ viseso bījaṅkuropamāyeva dassetabbo, udāhu aññūpamāyapi dassetabbo’’ti vattabbattā aññāya upamāyapi visesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā vā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Imāya upamāyapi hetupaccayānaṃ viseso vijānitabboti adhippāyo.
在种子、嫩芽等外在,作为资具的因缘差别已由阿阇梨阐明,亦被我们所了知。为问:“于内在如何阐明?”故说“此即是轮回”等。或者,当说:“外在作为资具的因缘是适合的,内在如何适合?”故说“此即是轮回”等。而注疏中说:“如此显示了外在的因缘差别后,现在为了显示内在,故说‘此即是轮回’等。”轮回与因、缘俱行,故为有因有缘。正因为此轮回是伴有因缘而生起的,所以内在作为资具的因缘也是适合的,应如此观见。这是它的意旨。显示巴利原文
Bījaṅkurādīsu bāhiresu parikkhārabhūtānaṃ hetupaccayānaṃ viseso ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ ajjhattikesu vibhatto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘ayañhi saṃsāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘bāhiresu parikkhārabhūto hetupaccayo yutto hotu, kathaṃ ajjhattikesu yutto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘ayañhi saṃsāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – ‘‘evaṃ bāhiraṃ hetupaccayavibhāgaṃ dassetvā idāni ajjhattikaṃ dassetuṃ ‘ayañhi saṃsāro’tiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 49) vuttaṃ. Hetupaccayehi saha saṃsāro bhavatīti sahetupaccayo. Ayaṃ saṃsāro hi yasmā sahetupaccayo hutvā nibbatto, tasmā ajjhattikepi parikkhārabhūto hetupaccayo yuttoyevāti daṭṭhabboti adhippāyo.
若世尊说此轮回是有因有缘的,如是,我们便应信受。为说:“如何应信?”故说“正因如是”等。“如是”即:由无明等因缘,一切缘起即是轮回的出生,世尊以此说明了轮回的有因有缘性,是故应信受。无明等是行等的缘。为问:“什么是无明的因?”故说“即无明是无明的因”。为问:“什么是无明的缘?”故说“非理作意是缘”。为问:“什么是无明?什么是该无明的因?”故说“前无明是后无明的因”。为问:“什么是前无明?什么是后无明?”故说“于此”等。为问:“作为无明现行之因的前无明随眠,仅仅是作为无间因,还是也有辗转因?”故说“如种子与嫩芽”等。“种子与嫩芽”:种子的嫩芽即名为种子嫩芽,譬如由于种子的无间因性而生出嫩芽。在树等之中,无论生起什么果,对于在该树等中生起的该果,这颗种子则作为辗转因而成为因。显示巴利原文
So imassa saṃsārassa sahetupaccayattaṃ yadi bhagavatā vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati amhehi saddahitabbaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ saddahitabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘evañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evanti iminā avijjādinā hetupaccayena sabbo paṭiccasamuppādo saṃsāroti nibbattoti bhagavatā saṃsārassa sahetupaccayattaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmā saddahitabbaṃ. Avijjādayo saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayo hotu, ‘‘katamo avijjāya hetū’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti avijjā avijjāya hetū’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Katamo avijjāya paccayo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘ayoniso manasikāro paccayo’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Katamā avijjā katamāya avijjāya hetū’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘purimikā avijjā pacchimikāya avijjāya hetū’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Katamā purimikā avijjā katamā pacchimikā avijjā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Avijjāpariyuṭṭhānassa hetubhūto purimo avijjānusayo samanantarova kiṃ, udāhu paramparahetupi hotī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘bījaṅkuro viyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bījaṅkuroti bījānaṃ aṅkuroti bījaṅkuro, bījānaṃ samanantarahetutāya aṅkuro nibbattati viya. Yattha rukkhādike yaṃ phalaṃ nibbattati, tasmiṃ rukkhādike nibbattassa assa phalassa idaṃ bījaṃ pana paramparahetutāya hetubhūtaṃ bhavati.
因为可能会问“然而种子只有一个,为何要说为二”,所以说了“因为有两种”等,意思是:依无间时与辗转时的差别,因也有两种。如同作为种子的因有两种,作为无明之因的无明随眠,依时的差别也有两种:无间因与辗转因。无间的无明随眠是无间无明现行的无间因;较前的无明随眠是较后无明现行的辗转因。同样地,如同作为种子的不共因,以及地、水等作为共缘,其差别是分明的;无明随眠是不共因,非理作意是共缘,应如此观其差别。显示巴利原文
‘‘Bījaṃ pana ekaṃyeva hoti, kathaṃ dvidhā vattabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘duvidho hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, samanantarakālaparamparakālabhedena hetupi duvidho hotiyevāti attho. Bījabhūto hetu duvidho yathā, evaṃ avijjāya hetubhūto avijjānusayopi samanantarahetu ca paramparahetu cāti kālabhedena duvidho bhavati, samanantaro avijjānusayo samanantarassa avijjāpariyuṭṭhānassa samanantarahetu hoti. Purimataro avijjānusayo pacchimatarassa avijjāpariyuṭṭhānassa paramparahetu hoti. Iti bījabhūto asādhāraṇo hetu, pathavīāpādiko sādhāraṇo paccayoti viseso pākaṭo yathā, evaṃ avijjānusayo asādhāraṇo hetu, ayonisomanasikāro sādhāraṇo paccayoti viseso daṭṭhabbo.
可能有人问:“只应如此论述因与缘的差别吗?”于是说“又如灯盏等”。注疏中说:“‘又如’等也是开示因与缘的差别。”其中,作为灯的缘的灯盏、灯芯和油,并非灯的自性因或同类因,这是其关联。若问:“为何应信作为灯的缘的灯盏等不是自性因?”则说“因为不能”等。因为无火、离火的灯盏、灯芯和油不能使灯点亮、燃烧,所以如同前灯是后灯的自性因那样,灯盏等不是自性因。如此,同类自性为因,异类非自性为缘;内在同类自性为因,外在非同类为缘。能生的无明随眠是无明缠缚的因,执取、支撑者是缘。与特定果不共者是因,与一切果共通者是缘。如此关联后,即使在灯喻中,因与缘的差别也应被明了,这是其意旨所在。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettakeneva hetupaccayānaṃ viseso vattabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yathā vā pana thālakañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – ‘‘yathā vā panātiādināpi hetupaccayavibhāgameva dassetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha padīpassa paccayabhūtaṃ thālakañca vaṭṭi ca telañca padīpassa sabhāvahetu samānahetu na hotīti yojanā. ‘‘Padīpassa paccayabhūtampi thālakādikaṃ sabhāvahetu na hotīti kasmā saddahitabba’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘na hi sakkā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Padīpassa paccayabhūtaṃ anaggikaṃ aggirahitaṃ thālakañca vaṭṭiñca telañca dīpetuṃ jāletuṃ hi yasmā na sakkā, tasmā purimo padīpo pacchimassa padīpassa sabhāvahetu hoti viya, evaṃ thālakādikaṃ sabhāvahetu na hoti. Iti evaṃpakāro sabhāvo samāno padīpo hetu hoti yathā, parabhāvo asamāno thālakādiko paccayo hoti yathā ca, tathā ajjhattiko sabhāvo hetu hoti, bāhiro asamāno paccayo hoti. Janako avijjānusayo avijjāpariyuṭṭhānassa hetu hoti, pariggāhako upatthambhako paccayo hoti. Aññehi phalehi asādhāraṇo hetu hoti, sabbehi phalehi sādhāraṇo paccayo hotīti yojetvā padīpopamāyapi hetupaccayānaṃ pākaṭo viseso daṭṭhabboti adhippāyo.
导师说因缘的差别、因、资具,而此因之因性是有待于果的,因此,为阐明“因性以何种方式存在,什么是因性,什么是方式”、“什么果以什么差别存在,什么是果,什么是差别”、“因果之间有什么关联”这一切,而说“不断义”等。在注疏中,这一衔接义如此说:“今因被称为‘资具’,而因性待望于果,故为阐明因的因性如何、如何存在、什么是果、什么是果的差别、什么是因果的关联这一切,而说‘不断义’等”,应如此了知。显示巴利原文
Hetupaccayappabhedaṃ kāraṇaṃ parikkhāroti ācariyena vuttaṃ, tassa kāraṇassa kāraṇabhāvo ca phalāpekkho hoti, tasmā ‘‘yo kāraṇabhāvo yenākārena hoti, katamo so kāraṇabhāvo, katamo so ākāro’’ti pucchitabbattā ca ‘‘yaṃ phalaṃ yena visesena hoti, katamaṃ taṃ phalaṃ, katamo so viseso’’ti pucchitabbattā ca ‘‘kāraṇaphalānaṃ yo sambandho hoti, katamo so sambandho’’ti pucchitabbattā ca taṃ sabbaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘avupacchedattho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayamanusandhyattho ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘idāni yasmā kāraṇaṃ ‘parikkhāro’ti vuttaṃ, kāraṇabhāvo ca phalāpekkhāya, tasmā kāraṇassa yo kāraṇabhāvo yathā ca so hoti, yañca phalaṃ, yo ca tassa viseso, yo ca kāraṇaphalānaṃ sambandho, taṃ sabbaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘avupacchedattho’tiādi vutta’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 49) iminā vuttoti daṭṭhabbo.
其中,被称为因缘的因,其不断之义即是相续义,以与果相关联故。又,那个因在成为自果的生者与支撑者后灭去,便名为不断。若某个果在成为他因而后灭去,于此不断中,它亦有相续义。然而,若某个果不成为他果之因而灭去,则是断,如同阿罗汉的死心。由因所生之果,其生起之义即是果义。结生蕴的结生义、结生作用,即是再有义、再发生义。烦恼的障碍义与于相续中生起之义,即是缠缚义。烦恼未被道所断除之义,即是随眠义。无明于四圣谛无通达之义,即是无明义。未被阿罗汉道遍知之义,即是识、结生识的种子义。显示巴利原文
Tattha avupacchinnassa hetupaccayasaṅkhātassa kāraṇassa yo anupacchedattho atthi, so anupacchedattho santatiattho hoti phalena sambandhattā , yañca kāraṇaṃ attano phalassa janakaṃ upatthambhakaṃ hutvā nirujjhati, so anupacchinno eva nāma hotīti. Yañca phalaṃ aññassa kāraṇaṃ hutvā nirujjhati, tasmiṃ anupacchinne tassa ca santatiattho hoti. Yaṃ pana phalaṃ aññassa phalassa kāraṇaṃ ahutvā nirujjhati, taṃ upacchinnaṃ hoti, yathā taṃ arahato cuticittanti. Kāraṇato nibbattassa phalassa yo nibbattiattho atthi, so nibbattiattho phalattho hoti. Paṭisandhikkhandhānaṃ yo paṭisandhiattho paṭisandahanattho atthi, so paṭisandhiattho punabbhavattho punabbhavanattho hoti. Kilesānaṃ yo palibodhattho santāne uppajjanattho atthi, so palibodhattho pariyuṭṭhānattho hoti. Kilesānaṃ maggena yo asamugghātattho atthi, so asamugghātattho anusayattho hoti. Avijjāya catunnaṃ saccānaṃ yo asampaṭivedhattho atthi, so asampaṭivedhattho avijjattho hoti. Arahattamaggena yo apariññātattho atthi, so apariññātattho viññāṇassa paṭisandhiviññāṇassa bījattho hoti.
至此,因性、因行相、果及果的差别已被导师分别,亦为我们所了知。若问:“何谓辗转因缘义?何谓关联义?”则说“于何处有不断”等。于何处、于何种色与非色的转起中,有被称为因缘差别的因之不断,此不断即是在彼色与非色转起中的相续。于何处、于何种色与非色的转起中有相续,此相续即是在彼色与非色转起中的生起。如是关联之后,当知辗转因等。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā kāraṇabhāvo ca kāraṇākāro ca phalañca phalaviseso ca ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘katamo paramparahetupaccayattho, katamo ca sambandhattho’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yattha avupacchedo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yattha yassaṃ rūpārūpapavattiyaṃ avupacchinnassa hetupaccayappabhedassa kāraṇassa yo avupacchedo atthi, so avupacchedo tattha tissaṃ rūpārūpapavattiyaṃ santati hoti. Yattha yassaṃ rūpārūpapavattiyaṃ yā santati atthi, sā santatitattha rūpārūpapavattiyaṃ nibbatti hotītiādinā yojetvā paramparahetuādiko viññātabbo.
戒蕴,即清净的戒蕴。定蕴,即广大蕴,因定为广大法之所依。慧蕴,即以道果慧为主的蕴,以彼是名为解脱智见的省察智蕴之缘故。知异方等义,已于《足处义摄分别释》中解说。显示巴利原文
Sīlakkhandhoti parisuddhasīlakkhandho. Samādhikkhandhassāti mahaggatakkhandhassa, samādhipaṭṭhāno hi mahaggatadhammo. Paññākkhandhoti maggaphalapaññāpadhānakkhandho. So hi vimuttiñāṇadassanasaṅkhātassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇakkhandhassa paccayo hoti. Titthaññutādīnaṃ attho padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttova.
导师说“自性为因”,若问“怎样的自性为因”,便说“又如缘眼等”。眼识依眼与眼根为依止,依色为所缘而生起。其中,于眼等之中:眼根以增上缘、根缘的缘力成为眼识的缘;色所缘以先前已生的所缘缘为缘;光明以依止缘、亲依止缘为缘。这些虽是缘,但与果眼识不同类,故不是自性因,仅为缘;作意也是如此。然而,唯作意界与果眼识同以识性而同类,因此如同自性因;同样,诸行与识以名蕴性同类,当成为识的缘时,便是自性因。识与名色以同一相续性同类,当成为名色的缘时,也是自性因。依此道理,“名色缘六处”等义亦应了知。如此所说的因——能生的缘、支撑的缘,以及任何亲依止、强缘,这一切因缘,由于对于其所生、所支撑之果具有资益与造作的作用,在究竟意义上称为“资具”。显示巴利原文
Sabhāvo hetūti ācariyena vutto, ‘‘kīdiso so sabhāvo hetū’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yathā vā pana cakkhuñca paṭiccā’’tiādi vuttaṃ . Cakkhuviññāṇaṃ cakkhuñca cakkhundriyañca paṭicca nissayaṃ katvā rūpe paṭicca ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppajjati. Tattha cakkhādīsu cakkhundriyaṃ ādhipateyyapaccayatāya indriyapaccayatāya cakkhuviññāṇassa paccayo, rūpārammaṇaṃ purejātārammaṇapaccayatāya paccayo, āloko sannissayatāya upanissayatāya paccayo hoti. So paccayo honto phalena cakkhuviññāṇena asamānattā sabhāvo hetu na hoti, paccayo ca hoti manasikāro. Kiriyamanodhātu pana phalena cakkhuviññāṇena viññāṇabhāvena samānattā sabhāvo hetu hoti yathā, evaṃ saṅkhārā nāmakkhandhabhāvena samānattā viññāṇassa paccayā hontā sabhāvo hetu honti. Viññāṇaṃ nāmarūpena ekasantativasena samānattā nāmarūpassa paccayo hontaṃ sabhāvo hetu hoti. Iminā nayena ‘‘nāmarūpaṃ saḷāyatanassā’’tiādīsupi attho veditabbo. Evaṃ vuttappakāro hetu, paccayo janako, upatthambhako ca yo koci upanissayo balavapaccayo hoti, sabbo so hetupaccayo janakaupatthambhako janitabbupatthambhiyassa phalassa parikkharaṇato abhisaṅkharaṇato nippariyāyato parikkhāro nāma.
“所说这样的因缘,我们凭什么相信它就是‘资具’呢?”由于应作此问,故说“因此”等。正是以此因由——一切因缘的资具性,尊者大迦旃延说出“诸法生彼法”这句话,应依此言而信受。意思是:你们当依“诸法生彼法”这句话来审察。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vuttappakāro hetupaccayo parikkhāro nāmāti kena amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena kāraṇabhūtena sabbassa hetupaccayassa parikkhārabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno ‘‘ye dhammā yaṃ dhammaṃ janayantī’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena saddahitabbo, ‘‘ye dhammā yaṃ dhammaṃ janayantī’’ti vacanaṃ nissāya tumhehi sallakkhetabboti adhippāyo.
“资具之舍弃应这样结合”,为了说明这个道理,故说“已结合的资具之舍弃”。凡是应当结合的资具之舍弃,都需提取出来、结合之后加以运用。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettakova parikkhāro hāro yuñjitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto parikkhāro hāro’’ti vuttaṃ, yo yo parikkhāro hāro yuñjitabbo, so so parikkhāro hāro nīharitvā yutto yuñjitabboti.
然而,智者应依注疏与复注,详细辨析深义而受持。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.
16. 增益舍弃分别之阐释显示巴利原文
16. Samāropanahāravibhaṅgavibhāvanā
50 凡是以作为特殊解释的“资具舍弃”分别,解析了诸经义之因缘,这种……分别即告圆满。因当问“什么是增益舍弃分别”,故说“其中,什么是增益的舍弃”等。其中,于所开示的十六种宣说之舍弃等之中,哪一种特殊解释是增益舍弃分别的增益之舍弃?以“诸法以彼为根”等的指示,现在由我宣说者,即名为“在一处所,有多少处所进入”等广说之特殊解释,正是增益舍弃分别。显示巴利原文
50. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena parikkhārahāravibhaṅgena suttatthānaṃ hetupaccayo vibhatto, so…pe… vibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo samāropanahāravibhaṅgo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo samāropano hāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu niddiṭṭhesu soḷasasu desanāhārādīsu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso samāropano hāro samāropanahāravibhaṅgo nāmāti pucchati. ‘‘Ye dhammā yaṃmūlā’’tiādiniddesassa idāni mayā vuccamāno ‘‘ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne yattakāni padaṭṭhānāni otarantī’’tiādiko vitthārasaṃvaṇṇanāviseso samāropanahāravibhaṅgo nāma.
因当问:“经中说多少处所时,应增益多少处所?”故说“在一处所”等。当经中宣说一处所时,那些未说而进入、会集的全部处所,一切未说之处所,都应如同经中所说,以简择的方式引出,增益于教示中。因当说:“应如同什么那样增益?”故说“如于回转中”等。在回转舍弃中,当经中说一处所时,许多经中未说的处所进入;如同那些许多处所需被寻求一样,同样地,在增益舍弃中,也应当将许多处所增益于教示之中,这就是其中的意思。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kittake padaṭṭhāne sutte vutte kittakāni padaṭṭhānāni samāropayitabbānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne sutte vutte sati avuttāni yattakāni padaṭṭhānāni otaranti samosaranti, sabbāni tāni avuttāni padaṭṭhānāni sutte vuttāni viya niddhāraṇavasena ānetvā desanāya āropayitabbāni. ‘‘Kāni viya samāropayitabbānī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yathā āvaṭṭe’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Āvaṭṭe hāre ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne sutte vutte sati sutte avuttāni bahukāni padaṭṭhānāni otaranti, tāni bahukāni padaṭṭhānāni pariyesitabbāni yathā, evaṃ samāropane hārepi bahukāni padaṭṭhānāni desanāya samāropayitabbānīti attho.
因为应说:“增益是否仅依处所而作,还是也应依其他方式而作?”因此也依其他方式而作增益。所以,为了显示增益应作四种,而说“其中,增益有四种”等。其中,在这些应增益者中,增益有四处所增益、同义词增益、修习增益、断除增益这四种分类,增益应作四种。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kevalaṃ pana padaṭṭhānavaseneva samāropanā kātabbā kiṃ, udāhu aññavasenāpi samāropanā kātabbā ki’’nti vattabbattā aññavasenāpi samāropanā kātabbā; tasmā samāropanā catubbidhā kātabbāti dassento ‘‘tattha samāropanā catubbidhā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti tāsu samāropayitabbasamāropanāsu padaṭṭhānaṃ padaṭṭhānasamāropanā, vevacanaṃ vevacanasamāropanā, bhāvanā bhāvanāsamāropanā, pahānaṃ pahānasamāropanā, iti iminā pabhedena samāropanā catubbidhā kātabbā.
由于应问:“于这四种增益中,何为处所增益?”因此这样问后,为了显示处所增益,而说“其中,何为……”等。这是问:以经中已说的处所,增益经中未说的处所,这算什么?显示巴利原文
‘‘Tāsu catubbidhāsu samāropanāsu katamā padaṭṭhānasamāropanā’’ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā padaṭṭhānasamāropanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthakatamā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sutte vuttena padaṭṭhānena sutte avuttānaṃ padaṭṭhānānaṃ samāropanā katamāti pucchati.
一切恶、不善的不作——有不作之因的教诫存在,这就是诸佛的教诫、教示;或者,不作——为了不作而有教诫存在,这就是诸佛的教诫、教示,不是其他任何人的教诫,这是其意思。因为“不作”一词在此是就目的格而用的对格,如同“为了什么目的、有何用处”一般。善的成就——为了成就而有教诫存在,这就是诸佛的教诫。自心清净——为了自心清净而有教诫存在,这就是诸佛的教诫。显示巴利原文
Sabbapāpassa akusalassa yaṃ akaraṇaṃ akaraṇahetu sāsanaṃ atthi, etaṃ sāsanaṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ ovādo hoti, atha vā akaraṇaṃ akaraṇatthāya yaṃ sāsanaṃ atthi, etaṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ ovādo hoti, na yassa kassaci sāsananti attho. Akaraṇanti hi sampadānatthe pavattaṃ paccattavacanaṃ yathā ‘‘kissa atthāya kimattha’’nti. Kusalassa sampadā sampadāya yaṃ sāsanaṃ atthi, etaṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ. Sacittapariyodāpanaṃ sacittapariyodāpanatthaṃ yaṃ sāsanaṃ atthi, etaṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ hoti.
如是以此种方式所说之教诫,其近因是什么?为此,再问其各别之近因。应知此三善行即是教诫、教示的近因,因为以三善行为因,故为教诫,如言“依食而住”等。当问及“三善行为近因时,应以何为近因安置”时,故言“其中,凡身业”等。此三蕴应可安立为教诫之近因。当问及“三蕴为近因时,应以何为近因安置”时,故言“其中,戒蕴”等。此止观二法应可安立为教诫之近因。当问及“止观二法为近因时,应以何为近因安置”时,故言“其中,止之果”等。此二果应可安立为教诫之近因。显示巴利原文
Iti evaṃpakārena vuttassa tassa sāsanassa kiṃ padaṭṭhānanti visesassa visesapadaṭṭhānaṃ puna pucchati. Idaṃ sucaritattayaṃ sāsanassa ovādassa padaṭṭhānaṃ sucaritattayena hetunā sāsanattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ yathā ‘‘annena vasatī’’tiādi. ‘‘Sucaritattaye padaṭṭhāne vutte katamaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yaṃ kāyikañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ khandhattayaṃ sāsanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabbaṃ, ‘‘khandhattaye padaṭṭhāne samāropayite katamaṃ samāropayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha sīlakkhandho cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ samathavipassanādvayaṃ sāsanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabbaṃ. ‘‘Samathavipassanādvaye padaṭṭhāne samāropayite katamaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha samathassa phala’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ phaladvayaṃ sāsanassa padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabbaṃ.
“教法的诸近因应被安立”,即由阿阇梨拣择、分别,并为我们所了知。又因应问“现在,应将哪一个近因安立于哪一个之上”,故说“vanaṃ vanathassa”等。这五种欲功德被称为“林”,应被安立为被称为渴爱之“林丛”的近因,因为它们是渴爱的所依;这依止于“女人”或“男人”相等之“林”,应被安立为执取“啊,眼!啊,耳!啊,鼻!啊,舌!啊,身!”等随形好之“林丛”的近因。这十二处的未遍知之“林”,应被安立为结缚之“林丛”的近因,因为结缚依处而生;这随眠之“林”,应被安立为缠缚之“林丛”的近因。又因应说“我们凭什么相信五欲功德等为林,而渴爱等为林丛”,故说“tenāha bhagavā”等。因此,由于五欲功德等是林,渴爱等是林丛,故世尊说此“应断除林与林丛”之语;依于世尊此语,应当信受。Ayanti 这是对“ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne”等的注释。Padaṭṭhānenāti 即一一近因。Samāropanāti 即对他者的安立。显示巴利原文
Sāsanassa padaṭṭhānāni samāropayitabbānīti ācariyena niddhāretvā vibhattāni, amhehi ca ñātāni, ‘‘idāni katamassa katamaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘vanaṃ vanathassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ kāmaguṇapañcakaṃ vanaṃ taṇhābhūtassa vanathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ taṇhāvatthubhāvato, ‘‘itthī’’ti vā ‘‘puriso’’ti vā nimittaggāhasaṅkhātaṃ idaṃ vanaṃ ‘‘aho cakkhu, aho sotaṃ, aho ghānaṃ, aho jivhā, aho kāyo’’ti tesaṃ tesaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ anubyañjanaggāhasaṅkhātassa vanathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabbaṃ. Apariññātaṃ dvādasāyatanasaṅkhātaṃ idaṃ vanaṃ saṃyojanasaṅkhātassa vanathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabbaṃ, āyatanaṃ paṭicca saṃyojanuppajjanato anusayasaṅkhātaṃ idaṃ vanaṃ pariyuṭṭhānasaṅkhātassa vanathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ samāropayitabbaṃ. ‘‘Pañcakāmaguṇādīnaṃ vanabhāvo ca taṇhādīnaṃ vanathabhāvo ca kena amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena pañcakāmaguṇādīnaṃ vanabhāvena ca taṇhādīnaṃ vanathabhāvena ca bhagavā ‘‘chetvā vanañca vanathañcā’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena bhagavato vacanena vacanānusārena saddahitabboti. Ayanti ayaṃ ‘‘ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāne’’tiādisaṃvaṇṇanā. Padaṭṭhānenāti ekekena padaṭṭhānena. Samāropanāti tadaññapadaṭṭhānānaṃ samāropanā . Samāropenti samāropayitabbāni etāya saṃvaṇṇanāyāti samāropanāti viggahoti. (1)
51 以近因进行的安立,已由阿阇梨指出,并为我们所了知。又因应问“以同义词进行的安立是哪一个”,故说“tattha katamā vevacanenā”等。Tatthāti,即于这四种近因安立等之中,问:以同义词,将一一同义词安立于其他同义词的安立是哪一个?“rāgavirāgā”、“cetovimuttī”与“sekkhaphala”这三词,因为是不来果之义,故为不来果的同义词。“avijjāvirāgā”、“paññāvimuttī”与“asekkhaphala”这三词,因为是阿罗汉果之义,故为阿罗汉果的同义词。应以同样的方法,于其他各处加以贯通。显示巴利原文
51. Padaṭṭhānena samāropanā ācariyena niddiṭṭhā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘katamā vevacanena samāropanā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamā vevacanenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tāsu catūsu padaṭṭhānasamāropanādīsu samāropanāsu vevacanena ekekena rotadaññavevacanānaṃ samāropanā katamāti pucchati. ‘‘Rāgavirāgā’’ti ca ‘‘cetovimuttī’’ti ca ‘‘sekkhaphala’’nti ca idaṃ vacanattayaṃ anāgāmiphalatthattā anāgāmiphalassa vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Avijjāvirāgā’’ti ca ‘‘paññāvimuttī’’ti ca ‘‘asekkhaphala’’nti ca idaṃ vacanattayaṃ arahattaphalatthattā arahattaphalassa vevacanaṃ. Iminā nayena sesesu yojanā kātabbā. (2)
以同义词所作的安立,导师已予开示,我等亦已了知。由于应问“以修习所作的安立为何”,故说“tattha katamā bhāvanāyā”等。“Tatthāti”意即:在这些四类立足点安立等之中,以哪一种已教导的修习,对哪些未教导的修习,如何安立?即如此提问。其意为:正如世尊以某种方式宣说了“tasmātiha, tvaṃ bhikkhu, kāye kāyānupassī viharati, ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ”这一修习,同样地,应以那种方式、即以彼修习,将其他修习亦如此安立。显示巴利原文
Vevacanena samāropanā ācariyena niddiṭṭhā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘katamā bhāvanāya samāropanā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamā bhāvanāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tāsu catūsu padaṭṭhānasamāropanādīsu katamāya desitāya bhāvanāya katamesānaṃ adesitānaṃ bhāvanāropanā katamāti pucchati. Yathā yena pakārena yaṃ bhāvanaṃ bhagavā ‘‘tasmātiha, tvaṃ bhikkhu, kāye kāyānupassī viharati, ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.369, 371, 395, 415) āha, tathā tena pakārena tāya bhāvanāya tadaññabhāvanāpi samāropayitabbāti attho.
由于应问“在‘tasmātiha’等经文中,世尊宣说了何种修习”,故说“ātāpī”等。以“ātāpī”一词,世尊宣说了精进根;以“sampajāno”一词,宣说了慧根;以“satimā”一词,宣说了念根;以“vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ”一词,宣说了定根。由于应问“如是宣说后,应安立何种修习”,故说“evaṃ kāye kāyānupassino viharato cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantī”。其意为:以如是所宣说的精进根等修习,应安立四念处。问:以何因由得至修习圆满?答:因四根之根性,或因应修习性,具有同一特相,故达修习圆满。由于应问“他们安立之后,复应安立何者”,故说“catūsū”等。其意为:当四念处被修习、应被安立之时,四正勤达至修习圆满,故应如此安立。其余各处,亦当以同样方式安立。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tasmātihā’’tiādipāṭhe ‘‘kiṃ bhāvanaṃ bhagavā āhā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘ātāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ātāpī’’ti vacanena vīriyindriyaṃ bhagavā āha. ‘‘Sampajāno’’ti vacanena paññindriyaṃ bhagavā āha. ‘‘Satimā’’ti vacanena satindriyaṃ āha. ‘‘Vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassa’’nti vacanena samādhindriyaṃ āha. ‘‘Evaṃ vutte katamā bhāvanā samāropayitabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘evaṃ kāye kāyānupassino viharato cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vuttāya vīriyindriyādibhāvanāya cattāro satipaṭṭhānā samāropayitabbāti attho. Kena kāraṇena bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantīti pucchati. Catunnaṃ indriyānaṃ indriyabhāvena, bhāvetabbabhāvena vā ekalakkhaṇattā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantīti vissajjeti. ‘‘Tesu samāropitesu katame samāropayitabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘catūsū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu bhāviyamānesu samāropayitabbesu cattāro sammappadhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantīti samāropayitabbāti attho. Sesesupi evameva samāropayitabbā.
以修习所作的安立,导师已予阐明,我等亦已了知。由于应问“以断除所作的安立为何”,故说“tattha katamā”等。“Tatthāti”意即:在这些四类立足点安立等之中,以哪一种已教导的断除,对哪些未教导的断除,如何安立?即如此提问。以“kāye kāyānupassī viharanto asubhe ‘subha’nti vipallāsaṃ pajahatī”这一已教导的、断除“净”颠倒的断除,亦应安立对段食作遍知而应断的障碍烦恼、欲取之断除等。显示巴利原文
Bhāvanāya samāropanā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘katamā pahānena samāropanā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tāsu catūsu padaṭṭhānasamāropanādīsu katamena desitena pahānena katamesaṃ adesitānaṃ pahānānaṃ katamā samāropanāti pucchati. ‘‘Kāye kāyānupassī viharanto asubhe ‘subha’nti vipallāsaṃ pajahatī’’ti desitena ‘‘subha’’nti vipallāsappahānena kabaḷīkārāhārapariññāya paribandhakilesakāmupādānappahānādayopi samāropayitabbā.
依“于受随观受而住时,于苦断除‘乐’想颠倒”这一教导,由断除“乐”颠倒,也应安立对触食遍知的障烦恼、有取之断除等义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharanto dukkhe ‘sukha’nti vipallāsaṃ pajahatī’’ti desitena ‘‘sukha’’nti vipallāsappahānena phassāhārapariññāya paribandhakilesabhavupādānappahānādayopi samāropayitabbā.
依“于心随观心而住时,于无常断除‘常’想颠倒”这一教导,由断除“常”颠倒,也应安立对识食遍知的障烦恼、见取之断除等义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Citte cittānupassī viharanto anicce ‘nicca’nti vipallāsaṃ pajahatī’’ti desitena ‘‘nicca’’nti vipallāsappahānena viññāṇāhārapariññāya paribandhakilesadiṭṭhupādānappahānādayopi samāropayitabbā.
依“于法随观法而住时,于无我断除‘我’想颠倒”这一教导,由断除“我”颠倒,也应安立对意思食遍知的障烦恼、我语取之断除等义——这是意趣。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dhammesudhammānupassī viharanto anattani ‘attā’ti vipallāsaṃ pajahatī’’ti desitena ‘‘attā’’ti vipallāsappahānena manosañcetanāhārapariññāya? Manosañcetanāhārapariññāya paribandhakilesaattavādupādānappahānādayopi samāropayitabbāti adhippāyo. (4)
然而,“断除之理”在相理分别的注释中已经说过,所以此处不再赘述。显示巴利原文
Pahānahāro pana lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttoyevāti idha na vadāma.
因为应当这样提问:“经中已教导的各各词处等,其未教导的词处等的归摄方式,我们应如何了知、应如何信受呢?”因此,他说了“因此,尊者……”等。通过这样的归摄方式,尊者大迦旃延——显示巴利原文
‘‘Sutte desitena ekekena padaṭṭhānādikena adesitānaṃ padaṭṭhānādīnaṃ samāropanabhāvo kena amhehi vijānitabbo saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāha āyasmā’’tiādimāha. Tena tathā samāropanabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno –
那些以何为根本的法,以及牟尼所宣说的同义法,
它们应当被归摄,此即归摄之摄。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ye dhammā yaṃmūlā, ye cekatthā pakāsitā muninā; Te samāropayitabbā, esa samāropano hāro’’ti –
凭借所说言语,依循言语次第,你们应当了知、信受如此归摄的义理——此义已宣说。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena vacanānusārena tathā samāropanabhāvo tumhehi vijānitabbo saddahitabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
“难道仅凭这些,归摄之摄便已圆满,再无其他适用?”因为应作如是言说,所以说“已应用的归摄之摄”。依经中已教导的方法,以词处等,应归摄未教导的词处;以彼彼词处等,对未教导的词处等作归摄的归摄之摄,是已应用的,应被择取、应用——此义应知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kiṃ pana ettāvatā samāropano hāro paripuṇṇo, añño niyutto natthī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto samāropano hāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Sutte desitena nayena padaṭṭhānādikena adesitāni padaṭṭhānāni samāropayitabbāni bhavanti, tena tena padaṭṭhānādikena adesitānaṃ padaṭṭhānādīnaṃ samāropano hāro niyutto niddhāretvā yuñjitabboti attho daṭṭhabbo.
然而,智者应当随顺注疏与复注,将深奥的义理详细分别之后而领受。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabbo.
上述的十六种分别殊胜,由于能除遣对所应分别之义的无知与疑惑,故称为‘摄’。显示巴利原文
Ime yathāvuttā soḷasa saṃvaṇṇanāvisesā saṃvaṇṇetabbatthesu aññāṇasaṃsayānaṃ haraṇato apanayanato hārā nāmāti.
一、教示摄会合之阐明显示巴利原文
1. Desanāhārasampātavibhāvanā
52 52. 无论哪种成为分别殊胜的教示摄分别等摄分别,只要它将味等种种经义分别开显出来,那么,这个成为分别殊胜的教示摄分别等摄分别,即是圆满的。显示巴利原文
52. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena desanāhāravibhaṅgādihāravibhaṅgena assādādayo nānāsuttatthā vibhattā, so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto desanāhāravibhaṅgādihāravibhaṅgo paripuṇṇo.
先以十六种摄,由观察方位而善观察方位已;
以钩简要地依三种理趣,来指示经典。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Soḷasa hārā paṭhamaṃ, disālocanato disā viloketvā; Saṅkhipiya aṅkusena hi, nayehi tīhi niddise sutta’’nti. (netti. 4 nayasaṅkhepa) –
此偈颂是导师在〈指示品〉中所说。该偈颂的解释,在〈摄分别品〉之初并未加以分别。由于应当问:“是在某处作了分别?还是在〈摄会合〉中作了分别?抑或是在〈理趣起源摄〉中作了分别?”为令了知“你们应知,是在〈摄会合〉中作了分别”,故说了“先以十六摄”等语。显示巴利原文
Gāthā niddesavāre ācariyena vuttā, tassā gāthāya niddeso hāravibhaṅgavārassa ādimhi na vibhatto, ‘‘kuhiñci vibhatto, hārasampāte vā vibhatto kiṃ, udāhu nayasamuṭṭhānahāre vā vibhatto ki’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘hārasampāte vibhatto’’ti tumhehi daṭṭhabboti viññāpanatthaṃ ‘‘soḷasa hārā paṭhama’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
或者,恰如在善加整备的土地上,对种种应分别的经文,以分别方式运用如同各色香花般的十六摄,导师将十六摄分别了;同样,在善学技艺的导师善加思择的阎浮金饰上,对种种应分别的经文,以分别方式运用如同种种光芒之网与各种宝珠般的十六摄,导师将十六摄分别了。又如翻覆大地令人食生米屑,极为不易,在种种应分别的经文中,以十六摄令人了知胜义之精华,犹如极难令食,导师如此而行;又如挤压由旬蜜团令人啜饮极甜之味,极为不易,在种种应分别的经文中,以十六摄令人了知胜义之甘味,犹如极难令饮,导师如此而行。导师在众多应分别的经文中,以分别方式运用十六摄后,将十六摄分别,并为我们所了知。因为应说:‘是在种种经文中以分别方式运用后,将十六摄分别了呢?还是也在单一的应分别经文中,以分别方式运用后,将十六摄分别了呢?’为了作出这样的分别:‘正是在单一的应分别经文中,以分别方式运用后,将十六摄分别了’,而说了‘先以十六摄’等开头的摄会合品。显示巴利原文
Atha vā suparikammakatabhūmisadisesu saṃvaṇṇetabbesu nānāsuttappadesesu nānāvaṇṇasugandhapupphasadise soḷasa hāre saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena yojetvā soḷasa hārā ācariyena vibhattā, tathā susikkhitasippācariyasuvicāritajambunadābharaṇasadisesu saṃvaṇṇetabbesu nānāsuttappadesesu nānāvidharaṃsijālavividhamaṇiratanasadise soḷasa hāre saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena yojetvāva soḷasa hārā vibhattā, mahāpathaviṃ parivattetvā pappaṭakojassa khādāpanaṃ atidukkaraṃ viya, nānāvidhesu saṃvaṇṇetabbesu suttappadesesu paramatthojāya soḷasahi hārehi atidukkarakhādāpanasadisaṃ viññāpanaṃ karontena ca yojanikamadhugaṇḍaṃ pīḷetvā sumadhurasassa pāyāpanaṃ atidukkaraṃ viya nānāvidhesu saṃvaṇṇetabbesu suttappadesesu paramatthamadhurasassa soḷasahi hārehi atidukkaraṃ pāyāpanasadisaṃ viññāpanaṃ karontena ca ācariyena anekesu saṃvaṇṇetabbasuttappadesesu soḷasa hāre saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena yojetvā soḷasa hārā vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘nānāvidhasuttappadesesu te saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena yojetvā soḷasa hārā vibhattā kiṃ , udāhu ekasmimpi saṃvaṇṇetabbasuttappadese saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena yojetvā soḷasa hārā vibhattā ki’’nti vattabbattā ekasmimpi saṃvaṇṇetabbasuttappadese saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena yojetvā soḷasa hārā vibhattāyevāti tathā vibhajanto ‘‘soḷasa hārā paṭhama’’ntiādikaṃ hārasampātavāraṃ āha.
若问:“想要阐述摄会合品的导师,难道不应说‘其中,什么是教示摄会合?’等语吗?为何却说‘先以十六摄’等?”在指示中已说:“‘先以十六摄’等开头的偈颂,摄分别品不采用它,因为其境界分散,且理趣考察被隔断。而摄会合品则采用该偈颂,因为其境界不分散。因此,为了令人了知‘应回溯该偈颂,在摄会合品中见其指示’,故必定要说‘先以十六摄’等。”然而,在注疏中——显示巴利原文
Nanu hārasampātavāraṃ kathetukāmena ācariyena ‘‘tattha katamo desanāhārasampāto’’tiādivacanaṃ vattabbaṃ, atha kasmā ‘‘soḷasa hārā paṭhama’’ntiādi vattabbanti ce? Niddese vuttaṃ ‘‘soḷasa hārā paṭhama’’ntiādikaṃ gāthaṃ hāravibhaṅgavāro nappayojeti vippakiṇṇavisayattā ca nayavicārassa ca antaritattā. Hārasampātavāro pana taṃ gāthaṃ payojeti avikiṇṇavisayattā. Tasmā taṃ gāthaṃ paccāmasitvā hārasampātavāre tassā gāthāya niddeso daṭṭhabboti viññāpanatthaṃ ‘‘soḷasa hārā paṭhama’’ntiādi vattabbaṃyevāti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
如是,犹如在善加整备的土地上撒布各色散花,犹如在善学技艺的导师善加思择的优美金饰上镶嵌闪烁种种光芒之网的各色宝珠,犹如翻覆大地令人食用生米屑,犹如挤压由旬蜜团令人啜饮极甜之味,尊者大迦旃延在种种经文中举例,将十六摄分别之后,现在为了将它们运用于单一的经中而示现,开始了摄会合品。而在开始时,即是在摄分别品中——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ suparikammakatāya bhūmiyā nānāvaṇṇāni muttapupphāni pakiranto viya, susikkhitasippācariyavicāritesu surattasuvaṇṇālaṅkāresu nānāvidharaṃsijālasamujjalāni vividhāni maṇiratanāni bandhanto viya, mahāpathaviṃ parivattetvā pappaṭakojaṃ khādāpento viya , yojanikamadhugaṇḍaṃ pīḷetvā sumadhurasaṃ pāyento viya ca āyasmā mahākaccāno nānāsuttappadese udāharanto soḷasa hāre vibhajitvā idāni te ekasmiṃyeva sutte yojetvā dassento hārasampātavāraṃ ārabhi. Ārabhanto ca yāyaṃ niddesavāre –
先以十六种摄,由观察方位而照见诸方位后;
以钩简要地,以三种理趣开示经典。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Soḷasa hārā paṭhamaṃ, disālocanato disā viloketvā; Saṅkhipiya aṅkusena hi, nayehi tīhi niddise sutta’’nti. –
已说此偈。因为摄分别品未运用此偈,其涉及的范围分散,且理趣的考察有所间隔。摄分别品仅是借由众多经文片段显示诸摄的分别;而摄会合品则运用此偈,因为它在单一的经文片段中便结合了十六摄,紧接着便阐述了理趣的生起。因此,回顾“先以十六摄”之偈后,便说:“应于何处见该偈的指示?当于摄会合中见。”显示巴利原文
Gāthā vuttā. Yasmā taṃ hāravibhaṅgavāro nappayojeti vippakiṇṇavisayattā, nayavicārassa ca antaritattā. Anekehi suttappadesehi hārānaṃ vibhāgadassanameva hi hāravibhaṅgavāro. Hārasampātavāro pana taṃ payojeti ekasmiṃyeva suttappadese soḷasa hāre yojetvāva tadanantaraṃ nayasamuṭṭhānassa kathitattā. Tasmā ‘‘soḷasa hārā paṭhama’’nti gāthaṃ paccāmasitvā ‘‘tassā niddeso kuhiṃ daṭṭhabbo? Hārasampāteti āhā’’ti –
已说。颂句之义在义释的阐明中已明。关于“十六……经”的颂,乃阿阇梨在义释中所说。那么,此颂的义释应于何处见?是应视作阿阇梨在杖论广释的开头未作阐释,而于杖论汇集处回顾后作了解释?还是应视作于理趣生起处回顾后作了解释?答:应视作于杖论汇集处回顾后作了解释。显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ. Gāthāttho niddesavibhāvanāyaṃ vuttova. ‘‘Soḷasa…pe… sutta’’nti yā gāthā niddese ācariyena vuttā, tassā gāthāya niddeso kuhiṃ daṭṭhabbo, hāravibhaṅgassa ādimhi ācariyena na vibhatto, hārasampāte vā paccāmasitvā vibhattoti daṭṭhabbo kiṃ, udāhu nayasamuṭṭhāne vā paccāmasitvā vibhattoti daṭṭhabbo kinti pucchati. Hārasampāte paccāmasitvā vibhattoti daṭṭhabboti vissajjanā.
阿阇梨说:此颂的义释应见于杖论汇集处。该杖论汇集依说法杖论汇集等差别而有十六种。由于应当问“其中,何为杖论汇集?何为说法杖论汇集”,因此在对此应加注释的经中,因无注释,故由我加以解释、属于杖论汇集的注释特例,即名说法杖论汇集。为如此解释,而说“其中,何为说法杖论汇集”等。其中,即在那十六种说法杖论汇集等杖论汇集中。那么,属于杖论汇集的注释特例,哪一种名为说法杖论汇集呢?显示巴利原文
Hārasampāte tassā gāthāya niddeso daṭṭhabboti ācariyena vutto, so hārasampāto desanāhārasampātabhedena soḷasavidho, ‘‘tattha katamo hārasampāto desanāhārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā imasmiṃ sutte saṃvaṇṇetabbe saṃvaṇṇanābhāvena mayā vibhajiyamāno hārasampātabhūto saṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhārasampāto nāmāti tathā vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha katamo desanāhārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ soḷasavidhe desanāhārasampātādike hārasampāte. Katamo hārasampātabhūto saṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhārasampāto nāmāti pucchati.
以不警觉之心,与邪见相应者,
被昏沉睡眠所胜者,便入于魔的掌控。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Arakkhitena cittena, micchādiṭṭhihatena ca; Thinamiddhābhibhūtena, vasaṃ mārassa gacchatī’’ti. –
在经中,先问:“‘以无防护之心’,是表示什么?”而后回答“表示放逸”等,如此注解特例,即名为“说法杖论汇集”。该颂的意义已在注释书(《导论注》52)中解释。其关联之义为:以无防护之心,即具无防护心之人,趣入魔罗与死神的掌控。被邪见所害,即是被颠倒所害,具颠倒之人,趣入魔罗的掌控。被昏沉睡眠所胜,即是指心需由他力策励、懈怠者,具如是心之人,趣入魔罗、烦恼等众魔的掌控。显示巴利原文
Sutte ‘‘arakkhitena cittenāti kiṃdesayatī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘pamādaṃ desayatī’’tiādisaṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhārasampāto nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Gāthāttho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 52) vibhatto. Yojanattho pana arakkhitena cittena arakkhitacittasamaṅgī puggalo mārassa maccuno vasaṃ gacchati. Micchādiṭṭhihatena vipallāsena vipallāsasamaṅgī puggalo mārassa vasaṃ gacchati. Thinamiddhābhibhūtena sasaṅkhārikacittena kusītacittena taṃcittasamaṅgī puggalo mārassa kilesādimārassa vasaṃ gacchatīti.
因应问:“‘以无防护之心’一语所示的那已生的放逸法,属于谁的境界?”故说:“那是死神的境界。”由“以无防护之心”此经句所示的意义,已由阿阇梨解释,我们也已了知。因应问:“‘以被邪见所害’此经句所示的意义,是如何解释的?”故说:“以被邪见所害”等。当有人以某种颠倒,于无常中见为常,那时所生的该颠倒,即称为“被邪见所害”。因应问:“然而此颠倒有何特征?”如此问后,说:“颠倒的特征即是执取相反。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Arakkhitena cittenā’ti padena desitaṃ taṃ pamādadhammajātaṃ kassa pada’’nti vattabbattā ‘‘taṃ maccuno pada’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Arakkhitena cittenā’’ti iminā suttappadesena desito attho ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘micchādiṭṭhihatena cāti suttappadesena desito attho kathaṃ vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘micchādiṭṭhihatena cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yena vipallāsena yadā anicce ‘‘nicca’’nti passati, tadā pavatto so vipallāso ‘‘micchādiṭṭhihataṃ nāmā’’ti vuccati. ‘‘So pana vipallāso kiṃlakkhaṇo’’ti pucchitabbattā tathā pucchitvā ‘‘viparītaggāhalakkhaṇo vipallāso’’ti vuttaṃ.
所谓执取相反的特征,是指对于不净等,却执取为净等相反的特征。因为“令颠倒”这一使役含义,故称为颠倒。什么是颠倒?什么是执取相反的特征?该颠倒令想颠倒,令心颠倒,亦令见颠倒。如此,它令这三法颠倒,由于所应颠倒之法有三种,颠倒也有三种。其中,想颠倒微细而羸弱,仅以净等的方式执取所现的相;心颠倒较想颠倒更有力,对于以净等方式显现的色蕴等,以净等的方式确定而执取;见颠倒较想颠倒、心颠倒更强有力,对于任何以净等相状显现的所缘,常以常见等方式执著而执取。因此,先说想颠倒,次说心颠倒,后说见颠倒。详细来说,每一颠倒依执取净、乐、我、常而有四种,故共计十二种。显示巴利原文
Viparītaggāhalakkhaṇoti asubhādīnaṃyeva subhādiviparītaggāhalakkhaṇo vipallāso ‘‘vipallāsayatī’’ti kāritatthasambhavato. Kiṃ vipallāso viparītaggāhalakkhaṇo? So vipallāso saññaṃ vipallāsayati, cittampi vipallāsayati, diṭṭhimpi vipallāsayati. Iti tayo dhamme vipallāsayatīti vipallāsetabbānaṃ tividhattā vipallāsāpi tividhā honti. Tesu saññāvipallāso muduko dubbalo subhādivasena upaṭṭhitākāraggahaṇamattattā, cittavipallāso saññāvipallāsato balavā subhādivasena upaṭṭhahantānaṃ rūpakkhandhādīnaṃ subhādivasena sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā gahaṇato. Diṭṭhivipallāso saññāvipallāsacittavipallāsehi balavataro, yaṃ yaṃ ārammaṇaṃ subhādiākārena upaṭṭhāti. Taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ sassatādivasena abhinivisitvā gahaṇato. Tasmā saññāvipallāso paṭhamaṃ vutto, tadanantaraṃ cittavipallāso, tadanantaraṃ diṭṭhivipallāso vutto. Vitthārato pana ekekassa subhasukhaattaniccaggahaṇavasena catubbidhattā dvādasavidhā honti.
颠倒已由阿阇梨阐明,我们也已了知。因为应当提问:“哪些是颠倒活动处与境的所缘?”为了显示这些自身存在的所依正是颠倒活动处与境的所缘,而说:“它于何处令颠倒?于四种自身存在的所依。”在色身、受、心、法这四种自身存在的所依中,所有颠倒令想、心、见颠倒。因为应当提问:“对于如何观察者,它令颠倒?”而说:“观色是我”等。若有补特伽罗观色是我,或观有色是我,或观我中有色,或观色中有我,对于如此观察的补特伽罗,颠倒于色身中令想、心、见颠倒。受等也是如此。显示巴利原文
Vipallāsā ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘katame vipallāsapavattiṭṭhānavisayā’’ti pucchitabbattā imāni attabhāvavatthūni vipallāsapavattiṭṭhānavisayānīti dassetuṃ ‘‘so kuhiṃ vipallāsayati catūsu attabhāvavatthūsū’’ti vuttaṃ. Catūsu rūpakāyavedanācittadhammasaṅkhātesu attabhāvavatthūsu so sabbo vipallāso saññācittadiṭṭhiyo vipallāsayati. ‘‘Kathaṃ samanupassantassa vipallāsayatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yo puggalo rūpaṃ vā attato samanupassati, rūpavantaṃ attānaṃ vā attato samanupassati , attani rūpaṃ vā attato samanupassati. Rūpasmiṃ attānaṃ vā attato samanupassati, evaṃ tassa samanupassantassa puggalassa vipallāso rūpakāye saññācittadiṭṭhiyo vipallāsayati. Eseva nayo vedanādīsupi.
因为应当提问:“在那些色身等中,何者是何种颠倒的所依?”为了分别如此生起的颠倒中,此是此的所依,而说:“其中,色”等。其中,即在色等四种当中,首先,颠倒的所依——色,是“于不净为净”这般生起的颠倒的所依,应如此分别了知。其余也可类推。如此,依“于不净为净”等,颠倒有四种。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tesu rūpakāyādīsu katamaṃ katamassa vipallāsassa vatthū’’ti pucchitabbattā evaṃ pavattamānassa vipallāsassa idaṃ imassa vatthūti vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha rūpa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu rūpādīsu catūsu paṭhamaṃ vipallāsavatthu rūpaṃ ‘‘asubhe subha’’nti evaṃ pavattamānassa vipallāsassa vatthu hotīti vibhajitvā gahetabbaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Evaṃ ‘‘asubhe subha’’ntiādippakārena vipallāsā catubbidhā bhavanti.
这就是它的所依事,已由阿阇梨分别显示,我们也已了知。因为应问:“那些颠倒中,哪些是根本因法?”故说“二法”等。心的杂染,即贪爱与无明——此二法便是颠倒的根本因。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ imassa vatthūti ācariyena vibhajitvā dassitā, amhehi ca ñātā, ‘‘tesaṃ vipallāsānaṃ katame mūlakāraṇadhammā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dve dhammā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Cittassa saṃkilesā, taṇhā ca avijjā ca – ime dve dhammā vipallāsānaṃ mūlakāraṇabhūtā bhavanti.
“这两法是合在一起成为诸颠倒的根本因,还是各自分开?”因为应当这样问,所以为了分别解说而说“被贪爱所覆”等。没有无明,就不存在贪爱,因此是否应当说“被贪爱与无明所覆”?不,因为贪爱是特别强有力的缘。正是由于这强力的贪爱,人们对于不净也视为“净”,对于苦也视为“乐”。既然说了“贪爱与无明”,就应当说“被无明所覆”,为什么却说“被见所覆”?因为无明会产生见,所以以见为首而取无明,说为“被见所覆”,应理解为“被无明所覆”之意。然而,如果说“被无明所覆”,则可能连不带见的无明也被包含;正因为带有见的无明,人们才对无常视为常,对无我视为我。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ime dve dhammā ekato vipallāsānaṃ mūlakāraṇaṃ kiṃ honti, udāhu visuṃ visu’’nti vattabbattā visuṃ visuṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘taṇhānivuta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Avijjārahitā taṇhā nāma natthi, tasmā ‘‘taṇhāavijjānivuta’’nti vattabbanti? Na, taṇhāya sātisayapaccayattā. Sātisayāya hi taṇhāya asubhepi ‘‘subha’’nti, dukkhepi ‘‘sukha’’nti samanupassanti. ‘‘Taṇhā ca avijjā cā’’ti vuttattā ‘‘avijjānivuta’’nti vattabbaṃ, kasmā ‘‘diṭṭhinivuta’’nti vuttanti? Avijjāya diṭṭhi bhavatīti diṭṭhisīsena avijjaṃ gahetvā ‘‘diṭṭhinivuta’’nti vuttaṃ, avijjānivutanti attho gahetabbo. ‘‘Avijjānivuta’’nti vutte pana diṭṭhirahitā avijjāpi gahitā siyā, diṭṭhisahitāya hi avijjāya aniccepi ‘‘nicca’’nti, anattaniyepi ‘‘attā’’ti samanupassanti.
“以贪爱为根的颠倒如何转起?以带有见的无明为根的颠倒如何转起?”因为应当这样问,故说“其中,见颠倒”等。“其中”指在以贪爱为根和以带有见的无明为根这两种之中。“见颠倒”即以带有见的无明为根的颠倒。他观过去色为我,如同把非实质的说成实质的。“贪爱颠倒”即以带有见的贪爱为根的颠倒,以见欢喜的方式欢喜未来色。如是,应见依过去观照与未来欢喜的差别而有的转起差异。“心的杂染,并非只有贪爱与无明二法,十种烦恼也是,为什么只说二法?”因为应当这样问,故说“二法是心的随烦恼”等。贪爱与无明——这二法正是具有极重过患的颠倒的根本因。因为信由贪爱与无明而清净的心,即从一切烦恼中清净,因此它们特别地成为心的随烦恼,故说二法。因为当贪爱与无明被阿罗汉道断除时,没有任何杂染是未断的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathaṃ taṇhāmūlako vipallāso pavatto, kathaṃ diṭṭhisahitāvijjāmūlako vipallāso pavatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tattha yo diṭṭhivipallāso’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu taṇhāmūlakadiṭṭhisahitāvijjāmūlakesu. Diṭṭhivipallāsoti diṭṭhisahitāvijjāmūlakavipallāso. Atītaṃ rūpaṃ attato samanupassatīti adabbabhūtopi dabbabhūto viya vutto. Taṇhāvipallāsoti diṭṭhisahitataṇhāmūlako vipallāso anāgataṃrūpaṃ diṭṭhibhinandanavasena abhinandatīti. Evaṃ atītasamanupassanaanāgatābhinandanabhedena pavattiviseso daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Cittassa saṃkileso taṇhāavijjāyeva dve dhammā na honti, atha kho dasa kilesāpi, kasmā dveyeva vuttā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘dve dhammā cittassa upakkilesā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṇhā ca avijjā ca – ime dveyeva dhammā paramasāvajjassa vipallāsassa mūlakāraṇattā. Tāhi taṇhāavijjāhi visujjhantaṃ cittaṃ sabbehi kilesehi visujjhati, tasmā ca visesato cittassa upakkilesā hontīti dve dhammā vuttā. Na hi tāsu taṇhāavijjāsu arahattamaggena pahīnāsu koci saṃkileso appahīno nāma natthīti.
“所说的贪爱与无明,仅仅是所述诸颠倒的根本原因,还是整个轮回的根本原因?”因为应当这样问,所以为了显示“所说的贪爱与无明,既是所述诸颠倒的根本原因,也是整个轮回的根本原因”,而说“那些”等。其中,“那些”是指心未防护且被邪见所害的人。对于被无明所覆盖、被贪爱所结缚而不知前际的众生,即那些以无明盖、贪爱结而在轮回中流转、轮回的众生,他们有时流转轮回于地狱,即入于魔的掌控;有时流转轮回于畜生趣;有时流转轮回于饿鬼界;有时流转轮回于阿修罗身;有时流转轮回于天;有时流转轮回于人。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vuttappakārā taṇhāavijjā vuttappakārānaṃ vipallāsānaṃyeva mūlakāraṇaṃ honti kiṃ, udāhu sakalassa vaṭṭassāpi mūlakāraṇaṃ honti ki’’nti vattabbattā vuttappakārā taṇhāavijjā vuttappakārānaṃ mūlakāraṇaṃ honti yathā, evaṃ sakalassa vaṭṭassāpi mūlakāraṇaṃ hontīti dassetuṃ ‘‘tesa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yesaṃ puggalānaṃ cittaṃ arakkhitaṃ, micchādiṭṭhihatañca hoti, tesaṃ puggalānaṃ. Yesaṃ avijjānīvaraṇānaṃ taṇhāsaṃyojanānaṃ pubbakoṭi na paññāyati, tehi avijjānīvaraṇehi taṇhāsaṃyojanehi saṃsāre sandhāvantānaṃ saṃsarantānaṃ puggalānaṃ sakiṃ nirayaṃ māravasagamanena sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ hoti, sakiṃ tiracchānayoniṃ sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ hoti, sakiṃ pettivisayaṃ sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ hoti, sakiṃ asurakāyaṃ sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ hoti, sakiṃ deve sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ hoti, sakiṃ manusse sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ hotīti attho.
“被邪见所害”这一经文所阐明的义理,已由阿阇梨分别,也已被我们所了知。“被昏沉睡眠所胜”这一经文所阐明的义理,又是如何分别的呢?因为应当这样问,所以说了“被昏沉睡眠所胜”等。心的——即识蕴的——那种不适业、不调顺的状态,此一不适业、不调顺便称为“昏沉”。身的——即受等三蕴的——那种滞重、懈怠的状态,此一身之滞重便称为“睡眠”。如此,直接说出了昏沉与睡眠的自相。然而,由于心被这些昏沉睡眠所胜的状态等容易了知,所以并未加以解释。虽然没有解释,但对于那些心被昏沉睡眠所胜的人,他们以彼心——即以心为首,为结使所缚——于轮回中入于魔的掌控而流转、轮回;对此中的究竟义理应加以广说而了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Micchādiṭṭhihatena cā’’ti suttappadesena desito attho ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘thinamiddhābhibhūtenāti suttappadesena desito attho kathaṃ vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘thinamiddhābhibhūtenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Cittassa viññāṇakkhandhassa yā akallatā akammaniyatā atthi, idaṃ akallattaṃ akammaniyattaṃ thinaṃ nāma. Yaṃ kāyassa līnattaṃ vedanādikkhandhattayalīnattaṃ atthi, idaṃ kāyassa līnattaṃ middhaṃ nāmāti thinamiddhasarūpameva vuttaṃ. Tehi thinamiddhehi cittassa abhibhūtabhāvādiko pana suviññeyyattā na vutto, avuttepi yesaṃ puggalānaṃ cittaṃ thinamiddhehi abhibhūtaṃ, tesaṃ puggalānaṃ tena cittena cittasīsena saṃyojanena saṃsāre māravasagamanena sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ pariyosānasabhāvo vitthāretvā gahetabbo.
“入于魔的掌控”这一经文所阐明的义理,又是如何分别的呢?因为应当这样问,所以说了“入于魔的掌控”。其中,“烦恼魔”:烦恼能杀害、阻止布施等功德,以是义故称为“魔”,这就是烦恼魔。以此烦恼魔为所依而转起故,行魔、蕴魔、死魔也一并被取入;或者,由“ca”字而被取入,应如此了知。“众生魔”:即天子魔。或者,因为不说“天子魔”而说“众生魔”,所以任何能杀害布施等功德,或损害自在、财富等的国王、盗贼等,那些国王、盗贼等也被取入,因此,即指任何众生魔的意思。“掌控”:即欲求、贪求、意图、喜好、期望、命令、敕令。“入”:即接近、随从、随顺、跟随、不超越的意思。“为什么入于掌控?”因为应当这样问,所以说了“因为他”等。任何众生若具足未防护的心、被邪见所害的心、被昏沉睡眠所胜的心,这样的众生由于被无明盖等所覆,面向轮回而非面向还灭,所以他便入于魔的掌控。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vasaṃ mārassa gacchatīti suttappadesena desito attho kathaṃ vibhatto’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘vasaṃ mārassa gacchatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha kilesamārassāti kileso dānādipuññe māreti nivāretīti atthena māroti kilesamāro. Iminā kilesamāraṃ nissāya pavattattā abhisaṅkhāramārakhandhamāramaccumārā ca gahitā, ca-saddena vā gahitāti veditabbā. Sattamārassāti devaputtamārassa. Atha vā ‘‘devaputtamārassā’’ti avatvā ‘‘sattamārassā’’ti vuttattā yo yo rājacorādiko dānādīni vā issariyabhogādīni vā māreti, so so rājacorādikopi gahito, tasmā yassa kassaci sattamārassāti attho. Vasanti icchaṃ lobhaṃ adhippāyaṃ ruciṃ ākaṅkhaṃ āṇaṃ āṇattiṃ. Gacchatīti upagacchati upeti anuvattati anugacchati nātikkamatīti attho. ‘‘Kasmā vasaṃ gacchatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘so hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yo satto arakkhitacittena ca micchādiṭṭhihatacittena ca thinamiddhābhibhūtacittena ca samannāgato hoti, so satto avijjānīvaraṇādīhi nivuto hutvā saṃsārābhimukho hi yasmā hoti, na visaṅkhārābhimukho, tasmā mārassa vasaṃ gacchatīti attho.
解释以“无守护”等开头的经典之义时,当被问及“以‘无守护’等经典宣说了多少谛?”便说“这些由世尊”等。以“无守护”等经,世尊宣说了苦谛与集谛二谛。是如何宣说的呢?既依阿毗达摩论说,也依经文论说而宣说。在这些论说中,依阿毗达摩论说而宣说时,由“以无守护心”一词,世尊宣说、开示了无守护的贪着心、无守护的嗔恚心与无守护的愚痴心。其中,贪着心当知有八种,依与贪俱起之心生;嗔恚心有二种,依与嗔俱起之心生;愚痴心有二种,依与痴俱起之心生。由于这些心生起,于眼根等便生起不防护、无守护;以那不防护与无守护为因,心成为无守护——这是就果的近因而说。显示巴利原文
‘‘Arakkhitenātiādikassa yassa suttassa attho vibhatto, tena ‘arakkhitenā’tiādikena suttena kittakāni saccāni desitānī’’tivattabbattā ‘‘imāni bhagavatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Arakkhitenā’’tiādisuttena bhagavatā imāni dve saccāni desitāni dukkhaṃ, samudayo cāti. Kathaṃ desitāni? Abhidhammanissitāya kathāya ceva suttantanissitāya kathāya ca desitāni. Tāsu kathāsu abhidhammanissitāya kathāya desite sati ‘‘arakkhitena cittenā’’ti iminā padena arakkhitaṃ rattampi cittaṃ, arakkhitaṃ duṭṭhampi cittaṃ, arakkhitaṃ mūḷhampi cittaṃ bhagavatā desitaṃ ñāpitaṃ. Tattha rattacittaṃ lobhasahagatacittuppādavasena aṭṭhavidhaṃ, duṭṭhacittaṃ paṭighasampayuttacittuppādavasena dubbidhaṃ, mūḷhacittaṃ momūhacittuppādavasena dubbidhanti veditabbaṃ. Imesañhi cittuppādānaṃ vasena yā cakkhundriyādīnaṃ agutti anārakkhā uppannā, tāya aguttiyā anārakkhāya cittaṃ arakkhitaṃ hoti phalūpacārenāti.
由“被邪见所破坏”一词,宣说的是与邪见相应的心,当知此心有四种,依与见相应之心生起。因为与邪见相应、随顺邪见之势,故名为“被邪见所破坏”。由“被昏沉睡眠所覆”一词,宣说的是与昏沉睡眠相应的心,当知此心有五种,依有行心生起。因为与昏沉睡眠相应、随顺昏沉睡眠之势,故名为“被昏沉睡眠所覆”。因此,在“何等为不善法?于何时生起不善心”等(《法集论》365)十二不善心生起的段落中,当予详说;而这十二不善心生起,即由世尊以此三词宣说。由“魔的”一词,则摄入了五种魔。其中,烦恼魔宣说为“四漏、四流、四轭、四结、四取、八盖、十烦恼”(《法集论》1102等)。行作魔宣说为“善思、不善思、善业、不善业”(《分别论》226)等。蕴魔宣说为“五蕴之自身”等。死魔宣说为“死、死亡状态”(《分别论》193)等。天子魔则由相应教法而说。如是,于此应见依阿毗达摩论说所宣示之义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Micchādiṭṭhihatenā’’ti iminā padena micchādiṭṭhisaṃsaṭṭhaṃ cittaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ diṭṭhisampayuttacittuppādavasena catubbidhanti veditabbaṃ. Tañhi micchādiṭṭhiyā saṃsaṭṭhabhāvena micchādiṭṭhivasānugatattā micchādiṭṭhihataṃ nāmāti. ‘‘Thinamiddhābhibhūtenā’’ti iminā padena thinamiddhena saṃsaṭṭhaṃ cittaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ sasaṅkhārikacittuppādavasena pañcavidhanti veditabbaṃ. Tañhi thinamiddhena saṃsaṭṭhabhāvena thinamiddhavasānugatattā thinamiddhābhibhūtaṃ nāmāti evaṃ ye dvādasākusalā cittuppādakaṇḍe ‘‘katame dhammā akusalā? Yasmiṃ samaye akusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 365) vitthārato vattabbā, te dvādasākusalacittuppādā tīhi padehi bhagavatā desitāti veditabbā. ‘‘Mārassā’’ti padena pañca mārā gahitā. Tesu kilesamāro ‘‘cattāro āsavā, cattāro oghā, cattāro yogā, cattāro ganthā, cattāri upādānāni, aṭṭha nīvaraṇā, dasa kilesā’’ti (dha. sa. 1102 ādayo) desito. Abhisaṅkhāramāro pana ‘‘kusalā cetanā (vibha. 226) akusalā cetanā (vibha. 226) kusalaṃ kammaṃ akusalaṃ kamma’’ntiādinā desito. Khandhamāro pana ‘‘attabhāvo pañcakkhandhā’’tiādinā desito. Maccumāro pana ‘‘cuti cavanatā’’tiādinā (vibha. 193) desito. Evaṃ tāvettha abhidhammanissitāya kathāya desito attho daṭṭhabbo.
而依经文论说宣说时,“眼见色已,取于相,取于随好。若于此不防护眼根而住者,贪忧诸恶不善法将流入其心,他不趣向于防护,不守护眼根,于眼根不成就防护……(乃至)于意根不成就防护”(《中部》1.347)。如此,依补特伽罗安立而说的六门心,即由“以无守护心”一词所宣说。无论是由前际分别、后际分别或前后际分别,因不如理作意而生起邪见者,生起“世间是常”、“世间非常”或“如来死后无”等邪见,与这些邪见相应的心;或是如《梵网经》等(《长部》1.30等)所说的“四种常见……乃至现法涅槃见”等邪见,与这些邪见相应的心,皆由“以被邪见所破坏心”一词所宣说。显示巴利原文
Suttantanissitāya pana kathāya desite sati ‘‘cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā nimittaggāhī hoti anubyañjanaggāhī, yatvādhikaraṇamenaṃ cakkhundriyaṃ asaṃvutaṃ viharantaṃ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṃ, tassa saṃvarāya na paṭipajjati, na rakkhati cakkhundriyaṃ, cakkhundriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjati…pe… sotindriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjati… ghānindriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjati… jivhindriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjati… kāyindriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjati… manindriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.347) evaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānena yaṃ chadvārikacittaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ chadvārikacittaṃ ‘‘arakkhitena cittenā’’ti iminā padena desitaṃ. Yā micchādiṭṭhiyo pubbantakappanavasena vā aparantakappanavasena vā pubbantāparantakappanavasena vā micchā abhinivisantassa ayoniso ummujjantassa ‘‘sassato loko’’ti vā ‘‘asassato loko’’ti vā ‘‘na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā’’ti vā uppannā, tāhi diṭṭhīhi vā, yā ca diṭṭhiyo ‘‘imā cattāro sassatavādā…pe… paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā’’ti brahmajālasuttādīsu (dī. ni. 1.30 ādayo) vuttā, tāhi diṭṭhīhi vā sampayuttaṃ yaṃ cittaṃ ‘‘micchādiṭṭhihatena cā’’ti iminā padena desitaṃ.
所谓昏沉,是指心的不堪任性;所谓睡眠,是指受等三蕴的不堪任性;或者说“昏沉是无力消沉,睡眠是精进力受损之障”——凡以这些方式所说的昏沉与睡眠,若心被这些昏沉和睡眠所胜伏、所遮蔽,那颗心便由“为昏沉睡眠所胜”这一词语所表述。显示巴利原文
‘‘Thinaṃ nāma cittassa akammaññatā, middhaṃ nāma vedanādikkhandhattayassa akammaññatā’’ti vā ‘‘thinaṃ anussāhasaṃsīdanaṃ, middhaṃ ussāhasattivighāto’’ti vā yāni thinamiddhāni vuttāni, tehi thinamiddhehi yaṃ cittaṃ abhibhūtaṃ ajjhotthaṭaṃ, taṃ cittaṃ ‘‘thinamiddhābhibhūtenā’’ti iminā padena desitaṃ.
所谓“势”,即指欲求、贪、意愿、喜爱、渴爱、令、命令——凡所称说的“势”,皆由“势”这一词语所宣说。“五魔——蕴魔、行作魔、死魔、天子魔、烦恼魔”,凡所称说的“魔”,即由“魔的”这一词语所宣说。“行、趣、至、随转、随行、不越”,凡以这些词所表诠的补特伽罗,即由“行”这一词语所宣说。于是,在所宣说的诸法中,不善法即是集谛;而由“行于魔势”这一词,凡依五取蕴所施设的补特伽罗,其五取蕴即是苦谛——如此便宣说了二谛。由于会有人问“为何宣说二谛?”,所以说了“那些由世尊……”等语。为了遍知与断除此二谛,世尊宣说了“以无守护”等法,其含义是:以“以无守护”等词语,指明那二谛。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vaso nāma icchā lobho adhippāyo ruci ākaṅkhā āṇā āṇattī’’ti yo vaso vutto, so vaso ‘‘vasa’’nti iminā padena desito. ‘‘Pañca mārā – khandhamāro abhisaṅkhāramāro maccumāro devaputtamāro kilesamāro’’ti yo māro vutto, so māro ‘‘mārassā’’ti iminā desito. ‘‘Gacchati, upagacchati, upeti, anuvattati, anugacchati, nātikkamatī’’ti yo puggalo vutto, so puggalo ‘‘gacchatī’’ti iminā desitoti. Evaṃ desitesu dhammesu akusalā samudayasaccaṃ, ‘‘vasaṃ mārassa gacchatī’’ti iminā padena ye pañcupādānakkhandhe upādāya paññatto puggalo vutto, te pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccanti dve saccāni desitāni. ‘‘Kimatthāya dve saccāni desitānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tesaṃ bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tesaṃ dvinnaṃ saccānaṃ pariññāya ca pahānāya ca ‘‘arakkhitenā’’tiādi dhammaṃ bhagavā deseti, tāni dve saccāni ‘‘arakkhitenā’’tiādikena ñāpetīti attho.
当被问及“在这两谛中,为了遍知哪一谛、为了断除哪一谛而宣说”时,回答说:“为了遍知苦、为了断除集。”当被问到“由遍知与断除而宣说了哪些谛”时,便说“由彼……”等。即是:借由彼阿罗汉道而遍知,借由彼阿罗汉道而断除——此阿罗汉道即是道谛。以彼涅槃法为缘,能生起对渴爱与无明的断除——此涅槃法即是灭,是灭谛。如此,世尊宣说了四谛。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tesu dvīsu saccesu kassa saccassa pariññāya, kassa saccassa pahānāya desetī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dukkhassa pariññāya, samudayassa pahānāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pariññāpahānehi katamāni saccāni desitānī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘yena cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yena arahattamaggena parijānāti, yena arahattamaggena pajahati ca, ayaṃ arahattamaggo maggasaccaṃ nāma. Yaṃ nibbānadhammaṃ ārabbha taṇhāya, avijjāya ca pahānaṃ jātaṃ, ayaṃ nibbānadhammo nirodho nirodhasaccaṃ nāmāti. Evaṃ cattāri saccāni bhagavatā desitāni.
当可言“四圣谛的宣说性由何可知”时,便说“因此……”等。于此四圣谛中,以集谛把握乐味,以苦谛把握过患,以道谛与灭谛把握出离;依断除集谛,则成就舍断一切趣,舍断一切趣即把握为果。由守护心等而成就舍断一切趣,此守护心等即把握为方便;以遮止不守护心等的方式,对守护心等的劝导,即是世尊的教令。如此,依宣说之理,于诸经中所显示的乐味等,被抽取出来而显示于这一经——“以不守护……”等之中。显示巴利原文
‘‘Catunnaṃ saccānaṃ desitabhāvo kena viññātabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tesu catūsu saccesu samudayasaccena assādo gahito, dukkhasaccena ādīnavo gahito, maggasaccanirodhasaccehi nissaraṇaṃ gahitaṃ, samudayappahānavasena sabbagatipajahanaṃ jātaṃ, sabbagatipajahanaṃ phalanti gahitaṃ. Yena rakkhitacittatādikena sabbagatipajahanaṃ jātaṃ, so rakkhitacittatādiko upāyoti gahito, arakkhitacittatādikassa paṭisedhanamukhena rakkhitacittatādikassa niyojanaṃ bhagavato āṇattīti gahitanti desanāhārena nānāsuttesu dassitā assādādayo ‘‘arakkhitenā’’tiādike ekasmiṃyeva sutte nīharitvā dassitā.
当可言“乐味等被抽出而显示的特性,由何可知、应信”时,便说“因此……”等。其中,以某种特定的解释方式,于种种经中抽取出乐味等而显示,此特定解释即名为“宣说理分别”。以某种特定的解释方式,唯于单一经中抽取出乐味等而显示,此特定解释即名为“宣说理合集”。当知此中差别。显示巴利原文
‘‘Assādādīnaṃ nīharitvā dassitabhāvo kena viññātabbo saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha ca yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena nānāsuttesu assādādayo nīharitvā dassitā, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhāravibhaṅgo nāma. Yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena ekasmiṃyeva sutte assādādayo nīharitvā dassitā, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso desanāhārasampāto nāmāti viseso daṭṭhabbo.
当可言“宣说理合集仅此即圆满”时,便说“宣说理合集已结合”。其意为:在每一经中,乐味等由彼彼作为特定解释的宣说理合集抽取出来而如理显示,彼彼作为特定解释的宣说理合集便已结合,应当如理抉择而运用。此义已把握。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettakova desanāhārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto desanāhārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Ekekasmiṃyeva sutte assādādayo yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena desanāhārasampātena nīharitvā yathārahaṃ dassitā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto desanāhārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahito.
然而,贤者们……应当如此领会。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
二、审察导法汇合的阐明显示巴利原文
2. Vicayahārasampātavibhāvanā
53 53. 依于宣说理合集,阿阇梨已分别味等,我们亦已了知,此宣说理合集即告圆满。当被问及“什么是审查理合集”时,乃说“其中,什么是审查理合集”等。所谓“其中”,即在宣说理合集等十六理合集中,问:哪种特定的解释名为审查理合集?在这些法中,那应以此特定解释来审查的法,此特定解释即名为审查理合集。为了决定而分别,故说“其中,渴爱……”等。而在注释书中——显示巴利原文
53. Yena desanāhārasampātena assādādayo ācariyena vibhattā, amhehi ca ñātā, so desanāhārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo vicayahārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo vicayo hārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu desanāhārasampātādīsu soḷasasu hārasampātesu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vicayahārasampāto nāmāti pucchati. Imesu dhammesu ayaṃ dhammo yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesena vicayitabbo, so saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vicayahārasampāto nāmāti niyametvā vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha taṇhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
如此展示了宣说理合集后,现在显示审查理合集:因为对宣说理句义的审查即是审查理,所以为了显示审查理合集,即依于在宣说理中由颠倒因所确定的渴爱,通过善等分类细查的方式,而开始“其中,渴爱有二种”等。(《导论注释》53)显示巴利原文
‘‘Evaṃ desanāhārasampātaṃ dassetvā idāni vicayahārasampātaṃ dassento yasmā desanāhārapadatthavicayo vicayahāro, tasmā desanāhāre vipallāsahetubhāvena niddhāritāya taṇhāya kusalādivibhāgapavicayamukhena vicayahārasampātaṃ dassetuṃ ‘tattha taṇhā duvidhā’tiādi āraddha’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 53) –
已说。此处,“其中”是指在“以不守护心……”等经文中,依教法理趣所阐释的不善法中,被确定为“渴爱”的一切渴爱。善的渴爱呢?即是以四地善法为对象而转起的渴爱。不善的渴爱呢?即是以不善法为对象而转起的渴爱。如此,渴爱有二种,应当审察。因此,复注中说:“‘以善法为所缘’是就缘于善法而转起而言,并非指它们成为所缘缘,因为这里的‘善法’也包括出世间法。”显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ ‘‘arakkhitena cittenā’’tiādisuttatthe desanāhārasampātena saṃvaṇṇite akusaladhamme ‘‘taṇhā’’ti niddhāritā sabbataṇhā. Kusalāpīti catubhūmake kusale uddissa pavattā taṇhāpi. Akusalāpīti akusaladhamme uddissa pavattā taṇhāpīti duvidhā hotīti vicayitabbā. Tena vuttaṃ ṭīkāyaṃ – ‘‘kusaladhammārammaṇāti kusaladhamme uddissa pavattamattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na tesaṃ ārammaṇapaccayataṃ, idha ‘kusalā dhammā’ti lokuttaradhammānampi adhippetattā’’ti.
当问“善渴爱导向何处?不善渴爱导向何处?”时,便说“不善的导向轮回……”等。或者,当问“善与不善渴爱的差别是什么?”时,便说“不善的导向轮回……”等。当问“渴爱被称为导向轮回,又如何能导向损减?”时,便说“断除渴爱”。意即:成为断除之因的渴爱,即是断除渴爱。换言之,缘于应被断除的渴爱,而应生起断除;由这种应生起的断除,而趋向损减,如是说。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kusalā taṇhā kiṃgāminī, akusalā taṇhā kiṃ gāminī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘akusalā saṃsāragāminī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘katamo kusalākusalataṇhānaṃ viseso’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘akusalā saṃsāragāminī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Taṇhā nāma saṃsāragāminī hotu, kathaṃ apacayagāminī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘pahānataṇhā’’ti vuttaṃ, pahānassa hetubhūtā taṇhā pahānataṇhāti attho, pahātabbataṇhaṃ āgamma yaṃ pahānaṃ pavattetabbaṃ, tena pavattetabbena pahānena apacayaṃ gacchatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
当问“难道只有渴爱有善与不善两种吗?还是其他法也有善与不善两种?”时,便说“慢也是……”等。当问“什么是善慢?什么是不善慢?”时,便说“依于该慢而断除慢,此慢是善的;然而,若慢产生苦,此慢是不善的。”其中,“依于该慢……是善的”:即依于该慢、亲近依止该慢而生起断除,由此断除而断除相续中应生的慢,此作为亲依止缘的慢,以果的譬喻而称为善。“然而……是不善的”:即如果慢以恼害他人等方式转起,而产生自己与他人的苦,此慢应被审察,了知为不善。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kiṃ pana taṇhāyeva kusalākusalāti dubbidhā, udāhu aññopi kusalākusalāti dubbidho’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘mānopī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Katamo māno kusalo, katamo māno akusalo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yaṃ mānaṃ nissāya mānaṃ pajahati, ayaṃ māno kusalo. Yo pana māno dukkhaṃ nibbattayati, ayaṃ māno akusalo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ mānaṃ…pe… kusaloti yaṃ mānaṃ nissāya upanissāya pahānaṃ pavattitaṃ, tena pahānena santāne uppajjanārahaṃ mānaṃ pajahati, ayaṃ upanissayapaccayabhūto māno phalūpacārena kusalo. Yo pana…pe… akusaloti yo pana māno parahiṃsanādivasena pavattamāno hutvā attano ca parassa ca dukkhaṃ nibbattayati, ayaṃ māno akusaloti vicayitvā veditabbo.
若问“于那些趋向轮回减损的渴爱中,何种为趋向减损的善渴爱?”,为了显示被称作“善”的渴爱的自相,而说“其中,凡依出离而住者”等。“其中”,指那些作为趋向轮回减损的渴爱,即善与不善的渴爱。此渴爱是善的,如此连结。当一位善男子这样期望:“圣者们证得寂静处——即圣果法——之后,具足而住;我何时能证得那圣果法而住呢?”,他对那圣果生起希求,以希求为缘而生起忧,此忧被称为“依出离而住者”。应当如此审察:这种称为对圣果希求的渴爱是善的、无过失的,因为它以无过失的圣果法为所缘而转起。显示巴利原文
‘‘Saṃsārāpacayagāminīsu tāsu taṇhāsu katamā apacayagāminī taṇhā kusalā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘kusalā’’ti vuttāya taṇhāya sarūpaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha yaṃ nekkhammasita’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tāsu saṃsārāpacayagāminīsu taṇhābhūtāsu kusalākusalāsu. Ayaṃ taṇhā kusalāti sambandho. ‘‘Ariyā puggalā santaṃ āyatanaṃ yaṃ ariyaphaladhammaṃ sacchikatvā upasampajja viharanti, taṃ āyatanaṃ ariyaphaladhammaṃ ahaṃ kudāssu sacchikatvā viharissa’’nti patthayantassa tassa kulaputtassa tasmiṃ ariyaphale pihā uppajjati, pihāpaccayā yaṃ domanassaṃ uppajjati, idaṃ domanassaṃ ‘‘nekkhammasita’’nti vuccati. Ayaṃ ariyaphale pihāsaṅkhātā taṇhā kusalā anavajjā anavajjaariyaphaladhammaṃ uddissa pavattattāti vicayitabbaṃ.
因应当说“如何转起?”,而说“离贪染”等。应证得离贪染的心解脱。应当如此审察:以彼为所缘、依彼心解脱而转起的渴爱是善的、无过失的;应证得离无明染的慧解脱,以彼为所缘、依彼慧解脱而转起的渴爱是善的、无过失的。依于彼慧解脱,世尊说:显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathaṃ pavattā’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘rāgavirāgā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā rāgavirāgā cetovimutti pattabbā. Tadārammaṇā taṃ cetovimuttiṃ āgamma pavattā taṇhā kusalā anavajjā, yā avijjāvirāgā paññāvimutti pattabbā, tadārammaṇā taṃ paññāvimuttiṃ āgamma pavattā taṇhā kusalā anavajjāti vicayitabbā. Tāya paññāvimuttiyā vasena bhagavatā –
“是故,护持其心,以正志为境;
以正见为前导,了知生与灭。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tasmā rakkhitacittassa, sammāsaṅkappagocaro; Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro, ñatvāna udayabbayaṃ; Thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhu, sabbā duggatiyo jahe’’ti. (udā. 32; netti. 31, 65, 78) –
在偈颂中提到了“应断除一切恶趣”一句。由于应当审问:“对此慧解脱,应作何种审察?那审察是什么?”因此有“那审察是什么?”等语。若问:“对此慧解脱的审察是什么?”应知审察即是八支圣道——正见、正思惟、正语、正业、正命、正精进、正念、正定。又因应当审问:“那审察应于何处见?”因此有“它于何处?”等语。若问:“彼慧解脱的审察,应于何处、于何种法中见?”答:于第四禅中。当波罗蜜达到究竟时,在第四禅的修习中,应见到彼审察。此为古义疏所传,乃诸师所持之说。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ ‘‘sabbā duggatiyo jahe’’ti padaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘tassā paññāvimuttiyā yo pavicayo kātabbo, katamo so pavicayo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tassā ko pavicayo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassā paññāvimuttiyā ko pavicayoti ce puccheyya ‘‘aṭṭha maggaṅgāni – sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā sammākammanto sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati sammāsamādhī’’ti pavicayo veditabbo. ‘‘So pavicayo kattha daṭṭhabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so katthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. So paññāvimuttiyā pavicayo kattha kasmiṃ dhamme daṭṭhabboti pucchati. Catutthe jhāne pāramitāya ukkaṃsagatāya catutthajjhānabhāvanāya so pavicayo daṭṭhabbo.
为了阐明“于第四禅,波罗蜜达到究竟”所说的意义,而说“于第四禅中”等。那位证得第四禅的人,于第四禅中修习清净、洁白、无垢、离随烦恼、柔软、堪任、安住、达到不动的心,即具足八支之心;那位证得第四禅的人,于彼第四禅中证得八种明行。哪八种?即六神通与二种殊胜。神变等五种世间神通与阿罗汉道慧为六神通;意所成神通与观智为二种殊胜。显示巴利原文
‘‘Catutthe jhāne pāramitāyā’’ti vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘catutthe hi jhāne’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yo so catutthajjhānalābhī puggalo catutthe jhāne parisuddhaṃ pariyodātaṃ anaṅgaṇaṃ vigatūpakkilesaṃ mudu kammaniyaṃ ṭhitaṃ āneñjappattaṃ, iti aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ cittaṃ bhāvayati, so catutthajjhānalābhī puggalo tattha catutthe jhāne aṭṭhavidhaṃ vijjācaraṇaṃ adhigacchati. Katamaṃ aṭṭhavidhaṃ? Cha abhiññā, dve ca visese vā adhigacchatīti yojanā. Iddhividhādayo pañca, lokiyābhiññā ceva arahattamaggapaññā cāti cha abhiññā. Manomayiddhi ceva vipassanāñāṇañcāti dve ca visesā honti.
因有问:“彼第四禅心由何而清净……乃至由何而达到不动?”故说“彼心由何而清净”等。彼心由舍念清净的状态而清净,由彼舍念清净的状态而洁白。由断除乐等之缘而离贪等无垢的状态而无垢,由彼离贪等无垢的状态而离随烦恼。由善修习的状态而柔软,由彼善修习的状态而堪任。由安住于清净等状态而安住,由彼安住于清净等状态而达到不动——如此配对应是合理的,因为注释书中正是以对应方式阐述的。由信、精进、念、定、慧、光明所摄持的状态而达到不动。以信摄持的心,于相对的不信中不动摇、不摇动;以精进摄持的心,于相对的懈怠中不动摇;以念摄持的心,于相对的放逸中不动摇;以定摄持的心,于相对的掉举中不动摇;以慧摄持的心,于相对的无明中不动摇;达到光明的心,于烦恼黑暗中不动摇。如此,被此六法摄持的第四禅心便达到不动。如是,由于具足八支,第四禅心成为六神通智、意所成神通与观智的证得方便,因此,对于慧解脱的审察应见于第四禅中——这是略义。至于广说,注释书中已以“其中,由舍念清净的状态……”等,或以“另一种理趣……”等作了说明,故我等不再赘述。显示巴利原文
‘‘Taṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ kuto parisuddhaṃ…pe… kuto āneñjappatta’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘taṃ cittaṃ yato parisuddha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ cittaṃ yato upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvato parisuddhaṃ, tato upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvato pariyodātaṃ hoti. Sukhādīnaṃ paccayaghātena yato vītarāgādianaṅgaṇabhāvato anaṅgaṇaṃ, tato vītarāgādianaṅgaṇabhāvato vigatūpakkilesaṃ. Yato subhāvitabhāvato mudu, tato subhāvitabhāvato kammaniyaṃ. Yato parisuddhādīsu ṭhitabhāvato ṭhitaṃ, tato parisuddhādīsu ṭhitabhāvato āneñjappattaṃ hotītipi yojanā yuttā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 53) yugaḷato āgatattā. Saddhāvīriyasatisamādhipaññāobhāsehi pariggahitabhāvato āneñjappattaṃ. Saddhāya hi pariggahitaṃ cittaṃ paṭipakkhe assaddhiye na iñjati na calati, vīriyena pariggahitaṃ cittaṃ paṭipakkhe kosajje na iñjati, satiyā pariggahitaṃ cittaṃ paṭipakkhe pamāde na iñjati, samādhinā pariggahitaṃ cittaṃ paṭipakkhe uddhacce na iñjati, paññāya pariggahitaṃ cittaṃ paṭipakkhāya avijjāya na iñjati, obhāsagataṃ cittaṃ kilesandhakāre na iñjati. Iti imehi chahi dhammehi pariggahitaṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ āneñjappattaṃ hoti. Evaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatattā catutthajjhānacittaṃ channaṃ abhiññāñāṇānañca manomayiddhivipassanāñāṇānañca adhigamūpāyo hoti, tasmā so paññāvimuttiparicayo catutthajjhāne daṭṭhabboyevāti saṅkhepattho. Vitthārato pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 53) ‘‘tattha upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvenā’’tiādinā vā ‘‘aparo nayo’’tiādinā vā vuttoyevāti amhehi na vutto.
因有问:“由于无有那些贪等垢秽而无垢,由于无有那些贪欲等随烦恼而离随烦恼,由于无有那种心的安住而安住,由于无有动摇而达到不动——那么,那些贪等垢秽等属于哪一方?”故说“其中,垢秽”等。“其中”是指在那些贪等垢秽等之中,垢秽即贪等垢秽,随烦恼即贪欲等随烦恼,这两者——贪等垢秽与贪欲等随烦恼——属于渴爱一方,因为贪等垢秽以渴爱为自性,而贪欲等随烦恼随顺于渴爱。凡有动摇、颤动,以及心的不安住、不确立,此动摇与不安住属于见一方,因为动摇与不安住以邪执为因。应如此审察。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yesaṃ rāgādiaṅgaṇānaṃ abhāvena anaṅgaṇaṃ, yesaṃ abhijjhādiupakkilesānaṃ abhāvena vigatūpakkilesaṃ, yāya cittassa ṭhitiyā abhāvena ṭhitaṃ, iñjanāya abhāvena āneñjappattaṃ, te rāgādiaṅgaṇādayo katamāya pakkhā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha aṅgaṇā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu rāgādiaṅgaṇādīsu aṅgaṇā ca rāgādiaṅgaṇā ca upakkilesā abhijjhādiupakkilesā ca santi, tadubhayaṃ rāgādiaṅgaṇaabhijjhādiupakkilesadvayaṃ taṇhāpakkho rāgādiaṅgaṇānaṃ taṇhāsabhāvattā, abhijjhādiupakkilesānañca taṇhāya anulomattā. Yā iñjanā phandanā yā ca cittassa aṭṭhiti anavaṭṭhānaṃ atthi, ayaṃ iñjanā aṭṭhiti diṭṭhipakkho iñjanāya ca aṭṭhitiyā ca micchābhinivesahetubhāvatoti pavicayo kātabbo.
又,为回应这样的提问:“是否仅因第四禅心具足八支,它即成为证得六神通智、意所成神通与观智的方便?”故说“四根”。应这样说:那位第四禅的获得者,其苦根、忧根、乐根、喜根这四根在第四禅中灭尽,唯有舍根留存,因此第四禅心也是所述八种智的证得方便。不过,这种证得方便性,唯是已得熟练自在者方有,仅得第四禅者如何能有熟练自在?因此,那位第四禅的获得者,不仅安住于第四禅,亦如此修习、生起、培育无色等至,因而具备熟练自在。为显示此义,经中说“他对于上等定”等。其义在注释书(《指导论注》53)中已有详释,故此处仅作衔接。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kiṃ pana catutthajjhānacittaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatattāyeva channaṃ abhiññāñāṇānañca manomayiddhivipassanāñāṇānañca adhigamūpāyo hotī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘cattāri indriyānī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tassa catutthajjhānalābhino, dukkhindriyaṃ domanassindriyaṃ sukhindriyaṃ somanassindriyaṃ iti cattārindriyāni catutthajjhāne nirujjhanti, tassa catutthajjhānalābhino upekkhindriyaṃ avasiṭṭhaṃ bhavati, tasmāpi catutthajjhānacittaṃ vuttappakārānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ ñāṇānaṃ adhigamūpāyo hoti, so ca adhigamūpāyabhāvo ciṇṇavasībhāvasseva bhaveyya, kathaṃ catutthajjhānamattalābhino ciṇṇavasībhāvo siyā’’ti vattabbattā so catutthajjhānalābhī catutthajjhāneyeva aṭṭhatvā arūpasamāpattiyopi evaṃ katvā nibbatteti bhāveti, tasmā ciṇṇavasībhāvo hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘so uparimaṃ samāpatti’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 53) vitthārato vutto, tasmā yojanamattaṃ karissāma.
那位色界第四禅的获得者——瑜伽行者,从色界第四禅等至出发,对更上的空无边处等至作意其为“寂静、更为寂静”。当那位第四禅获得者瑜伽行者,依所说方式对更上的等至作意寂静时,他第四禅中的想便成为以想为增上的等至,现起犹如粗重;同时,对有对想则生起厌离、不喜而现起。这位瑜伽行者,在依所说方法作意时,由于无余地超越色想、有对想灭尽、不作意种种想,作意“虚空无边”之后,便现证、成就并具足安住于转起的空无边处等至。色想指色界想,为五种神通所引导。种种想是于种种所缘中变异的、不善的转起。如此,于色界禅中见其过患后,他于所缘超越那些色想与种种想,这位瑜伽行者的有对想也随之灭去。由此,依所说超越方法而得定、以寂静转起的无色界定而得定的瑜伽行者,其光明——即色界禅光明——消失。对于色,即遍色,以禅眼所见亦消失。此为衔接。显示巴利原文
So rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānalābhī yogāvacaro rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānasamāpattito uparimaṃ ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiṃsantato santatarato manasi karoti. Yathāvuttaṃ uparimaṃ samāpattiṃ santato manasi karoto tassa catutthajjhānalābhino yogāvacarassa catutthajjhāne saññā saññāpadhānā samāpatti oḷārikā viya hutvā saṇṭhahati, paṭighasaññā ca ukkaṇṭhā anabhirati hutvā saṇṭhahati, so yathāvuttena vidhinā manasi karonto yogāvacaro sabbaso niravasesato rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā ‘‘ākāsaṃ ananta’’nti manasi katvā pavattamānaṃ ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiṃ sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Rūpasaññā rūpāvacarasaññā pañcavidhaabhiññābhinīhāro hoti. Nānattasaññā nānārammaṇesu vokāro akusalo pavattati. Evaṃ rūpāvacarajjhāne ādīnavadassī hutvā tā rūpasaññānānattasaññāyo ārammaṇe samatikkamati, assa yogāvacarassa paṭighasaññā ca abbhatthaṃ gacchati. Evaṃ iminā vuttanayena samatikkamena samāhitassa, santavuttinā arūpāvacarasamādhinā samāhitassa yogāvacarassa obhāso rūpāvacarajjhānobhāso antaradhāyati. Rūpānaṃ kasiṇarūpānaṃ jhānacakkhunā dassanañca antaradhāyatīti yojanā.
为回答这样的提问:“以何定而得定者,其光明与对色的见会消失?此定具足多少支?应如何观察?”故说“此定”等。“此定”意为:以彼色界、无色界定而得定者,此二种定,应以无贪、无瞋、精进勤策三种资助支,轻安与念二种资具支,以及不散乱一种自性支,共具足六支而观察、反复思惟、善加辨认。为回答“如何、于何处观察?”故说“我于一切世间,心与无贪俱行……”等。为回答“于此六支中,哪些为止,哪些为观?”故为作分别而说“其中,凡……”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yena samādhinā samāhitassa, samāhitassa obhāso ca rūpānaṃ dassanañca antaradhāyati, so samādhi kittakehi aṅgehi samannāgato, kathaṃ paccavekkhitabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so samādhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. So samādhīti yena rūpārūpāvacarasamādhinā samāhito, so duvidhopi samādhi anabhijjhābyāpādavīriyārambhehi tīhi upakārakaṅgehi ca passaddhisatīhi dvīhi parikkhāraṅgehi ca avikkhittena ekena sabhāvaṅgena ca chahi aṅgehi samannāgatoti paccavekkhitabbo punappunaṃ cintetabbo sallakkhetabbo . ‘‘Kathaṃ kattha paccavekkhitabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘anabhijjhāsahagataṃ me mānasaṃ sabbaloke’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tesu chasu aṅgesu kittako samatho, kittakā vipassanā’’ti pucchitabbattā ettako samatho, ettakā vipassanāti vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha yañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
54 所谓“慧解脱”的阿罗汉果定,其前行——称为止观的行道,导师已从定门作了分别。若问:“依此行道所证得的阿罗汉果定,应以几种方式了知?”答言:“此定应以五种方式了知。”即那依止观行道而得的阿罗汉果定,当以五种智见来彻知。显示巴利原文
54. ‘‘Paññāvimuttī’’ti vuttassa arahattaphalassa samādhissa samathavipassanāsaṅkhātā pubbabhāgapaṭipadā samādhimukhena ācariyena vibhattā, ‘‘tāya paṭipadāya labhitabbo arahattaphalasamādhi kittakena veditabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so samādhi pañcavidhena veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Yo arahattaphalasamādhi samathavipassanāpaṭipadāya labhitabbo, so arahattaphalasamādhi pañcavidhena ñāṇadassanena veditabbo.
若问:“五种智见如何现前?”于是宣说“此定”等。此阿罗汉果定,于入定刹那,因有果等至之乐,故为现法乐住。作这样观察的阿罗汉,其自内智见便现前。此阿罗汉果定,作为未来应入之阿罗汉果定的亲依止缘,是未来乐异熟,作这样观察者……现前。此阿罗汉果定,因远离烦恼怨敌,故是圣;因无欲贪、轮转贪、世间贪,故是无贪,作这样观察者……现前。此阿罗汉果定,因是正自觉者、独觉、声闻等非卑士所修习,故非卑士所修习,作这样观察者……现前。此阿罗汉果定,因诸支、俱生烦恼不安而寂静,故是寂静;即使终日入定亦无厌足,故是胜妙;已被止息烦恼的阿罗汉所证得,故是寂止所得;依称为阿罗汉道定的一境性而证得,故是一境性所证得;是有行有功用而证得,并非镇伏盖等敌对法而证得,并非遮止其他烦恼而证得,只因唯依阿罗汉道果性而起,故非有行镇伏遮止。作这样观察的阿罗汉,其自内智见便现前。以如是五种智见,探究、彻知那阿罗汉果定。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathaṃ pañcavidhañāṇadassanaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘ayaṃ samādhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ arahattaphalasamādhi appitappitakkhaṇe phalasamāpattisukhattā paccuppannasukho hoti, iti paccavekkhantassa assa arahato paccattameva ñāṇadassanaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavati. Ayaṃ arahattaphalasamādhi āyatiṃ samāpajjitabbassa arahattaphalasamādhissa upanissayapaccayattā āyatiṃ sukhavipāko hoti, iti paccavekkhantassa…pe… bhavati. Ayaṃ arahattaphalasamādhi kilesaarīhi ārakattā ariyo, kāmāmisavaṭṭāmisalokāmisānaṃ abhāvato nirāmiso ca hoti, iti paccavekkhantassa…pe… bhavati. Ayaṃ arahattaphalasamādhi akāpurisehi sammāsambuddhapaccekabuddhasāvakabuddhehi sevitabbattā akāpurisasevito hoti, iti paccavekkhantassa…pe… bhavati. Ayaṃ arahattaphalasamādhi aṅgasantakilesadarathasantattā santo ceva divasampi samāpajjantassa atittikaraṇato paṇīto ca paṭippassaddhakilesena arahatā puggalena laddhattā paṭippassaddhiladdho ca arahattamaggasamādhisaṅkhātena ekodibhāvena adhigatattā ekodibhāvādhigato ca sasaṅkhārena sapayogena adhigatattā, nīvaraṇādipaccanīkadhamme niggayha anadhigatattā, aññe kilese vāretvā anadhigatattā, arahattamaggaphalabhāveneva pavattattā nasasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagato hoti, iti paccavekkhantassa assa arahato paccattameva ñāṇadassanaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavatīti pañcavidhena ñāṇadassanena so arahattaphalasamādhi vicayitvā veditabboti.
若问:“在现法乐住等诸定中,有多少为止,有多少为观?”于是宣说“其中,彼定为现法乐住”等。而这里所说的止与观,指阿罗汉果位的止观,并非前行的止观。导师说:阿罗汉果定应以五种方式了知。若问:“此阿罗汉果定的前行行道中所说的定,应以几种方式了知?”答言:“彼定应以五种方式了知。”于色界第四禅定中,在前行行道中所说的定——即此色界第四禅定,应以五种方式了知。若问:“以哪五种?”于是宣说“喜遍满”等。于初禅、二禅中,慧为喜遍满;于初禅、二禅、三禅中,慧为乐遍满;于第四禅中,他心智为心遍满;天眼智为光明遍满;观察禅那之后转起的慧为观察相。如是,应以五种慧的方式审察了知。若问:“于此五种方式中,多少为止,多少为观?”答言:“其中,那喜遍满者为止,此为观”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Paccuppannasukhādīsu samādhīsu kittako samatho, kittakā vipassanā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yo ca samādhi paccuppannasukho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Samatho, vipassanāti ca arahattaphalasamathavipassanāva adhippetā, na pubbabhāgasamathavipassanāti. Arahattaphalasamādhi pañcavidhena veditabboti ācariyena vutto, ‘‘tassa arahattaphalasamādhissa pubbabhāgapaṭipadāyaṃ vutto samādhi kittakena veditabbo’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so samādhi pañcavidhena veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Yo rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānasamādhi pubbabhāgapaṭipadāyaṃ vutto, so rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānasamādhi pañcavidhena pakārena veditabbo. ‘‘Katamenā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘pītipharaṇatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Paṭhamadutiyajjhānesu paññā pītipharaṇatā hoti. Paṭhamadutiyatatiyajjhānesu paññā sukhapharaṇatā hoti. Catutthajjhāne cetopariyapaññā cetopharaṇatā hoti. Dibbacakkhupaññā ālokapharaṇatā hoti. Jhānaṃ paccavekkhitvā pavattamānapaññā paccavekkhaṇānimittaṃ hoti. Iti pañcavidhena paññāpakārena vicayitvā veditabboti. ‘‘Tesu pañcavidhesu pakāresu kittako samatho, kittakā vipassanā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yo ca pītipharaṇo’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
55 师长已依相应分别了定,我们也已了知。因需被问及“如何依所缘而分别”,故说“十遍处”等。应以这十种所缘,即诸遍处,审察并了知定。因需被问及“于此十种中,多少为止,多少为观”,故说“其中,彼……”等。而所谓“遍处”,既指遍处圆盘、遍作,也指似相,以及从似相中生起的禅那,但此处唯指与相应俱行的禅那。显示巴利原文
55. Sampayogavasena samādhi ācariyena vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘kathaṃ ārammaṇavasena vibhatto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘dasa kasiṇāyatanānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Imehi dasahi ārammaṇehi kasiṇehipi samādhi vicinitvā veditabboti. ‘‘Tesu dasasu kittako samatho, kittakā vipassanā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kasiṇanti ca kasiṇamaṇḍalampi parikammampi paṭibhāganimittampi tasmiṃ paṭibhāganimitte uppannajjhānampi vuccati, idha pana sasampayuttajjhānameva adhippetaṃ.
因应被说及“是否仅如所说的定才应运用于止观,还是其他定也应运用”,为显示应审察并运用由念处等前行行道分类所成的多种差别、无余的圣道,故说“如是,一切”等。其中,“如是”即依我所说的方式,随所说之理,一切无余的、由念处等前行行道分类所成的多种差别的圣道,都应被运用。如何运用?凡我以无贪等相、现法乐住等相所说的定,即以此无贪等相、现法乐住等相,凡有可能以止运用的圣道,便应审察彼圣道而以止运用;凡有可能以观运用的圣道,便应审察彼圣道而以观运用。应如此理解其义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kiṃ pana vuttappakāro samādhiyeva samathavipassanāya yojetabbo, udāhu aññopi yojetabbo’’ti vattabbattā satipaṭṭhānādipubbabhāgapaṭipadābhedena anekabhedabhinno niravaseso ariyamaggopi vicayitvā yojetabboti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ sabbo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evanti mayā vuttanayena vuttanayānusārena sabbo niravaseso satipaṭṭhānādipubbabhāgapaṭipadābhedena anekabhedabhinno ariyo maggo yojetabbo. Kathaṃ? Yena yena anabhijjhādiākārena paccuppannasukhatādiākārena samādhi mayā vutto, tena tena anabhijjhādiākārena paccuppannasukhatādiākārena yo yo ariyamaggo samathena yojetuṃ sambhavati, so so ariyamaggo samathena vicayitvā yojayitabbo. Yo yo ariyamaggo vipassanāya yojetuṃ sambhavati, so so ariyamaggo vipassanāya yojayitvā yojayitabboti attho gahetabbo.
因应被问及“那些应被运用的止所依与观法,由哪些法所摄”,故说“它们由三法所摄:无常性、苦性、无我性”。那些止所依与观法,即由“无常性慧、苦性慧、无我性慧”此三种随观法所摄、所取。其义为:因与无常性等俱行,故随观慧亦被称为“无常性、苦性、无我性”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yehi samathādhiṭṭhānehi vipassanādhammehi yojayitabbo, te samathādhiṭṭhānā vipassanādhammā katamehi dhammehi saṅgahitā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘te tīhi dhammehi saṅgahitā aniccatāya dukkhatāya anattatāyā’’ti vuttaṃ, te samathādhiṭṭhānā vipassanādhammā ‘‘aniccatāya paññāya dukkhatāya paññāya anattatāya paññāyā’’ti tīhi anupassanādhammehi saṅgahitā gaṇhitāti attho. Aniccatādinā sahacaraṇato anupassanāpaññāpi ‘‘aniccatā dukkhatā anattatā’’ti vuccati.
因为应当被问到:“那位修习以止为依止之观的瑜伽行者,他修习的是什么?”所以说了“他正在修习止观”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yo yogī puggalo samathādhiṭṭhānaṃ vipassanaṃ bhāvayamāno hoti, so yogī puggalo kiṃ bhāvayatī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so samathavipassanaṃ bhāvayamāno’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
修习止观等的行者有三种:贪行者、嗔行者、痴行者。因为应当被问到:“其中,哪种行者以何种解脱门出离?于何处修学?断除什么?不随行什么?遍知什么?驱除什么?抖落什么?舍弃什么?熄灭什么?拔除什么?解开什么而出离?”所以说了“贪行者”等。而在注释书中说:“现在,为了显示那些行者于何处修学时,有特别的出离之门,以及哪些烦恼的对治是三种解脱门,并随同显示它们,故说‘贪行者’等。”其义在注释书(《导论注》第55章)中已作说明。显示巴利原文
Samathavipassanādīni bhāvayamāno puggalo rāgacarito dosacarito mohacaritoti tividho, ‘‘tattha katamo puggalo katamena katamena vimokkhamukhena niyyāti, katamāyaṃ katamāyaṃ sikkhanto, katamaṃ katamaṃ pajahanto, katamaṃ katamaṃ anupagacchanto, katamaṃ katamaṃ parijānanto, katamaṃ katamaṃ pavāhento, katamaṃ katamaṃ niddhunanto, katamaṃ katamaṃ vamento, katamaṃ katamaṃ nibbāpento, katamaṃ katamaṃ uppāṭento, katamaṃ katamaṃ vijaṭento niyyātī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘rāgacarito puggalo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘idāni yesaṃ puggalānaṃ yattha sikkhantānaṃ visesato niyyānamukhāni, yesañca kilesānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtāni tīṇi vimokkhamukhāni, tehi saddhiṃ tāni dassetuṃ ‘rāgacarito’tiādi vutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tassatthopi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 55) vuttoyeva.
因为应当被说到:“为何修习三种解脱门就是修习三蕴?”所以说了“其中,空解脱门”等。其中,“其中”是指在那些三种解脱门中。空解脱门是慧蕴,因为无我随观以慧为增上;无相解脱门是定蕴,因为无常随观以定为增上;无愿解脱门是戒蕴,因为苦随观以戒为增上。如此,由于三种解脱门包含三蕴,所以那位修习三种解脱门的瑜伽行者,就是修习三蕴。这些以慧为增上等的含义,在注释书(《导论注》第55章)中已说。所谓修习三蕴,就是修习圣八支道。因为应当被问到“为何修习?”为了显示其理由,所以说了“其中,这些……”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kasmā tīṇi vimokkhamukhāni bhāvayanto tayo khandhe bhāvayatī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tattha suññatavimokkhamukha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu tīsu vimokkhamukhesu. Suññatavimokkhamukhaṃ paññākkhandho anattānupassanāya paññāpadhānattā. Animittavimokkhamukhaṃ samādhikkhandho aniccānupassanāya samādhipadhānattā. Appaṇihitavimokkhamukhaṃ sīlakkhandho dukkhānupassanāya sīlapadhānattā. Iti tīhi vimokkhamukhehi tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ saṅgahitattā tīṇi vimokkhamukhāni bhāvayanto so yogī puggalo tayo khandhe bhāvayatiyevāti paññāpadhānādibhāvo aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 55) vutto. Tayo khandhe bhāvayanto ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvayati. ‘‘Kasmā bhāvayatī’’ti vattabbattā kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha yā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
已阐明三蕴与圣八支道之关系,此亦已为我们所了知。为答‘如何了知止观之状态’,故说‘此中,戒蕴’等,以显示三蕴的止观状态。为答‘修习止观的瑜伽行者,其有分心进入何种修习’,故说‘修习止观者……’等。身与心这两种有分,作为再生有的支分,进入修习并增长。戒与定这两种句、这两种足,作为导向有灭的行道,进入修习并增长。显示巴利原文
Tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ ariyaaṭṭhaṅgikamaggabhāvo vibhatto, amhehi ca jānito, ‘‘kathaṃ samathavipassanābhāvo jānitabbo’’ti vattabbattā tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ samathavipassanābhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha sīlakkhandho cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yo yogī puggalo samathavipassanaṃ bhāveti, tassa yogino puggalassa bhavaṅgāni katamaṃ bhāvanaṃ gacchantī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘yo samathavipassanaṃ bhāveti, tassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kāyo ca cittañca dve bhavaṅgāni upapattibhavassa aṅgāni bhāvanaṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ gacchanti. Sīlañca samādhi ca dve padāni dve pādā bhavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā bhāvanaṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ gacchanti.
为答‘如何进入’,故说‘他是比丘’等。已修身者,即身已被修习——指身正行或身律仪,由此比丘而称为已修身。其余诸项亦同此理。当身正行或身律仪被修习时,正业与正精进二法即进入修习,因为它们是身行戒。当戒依语律仪、活命律仪之力而转起,即戒被修习时,正语与正命二法即进入修习,因为它们是语等律仪戒。当心依心律仪之力而转起,即心被修习时,正念与正定二法即进入修习,因为它们是心律仪戒。当慧被修习时,正见与正思惟二法即进入修习,因为性质相同,且为助成。以正思惟反复思惟者,其慧便得增长。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathaṃ gacchantī’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘so hoti bhikkhū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhāvitakāyoti bhāvito kāyo kāyaābhisamācāriko, kāyasaṃvaro vā yena bhikkhunāti bhāvitakāyo. Sesesupi esa nayo. Kāye kāyaābhisamācārike, kāyasaṃvare vā bhāviyamāne sati sammākammanto, sammāvāyāmo ca dve dhammā bhāvanaṃ gacchanti kāyasamācārasīlattā. Sīle vācāsaṃvaraājīvasaṃvaravasena pavatte sīle bhāviyamāne sati sammāvācā ca sammāājīvo ca dve dhammā bhāvanaṃ gacchanti vācādisaṃvarasīlattā. Citte cittasaṃvaravasena pavatte citte bhāviyamāne sati sammāsati ca sammāsamādhi ca dve dhammā bhāvanaṃ gacchanti cittasaṃvarasīlattā. Paññāya bhāviyamānāya sati sammādiṭṭhi ca sammāsaṅkappo ca dve dhammā bhāvanaṃ gacchanti samānattā, upakārakattā ca. Sammāsaṅkappena hi punappunaṃ saṅkappantassa paññā vaḍḍhatīti.
为答‘正业与正精进二法,应依身而分别观察,还是应依心而分别观察’之问,故说‘此中,凡是正业’等。凡是作为身善行之思的正业,以及与之俱行的正精进,可归为身类;凡是作为离的正业,以及与之俱行的正精进,可归为心类。在这两类之中,凡是身类之正业与正精进,当身正行或身律仪被修习时,这些正业与正精进即进入修习;凡是心类之正业与正精进,当心律仪被修习时,这些正业与正精进即进入修习。如此连结。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sammākammanto ca sammāvāyāmo ca dve dhammā kāyavaseneva vibhattā vicetabbā kiṃ, udāhu cittavasena vibhattā vicetabbā ki’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yo ca sammākammanto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kāyasucaritacetanābhūto yo ca sammākammanto, taṃsahito yo ca sammāvāyāmo siyā kāyiko, viratibhūto yo ca sammākammanto, taṃsahito yo ca sammāvāyāmo siyā cetasiko, tattha tesu kāyikacetasikabhūtesu sammākammantasammāvāyāmesu yo sammākammantasammāvāyāmo kāyasaṅgaho, so sammākammantasammāvāyāmo kāye kāyaābhisamācārike, kāyasaṃvare vā bhāvite sati bhāvanaṃ gacchati. Yo sammākammantasammāvāyāmo cittasaṅgaho, so sammākammantasammāvāyāmo citte cittasaṃvare bhāvite sati bhāvanaṃ gacchatīti yojanā.
为探究“修习止观的瑜伽行者,能获得何种程度的证得”,故说“他修习止观”等。为显示五种圣道证得,故说“速证得”等。其义在注释书中已有阐明。为回答“由何而得何种证得”的问难,故说“此中,由止”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Samathavipassanaṃ bhāvayanto so yogī puggalo kittakaṃ adhigamaṃ gacchatī’’ti vicayitabbattā ‘‘so samathavipassanaṃ bhāvayanto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pañcavidhaṃ ariyamaggādhigamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘khippādhigamo cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 55) vibhatto. ‘‘Kena katamo adhigamo hotī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha samathenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
56 导师已为所化者,依阿罗汉果解脱门,探究、分别了“以未防护之心”等经句之义,我们亦已知晓。为回答“具足十力的说法者,其十力应如何探究”这一问题,故说“此中,凡说法者,彼具足十力”等。然而在注释书中——显示巴利原文
56. ‘‘Arakkhitena cittenā’’tiādisuttattho veneyyānaṃ arahattaphalavimuttimukhena ācariyena vicayito vibhatto, amhehi ca ñāto, ‘‘desakassa dasabalasamannāgatassa dasa balāni kathaṃ vicayitabbānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha yo desayati, so dasabalasamannāgato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
如是,大长老以“因此是防护心者”之偈颂,依阿罗汉果解脱门开示思察理趣之相应;又以说法善巧,通过众多经句,分别其前行道之修习差别与修习功德,从种种方面显示了思察理趣。今为以十如来力也显示此,故说“此中,凡说法者”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Iti mahāthero ‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’ti gāthāya vasena arahattaphalavimuttimukhena vicayahārasampātaṃ niddisanto, desanākusalatāya anekehi suttappadesehi tassā pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya bhāvanāvisesānaṃ bhāvanānisaṃsānañca vibhajanavasena nānappakārato vicayahāraṃ dassetvā, idāni dasannaṃ tathāgatabalānampi vasena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘tattha yo desayatī’tiādimāhā’’ti –
已说。“于彼彼处”,即在那些应受教诫、应被调伏而修习止观者之中。那位具足十力的说法者、导师,宣说“以未防护之心”等法,依教诫而不欺诳弟子——应当探究这位说法者、导师的十力。如此连结。显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu samathavipassanaṃ bhāvayantesu sāsitabbasāsakesu. Dasabalasamannāgato yo desako satthā ‘‘arakkhitena cittenā’’tiādidhammaṃ deseti, ovādena sāvake na visaṃvādayati, tassa desakassa satthuno dasa balāni vicayitabbānīti yojanā.
因需问:“如何教导?”故说“那三种”等。在这十种如来力中,处非处智称为第一如来力。因需问:“此力应如何探究?”故说“彼如是教诫”等。其义理在注释书中已说明,依经文亦清楚。了知“此理不存在”的智慧,名为非处智;了知“此理存在”的智慧,名为处智。当知这其中的意趣是:了知处与非处的智慧,应被探究为第一如来力。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kinti desetī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so tividha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tesu dasasu tathāgatabalesu ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ nāma, ‘‘taṃ balaṃ kathaṃ vicayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘so tathā ovadito’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Attho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 56) vutto, pāḷivasenapi pākaṭo. ‘‘Etaṃ ṭhānaṃ na vijjatī’’ti jānanaṃ aṭṭhānañāṇaṃ nāma, ‘‘etaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti jānanaṃ ṭhānañāṇaṃ nāmāti ṭhānāṭṭhānānaṃ jānanañāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti adhippāyo veditabbo. (1)
57 处非处智作为第一如来力,已由导师探究、分别,我们亦已了知。因需问:“遍行道智——第二如来力,应如何探究?”故说“如是处非处性”等。“此道导向此有,此道导向此有”,像这样了知一切处所导向之道的智慧,名为遍行道智。这其中的意趣是:遍行道智应被探究为第二如来力。显示巴利原文
57. Ṭhānāṭṭhānañāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ vibhattaṃ amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ sabbatthagāminipaṭipadāñāṇaṃ dutiyatathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti ṭhānāṭṭhānatā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ayaṃ paṭipadā imasmiṃ bhave gāminī, ayaṃ paṭipadā imasmiṃ bhave gāminī’’ti sabbattha gāminiyā paṭipadāya jānanañāṇaṃ sabbatthagāminipaṭipadāñāṇaṃ nāmāti sabbatthagāminipaṭipadāñāṇaṃ dutiyaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti adhippāyo. (2)
59 遍行道智是第二如来力,已由老师所抉择,亦为我等所知。因应问:“如何抉择种种界智——第三如来力?”故说“如是遍行道”等。所谓“此界与此界,名为种种界;此界与此界,名为差别界”,如是了知种种界与差别界的智慧,即名种种界智。如此,种种界智应被抉择为第三如来力。显示巴利原文
59. Sabbatthagāminipaṭipadāñāṇaṃ dutiyaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ anekadhātunānādhātuñāṇaṃ tatiyaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti sabbatthagāminī paṭipadā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ayaṃ dhātu ca ayaṃ dhātu ca anekadhātu nāma, ayaṃ dhātu ca ayaṃ dhātu ca nānādhātu nāmā’’ti anekadhātunānādhātūnaṃ jānanañāṇaṃ anekadhātunānādhātuñāṇaṃ nāmāti anekadhātunānādhātuñāṇaṃ tatiyaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti. (3)
60 种种界智是第三如来力,已由老师所抉择、分别,亦为我等所知。因应问:“如何抉择有情种种意乐智——第四如来力?”故说“如是种种界差别界之世间”等。所谓“这些有情如是意乐,这些有情如是意乐”,如是了知有情诸意乐的智慧,即名有情种种意乐智。如此,有情种种意乐智应被抉择为第四如来力。显示巴利原文
60. Anekadhātunānādhātuñāṇaṃ tatiyaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikatāñāṇaṃ catutthaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti anekadhātunānādhātukassa lokassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ime sattā evaṃ adhimuttā, ime sattā evaṃ adhimuttā’’ti sattānaṃ adhimuccanānaṃ jānanañāṇaṃ sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikatāñāṇaṃ nāmāti sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikatāñāṇaṃ catutthaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti. (4)
有情种种意乐智是第四如来力,已由老师所分别,亦为我等所知。因应问:“如何抉择果报差别智——第五如来力?”故说“如是他们随其意乐”等。所谓“如是意乐之有情,此业为黑,此黑业之果报为此;此业为白,此白业之果报为此”,如是了知诸果报差别的智慧,即名果报差别智。如此,果报差别智应被抉择为第五如来力。显示巴利原文
Sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikatāñāṇaṃ catutthaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vibhattaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ vipākavemattatāñāṇaṃ pañcamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti te yathādhimuttā cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ adhimuttānaṃ sattānaṃ idaṃ kammaṃ kaṇhaṃ, imassa kaṇhakammassa ayaṃ vipāko. Idaṃ kammaṃ sukkaṃ, imassa sukkakammassa ayaṃ vipāko’’ti evamādīhi vipākānaṃ nānattajānanañāṇaṃ vipākavemattatāñāṇaṃ nāmāti vipākavemattatāñāṇaṃ pañcamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti.
62 果报差别智是第五如来力,已由老师抉择,亦为我等所了知。因当问“如何抉择诸禅那杂染清净出离智为第六如来力”,故说“如是所取……”等。“如是所取之诸业、诸禅那、诸解脱、诸定、诸等至,此为杂染,此为清净,此为出离;如是杂染,如是清净,如是出离”——如此了知诸禅那杂染、清净、出离之无碍智,即名为诸禅那杂染清净出离智。是故,诸禅那杂染清净出离智应抉择为第六如来力。显示巴利原文
62. Vipākavemattatāñāṇaṃ pañcamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ, amhehi ca ñātaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ jhānānaṃ saṃkilesavodānavuṭṭhānañāṇaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti tathā samādinnāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ samādinnānaṃ kammānaṃ jhānānaṃ vimokkhānaṃ samādhīnaṃ samāpattīnaṃ ayaṃ saṃkileso, idaṃ vodānaṃ, idaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ, evaṃ saṃkilissati, evaṃ vodāyati, evaṃ vuṭṭhahatī’’ti jhānānaṃ saṃkilesavodānavuṭṭhānānaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ jhānānaṃ saṃkilesavodānavuṭṭhānañāṇaṃ nāmāti jhānānaṃ saṃkilesavodānavuṭṭhānañāṇaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti. (5)
63 诸禅那杂染清净出离智是第六如来力,已由老师抉择。因当问“如何抉择根之高下差别智为第七如来力”,故说“如是,对于同一定……”等。依于“以增上义为根,以不动摇义为力”的了知,进而了知“此人根钝、此人根中、此人根利”——即对其他有情的根与力,了知其钝、中、利差别之智,名为根之高下差别智。是故,根之高下差别智应抉择为第七如来力。显示巴利原文
63. Jhānānaṃ saṃkilesañāṇaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ indriyaparopariyattavemattatāñāṇaṃ sattamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti tasseva samādhissā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ ādhipateyyaṭṭhena indriyāni, evaṃ akampiyaṭṭhena balānī’’ti jānanena saha ‘‘ayaṃ mudindriyo, ayaṃ majjhindriyo, ayaṃ tikkhindriyo’’ti parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ indriyabalānaṃ amudumajjhādhimattatājānanañāṇaṃamudumajjhādhimattatājānanañāṇaṃ indriyaparopariyattavemattatāñāṇaṃ nāmāti indriyaparopariyattavemattatāñāṇaṃ sattamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti. (6)
64 根之高下差别智是第七如来力,已由老师抉择。因当问“如何抉择宿住随念智为第八如来力”及“如何抉择天眼智为第九如来力”,故说“如是,于彼处,凡种种……”等。以“一生……”等,依生的方式,或以“名为如此……”等,依名、族姓、容色、食物、苦乐感受边际的方式,对于有相、有说明的种种宿住,于一一有之一切而无余了知之智,名为宿住随念智。是故,宿住随念智应抉择为第八如来力。显示巴利原文
64. Indriyaparopariyattañāṇaṃ sattamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbaṃ, kathaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ navamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti tattha yaṃ anekavihita’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ekaṃ jāti’’ntiādinā jātivasena vā ‘‘evaṃnāmo’’tiādinā nāmagottavaṇṇāhārasukhadukkhapaṭisaṃvedanāya pariyantavasena vā sākārassa sauddesassa anekavihitapubbenivāsassa taṃtaṃbhavassa asesato jānanañāṇaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ nāmāti pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti. (7)
对于正在死去与投生、低劣与殊胜、美色与丑色、善趣与恶趣、随其业而往的有情,能无余了知他们死与生的智慧,称为天眼智。由此,天眼智应被抉择为第九如来力。显示巴利原文
Cavamānaupapajjamānahīnapaṇītasuvaṇṇadubbaṇṇasugataduggatayathākammūpagānaṃ sattānaṃ asesato cutūpapātānaṃ jānanañāṇaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ nāmāti dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ navamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti. (8-9)
宿住随念智等第八、第九如来力,已由阿阇梨抉择并分别。由于应问:“如何抉择一切漏尽智为第十如来力?”故说“如是,于彼处,凡……”等。于菩提树下,生起了灭除烦恼魔的智慧;此灭除烦恼魔的智慧,即名为一切漏尽智。如此,一切漏尽智应被抉择为第十如来力——此为略义。至于广说,依巴利圣典及注疏,对比丘学子而言也早已明了,故不再展示。显示巴利原文
Pubbenivāsādiaṭṭhamanavamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ ācariyena vicayitaṃ vibhattaṃ, ‘‘kathaṃ sabbāsavakkhayañāṇaṃ dasamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabba’’nti pucchitabbattā ‘‘iti tattha ya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Bodhimūle saṃkilesamāranihanaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppannaṃ, idaṃ kilesamāranihanaṃ ñāṇaṃ sabbāsavakkhayañāṇaṃ nāmāti sabbāsavakkhayañāṇaṃ dasamaṃ tathāgatabalaṃ vicayitabbanti ayaṃ saṅkhepattho. Vitthārato pana pāḷito ca aṭṭhakathāto ca yatipotānampi pākaṭo bhaveyyāti maññitvā na dassito.(10)
因必须说“抉择摄取至此圆满”,故说“抉择摄取已运用”。凡是所说各段经文之义,都应通过各自作为殊胜解说的抉择摄取来抉择;而每一种作为殊胜解说的抉择摄取,都已如理引出并加以运用——此即应取之义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettakova vicayahārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto vicayo hārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Ye ye suttappadesatthā vuttā, te te suttappadesatthā yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vicayahārasampātena vicayitabbā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vicayahārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ nīharitvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.
然而,智者们……乃至……所应取。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
三、理摄集阐明显示巴利原文
3. Yuttihārasampātavibhāvanā
65 凡导师以审察摄经由种种途径审察经文段落之义,并为我等所了知者,彼审察摄即为圆满。因应问“何为理趣摄?”,故说“于此,何为理趣摄?”等。而于注疏中则说:“如此以种种理趣详说审察摄后,今为显示理趣摄等,故开始宜说‘于此,何为理趣摄?’等。”“于此”者,即于他们所阐述的十六种摄之中,为引出经文段落而问:何等解说特相名为理趣摄?——为了审察于该经文段落中宣说的诸义理趣之性。显示巴利原文
65. Yena yena vicayahārasampātena suttappadesatthā ācariyena vicayitabbā, amhehi ca ñātā, so vicayahārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo yuttihārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo yuttihārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana – ‘‘evaṃ nānānayehi vicayahārasampātaṃ vitthāretvā idāni yuttihārasampātādīni dassetuṃ ‘tattha katamo yuttihārasampāto’tiādi āraddha’’nti (netti. aṭṭha. 65) vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tesu desanāhārasampātādīsu soḷasasu hārasampātesu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso yuttihārasampāto nāmāti pucchati, pucchitvā yasmiṃ suttappadese vuttānaṃ atthānaṃ yuttibhāvo vicāretabbo, taṃ suttappadesaṃ nīharituṃ –
是故,守护心者,以正思惟为其行境;
以正见为前导,已了知生灭;
降伏昏沉睡眠的比丘,将舍断一切恶趣。」
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tasmā rakkhitacittassa, sammāsaṅkappagocaro; Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro, ñatvāna udayabbayaṃ; Thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhu, sabbā duggatiyo jahe’’ti. (udā. 32; netti. 31, 78) –
已说。在此偈中:由于不守护心者随顺魔力,比丘应通过念的守护、根的守护等,成为心的守护者;由于以欲寻等邪思惟为行境者随顺魔力,比丘应通过出离寻等,成为以正思惟为行境者;由于为邪见所损心者随顺魔力,比丘应通过如理作意了知生灭,成为以正见为前导者;由于为昏沉睡眠所损心者随顺魔力,比丘应通过精进力,成为降伏昏沉睡眠者。这样的比丘将舍断一切恶趣。应知,这便是‘将舍断’之义。显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ. Tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ tasmā arakkhitacittassa māravasānugatattā satisaṃvaraindriyasaṃvarādivasena bhikkhu rakkhitacitto assa bhaveyya, tasmā kāmavitakkādimicchāsaṅkappagocarassa māravasānugatattā nekkhammasaṅkappādivasena bhikkhu sammāsaṅkappagocaro assa bhaveyya, tasmā micchādiṭṭhihatacittassa māravasānugatattā yonisomanasikārena bhikkhu udayabbayaṃ ñatvāna sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro assa bhaveyya, tasmā thinamiddhena hatacittassa māravasānugatattā vīriyavasena bhikkhu thinamiddhābhibhū assa bhaveyya, tādiso bhikkhu sabbā duggatiyo jahe jahissatīti attho veditabbo.
为说明“于彼偈中,应当如何审察其理?”而开示了“故守护心者”等内容。守护心者,其行境将成为正思惟——这一理义正相应,并非不相应。又因已舍断邪思惟,成为以正见为前导而住者,必将通达生灭,这一理义亦相应,因为以正见为前导者不可能没有生灭随观。通达生灭者必将断除一切恶趣,这一理义相应,因为依生灭随观的次第,必生起圣道。断除一切恶趣者,将超越一切恶趣堕落的怖畏,这一理义相应,因为一切恶趣堕落的怖畏已不再生起。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tassaṃ gāthāyaṃ kathaṃ yuttibhāvo vicāretabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Rakkhitacittassa sammāsaṅkappagocaro bhavissatīti attho yujjati eva, no na yujjati. Micchāsaṅkappānampi jahitattā sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro hutvā viharanto udayabbayaṃ paṭivijjhissatīti attho yujjati sammādiṭṭhipurekkhārassa udayabbayānupassanāsambhavato. Udayabbayaṃ paṭivijjhanto sabbā duggatiyo jahissatīti attho yujjati udayabbayānupassanānukkamena ariyamaggasambhavato. Sabbā duggatiyo jahanto sabbāni duggativinipātabhayāni samatikkamissatīti attho yujjati sabbesaṃ duggativinipātabhayānaṃ anuppajjanato.
为表明“仅此理趣摄即已圆满”,故说“已善配理趣摄”。凡是通过作为释相之理趣摄,审辨经文段落义理的各种情况,作为释相的理趣摄皆已善配。应如理拣择而相应的配合——应当如是了知其义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettakova yuttihārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto yuttihārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena yuttihārasampātena suttappadesatthānaṃ yuttibhāvo vicāretabbo , so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto yuttihārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.
然由诸智者……乃至……应当把握。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
四、词基摄集阐明显示巴利原文
4. Padaṭṭhānahārasampātavibhāvanā
66 凡依某种理趣摄而由导师阐明了经文段落义理、且已为我等所了知者,即该理趣摄已得圆满。因应问“何为词基摄?”故问:“于此,何为词基摄?”显示巴利原文
66. Yena yena yuttihārasampātena suttappadesatthānaṃ yuttibhāvo ācariyena vibhāvito, amhehi ca ñāto, so yuttihārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo padaṭṭhānahārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo padaṭṭhāno hārasampāto’’ti pucchati.
如此问已,为引出某经文段落中所阐述的诸词基,即引出该经文段落,故说“是故,守护心者,正思惟为行境”等偈颂。偈颂之义如前已说。因应问“何等偈颂义,为哪些法的词基?”故说“是故,守护心者”等。其中,“守护心者”这一经文段落,其义为诸根守护门,名为三善行的词基,因为它是令善行圆满的近因。“正思惟为行境”这一经文段落,其义为出离寻等正思惟,名为止的词基,因为它是镇伏欲欲等诸盖的近因。“正见为前导”这一经文段落,其义为业自性正见与缘起观之名色正见,名为观的词基,因为它是无常随观等的殊胜因。“了知生灭”这一经文段落,其义为生灭随观慧,名为见地的词基,因为它是证得初道的近因。“征服昏沉睡眠之比丘”这一经文段落,其义为征服昏沉睡眠,名为精进的词基,因为它是其近因。“舍断一切恶趣”这一经文段落,其义为修习所应舍断者,名为修习圣道的词基,因为由舍断所应舍断者,能生起圣道修习的圆满。显示巴利原文
Pucchitvā yasmiṃ suttappadese vuttāni padaṭṭhānāni nīharitāni, taṃ suttappadesaṃ nīharituṃ ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassa, sammāsaṅkappagocaroti gāthā’’ti vuttā. Gāthāttho vuttova. ‘‘Katame gāthātthā katamesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’ti suttappadesassa atthabhūtā indriyesu guttadvāratā tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma sucaritapāripūriyā āsannakāraṇattā. ‘‘Sammāsaṅkappagocaro’’ti suttappadesassa atthabhūtā nekkhammasaṅkappādayo sammāsaṅkappā samathassa padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma kāmacchandaādinīvaraṇavikkhambhanassa āsannakāraṇattā. ‘‘Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro’’ti suttappadesassa atthabhūtā kammassakatāsammādiṭṭhi ca sappaccayanāmarūpadassanasammādiṭṭhi ca vipassanāya padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma aniccānupassanādīnaṃ visesakāraṇattā. ‘‘Ñatvāna udayabbaya’’nti suttappadesassa atthabhūtā udayabbayānupassanāpaññā dassanabhūmiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma paṭhamamaggādhigamassa āsannakāraṇattā. ‘‘Thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhū’’ti suttappadesassa atthabhūtaṃ thinamiddhābhibhavanaṃ vīriyassa padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma āsannakāraṇattā. ‘‘Sabbā duggatiyo jahe’’ti suttappadesassa atthabhūtā pahātabbajahanabhāvanāya ariyamaggabhāvanāya padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma pahātabbappahānena ariyamaggabhāvanāpāripūrisambhavato.
因应说“唯此词基摄已圆满”,故说“词基摄已配置”。凡依某种作为特定解说的词基摄,而将经文段落之义引出为词基者,该作为特定解说的词基摄即已配置,应如理简择而加以配合——当如此领会其义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettakova padaṭṭhānahārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto padaṭṭhāno hārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena padaṭṭhānahārasampātabhūtena suttappadesatthāni padaṭṭhānāni nīharitāni, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto padaṭṭhānahārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.
然而诸智者……乃至……应当把握。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
五、特相摄集阐明显示巴利原文
5. Lakkhaṇahārasampātavibhāvanā
67 67. 凡依某种「近因之摄取法」而确立经文段落义理的近因,既经导师抉择,亦由我等了知,则该「近因之摄取法」即告圆满。由于接下来应问「何谓相之摄取法?」,故说「其中,何谓相之摄取法?」等语。此处,即在以宣说之摄取法等为首的十六种摄取法之中,发问:名为「相之摄取法」的特殊诠释方式为何?显示巴利原文
67. Yena yena padaṭṭhānahārasampātena suttappadesatthāni padaṭṭhānāni ācariyena niddhāritāni, amhehi ca ñātāni, so padaṭṭhānahārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo lakkhaṇahārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo lakkhaṇo hārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu desanāhārasampātādīsu soḷasasu hārasampātesu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso lakkhaṇahārasampāto nāmāti pucchati.
由于应问「与哪些经义具有相同之相的法被摄取了?」,故说「因此」等语。以「因此,对于护心者,正思惟为其行境」这一经文段落所说之「护持」,即摄取了念根;念根既被摄取,信等五根亦随之被摄取,因为它们皆以「根」义而具有相同之相。以「以正见为前导」这一经文段落所说之正见被摄取;正见既被摄取,则八支圣道亦随之被摄取。何故如此?此处提问其因,提问之后,以「因为正见……」等语说明原因:正思惟由正见之因而生起,故尔;正语由正思惟而生起,故尔;正业由正语而生起,故尔;正命由正业而生起,故尔;正精进由正命而生起,故尔;正念由正精进而生起,故尔;正定由正念而生起,故尔;正解脱由正定而生起,故尔;正解脱智见由正解脱而生起,故尔——因此,八支圣道即被摄取。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamehi suttatthehi samānalakkhaṇā katame dhammā gahitā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tasmā rakkhitacittassa, sammāsaṅkappagocaro’’ti suttappadesena vuttaṃ idaṃ rakkhaṇaṃ satindriyaṃ gahitaṃ, satindriye gahite saddhādipañcindriyāni gahitāni bhavanti indriyaṭṭhena samānalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro’’ti suttappadesena vuttā sammādiṭṭhi gahitā, sammādiṭṭhiyā gahitāya ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo gahito bhavati. Taṃ kissa hetūti kāraṇaṃ pucchati. Pucchitvā kāraṇamāha ‘‘sammādiṭṭhito hī’’tiādinā. Sammādiṭṭhihetuto sammāsaṅkappo hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāsaṅkappato sammāvācā hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāvācāto sammākammanto hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammākammantato sammāājīvo hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāājīvato sammāvāyāmo hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāvāyāmato sammāsatihi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāsatito sammāsamādhi hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāsamādhito sammāvimutti hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, sammāvimuttito sammāvimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ hi yasmā pabhavati, tasmā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo gahito bhavatīti.
因为应当说“相之摄取法至此即告圆满”,所以表述为“相之摄取法已得运用”。凡是凭借某种作为特殊解释方式的相之摄取法,将经文段落之义以同相统摄的,此一特殊解释的相之摄取法便已得到运用——意思是:应当如理拣择、如法配合,这样才算圆满摄取。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettakova lakkhaṇahārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto lakkhaṇo hārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena lakkhaṇahārasampātena suttappadesatthā samānalakkhaṇena gahitā bhavanti, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto lakkhaṇahārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahitoti.
而智者……乃至……应当如此把握。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
六、四种配列之摄取法之阐明显示巴利原文
6. Catubyūhahārasampātavibhāvanā
68 68. 凡是凭借某种相之摄取法将经文段落之义以同相统摄的,此相之摄取法即告圆满。由于接下来应当发问“何为四种配列之摄取法”,故说“其中,何为四种配列之摄取法”等语。此处,即是在以教说之摄取法等为首的十六种摄取法之中,发问:何者是名为“四种配列之摄取法”的特殊解释方式?显示巴利原文
68. Yena yena lakkhaṇahārasampātena suttappadesatthā samānalakkhaṇena gahitā, so lakkhaṇahārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo catubyūhahārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo catubyūho hārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesu desanāhārasampātādīsu soḷasasu hārasampātesu katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso catubyūhahārasampāto nāmāti pucchati.
若问:“于哪部经中抉择了哪些语源、意趣、缘起与前后关联?”因此而有“所以”等言。在“因此,护心者”这一经文句中,以“被守护、被防护”来标示“护”的语源,并以“被周全地守护”的方式加以说明。又因“iti”一词具有“如此”等起首之义,便如下引出语源:“思虑故,名为心;积集于自相续故,名为心;为诸缘所彩绘故,名为心;以种种之义故,名为心;以造作之义故,名为心。其心被守护者,称为护心者。正确地思惟故,名为正思惟;牛群于此游行故,名为行境;如行境一般故,名为行境;以正思惟为行境者,名为正思惟行境者。正确地照见故,名为正见;以正见为前导者,名为正见前导者。了知故,名为已知。生起与灭去,名为生灭。昏沉与睡眠,名为昏沉睡眠;超越彼故,名为超越者;超越昏沉睡眠者,名为昏沉睡眠超越者。乞食故,名为比丘。”如此,语源便被引出。故说:“‘iti’一词具有起首之义。”以上所施设的种种,即称为“语源”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamasmiṃ sutte katame nirutyādhippāyanidānapubbāparānusandhayo niddhāritā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’ti suttappadese ‘‘rakkhīyate rakkhita’’nti niruttiṃ ‘‘paripālīyatī’’ti iminā pariyāyena dasseti, itisaddassa ādyatthattā ‘‘cintetīti cittaṃ, attano santānaṃ cinotīti cittaṃ, paccayehi citanti cittaṃ, cittavicittaṭṭhena cittaṃ, cittakaraṇaṭṭhena cittaṃ, rakkhitaṃ cittaṃ yassāti rakkhitacitto. Sammā saṅkappetīti sammāsaṅkappo, gāvo caranti etthāti gocaro, gocaro viyāti gocaro, sammāsaṅkappo gocaro assāti sammāsaṅkappagocaro. Sammā passatīti sammādiṭṭhi, sammādiṭṭhi purekkhāro assāti sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro. Jānātīti ñatvāna. Udayo ca vayo ca udayabbayaṃ. Thinañca middhañca thinamiddhaṃ, abhibhavatīti abhibhū, thinamiddhaṃ abhibhūti thinamiddhābhibhū. Bhikkhatīti bhikkhū’’ti niruttipi nīharitā. Tenāha – ‘‘iti-saddo ādyattho’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 68). Esā vuttappakārā paññatti nirutti nāmāti nīharitā.
若问此经文段落中世尊的意趣为何?当如此导出:“凡愿从一切恶趣中解脱的善士,这些善士将行于法、守护其心”,这就是意趣。在此“因此,护心者”等经文句中,应当如是导出世尊的意趣。显示巴利原文
Idha suttappadese bhagavato ko adhippāyoti ce puccheyya, ye sappurisā sabbāhi duggatīhi parimuccitukāmā bhavissanti, te sappurisā dhammacārino rakkhitacittā bhavissantīti ayaṃ adhippāyo. Ettha ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’tiādisuttappadese bhagavato adhippāyoti nīharitabbo.
若问:“缘起为何?”应这样引出缘起:由于拘迦利迦对舍利弗、目犍连二位长老心不防护,起于嗔恚,因此堕入大莲花地狱;又因世尊具足正念的守护,舍离一切恶趣。是故,欲舍离一切恶趣的善士比丘,应当成为护心者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamaṃ nidāna’’nti ce puccheyya, kokāliko sāriputtamoggallānesu theresu cittaṃ arakkhitvā padosayitvā mahāpadumaniraye yasmā upapanno, yasmā bhagavā ca satiārakkhena samannāgato sabbā duggatiyo jahati, tasmā ca sabbā duggatiyo jahitukāmo bhikkhu sappuriso rakkhitacitto assa bhaveyyāti nidānaṃ nīharitabbaṃ.
若问:“何为前后连结?”当知,经中所说的“应以念守护心”一句为前言——依此前言,与“是故,护心者……乃至……能舍一切恶趣”这段经文前后随顺、相衔接、相会通,由此即可确定前后连结。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamo pubbāparasandhī’’ti ce puccheyya, suttamhi ‘‘satiyā cittaṃ rakkhitabba’’nti yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, tena pubbavacanena ayaṃ ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassa…pe… sabbā duggatiyo jahe’’ti suttappadeso anusandhi saṃsandati sametīti pubbaparānusandhi niddhāritabboti.
因为应当说“四种配列之摄取法至此即告圆满”,所以这里说“四种配列之摄取法已得应用”。凡是通过某种特定的解释——即四种配列之摄取法,而得以确定语源、意趣、缘起与前后连结之处,那种作为特定解释的四种配列之摄取法便已得到应用。其意思是:应当依合适的方式予以抉择、运用后,方才如理把握。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettakova catubyūhahārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto catubyūho hārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena catubyūhahārasampātena nirutyādhippāyanidānapubbāparānusandhi niddhāritabbo, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto catubyūhahārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.
如是,关于四种配列之摄取法,已依能力所及而撰成其阐明。显示巴利原文
Iti catubyūhahārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā
而智者……乃至……应如此把握。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
7. 回转摄句的阐明显示巴利原文
7. Āvaṭṭahārasampātavibhāvanā
69 凡是依种种四聚摄句而分别词义、意趣、因缘、前后连结,此四聚摄句即告圆满。因须问“何为回转摄句”,故说“于此,何为回转摄句”等。此处问的是:“以何种殊胜诠释名为回转摄句?”显示巴利原文
69. Yena yena catubyūhahārasampātena nirutyādhippāyanidānapubbāparānusandhayo vibhattā, so catubyūhahārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo āvaṭṭahārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo āvaṭṭo hārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso āvaṭṭahārasampāto nāmāti pucchati.
因须问“哪些经义应如何回转”,故说“所以”等语。其心多安住于出离思惟——即名为正思惟的出离寻,以遍等为所缘;其心多安住于无害思惟——即名为正思惟的无害寻,以慈等为所缘;如此安住于所证得的心一境性,其心便名为“从杂染中守护之心”。当说“所以,守护之心者,以正思惟为行境”时,其中应回转的一境性,即是此一境性——止。当说“以正见为前导”时,其中应回转的慧,即是此慧——观。当说“了知生灭”时,其中应回转的遍知苦,即是此遍知苦——苦遍知。当说“比丘,克服昏沉睡眠”时,彼处依补特伽罗而说的克服昏沉睡眠,即是此克服昏沉睡眠——集断除。当说“正确地舍弃诸恶趣”时,彼处所说的舍弃一切恶趣的不生起,即是此不生起——灭。如是:以苦遍知,应回转所应遍知的苦谛;以集断除,应回转所应断除的集谛;以灭,应回转灭谛;以止与观,应回转道谛——此四谛即是应回转者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katame suttatthā kathaṃ āvaṭṭetabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nekkhammasaṅkappasaṅkhātasammāsaṅkappabahulo kasiṇādivasena, avihiṃsāsaṅkappasaṅkhātasammāsaṅkappabahulo mettādivasena adhigatāya cittekaggatāya cittaṃ ṭhapento saṃkilesato rakkhitacitto nāma hoti, ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassa, sammāsaṅkappagocaro’’ti iminā rakkhitacitte vutte sati yā ekaggatā āvaṭṭetabbā, sā ayaṃ ekaggatā samatho. ‘‘Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro’’ti iminā sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāre vutte sati yā paññā āvaṭṭetabbā, sā ayaṃ paññā vipassanā. ‘‘Ñatvāna udayabbaya’’nti iminā udayabbayañāṇasamannāgate vutte sati yā dukkhaparijānanā āvaṭṭetabbā, sā ayaṃ dukkhaparijānanā dukkhapariññā. ‘‘Thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhū’’ti iminā puggalādhiṭṭhānena yaṃ thinamiddhābhibhavanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ thinamiddhābhibhavanaṃ samudayappahānaṃ. ‘‘Sammā duggatiyo jahe’’ti iminā yo sabbaduggatijahanasaṅkhāto anuppādo vutto, so ayaṃ anuppādo nirodho. Iti dukkhapariññāya pariññetabbaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ āvaṭṭetabbaṃ, samudayappahānena pahātabbaṃ samudayasaccaṃ āvaṭṭetabbaṃ, nirodhena nirodhasaccaṃ āvaṭṭetabbaṃ, samathavipassanāhi maggasaccaṃ āvaṭṭetabbanti imāni cattāri saccāni āvaṭṭetabbānīti.
因须说“回转摄句仅此即圆满”,故说“回转摄句已确定”。其义当如是解:凡以作为殊胜诠释的回转摄句而应回转止等,彼作为殊胜诠释的回转摄句即已确定,应各随其宜,抉择而运用之。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettakova āvaṭṭo hārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto āvaṭṭo hārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena āvaṭṭahārasampātena samathādayo āvaṭṭetabbā , so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto āvaṭṭahārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.
如此,于回转摄句中,已依能力与力量相应而撰述其阐明。显示巴利原文
Iti āvaṭṭahārasampāte sattibalānurūpā racitā
然而,由智者……乃至……应当了知。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
8. 分别摄句的阐明显示巴利原文
8. Vibhattihārasampātavibhāvanā
70 70. 任何以回转摄句的方式而应回转经义的情况,该回转摄句便已圆满。由于应问“什么是分别摄句”,故说“于此,什么是分别摄句”等。此处问道:“什么样的解释殊胜,称为分别摄句?”显示巴利原文
70. Yena yena āvaṭṭahārasampātena suttatthā āvaṭṭetabbā, so āvaṭṭahārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo vibhattihārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo vibhattihārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha katamo saṃvaṇṇanāviseso vibhattihārasampāto nāmāti pucchati.
因应问“哪些经义在何处被分别”,故说“所以,守护之心者”等。在所说“所以……乃至……行境”这一偈颂中,该偈颂所阐述的善品法,应以善品法来指示、分别念防护法;亦应以不善品法来指示、分别。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katame suttatthā kattha vibhattā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā ‘‘tasmā…pe… gocaro’’ti gāthā vuttā, tissaṃ gāthāyaṃ vutto kusalapakkho dhammo kusalapakkhena dhammena satisaṃvaro dhammo niddisitabbo vibhajitabbo, akusalapakkhena dhammena niddisitabbo vibhajitabbo.
如何分别?「守护之心者」一语所说的善品念防护法,应以六种善品法来指示、分别,即:眼门防护……乃至……意门防护。「正思惟」一语所说的善品正思惟法,应以三种善品法来分别,即:出离寻、无嗔寻、无害寻。「以正见为前导」一语所说的善品诸法,应以八种善品法来分别,即:苦智、苦集智、苦灭智、趣苦灭道智、前际智、后际智、前后际智、此缘性缘起诸法智(《法集论》第1063条)。「了知生灭」一语所说的善品生灭智诸法,应以五十种生灭智善品来分别。「克服昏沉睡眠」一语所说的克服昏沉睡眠的善品诸法,应以四种善品来分别,即:入流道之克服、一来道之克服、不来道之克服、阿拉汉道之克服。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ? ‘‘Rakkhitacittassā’’ti padena vutto kusalapakkho satisaṃvaro dhammo ‘‘cakkhudvārasaṃvaro…pe… manodvārasaṃvaro’’ti chabbidhena kusalapakkhena dhammena niddisitabbo vibhajitabbo. ‘‘Sammāsaṅkappo’’ti padena vutto kusalapakkho sammāsaṅkappo dhammo ‘‘nekkhammasaṅkappo abyāpāda-saṅkappo avihiṃsāsaṅkappo’’ti tividhena kusalapakkhena dhammena vibhajitabbo. ‘‘Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro’’ti padena vuttā kusalapakkhā dhammajāti ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudaye ñāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhe ñāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadāya ñāṇaṃ, pubbante ñāṇaṃ, aparante ñāṇaṃ, pubbantāparante ñāṇaṃ, idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu ñāṇa’’nti (dha. sa. 1063) aṭṭhavidhena kusalapakkhena dhammena vibhajitabbā. ‘‘Ñatvāna udayabbaya’’nti padena vuttaṃ kusalapakkhaudayabbayañāṇaṃ dhammajātaṃ paññāsavidhena udayabbayañāṇena kusalapakkhena vibhajitabbaṃ. ‘‘Thinamiddhābhibhū’’ti padena vuttaṃ thinamiddhābhibhavanaṃ kusalapakkhaṃ dhammajātaṃ ‘‘sotāpattimaggābhibhavanaṃ sakadāgāmimaggābhibhavanaṃ anāgāmimaggābhibhavanaṃ arahattamaggābhibhavana’’nti catubbidhena kusalapakkhena vibhajitabbaṃ.
念防护属于善品,应依两种方式分别:世间念防护与出世间念防护。世间念防护应依一种方式分别,即欲界念防护。出世间念防护应依两种方式分别:见地与修习地。欲界念防护应依四种方式分别:身随观念防护、受随观念防护、心随观念防护、法随观念防护。出世间念防护亦然,亦依四种方式分别。正思惟与正见亦应依世间与出世间之别,以两种等方式分别。就近因而言,亦应依近因摄句中所说的方式分别。显示巴利原文
Satisaṃvaro kusalapakkho ‘‘lokiyo satisaṃvaro, lokuttaro satisaṃvaro’’ti dubbidhena vibhajitabboti. Lokiyo satisaṃvaro kāmāvacarovāti ekavidhena vibhajitabbo. Lokuttarā satisaṃvaro ‘‘dassanabhūmi, bhāvanābhūmī’’ti dubbidhena vibhajitabbo. Kāmāvacaro satisaṃvaro ‘‘kāyānupassanāsatisaṃvaro vedanānupassanāsatisaṃvaro cittānupassanāsatisaṃvaro dhammānupassanāsatisaṃvaro’’ti catubbidhena vibhajitabbo. Lokuttaro satisaṃvaropi tathā catubbidhena vibhajitabbo. Sammāsaṅkappasammādiṭṭhiyopi lokiyalokuttaravasena dubbidhādibhedena vibhajitabbā. Padaṭṭhānenapi padaṭṭhānahārasampāte vuttanayena vibhajitabbā.
就不善品而言,「心未受防护」一语所说的不防护,应以八种方式分别:眼不防护……乃至……身不防护、动身不防护、语不防护、意不防护。「被邪见所击」一语所摄的邪思惟,应以三种方式分别:欲寻、嗔恚寻、伤害寻。「邪见」一语所说的邪见,应以八种方式分别:于苦无知……乃至……于此缘性缘起所生诸法无知;亦应以六十二种邪见的方式分别。昏沉睡眠应以五种有行方式分别。显示巴利原文
Akusalapakkhena ‘‘arakkhitena cittenā’’ti padena vutto asaṃvaro ‘‘cakkhuasaṃvaro …pe… kāyaasaṃvaro, copanakāyaasaṃvaro, vācāasaṃvaro, manoasaṃvaro’’ti aṭṭhavidhena vibhajitabbo. ‘‘Micchādiṭṭhihatenā’’ti padena gahito micchāsaṅkappo ‘‘kāmavitakko byāpādavitakko vihiṃsāvitakko’’ti tividhena vibhajitabbo. ‘‘Micchādiṭṭhī’’ti padena vuttā micchādiṭṭhi ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇaṃ…pe…idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu aññāṇa’’nti aṭṭhavidhena vibhajitabbā, dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhividhenapi vibhajitabbā. Thinamiddhaṃ pañcavidhena sasaṅkhārikavidhena vibhajitabbaṃ.
由于应当说“分别摄持法门至此已圆满”,故说“分别摄持法门已运用”。凡以某种殊胜诠释的分别摄持法门,分别了经文段落之义,该殊胜诠释的分别摄持法门即已被运用——其义应如此理解:应随宜抉择并加以运用。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettakova vibhattihārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto vibhattihārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vibhattihārasampātena suttappadesatthā vibhattā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vibhattihārasampāto niyuttoti yathāraha niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.
然而,智者们……应当如此理解。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
九、转变摄持法门的阐明显示巴利原文
9. Parivattanahārasampātavibhāvanā
71 71. 凡以某种分别摄持法门分别了经文段落之义,该分别摄持法门即已圆满。由于应当提问“何为转变摄持法门”,故说“其中,何为转变摄持法门”等语。显示巴利原文
71. Yena yena vibhattihārasampātena suttappadesatthā vibhattā, so vibhattihārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo parivattanahārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo parivattano hārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
由于应被问及“哪些经文段落的义理应如何加以转变”,故说“因此”等语。在“因此……乃至……行境”这首偈颂中,确立了止与观。若修习此止与观,则不生善法的息灭为其果、为其利益;苦得以遍知,集得以断除,道得以修习——应如此转变。反之,若未修习止与观,则不生善法不得息灭,苦不得遍知,集不得断除,道不得修习——应如此作相反的转变。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katame suttappadesatthā kathaṃ parivattetabbā’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā ‘‘tasmā…pe… gocaro’’ti gāthā vuttā, tāya gāthāya yā samathavipassanā niddhāritā, tāya samathavipassanāya bhāvitāya akusalānaṃ nirodho phalaṃ payojanaṃ hoti, pariññātaṃ dukkhaṃ hoti, samudayo pahīno hoti, maggo bhāvito hotīti parivattetabbo. Paṭipakkhena pana samathavipassanāya abhāvitāya akusalānaṃ anirodho, apariññātaṃ dukkhaṃ, samudayo appahīno, maggo abhāvito hotīti parivattetabbo.
由于应说明“转变摄持法门至此圆满”,故说“转变摄持法门已运用”。凡是以某种殊胜诠释的方式来转变经文段落之义的转变摄持法门,该殊胜诠释的转变摄持法门即为“已运用”——其含义是:应依情况提取并加以运用。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettakova parivattanahārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto parivattano hārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena parivattanahārasampātena suttappadesatthā parivattetabbā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto parivattanahārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ nīharitvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.
然而,智者们……乃至……应当如是理解。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
十、同义语摄持法门的阐明显示巴利原文
10. Vevacanahārasampātavibhāvanā
72 凡是通过某一转变摄持法门而需要转变经文段落之义时,该转变摄持法门便为圆满。由于应当追问“什么是同义语摄持法门”,故说“其中什么是同义语摄持法门”等语。显示巴利原文
72. Yena yena parivattanahārasampātena suttappadesatthā parivattetabbā, so parivattano hārasampātoti paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo vevacano hārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo vevacano hārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
由于应当追问“哪些经文段落之义或经文词句有哪些同义词”,故说“因此”等语。所说的“因此……乃至……行境”那首偈颂中,以“护心者”一词所指向的“心”,或者“护心者”这一处“心”的词句,所说的“心……乃至……能了知之性”这一表述,便是同义词;“意、心脏”等语也是“心”的同义词。在“正思惟为行境”这一处,对于“正思惟”,所说的“出离思惟、无嗔恨思惟、无伤害思惟”这一表述,便是同义词;“寻、伺”等语也是“正思惟”的同义词。在“以正见为前导”这一处,对于“正见”这一词句,所说的“正见名为慧之矛、慧之剑、慧之宝、慧之驱策、慧之殿堂”这一表述,便是同义词;“慧、了知、简择”等语也是“正见”词句的同义词。所说的“昏沉、昏沉性、昏沉之状态,心之不适、心之不堪用、覆盖、遍覆、内收缩”这一表述,便是“昏沉”的同义词。所说的“身之不适、身之不堪用、身之懈怠、睡眠、睡眠状态、已睡之状态”这一表述,便是“睡眠”的同义词。所说的“乞食者、比丘”等语这一表述,便是“比丘”词句的同义词。所说的“恶趣、堕处”显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamesaṃ suttappadesatthānaṃ, suttapadānaṃ vā katamāni vevacanānī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā ‘‘tasmā…pe… gocaro’’ti gāthā vuttā, tāya gāthāya ‘‘rakkhitacittassā’’ti padena vuttassa cittassa, ‘‘rakkhitacittassā’’ti ettha cittassa padassa vā ‘‘cittaṃ…pe… vijānitatta’’nti yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ vevacanaṃ, ‘‘mānasaṃ hadaya’’ntiādivacanampi (dha. sa. 17, 63) cittassa vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Sammāsaṅkappagocaro’’ti ettha sammāsaṅkappassa ‘‘nekkhammasaṅkappo abyāpādasaṅkappo avihiṃsāsaṅkappo’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ vevacanaṃ, ‘‘takko vitakko’’tiādi (dha. sa. 7) vacanampi sammāsaṅkappassa vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro’’ti ettha sammādiṭṭhipadassa ‘‘sammādiṭṭhi nāma paññāsatthaṃ paññākhaggo paññāratanaṃ paññāpatodo paññāpāsādo’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ vevacanaṃ, ‘‘paññā pajānanā vicayo’’tiādi (dha. sa. 16) vacanampi sammādiṭṭhipadassa vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Thinaṃ thiyanā thiyitattaṃ cittassa, cittassa akallatā akammaññatā onāho pariyonāho antosaṅkoco’’ti (dha. sa. 1162-1163) yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ thinassa vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Kāyassa akallatā akammaññatā kāyālasiyaṃ soppaṃ supanā suppitatta’’nti (dha. sa. 1163) yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ middhassa vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhako bhikkhū’’tiādikaṃ (pārā. 45; vibha. 510) yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ bhikkhupadassa vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Duggati apāyo vinipāto vaṭṭadukkhaṃ saṃsāro’’tiādikaṃ yaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vacanaṃ duggatipadassa vevacanaṃ. Iti vevacanāni nīharitāni.
由于应当说“同义语摄持法门至此圆满”,故说“同义语摄持法门已运用”。凡是作为殊胜诠释的同义语摄持法门,并以此提取出诸同义词,那么该殊胜诠释的同义语摄持法门即被运用——其义已如此理解:应依具体情况提取后加以运用。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettakova vevacanahārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto vevacano hārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena vevacanahārasampātena vevacanāni nīharitāni, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto vevacanahārasampāto niyutto yathāsambhavaṃ nīharitvā yujjitabboti attho gahitoti.
然而,智者们……乃至……应当理解。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
十一、施设摄持法门的阐明显示巴利原文
11. Paññattihārasampātavibhāvanā
73 73. 诸同义词由某同义语摄持法门而得以确定,该同义语摄持法门即圆满。因应问“何为施设摄持法门?”,故说“于此,何为施设摄持法门?”等。显示巴利原文
73. Yena yena vevacanahārasampātena vevacanāni niddhāritāni, so vevacanahārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo paññattihārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo paññattihārasampāto’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
因应问“何为经文段落性质的施设?是哪些法的施设?”,故说“所以”等。“所以心受护者”——此施设由阐明念的所依处即应受护之心,故称念的所依处施设。应被念守护之心,即名念的所依处、所依。故注疏中说:“以确立而守护,念所护之心,犹如其依处。”“正思惟行境”——此施设由阐明止的修习,故称止的修习施设。“正见为前导,知生灭”——此施设由阐明见地的安立,故称安立施设。“比丘胜昏沉睡眠”——此施设由阐明集的完全无余断,故称完全无余断施设。“舍一切恶趣”——此施设由阐明道、圣道的修习,故称修习施设。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamā suttappadesabhūtā paññatti katamesaṃ dhammānaṃ paññattī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’ti paññatti satiyā padaṭṭhānassa rakkhitabbassa cittassa paññāpanato satiyā padaṭṭhānapaññatti nāma. Satiyā hi rakkhitabbaṃ cittaṃ satiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ – ‘‘adhiṭṭhahitvā rakkhantiyā satiyā rakkhiyamānaṃ cittaṃ tassā adhiṭṭhānaṃ viya hotī’’ti. ‘‘Sammāsaṅkappagocaro’’ti paññatti samathassa bhāvanāya paññāpanato samathassa bhāvanāpaññatti nāma. ‘‘Sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāro, ñatvāna udayabbaya’’nti paññatti dassanabhūmiyā nikkhepassa paññāpanato nikkhepapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhū’’ti samudayassa anavasesappahānassa paññāpanato anavasesappahānapaññatti nāma. ‘‘Sabbā duggatiyo jahe’’ti paññatti maggassa ariyamaggassa bhāvanāya paññāpanato bhāvanāpaññatti nāma.
因应说“唯此施设串连圆满”,故说“施设串连已结合”。凡是经由作为注释差别性质的施设串连而确立施设分类的,彼作为注释差别性质的施设串连即是已结合;应如理确立之后再加以结合,当取此义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettakova paññattihārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto paññattihārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena paññattihārasampātena paññattippabhedā niddhāritā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto paññattihārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.
然由诸智者……应取。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
十二、下降串连阐释显示巴利原文
12. Otaraṇahārasampātavibhāvanā
74 74. 经由任何一种施设串连而确立施设之分类,彼施设串连即圆满。因应当问“何为下降串连?”,故宣说“于此,何为下降串连?”等。显示巴利原文
74. Yena yena paññattihārasampātena paññattippabhedā niddhāritā, so paññattihārasampāto paripuṇṇo, ‘‘katamo otaraṇo hārasampāto’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tattha katamo otaraṇo hārasampāto’’tiādimāha.
因有问:「于此偈中,哪些根被确定?又以哪些已确定之法而下降?」故说「因此」等。于所说「因此心受护者」等偈中,在此偈内,以「因此……前导」之经文段落摄取正见;正见既摄,则信等五根亦被摄取。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha tissaṃ gāthāyaṃ katamāni indriyāni niddhāretvā katamehi niddhāritehi dhammehi otaratī’’ti pucchitabbattā ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yā ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’tiādigāthā vuttā, tissaṃ gāthāyaṃ ‘‘tasmā…pe… purekkhāro’’ti suttappadesena sammādiṭṭhi gahitā, sammādiṭṭhiyā gahitāya pañcindriyāni saddhādipañcindriyāni gahitāni bhavanti.
那些信等五根,因于明有助益,或为明之所依,故成为明。由明生起——即由如是明之生起,以其生起为因,无明灭得以成就;由无明灭,行灭成就……由生灭,老死灭成就。此下降,即名以缘起下降五根。显示巴利原文
Tāniyeva saddhādipañcindriyāni vijjāya upakārattā vā padaṭṭhānattā vā vijjā bhavanti, vijjuppādā tādisāya vijjāya uppādā uppādahetuto avijjānirodho sambhavati, avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho sambhavati…pe… jātinirodhā jarāmaraṇanirodho sambhavatīti. Ayaṃ otaraṇā paṭiccasamuppādena pañcindriyānaṃ otaraṇā nāma.
那些五根,为戒蕴、定蕴、慧蕴三蕴所摄——因信与精进生起戒,因念随顺慧。此下降,即名以蕴下降五根。显示巴利原文
Tāniyeva pañcindriyāni sīlakkhandhena samādhikkhandhena paññākkhandhena tīhi khandhehi saṅgahitāni bhavanti saddhāvīriyehi sīlasambhavato, satiyā ca paññānuvattakattā. Ayaṃ otaraṇā khandhehi pañcindriyānaṃ otaraṇā nāma.
这些五根即被含摄于诸行之中。凡是无漏的诸行,它们是有分、有因,却不成为有;这些无漏行由于入于法界内的缘故,被摄于法界。此即名为‘以界摄五根’的下降。显示巴利原文
Tāniyeva pañcindriyāni saṅkhārapariyāpannāni bhavanti. Ye saṅkhārā anāsavā bhavanti, bhavaṅgā bhavahetū no bhavanti, te anāsavā saṅkhārā dhammadhātusaṅgahitā bhavanti dhammadhātuyā antogadhattā. Ayaṃ otaraṇā dhātūhi pañcindriyānaṃ otaraṇā nāma.
此无漏法界被含摄于法处之中,凡是无漏的处,是有分、有因,却不成为有。此即名为‘以处摄法界’的下降。显示巴利原文
Sā anāsavā dhammadhātu dhammāyatanapariyāpannā bhavati, yaṃ āyatanaṃ anāsavaṃ bhavati, bhavaṅgaṃ bhavahetu no bhavati. Ayaṃ otaraṇā āyatanehi dhammadhātuyā otaraṇā nāma.
因为应说‘唯此下降串连方为圆满’,故说‘下降串连已结合’。任何经文段落的义理,都应藉由某种作为注释差别的下降串连而得以‘下降’;也就是说,应如理抉择出已经结合、且作为注释差别的下降串连,然后据以运用。应如此理解此义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettakova otaraṇo hārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto otaraṇo hārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena otaraṇahārasampātena suttappadesatthā otaritabbā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto otaraṇo hārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabboti.
然而,智者……应受持。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana…pe… gahetabboti.
从此以后,“于彼何者”等之连贯义,以及结尾处“相应”等之连贯义,应依前说方式了知。其中某处若文句不明显,我们将随力解说。显示巴利原文
Ito paṭṭhāya ‘‘tattha katamo’’tiādianusandhyattho ca pariyosāne ‘‘niyutto’’tiādianusandhyattho ca vuttanayānusāreneva viññātabbo. Katthaci katthaci pāṭhe apākaṭaṃyeva yathābalaṃ kathayissāma.
十三、净化串连之阐明显示巴利原文
13. Sodhanahārasampātavibhāvanā
75 “于何处”:于某问题。若其开端之义清净、圆满,则该问题已无余解答。然而,若某问题开端之义不清净、不圆满,尚有某些应解答者残留,则该问题尚未被解答。显示巴利原文
75.Yatthāti yasmiṃ pañhe. Ārambho attho suddho paripuṇṇo, so pañho niravasesato vissajjito bhavati. Yattha pañhe pana ārambho attho na suddho aparipuṇṇo koci vissajjetabbo avasiṭṭho, so pañho tāva vissajjito na bhavati.
十五、资具串连之阐明显示巴利原文
15. Parikkhārahārasampātavibhāvanā
77 “故心守护者”之句所说的念律仪,是止的资具;“正思惟行境”之句所说的正思惟,是观的资具。应如此分别而配合。显示巴利原文
77.‘‘Tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’ti padena yo satisaṃvaro vutto, ayaṃ satisaṃvaro samathassa parikkhāro. ‘‘Sammāsaṅkappagocaro’’ti padena yo sammāsaṅkappo vutto, so sammāsaṅkappo vipassanāya parikkhāroti vibhajitvā yojetabbo.
十六、安立串连之阐明显示巴利原文
16. Samāropanahārasampātavibhāvanā
78 “故心守护者”之句所说的守护心,此守护心是三种善行业的立足处。当正见被修习时,圣八支道即被修习,因为二者应一起修习,也因为是立足处的缘故。因此说“从正见”等。凡具有定解脱的阿拉汉,此阿拉汉是无余依之人,此定解脱即是无余依涅槃界。显示巴利原文
78.‘‘Tasmārakkhitacittassā’’ti padena yaṃ rakkhitacittaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ rakkhitacittaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānaṃ kammānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sammādiṭṭhiyā bhāvitāya ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo bhāvito bhavati ekato bhāvitabbattā, padaṭṭhānakāraṇattā ca. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘sammādiṭṭhito hī’’tiādi. Yassa arahato samādhivimutti bhavati, ayaṃ arahā anupādiseso puggalo, ayaṃ samādhivimutti anupādisesā nibbānadhātu.
因为应当说明:“以教说串连等的串连,以何种十六种分别之相来确定经句之义并加以结合,此十六种分别之相又应被我们如何信受”,所以论中说“因此说”等。以那十六种分别之相,尊者大迦旃延所说的“十六……乃至……经”这番话,以此言说,十六种分别之相便应被你们信受。显示巴利原文
‘‘Desanāhārasampātādiko hārasampāto yena soḷasappabhedabhāvena suttappadesatthe niddhāretvā yujjito, soḷasappabhedabhāvo kena amhehi saddahitabbo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena soḷasappabhedabhāvena āyasmā mahākaccāno ‘‘soḷasa…pe… sutta’’nti yaṃ vacanaṃ āha, tena vacanena soḷasappabhedabhāvo tumhehi saddahitabbo.
因为可以说“仅此范围的句聚圆满”,所以才说“句聚已结合”。以种种作为注释殊胜的教说句聚等,确定了经句之义;而这些作为注释殊胜的教说句聚等句聚已结合,应如理确定后再加以结合——这是应当领会的义理。在注释书中也是如此确定后结合的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ettakova hārasampāto paripuṇṇo’’ti vattabbattā ‘‘niyutto hārasampāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena yena saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūtena desanāhārasampātena suttappadesatthā niddhāritā, so so saṃvaṇṇanāvisesabhūto desanāhārasampātādihārasampāto niyutto yathārahaṃ niddhāretvā yujjitabboti attho gahetabbo, aṭṭhakathāyañca (netti. aṭṭha. 73, 76) tathā niddhāretvā yujjitoti.
然而,智者应当随顺注疏与复注,对甚深义作详细分别后而受持。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍitehi pana aṭṭhakathāṭīkānusārena gambhīrattho vitthārato vibhajitvā gahetabboti.